12 Volt Battery Internal Resistance Reset

NOTE:
At every engine startup, the PCM updates and records the internal resistance of a 12 volt battery. When the average of
past internal resistance (multiple memories) exceeds a threshold value, the PCM is judged the 12 volt battery deterioration.
The 12 volt battery cancel or the PCM reset does not clear the recorded internal resistance values of the 12 volt battery in
the PCM.

1. HDS - Connect

2. 12 Volt Battery Internal Resistance - Reset

1. Make sure all electrical items (the A/C, the audio, the lights,
etc.) are off.

2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

3. Turn the vehicle to the ACCESSORY mode.

4. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

5. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute or more.

6. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 four times or more.

NOTE: The internal resistance of a 12 volt battery may not

be updated if the engine starts up immediately from the
OFF (LOCK) mode without going through the ACCESSORY
mode and the ON mode.

8. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

9. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS.

10. Check the Idle Stop Inhibit (Battery Deterioration) in the

DATA LIST with the HDS.

Normal: The 12 volt battery internal resistance reset is

complete.
Inhibited: Replace the 12 volt battery, then do this 12
volt battery internal resistance reset procedure again.
11. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, and disconnect
the HDS from the DLC.
12 Volt Battery Management System Circuit Diagram

: CAN line
: Other communication line

12 VOLT UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BODY CONTROL MODULE

BATTERY

No. A1 No. A27

(125 A) (10 A) A1 +B
RED RED BACK UP

RED
No. A16 No. A28
(7.5 A) (10 A)
12 VOLT
BATTERY
SENSOR

BATT IR 1
LT GRN
(BATT SNSR)
2
+B HORN BLU
LIN
(BATT SNSR)
3

No. A5-3 No. A6

(30 A) (30 A) A54
B-CAN_H

PNK PUR A55

B-CAN_L
RELAY CONTROL MODULE C5 A1
+B +B PNK BLU
R/M2 R/M1
C1 GND GND GND
B-CAN_H PNK
IPD IPD A56 B2 B35
C2
B-CAN_L BLU
INTR LT INTR LT
CUT RLY CUT RLY
GND GND OUT2 OUT1
B1 C10 C15 C13
BLK BRN BLK BLK RED YEL PNK BLU BLK BLK BLK

G303 G301 INTERIOR LIGHTS

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE A1

+B BACK UP
A22
B-CAN_H
A4 LIN
(BATT SNSR)
A23
B-CAN_L

GND GND
A16 A18

BLK BLK

G1 G502 G502 G501

12 Volt Battery Management System Component Location Index

For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram.

 12 VOLT BATTERY SENSOR
Removal and Installation

12 VOLT BATTERY
Parasitic Draw Check
Removal, Installation, and Test
Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection

POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Removal and Installation
 FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR INNER CEILING LIGHT (Without moonroof)
HANDLE LIGHT Removal, Installation, and Test
Removal and Installation

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR COURTESY LIGHT

Removal and Installation

CEILING LIGHT (With moonroof)

Removal, Installation, and Test

RIGHT REAR DOOR

INNER HANDLE LIGHT
Removal and Installation

DRIVER'S DOOR INNER

HANDLE LIGHT
Removal and Installation

DRIVER'S DOOR COURTESY LIGHT

Removal and Installation

LEFT REAR DOOR TRUNK LIGHT

INNER HANDLE LIGHT Removal, Installation, and Test
Removal and Installation
 DRIVER'S VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS
Removal, Installation, and Test Removal, Installation, and Test
PASSENGER'S VANITY
MIRROR LIGHTS
Removal, Installation, and Test

AMBIENT LIGHT
(Built into the interior light switch)
Removal, Installation, and Test

CENTER POCKET LIGHT

Removal and Installation

CONSOLE BOX LIGHT

Removal and Installation

BODY CONTROL MODULE

Update
Removal and Installation

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

Update
Removal and Installation

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (MID)

A/T model is shown, other models are similar.
12 Volt Battery Management System Description - Components

12 Volt Battery Sensor

The 12 volt battery sensor is located between the 12 volt battery negative terminal and the ground cable.

12 Volt Battery Sensor

Connector Ground Cable

12 Volt Battery
Negative Terminal
12 Volt Battery Management System Description - System Diagram

For locations of each component on the vehicle, refer to the Component Location Index

Vanity Mirror Lights

Front Individual
Map Lights
Gauge Control Body Control Module
12 Volt LIN Module B-CAN B-CAN Relay
Battery ∙ Interior Light Cut Control Door Courtesy Lights
Sensor ∙ 12 Volt Battery Module
Condition Signal Signal
Trunk Light

Door Inner
Handle Lights

Console Box Light

Ceiling Light

Ambient Lights

Center Pocket Light

12 Volt Battery Management System Description

Overview
The 12 volt battery management system consists of the 12 volt battery sensor, the gauge control module, and the body control
module. The 12 volt battery sensor measures current, voltage, and temperature values of the 12 volt battery. This data is used to
control interior lights.

Basic Control/Function
The 12 volt battery sensor measures 12 volt battery voltage, sensor temperature, and charge/discharge currents. According to these
readings, 12 volt battery fluid temperature, internal resistance, and state of charge are sent as signals from the 12 volt battery sensor
to the gauge control module.
12 Volt Battery Removal, Installation, and Test

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Honda ED-18 Battery Tester (12 Volt) INBED18V3H*

Honda GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station with AST Module (12

Volt) MTRGR811ASTH*

*Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

After turning the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, wait at least 3 minutes before disconnecting the 12 volt negative battery
cable.
Strong impacts (i.e., dropping the 12 volt battery, collision damage) may cause electrolyte leaks, internal short circuit and
heat increase resulting in fire. Avoid impacts to the 12 volt battery.
Organic electrolyte is poisonous. If ingested, get medical attention immediately.
12 volt battery damage may cause flammable gas or electrolyte leaks and may result in fire. Do not damage the 12 volt
battery and keep sparks, flame and cigarettes away.
Canada models: When turning the vehicle to the ON mode for the first time after the 12 volt battery is reconnected, turn the
vehicle to the ON mode while depressing the brake pedal for the immobilizer mutual authentication between the body
control module and the VSA modulator-control unit.
With auto idle stop system: When replacing the 12 volt battery used for the auto idle stop system, replace it with a special
12 volt battery built exclusively for auto idle stop. A normal 12 volt battery works but it reduces its 12 volt battery life.
1
 2.

2.
4. 9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

3.

5.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. 12 Volt Battery Terminal - Disconnect

2. 12 Volt Battery Setting Plate - Remove

NOTE for installation

Do not deform the 12 volt battery setting plate by over-

tightening the nuts.

3. 12 Volt Battery Insulator - Removal

4. 12 Volt Battery - Removal

5. 12 Volt Battery Box - Removal

6. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. 12 Volt Battery - Test

A 12 volt battery can explode if you do not follow the

proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone
nearby.
Follow all procedures carefully and keep sparks and open
flames away from the 12 volt battery.

NOTE:
Read the 12 volt battery label to determine the 12 volt
battery type.
With auto idle stop system: When replacing the 12 volt
battery used for the auto idle stop system, replace it with a
special 12 volt battery built exclusively for auto idle stop. A
normal 12 volt battery works but it reduces its 12 volt
battery life.

Software Version

Make sure you have the latest software for the ED-18 and
GR8.
To check the software version on the ED-18, do this:
Press the POWER button.
Read the version number on the screen. It should appear
for about 3 seconds.
Or you can select: Language> Options> Info> Version. The
version number will appear near the top of the screen.

Check that this is the latest version on iN > Service> Service

Bay> Diagnostic Tool Software Versions.

To check the software version on the GR8, do this:

Press the POWER button.
Read the version number on the screen. It should appear
for about 5 seconds.
Or from the Main Menu, select: Options > Info> Version.
The version number will appear on the screen.

Check that this is the latest version on iN > Service> Service

Bay> Diagnostic Tool Software Versions.

Using the ED-18 Battery Tester (12 Volt)

NOTE: For setup, customization, and other available features,

refer to the ED-18 user's manual.

1. Connect the leads to the positive and negative terminals.

2. Use the arrow keys to select the Battery test and press
ENTER and follow the prompts.

NOTE:
Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking ampere
(CCA) rating of the 12 volt battery. You can find the
CCA printed on the label on the top of the 12 volt
battery. If the CCA rating is not entered correctly, the
test result will not be accurate.
Make sure to select FLOODED for the 12 volt battery
type.

3. Here are the four possible 12 volt battery conditions:

GOOD BATTERY: The 12 volt battery has at least 60

percent of its charge and required no action.
GR8 DIAGNOSTIC NEEDED: The battery voltage is
below 60 percent of its state-of-charge, and the
condition of the 12 volt battery is unknown. Use the
GR8 to charge the 12 volt battery and properly
diagnose it.
REPLACE BATTERY: The 12 volt battery condition is
poor. Replace it.
BAD CELL: There is an internal problem with the 12
volt battery. Replace it.
Using the GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station with
AST Module (12 Volt)

NOTE:
For setup, customization, and other available features, refer
to the GR8 user's manual.
On the GR8, you can select two modes: DEALER
INVENTORY or CUSTOMER VEHICLE:

－ DEALER INVENTORY: Use this mode for vehicles in

dealer inventory. The GR8 charges the 12 volt battery
to 80 % of its state-of-charge. If the 12 volt battery
condition is OK, the GR8 states the 12 volt battery is
GOOD. If you leave the GR8 attached to the 12 volt
battery, it changes to Top Off mode, and continues to
charge the 12 volt battery until it is at 100 % of its state-
of-charge.
－ CUSTOMER VEHICLE: In order to give a waiting
customer quicker service, the GR8 charges the 12 volt
battery to 60 % of its state-of-charge. If the 12 volt
battery condition is OK, the GR8 states the 12 volt
battery is GOOD. If you leave the GR8 attached to the
12 volt battery, it will enter Top Off mode, and continues
to charge the 12 volt battery until it is at 100 % of its
state-of-charge.

1. Connect the leads to the positive and negative terminal of

the 12 volt battery.

2. Use the arrow keys to select Diagnostic, and follow the

prompts.

NOTE:
Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking ampere
(CCA) rating of the 12 volt battery. You can find the
CCA printed on the label on the top of the 12 volt
battery. If the CCA rating is not entered correctly, the
test result will not be accurate.
Make sure to select FLOODED for the 12 volt battery
type.

3. Here are the three possible 12 volt battery conditions:

GOOD BATTERY: The 12 volt battery state of health is

good and state of charge is at least 60 %.
REPLACE BATTERY: The 12 volt battery condition is
poor. Replace it.
BAD CELL: There is a problem with the 12 volt battery.
Replace it.
12 Volt Battery Sensor Removal and Installation

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

After turning the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, wait at least 3 minutes before disconnecting the 12 volt negative battery
cable.
Canada models: When turning the vehicle to the ON mode for the first time after the 12 volt battery is reconnected, turn the
vehicle to the ON mode while depressing the brake pedal for the immobilizer mutual authentication between the body
control module and the VSA modulator-control unit.

1
 1. 1.
2.9－5.9 6.9－11.8
6.9－
6.9－11.8
(0.30－0.60, 2.1－4.4) (0.70－
(0.70
(0.70－1.20,
－1.20, 5.1－8.7)
5.1－8.7)
5.1－

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Multipurpose grease

1. 12 Volt Battery Sensor - Remove

 NOTE: To protect the 12 volt battery sensor connector from
damage, do not hold it when removing the negative terminal.

Note for installation

Make sure the areas between the negative terminal and the 12
volt battery sensor are clean.

2. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

3. Steering Angle Neutral Position (All sensor) - Learn

12 Volt Battery Symptom Troubleshooting - Low or dead 12 volt battery

Low or dead 12 volt battery

NOTE:
A 12 volt battery might be discharged under these conditions:
－ Driving a vehicle 6 miles (10 km) or less per day.
－ Leaving a vehicle idling with high electrical loads such as headlight, seat heaters,
wipers, rear window defogger, etc.

When doing the following operation during the measurement of the parasitic draw, it may
not be measured accurate:
－ Approaching a vehicle with remote.
－ Locking or unlocking a door.

Indication Example
－ Latest History －
Duration: 22 hours
Discharge: 300 mAh
Average current: 14 mA

Data Value
Current immediately after IG OFF -3.82 A
Average current from immediately after IG OFF to 1 hour -990 mA
Average current from 1 hour to 2 hours -10 mA
Average current of 1 hour just before IG ON -10 mA

1. PGM-FI system check:

‐1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs.

DTC Description Confirmed Pending
DTC DTC
P0562 Charging System Low Voltage
P065A ACG No Charging Malfunction
P16BB Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low
Voltage

Are DTCs P0562, P065A, and/or P16BB indicated?

 YES Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.■

NO Go to step 2.

2. Parasitic draw check:

‐1. Check all the BATTERY CONSUMPTION CURRENT HISTORY with the HDS.

Battery Consumption Current History

Threshold of the average
current
27.0 mA

Are all the values of average current from 1 hour to 2 hours less than the threshold?

YES Check the 12 volt battery.■

NO Go to step 3.

3. Problem verification:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Get out of the vehicle, and close all doors, hood, and trunk securely.

‐3. Lock the doors with the keyless remote.

‐4. Make sure the front individual map lights and the ceiling light are turned off, and the
security alarm system is armed.

‐5. Wait 130 minutes or more.

‐6. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐7. Check the latest BATTERY CONSUMPTION CURRENT HISTORY with the HDS.

Battery Consumption Current History

Threshold of the average
current
27.0 mA

Is the value of average current from 1 hour to 2 hours less than the threshold?

YES Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

The possible cause could be that an incorrect parasitic draw value was recorded:
A switch was not turned off.
The vehicle's accessories were operated for a long time with the vehicle
ignition was in the ACCESSORY mode.
NO Go to the parasitic draw check.■
12 Volt Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection

NOTE:
Keep the driver door open, and after turning the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, do not disconnect and isolate the
negative cable connected to the 12 volt battery at least 3 minutes.
Canada models: When turning the vehicle to the ON mode for the first time after the 12 volt battery is reconnected, turn the
vehicle to the ON mode while depressing the brake pedal for the immobilizer mutual authentication between the body
control module and the VSA modulator-control unit.

1. 12 Volt Battery Terminal - Disconnect

1.5L Engine 1. Make sure to the vehicle is in the OFF (LOCK) mode.

A
C 2. Disconnect and isolate the cable with the 12 volt battery
B sensor (A) from the 12 volt battery.

NOTE:
D Always disconnect the negative side first.
To protect the connector (B) from damage, do not hold
it when removing the terminal.
Do not disconnect the 12 volt battery sensor from the
cable (C).

E 3. Open the cover (D).

NOTE: If necessary, remove the cover.

4. Disconnect the terminal (E) from the 12 volt battery.

2.0L Engine

A C
B

E
 NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
If the 12 volt battery performs abnormally, test the 12 volt battery.

1. 12 Volt Battery Terminal - Connect

1.5L Engine 1. Clean the 12 volt battery terminals.

B
2. Connect the terminal (A) to the 12 volt battery.
C

NOTE: Always connect the positive side first.

D
3. Connect the cable and the 12 volt battery sensor (B) to the
12 volt battery.

NOTE: To protect the connector (C) from damage, do not

hold it when installing the terminal.
2.9－5.9
(0.30－0.60, 2.1－4.4) 4. Apply multipurpose grease to the terminals to prevent
corrosion.

5. Close the cover (D).

2.0L Engine

C B

2.9－5.9
(0.30－0.60, 2.1－4.4)

A
2. 12 Volt Battery Internal Resistance - Reset (With Auto Idle Stop System)

1. When replacing the 12 volt battery, Reset the 12 volt

battery internal resistance.

3. Steering Angle Neutral Position - Learn

 2.

2.
2. 2.

3.
2.
*1

2.
2.
*1
3.

3.

3.
2.
*1
 

1.


2.

1.

2.
 2.

3.
*1

5.
9.4
(0.96, 6.9)

5.
4. 9.4 (0.96, 6.9)
*1

5.
2.
*1
2.

2.
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)
 2.

2.
2.
*1
 2.

2. 2.
9.4 (0.96, 6.9) 9.4 (0.96, 6.9)
 2.

2.

2. *1
22 (2.2, 16)

2. *2
22 (2.2, 16)
 *: IG1B HOT in ON and START mode
: CAN line

UNDER-HOOD UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
12 VOLT
BATTERY +B IG
No. A5-5 (30 A) D4 MAIN2
YEL

IG1B
RELAY
No. A1 CIRCUIT*
(125 A)

IG1
COIL+ H9
No. A27 No. B36 No. B37 WHT
(10 A) (10 A) (10 A) BODY
RLY CONTROL
GND H11 MODULE
TAN
IG1 IG1
METER OPTION
H17 H7

RED BRN RED

BRN BRN

A B

PARKING and PARKING and

BACK-UP SENSOR BACK-UP SENSOR
CONTROL UNIT SWITCH

A1 A2
+B IG1
BACK UP METER

SPEAKER GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

GND GND F-CAN C_H F-CAN C_L

A16 A18 A20 A21

BLK BLK PUR GRN

CAN GATEWAY

G502
 *: IG1A HOT in ON and START mode
: CAN line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD
12 VOLT
BATTERY +B IG
No. A2-1 (30 A) A1 MAIN
GRY

IG1A
RELAY
No. A1 (125 A) No. A27 (10 A) CIRCUIT*

IG1 RLY
COIL+ GND IG1-A
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
B8 B4 B2

PNK
DOOR and
TRUNK LID OPEN
INDICATOR No. A40
(20 A)

B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A22 A23

PNK BLU RED WHT TAN RED

A54 A55 A1 C54 C47 A2 BODY CONTROL MODULE

B-CAN_H B-CAN_L +B IG1 RLY IG1 FUEL
BACK UP COIL+ GND PUMP

FL DOOR SW FR DOOR SW RL DOOR SW RR DOOR SW TRUNK SW

GND GND GND

A56 B2 B35 B63 B47 B64 B48 B65

BLK BLK BLK GRN LT GRN BRN GRY WHT

5 6 10 5 1
FRONT LEFT RIGHT
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S REAR REAR TRUNK LID
DOOR DOOR DOOR DOOR LATCH
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
(Closed: (Closed: (Closed: (Closed: (Closed:
door open) door open) door open) door open) lid open)

8 DRIVER’S 8 FRONT 9 LEFT REAR 6 RIGHT REAR 2 TRUNK LID

DOOR PASSENGER’S DOOR DOOR LATCH
LATCH DOOR LATCH LATCH
LATCH
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

G502 G501 G502 G503 G601 G602 G701

Electric Servo Brake System Circuit Diagram

12 VOLT
BATTERY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
: CAN line
No. A2-2
(+B ESB)
(40 A)
RED A
UNDER-DASH
No. A2-7 UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
(+B IG MAIN1) SUB RELAY BOX
(30 A) +B IG MAIN No. B10 (7.5 A)
IG1-MAIN A5 E26
WHT GRN YEL
IG1 MAIN HOT in ON and
READY TO DRIVE mode

MICU
GAUGE CONTROL
PCM MODULE
D22
BRAKE SYSTEM
A3 A19 INDICATOR BRN
WHT WHT (AMBER)
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H

A4 A20
RED RED BRN
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L BRAKE WARNING
INDICATOR DRIVER'S
(RED) DOOR SWITCH
A5
LT BLU (Closed :
F-CAN B_H Door open)

A6
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L

B
LT BLU
VSA MODURATOR-
CONTROL UNIT ACC UNIT
LT GRN
8 2
LT BLU GRN
F-CAN B_H F-CAN B_H

15 13
LT GRN LT GRN BRN C
F-CAN B_L F-CAN B_L
9 4
ORN TAN
F-CAN C_H F-CAN C_H

16 15
PUR PUR
F-CAN C_L F-CAN C_L

DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
LT BLU D
6
BLU TAN WHT
DIAG-CAN_H GRN
LT GRN E
14
PNK PUR RED LT GRN
DIAG-CAN_L

2 3 8 9 15 14 10 11

DIAG- DIAG- F- F- F- F- F- F-
CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN
_L _H C_L C_H A_L A_H B_L B_H

CAN GATEWAY
 : CAN line
: Shielding
ELECTRIC SERVO BRAKE CONTROL UNIT

TANDEM MOTOR CYLINDER

A2 RESOLVA
A RED
+B ESB B11 5
PNK
ESB R1
B12 1
GRY
ESB R2
B16 6
TAN
ESB S1
B15 3
BLU
ESB S3
B13 2
PUR
ESB S2
B14 4
LT BLU
ESB S4

MOTOR

B2 3
GRN
MU

B1 1
RED
MV
2

B3
WHT
MW
BRAKE PEDAL
A8 STROKE SENSOR
B YEL B4 2
GRN
IG1 VSA/ABS BPS
B6 3
RED
BPSR
BLK

A7 DOOR G401
B8 1
C BRN INPUT YEL YEL
FL DOOR SW ESB SVCC
CIRCUIT B5 4
LT GRN LT GRN
ESB SGND
PEDAL FEEL SIMULATOR
A1 B2
BLK LT GRN
ESB GND
B5
YEL
UPPER HYDRAULIC
B9 B4 PRESSURE
G403 TAN SENSOR
ESB PL
A10 B7 B3
D LT BLU BLU
ESB PLR
F-CAN B_H
CAN CONTROLLER B10
A11 ESB PU LOWER HYDRAULIC
E LT GRN A9 B1 PRESSURE
F-CAN B_L BRN SENSOR
ESB PUR B6
RED
A3
ESB PFS+B A1
A4 BLU PEDAL FORCE
ESB PFSV A2 SIMULATOR VALVE
GRN
A5 A4
BRN
ESB MCV+B
A3 MASTER CUT VALVE
A6 ORN
ESB MCV
MASTER CUT VALVE
: 12 V
:5V
 *: IG1B HOT in ON and START mode
: CAN line
: Other communication line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

12 VOLT
BATTERY No. A5-5
(30 A)

No. A1 No. A3-7

(125 A) (60 A) GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
LIN
HUD UART (BATT SNSR)
A25 A4
RED YEL
UNDER-DASH BLK BRN
FUSE/RELAY BOX D3 D4
+B F/BOX +B IG A1 A2
MAIN MAIN2
CABLE REEL

IG1B* C11 C14

RELAY YEL
CIRCUIT
BLK BLU
PNK

7 10 1 8 6 12
STRG STRG HUD+ HUD- HUD- HUD+
No. B48 No. B36 GND SW
(10 A) (10 A) LIN
+B IG1 RLY IG1
HUD METER GND COIL+
D21 D15 H11 H9 AUDIO REMOTE-HFL ACC COMBINATION
SWITCH SWITCH
LT BLU BRN TAN WHT LT GRN

BODY CONTROL G502

MODULE
1 11 13
+B IG1 HUD UART
HUD METER
RELAY
CONTROL HEAD UP DISPLAY
MODULE HUD HUD HUD
MIR MAIN MIR
DWN SW UP F-CAN C_H F-CAN C_L B-CAN_H B-CAN_L GND
19 9 8 4 15 5 16 10

GRY YEL TAN GRY PUR GRN PNK BLU BLK

6 8 1 10
ILLUMI+

HEAD UP
DISPLAY
HUD MAIN
LIGHT SWITCH
(LEDs)
∙ CAN GATEWAY ∙ BODY CONTROL
∙ GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
ILL-(LED) GND MODULE ∙ AUDIO-NAVIGATION
7 5 ∙ AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
UNIT ∙ GAUGE CONTROL
BLU BLK MODULE
∙ RELAY CONTROL
MODULE
∙ AUTOMATIC LIGHTING/
RAIN SENSOR
DASHLIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
(In the gauge
control module) G501 G303
Fastener Locations
:6

1.
Fastener Locations
: 14

1.

1.
Fastener Locations
: 15

5.
Fastener Locations
: 14

5.
6.
Fastener Locations
: 14

5.
6.
Fastener Locations
A :2 B :2 C :4

A C
B
B C
C
C

3.
Fastener Locations
:5

1.
Fastener Locations
:3
2.
Fastener Locations
A :3 B :3 C :1 D :1

B
C

A
7. A

4.4 (0.45, 3.2)

Fastener Locations
:8

1.
Fastener Locations
:3

2.
Fastener Locations

A :1 B :4 C :1

B
B
B

2. B

A
Fastener Locations

:7

*
*

1.
Fastener Locations
:4

2.
Fastener Locations
:2

3.
Fastener Locations
A :2 B :3 C :2

B C

C
B

B
A
4.

4.4 (0.45, 3.2)

5.
Fastener Locations
A :2 B :1

A
B

1.
Fastener Locations
: 16

3.
Fastener Locations
: 10
7.

5.

6.
Fastener Locations
A :2 B :1
1.

A
A

3.

B
Fastener Locations
:4

4.
5.
2.
 2.
1.
 6.
5. 

5.
 4. 4.

3.
2.
 4. 4.

3.
 5.
22 (2.2, 16)

5.
12 (1.2, 9)
 2.
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)
9－10 mm
(0.35－0.39 in)
12 (1.2, 9)

2.

1.

12 (1.2, 9)

24 (2.4, 18)

9.5
(0.97, 7.0) 9.5
(0.97, 7.0)

9.5
(0.97, 7.0)

This illustration shows CVT.




1.
10 (1.0, 7)
Fastener Locations
:8

2. 1.

3.

CONSOLE BOX

5.

4.

4.
Fastener Location
:1

7.

6.

CONSOLE BOX
Fastener Locations
:2

3. 5.

6.
Fastener Locations
:5

2.
4.

5.

6.
Fastener Locations
A :6 B :2

A
A
A

B
3.

B
2.
A
A A

2.

5.
1.

38 (3.9, 28)
 2.

2.

93 (9.5, 69)
3.

22 (2.2, 16)
2.
Fastener Locations

:5

2.
Fastener Locations
:4

2.
Fastener Locations
:4

3.
Fastener Locations
:4

3.
Fastener Locations
: 10

1.
2.
3.
Fastener Locations
A :2 B :1

2.

B
A

3.
 2.
12 (1.2, 9)

2.


 2.
12 (1.2, 9)

2.


1.
17 (1.7, 13)
*1
Fastener Locations
:7

3.

2.
c

1.
a, b

2.
c

FRONT BUMPER LOWER GRILLE

a b c
Fastener Locations
:4

3.

*1

*1

FRONT BUMPER FACE

*1

a
a

a
 *1: IG1B HOT in ON and START mode *10: Without ventilated seat
*2: Without ACC *11: With BSI
*3: With ACC *12: With DPMS
*4: With display audio *13: With telematics
*5: CVT *14: With ventilated seat
*6: Without navigation *15: With wireless charger
*7: With navigation *16: Without auto idle stop system
*8: With head up display *17: With auto idle stop system
*9: With automatic lighting without automatic wiper : CAN line
*17
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY HOLDER A
FUSE/RELAY BOX
DC-DC
IG1B RELAY CONVERTER
12 VOLT CIRCUIT
BATTERY No. A5-5 +B IG No. B36 IG1 IG1 RELAY 1
(30 A) D4 MAIN2 (10 A) H17 B1 METER
YEL BRN BRN

*16
No. A1
(125 A)
No. C6
(7.5 A)
No. A27
(10 A) IG1 RLY IG1 PCU DCDC
COIL+ GND EWP CUT1 GND
H9 H11 B3 A2 B11

WHT TAN BRN LT BLU BLU BLK

G502
DC-DC
CONVERTER
RED BODY CONTROL BRN*16
GAUGE MODULE LT BLU*17
CONTROL MODULE A1 A2
+B IG1 METER*16
BACK UP IG1 PCU EWP*17

A
B
A

F-CAN F-CAN B-CAN

TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER

2.6 kΩ 124 Ω
FUEL FUEL
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_L F-CAN C_H F-CAN C_L B-CAN_H B-CAN_L GAUGE+ GAUGE-
A20 A21 A20 A21 A22 A23 A8 A9

WHT RED PUR GRN PNK BLU GRY GRN

· ANC/ACTIVE SOUND · AUDIO UNIT*6 · AUDIO UNIT*6 FUEL

· AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT*7 · AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT*7 GAUGE FUEL
CONTROL UNIT TANK
· AUDIO UNIT*4 · CAN GATEWAY · AUTOMATIC LIGHTING SENDING
UNIT UNIT
· BODY CONTROL · HEAD UP DISPLAY*8 CONTROL UNIT-SENSOR*9
MODULE · BODY CONTROL MODULE
· DATA LINK *3 · CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT 4
CONNECTOR (DLC) · FRONT SEAT HEATER
· ELECTRIC BRAKE CONTROL UNIT*10
BOOSTER · HEAD UP DISPLAY*8
· EPS CONTROL UNIT · LEFT SIDE BSI RADAR UNIT*11
· PCM · POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT*12
· SRS UNIT · POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH
· TCM*5 · RELAY CONTROL MODULE
· VSA MODULATOR- · RIGHT SIDE BSI RADAR UNIT*11
CONTROL UNIT · TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT*13
· VENTILATED SEAT CONTROL UNIT*14
*2 · WIRELESS CHARGER*15
 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LT
BLK PNK
32 31
BLU
30
LT
PNK RED
29 28
- PUR GRN GRY BRN PUR
27 26 25
LT
24 23 22
- BRN
21 20
-
19
*3 RED
18 17 
BLU YEL GRN *4 BRN TAN WHT GRN YEL BLU PNK *2 *1 - BLK BLU

*1: WHT (Without ACC), PUR (With ACC)

*2: RED (Without ACC), GRN (With ACC)
*3: BRN (Without auto idle stop system), LT BLU (With auto idle stop system)
*4: - (Without auto idle stop system), BLU (With auto idle stop system)
 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1


BLK LT
BRN GRN BLK - - GRN - - BLU GRY BRN
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
BLU YEL LT - - - LT PNK WHT GRN LT YEL
BLU GRN BLU
 *: IG1B HOT in ON and START mode
: CAN line

UNDER-HOOD UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
12 VOLT
BATTERY +B IG
No. A5-5 (30 A) D4 MAIN2
YEL

IG1B
RELAY
No. A1 CIRCUIT*
(125 A)

IG1
COIL+ H9
No. A27 No. B36 No. B37 WHT
(10 A) (10 A) (10 A) BODY
RLY CONTROL
GND H11 MODULE
TAN
IG1 IG1
METER OPTION
H17 H7

RED BRN RED

BRN BRN

A B

PARKING and PARKING and

BACK-UP SENSOR BACK-UP SENSOR
CONTROL UNIT SWITCH

A1 A2
+B IG1
BACK UP METER

SPEAKER GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

GND GND F-CAN C_H F-CAN C_L

A16 A18 A20 A21

BLK BLK PUR GRN

CAN GATEWAY

G502
 *1: 1G1A HOT in ON and START mode
*2: 1G1B HOT in ON and START mode
*3: Without automatic wiper with automatic lighting
*4: With automatic wiper
*5: With automatic lighting
UNDER-HOOD *6: Without auto idle stop system
FUSE/RELAY BOX *7: With auto idle stop system
12 VOLT : CAN line
BATTERY No. A1 No. A27
(125 A) (10 A)
RED RED A
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
IG1B
No. A5-5 RELAY No. B36
+B CIRCUIT*2 (10 A) IG1 *6
(30 A) D4 IG MAIN2 METER H17 BRN*6 B
YEL BRN BRN LT BLU*7
No. A2-1
(30 A)

RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD

GRY IG1A RLY IG1
RELAY GND COIL+
+B IG *7
CIRCUIT*1 H11 H9
A1 MAIN IG1-A B2
TAN WHT BRN LT BLU
PNK
DC-DC B1 B3
No. A40 CONVERTER IG1 IG1 PCU
(20 A) METER EWP
RLY IG1 GND B11
GND COIL+
DCDC No. C6
B4 B8 (7.5 A)
A2 CUT1
BLU
TAN WHT RED BLK
DC-DC
CONVERTER
IG1 RELAY 1
G502
RED TAN WHT FUSE/RELAY HOLDER A

BODY CONTROL MODULE A2 A1 C47 C54

IG1 FUEL +B RLY IG1
PUMP BACK UP GND COIL+
H/L H/L
FL DOOR OFF SMALL ON
SW SW LT SW SW
COMBI
SW GND
GND GND GND (LT) B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A56 B2 B35 B63 A41 A12 A7 A40 A54 A55

PNK

BLK BLK BLK GRN YEL GRY PNK BLU

PNK BRN PNK

5 1 8 7 6

DRIVER’S A B
DOOR AUTO*5
SWITCH ∙ AUTOMATIC
(Closed: LIGHTING GAUGE
OFF CONTROL CONTROL MODULE
door open)
UNIT-SENSOR*3
8 DRIVER’S ∙ AUTOMATIC
DOOR LIGHTING/
LATCH COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH RAIN SENSOR*4

BLK

G502 G501 G502

A Few Words About Safety

Service Information
The service and repair information contained in this manual is intended for use by qualified, professional technicians. Attempting
service or repairs without the proper training, tools, and equipment could cause injury to you or others. It could also damage the
vehicle or create an unsafe condition.

This manual describes the proper methods and procedures for doing service, maintenance, and repairs. Some procedures require the
use of specially designed tools and dedicated equipment. Any person who intends to use a replacement part, a service procedure, or
a tool that is not recommended by Honda, must determine the risks to their personal safety and the safe operation of the vehicle.

If you need to replace any parts, always use the correct parts supplied by a Honda dealer. Never use inferior quality parts.

FOR YOUR CUSTOMER'S SAFETY

Proper service and maintenance are essential to the customer's safety and the reliability of the vehicle. Any error or oversight while
servicing a vehicle can result in faulty operation, damage to the vehicle, or injury to others.

Improper service or repairs can create an unsafe condition that can cause your customers or others to be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow the procedures and precautions in this manual and other service materials carefully.

FOR YOUR SAFETY

Because this manual is intended for the professional service technician, we do not provide warnings about many basic shop safety
practices (for example, hot parts－wear gloves). If you have not received shop safety training or do not feel confident about your
knowledge of safe servicing practices, we recommend that you do not attempt to do the procedures described in this manual.

Failure to properly follow instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow the procedures and precautions in this manual carefully.

Some of the most important general service safety precautions follow this text. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable
hazard that can arise in doing service and repair procedures. Only you can decide whether or not you should do a given task.

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Make sure you have a clear understanding of all basic shop safety practices, and that you are wearing appropriate clothing and
using safety equipment. When doing any service task, be especially careful of the following:
－ Read all of the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools, the replacement or repair parts, and the skills
required to do the tasks safely and completely.
－ Protect your eyes by using proper safety glasses, goggles, or face shields anytime you hammer, drill, grind, or work around
pressurized air or liquids and springs, or other stored-energy components. If there is any doubt, put on eye protection.
－ Use other protective wear when necessary, such as gloves or safety shoes. Handling hot or sharp parts can cause severe
burns or cuts. Before you grab something that looks like it can hurt you, stop and put on gloves.
－ Protect yourself and others whenever you have the vehicle up in the air. Anytime you raise the vehicle, either with a lift or a
jack, make sure that it is always securely supported. Use safety stands if needed.
－ Protect yourself by wearing an approved welding helmet, gloves, and safety shoes anytime you are welding. You can receive
burns from hot parts; allow the parts to cool before working in that area.
－ Protect yourself from paints and harmful chemicals by wearing an approved respirator, eye protection, and gloves whenever
you are painting. Spray paint only in an approved paint booth that is well ventilated.
Make sure the engine is off before you begin any servicing procedures, unless the instruction tells you to do otherwise. This will
help eliminate several potential hazards:
－ Carbon monoxide poisoning from engine exhaust. Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you run the engine.
－ Burns from hot parts or coolant. Let the engine and exhaust system cool before working in those areas.
－ Injury from moving parts. If the instruction tells you to run the engine, be sure your hands, fingers, and clothing are out of the
way.

Gasoline vapors and hydrogen gases from batteries are explosive. To reduce the possibility of a fire or explosion, be careful when
working around gasoline or batteries:
－ Use only a nonflammable solvent, not gasoline, to clean parts.
－ Never drain or store gasoline in an open container.
－ Keep all cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.
2/8/23, 1:35 AM A Few Words About Safety 3686

A Few Words About Safety

Service Information
The service and repair information contained in this manual is intended for use by qualified, professional technicians. Attempting
service or repairs without the proper training, tools, and equipment could cause injury to you or others. It could also damage the
vehicle or create an unsafe condition.

This manual describes the proper methods and procedures for doing service, maintenance, and repairs. Some procedures require the
use of specially designed tools and dedicated equipment. Any person who intends to use a replacement part, a service procedure, or
a tool that is not recommended by Honda, must determine the risks to their personal safety and the safe operation of the vehicle.

If you need to replace any parts, always use the correct parts supplied by a Honda dealer. Never use inferior quality parts.

FOR YOUR CUSTOMER'S SAFETY

Proper service and maintenance are essential to the customer's safety and the reliability of the vehicle. Any error or oversight while
servicing a vehicle can result in faulty operation, damage to the vehicle, or injury to others.

Improper service or repairs can create an unsafe condition that can cause your customers or others to be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow the procedures and precautions in this manual and other service materials carefully.

FOR YOUR SAFETY

Because this manual is intended for the professional service technician, we do not provide warnings about many basic shop safety
practices (for example, hot parts－wear gloves). If you have not received shop safety training or do not feel confident about your
knowledge of safe servicing practices, we recommend that you do not attempt to do the procedures described in this manual.

Failure to properly follow instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow the procedures and precautions in this manual carefully.

Some of the most important general service safety precautions follow this text. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable
hazard that can arise in doing service and repair procedures. Only you can decide whether or not you should do a given task.

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Make sure you have a clear understanding of all basic shop safety practices, and that you are wearing appropriate clothing and
using safety equipment. When doing any service task, be especially careful of the following:
－ Read all of the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools, the replacement or repair parts, and the skills
required to do the tasks safely and completely.
－ Protect your eyes by using proper safety glasses, goggles, or face shields anytime you hammer, drill, grind, or work around
pressurized air or liquids and springs, or other stored-energy components. If there is any doubt, put on eye protection.
－ Use other protective wear when necessary, such as gloves or safety shoes. Handling hot or sharp parts can cause severe
burns or cuts. Before you grab something that looks like it can hurt you, stop and put on gloves.
－ Protect yourself and others whenever you have the vehicle up in the air. Anytime you raise the vehicle, either with a lift or a
jack, make sure that it is always securely supported. Use safety stands if needed.
－ Protect yourself by wearing an approved welding helmet, gloves, and safety shoes anytime you are welding. You can receive
burns from hot parts; allow the parts to cool before working in that area.
－ Protect yourself from paints and harmful chemicals by wearing an approved respirator, eye protection, and gloves whenever
you are painting. Spray paint only in an approved paint booth that is well ventilated.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G003686_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 1:35 AM A Few Words About Safety 3686

Make sure the engine is off before you begin any servicing procedures, unless the instruction tells you to do otherwise. This will
help eliminate several potential hazards:
－ Carbon monoxide poisoning from engine exhaust. Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you run the engine.
－ Burns from hot parts or coolant. Let the engine and exhaust system cool before working in those areas.
－ Injury from moving parts. If the instruction tells you to run the engine, be sure your hands, fingers, and clothing are out of the
way.

Gasoline vapors and hydrogen gases from batteries are explosive. To reduce the possibility of a fire or explosion, be careful when
working around gasoline or batteries:
－ Use only a nonflammable solvent, not gasoline, to clean parts.
－ Never drain or store gasoline in an open container.
－ Keep all cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G003686_enu 2/2
ABS indicator, brake system indicator (red), VSA indicator, and brake system indicator (amber) do not go off

Diagnostic procedure

1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair those first.
2. Symptom troubleshooting.
ABS indicator, brake system indicator (red), VSA indicator, and brake system indicator (amber) do not go off

Diagnostic procedure

1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair those first.
2. Symptom troubleshooting.
ABS indicator, brake system indicator (red), VSA indicator, brake system indicator (amber), or VSA OFF indicator does not
come on at start-up (bulb check)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.

2. Replace the VSA modulator-control unit.
ABS indicator, brake system indicator (red), VSA indicator, brake system indicator (amber), or VSA OFF indicator does not
come on at start-up (bulb check)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.

2. Replace the VSA modulator-control unit.
Accessory Power Socket Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Front Accessory Power Socket

 3.

2.
*1

3.
*2

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

*1 Tab
*2 Indexing tab
2

Console Accessory Power Socket

2.

3.
*2

2.
*1
 Detailed information, notes, and precautions
*1 Tab
*2 Indexing tab

Front Accessory Power Socket

1. Dashboard Center Pocket - Remove

2. Front Accessory Power Socket - Remove

1. Gently press the tabs.

3. Housing - Remove

Note the location of the indexing tab.

1. Gently press the tabs.

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Console Accessory Power Socket

1. Center Console Panel - Remove

2. Console Accessory Power Socket - Remove

1. Gently press the tabs.

3. Housing - Remove

Note the location of the indexing tab.

1. Gently press the tabs.

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Accessory Power Sockets Circuit Diagram

*1: ACC HOT in ACCESSORY and ON mode

*2: M/T
*3: A/T, CVT
UNDER-HOOD
12 VOLT FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. A1 (125 A)

No. A5-5 No. A2-5 No. A3-7

(30 A) (60 A) (60 A)

YEL PNK RED

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX D4 D1 D3
H2 ACC RLY CL+ +B IG +B F/BOX +B F/BOX
PNK MAIN2 MAIN2 MAIN

BODY CONTROL ACC

MODULE RELAY
CIRCUIT*1
H11 RLY GND
TAN

No. B50 No. B4 No. B16

(20 A) (10 A) (20 A)

2 4 4 2
FRONT CONSOLE
ACCESSORY ACCESSORY
POWER POWER
SOCKET SOCKET
RELAY RELAY
1 3 3 1

FR ACC CTR ACC

SOCKET GND SOCKET
K7 K12 K2
*2 *3

WHT BLK LT GRN

LT GRN

YEL

2 2
FRONT CONSOLE
ACCESSORY ACCESSORY
POWER POWER
SOCKET SOCKET
1 1
*2 *3

BLK

GRY

GRY GRY

G504 G501 G504

Accessory Power Sockets Component Location Index
 CONSOLE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET RELAY (4P)
Test

FRONT ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET RELAY (4P)

Test

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

Removal and Installation

A/T model is shown, other models are similar.

 FRONT ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
Removal and Installation

CONSOLE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

Removal and Installation

A/T model is shown, other models are similar.

Active Noise Cancellation Microphone Connector for Inputs and Outputs

NOTE: The front active noise cancellation microphone, front HFL-ANC microphone, and the HFL
microphone are the same parts.

Front Active Noise Cancellation Microphone 8P Connector (female terminals)

4 3 2 1
LT - BLU PNK
BLU
8 7 6 5
WHT GRN - -

Cavity Terminal Name Description

1 MIC GND Ground for front HFL-ANC microphone
2 MIC+ Outputs front HFL microphone signal
3 Not used ―――
4 MIC PWR Power source for front HFL-ANC microphone
5 Not used ―――
6 Not used ―――
7 HFT MUTE Inputs front HFL microphone directivity switching signal
8 ANC F MIC+8V Outputs front active noise cancellation microphone signal

Middle Active Noise Cancellation Microphone 2P Connector (female terminals)

2 1
GRY BLU

Cavity Terminal Name Description

1 ANC M MIC+8V Outputs middle active noise cancellation microphone signal
2 SH ANC M MIC Shield for terminal No. 1

Rear Active Noise Cancellation Microphone 2P Connector (female terminals)

2 1
GRY BLU
Cavity Terminal Name Description
1 ANC R MIC+8V Outputs rear active noise cancellation microphone signal
2 SH ANC R MIC Shield for terminal No. 1
Active Noise Cancellation Microphone Removal and Installation

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before
doing repairs or service.

NOTE: The front active noise cancellation microphone, front HFL-ANC microphone, and the HFL microphone are the same
parts.

Front
 2.

Middle
 2.

Rear
 2.

Front

1. Roof Console - Remove

2. Front Active Noise Cancellation Microphone - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Middle

1. Headliner - Remove

2. Middle Active Noise Cancellation Microphone - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Rear

1. Headliner - Remove

2. Rear Active Noise Cancellation Microphone - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Active Noise Cancellation Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Connector Index
Active Noise Cancellation Unit 20P Connector (female terminals)
(Without ACC)
Active Noise Cancellation Unit 20P Connector (female terminals)
(With ACC)

Active Noise Cancellation Unit 20P Connector (female terminals) (Without ACC)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GRN WHT GRY GRY GRY RED WHT GRN GRY BLK

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
BLK RED WHT BLU RED BLU LT LT BRN RED
BLU GRN

Cavity Terminal Name Description

1 GND Ground for active noise cancellation unit (G503)
2 SH ANC M MIC Shield for terminals No. 13
3 SWD+B Inputs signal for active noise cancellation unit switching on/off
4 F-CAN A_H Communication signal
5 F-CAN A_L Communication signal
6 SH ANC R MIC Shield for terminal No. 17
7 SH ANC F MIC Shield for terminal No. 18
8 ANC SH Shield for terminals No. 9, No. 10, No. 19, and No. 20
9 ANC R－ Outputs noise cancelling signal
10 ANC F－ Outputs noise cancelling signal
11 +B RADIO Continuous power source
12 IG1 METER IG1 power source
13 ANC M MIC+8V Inputs sound signal from middle active noise cancellation microphone
14 K LINE Detects scan tool signal (serial data)
15 AUD F MIX GND Basis ground for terminal No. 16
16 AUD F MIX Inputs audio mixing signal for front channels
17 ANC R MIC+8V Inputs sound signal from rear active noise cancellation microphone
18 ANC F MIC+8V Inputs sound signal from front active noise cancellation microphone
19 ANC R+ Outputs noise cancelling signal
20 ANC F+ Outputs noise cancelling signal

Active Noise Cancellation Unit 20P Connector (female terminals) (With ACC)
 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GRN WHT GRY GRY GRY *2 *1 GRN GRY BLK

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
BLK RED WHT BLU RED BLU LT LT BRN RED
BLU GRN

*1: WHT (A/T), LT BLU (M/T, CVT)

*2: RED (A/T), LT GRN (M/T, CVT)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

1 GND Ground for active noise cancellation unit (G503)
2 SH ANC M MIC Shield for terminals No. 13
3 SWD+B Inputs signal for active noise cancellation unit switching on/off
4 *3 Communication signal
F-CAN A_H
F-CAN B_H*1*2
5 F-CAN A_L*3 Communication signal
*1*2
F-CAN B_L
6 SH ANC R MIC Shield for terminal No. 17
7 SH ANC F MIC Shield for terminal No. 18
8 ANC SH Shield for terminals No. 9, No. 10, No. 19, and No. 20
9 ANC R－ Outputs noise cancelling signal
10 ANC F－ Outputs noise cancelling signal
11 +B RADIO Continuous power source
12 IG1 METER IG1 power source
13 ANC M MIC+8V Inputs sound signal from middle active noise cancellation microphone
14 K LINE Detects scan tool signal (serial data)
15 AUD F MIX GND Basis ground for terminal No. 16
16 AUD F MIX Inputs audio mixing signal for front channels
17 ANC R MIC+8V Inputs sound signal from rear active noise cancellation microphone
18 ANC F MIC+8V Inputs sound signal from front active noise cancellation microphone
19 ANC R+ Outputs noise cancelling signal
20 ANC F+ Outputs noise cancelling signal
*1: M/T
*2: CVT
*3: A/T
Active Noise Cancellation Unit Removal and Installation

1
 2.

2.
9.4
(0.96, 6.9)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. Glove box - Remove

2. Active Noise Cancellation Unit - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Adaptive Damper Control Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Adaptive Damper Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 24P Connector (female terminals)

2 1
RED -
18 17 16 15
8 7 6 - - - - 5 4 3
LT RED BRN LT PNK YEL
GRN 20 19 GRN
LT LT
14 13 12 GRN BLU 11 10 9
- BLK - 24 23 22 21 BLU GRN RED
- - - -

Terminal Terminal sign Description

Number
1 Not used ―――
2 IG1 OPTION Power source for the adaptive damper control unit
3 ADS COIL OUT FL H Drives left-front damper coil
4 ADS COIL OUT FL L Ground for the left-front damper coil
5 ADS COIL OUT RL H Drives left-rear damper coil
6 ADS COIL OUT RR L Ground for the right-rear damper coil
7 ADS COIL OUT RR H Drives right-rear damper coil
8 +B ADS Power source for the fail-safe relay
9 ADS COIL OUT FR L Ground for the right-front damper coil
10 ADS COIL OUT FR H Drives right-front damper coil
11 ADS COIL OUT RL L Ground for the left-rear damper coil
12 Not used ―――
13 GND Ground for the adaptive damper control unit
14 Not used ―――
15 Not used ―――
16 Not used ―――
17 Not used ―――
18 Not used ―――
19 F-CAN B_H F-CAN communication circuit
20 F-CAN B_L F-CAN communication circuit
21 Not used ―――
22 Not used ―――
23 Not used ―――
24 Not used ―――
Adaptive Damper Control Unit Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

1. Glove Box - Remove

2. Adaptive Damper Control Unit - Remove

B
1. Disconnect the connector (A).
D 9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

2. Loosen the adaptive damper control unit mounting nut (B).

3. Remove the adaptive damper control unit mounting bolt

(C).

4. Remove the adaptive damper control unit (D).

C
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

4. Adaptive Damper Control Unit Software - Check

1. Make sure the adaptive damper control unit has the latest
software. If it does not have the latest, update the software
in the adaptive damper control unit.
Adaptive Damper Control Unit Update

1. Adaptive Damper Control Unit - Update

NOTE: When updating control units, use the most current

version of the HDS software and interface device. Check any
official service information website for more information about
updating control units.
Adaptive Damper System Circuit Diagram

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

12 VOLT
BATTERY
No. A1 (150 A) No. A4-4 (60 A) D2 No. B44 (20 A) D8
GRN

No. A5-5 (30 A) D4 IG1B RELAY

YEL CIRCUIT
No. B37 (10 A) H7

H9
BODY WHT
CONTROL
MODULE H11
TAN

IG1B HOT in ON and

READY TO DRIVE mode

ADAPTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT

2
RED
IG1 OPTION

FAIL-SAFE 8
RELAY LT GRN
+B ADS
RIGHT-FRONT
DAMPER ACTUATOR
10 4 2
GRN
ADS COIL OUT FR H
9 3 1
RED
ADS COIL OUT FR L

LEFT-FRONT
DAMPER ACTUATOR
3 4 2
YEL
ADS COIL OUT FL H
4 3 1
PNK
ADS COIL OUT FL L

RIGHT-REAR
DAMPER ACTUATOR
7 1 2
RED
ADS COIL OUT RR H
6 2 1
BRN
ADS COIL OUT RR L

LEFT-REAR
DAMPER ACTUATOR
5 1 2
LT GRN
ADS COIL OUT RL H
11 2 1
BLU
ADS COIL OUT RL L

13
BLK
GND

G303
 *: Wire colors may be substituted
for SRS circuits
: CAN line
ADAPTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT

19
LT BLU
CAN F-CAN B_H
CONTROLLER 20
LT GRN CAN GATEWAY
F-CAN B_L
3
WHT
F-CAN A_H
11
RED
F-CAN A_L
6
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
GAUGE CONTROL 14
MODULE LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
A20 5
PUR PUR
F-CAN C_H F-CAN C_H
A21 13
GRN GRN
F-CAN C_L F-CAN C_L
7
F-CAN D_H
EPS 15
CONTROL UNIT
F-CAN D_L
B4
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
PNK GRN PCM
B1
LT GRN A39
F-CAN B_L
F-CAN D_H
A38
F-CAN D_L
A37
WHT
F-CAN A_H
SRS UNIT A36
RED
F-CAN A_L
A16
LT BLU*
F-CAN B_H
A17
LT GRN*
F-CAN B_L

VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT

20
WHT
F-CAN A_H
21
RED
F-CAN A_L
24
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
25
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
Adaptive Damper System Component Location Index
For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram.

LEFT-REAR
RIGHT-REAR ADAPTIVE DAMPER UNIT
ADAPTIVE DAMPER UNIT

ADAPTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT

Removal and Installation
Update

RIGHT-FRONT
ADAPTIVE DAMPER UNIT

LEFT-FRONT
ADAPTIVE DAMPER UNIT
Adaptive Damper System Description - Components

Components
The adaptive damper system consists of the following primary components:
Adaptive damper control unit
Adaptive damper units
System warning

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index, and for indicator functions, refer to How to
Troubleshoot the Adaptive Damper System.

Damper Unit

The adaptive damper passes the electric current that has been adjusted by the adaptive damper control unit, to the coil to operate the
valves. The solenoid valves open depending on the amount of electric current. Since the amount of oil changes depending on the
driving condition, an optimal damping force can be generated.

Tension Compression
: Oil
*Tension/compression will be same oil flow

MOVABLE
ORIFICE SOLENOID VALVE
COIL

: Main oil flow

: Sub oil flow
: Magnetic force
: Thrust by a magnetic force

The illustrations shows rear damper.

Adaptive Damper System Description - System Diagram

The adaptive damper system controller uses information from the PCM, the VSA modulator-control unit, the EPS control unit, and the
SRS unit.
When a malfunction is detected, the multi-information display will show a warning to inform the driver about the malfunction in the
system.

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index:

Adaptive damper control unit, Adaptive damper unit
PCM
VSA modulator-control unit
Gauge control module
EPS control unit
SRS unit

: CAN line

LEFT-FRONT RIGHT-FRONT
DAMPER UNIT DAMPER UNIT

GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE

PCM

ADAPTIVE DAMPER VSA MODULATOR-

CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT

EPS CONTROL
UNIT

SRS UNIT

LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR
DAMPER UNIT DAMPER UNIT
F-CAN Communication Data
Adaptive Damper Control Unit Receiving Signal
Transmitting Unit Signal Name
PCM Engine torque signal

Sport mode signal

VSA modulator-control unit Master cylinder pressure signal

Wheel speed signal

ABS/TCS/VSA operating status

 Transmitting Unit Signal Name
EPS control unit Steering angle signal
SRS unit
Yaw rate signal

Lateral acceleration signal

Longitudinal acceleration signal

Adaptive Damper Control Unit Transmitting Signal

Transmitting Unit Signal Name
Adaptive damper control unit System warning indication signal

Fail safe action status

Adaptive Damper System Description

Overview
The adaptive damper system provides optimal damping force for all driving conditions by adjusting the damping force of each damper
independently, improving the driving performance.
The system is controlled by the adaptive damper control unit.
With the adaptive damper system, roll-, pitch-, and yaw- motion of the vehicle can be controlled resulting in different driving
characteristics.
The adaptive damper control unit controls each damper solenoid with vehicle motion signals from other control units.

REAR DAMPER UNIT

Yaw

Pitch
Y

Roll

X
FRONT DAMPER UNIT
This illustration shows an example.

Control
The adaptive damper adjusts the damping force as in the following graph, depending on the change of the amount of electric current
output from the adaptive damper control unit.

Adaptive Damper Characteristic Image

 SPORT mode

NORMAL mode
Damping Force [N]

0A
0.4 A
SPORT mode 0.8 A
1.2 A
1.6 A

Damper Stroke Speed [m/s]

Sport Mode
The adaptive damper system has two control modes which correspond to the sport mode signal sent from the PCM via F-CAN.
When the vehicle in the NORMAL mode, the adaptive damper system provides a softer ride. When the vehicle in the SPORT mode,
the adaptive damper system improves a flat ride.
Fail Safe Mode
Depending on the severity of the error, the adaptive damper system will switch to one of four possible fail safe modes. In case of each
fail safe mode a DTC is stored in the adaptive damper control unit.

Fail Safe Failure State Action Failure

Mode Indication
A Power source (IG) failure The current for all dampers is ON
switched off.
Control unit failure
Damper unit failure
B SVCC voltage upper limit failure A fixed current (0 A) is set for all ON
dampers.
C Power source (+B) failure A fixed current (0 A) is set for all OFF
dampers.
CAN communication failure (except integrated sport
mode signal)
D CAN communication failure (integrated sport mode The control mode is fixed in that mode OFF
signal) when the failure occurred.
NOTE: The failure state is an outline and some examples.
After warming up, idle speed is above specifications without load (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Inspect the APP sensor.

Also check for

Intake air leaks

After warming up, idle speed is below specifications without load (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Do the carbon accumulation check.

Also check for

Incorrect valve timing or clearance adjustment

Intake Air System and Exhaust System Component Location Index
 AIR CLEANER
Removal and Installation
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
Removal, Installation, and Inspection

INTAKE MANIFOLD
Removal and Installation

INTAKE AIR RESONATOR

Removal and Installation

MUFFLER
Removal and Installation

HEAT COLLECTOR
Removal and Installation
THERMO ACTUATOR
Inspection

EXHAUST PIPE A
Removal and Installation
2/8/23, 2:04 AM Air Cleaner Element/Air Cleaner/Intake Air Resonator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3130

Air Cleaner Element/Air Cleaner/Intake Air Resonator Removal, Installation, and Inspection

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Make sure the length of the bands as shown.

1
Air Cleaner and Air Cleaner Element 1/2

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003130_enu 1/9
2/8/23, 2:04 AM Air Cleaner Element/Air Cleaner/Intake Air Resonator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3130

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003130_enu 2/9
2/8/23, 2:04 AM Air Cleaner Element/Air Cleaner/Intake Air Resonator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3130

2.
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)
9－10 mm
(0.35－0.39 in)
12 (1.2, 9)

2.

1.

12 (1.2, 9)

24 (2.4, 18)

9.5
(0.97, 7.0) 9.5
(0.97, 7.0)

9.5
(0.97, 7.0)

This illustration shows CVT.

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

2
Air Cleaner and Air Cleaner Element 2/2

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003130_enu 3/9
2/8/23, 2:04 AM Air Cleaner Element/Air Cleaner/Intake Air Resonator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3130

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003130_enu 4/9
2/8/23, 2:04 AM Air Cleaner Element/Air Cleaner/Intake Air Resonator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3130

3.

4.
*1

AIR CLEANER HOUSING

5.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

*1 These parts have inspection items.

3
Intake Air Resonator

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003130_enu 5/9
2/8/23, 2:04 AM Air Cleaner Element/Air Cleaner/Intake Air Resonator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3130

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003130_enu 6/9
2/8/23, 2:04 AM Air Cleaner Element/Air Cleaner/Intake Air Resonator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3130

6.
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

5.
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

Air Cleaner and Air Cleaner Element

1. Air Intake Duct - Remove

2. Air Cleaner - Remove

3. Air Cleaner Housing Cover - Remove

4. Air Cleaner Element - Remove

Note for installation

If the idle speed fluctuates, do the idle speed inspection.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003130_enu 7/9
2/8/23, 2:04 AM Air Cleaner Element/Air Cleaner/Intake Air Resonator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3130

5. Umbrella Valve - Remove (if necessary)

6. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

7. Maintenance Minder - Reset (With Maintenance Minder System)

1. If the Maintenance Minder requires the air cleaner element

to be replaced, reset the Maintenance Minder with the
gauge (see "Resetting the Maintenance Minder").

Intake Air Resonator

1. Engine Undercover - Remove

2. Left Front Wheel - Remove

3. Left Front Inner Fender - Remove

NOTE: Remove an appropriate portion of the left front inner

fender.

4. Air Cleaner - Remove

5. Intake Air Resonator - Remove

Note for installation

Make sure the end of hose band is aligned with the mark on
the hose band after the intake air resonator is installed.

6. Intercooler Outlet Pipe A - Remove (if necessary)

Note for installation

Make sure the end of hose band is aligned with the mark on
the hose band after intercooler outlet pipe A is installed.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003130_enu 8/9
2/8/23, 2:04 AM Air Cleaner Element/Air Cleaner/Intake Air Resonator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3130
7. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. Air Cleaner Element - Inspect

1. Check the air cleaner element for damage or clogging. If it

is damaged or clogged, replace it.

NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air cleaner

element.

2. Clean and remove any debris from inside the air cleaner.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003130_enu 9/9
 Job Aid
Applies To: All Models February 2014

Brake System Troubleshooting Guide

Use this Job Aid for troubleshooting common brake system issues based on symptoms (steps are in proper
troubleshooting order).

CONDITION
POSSIBLE Brake Sinking Low/ Brakes Drag Excessive Vibration Rattling Squeal Groaning/ Grinding/ POSSIBLE
Pull Pedal Spongy Rapid Wear Brake Pedal During Moaning Scraping
SOURCES Pedal Effort Braking SOURCES
Air in the Brake System 4 2 Air in the Brake System
Anti Squeal Shims 6 1 1 1 1 Anti Squeal Shims
Booster Unit 7 3 5 Booster Unit
Booster Vacuum Leak 4 Booster Vacuum Leak
Brake Lines 7 9 9 Brake Lines
Brake Pads/Shoes 2 8 1 3 3 2 3 Brake Pads/Shoes
Brake Pedal Switch 2 Brake Pedal/Switch
Brake Pistons 3 7 5 Brake Pistons
Brake Shield 2 2 2 Brake Shield
A/C Cycling 1 A/C Cycling
Fluid/Leak 2 1 3 Fluid Leak
Lug Nuts 4 Lug Nuts
Master Cylinder 3 4 5 Master Cylinder
Parking Brake 6 7 Parking Brake
Retaining Clips 4 Retaining Clips
Rotors/Drums 6 5 2 1 4 3 4 Rotors/Drums
Sliding Pins 1 3 1 4 4 Sliding Pins
Steering 2 5 Steering
Suspension 5 3 6 Suspension
Tires 4 5 6 Tires
VSA/ABS Unit 8 VSA/ABS Unit

Table of Contents

Contents Page
• Brake Pull
• Sinking Pedal
2
• Low or Spongy Pedal
• Brake Drag or Wear
• Excessive Brake Effort
• Vibration During Braking
3
• Rattling Noise
• Squealing Noise
• Groaning or Moaning Noise
• Grinding or Scraping Noise 4
• Liquids and Lubricants Used on the Brake System

 2014 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. – All Rights Reserved AJA 50639 (1402) 1 of 4
Brake Pull: When the brakes are applied, the vehicle drifts to one side.
No. Source Check/Inspect for
1 Sliding Pins Damaged, stuck, incorrect size/type
2 Brake Pads/Shoes Metal to metal contact, contamination, mismatched pads
3 Caliper Pistons Stuck pistons, damaged/leaking piston seals
4 Tires Uneven wear, improper inflation, mismatched tire type/brand
5 Suspension Loose/ damaged components
6 Rotors/Drums Contamination
7 Brake lines Binding, kinks, pinched, weak, inner or outer bulging or damaged hose

Sinking Pedal: After the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the brake pedal drops or sinks further than an identical
vehicle.

No. Source Check/Inspect for

A/C Compressor Cycling Brake booster vacuum from the engine is decreased when the A/C compressor cycles
1
on during idle operation, leading to sudden brake pedal drop.
Fluid/ Leak Excessive fluid contamination/deterioration, check for brake system leaks in the lines,
2
master cylinder, brake booster, VSA system, and any related hardware
3 Master Cylinder Perform master cylinder inspection
4 Air in the Brake System Bleed the system to ensure integrity

Low or Spongy Pedal: Brakes seem slow to respond or are soft/mushy when applied because of excessive pedal
stroke.
No. Source Check/Inspect for
Fluid/ Leak Check for brake system leaks in the lines, master cylinder, brake booster, VSA
1
system, and any related hardware, excessive fluid contamination/deterioration
2 Air in the Brake System Bleed the system to ensure integrity
3 Sliding Pins Binding
4 Master Cylinder Perform master cylinder inspection
5 Rotors Dished rotors with new pads installed.
6 Anti-Squeal Shims Incorrectly installed, incorrect aftermarket component
7 Caliper Pistons Damaged/leaking piston seals, excessive piston seal rollback, stuck piston
8 VSA/ABS Unit Air in the modulator
9 Brake Lines Weak, inner or outer bulging

Brake Drag or Wear: Brake pads or shoes are in continuous contact with the disc brake rotors or brake drums
leading to early, rapid, or uneven brake wear.
No. Source Check/Inspect for
1 Sliding Pins Damaged, stuck, incorrect size/type
2 Brake Pedal/Switch Insufficient pedal free play
3 Brake Fluid Brake fluid contamination leading to swollen seals
4 Retaining Clips Rust, contamination, inadequate lubrication or brake pad clearance
5 Caliper Pistons Stuck caliper pistons/cylinders
Parking Brake Insufficient drum shoe clearance, parking brake applied during driving, sticking or cor-
6
roded cables
7 Booster Unit Misadjusted push rod, check valve
8 Brake Pads/Shoes Aftermarket material compostion
9 Brake Lines Binding, kinks, pinched, weak, inner or outer bulging or damaged hose

2 of 4
Excessive Brake Effort: The brake pedal must be pressed hard to stop the vehicle despite maintaining the normal
pedal stroke/high or hard brake pedal.

No. Source Check/Inspect for

1 Brake Pads/Shoes Glazing, contamination, aftermarket material composition
2 Brake Rotors/Drums Contamination, glazing, heat spots, corrosion
3 Booster Unit Misadjusted push rod, frozen check valve
4 Booster Vacuum Leak Perform booster unit inspection test
5 Master Cylinder Perform master cylinder inspection

Vibration During Braking: A judder or pulsation is felt through the brake pedal, steering wheel, seat, floor, or
elsewhere in the vehicle when the brakes are applied.

No. Source Check/Inspect for

1 Rotors/Drums Excessive lateral runout or parallelism, corrosion, heat spots, contamination
2 Steering Loose/damaged components
3 Suspension Loose/damaged components
4 Lug Nuts Over torqued causing excessive rotor lateral runout
5 Tires Dynamic or static imbalance

Rattling Noise: A noise similar to a baby rattle originating from the brake area when driving over bumpy surfaces
either off or on the brake.
No. Source Check/Inspect for
1 Anti-Squeal Shims Incorrectly installed, incorrect aftermarket, loose
Brake Shield Check for foreign material caught between the shield and rotor, bent/loose/misaligned
2
shield
3 Brake Pads/Shoes Excessive clearance
4 Sliding Pins Loose, incorrect size/type
5 Steering Loose/damaged components
6 Suspension Loose/damaged components
7 Parking Brake Sticking, cut or frayed cables, excessive drum shoe clearance against backing plate

Squealing Noise: A noise similar to skidding tires or a loose fan belt when the brakes are applied.
No. Source Check/Inspect for
Anti-Squeal Shims Inadequate lubrication, loose, missing, damaged, incorrectly installed, incorrect
1
aftermarket
Metal to metal contact, check for foreign material caught between shield and rotor,
2 Brake Shield
bent/loose/misaligned shield
3 Brake Pads/Shoes Metal to metal contact, aftermarket material composition
Metal to metal contact, glazing, scoring, heat spots, corrosion, aftermarket material
4 Rotors/Drums
composition

3 of 4
Groaning or Moaning Noise: A noise similar to blowing across the top of an empty bottle (moaning) or a twisting
wooden beam on a ship (groaning) when the brakes are applied.

No. Source Check/Inspect for

1 Anti-Squeal Shims Incorrectly installed, incorrect aftermarket
2 Brake Pads/Shoes Metal to metal contact, inadequate clearance, aftermarket material composition
3 Rotors/Drums Glazing, scoring, heat spots, corrosion, aftermarket material composition
4 Sliding Pins Binding
5 Booster Unit Misadjusted pushrod
6 Tires Uneven wear, driver may be sensitive to tire compound on different road surfaces

Grinding or Scraping Noise: A noise similar to the sharpening of a tool on a grinding wheel when the brakes are
applied.
No. Source Check/Inspect for
1 Anti-Squeal Shims Incorrectly installed, incorrect aftermarket, loose
2 Brake Shield Check for foreign material between shield and rotor, bent/loose/misaligned shield
3 Brake Pads/Shoes Metal to metal contact, inadequate clearance, aftermarket material composition
4 Rotors/Drums Aftermarket material composition, corrosion

Liquids and Lubricants Used on the Brake System

Lubricant Part Number Use
P/N 08700–9201 Cleans brake drums, liners, cylinders, springs, and disc
Brake Cleaner
pads; degreases brake fluids, grease and oil
PN 08798–9008 The only brake fluid specifically formulated for use in
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Honda vehicles and AKEBONO caliper piston seals.
P/N 08C30–B0234M Use on caliper piston seals and boots, sliding pins and
(supersedes boots
Honda Silicone Grease
08C30–B0224M/Honda
caliper grease)
P/N 08700–9203 Cleaner for degreasing parts and removing brake dust
Spray Cleaner and Polish
from alloy wheels
P/N 08732–0020B Cleaner for degreasing parts and removing brake dust
Hondabrite All Surface Cleaner
from alloy wheels
Call Dow Corning: Use on the backing plate and brake shoe contact
Molykote 44MA (800) 248-2481 points and on the ends of the shoes, shoe adjuster bolt
and connecting rod
P/N 08798–9010 call Use between brake pads and pad shims, brake pad ends
Molykote M77 Dow Corning at (800) and between caliper bracket and pad retainers
248-2481
Shin-Etsu Silicone Grease P/N 08798–9013 Use on master cylinder inner bore lip and rods
T68 P/N 08734–0016 Use on master cylinder inner bore lip and rods

4 of 4
2/8/23, 1:42 AM Alternator Overhaul 3009

Alternator Overhaul

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Alternator OAD Pulley Holder 07AAB-TK8A100

Bearing Driver Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300

Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003009_enu 1/13
2/8/23, 1:42 AM Alternator Overhaul 3009

3. 4.

5.
*1

7.
*1

6.

8.

9.

DRIVE-END 2. 1.
HOUSING

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Replace
*1 These parts have inspection items.

1. OAD Pulley Seal Cap - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003009_enu 4/13
2/8/23, 1:42 AM Alternator Overhaul 3009

1. Remove the OAD pulley seal cap (A) by piercing the center
A of the rubber cap with a flat screwdriver and prying it loose.

NOTE: While the cap is off, the grease inside the OAD
pulley is exposed. Do not wipe the grease off, and make
sure it does not become contaminated.

2. OAD Pulley - Remove

1. Clamp the alternator firmly in a vise.

07AAB-TK8A100
2. Insert the alternator OAD pulley holder into the OAD pulley.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003009_enu 5/13
2/8/23, 1:42 AM Alternator Overhaul 3009

3. Place a 10 mm hex wrench (A) through center of the

alternator OAD pulley holder (B), onto the nut on the end of
the alternator shaft.

D 4. Hold the alternator OAD pulley holder with a 17 mm wrench

C
(C), then turn the alternator shaft clockwise.

A
5. Remove the OAD pulley (D).

3. Terminal Insulator - Remove

4. End Cover - Remove

5. Brush Holder - Remove

6. Stator Assembly - Remove

7. Rotor - Remove

8. Front Bearing Retainer - Remove

9. Front Bearing - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003009_enu 6/13
2/8/23, 1:42 AM Alternator Overhaul 3009

1. Drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and a hammer.

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003009_enu 7/13
2/8/23, 1:42 AM Alternator Overhaul 3009

7. 6.
4.5 (0.46, 3.3) 5.
1.8 (0.18, 1.3)
*1

3.
*1

4.
5.9 (0.60, 4.4)

2.
2.3 (0.23, 1.7) 1.

DRIVE-END 8. 9.
HOUSING 80 (8.2, 59)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace
*1 These parts have inspection items.

1. Front Bearing - Install

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003009_enu 9/13
2/8/23, 1:42 AM Alternator Overhaul 3009

1. Use a hand press to install the front bearing (A) in the drive-
end housing, with the driver handle, 15 x 135L and the
07749-0010000 bearing driver attachment, 42 x 47 mm.

07746-0010300

2. Front Bearing Retainer - Install

3. Rotor - Install

4. Stator Assembly - Install

5. Brush Holder - Install

1. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit (B)
(about 1.6 mm (1/16 in) diameter) to hold them there.

2. Install the brush holder.

A
3. Pull out the pin or drill bit.

6. End Cover - Install

7. Terminal Insulator - Install

8. OAD Pulley - Install

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003009_enu 10/13
2/8/23, 1:42 AM Alternator Overhaul 3009

1. Clamp the alternator firmly in a vise.

07AAB-TK8A100
2. Loosely tighten the OAD pulley, then insert the alternator
OAD pulley holder into the OAD pulley.

3. Place a 10 mm hex wrench (A) through center of the

alternator OAD pulley holder (B), into the hex in the end of
the alternator shaft.

4. Hold the alternator OAD pulley holder with a 17 mm wrench

C (C), then tighten the alternator shaft counterclockwise to the
specified torque.
A

9. OAD Pulley Seal Cap - Install

NOTE:
When installing do not distort the OAD pulley seal cap.
Make sure to check that the cap is installed securely.

Brush Holder

1. Brush - Inspect

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003009_enu 11/13
2/8/23, 1:42 AM Alternator Overhaul 3009

1. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with a vernier

caliper (B). If either brush is shorter than the service limit,
replace the brush holder.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003009_enu 12/13
2/8/23, 1:42 AM Alternator Overhaul 3009

Alternator Brush Length

Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.413 in)
Service Limit: 1.5 mm (0.059 in)

Rotor

1. Rotor Slip Ring - Test

1. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A):

C

If there is continuity, go to step 2.

If there is no continuity, replace the rotor assembly.

2. Check for continuity between each slip ring and the rotor
A (B) and the rotor shaft (C). If there is continuity, replace the
rotor assembly.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003009_enu 13/13
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Performance Test 4732

Alternator Performance Test

Alternator Performance Test

Special Tools Required
Honda GR8 Battery Diagnostic Station with AST Module (12 Volt) MTRGR811ASTH*
*: Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857.
1. PGM-FI system DTC check:

‐1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.

‐2. Check for PGM-FI system DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description Confirmed Pending
DTC DTC

DTC (PGM-FI)

Are any DTCs indicated?

YES Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

NO Go to step 2.

2. Alternator Test:

‐1. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, and wait more than 1 minute.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM from damage.

SCS Short

‐2. Test the alternator with the Honda GR8 battery diagnostic station with AST module (12
Volt).
NOTE: For setup, customization, and other available features, refer to the GR8 user's
manual.

Is the result OK?

YES Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004732_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Performance Test 4732

NO Replace the alternator or repair the alternator.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004732_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3007

Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Alternator OAD Pulley Holder 07AAB-TK8A100

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003007_enu 1/8
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3007

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003007_enu 2/8
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3007

5.
12 (1.2, 9) 5.
24 (2.4, 18)

5.
5.
*1
24 (2.4, 18)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
*1 These parts have inspection items.
https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003007_enu 3/8
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3007

1. 12 Volt Battery Terminal - Disconnect

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

3. Drive Belt - Remove

4. Exhaust Pipe A - Remove

5. Alternator - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003007_enu 4/8
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3007

NOTE: Remove the alternator from the opening between the

front subframe and the intermediate shaft.

6. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE: Make sure the crimped side of the ring terminal

faces away from the alternator when you connect the
positive alternator cable.

1. OAD Pulley Seal Cap - Remove

2. OAD Pulley - Inspect

1. Clamp the alternator firmly in a vise.

07AAB-TK8A100
2. Insert the alternator OAD pulley holder into the OAD pulley.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003007_enu 5/8
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3007

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003007_enu 6/8
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3007

3. Place a beam type torque wrench (A) with a 17 mm socket

wrench (B) on the alternator OAD pulley holder.

C
4. While holding the OAD pulley (C), rotate the alternator shaft
counterclockwise. Make sure the alternator shaft is locked
when applying the specified torque.
B

Specified Torque:
11 N·m (1.1 kgf·m, 8 lbf·ft)

If the alternator shaft locks, go to step 3.

If it does not lock, replace the OAD pulley.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003007_enu 7/8
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3007

5. While holding the OAD pulley (A), rotate the alternator shaft
clockwise. Check that the alternator shaft rotates at the
specified torque or less.
A
Specified Torque:
0.8 N·m (0.08 kgf·m, 0.6 lbf·ft) max

If the alternator shaft rotates at the specified torque or

less, it is normal. Install a new OAD pulley seal cap.
If it does not rotate at the specified torque or less,
replace the OAD pulley.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003007_enu 8/8
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3015

Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Alternator OAD Pulley Holder 07AAB-TK8A100

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003015_enu 1/9
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3015

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003015_enu 2/9
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3015

6.
24 (2.4, 18)

5.
12 (1.2, 9) 5.
24 (2.4, 18)
5.
*1 5.
37 (3.8, 27)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
*1 These parts have inspection items.

1. 12 Volt Battery Terminal - Disconnect

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003015_enu 3/9
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3015

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

3. Drive Belt - Remove

4. Exhaust Pipe A - Remove

5. Alternator - Remove

NOTE: Remove the alternator from the opening between the

front subframe and the intermediate shaft.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003015_enu 4/9
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3015

Note for installation

Be sure to use bolt which is applied only to this engine

type.
When installing the alternator, do the following procedures.

-1. Loosen the bolt .

-2. Loosely tighten the all bolts to finger-tight.
-3. Tighten the bolts in sequence, to the specified torque.

6. Alternator Bracket - Remove (if necessary)

7. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE: Make sure the crimped side of the ring terminal

faces away from the alternator when you connect the
positive alternator cable.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003015_enu 5/9
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3015

1. OAD Pulley Seal Cap - Remove

2. OAD Pulley - Inspect

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003015_enu 6/9
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3015

1. Clamp the alternator firmly in a vise.

07AAB-TK8A100
2. Insert the alternator OAD pulley holder into the OAD pulley.

3. Place a beam type torque wrench (A) with a 17 mm socket

wrench (B) on the alternator OAD pulley holder.

C
4. While holding the OAD pulley (C), rotate the alternator shaft
counterclockwise. Make sure the alternator shaft is locked
when applying the specified torque.
B

Specified Torque:
13 N·m (1.3 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

If the alternator shaft locks, go to step 3.

If it does not lock, replace the OAD pulley.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003015_enu 7/9
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3015

5. While holding the OAD pulley (A), rotate the alternator shaft
clockwise. Check that the alternator shaft rotates at the
specified torque or less.
A
Specified Torque:
0.8 N·m (0.08 kgf·m, 0.6 lbf·ft) max

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003015_enu 8/9
2/8/23, 1:43 AM Alternator Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3015

If the alternator shaft rotates at the specified torque or

less, it is normal. Install a new OAD pulley seal cap.
If it does not rotate at the specified torque or less,
replace the OAD pulley.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003015_enu 9/9
AM radio reception changes at night

Diagnostic Procedure

1. This is a system characteristic. AM radio stations are required by the government (FCC) to
lower their power at night
2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ambient Light Removal, Installation, and Test 690

Ambient Light Removal, Installation, and Test

Without moonroof

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000690_enu 1/7
2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ambient Light Removal, Installation, and Test 690

2.
*1

*1 Ambient light: LED

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000690_enu 2/7
2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ambient Light Removal, Installation, and Test 690

With moonroof

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000690_enu 3/7
2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ambient Light Removal, Installation, and Test 690

2.
*1

*1 Ambient light: LED

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000690_enu 4/7
2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ambient Light Removal, Installation, and Test 690

1. Front Individual Map Light - Remove

2. Ambient Light - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. Ambient Light - Test (Without Moonroof)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000690_enu 5/7
2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ambient Light Removal, Installation, and Test 690
1. Check the lights according to the table.

NOTE:
When an LED is located between terminals, check if
the LED illuminates by connecting power and ground to
the LED.
Note this important operating characteristic; diode bias
causes a diode to fully conduct electricity in one
direction (forward), while not at all in the opposite
direction (reverse).

2. If the ambient light does not come on, the LED is faulty;
replace the ambient light (A).

Terminal
5 1
Position
ON
OFF
― = Voltage for LED

2. Ambient Light - Test (With Moonroof)

NOTE: The ambient light (A) is built into the moonroof switch
(B).

1. Check the lights according to the table.

NOTE:
When an LED is located between terminals, check if
B the LED illuminates by connecting power and ground to
the LED.
Note this important operating characteristic; diode bias
causes a diode to fully conduct electricity in one
direction (forward), while not at all in the opposite
direction (reverse).

A
2. If the ambient light does not come on, the LED is faulty;
replace the moonroof switch assembly.

Terminal 8 11

― = Voltage for LED

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000690_enu 6/7
2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ambient Light Removal, Installation, and Test 690

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000690_enu 7/7
AM/FM radio display is blank or no station information is displayed

Diagnostic Procedure

1. Symptom Troubleshooting

Also Check for

Software not up to date. Check for any Honda authorized service information.
Make sure to check the problem against a known-good vehicle under the same conditions.
AM/FM radio preset memory is lost

Diagnostic Procedure

1. Replace the audio unit

Also Check for

Internal error
AM/FM radio preset memory is lost

Diagnostic Procedure

1. Replace the tuner unit

Also Check for

Internal error
Audio and Visual System Circuit Diagram

*1: With telematics control unit

UNDER-HOOD *2: With USB charger unit
FUSE/RELAY BOX *3: Integrated with the dashboard wire harness
12 VOLT : Other communication line
BATTERY No. A5-5 : Shielding
(30 A)
BODY CONTROL
YEL MODULE
No. A1
(125 A)
No. A4-2
(70 A)
BLU
No. A4-4
(60 A) PNK TAN
GRN
No. A35 UNDER-DASH
(7.5 A) D2 E1 D4 H2 H11 FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. A24 IG1B REVERSE
(15 A) RELAY ACC RELAY
CIRCUIT RELAY CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT

No. B43 No. B24 No. B36 No. B4

(10 A) (20 A) (10 A) (10 A)

K20 K9 H17 H12 G3

BLU
RED RED WHT RED BRN BLU WHT
BLU C
1 REAR 1 REAR
CAMERA CAMERA
ACC ∙ USB PORT LIGHT IG1
E D B ∙ TELEMATICS
2 DIODE*3 2 DIODE*3
CONTROL UNIT* 1
AUDIO STEREO ∙ ACTIVE NOISE YEL ∙ USB CHARGER
UNIT*2 YEL
RED RED REMOTE-HFL AMPLIFIER CANCELLATION
SWITCH UNIT
∙ TELEMATICS
CONTROL UNIT* 1 YEL

A3 A4 A23
+B +B IG1 WITH
AUDIO AUDIO DIODE
SUB FMVSS
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT

DISP LVDS1 SH
CONT LVDS1+ LVDS1– SH Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi) VSP K LINE GND GND
E12 H4 H5 H6 K1 K2 A22 A12 A1 A2
BLK

RED RED WHT BLU LT BLU GRY GRY

BLK
A1 A4 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2
+B DISP LVDS1+ LVDS1– LVDS1 Wi-Fi SH
AUDIO CONT SH (Wi-Fi)
A CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
GND
∙ ACTIVE NOISE DATA LINK
CANCELLATION A5 CONNECTOR
UNIT (DLC)
∙ TELEMATICS
CONTROL UNIT* 1 GRY A35
∙ USB CHARGER
UNIT*2 VSP

PCM

G504 G504
 *1: CVT
*2: A/T
: CAN line
: Shielding
FRONT
DRIVER’S LEFT FRONT FRONT PASSENGER’S RIGHT FRONT No. B24 (20 A)
DOOR DOOR CENTER DOOR DOOR FUSE (In the
SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER TWEETER under-dash SUBWOOFER
fuse/relay box)
D
1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2

PNK GRY YEL GRN LT GRN WHT RED BLK BLU WHT RED RED BLK

A5 A6 A14 A15 A11 A18 A13 A12 A16 A17 A3 A2 A4

FL FL FL FL CTR CTR FR FR FR FR +B SUB SUB
SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– AUDIO WOOFER+ WOOFER–
AMP
STEREO AMPLIFIER
AUD
SWD AUD F MIX ANC ANC ANC ANC
GND +B F MIX GND F+ F– R+ R–
A1 C14 C11 C3 C10 C2 C9 C1

GRY GRN

G504
GRN GRN RED BLU BLK GRN RED WHT

A21
SWD
+B

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT

CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA SH

ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V CAMERA
E16 E15 E33 E31 E13 E32 E14
GRY

BLK RED
BRN GRN YEL WHT GRY

RED BLK 3 16 15 20 10 19 9 8
SWD AUD AUD ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC
+B F MIX F MIX F+ F– R+ R– SH
2 3 6 5 4 1 GND ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA +B IG1 F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN
ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V K LINE GND AUDIO METER A_H A_L B_H B_L
REARVIEW CAMERA 14 1 11 12 4 5 4 5

LT BLU BLK RED BRN WHT RED LT BLU LT GRN

G503 A B
DATA LINK No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A)
CONNECTOR FUSE (In the FUSE (In the ∙ CAN GATEWAY ∙ CAN GATEWAY
(DLC) under-hood under-dash ∙ PCM ∙ PCM
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) *2 *1
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

LEFT REAR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR

SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER TWEETER

ROOF ANTENNA
1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 (With XM)
SH ANT
BLU WHT SAT/TER (SAT/TER) +B RF IN RF SH

PNK WHT YEL BRN BLU LT GRN

ANTENNA
PNK LT BLU REAR LEAD
(XM)

A10 A9 B7 B8 A8 A7 B5 B6
SATL SATL SATL SATL SATR SATR SATR SATR 1 2
SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER–
(N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN)
STEREO AMPLIFIER BLK
AUX
AUX AUX NAVI SPDIF2 SH ANTENNA
BEEP NAVI GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF2) MAIN LEAD
C4 C12 C5 C15 C7 D1 D2 (XM)

BLK
1 2

BLK
PNK GRN BLU BLU PNK BLK
ANTENNA ANTENNA
SUBLEAD REAR LEAD
(XM) (AM/FM)
GRY GRY
BLK
D11 D12 D4 D3 D7 D8 D6 C1 C4 N1 N2
AUX AUX AUX AUX RS485+ RS485– AMP SPDIF2 SH SAT/TER SH
BEEP NAVI NAVI NAVI RS485 SIG (SPDIF2) (SAT/TER)
GND SH SH
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
TUNER
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER RS485 SPDIF1 SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SH SIG (SPDIF1)
D1 D2 D9 D15 D16 D14 C3 C6

GRY

BLU PNK

RED YEL BLK BLK

WHT BLK

A10 A1 A2 A5 A7 B1 B2 C1 C2 C4
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER SPDIF1 SH ANT RF IN RF SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF1) +B

TUNER UNIT
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

(Without telematics control unit) (With telematics control unit)

TEL
GPS ANTENNA TEL/GNSS ANTENNA ANTENNA
SH
SH GPS (GPS SH
SH SH TEL (TEL ANT ANT TEL (TEL
GPS (GPS) GPS (GPS) ANT1 ANT1) (TEL) (TEL)) ANT2 ANT2)

J1 J2 J1 J2
GPS SH GPS SH 1 2
(GPS) (GPS)

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
SH TEL TEL TEL TEL TEL
TELEM TELEM TELEM USB USB USB USB USB USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3
SIG+ SIG– SIG SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND SH VBUS DATA– DATA+ GND
F35 F17 F18 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M2 M4 M3 M1
GRY

GRN YEL

GRY
A12 A13 A28 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 C1 C3 C2 C4 D1 D2
TELEM TELEM SH TEL TEL TEL TEL TEL TEL SH GPS SH TEL SH
SIG+ SIG– TELEM USB USB USB USB USB ANT1 (TEL ANT (GPS ANT2 (TEL
SIG SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND ANT1) (TEL) ANT ANT2)
(TEL))
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT

5 4 3 2 1
USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3
SH VBUS DATA– DATA+ GND

NEAR FIELD
COMMUNICATION UNIT
 : CAN line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A22 A23
(With wireless charger)

WIRELESS
CHARGER

B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
3 2
PNK BLU
PNK BLU
VSA
MODULATOR- BLU
CONTROL
UNIT PNK

PNK BLU
BRN 5 16
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L

HEAD UP
DISPLAY
BRN BRN
(With telematics control unit)
(With head up display)
E10 E28
PARK PARK
BUSY BUSY
No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A) No. B4 (10 A) BODY
FUSE (In the FUSE (In the FUSE (In the AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONTROL
under-hood under-dash under-dash SH
ECALL ECALL ECALL ECALL MODULE
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
NAVI NAVI NAVI HFT
A B C MIC+ MIC– MIC MUTE B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
E23 E6 E5 E4 A14 A24
GRY

PNK BLU PNK BLU PNK BLU

RED BRN BLU YEL BRN BLU

PNK
A17 A18 A2 A25 A26 A27
BLU
+B IG1 ACC ECALL ECALL ECALL
AUDIO METER NAVI NAVI HFT
MIC+ MIC– MUTE
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT PNK BLU
GND CDS B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A6 A29 A23 A22
BLU

GRY PUR PNK

PNK BLU PNK BLU

A1
CDS A25 A8 3 5
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
G504 SRS UNIT
CLIMATE CONTROL LEFT SIDE
UNIT BSI RADAR UNIT

(With BSI)
 : Shielding

(With telematics control unit)

TELEMATICS SWITCH MODULE

SYSTEM STATUS
INDICATOR (LED)
100 Ω 300 Ω

2.7 kΩ
ASSIST LINK

E-CALL E-CALL LIGHT

LED LED E-CALL E-CALL (LED x 2) ILL–
GREEN RED SW+ SW– ILLUMI+ (LED) GND
4 5 2 1 7 6 3

BRN LT GRN WHT LT BLU GRY BLU BLK

RELAY GAUGE
CONTROL CONTROL G501
MODULE MODULE

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE

FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

HFT MIC MIC ANC F ANC M SH ANC

MUTE PWR MIC+ GND MIC+8V MIC+8V M MIC
7 4 2 1 8 1 2
GRY

BLU

GRN LT BLU BLU PNK WHT

LT GRN

GRY GRY GRY

A21 A20 A4 A5 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 18 7 2 13
E-CALL E-CALL E-CALL E-CALL HFT MIC MIC+ MIC SH ANC F SH ANC SH ANC ANC M
LED LED SW+ SW– MUTE PWR GND MIC MIC+8V F MIC M MIC MIC+8V
GREEN RED ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
17 6
(Without telematics control unit) GRY

GRN LT BLU BLU PNK BLU

GRY
E4 E22 E23 E6 E5 GRY
HFT MIC MIC+ MIC SH 1 2
MUTE PWR GND MIC ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2 LIN
C_H C_L LVDS2+ LVDS2– SH (BATT SNSR)
A20 A21 C1 C2 C3 A4
CAN GATEWAY No. B43 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
E

PUR GRN BLK BRN WHT

G502

A1 A2 A3
PUR
CABLE
REEL
GRN
C11 C14 C15

PUR GRN BLK BLU PUR

E29 E30 H1 H2 H3
7 10 12
F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2+ LVDS2– LVDS2
C_H C_L SH STRG STRG +B
GND SW LIN
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH
USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2
SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 G10 G9 G8 G7 G6

No. B4 (10 A)
FUSE (In the RELAY
under-dash CONTROL
fuse/relay box) MODULE
C
USB
HARNESS
USB
HARNESS
BLU GRY
BLK

1 2 3
ACC ILLUMI+ GND

5 2 3 1 4 USB PORT LIGHT 5 2 3 1 4

USB PORT A USB PORT B

G503
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

No. A24 (15 A) No. B4 (10 A)

FUSE (In the FUSE (In the
under-hood under-dash
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
A C

RED BLU BLK GRY

3 2 1
+B ACC GND
AUDIO
USB CHARGER UNIT
G504
USB PORT C USB PORT D
(CHARGE ONLY) (CHARGE ONLY)

(With USB charger unit)

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
LWC LWC LWC LWC SH
CAM CAM CAM UART LWC LANEWATCH
VID VGND VCC AS CAM SW
F25 F7 F24 F26 F6 F8
GRY

BLK WHT RED GRN WHT

GRY

3 13 12 4 5
WHT/BLU LANEWATCH
SWITCH
GRN BRN BLU/ WHT/
YEL RED

WHT/BLU
4 5 1 6 2
LWC LWC LWC LWC LWC
VDA VGND VCC UART SH
AS DA AS AS AS AS

LANEWATCH CAMERA

(With LANEWATCH)
Audio and Visual System Circuit Diagram

*1: Integrated with : Other communication line

UNDER-HOOD the dashboard wire harness : Shielding
FUSE/RELAY BOX *2: CVT
12 VOLT *3: AT
BATTERY No. A5-5 *4: MT
(30 A)
YEL
BODY CONTROL
MODULE
No. A1
(125 A)

No. A4-4
(60 A)
GRN PNK TAN
No. A35
(7.5 A)
D2 D4 H2 H11
No. A24
(15 A)
IG1B
RELAY ACC
CIRCUIT RELAY
CIRCUIT

RED RED No. B43 No. B36 No. B4

(10 A) (10 A) (10 A)

K20 H17 H12

BLU
WHT BRN BLU
BLU
1 REAR
E B CAMERA C
ACC
RED RED AUDIO ACTIVE NOISE 2 DIODE* ∙ USB PORT LIGHT
1

REMOTE-HFL CANCELLATION YEL

SWITCH UNIT

YEL
A3 A4 A23
+B +B IG1 WITH
AUDIO AUDIO DIODE
SUB FMVSS
AUDIO UNIT

DISP LVDS1 SH
CONT LVDS1+ LVDS1– SH Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi) VSP K LINE GND GND
E12 H4 H5 H6 K1 K2 A22 A12 A1 A2
BLK

RED RED WHT BLU LT BLU GRY GRY

BLK
A1 A4 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2
+B DISP LVDS1+ LVDS1– LVDS1 Wi-Fi SH
AUDIO CONT SH (Wi-Fi)
A CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
GND
∙ ACTIVE NOISE DATA LINK
CANCELLATION A5 CONNECTOR
UNIT (DLC)

GRY A35
VSP

PCM

G504 G504
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

ROOF ANTENNA
(With XM)
SH ANT
SAT/TER (SAT/TER) +B RF IN RF SH

ANTENNA
REAR
LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR LEAD
TWEETER TWEETER TWEETER TWEETER (XM)

2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2

PNK GRY RED BLK BLU WHT YEL BRN

BLK
FRONT
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S ANTENNA
DOOR DOOR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR MAIN
SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER LEAD
(XM)

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 BLK
1 2

BLK
PNK GRY RED BLK BLU WHT YEL BRN
ANTENNA ANTENNA
SUBLEAD REAR
(XM) LEAD
(AM/FM)
BLK
A15 A16 A17 A18 A5 A6 A7 A8 N1 N2
FL FL FR FR RL RL RR RR SAT/TER SH
SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– (SAT/TER)

AUDIO UNIT
TUNER
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER RS485 SPDIF1 SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SH SIG (SPDIF1)
D1 D2 D9 D15 D16 D14 C1 C2

GRY

BLU PNK

RED YEL BLK BLK

WHT BLK

A10 A1 A2 A5 A7 B1 B2 C1 C2 C4
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER SPDIF1 SH ANT RF IN RF SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF1) +B

TUNER UNIT
 *1: Without ACC
*2: With ACC
*3: M/T
*4: A/T
*5: CVT
: CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

*2, *3, *4, *5

CAN GATEWAY

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE *1, *5

F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2 F-CAN F-CAN
C_H C_L LVDS2+ LVDS2– SH A_H A_L
A20 A21 C1 C2 C3 A20 A21 ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION
UNIT

PUR GRN WHT RED

D E

WHT RED

GRN RED

PUR WHT

WHT RED
A37 A36
F-CAN F-CAN
A_H A_L
PUR GRN WHT RED
PCM

E29 E30 H1 H2 H3 E29 E30

F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2+ LVDS2– LVDS2 F-CAN F-CAN
C_H C_L SH A_H A_L

AUDIO UNIT

USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3

SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
M5 M4 M3 M2 M1

5 3 2 4 1
USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3
SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND

NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION UNIT

(With NFC)
 *1: Without ACC
*2: With ACC
*3: M/T
*4: A/T
*5: CVT
: CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

LIN B- B-
(BATT SNSR) CAN_H CAN_L
A4 A22 A23 (With BSI) (With wireless charger)
No. B43 (10 A)
FUSE (In the LEFT SIDE WIRELESS
under-dash BSI RADAR UNIT CHARGER GPS ANTENNA
fuse/relay box) PNK BLU B- B- B- B- SH
F CAN_H CAN_L CAN_H CAN_L GPS (GPS)
3 5 3 2

PNK BLU PNK BLU

BLK BRN WHT
VSA
G502 MODULATOR-
PNK CONTROL
A1 A2 A3 UNIT
BLU
CABLE
REEL
PNK BLU
C11 C14 C15
BRN
A25 A8
B- B-
BLK BLU PUR CAN_H CAN_L
PNK BLU
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT BRN BRN

A14 A24 J1 J2 E10 E28

7 10 12
B- B- GPS SH PARK PARK
STRG STRG +B CAN_H CAN_L (GPS) BUSY BUSY
GND SW LIN
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH AUD
ANC ANC ANC ANC SWD AUD F MIX
F+ F– R+ R– +B F MIX GND
E19 E20 E1 E2 A21 E21 E3

BLK GRN RED WHT GRN RED BLU

GRY
20 10 19 9 8 3 16 15
ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC SWD AUD AUD
F+ F– R+ R– SH +B F MIX F MIX
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT GND
+B IG1 F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN
AUDIO METER K LINE GND B_H B_L A_H A_L A_H A_L
11 12 14 1 4 5 4 5 4 5

RED BRN LT BLU BLK LT BLU LT GRN WHT RED WHT RED

A B D E
No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A) DATA LINK G503
FUSE (In the FUSE (In the CONNECTOR ∙ CAN GATEWAY ∙ AUDIO UNIT CAN GATEWAY
under-hood under-dash (DLC) ∙ PCM ∙ GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) ∙ PCM
*2, *3, *5 *1, *5 *2, *4
 : Shielding

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE

FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

HFT MIC MIC ANC F ANC M SH ANC

MUTE PWR MIC+ GND MIC+8V MIC+8V M MIC
7 4 2 1 8 1 2
GRY

GRN LT BLU BLU PNK WHT BLU

GRY
E4 E22 E23 E6 E5
HFT MIC MIC+ MIC SH
MUTE PWR GND MIC

AUDIO UNIT

CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA SH

ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V CAMERA LT GRN
E16 E15 E33 E31 E13 E32 E14
GRY

BLK RED
BRN GRN YEL WHT
GRY GRY
RED BLK 18 7 13 2
ANC F SH ANC ANC M SH ANC
MIC+8V F MIC MIC+8V M MIC
2 3 6 5 4 1
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA ANC R SH ANC
ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V MIC+8V R MIC
REARVIEW CAMERA 17 6
GRY

BLU

GRY
1 2
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

USB PORT A

USB PORT LIGHT 4 1 3 2 5

GND ILLUMI+ ACC

3 2 1

BLK GRY BLU

USB
HARNESS

C
G503 RELAY No. B4 (10 A)
CONTROL FUSE (In the
MODULE under-dash
fuse/relay box)

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5
USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1
GND VBUS DATA+ DATA– SH

AUDIO UNIT

USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2
SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
G10 G9 G8 G7 G6 G10 G9 G8 G7 G6

USB
HARNESS

5 3 2 4 1 USB
HARNESS

USB
SUBHARNESS

5 3 2 1 4

USB PORT B USB PORT B

(M/T) (A/T, CVT)

(With USB port B)

Audio and Visual System Circuit Diagram

*1: With USB charger unit

*2: Integrated with
UNDER-HOOD the dashboard wire harness
FUSE/RELAY BOX *3: CVT
12 VOLT *4: AT
BATTERY No. A5-5 *5: MT
(30 A) : Other communication line
YEL : Shielding
No. A1
(125 A) BODY CONTROL
MODULE
No. A4-2
(70 A)
BLU
No. A4-4
(60 A)
GRN
PNK TAN
No. A35
(7.5 A) UNDER-DASH
D2 E1 D4 H2 H11 FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. A24
(15 A)
IG1B REVERSE BACK-UP
RELAY ACC RELAY LIGHT
CIRCUIT RELAY CIRCUIT*3*4 SWITCH*5
CIRCUIT

WHT
RED RED No. B43 No. B24 No. B36 No. B4 D23
(10 A) (20 A) (10 A) (10 A)

K20 K9 H17 H12 G3

BLU
WHT RED BRN BLU WHT
BLU
1 REAR 1 REAR
E D B CAMERA C CAMERA
ACC IG1
RED RED AUDIO STEREO ACTIVE NOISE 2 DIODE*2 ∙ USB PORT LIGHT 2 DIODE*2
REMOTE-HFL AMPLIFIER CANCELLATION YEL ∙ USB CHARGER UNIT*1 YEL
SWITCH UNIT

YEL
A3 A4 A23
+B +B IG1 WITH
AUDIO AUDIO DIODE
SUB FMVSS
AUDIO UNIT

DISP LVDS1 SH
CONT LVDS1+ LVDS1– SH Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi) VSP K LINE GND GND
E12 H4 H5 H6 K1 K2 A22 A12 A1 A2
BLK

RED RED WHT BLU LT BLU GRY GRY

BLK
A1 A4 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2
+B DISP LVDS1+ LVDS1– LVDS1 Wi-Fi SH
AUDIO CONT SH (Wi-Fi)
A CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
GND
∙ ACTIVE NOISE DATA LINK
CANCELLATION A5 CONNECTOR
UNIT (DLC)
∙ USB CHARGER
UNIT*1 GRY A35
VSP

PCM

G504 G504
 *1: M/T
*2: A/T
*3: CVT
: CAN line
FRONT : Shielding
DRIVER’S LEFT FRONT FRONT PASSENGER’S RIGHT FRONT
DOOR DOOR CENTER DOOR DOOR No. B24 (20 A)
SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER TWEETER SUBWOOFER FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 D

PNK GRY YEL GRN LT GRN WHT RED BLK BLU WHT RED BLK RED

A5 A6 A14 A15 A11 A18 A13 A12 A16 A17 A2 A4 A3

FL FL FL FL CTR CTR FR FR FR FR SUB SUB +B
SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– WOOFER+ WOOFER– AUDIO
AMP
STEREO AMPLIFIER
AUD
SWD AUD F MIX ANC ANC ANC ANC
GND +B F MIX GND F+ F– R+ R–
A1 C14 C11 C3 C10 C2 C9 C1

GRY GRN

G504
GRN GRN RED BLU BLK GRN RED WHT

A21
SWD
+B

AUDIO UNIT

CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA SH

ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V CAMERA
E16 E15 E33 E31 E13 E32 E14
GRY

BLK RED
BRN GRN YEL WHT GRY

RED BLK 3 16 15 20 10 19 9 8
SWD AUD AUD ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC
+B F MIX F MIX F+ F– R+ R– SH
2 3 6 5 4 1 GND ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA +B IG1 F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN
ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V K LINE GND AUDIO METER A_H A_L B_H B_L
REARVIEW CAMERA 14 1 11 12 4 5 4 5

LT BLU BLK RED BRN WHT RED LT BLU LT GRN

G503 A B
DATA LINK No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A)
CONNECTOR FUSE (In the FUSE (In the ∙ CAN GATEWAY ∙ CAN GATEWAY
(DLC) under-hood under-dash ∙ PCM ∙ PCM
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) *2 *1, *3
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

LEFT REAR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR

SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER TWEETER

ROOF ANTENNA
1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 (With XM)
SH ANT
BLU WHT SAT/TER (SAT/TER) +B RF IN RF SH

PNK WHT YEL BRN BLU LT GRN

ANTENNA
REAR LEAD
PNK LT BLU (XM)

A10 A9 B7 B8 A8 A7 B5 B6
SATL SATL SATL SATL SATR SATR SATR SATR 1 2
SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER–
(N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN)
STEREO AMPLIFIER BLK
AUX
AUX AUX NAVI SPDIF2 SH ANTENNA
BEEP NAVI GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF2) MAIN LEAD
C4 C12 C5 C15 C7 D1 D2

BLK
1 2

BLK
PNK GRN BLU BLU PNK BLK
ANTENNA ANTENNA
SUBLEAD REAR LEAD
(XM) (AM/FM)
GRY GRY
BLK
D11 D12 D4 D3 D7 D8 D6 C1 C4 N1 N2
AUX AUX AUX AUX RS485+ RS485– AMP SPDIF2 SH SAT/TER SH
BEEP NAVI NAVI NAVI RS485 SIG (SPDIF2) (SAT/TER)
GND SH SH
AUDIO UNIT
TUNER
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER RS485 SPDIF1 SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SH SIG (SPDIF1)
D1 D2 D9 D15 D16 D14 C3 C6

GRY

BLU PNK

RED YEL BLK BLK

WHT BLK

A10 A1 A2 A5 A7 B1 B2 C1 C2 C4
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER SPDIF1 SH ANT RF IN RF SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF1) +B

TUNER UNIT
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

No. A24 (15 A) No. B4 (10 A)

FUSE (In the FUSE (In the
under-hood under-dash
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
A C

RED BLU BLK GRY

3 2 1 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

+B ACC GND LVDS2
AUDIO LVDS2+ LVDS2– SH B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
USB CHARGER UNIT C1 C2 C3 A22 A23
G504
USB PORT C USB PORT D
(CHARGE ONLY) (CHARGE ONLY)

(With USB charger unit)

H1 H2 H3
LVDS2+ LVDS2– LVDS2
SH
AUDIO UNIT
LWC LWC LWC LWC SH
LANEWATCH CAM CAM CAM UART LWC USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3
SW VID VGND VCC AS CAM SH VBUS DATA– DATA+ GND B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
F8 F25 F7 F24 F26 F6 M5 M2 M4 M3 M1 A14 A24
GRY
PNK BLU PNK BLU
WHT BLK WHT RED GRN

GRY

PNK
3 13 12 4 5
LANEWATCH WHT/BLU
SWITCH BLU

GRN BRN BLU/ WHT/

YEL RED

WHT/BLU
4 5 1 6 2 PNK BLU PNK BLU
5 4 3 2 1
LWC LWC LWC LWC LWC
VDA VGND VCC UART SH USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3 USB3
SH VBUS DATA– DATA+ GND A25 A8 3 5
AS DA AS AS AS AS
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
LANEWATCH CAMERA NEAR FIELD CLIMATE CONTROL LEFT SIDE
COMMUNICATION UNIT UNIT BSI RADAR UNIT

(With LaneWatch) (With NFC) (With BSI)

 : Other communication line
: Shielding

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE

FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

GPS ANTENNA HFT MIC MIC ANC F ANC M SH ANC

MUTE PWR MIC+ GND MIC+8V MIC+8V M MIC
SH 7 4 2 1 8 1 2
GPS (GPS)
GRY

GRN LT BLU BLU PNK WHT BLU

GRY
J1 J2 E4 E22 E23 E6 E5
GPS SH HFT MIC MIC+ MIC SH
(GPS) MUTE PWR GND MIC

AUDIO UNIT

USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1

SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND LT GRN
G5 G4 G3 G2 G1

No. B14 (10 A)

FUSE (In the RELAY
under-dash CONTROL
fuse/relay box) MODULE
C GRY GRY
18 7 13 2
USB
HARNESS ANC F SH ANC ANC M SH ANC
BLU GRY MIC+8V F MIC MIC+8V M MIC
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
BLK
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
1 2 3 17 6
ACC ILLUMI+ GND GRY

5 2 3 1 4 USB PORT LIGHT

BLU
USB PORT A
GRY
1 2
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
G503
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

F-CAN F-CAN LIN
C_H C_L (BATT SNSR)
A20 A21 A4
CAN GATEWAY No. B43 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
E

PUR GRN BLK BRN WHT

VSA
MODULATOR- G502
CONTROL
UNIT A1 A2 A3
PUR
CABLE
REEL
GRN
C11 C14 C15
BRN

PUR GRN BLK BLU PUR

BRN BRN

E28 E10 E29 E30

7 10 12
PARK PARK F-CAN F-CAN
BUSY BUSY C_H C_L STRG STRG +B
GND SW LIN
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH
USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2
SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
G10 G9 G8 G7 G6 G10 G9 G8 G7 G6

USB
HARNESS

USB
5 3 2 4 1 HARNESS

USB
SUBHARNESS

5 3 2 1 4 5 2 3 1 4

USB PORT B USB PORT B

(M/T) (A/T, CVT)

Audio and Visual System Circuit Diagram

With Auto Idle Stop System

: Other communication line

UNDER-HOOD : Shielding
FUSE/RELAY BOX
12 VOLT
BATTERY No. A5-5
(30 A)
BODY CONTROL
YEL MODULE
No. A1
(125 A) No. A4-2
(70 A)
BLU
No. C2 (15 A)
FUSE (In the No. A4-4
fuse/relay (60 A) PNK TAN
holder A) GRN
G No. A24
(15 A) D2 E1 D4 H2 H11

IG1B
GRN No. A45 RELAY ACC
(30 A) CIRCUIT RELAY
RED CIRCUIT

B
No. B43 No. B24 No. B36 No. B4
BRN (10 A) (20 A) (10 A) (10 A)
∙ ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION
UNIT
K20 K9 H17 H12 UNDER-DASH
∙ USB CHARGER FUSE/RELAY BOX
UNIT BLU
WHT RED BRN

C D E F

AUDIO STEREO ∙ ACTIVE NOISE ∙ USB CHARGER

REMOTE-HFL AMPLIFIER CANCELLATION UNIT
SWITCH UNIT ∙ DC-DC
BRN BRN ∙ TELEMATICS CONVERTER
CONTROL UNIT ACC RELAY

A
A3
+B
TELEMATICS BACKUP2
CONTROL UNIT SUB
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT

DISP LVDS1 SH
CONT LVDS1+ LVDS1– SH Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi) VSP K LINE GND GND
E12 H4 H5 H6 K1 K2 A22 A12 A1 A2
BLK

BRN WHT BLU LT BLU GRY GRY

BLK
A1 A4 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2
+B DISP LVDS1+ LVDS1– LVDS1 Wi-Fi SH
BACKUP2 CONT SH (Wi-Fi)
SUB
CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
GND
DATA LINK
A5 CONNECTOR
(DLC)

GRY A35
VSP

PCM

G504 G504
 : Other communication line
: Shielding
*1: Type A
*2: Type B
*3: Integrated with the dashboard wire harness
No. B4 (10 A)
DC-DC FUSE (In the
CONVERTER under-dash
fuse/relay box)
F

GRN BLU BLU

A1 A2 B2
DCDC DCDC ACC
OUT2 OUT1 UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

2 3
REVERSE
No. C4 No. C2 No. C1 DC-DC RELAY
(7.5 A) (15 A) (7.5 A) CONVERTER CIRCUIT
ACC RELAY
1 4
+B +B
AUDIO BACKUP2 ACC
SUB MAIN CUT(VST) GND
B14 B4 B15 B11 FUSE/RELAY G3
HOLDER A
PNK GRN RED BLK WHT

G 1 REAR
RED RED CAMERA
1 REAR G502 IG1
No. A45 (30 A) H CAMERA 2 DIODE*3
FUSE (In the ACC
under-hood 2 DIODE*3 YEL
fuse/relay box) TELEMATICS
CONTROL YEL
UNIT

YEL
A4 A23
+B IG1 WITH
AUDIO DIODE
SUB FMVSS
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT

USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2
SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 G10 G9 G8 G7 G6

RELAY
CONTROL
MODULE

GRY

LIGHTS
(LED) USB
ADAPTER
HOLDER
5 2 3 1 4 5 2 3 1 4

USB PORT A USB PORT B*1 1

USB PORT B (CHARGE ONLY)* 2
BLU

GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
 : CAN line
: Shielding
FRONT
DRIVER’S LEFT FRONT FRONT PASSENGER’S RIGHT FRONT No. B24 (20 A)
DOOR DOOR CENTER DOOR DOOR FUSE (In the
SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER TWEETER under-dash SUBWOOFER
fuse/relay box)
D
1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2

PNK GRY YEL GRN LT GRN WHT RED BLK BLU WHT RED RED BLK

A5 A6 A14 A15 A11 A18 A13 A12 A16 A17 A3 A2 A4

FL FL FL FL CTR CTR FR FR FR FR +B SUB SUB
SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– AUDIO WOOFER+ WOOFER–
AMP
STEREO AMPLIFIER
AUD
SWD AUD F MIX ANC ANC ANC ANC
GND +B F MIX GND F+ F– R+ R–
A1 C14 C11 C3 C10 C2 C9 C1

GRY GRN

G504
GRN GRN RED BLU BLK GRN RED WHT

A21
SWD
+B

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT

CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA SH

ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V CAMERA
E16 E15 E33 E31 E13 E32 E14
GRY

BLK RED
BRN GRN YEL WHT GRY

RED BLK 3 16 15 20 10 19 9 8
SWD AUD AUD ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC
+B F MIX F MIX F+ F– R+ R– SH
2 3 6 5 4 1 GND ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA +B IG1 F-CAN F-CAN
ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V K LINE AUDIO METER GND B_H B_L
REARVIEW CAMERA 14 11 12 1 4 5

LT BLU RED BRN BLK LT BLU LT GRN

B E G503
DATA LINK No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A)
CONNECTOR FUSE (In the FUSE (In the ∙ CAN GATEWAY
(DLC) under-hood under-dash ∙ PCM
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

LEFT REAR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR

SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER TWEETER

ROOF ANTENNA
1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
SH ANT
BLU WHT SAT/TER (SAT/TER) +B RF IN RF SH

PNK WHT YEL BRN BLU LT GRN

PNK LT BLU

A10 A9 B7 B8 A8 A7 B5 B6
SATL SATL SATL SATL SATR SATR SATR SATR 1 2
SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER–
(N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN)
STEREO AMPLIFIER BLK
AUX
AUX AUX NAVI SPDIF2 SH ANTENNA
BEEP NAVI GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF2) MAIN LEAD
C4 C12 C5 C15 C7 D1 D2 (XM)

BLK
1 2

BLK
PNK GRN BLU BLU PNK BLK
ANTENNA
SUBLEAD
(XM)
GRY GRY
BLK
D11 D12 D4 D3 D7 D8 D6 C1 C4 N1 N2
AUX AUX AUX AUX RS485+ RS485– AMP SPDIF2 SH SAT/TER SH
BEEP NAVI NAVI NAVI RS485 SIG (SPDIF2) (SAT/TER)
GND SH SH
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
TUNER
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER RS485 SPDIF1 SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SH SIG (SPDIF1)
D1 D2 D9 D15 D16 D14 C3 C6

GRY

BLU PNK

RED YEL BLK BLK

WHT BLK

A10 A1 A2 A5 A7 B1 B2 C1 C2 C4
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER SPDIF1 SH ANT RF IN RF SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF1) +B

TUNER UNIT
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

TEL
TEL/GNSS ANTENNA ANTENNA
SH
SH GPS (GPS SH
SH TEL (TEL ANT ANT TEL (TEL
GPS (GPS) ANT1 ANT1) (TEL) (TEL)) ANT2 ANT2)

J1 J2
GPS SH 1 2
(GPS)

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
SH TEL TEL TEL TEL TEL
TELEM TELEM TELEM USB USB USB USB USB
SIG+ SIG– SIG SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
F35 F17 F18 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6
GRY

GRN YEL

GRY
A12 A13 A28 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 C1 C3 C2 C4 D1 D2
TELEM TELEM SH TEL TEL TEL TEL TEL TEL SH GPS SH TEL SH
SIG+ SIG– TELEM USB USB USB USB USB ANT1 (TEL ANT (GPS ANT2 (TEL
SIG SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND ANT1) (TEL) ANT ANT2)
(TEL))
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT
 : CAN line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A22 A23

WIRELESS
CHARGER

B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
3 2
PNK BLU
PNK BLU
VSA
MODULATOR- BLU
CONTROL
UNIT PNK

PNK BLU
BRN 5 16
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L

HEAD UP
DISPLAY
BRN BRN

E10 E28
PARK PARK
BUSY BUSY
No. A45 (30 A) No. B36 (10 A) BODY
FUSE (In the FUSE (In the DC-DC AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONTROL
under-hood under-dash CONVERTER MODULE
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) ACC RELAY ECALL ECALL SH
-NAVI -NAVI ECALL-NAVI
A E H MIC+ MIC– MIC B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
E23 E6 E5 A14 A24
GRY

PNK BLU PNK BLU PNK BLU

BRN BRN RED YEL BRN

PNK
A17 A18 A2 A25 A26
BLU
+B IG1 ACC ECALL ECALL
BACKUP2 METER CUT(VST) -NAVI -NAVI
SUB MIC+ MIC–
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT PNK BLU
GND CDS B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A6 A29 A23 A22
BLU

GRY PUR PNK

PNK BLU PNK BLU

A1
CDS A25 A8 3 5
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
G504 SRS UNIT
CLIMATE CONTROL LEFT SIDE
UNIT BSI RADAR UNIT
 : Shielding

TELEMATICS SWITCH MODULE

SYSTEM STATUS
INDICATOR (LED)
100 Ω 300 Ω

2.7 kΩ
ASSIST LINK

E-CALL E-CALL LIGHT

LED LED E-CALL E-CALL (LED x 2) ILL–
GREEN RED SW+ SW– ILLUMI+ (LED) GND
4 5 2 1 7 6 3

BRN LT GRN WHT LT BLU GRY BLU BLK

RELAY GAUGE
CONTROL CONTROL G501
MODULE MODULE

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE

FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

MIC MIC HFT ANC F ANC M SH ANC

PWR MIC+ GND MUTE MIC+8V MIC+8V M MIC
4 2 1 7 8 1 2
GRY

BLU

LT BLU BLU PNK GRN WHT

J LT GRN

AUDIO-
NAVIGATION
UNIT
GRY GRY GRY
A21 A20 A4 A5 A10 A9 A8 A7 18 7 2 13
E-CALL E-CALL E-CALL E-CALL MIC MIC+ MIC SH ANC F SH ANC SH ANC ANC M
LED LED SW+ SW– PWR GND MIC MIC+8V F MIC M MIC MIC+8V
GREEN RED ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
17 6
GRY

BLU

GRY
1 2
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2 LIN
C_H C_L LVDS2+ LVDS2– SH (BATT SNSR)
A20 A21 C1 C2 C3 A4
CAN GATEWAY No. B43 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
C

PUR GRN BLK BRN WHT

G502

A1 A2 A3
PUR
CABLE
FRONT REEL
HFL-ANC GRN
MICROPHONE C11 C14 C15

J
PUR GRN BLK BLU PUR

GRN

E4 E29 E30 H1 H2 H3
HFT 7 10 12
F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2+ LVDS2– LVDS2
MUTE C_H C_L SH STRG STRG +B
GND SW LIN
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT

AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH

No. A24 (15 A) No. B4 (10 A)

FUSE (In the FUSE (In the
under-hood under-dash
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
B F

RED BLU BLK GRY

3 2 1
+B ACC GND
AUDIO
USB CHARGER UNIT
G504
USB PORT C USB PORT D
(CHARGE ONLY) (CHARGE ONLY)

Without Auto Idle Stop System

 *: Integrated with the dashboard wire harness
UNDER-HOOD : Other communication line
FUSE/RELAY BOX : Shielding
12 VOLT
BATTERY No. A5-5
(30 A)
BODY CONTROL
YEL MODULE
No. A1
(125 A)
No. A4-2
(70 A)
BLU
No. A4-4
(60 A) PNK TAN
GRN
No. A35 UNDER-DASH
(7.5 A) D2 E1 D4 H2 H11 FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. A24 IG1B REVERSE
(15 A) RELAY ACC RELAY
CIRCUIT RELAY CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT

No. B43 No. B24 No. B36 No. B4

(10 A) (20 A) (10 A) (10 A)

K20 K9 H17 H12 G3

BLU
RED RED WHT RED BRN BLU WHT
BLU C
1 REAR 1 REAR
CAMERA CAMERA
E D B ACC ∙ TELEMATICS IG1
2 DIODE* CONTROL UNIT 2 DIODE*
∙ USB CHARGER
AUDIO STEREO ∙ ACTIVE NOISE YEL UNIT YEL
RED RED REMOTE-HFL AMPLIFIER CANCELLATION
SWITCH UNIT
∙ TELEMATICS
CONTROL UNIT YEL

A3 A4 A23
+B +B IG1 WITH
AUDIO AUDIO DIODE
SUB FMVSS
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT

DISP LVDS1 SH
CONT LVDS1+ LVDS1– SH Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi) VSP K LINE GND GND
E12 H4 H5 H6 K1 K2 A22 A12 A1 A2
BLK

RED RED WHT BLU LT BLU GRY GRY

BLK
A1 A4 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2
+B DISP LVDS1+ LVDS1– LVDS1 Wi-Fi SH
AUDIO CONT SH (Wi-Fi)
A CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
GND
∙ ACTIVE NOISE DATA LINK
CANCELLATION A5 CONNECTOR
UNIT (DLC)
∙ TELEMATICS
CONTROL UNIT GRY A35
∙ USB CHARGER
UNIT VSP

PCM

G504 G504
 : CAN line
: Shielding
FRONT
DRIVER’S LEFT FRONT FRONT PASSENGER’S RIGHT FRONT No. B24 (20 A)
DOOR DOOR CENTER DOOR DOOR FUSE (In the
SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER TWEETER under-dash SUBWOOFER
fuse/relay box)
D
1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2

PNK GRY YEL GRN LT GRN WHT RED BLK BLU WHT RED RED BLK

A5 A6 A14 A15 A11 A18 A13 A12 A16 A17 A3 A2 A4

FL FL FL FL CTR CTR FR FR FR FR +B SUB SUB
SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– AUDIO WOOFER+ WOOFER–
AMP
STEREO AMPLIFIER
AUD
SWD AUD F MIX ANC ANC ANC ANC
GND +B F MIX GND F+ F– R+ R–
A1 C14 C11 C3 C10 C2 C9 C1

GRY GRN

G504
GRN GRN RED BLU BLK GRN RED WHT

A21
SWD
+B

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT

CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA SH

ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V CAMERA
E16 E15 E33 E31 E13 E32 E14
GRY

BLK RED
BRN GRN YEL WHT GRY

RED BLK 3 16 15 20 10 19 9 8
SWD AUD AUD ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC
+B F MIX F MIX F+ F– R+ R– SH
2 3 6 5 4 1 GND ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA +B IG1 F-CAN F-CAN
ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V K LINE AUDIO METER GND A_H A_L
REARVIEW CAMERA 14 11 12 1 4 5

LT BLU RED BRN BLK WHT RED

A B G503
DATA LINK No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A)
CONNECTOR FUSE (In the FUSE (In the ∙ CAN GATEWAY
(DLC) under-hood under-dash ∙ PCM
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

LEFT REAR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR

SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER TWEETER

ROOF ANTENNA
1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 (With XM)
SH ANT
BLU WHT SAT/TER (SAT/TER) +B RF IN RF SH

PNK WHT YEL BRN BLU LT GRN

PNK LT BLU

A10 A9 B7 B8 A8 A7 B5 B6
SATL SATL SATL SATL SATR SATR SATR SATR 1 2
SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER–
(N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN)
STEREO AMPLIFIER BLK
AUX
AUX AUX NAVI SPDIF2 SH ANTENNA
BEEP NAVI GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF2) MAIN LEAD
C4 C12 C5 C15 C7 D1 D2 (XM)

BLK
1 2

BLK
PNK GRN BLU BLU PNK BLK
ANTENNA
SUBLEAD
(XM)
GRY GRY
BLK
D11 D12 D4 D3 D7 D8 D6 C1 C4 N1 N2
AUX AUX AUX AUX RS485+ RS485– AMP SPDIF2 SH SAT/TER SH
BEEP NAVI NAVI NAVI RS485 SIG (SPDIF2) (SAT/TER)
GND SH SH
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
TUNER
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER RS485 SPDIF1 SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SH SIG (SPDIF1)
D1 D2 D9 D15 D16 D14 C3 C6

GRY

BLU PNK

RED YEL BLK BLK

WHT BLK

A10 A1 A2 A5 A7 B1 B2 C1 C2 C4
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER SPDIF1 SH ANT RF IN RF SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF1) +B

TUNER UNIT
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

(Without telematics control unit) (With telematics control unit)

TEL
GPS ANTENNA TEL/GNSS ANTENNA ANTENNA
SH
SH GPS (GPS SH
SH SH TEL (TEL ANT ANT TEL (TEL
GPS (GPS) GPS (GPS) ANT1 ANT1) (TEL) (TEL)) ANT2 ANT2)

J1 J2 J1 J2
GPS SH GPS SH 1 2
(GPS) (GPS)

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
SH TEL TEL TEL TEL TEL
TELEM TELEM TELEM USB USB USB USB USB
SIG+ SIG– SIG SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
F35 F17 F18 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6
GRY

GRN YEL

GRY
A12 A13 A28 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 C1 C3 C2 C4 D1 D2
TELEM TELEM SH TEL TEL TEL TEL TEL TEL SH GPS SH TEL SH
SIG+ SIG– TELEM USB USB USB USB USB ANT1 (TEL ANT (GPS ANT2 (TEL
SIG SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND ANT1) (TEL) ANT ANT2)
(TEL))
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT
 : CAN line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A22 A23

WIRELESS
CHARGER

B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
3 2
PNK BLU
PNK BLU
VSA
MODULATOR- BLU
CONTROL
UNIT PNK

PNK BLU
BRN 5 16
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L

HEAD UP
DISPLAY
BRN BRN
(With telematics control unit)
(With head up display)
E10 E28
PARK PARK
BUSY BUSY
No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A) No. B4 (10 A) BODY
FUSE (In the FUSE (In the FUSE (In the AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT CONTROL
under-hood under-dash under-dash MODULE
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) ECALL ECALL SH
-NAVI -NAVI ECALL-NAVI
A B C MIC+ MIC– MIC B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
E23 E6 E5 A14 A24
GRY

PNK BLU PNK BLU PNK BLU

RED BRN BLU YEL BRN

PNK
A17 A18 A2 A25 A26
BLU
+B IG1 ACC ECALL ECALL
AUDIO METER -NAVI -NAVI
MIC+ MIC–
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT PNK BLU
GND CDS B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A6 A29 A23 A22
BLU

GRY PUR PNK

PNK BLU PNK BLU

A1
CDS A25 A8 3 5
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
G504 SRS UNIT
CLIMATE CONTROL LEFT SIDE
UNIT BSI RADAR UNIT

(With BSI)
 : Shielding

(With telematics control unit)

TELEMATICS SWITCH MODULE

SYSTEM STATUS
INDICATOR (LED)
100 Ω 300 Ω

2.7 kΩ
ASSIST LINK

E-CALL E-CALL LIGHT

LED LED E-CALL E-CALL (LED x 2) ILL–
GREEN RED SW+ SW– ILLUMI+ (LED) GND
4 5 2 1 7 6 3

BRN LT GRN WHT LT BLU GRY BLU BLK

RELAY GAUGE
CONTROL CONTROL G501
MODULE MODULE

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE

FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

MIC MIC HFT ANC F ANC M SH ANC

PWR MIC+ GND MUTE MIC+8V MIC+8V M MIC
4 2 1 7 8 1 2
GRY

BLU

LT BLU BLU PNK GRN WHT

F LT GRN

AUDIO-
NAVIGATION
UNIT
GRY GRY GRY
A21 A20 A4 A5 A10 A9 A8 A7 18 7 2 13
E-CALL E-CALL E-CALL E-CALL MIC MIC+ MIC SH ANC F SH ANC SH ANC ANC M
LED LED SW+ SW– PWR GND MIC MIC+8V F MIC M MIC MIC+8V
GREEN RED ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
17 6
(Without telematics control unit) GRY

LT BLU BLU PNK BLU

GRY
E22 E23 E6 E5 GRY
MIC MIC+ MIC SH 1 2
PWR GND MIC ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding
*1: Type A
*2: Type B

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2 LIN
C_H C_L LVDS2+ LVDS2– SH (BATT SNSR)
A20 A21 C1 C2 C3 A4
CAN GATEWAY No. B43 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
E

PUR GRN BLK BRN WHT

G502

A1 A2 A3
PUR
CABLE
FRONT REEL
HFL-ANC GRN
MICROPHONE C11 C14 C15
F

PUR GRN BLK BLU PUR

GRN

E4 E29 E30 H1 H2 H3
HFT 7 10 12
F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2+ LVDS2– LVDS2
MUTE C_H C_L SH STRG STRG +B
GND SW LIN
AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH
USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2
SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 G10 G9 G8 G7 G6

RELAY
CONTROL
MODULE

GRY

LIGHTS
(LED) USB
ADAPTER
HOLDER
5 2 3 1 4 5 2 3 1 4

USB PORT A USB PORT B*1 1

USB PORT B (CHARGE ONLY)* 2
BLU

GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

No. A24 (15 A) No. B4 (10 A)

FUSE (In the FUSE (In the
under-hood under-dash
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
A C

RED BLU BLK GRY

3 2 1
+B ACC GND
AUDIO
USB CHARGER UNIT
G504
USB PORT C USB PORT D
(CHARGE ONLY) (CHARGE ONLY)

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
LWC LWC LWC LWC SH
CAM CAM CAM UART LWC LANEWATCH
VID VGND VCC AS CAM SW
F25 F7 F24 F26 F6 F8
GRY

BLK WHT RED GRN WHT

GRY

3 13 12 4 5
WHT/BLU LANEWATCH
SWITCH
GRN BRN BLU/ WHT/
YEL RED

WHT/BLU
4 5 1 6 2
LWC LWC LWC LWC LWC
VDA VGND VCC UART SH
AS DA AS AS AS AS

LANEWATCH CAMERA

(With LANEWATCH)
Audio and Visual System Circuit Diagram

With Auto Idle Stop System

: Other communication line

UNDER-HOOD : Shielding
FUSE/RELAY BOX
12 VOLT
BATTERY No. A5-5
(30 A)
YEL
BODY CONTROL
MODULE
No. A1
(125 A)
No. C2 (15 A) No. A4-4
FUSE (In the (60 A)
fuse/relay GRN
holder A)
PNK TAN
D No. A24
(15 A)
D2 D4 H2 H11
GRN No. A45
(30 A)
RED
IG1B
RELAY ACC
A CIRCUIT RELAY
CIRCUIT
BRN
∙ ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION
UNIT
∙ USB CHARGER No. B43 No. B36 No. B4
UNIT (10 A) (10 A) (10 A)

K20 H17 H12 UNDER-DASH

FUSE/RELAY BOX

WHT BRN BLU

E B C

AUDIO ACTIVE NOISE ∙ USB CHARGER

REMOTE-HFL CANCELLATION UNIT
SWITCH UNIT ∙ DC-DC
BRN CONVERTER
ACC RELAY

A3
+B
BACKUP2
SUB
AUDIO UNIT

DISP LVDS1 SH
CONT LVDS1+ LVDS1– SH Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi) VSP K LINE GND GND
E12 H4 H5 H6 K1 K2 A22 A12 A1 A2
BLK

BRN WHT BLU LT BLU GRY GRY

BLK
A1 A4 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2
+B DISP LVDS1+ LVDS1– LVDS1 Wi-Fi SH
BACKUP2 CONT SH (Wi-Fi)
SUB
CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
GND
DATA LINK
A5 CONNECTOR
(DLC)

GRY A35
VSP

PCM

G504 G504
 : Other communication line
: Shielding
*1: Type A
*2: Type B
*3: Integrated with the dashboard wire harness
No. B4 (10 A)
DC-DC FUSE (In the
CONVERTER under-dash
fuse/relay box)
C

GRN BLU BLU

A1 A2 B2
DCDC DCDC ACC
OUT2 OUT1 UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

2 3
REVERSE
No. C4 No. C2 No. C1 DC-DC RELAY
(7.5 A) (15 A) (7.5 A) CONVERTER CIRCUIT
ACC RELAY
1 4
+B +B
AUDIO BACKUP2 ACC
SUB MAIN CUT(VST) GND
B14 B4 B15 B11 FUSE/RELAY G3
HOLDER A
PNK GRN RED BLK WHT

D 1 REAR 1 REAR
CAMERA CAMERA
ACC G502 IG1
No. A45 (30 A) 2 DIODE*3 2 DIODE*3
FUSE (In the
under-hood YEL YEL
fuse/relay box)

YEL

A4 A23
+B IG1 WITH
AUDIO DIODE
SUB FMVSS
AUDIO UNIT

USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2
SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 G10 G9 G8 G7 G6

RELAY
CONTROL
MODULE

GRY

LIGHTS
(LED) USB
ADAPTER
HOLDER
5 2 3 1 4 5 2 3 1 4

USB PORT A USB PORT B*1 1

USB PORT B (CHARGE ONLY)* 2
BLU

GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

ROOF ANTENNA

ANT
+B RF IN RF SH

(With front tweeter) (With rear tweeter)

LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR

TWEETER TWEETER TWEETER TWEETER

2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1

PNK GRY RED BLK BLU WHT YEL BRN

FRONT
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S
DOOR DOOR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR
SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

PNK GRY RED BLK BLU WHT YEL BRN

A15 A16 A17 A18 A5 A6 A7 A8

FL FL FR FR RL RL RR RR
SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR–

AUDIO UNIT
TUNER
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER RS485 SPDIF1 SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SH SIG (SPDIF1)
D1 D2 D9 D15 D16 D14 C1 C2

GRY

BLU PNK

RED YEL BLK BLK

WHT BLK

A10 A1 A2 A5 A7 B1 B2 C1 C2 C4
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER SPDIF1 SH ANT RF IN RF SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF1) +B

TUNER UNIT
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

CAN GATEWAY
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2
C_H C_L LVDS2+ LVDS2– SH
A20 A21 C1 C2 C3

PUR GRN

GRN

PUR

PUR GRN

E29 E30 H1 H2 H3
F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2+ LVDS2– LVDS2
C_H C_L SH

AUDIO UNIT

No. A24 (15 A) No. B4 (10 A)

FUSE (In the FUSE (In the
under-hood under-dash
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
A C

RED BLU BLK GRY

3 2 1
+B ACC GND
AUDIO
USB CHARGER UNIT
G504
USB PORT C USB PORT D
(CHARGE ONLY) (CHARGE ONLY)

(With USB charger unit)

 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

LIN B- B-
(BATT SNSR) CAN_H CAN_L
A4 A22 A23 (With BSI)
No. B43 (10 A)
FUSE (In the LEFT SIDE
under-dash BSI RADAR UNIT GPS ANTENNA
fuse/relay box) PNK BLU B- B- SH
E CAN_H CAN_L GPS (GPS)
3 5

PNK BLU
BLK BRN WHT
VSA
G502 MODULATOR-
PNK CONTROL
A1 A2 A3 UNIT
BLU
CABLE
REEL
PNK BLU
C11 C14 C15
BRN
A25 A8
B- B-
BLK BLU PUR CAN_H CAN_L
PNK BLU
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT BRN BRN

A14 A24 J1 J2 E10 E28

7 10 12
B- B- GPS SH PARK PARK
STRG STRG +B CAN_H CAN_L (GPS) BUSY BUSY
GND SW LIN
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH AUD
ANC ANC ANC ANC SWD AUD F MIX
F+ F– R+ R– +B F MIX GND
E19 E20 E1 E2 A21 E21 E3

BLK GRN RED WHT GRN RED BLU

GRY
20 10 19 9 8 3 16 15
ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC SWD AUD AUD
F+ F– R+ R– SH +B F MIX F MIX
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT GND
+B IG1 F-CAN F-CAN
AUDIO METER K LINE GND B_H B_L
11 12 14 1 4 5

RED BRN LT BLU BLK LT BLU LT GRN

A B
No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A) DATA LINK G503 ∙ CAN GATEWAY
FUSE (In the FUSE (In the CONNECTOR ∙ PCM
under-hood under-dash (DLC)
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
 : Shielding

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE

FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

HFT MIC MIC ANC F ANC M SH ANC

MUTE PWR MIC+ GND MIC+8V MIC+8V M MIC
7 4 2 1 8 1 2
GRY

GRN LT BLU BLU PNK WHT BLU

GRY
E4 E22 E23 E6 E5
HFT MIC MIC+ MIC SH
MUTE PWR GND MIC

AUDIO UNIT

CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA SH

ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V CAMERA LT GRN
E16 E15 E33 E31 E13 E32 E14
GRY

BLK RED
BRN GRN YEL WHT
GRY GRY
RED BLK 18 7 13 2
ANC F SH ANC ANC M SH ANC
MIC+8V F MIC MIC+8V M MIC
2 3 6 5 4 1
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA ANC R SH ANC
ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V MIC+8V R MIC
REARVIEW CAMERA 17 6
GRY

BLU

GRY
1 2
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

Without Auto Idle Stop System

 *: Integrated with
UNDER-HOOD the dashboard wire harness
FUSE/RELAY BOX : Other communication line
12 VOLT
BATTERY No. A5-5 : Shielding
(30 A)
YEL
BODY CONTROL
MODULE
No. A1
(125 A)

No. A4-4
(60 A)
GRN PNK TAN
No. A35
(7.5 A) UNDER-DASH
D2 D4 H2 H11 FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. A24
(15 A)
IG1B REVERSE
RELAY ACC RELAY
CIRCUIT RELAY CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT

RED RED No. B43 No. B36 No. B4

(10 A) (10 A) (10 A)

K20 H17 H12 G3

BLU
WHT BRN BLU WHT
BLU
C
1 REAR 1 REAR
E B CAMERA CAMERA
ACC USB IG1
RED RED AUDIO ACTIVE NOISE 2 DIODE* CHARGER 2 DIODE*
REMOTE-HFL CANCELLATION YEL UNIT YEL
SWITCH UNIT

YEL
A3 A4 A23
+B +B IG1 WITH
AUDIO AUDIO DIODE
SUB FMVSS
AUDIO UNIT

DISP LVDS1 SH
CONT LVDS1+ LVDS1– SH Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi) VSP K LINE GND GND
E12 H4 H5 H6 K1 K2 A22 A12 A1 A2
BLK

RED RED WHT BLU LT BLU GRY GRY

BLK
A1 A4 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2
+B DISP LVDS1+ LVDS1– LVDS1 Wi-Fi SH
AUDIO CONT SH (Wi-Fi)
A CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
GND
∙ ACTIVE NOISE DATA LINK
CANCELLATION A5 CONNECTOR
UNIT (DLC)
∙ USB CHARGER
UNIT GRY A35
VSP

PCM

G504 G504
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

ROOF ANTENNA
(With XM)
SH ANT
SAT/TER (SAT/TER) +B RF IN RF SH

LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR

TWEETER TWEETER TWEETER TWEETER

2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2

PNK GRY RED BLK BLU WHT YEL BRN

BLK
FRONT
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S ANTENNA
DOOR DOOR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR MAIN
SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER LEAD
(XM)

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 BLK
1 2

BLK
PNK GRY RED BLK BLU WHT YEL BRN
ANTENNA
SUBLEAD
(XM)

BLK
A15 A16 A17 A18 A5 A6 A7 A8 N1 N2
FL FL FR FR RL RL RR RR SAT/TER SH
SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– (SAT/TER)

AUDIO UNIT
TUNER
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER RS485 SPDIF1 SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SH SIG (SPDIF1)
D1 D2 D9 D15 D16 D14 C1 C2

GRY

BLU PNK

RED YEL BLK BLK

WHT BLK

A10 A1 A2 A5 A7 B1 B2 C1 C2 C4
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER SPDIF1 SH ANT RF IN RF SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF1) +B

TUNER UNIT
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

(With CAN gateway)

CAN GATEWAY
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (Without CAN gateway)
F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2 F-CAN F-CAN
C_H C_L LVDS2+ LVDS2– SH A_H A_L
A20 A21 C1 C2 C3 A20 A21 ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION
UNIT

PUR GRN WHT RED

D E

WHT RED

GRN RED

PUR WHT

WHT RED
A37 A36
F-CAN F-CAN
A_H A_L
PUR GRN WHT RED
PCM

E29 E30 H1 H2 H3 E29 E30

F-CAN F-CAN LVDS2+ LVDS2– LVDS2 F-CAN F-CAN
C_H C_L SH A_H A_L

AUDIO UNIT
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

LIN B- B-
(BATT SNSR) CAN_H CAN_L
A4 A22 A23 (With BSI)
No. B43 (10 A)
FUSE (In the LEFT SIDE WIRELESS
under-dash BSI RADAR UNIT CHARGER GPS ANTENNA
fuse/relay box) PNK BLU B- B- B- B- SH
F CAN_H CAN_L CAN_H CAN_L GPS (GPS)
3 5 3 2

PNK BLU PNK BLU

BLK BRN WHT
VSA
G502 MODULATOR-
PNK CONTROL
A1 A2 A3 UNIT
BLU
CABLE
REEL
PNK BLU
C11 C14 C15
BRN
A25 A8
B- B-
BLK BLU PUR CAN_H CAN_L
PNK BLU
CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT BRN BRN

A14 A24 J1 J2 E10 E28

7 10 12
B- B- GPS SH PARK PARK
STRG STRG +B CAN_H CAN_L (GPS) BUSY BUSY
GND SW LIN
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH AUD
ANC ANC ANC ANC SWD AUD F MIX
F+ F– R+ R– +B F MIX GND
E19 E20 E1 E2 A21 E21 E3

BLK GRN RED WHT GRN RED BLU

GRY
20 10 19 9 8 3 16 15
ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC SWD AUD AUD
F+ F– R+ R– SH +B F MIX F MIX
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT GND
+B IG1 F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN
AUDIO METER K LINE GND A_H A_L A_H A_L
11 12 14 1 4 5 4 5

RED BRN LT BLU BLK WHT RED WHT RED

D E
A B
No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A) DATA LINK G503 ∙ AUDIO UNIT CAN GATEWAY
FUSE (In the FUSE (In the CONNECTOR ∙ GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
under-hood under-dash (DLC) ∙ PCM
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
(CVT) (A/T)
 : Shielding

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE

FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

HFT MIC MIC ANC F ANC M SH ANC

MUTE PWR MIC+ GND MIC+8V MIC+8V M MIC
7 4 2 1 8 1 2
GRY

GRN LT BLU BLU PNK WHT BLU

GRY
E4 E22 E23 E6 E5
HFT MIC MIC+ MIC SH
MUTE PWR GND MIC

AUDIO UNIT

CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA SH

ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V CAMERA LT GRN
E16 E15 E33 E31 E13 E32 E14
GRY

BLK RED
BRN GRN YEL WHT
GRY GRY
RED BLK 18 7 13 2
ANC F SH ANC ANC M SH ANC
MIC+8V F MIC MIC+8V M MIC
2 3 6 5 4 1
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA ANC R SH ANC
ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V MIC+8V R MIC
REARVIEW CAMERA 17 6
GRY

BLU

GRY
1 2
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
 : Other communication line
: Shielding
*1: Type A
*2: Type B

No. A24 (15 A) No. B4 (10 A)

FUSE (In the FUSE (In the
under-hood under-dash
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
A C

RED BLU BLK GRY

3 2 1
+B ACC GND
AUDIO
USB CHARGER UNIT
G504
USB PORT C USB PORT D
(CHARGE ONLY) (CHARGE ONLY)

AUDIO UNIT

USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2
SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 G10 G9 G8 G7 G6

RELAY
CONTROL
MODULE

GRY

LIGHTS
(LED) USB
ADAPTER
HOLDER
5 2 3 1 4 5 2 3 1 4

USB PORT A USB PORT B*1 1

USB PORT B (CHARGE ONLY)* 2
BLU

GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
Audio and Visual System Circuit Diagram

With Auto Idle Stop System

: Other communication line
: Shielding
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
12 VOLT
BATTERY No. A5-5
(30 A)
YEL

No. A1 BODY CONTROL

(125 A) MODULE
No. A4-2
(70 A)
No. C2 (15 A) BLU
FUSE (In the No. A4-4
fuse/relay (60 A)
holder A) GRN
PNK TAN
No. A24
F (15 A)
D2 E1 D4 H2 H11

GRN No. A45

(30 A) RED
IG1B
RELAY ACC
A CIRCUIT RELAY
CIRCUIT
BRN ∙ ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION
UNIT
∙ USB CHARGER No. B43 No. B24 No. B36 No. B4
UNIT (10 A) (20 A) (10 A) (10 A)

K20 K9 H17 H12 UNDER-DASH

BLU FUSE/RELAY BOX

WHT RED BRN

E D B C

AUDIO STEREO ACTIVE NOISE ∙ USB CHARGER

REMOTE-HFL AMPLIFIER CANCELLATION UNIT
SWITCH UNIT ∙ DC-DC
BRN CONVERTER
ACC RELAY

A3
+B
BACKUP2
SUB
AUDIO UNIT

DISP LVDS1 SH
CONT LVDS1+ LVDS1– SH Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi) VSP K LINE GND GND
E12 H4 H5 H6 K1 K2 A22 A12 A1 A2
BLK

BRN WHT BLU LT BLU GRY GRY

BLK
A1 A4 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2
+B DISP LVDS1+ LVDS1– LVDS1 Wi-Fi SH
BACKUP2 CONT SH (Wi-Fi)
SUB
CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
GND
DATA LINK
A5 CONNECTOR
(DLC)

GRY A35
VSP

PCM

G504 G504
 : Other communication line
: Shielding
*1: Type A
*2: Type B
*3: Integrated with the dashboard wire harness
No. B4 (10 A)
DC-DC FUSE (In the
CONVERTER under-dash
fuse/relay box)
C

GRN BLU BLU

A1 A2 B2
DCDC DCDC ACC
OUT2 OUT1 UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX

2 3
REVERSE
No. C4 No. C2 No. C1 DC-DC RELAY
(7.5 A) (15 A) (7.5 A) CONVERTER CIRCUIT
ACC RELAY
1 4
+B +B
AUDIO BACKUP2 ACC
SUB MAIN CUT(VST) GND
B14 B4 B15 B11 FUSE/RELAY G3
HOLDER A
PNK GRN RED BLK WHT

F 1 REAR 1 REAR
CAMERA CAMERA
ACC G502 IG1
No. A45 (30 A) 2 DIODE*3 2 DIODE*3
FUSE (In the
under-hood YEL YEL
fuse/relay box)

YEL

A4 A23
+B IG1 WITH
AUDIO DIODE
SUB FMVSS
AUDIO UNIT

USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2
SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 G10 G9 G8 G7 G6

RELAY
CONTROL
MODULE

GRY

LIGHTS
(LED) USB
ADAPTER
HOLDER
5 2 3 1 4 5 2 3 1 4

USB PORT A USB PORT B*1 1

USB PORT B (CHARGE ONLY)* 2
BLU

GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
 : CAN line
: Shielding
FRONT
DRIVER’S LEFT FRONT FRONT PASSENGER’S RIGHT FRONT
DOOR DOOR CENTER DOOR DOOR No. B24 (20 A)
SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER TWEETER SUBWOOFER FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 D

PNK GRY YEL GRN LT GRN WHT RED BLK BLU WHT RED BLK RED

A5 A6 A14 A15 A11 A18 A13 A12 A16 A17 A2 A4 A3

FL FL FL FL CTR CTR FR FR FR FR SUB SUB +B
SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– WOOFER+ WOOFER– AUDIO
AMP
STEREO AMPLIFIER
AUD
SWD AUD F MIX ANC ANC ANC ANC
GND +B F MIX GND F+ F– R+ R–
A1 C14 C11 C3 C10 C2 C9 C1

GRY GRN

G504
GRN GRN RED BLU BLK GRN RED WHT

A21
SWD
+B

AUDIO UNIT

CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA SH

ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V CAMERA
E16 E15 E33 E31 E13 E32 E14
GRY
GRY
BLK RED
BRN GRN YEL WHT 3 16 15 20 10 19 9 8
SWD AUD AUD ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC
RED BLK +B F MIX F MIX F+ F– R+ R– SH
GND ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
2 3 6 5 4 1 +B IG1 F-CAN F-CAN
K LINE GND AUDIO METER B_H B_L
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA
ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V 14 1 11 12 4 5

REARVIEW CAMERA
LT BLU BLK RED BRN LT BLU LT GRN

G503 A B
DATA LINK No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A)
CONNECTOR FUSE (In the FUSE (In the ∙ CAN GATEWAY
(DLC) under-hood under-dash ∙ PCM
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

LEFT REAR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR

SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER TWEETER

ROOF ANTENNA
1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 (With XM)
SH ANT
BLU WHT SAT/TER (SAT/TER) +B RF IN RF SH

PNK WHT YEL BRN BLU LT GRN

PNK LT BLU

A10 A9 B7 B8 A8 A7 B5 B6
SATL SATL SATL SATL SATR SATR SATR SATR 1 2
SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER–
(N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN)
STEREO AMPLIFIER BLK
AUX
AUX AUX NAVI SPDIF2 SH ANTENNA
BEEP NAVI GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF2) MAIN LEAD
C4 C12 C5 C15 C7 D1 D2

BLK
1 2

BLK
PNK GRN BLU BLU PNK BLK
ANTENNA
SUBLEAD
(XM)
GRY GRY
BLK
D11 D12 D4 D3 D7 D8 D6 C1 C4 N1 N2
AUX AUX AUX AUX RS485+ RS485– AMP SPDIF2 SH SAT/TER SH
BEEP NAVI NAVI NAVI RS485 SIG (SPDIF2) (SAT/TER)
GND SH SH
AUDIO UNIT
TUNER
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER RS485 SPDIF1 SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SH SIG (SPDIF1)
D1 D2 D9 D15 D16 D14 C3 C6

GRY

BLU PNK

RED YEL BLK BLK

WHT BLK

A10 A1 A2 A5 A7 B1 B2 C1 C2 C4
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER SPDIF1 SH ANT RF IN RF SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF1) +B

TUNER UNIT
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE

FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

GPS ANTENNA HFT MIC MIC ANC F ANC M SH ANC

MUTE PWR MIC+ GND MIC+8V MIC+8V M MIC
SH 7 4 2 1 8 1 2
GPS (GPS)
GRY

GRN LT BLU BLU PNK WHT BLU

GRY
J1 J2 E4 E22 E23 E6 E5
GPS SH HFT MIC MIC+ MIC SH
(GPS) MUTE PWR GND MIC

AUDIO UNIT

LT GRN

No. A24 (15 A) No. B4 (10 A) GRY GRY

FUSE (In the FUSE (In the
under-hood under-dash 18 7 13 2
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) ANC F SH ANC ANC M SH ANC
MIC+8V F MIC MIC+8V M MIC
A C
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
RED BLU BLK GRY
17 6
GRY
3 2 1
+B ACC GND BLU
AUDIO
USB CHARGER UNIT GRY
1 2
G504 ANC R SH ANC
USB PORT C USB PORT D MIC+8V R MIC
(CHARGE ONLY) (CHARGE ONLY)
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

LVDS2 F-CAN F-CAN LIN
LVDS2+ LVDS2– SH C_H C_L B-CAN_H B-CAN_L (BATT SNSR)
C1 C2 C3 A20 A21 A22 A23 A4
CAN GATEWAY No. B43 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
E

PUR GRN PUR GRN BLK BRN WHT

VSA
MODULATOR- G502
CONTROL
UNIT A1 A2 A3

CABLE
REEL

C11 C14 C15

BRN

PUR GRN BLK BLU PUR

BRN BRN

E28 E10 H1 H2 H3 E29 E30

7 10 12
PARK PARK LVDS2+ LVDS2– LVDS2 F-CAN F-CAN
BUSY BUSY SH C_H C_L STRG STRG +B
GND SW LIN
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A14 A24

PNK BLU PNK BLU

PNK

BLU

PNK BLU PNK BLU PNK BLU

3 2 A25 A8 3 5
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L B-CAN_H B-CAN_L B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
WIRELESS CLIMATE CONTROL LEFT SIDE
CHARGER UNIT BSI RADAR UNIT

Without Auto Idle Stop System

 *: Integrated with
UNDER-HOOD the dashboard wire harness
FUSE/RELAY BOX : Other communication line
12 VOLT : Shielding
BATTERY No. A5-5
(30 A)
YEL
No. A1
(125 A) BODY CONTROL
MODULE
No. A4-2
(70 A)
BLU
No. A4-4
(60 A)
GRN
PNK TAN
No. A35
(7.5 A) UNDER-DASH
D2 E1 D4 H2 H11 FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. A24
(15 A)
IG1B REVERSE
RELAY ACC RELAY
CIRCUIT RELAY CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT

RED RED No. B43 No. B24 No. B36 No. B4

(10 A) (20 A) (10 A) (10 A)

K20 K9 H17 H12 G3

BLU
WHT RED BRN BLU WHT
BLU
C
1 REAR 1 REAR
E D B CAMERA CAMERA
ACC USB IG1
RED RED AUDIO STEREO ACTIVE NOISE 2 DIODE* CHARGER 2 DIODE*
REMOTE-HFL AMPLIFIER CANCELLATION UNIT
YEL YEL
SWITCH UNIT

YEL
A3 A4 A23
+B +B IG1 WITH
AUDIO AUDIO DIODE
SUB FMVSS
AUDIO UNIT

DISP LVDS1 SH
CONT LVDS1+ LVDS1– SH Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi) VSP K LINE GND GND
E12 H4 H5 H6 K1 K2 A22 A12 A1 A2
BLK

RED RED WHT BLU LT BLU GRY GRY

BLK
A1 A4 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2
+B DISP LVDS1+ LVDS1– LVDS1 Wi-Fi SH
AUDIO CONT SH (Wi-Fi)
A CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
GND
∙ ACTIVE NOISE DATA LINK
CANCELLATION A5 CONNECTOR
UNIT (DLC)
∙ USB CHARGER
UNIT GRY A35
VSP

PCM

G504 G504
 : CAN line
FRONT : Shielding
DRIVER’S LEFT FRONT FRONT PASSENGER’S RIGHT FRONT
DOOR DOOR CENTER DOOR DOOR No. B24 (20 A)
SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER SPEAKER TWEETER SUBWOOFER FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 D

PNK GRY YEL GRN LT GRN WHT RED BLK BLU WHT RED BLK RED

A5 A6 A14 A15 A11 A18 A13 A12 A16 A17 A2 A4 A3

FL FL FL FL CTR CTR FR FR FR FR SUB SUB +B
SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– TWEETER+ TWEETER– WOOFER+ WOOFER– AUDIO
AMP
STEREO AMPLIFIER
AUD
SWD AUD F MIX ANC ANC ANC ANC
GND +B F MIX GND F+ F– R+ R–
A1 C14 C11 C3 C10 C2 C9 C1

GRY GRN

G504
GRN GRN RED BLU BLK GRN RED WHT

A21
SWD
+B

AUDIO UNIT

CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA SH

ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V CAMERA
E16 E15 E33 E31 E13 E32 E14
GRY

BLK RED
BRN GRN YEL WHT GRY

RED BLK 3 16 15 20 10 19 9 8
SWD AUD AUD ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC
+B F MIX F MIX F+ F– R+ R– SH
2 3 6 5 4 1 GND ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA +B IG1 F-CAN F-CAN
ADPT BIT0 BIT1 VCC GND V AUDIO METER GND K LINE A_H A_L
REARVIEW CAMERA 11 12 1 14 4 5

RED BRN BLK LT BLU WHT RED

A B G503
No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A) DATA LINK
FUSE (In the FUSE (In the CONNECTOR ∙ CAN GATEWAY
under-hood under-dash (DLC) ∙ PCM
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box)
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

LEFT REAR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR RIGHT REAR

SPEAKER TWEETER SPEAKER TWEETER

ROOF ANTENNA
1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1
ANT
BLU WHT +B RF IN RF SH

PNK WHT YEL BRN BLU LT GRN

PNK LT BLU

A10 A9 B7 B8 A8 A7 B5 B6
SATL SATL SATL SATL SATR SATR SATR SATR
SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER– SP+ SP– TWEETER+ TWEETER–
(N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN) (N/W IN)
STEREO AMPLIFIER
AUX
AUX AUX NAVI SPDIF2 SH
BEEP NAVI GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF2)
C4 C12 C5 C15 C7 D1 D2

PNK GRN BLU BLU PNK BLK

GRY GRY

D11 D12 D4 D3 D7 D8 D6 C1 C4
AUX AUX AUX AUX RS485+ RS485– AMP SPDIF2 SH
BEEP NAVI NAVI NAVI RS485 SIG (SPDIF2)
GND SH SH
AUDIO UNIT
TUNER
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER RS485 SPDIF1 SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SH SIG (SPDIF1)
D1 D2 D9 D15 D16 D14 C3 C6

GRY

BLU PNK

RED YEL BLK BLK

WHT BLK

A10 A1 A2 A5 A7 B1 B2 C1 C2 C4
TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER TUNER SPDIF1 SH ANT RF IN RF SH
6V 9V GND RS485+ RS485– SIG (SPDIF1) +B

TUNER UNIT
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

No. A24 (15 A) No. B4 (10 A) LVDS2
FUSE (In the FUSE (In the LVDS2+ LVDS2– SH B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
under-hood under-dash
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) C1 C2 C3 A22 A23

A C

RED BLU BLK GRY

3 2 1
+B ACC GND
AUDIO
USB CHARGER UNIT
G504
USB PORT C USB PORT D
(CHARGE ONLY) (CHARGE ONLY)
PNK BLU

3 2
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L

WIRELESS
CHARGER

H1 H2 H3
LVDS2+ LVDS2– LVDS2
SH

AUDIO UNIT

B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A14 A24

PNK BLU PNK BLU

PNK

BLU

PNK BLU PNK BLU

A25 A8 3 5
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
CLIMATE CONTROL LEFT SIDE
UNIT BSI RADAR UNIT
 : Other communication line
: Shielding

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE

FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

GPS ANTENNA HFT MIC MIC ANC F ANC M SH ANC

MUTE PWR MIC+ GND MIC+8V MIC+8V M MIC
SH 7 4 2 1 8 1 2
GPS (GPS)
GRY

GRN LT BLU BLU PNK WHT BLU

GRY
J1 J2 E4 E22 E23 E6 E5
GPS SH HFT MIC MIC+ MIC SH
(GPS) MUTE PWR GND MIC

AUDIO UNIT

LT GRN

GRY GRY
18 7 13 2
ANC F SH ANC ANC M SH ANC
MIC+8V F MIC MIC+8V M MIC
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
17 6
GRY

BLU

GRY
1 2
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding
*1: Type A
*2: Type B

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

F-CAN F-CAN LIN
C_H C_L (BATT SNSR)
A20 A21 A4
CAN GATEWAY No. B43 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
under-dash
fuse/relay box)
E

PUR GRN BLK BRN WHT

VSA
MODULATOR- G502
CONTROL
UNIT A1 A2 A3
PUR
CABLE
REEL
GRN
C11 C14 C15
BRN

PUR GRN BLK BLU PUR

BRN BRN

E28 E10 E29 E30

7 10 12
PARK PARK F-CAN F-CAN
BUSY BUSY C_H C_L STRG STRG +B
GND SW LIN
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH
USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2 USB2
SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND
G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 G10 G9 G8 G7 G6

RELAY
CONTROL
MODULE

GRY

LIGHTS
(LED) USB
ADAPTER
HOLDER
5 2 3 1 4 5 2 3 1 4

USB PORT A USB PORT B*1 1

USB PORT B (CHARGE ONLY)* 2
BLU

GAUGE
CONTROL
MODULE
Audio and Visual System Circuit Diagram

*: Integrated with the dashboard wire harness

: Other communication line
: Shielding
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
12 VOLT BODY CONTROL
BATTERY No. A5-5 MODULE
(30 A)
YEL

No. A1
(125 A)
No. A4-4
(60 A) PNK TAN
GRN
UNDER-DASH
No. A24 D2 D4 H2 H11 FUSE/RELAY BOX
(15 A)
IG1B REVERSE
RELAY ACC RELAY
CIRCUIT RELAY CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT

No. B43 No. B36 No. B4

(10 A) (10 A) (10 A)

RED
K20 H17 H12 G3
BLU
WHT BRN BLU WHT
BLU
1 REAR 1 REAR
CAMERA CAMERA
E B ACC C IG1
2 DIODE* 2 DIODE*
AUDIO ACTIVE NOISE YEL USB PORT LIGHT YEL
RED RED REMOTE-HFL CANCELLATION
SWITCH UNIT
(With multi-information
display) YEL

A3 A23
+B IG1 WITH
AUDIO DIODE
FMVSS
AUDIO UNIT

DISP LVDS1
CONT LVDS1+ LVDS1– SH GND K LINE
B20 D1 D2 D3 A1 A12

RED RED WHT GRY LT BLU

A1 A4 B1 B2 B3
+B DISP LVDS1+ LVDS1– LVDS1
AUDIO CONT SH
A CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
GND
ACTIVE NOISE DATA LINK
CANCELLATION A5 CONNECTOR
UNIT (DLC)

GRY

G504 G504
 : CAN line
: Shielding

ROOF ANTENNA

SWD SH
+B (AM/FM) AM/FM

1 3 2

BLK
FRONT
DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S
DOOR DOOR LEFT REAR RIGHT REAR ANTENNA
SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER BLK
MAIN LEAD

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 BLK
1 3 2

BLK
PNK GRY RED BLK BLU WHT YEL BRN

BLK ANTENNA
SUBLEAD

BLK
A15 A16 A17 A18 A5 A6 A7 A8 C1 C3 C2
FL FL FR FR RL RL RR RR SWD SH AM/FM
SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– SPKR+ SPKR– +B (AM/FM)

AUDIO UNIT
AUD
AUD F MIX ANC ANC ANC ANC SWD
F MIX GND F+ F– R+ R– +B
B3 B13 B11 B12 B1 B2 A21

RED BLU BLK GRN RED WHT GRN

GRY
16 15 20 10 19 9 8 3
AUD AUD ANC ANC ANC ANC ANC SWD
F MIX F MIX F+ F– R+ R– SH +B
GND ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
+B IG1 F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN
K LINE GND AUDIO METER A_H A_L B_H B_L
14 1 11 12 4 5 4 5
(Without ACC) (With ACC)
WHT RED LT BLU LT GRN

LT BLU BLK RED BRN LT BLU

CAN
GATEWAY
LT GRN
WHT RED WHT RED LT BLU LT GRN
G503 A B A37 A36 A20 A21 A39 A38
DATA LINK No. A24 (15 A) No. B36 (10 A) F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN
CONNECTOR FUSE (In the FUSE (In the A_H A_L A_H A_L B_H B_L
(DLC) under-hood under-dash GAUGE CONTROL PCM
fuse/relay box) fuse/relay box) PCM MODULE
 : CAN line
: Other communication line
: Shielding

(Without multi-information display)

AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH
AUDIO
REMOTE-HFL
SWITCH
– + SOURCE D

2670 Ω 180 Ω 270 Ω 470 Ω 1.2 kΩ 3.9 kΩ

LIGHT (LED)
10 kΩ 47 Ω 100 Ω 10 kΩ
BLU

7 10 12 6 11
A17
ILL–
(LED)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
LT GRN PUR WHT BRN BLU LIN
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L (BATT SNSR)
A22 A23 A4
CLIMATE
C1 C2 C7 C16 C15 CONTROL
UNIT
CABLE
REEL PNK BLU B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
A25 A8
A10 A9 A5 A4 A3
PNK BLU

GRY BLU LT BLU YEL WHT PNK

BLU
PNK BLU
D
PNK BLU
RELAY GAUGE
CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE MODULE
BODY CONTROL
A13 A19 A9 A14 A24 MODULE
HFT/NAVI REMOTE AUDIO B-CAN_H B-CAN_L
REMOTE SW GND REMOTE
SW SW
AUDIO UNIT
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA SH
BIT0 BIT1 ADPT VCC GND V CAMERA
F10 F11 F4 F9 F6 F5 F12 E WHT BRN BLK
G502
GRY No. B43 (10 A)
FUSE (In the
BLK RED under-dash A3 A2 A1
fuse/relay box)
GRN YEL BRN WHT
CABLE
REEL
RED BLK
C15 C14 C11

3 6 2 5 4 1
CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA CAMERA PUR BLU BLK
BIT0 BIT1 ADPT VCC GND V

REARVIEW CAMERA
12 10 7
+B STRG STRG
SW LIN GND

AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH

(With multi-information display)

 : Other communication line
: Shielding

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE

FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE

HFT MIC MIC ANC F ANC M SH ANC

MUTE PWR MIC+ GND MIC+8V MIC+8V M MIC
7 4 2 1 8 1 2
GRY

GRN LT BLU BLU PNK WHT BLU

GRY
B17 B8 B10 B7 B9
HFT MIC MIC+ MIC SH
MUTE PWR GND MIC

AUDIO UNIT

USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1 USB1

SH DATA– DATA+ VBUS GND LT GRN
E5 E4 E3 E2 E1

No. B4 (10 A)
FUSE (In the RELAY
under-dash CONTROL
fuse/relay box) MODULE
C GRY GRY
18 7 13 2
USB
HARNESS ANC F SH ANC ANC M SH ANC
BLU GRY MIC+8V F MIC MIC+8V M MIC
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION UNIT
BLK
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
1 2 3 17 6
ACC ILLUMI+ GND GRY

5 2 3 1 4 USB PORT LIGHT

BLU
USB PORT
GRY
1 2
ANC R SH ANC
MIC+8V R MIC
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
G503
Audio Remote-HFL Switch Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Audio Remote-HFL Switch 12P Connector (female terminals) (without multi-information

display)

6 5 4 3 2 1
BRN - LT - - -
BLU
12 11 10 9 8 7
WHT BLU PUR - RED LT
GRN

Cavity Terminal Name Description

1 Not used ―――
2 Not used ―――
3 Not used ―――
4 ILLUMI－(LED) Outputs illumination control signal
5 Not used ―――
6 REMOTE SW GND Audio remote-HFL switch ground
7 ILLUMI＋ Outputs illumination signal
8 ILLUMI＋ Outputs illumination signal
9 Not used ―――
10 ILLUMI－(LED) Outputs illumination control signal
11 AUDIO REMOTE SW Outputs control signal from audio remote-HFL switch
12 HFT/NAVI REMOTE SW Outputs control signal from HFL switch

Audio Remote-HFL Switch 12P Connector (female terminals) (with multi-information

display)

6 5 4 3 2 1
- GRN*3 LT *2 WHT*3 BRN*2 YEL*1
GRN
12 11 10 9 8 7
PUR RED BLU LT PNK*1 BLK
BLU

*1: With head up display

*2: With heated steering wheel
*3: With paddle shifter

Cavity Terminal Name Description

*1 HUD＋ Power source for head up dislay sub switch
1
2*2 STRG GND Ground for heated steering wheel control unit

3*3 ILLUMI－(LED) Outputs illumination control signal

4*2 HSW LIN Communication signal

*3 ILLUMI＋ Outputs illumination signal
5
6 Not used ―――
7 STRG GND Ground for audio remote-HFL switch (G502)
*1: With head up display
*2: With heated steering wheel
*3: With paddle shifter
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
*1 HUD－ Ground for head up display sub switch
8
9 ILLUMI－(LED) Outputs illumination control signal
10 STRG SW LIN Communication signal
11 ILLUMI＋ Outputs illumination signal
12 ＋B ＋B power source
*1: With head up display
*2: With heated steering wheel
*3: With paddle shifter
Audio Remote-HFL Switch Removal and Installation

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before
doing repairs or service.

1
 3.

4.

2.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

1. Driver's Airbag - Remove

2. Lower Garnish - Remove

 With heated steering wheel: Disconnect the connector.

3. Upper Garnish Assembly - Remove

4. Audio Remote-HFL Switch - Remove

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Audio Remote-HFL Switch Removal, Installation, and Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before
doing repairs or service.

1
 3.

4.

2.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

1. Driver's Airbag - Remove

2. Lower Garnish - Remove

 With heated steering wheel: Disconnect the connector.

3. Upper Garnish Assembly - Remove

4. Audio Remote-HFL Switch - Remove

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE: Test of switch is possible only without multi-information display.

1. Audio Remote-HFL Switch - Test

1. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 6 and No.

11 in each switch position according to the table.

Button Held Down Resistance

No button pressed About 10 kΩ
SOURCE About 3.7 kΩ
(CH＋) About 1.7 kΩ
(CH－) About 775 Ω
VOL＋ (VOL.UP) About 357 Ω
VOL－ (VOL.DOWN) About 99 Ω

2. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 6 and No.

12 in each switch position according to the table.

Button Held Down Resistance

SOURCE BUTTON
No button pressed About 10 kΩ
PICK-UP About 222 Ω
TALK BUTTON HANG-UP/BACK About 47 Ω
HANG-UP/BACK BUTTON
TALK About 2.2 kΩ

PICK-UP BUTTON
3. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the audio
remote-HFL switch.
Audio System Component Location Index
For relationships between signals in a system, refer to system diagram.
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH
Removal and Installation

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE

USB PORT B CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
(With USB port B) Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation

CENTER DISPLAY UNIT

Removal and Installation

GPS ANTENNA
Removal and Installation
REAR ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
ACTIVE NOISE
Removal and Installation
CANCELLATION UNIT
Removal and Installation

LANEWATCH CAMERA
(With LaneWatch)
Removal and Installation
How to Start
LaneWatch Camera Aiming

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
(With navigation)
Removal and Installation
Sensor Calibration
System Diagnostic Mode
AUDIO UNIT
(Without navigation)
Removal and Installation
System Diagnostic Mode
REARVIEW CAMERA USB CHARGER UNIT
Removal and Installation (With USB charger)
Removal and Installation

USB PORT A
 LEFT FRONT TWEETER
Removal, Installation, and Test

DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER

Removal, Installation, and Test

FRONT CENTER SPEAKER

(With stereo amplifier)
LEFT REAR TWEETER LEFT REAR SPEAKER Removal, Installation, and Test
Removal, Installation, and Test Removal, Installation, and Test
NEAR FIELD
COMMUNICATION UNIT
(With NFC)
Removal, Installation, and Test

RIGHT FRONT TWEETER

Removal, Installation, and Test

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SPEAKER

Removal, Installation, and Test

STEREO AMPLIFIER
(With stereo amplifier)
Removal and Installation

RIGHT REAR TWEETER

Removal, Installation, and Test

RIGHT REAR SPEAKER

Removal, Installation, and Test

SUBWOOFER (With stereo amplifier)

Removal, Installation, and Test
 ROOF ANTENNA (AM/FM/XM)
Removal and Installation

TUNER UNIT ANTENNA REAR LEAD (AM/FM/XM)

Removal and Installation

ANTENNA SUBLEAD (XM)

(With XM)

ANTENNA MAIN LEAD (XM)

(With XM)
Audio System Component Location Index
For relationships between signals in a system, refer to system diagram.
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH
Removal and Installation

MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE

CANCELLATION MICROPHONE Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation

CENTER DISPLAY UNIT

Removal and Installation

GPS ANTENNA
Removal and Installation

ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION UNIT
Removal and Installation

LANEWATCH CAMERA
(With LaneWatch)
Removal and Installation
How to Start
LaneWatch Camera Aiming

AUDIO-NAVIGATION UNIT
(With navigation)
Removal and Installation
Sensor Calibration
System Diagnostic Mode
AUDIO UNIT
(Without navigation)
Removal and Installation
REARVIEW CAMERA System Diagnostic Mode
Removal and Installation

USB CHARGER UNIT

(With USB charger)
Removal and Installation

REAR ACTIVE NOISE

CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation
 LEFT REAR TWEETER LEFT FRONT TWEETER
(With rear tweeter) (With front tweeter)
Removal, Installation, and Test Removal, Installation, and Test

DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER

LEFT REAR SPEAKER Removal, Installation, and Test
Removal, Installation, and Test
FRONT CENTER SPEAKER
(With stereo amplifier)
Removal, Installation, and Test

FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
Removal, Installation, and Test

RIGHT FRONT TWEETER

(With front tweeter)
Removal, Installation, and Test

STEREO AMPLIFIER
(With stereo amplifier)
Removal and Installation

RIGHT REAR TWEETER

(With rear tweeter)
Removal, Installation, and Test

RIGHT REAR SPEAKER

Removal, Installation, and Test

SUBWOOFER
(With stereo amplifier)
Removal, Installation, and Test
 ROOF ANTENNA (AM/FM/XM)
Removal and Installation

ANTENNA REAR LEAD

(AM/FM/XM)

ANTENNA MAIN LEAD (XM)

(With XM)

ANTENNA SUBLEAD (XM)

(With XM)

Type A Type B

USB PORT B USB PORT B

(Charge only)

TUNER UNIT USB PORT A USB PORT A

Removal and Installation
Audio System Component Location Index
For relationships between signals in a system, refer to system diagram.

AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH

Removal, Installation, and Test
MIDDLE ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation FRONT HFL-ANC MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation

REAR ACTIVE NOISE

CANCELLATION MICROPHONE CENTER DISPLAY UNIT
Removal and Installation Removal and Installation

ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION UNIT
Removal and Installation

LEFT REAR SPEAKER

Removal, Installation, and Test

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR

SPEAKER
Removal, Installation, and Test

AUDIO UNIT
Removal and Installation
System Diagnostic Mode

USB PORT

REARVIEW CAMERA DRIVER'S DOOR SPEAKER

Removal and Installation Removal, Installation, and Test

RIGHT REAR SPEAKER

Removal, Installation, and Test
ROOF ANTENNA (AM/FM)
Removal and Installation

ANTENNA SUBLEAD (AM/FM)

ANTENNA MAIN LEAD (AM/FM)

Audio System Description - System Diagram

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index.

Audio system components
Gauge control module, Body control module
Climate control unit
PCM

BODY
CONTROL
MODULE

PCM

CLIMATE
USB DEVICE CONTROL
UNIT

CAN B-CAN GAUGE

USB PORT TRANSCEIVER CONTROL
MODULE

*2
LIN
CENTER LVDS
DISPLAY LVDS MEDIA
TX CPU AUDIO
UNIT REMOTE-HFL
SWITCH
SYSTEM
CAMERA CPU
REARVIEW ADPT *1
CAMERA
AUDIO
REMOTE-HFL
SWITCH

FRONT
HFL-ANC
MICROPHONE

ANC F
MIC+8 V

ACTIVE NOISE
CANCELLATION
UNIT

ANC M
MIC+8 V
MIDDLE ACTIVE
NOISE
CANCELLATION
MICROPHONE

ANC R REAR ACTIVE

MIC+8 V NOISE
CANCELLATION
MICROPHONE

DSP
Bluetooth
ANTENNA FRONT
SPEAKERS
Bluetooth POWER
AMPLIFIER
LINKED Bluetooth
CUSTOMER’S MODULE REAR
DEVICE SPEAKERS

ROOF
ANTENNA
(AM/FM)

MEDIA UNIT AUDIO UNIT

*1: Without multi-information display

*2: With multi-information display

Power Supply Diagram

+B SUB
CIRCUIT

ACC ON trigger

MIC PWR

ACC ON trigger

USB1 VBUS

RC ON trigger

CAMERA VCC

POWER
AMPLIFIER

B-CAN MAIN CPU

(ILLUMI)

ACC ON trigger

SWD+B

ANT+B

GND From each circuits

Frame ground

: Application circuit to protect ground short.

Audio System Description - System Diagram

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index.

Audio system components
Gauge control module, Body control module
Climate control unit
PCM
LaneWatch components

NOTE: Refer to the navigation system section for audio-navigation unit system diagram.

Without stereo amplifier

FRONT FRONT REAR REAR

SPEAKERS TWEETERS SPEAKERS TWEETERS

FL/FR RL/RR ROOF

ANTENNA
(AM/FM)
CLIMATE POWER AMPLIFIER
CONTROL AM/FM
UNIT
SPDIF1
DSP
BODY TUNER UNIT
CONTROL RS485
MODULE

AUDIO ∙ VSP
REMOTE-HFL ∙ BACK LT
SWITCH
COOLING FAN ∙ PARK BUSY VEHICLE
SIGNALS
LIN
B-CAN CAN
TRANSCEIVER *
GAUGE
CONTROL AUDIO MCU
MODULE LWC SW LaneWatch
F-CAN CAN SWITCH
TRANSCEIVER

LVDS2

DISP CONT

PCM

GYRO SENSOR CENTER

* DISPLAY UNIT

LaneWatch LWC CAM VID SD CARD

CAMERA
VIDEO LVDS1
DECODER
CAMERA V
REARVIEW
CAMERA CAMERA BIT

MIC+ ECHO/NOISE
HFL CANCELLER
MICROPHONE HFT MUTE GPS ANT
APPLICATION
CPU GPS ANTENNA

USB1 USB
USB PORT A DEVICE

USB USB2 USB

USB PORT C USB PORT B DEVICE
DEVICE

USB CHARGER UNIT

USB
DEVICE USB PORT D

(With USB charger unit) ROOF

SAT/TER
ANTENNA
(XM)

(With XM)

AUDIO UNIT
*: With LaneWatch
With stereo amplifier

FRONT FRONT REAR REAR CENTER SUB

SPEAKERS TWEETERS SPEAKERS TWEETERS SPEAKER WOOFER

ROOF
STEREO AMPLIFIER ANTENNA
(AM/FM)
CLIMATE
CONTROL AM/FM
UNIT
SPDIF1
DSP
BODY TUNER UNIT
CONTROL RS485
MODULE
RS485
AUDIO ∙ VSP
REMOTE-HFL ∙ BACK LT
SWITCH
COOLING FAN ∙ PARK BUSY VEHICLE
SIGNALS
LIN
B-CAN CAN
TRANSCEIVER *
GAUGE
CONTROL AUDIO MCU
MODULE LWC SW LaneWatch
F-CAN CAN SWITCH
TRANSCEIVER

LVDS2

DISP CONT

PCM

GYRO SENSOR CENTER

* DISPLAY UNIT

LaneWatch LWC CAM VID SD CARD

CAMERA
VIDEO LVDS1
DECODER
CAMERA V
REARVIEW
CAMERA CAMERA BIT

MIC+ ECHO/NOISE
CANCELLER GPS ANT
HFL GPS ANTENNA
MICROPHONE HFT MUTE APPLICATION
CPU

USB1 USB
USB PORT A DEVICE
USB
DEVICE USB PORT C
USB2 USB
USB PORT B DEVICE
USB CHARGER UNIT

USB
DEVICE USB PORT D

(With USB charger unit)

SAT/TER ROOF
ANTENNA
(XM)

(With XM)
AUDIO UNIT
*: With LaneWatch

Power Supply Diagram

 To
+B SUB power amplifier
CIRCUIT circuit

DC/DC USB1
5V

DC/DC USB2
5V

DC/DC LDO GPS ANT

5.8 V 4.6 V

LDO USB (NFC)

5V

LDO TEL USB

5V

To
+B CIRCUIT power amplifier
circuit

SWD+B
IC
MIC PWR

DC/DC TUNER 6 V
6V

LDO TUNER 9 V
9V

CAMERA VCC
LDO
8V
LWC VCC

GND From each circuits

Frame ground
Audio System Description

Basic Configuration
The Audio and Visual system consists of a digital audio/video playback function, communication to the customer's device, and
displaying the driver's support information.

Audio Unit
The audio unit acts as a processor which includes playback functions of the USB, Bluetooth audio, iPod for music, and an internal
radio tuner or an external radio tuner that is controlled with digital communication. Select audio functions from audio unit buttons,
touch screen (touch the display directly to select items on the screen), or the audio remote-HFL switch (on the steering wheel).

There are two kinds of audio units according to a vehicle model:

Display Audio Type (8-inch Screen) Color Audio Type (7-inch Screen)
With Navigation ○ ×
Without Navigation ○ ○

Display Audio Type (8-inch Screen)

The audio unit exists as a Head Unit that controls external audio/visual system related devices which do not have an audio disc player
and a control module. Each function about the system is installed in the audio unit as applications. As an advanced feature, a
smartphone linkage and video playback functions are available. Also, the audio unit can reset the engine oil monitor system by center
display operation (see the Owner's Manual).

An audio unit with navigation function is referred to as an audio-navigation unit. This unit has a built-in gyro sensor and a navigation
map data (refer to the Navigation System Overview).

The SD card is a storage media that saves the navigation map data. The audio-navigation unit and the SD card cannot be substituted
separately because the SD card module is not a removable type.

The audio unit or audio-navigation unit has a built-in gyro sensor and a GPS receiver circuit. GPS information is also used for a
function that needs vehicle location other than the navigation function. A vehicle with navigation, the navigation map data is installed in
the audio-navigation unit (refer to the Navigation Function description).

For vehicles with Sirius XM(R) radio, the XM receiver circuit is built into the audio unit circuit. The XM satellite/terrestrial signal is
received by the dedicated XM antenna. The audio unit holds XM presets and settings even when the 12 volt battery is disconnected
(AM/FM presets are stored in the tuner unit).

There are two audio systems available for the display audio type:
The system with stereo amplifier: An external stereo amplifier (10 channels output) and 10 speakers are equipped. The audio unit
outputs digital audio signal to the stereo amplifier.
The system without stereo amplifier: 8 speakers are equipped. In this case, a power amplifier is built into the audio unit.
 AUDIO UNIT

COOLING FAN

Self-Diagnostic Function
The audio unit has a self-diagnostic function to check the failure of the audio unit or its connection. Additionally, the audio unit has
original hard error codes that can be displayed on the diagnostic screen to identify the failure part.

OTA (Over the Air) Update

The audio unit or the audio-navigation unit is able to download the update software for the audio unit or the audio-navigation unit and
the telematics control unit using a Wi-Fi network or a USB storage device. For vehicles with telematics, the telematics control unit is
able to download the update software from the Honda server (refer to the Telematics System description).

The audio unit or the audio-navigation unit checks the compatibility of software in each unit every time the vehicle is turned to the
ACCESSORY or the ON mode. If the original unit is substituted with a known-good unit, the audio unit or the audio-navigation unit
notifies the Honda server that the original unit was replaced after the communication is established. If necessary, the audio unit or the
audio-navigation unit downloads the update software from the Honda server.

If the OTA update failed or was disabled, the center display unit indicates an error message, and the audio unit or the audio-navigation
unit stores an error code. The error code can be checked on the System Diagnostic Mode.

Color Audio Type (7-inch Screen)

The audio unit consists of a simple component which does not have an audio disc playere. This screen displays audio and
HandsFreeLink (HFL) information. Additionally, the screen shows the rearview image when the transmission is shifted to the R
position/mode. An antenna for Bluetooth communication is built in the audio unit. As an advanced feature, the HFL function includes
an external microphone that located in the roof console

The AM/FM (RBDS) radio tuner is built into the audio unit. This unit holds AM/FM presets even when the 12 volt battery is
disconnected.
 BLUETOOTH ANTENNA

AUDIO UNIT

Self-Diagnostic Function
The audio unit has the self-diagnostic function to check the failure of the audio unit or its connection.

Center Display Unit

Display Audio Type (8-inch Screen)

The center display unit has antenna for Bluetooth communication, antenna for wireless LAN communication and a 8-inch HD color
TFT LCD that is driven by IPS (In-plane Switching) system with an electrostatic capacitive touch panel. The surface of the display is
given an anti-glare coating. This unit displays the navigation map, vehicle information, various menu screens, and a rearview or
LaneWatch* image, and can operate the audio, navigation, and HFL systems by touching the display. The HVAC information is
displayed if the audio unit receiving the feedback signal from the climate control unit via the B-CAN.

*: With LaneWatch

CENTER DISPLAY UNIT

BLUETOOTH/Wi-Fi ANTENNA
(Built into the center display)
Color Audio Type (7-inch Screen)

The center display unit has a 7-inch WVGA color TFT LCD panel. This screen is not touch sensitive. This screen displays audio and
HandsFreeLink(R) (HFL) information. Additionally, the screen shows the rearview image when the transmission is shifted to the R
position/mode. The audio panel has an illumination dimming function that is controlled by the B-CAN information. As an advanced
feature, the HFL function includes an external microphone that located in the roof console.

CENTER DISPLAY UNIT

Controls

The center display unit turns on when the DISP CONT signal changes from OFF to ON (depends on the audio unit).

After turning the center display unit on, all the communication for mutual status uses the dedicated digital signal line (LVDS1).

The audio unit also communicates with the gauge control module using the dedicated digital signal line (LVDS2). Display contents that
customized by the audio unit are fed back to the gauge control module. (With Display Audio Type (8-inch Screen))

AUDIO UNIT CENTER DISPLAY UNIT

CAPACITIVE TOUCH PANEL*

DISP CONT Screen ON signal

DISPLAY MODULE
(7-inch or 8-inch LCD)

Power contorl and digital RGB

LVDS1
Touch screen operation and status

Customization of screen contents

B-CAN
Remote switch operation and status Remote switch
operation and status
* MULTI-INFORMATION LIN
DISPLAY (MID)
Digital RGB
LVDS2
Screen status AUDIO REMOTE-HFL
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE SWITCH

*: With display audio

Fail-Safe Function
The center display unit performs the fail-safe control when the system detects an abnormal high temperature in the unit:
When the center display unit temperature rises over 176 °F (80 °C), the center display unit sends the error status to the audio
unit, and the center display unit displays the error message and then the display back light turns off (the background system stay
on).
When the center display unit temperature drops to below 167 °F (75 °C), the display back light turns on, and the display
brightness returns gradually with the temperature drops.

Self-Diagnostic Function
The audio unit can check the center display unit status by performing the System Diagnostic Mode.

Electrostatic Capacitive Touch Panel

To use the touch screen, bring your finger close to the screen or gently touch it with your finger. The touch sensor senses the change
of the electrical charge when your finger is close to the screen and detects the position of the electrical charge. Use only a gentle
touch to select or move the screen image. A hard finger press is not necessary. The screen cannot sense your touch if you wear
heavy gloves, use a fingernail, or a pen.

Touch sensor part

A touch on the screen changes

the status of the electrical charge

GLASS
Detects changes
in electrical charge

LCD

Audio System Functions

Anti-Theft Function
The audio unit has an anti-theft protection function separate from the security system of the vehicle. If the audio unit is removed from
the vehicle, the audio unit requires a procedure to unlock the security system in order to use it again after the audio unit is
reconnected.

There are two kinds of anti-theft mode release procedures:

While displaying the security code entry screen or the conformation screen of the anti-theft system, press and hold the
VOLUME/POWER ( ) knob for at least 2 seconds. The audio unit automatically exits the anti-theft mode.
While displaying the security code entry screen, enter the 5-digit anti-theft code.

The System Diagnostic Mode (includes checking hard error codes) can be used even if the audio unit is in the anti-theft mode.

If you substitute the audio unit into another vehicle, you must either enter the anti-theft code or perform the anti-theft skip mode in the
System Diagnostic mode (This mode will release the anti-theft code for 150 seconds).

Muting Logic
The outline of the audio interruption function is shown in the following table.

With Stereo Amplifier

 Contents Audio Output
Center CH Left Front CH Right Front Right Rear Left Rear CH Subwoofer
CH CH CH
System beep Audio Beep and Beep and Audio Audio Audio
audio audio
Pressing Feedback Muted Muted Muted Muted Muted
TALK/BACK output
buttons
Guidance Guidance Attenuated Attenuated Attenuated Attenuated Attenuated
output and audio audio audio audio audio
attenuated
audio
HFL MUTE HFL output HFL output Muted Muted Muted
HFL and Guidance HFL output HFL output Muted Muted Muted
Guidance output

Without Stereo Amplifier

Contents Audio Output
Left Front CH Right Front CH Right Rear CH Left Rear CH
System beep Beep and audio Beep and audio Audio Audio
Pressing TALK/BACK Feedback output Muted Muted Muted
buttons
Guidance Guidance output and Attenuated audio Attenuated audio Attenuated audio
attenuated audio
HFL HFL output HFL output Muted Muted
HFL and Guidance Guidance output HFL output Muted Muted

Speed-Sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC)

All audio systems are equipped with speed-sensitive volume compensation (SVC). The audio unit receives the vehicle speed pulse
(VSP) from the gauge control module (B-CAN). The system processes the speed input and increases the audio system volume level
as the vehicle speed increases to compensate for the interior noise that occurs at higher speeds. When the vehicle slows down, the
volume returns to its normal level. For vehicles with a stereo amplifier, SVC function is controlled by the stereo amplifier. The SVC has
four settings: SVC OFF, SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC HIGH that can be adjusted using the audio unit.

Operation Restriction
The audio unit has a function that restricts certain operations of audio and visual systems that may affects safe driving.

Clock Function
The audio unit has a real time clock circuit that operates the clock even if the vehicle is in the OFF (LOCK) mode. Also, the display
audio type audio unit can adjust the internal clock by linking a smartphone. Additionally, the audio unit with a GPS antenna can display
clock information by receiving the GPS signal.

USB Connection
The audio unit has a USB port for an external device input and a smartphone connection. USB port A is based on the specification of
USB Battery Charging 1.2 (BC 1.2) that supports high-speed charging of the USB device. The audio unit can detect the USB device
type (BC 1.2 or not), and change the charging mode automatically.

USB Audio
The audio system can play digital music from portable audio players, a USB drive, etc. when the device is plugged into the vehicle's
USB port, and the vehicle is turned to the ACCESSORY mode, the audio unit begins to communicate with the connected USB device,
and to supply the VBUS power. The audio unit controls the device when searching and playing the files. Not all players and player
functions work with the USB adapter. Please see the Owner's Manual for more information.

Supported Devices
 Supports for USB Mass storage class/Bulk-only transport.
USB 2.0 Full-speed capable.
At least 256 MB storage capacity.
USB formatted to be compatible with Windows-based operating systems.
If the USB has a security feature, like write protection, it must be turned off.

There are many different USB devices, manufacturers, and configurations with new devices being released every day, which makes it
impossible to test all USB devices with the audio system. Even if the USB device has all these requirements, it may not be
compatible.

Hard drives do not support overwriting the data for the track order, which is why they are not recommended.

When you disconnect a USB device, the data for the track order remains in the audio unit's memory so when you reconnect the same
USB device, the audio unit continues playing from the location where it was disconnected. If a new USB device is connected, the data
for the track order is rewritten and you need to select the album or music file.

Bluetooth Connection
The audio unit can be paired with a compatible cell phone or a device for Bluetooth communication. Pairing procedures vary by the
connection history and Bluetooth version of the cell phone or the device. Refer to the Owner's Manual.

The audio unit supports Bluetooth Ver 4.0+EDR. Bluetooth enables audio streaming, wireless play back on an audio device, hands-
free calling with a cell phone, data communication, and phone book loading.

When the vehicle has an NFC (Near Field Communication) function, a compatible cell phone can transfer the Bluetooth profile data to
the audio unit or the audio-navigation unit via the NFC.

Bluetooth Audio
Bluetooth audio allows approved Bluetooth cell phones equipped with music function to play music via the vehicle's audio system
using a Bluetooth technology. You can control the cell phone's music player remotely using the wireless connection.
You can play music stored in your cell phone using the wireless connection.
You can choose the next song, a previous song and resume/pause via the wireless connection.

NOTE: Not all cell phones support the Bluetooth audio function.

Supported Devices
Bluetooth music phones that support A2DP 1.2 and AVRCP 1.4.
Bluetooth adapters for portable music devices including iPod are not supported.

NOTE: Availability of the functions depends on the connected cell phone.

Wireless LAN Connection (Display Audio Type)

The audio unit supports wireless LAN connection based on the IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac standard. The audio unit can connect the
device that has a function as Wi-Fi access point.

Video Playback Function (Display Audio Type)

The audio system can play digital compressed video (MP4 is supported) from a USB device.

HD Radio(TM) (Display Audio Type)

HD Radio(TM) is a crystal clear digital audio broadcast by local radio stations. There is no charge for HD radio. Simply tune to your
favorite station, and if the station is broadcasting with HD Radio(TM) technology, then the audio unit will automatically pick up the
digital signal, and begin playing the crystal clear, subscription free audio. Refer to your Owner's Manual to determine how your
particular receiver indicates HD Radio(TM) reception and how to transition from the main program to the multicast program(s).
The HD1 channel acquires the analog station first and then blends with the digital signal. Therefore, the digital audio may have a
short delay.
There is no analog signal available on the HD2/HD3 channels. Therefore, there is a short delay while decoding the digital audio.
Audio will begin playing when available.
Go to www.hdradio.com for stations in the area to verify correct operation on the station.
Song By Voice(TM) (Display Audio Type)
A customer can use the Song By Voice(TM) feature to select and play the audio files in an iPod or a USB device with voice commands.

When an iPod or a USB device is connected to the audio unit, the unit makes a dictionary from the album name, folder name, artist
name, track name, and the file name.

If a different device is connected, or the customer updates the files on the connected device, a new dictionary is created.

Smartphone Linkage Function (Display Audio Type)

This function helps ensure the safe use of a smartphone while driving. Connect a smartphone to the audio unit to use it. Connection
methods vary depending on carriers.

When using the navigation function via a smartphone, the audio unit can display the navigation map screen that is in the connected
smartphone. In this case, the GPS signal is received by the audio unit, and the vehicle signals are received from the F-CAN and the
B-CAN as information of vehicle position tuning.

When using the voice recognition function via a smartphone, the front HFL-ANC microphone in the roof console picks up the driver's
voice, and sends the voice signal to the smartphone via the audio unit using Bluetooth.

When the voice recognition is in use, the audio unit sends the fan mute signal to the climate control unit via the B-CAN. The blower
fan operating voltage may be reduced depending on the current fan speed.

HondaLink® Assist (USA and Canada models Display Audio Type)

HondaLink® delivers remote services to the vehicle using the customer's compatible Bluetooth cell phone.

If the SRS airbag is deployed, the SRS unit sends a signal to the audio unit via the F-CAN. Then, the audio unit calls a Public Safety
Answering Point (PSAP) automatically using the customer's compatible Bluetooth cell phone, and sends the vehicle location using
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF). The audio unit uses the GPS antenna for tracking the vehicle location.

GPS ANTENNA
GPS SATELLITE CUSTOMER'S PHONE
(Inside the vehicle)

PSAP
(Public Safety
Answering
Point)
Send
Vehicle position vehicle position
Call and
automatically emergency call
or
manually

AUDIO UNIT
(Receive airbag deployment signal)

Tuner Unit

The tuner unit is a separate digital radio tuner interface. Received AM/FM radio waves are processed on the digital signal processor
(DSP) and sent to the audio unit via the dedicated digital audio line (SPDIF1). At this time, HD radio(TM) sound signal is separated
from normal AM radio sound signal. All of the information about AM/FM reception (includes RBDS information) are sent from the tuner
unit via the dedicated serial bus (TUNER RS485). This unit holds AM/FM radio frequency presets even when the 12 volt battery is
disconnected.
For vehicles with Sirius XM(R) radio, the antenna for receiving AM/FM radio waves and satellite/terrestrial (XM) signal uses a roof
antenna type. AM/FM radio wave is amplified by the AM/FM antenna amplifier. The sensitivity of the FM wave is raised by the auto
gain control. The XM antenna receives satellite signal and terrestrial signal by using the high-gain antenna. Signals are sent to the
audio unit via the dedicated single line (SAT/TER).

With XM (Roof Antenna Type)

Power supply at ACCESSORY mode Power supply

TUNER 9V ANT +B

Continuous power supply

TUNER 6V Tuner unit ON trigger
AM/FM
ANTENNA
Tuner control signal AMPLIFIER
RS485
Tuner status signal

Digital audio signal Radio wave

SPDIF Converts to digital signal AM/FM

TUNER UNIT
Satellite/Terrestrial signal XM
SAT/TER ANTENNA

AUDIO UNIT ROOF ANTENNA

Self-Diagnostic Function
The audio unit can check the tuner unit status by performing the System Diagnostic Mode.

Stereo Amplifier

The stereo amplifier is a separated power amplifier interface. Digital audio signal (SPDIF2) that is received from the audio unit is
processed on the DSP, and sent to each speaker after amplified by the AMP IC.

The stereo amplifier communicates with the audio unit using the dedicated serial bus (RS485). This communication includes the
vehicle speed (for SVC) information, audio settings, and the MUTE commands. The stereo amplifier adjusts the speaker outputs by
oneself which is based on the received information.

The stereo amplifier receives the guidance signal and the system beep signal via independent lines, and mix them to applicable audio
lines.

STEREO AMPLIFIER

Serial MUTE
RS485 MCU CIRCUIT

FILTER
CIRCUIT MIXER ∙ FRONT
CIRCUIT DOOR
FRONT AMP IC SPEAKER
Digital audio ∙ FRONT
SPDIF2
TWEETER
ISOLATOR ∙ FRONT
SUBW CENTER
AUX SPEAKER
ADC DSP DAC CTR AMP IC
NAVI ∙ SUBWOOFER
∙ REAR
SPEAKER

SAT AMP IC REAR

TWEETER
AUX
BEEP
Fail-Safe Function
The audio-navigation unit or audio unit can check the stereo amplifier status by performing the System Diagnostic Mode.

When the temperature cools down, the stereo amplifier outputs the sound again.

Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)

The ANC eliminate unwanted sound entering the passenger compartment. There are three microphones mounted in the headliner.
The microphones capture low frequencies entering the passenger compartment and send a signal to the active noise cancellation
unit. The active noise cancellation unit then creates the sound wave that is sent out through the speakers to eliminate the unwanted
sound.

The ANC works to cancel the engine booming sound up to about 2,000 min-1 (rpm). The active noise cancellation unit receives the
engine speed pulse (NEP) from the PCM and outputs a sine-wave-sound through the audio speakers to cancel the low-frequency
noise from the engine. The ANC system also uses three microphones to detect and monitor the low frequency noise in the passenger
compartment. The microphones feedback the noise information to the audio unit or the audio-navigation unit which adjusts the
speaker output to reduce the noise. The ANC also receives the output of the door open/close signal from the gauge control module.
Whenever any door is opened, the ANC temporarily stops working. Each signal is sent to the active noise cancellation unit via the F-
CAN.

The active noise cancellation unit the stereo amplifier output signals to the subwoofer, and if the subwoofer gives a sound more than
the rated value, the active noise cancellation unit stops ANC control.

LOW-FREQUENCY
NOISE

SOUND SOUND CANCELS LOW-FREQUENCY NOISE

WAVE WAVE

SINE-WAVE
SOUND

TIME TIME

Active Sound Control

The active sound control is the next generation control of eliminating the unwanted sound in the passenger compartment. The active
sound control has a much broader range than the ANC system. In addition to the microphones in the headliner, the active sound
control also receives the output from the engine speed pulse (NEP) to provide various levels of the sound cancelling depending on
changes in the engine RPM.

Audio Remote-HFL Switch

There are two kinds of audio remote-HFL switches according to a vehicle model:
With multi-information display (MID): The audio remote switch and the HFL switch are integrated to the audio remote-HFL switch
that uses the digital communication (LIN).
Without multi-information display (MID): The audio remote switch and the HFL switch are integrated to the audio remote-HFL
switch that uses the resistor divider circuit.

For vehicles with an audio unit (display audio type), the audio remote-HFL switch has an electrostatic capacitance touch sensor (see
Center Display Unit) for specific buttons operation. When using any button or the touch switch on the audio remote-HFL switch, the
control signal is sent to the audio unit via the gauge control module. The gauge control module reflects the control information of the
audio remote-HFL switch as indication to the MID.

If the LIN circuit is open or shorted between the gauge control module and the audio remote-HFL switch, the gauge control module
detects the related DTC.

With Multi-Information Display (MID)

 AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH

JOG

HARD
SWITCH

MCU ILL+

CRUISE
LIGHT CONTROL
(LED) COMBINATION
SWITCH
ENTER
ILL–

ILL–(LED)

LIN GAUGE AUDIO UNIT

CONTROL B-CAN
MODULE

*:

USB Charger Unit

The USB charger unit controls an output current for charging of a USB device. The USB port C, and D (CHARGE ONLY) located on
the center console are a dedicated USB charging port. The USB charger unit is based on the specification of the USB Battery
Charging 1.2 (BC 1.2) that supports high-speed charging of the USB device. The USB charger unit can detect the USB device type
(BC 1.2 or not), and change the charging mode automatically.

The USB charger unit is launched by turning the vehicle to the ACCESSORY mode. When you connect the USB device to the USB
port C and D (CHARGE ONLY), the USB charger unit supplies the appropriate current (1.0 A - 2.1 A) to the USB device via the USB
VBUS. In this case, the USB charger unit detects the electrical characteristics from the USB DATA lines. No data communication
occurs between the USB charger unit and the USB device. Also, there is no connection between the USB charger unit and the audio
unit.

Near Field Communication Unit

The near field communication unit is a receiver that communicates with the audio unit or the audio-navigation unit and an approved
customer's device using NFC (Near Field Communication). This communication allows the customer to transfer a low-capacity data
easily.

The near field communication unit consists of an NFC antenna and an NFC controller. When holding the approved customer's device
over the NFC logo, the near field communication unit transfers the received customer's device data to the audio unit or the audio-
navigation unit using the USB (USB3 lines).
 20 mm
(0.79 in)

15 mm 30 mm (1.18 in)
(0.59 in) (Maximum oprtation distance)

Active area
NFC ANTENNA COIL

Self-Diagnostic Function
The audio-navigation unit or audio unit can check the near field communication unit connection by performing the System Diagnostic
Mode.

Multi-View Rear Camera

The multi-view rearview camera is a function that provides three different view images to the driver by the camera that is installed in
the vehicle's rear end. The view images can be changed by the user. The rearview guide lines change according to the selected view.
The rearview camera is connected directly to the audio unit.
Normal View Mode
The display shows the standard view.
Wide View Mode
The display shows wider visibility than the normal view, which helps the driver confirm any objects approaching from right and left.
Top Down View Mode
The display shows the view from the top angle of the vehicle, which helps the driver confirm the distance from any object behind.

Basic Control
The audio unit outputs the power source (CAMERA VCC) to the rearview camera under some conditions:
Turn the vehicle to the ACCESSORY mode.
－ Meantime if the audio unit does not detect the BACK LT signal for 5 minutes, the audio unit cancels outputting the power
source to the rearview camera.

Detecting the BACK LT signal (when the transmission is shifted to R position/mode).

－ If the audio unit does not detect the BACK LT signal for 5 minutes after cancelling the rearview mode, the audio unit cancels
outputting the power source to the rearview camera.

When using the Rear Camera diagnosis in the System Diagnostic Mode.
－ If the audio unit does not detect the BACK LT signal for 5 minutes after exiting the diagnosis, the audio unit cancels outputting
the power source to the rearview camera.

When the audio unit detects the BACK LT signal for at least 1 seconds, the audio unit display turns on the rearview camera image.
The display delays for 1 seconds to prevent changing the screen image too frequently because of incorrect shift position/mode
selection. You can change the view mode by touching the mode icon*1 or by pressing the SELECTOR knob*2.

*1: Display audio type

*2: Color audio type

While displaying the rearview image, the LaneWatch function can not be used because the LaneWatch image is misunderstood as the
rearview image.
 Wide View Normal View Top Down View

Wide View/Normal View Top Down View

0.25 m 0.25 m
(0.82 ft) (0.82 ft)

0.25 m 0.25 m
(0.82 ft) (0.82 ft)

1 m (3 ft) 1 m (3 ft)
0.5 m (1.6 ft) 0.5 m (1.6 ft)

Changing Camera Views

When the rearview camera image is displayed, touching the mode icon sends a signal from the audio unit to the rearview camera
using the CAMERA BIT0 and CAMERA BIT1 signal lines to change the rearview camera view.

Wide Normal Top Down

CAMERA BIT0 Signal OFF (0 V) ON (5 V - 11 V) OFF (0 V)
CAMERA BIT1 Signal OFF (0 V) OFF (0 V) ON (5 V - 11 V)

View Mode Memorization

Any time the audio unit loses power (battery disconnected, audio unit disconnected, etc.) the rearview camera defaults to the normal
angle view. The rearview camera will also default to this angle if you had the top down angle selected when you turn the vehicle to the
OFF (LOCK) mode. If you change the rearview camera to the wide view, the rearview camera will remember this view when you turn
the vehicle to the ON mode.

Dynamic Guideline (Display Audio Type)

When the rearview image is displayed with the guide line, the guide line changes according to the steering angle input (When the
steering rotates 90 degrees or more). The steering angle information is received from the gauge control module via the B-CAN as
vehicle signals.
Self-Diagnostic Function
The audio-navigation unit or audio unit can check the rearview camera connection and do the rearview camera guideline setting by
performing the System Diagnostic Mode.
Audio System Diagnostic Mode

Preparation

NOTE:
Check the vehicle 12 volt battery condition first.
The screen detail indicated may change depending on equipment or specification.

Check the audio unit button/knob layout, audio remote-HFL switch button/knob layout, and
displaying contents.

Audio Unit

DIAGNOSIS NUMBER
PHONE BUTTON

SEEK/UP
( )
BUTTON

SEEK/DOWN
( )
BUTTON
LIST/SELECT
KNOB

VOLUME/POWER
KNOB
PRESET BUTTONS RETURN BUTTON

Audio Remote-HFL Switch

VOL (+) BUTTON

CH ( ) BUTTON

CH ( ) BUTTON

SOURCE BUTTON

VOL (-) BUTTON

TALK BUTTON
HANG-UP BUTTON
PICK-UP BUTTON
How to Obtain the Audio Unit Serial Number

NOTE: This procedure can be done only before anti-theft mode is cancelled.

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode. Make sure the audio unit is in the anti-theft mode.

2. Press and hold the preset No. 1 button, the preset No. 6 button, and the VOLUME/POWER (
) knob until the Manual Diag menu screen is displayed.

3. Go into the System Diagnostic Mode, and select the System diagnosis.

4. Go into the System, and select the Serial number display.

5. The screen displays an 8-digit audio unit serial number.

6. Use all 8 numbers as the serial number when using the Interactive Network (iN) to retrieve the
5-digit anti-theft code.

Anti-Theft Temporary Cancellation

7. When the preset No. 2 button is pressed, the anti-theft mode is cancelled temporarily, and the
system returns to the normal audio screen automatically.

How to Go Directly to the Speaker Check Mode

You can select the speaker check mode directly without entering the system diagnostic mode.

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode and audio OFF.

2. Press the VOLUME/POWER ( ) knob to turn off the audio unit.

3. Press and hold the preset No. 1 button, preset No. 5 button and the VOLUME/POWER ( ) knob. The display screen goes
directly to the Sound menu shown.
 Title Item Description Procedure
Sound 1 Speaker Check This diagnosis checks the Each time you press the preset No. 1 button, the
audio speakers individually. system checks the speakers in this order:
→ → → → → →

NOTE: A sound may leak from other speaker

connecting to same lines.
: OFF Speaker check mode is OFF
(default).
: FL You should hear a tone from the left
front door speaker.
: FR You should hear a tone from the
right front door speaker.
: RR You should hear a tone from the
right rear speaker.
: RL You should hear a tone from the left
rear speaker.
: ALL You should hear a tone from all
speakers.
2 EQ These items are not ―――
3 Loudness supported in this diagnosis.

4. To exit the Sound screen, press the VOLUME/POWER knob, or turn the vehicle to the OFF
(LOCK) mode.

How to Check the Audio Unit Software Version

This procedure can be done only before entering the system diagnostic mode.

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

2. Press the VOLUME/POWER ( ) knob to turn off the audio unit.

3. Press and hold the preset No. 1 button, preset No. 5 button, the PHONE button, and the VOLUME/POWER ( ) knob. The
display screen goes directly to the Version Display screen shown.

Title Item Description

Version Display 1 System u.com These items display the audio unit software version.
2 Graphic u.com

4. To exit the Version Display screen, press the VOLUME/POWER ( ) knob, or turn the vehicle
to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

Start-Up Procedure and Diagnostic Menu

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode. If needed, start the engine.

2. Press the VOLUME/POWER ( ) knob to turn on the audio unit.

3. Press and hold the preset No. 1 button preset No. 6 button, and the VOLUME/POWER ( )
knob. The display screen goes directly to the Manual Diag menu shown.

4. When you are in the system diagnostic mode, pressing a preset button starts the diagnosis
that is assigned to that preset button. To return to the previous screen, press the RETURN
button. To exit this mode, go to step 5. Once you exit this test, you must start again at step 1.
 Preset No. 1 button: System
Preset No. 2 button: Audio
Preset No. 3 button: Display
Preset No. 4 button: Camera
Preset No. 5 button: Connection
Preset No. 6 button: Vehicle Information

5. To end the system diagnostic mode, press the VOLUME/POWER ( ) knob, or turn the vehicle
to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

System

This diagnosis displays information about the audio unit setting and result of the In Line Diag, and
detects the hard keys.

To start the diagnosis, press the preset button to select the diagnosis number you want to check.

Title Item Description Procedure

System 1 Driver Distraction This item allows you to set the Every time the preset No. 1 button is
Prevention operation restriction about audio pressed, this item switches the function
system. to ON or OFF.
3 Knob Check This diagnosis checks the audio unit As each function is tested, the
hard buttons and the audio remote-HFL corresponding button name should be
switch. displayed.
If any button of the audio unit does
not respond, replace the center
display unit or the audio unit.
If any button of the audio remote-
HFL switch does not respond,
replace the audio remote-HFL
switch.
If all buttons of the audio remote-
HFL switch do not respond, go to
Audio remote-HFL switch does not
work properly (audio unit buttons
work) troubleshooting.
4 Inline Diag This diagnosis checks whether the See Inline Diag.
audio unit is receiving each unit signal
properly, and clear the result(s).
5 Knob Illumination This diagnosis checks the dimming Every time the preset No. 1 button is
Check circuit of the audio unit buttons. pressed, this item switches the function
to ON or OFF.

When rotating the LIST/SELECT knob,

you should see the value change from
1 (max low) to 22 (max high).
6 Update Software This diagnosis is for factory use only. ―――

Inline Diag

To start the Inline Diag, press the preset No. 1 button.

 Title Item Description Procedure
Inline Diag 1 Result Display This item displays result of The Inline Diag function runs automatically or
the Inline diag. manually. When the diagnosis finishes, the icons turn
different colors* based on their test status (OK or
NG).
B-CAN Result is OK when receiving
the VSPNE flame.
STRG REMOTE Result is OK when detects
the audio remote-HFL switch
by pressing any of the audio
remote button.
HFT REMOTE Result is OK when detects
the audio remote-HFL switch
by pressing any of the HFL
button.
HFT MIC Result is OK when detects
the front HFL-ANC
microphone .
Rear Camera Result is OK when detects
the rearview camera.
Display Result is OK when detects
the center display unit.
2 Result All Clear This item changes result of While displaying the Inline Diag screen, press and
the Inline diag to the hold the preset No. 2 button for 5 seconds.
undiagnosed.
3 Result All OK This item changes result of While displaying the Inline Diag screen, press and
the Inline diag to OK. hold the preset No. 3 button for 5 seconds.

*: Inline Diag Icon Colors

Icon Colors Description
Green The system ran a diagnosis and the results are OK.
Red Errors that require replacement of hardware or harness.
Yellow Errors that do not require hardware replacement, such as a missing optional systems (rearview camera), or
the connection check is in the state which is not done.

Audio

This diagnosis checks the audio unit sound system.

To start the diagnosis, press the preset button to select the diagnosis number you want to check.

Title Item Description Procedure

Audio 1 Sound See How to Go Directly to the Speaker See How to Go Directly to the Speaker
Check Mode. Check Mode.
2 FM This diagnosis checks the FM See Reception Level Check.
reception level in the electric field
strength (dB). This level then can be
used in the diagnosis of audio unit
reception quality.
3 AM This diagnostic screen checks the AM See Reception Level Check.
reception level in the electric field
strength (dB). This level then can be
used in the diagnosis of audio unit
reception quality.

Reception Level Check

Preparation:
Park the vehicle outside in a good location away from tall buildings, mountains, high-voltage
power line or any other object that may interfere with reception.
Tune to a powerful local AM or FM radio station then write down the radio station number.

1. Tune to the AM or FM radio station you wrote down in preparation using the SEEK/DOWN (
) or SEEK/UP ( ) button, and note the reception level of that station.

2. Press the preset No. 6 button to turn the AM/FM antenna power (SWD +B) off.

3. Note the decibel level of that station with the AM/FM antenna power off.

4. Press the preset No. 6 button to turn the AM/FM antenna power (SWD +B) on.

5. Compare your results to a known-good, (make sure it is the same year and trim level) in the
same location and direction, and under the same environmental conditions.

If the reception level is within 10 % of the known-good vehicle, no repair is needed at this
time.
If the reception level is at least 10 % less than the known good vehicle, go to Poor AM or
FM radio reception or interference troubleshooting.

Display

These screens allow you to troubleshoot the LCD display built into the audio unit.

To start the diagnosis, press the preset button to select the diagnosis number you want to check.

NOTE: Displaying an anomaly in this diagnosis screen is not necessarily a failure.

Title Item Description

Display 1 R/G/B/White Color This screen verifies that the audio unit is displaying the RGB (Red, Green, and
Blue) components properly. The three primary colors should all appear without
distortion. The combination of all three should produce a central white section.
2 Full Gradation This screen checks problems with contrast. You should be able to see the
changes in the smooth across the scale.
3 16 Step Gradation This screen displays the rear view camera image forcibly.
4 Artwork On/Off This item is not supported in this diagnosis.
5 Version This screen displays for serial number of each module in the audio unit.
6 Status This screen displays for status the center display unit.

Camera

This screen checks the rearview camera image, and adjusts the guideline.

To start the diagnosis, press the preset button to select the diagnosis number you want to check.
 Title Item Description Procedure
Camera 1 Forced Rear This screen displays the rearview camera ―――
Camera View image forcibly whether the transmission is
shifted to any position/mode.

Mode icon and the caution message are

not displayed.
2 Fixed Guideline This item adjusts the rearview camera This item displays the preset screen
Adjustment image fixed guidelines. first. See Guideline Adjustment.
3 Dynamic This item adjusts the rearview camera This item displays the preset screen
Guideline image dynamic guidelines. first. See Guideline Adjustment.
Adjustment

Guideline Adjustment
Action Procedure
Select screen Every time the MENU button is pressed, the audio unit changes the screen in this order:
Preset screen Guideline adjustment screen Point adjustment screen
Select view mode When pressing and holding the VOLUME (+) button or the VOLUME (-) button on the audio
remote-HFL switch for a second, the audio unit changes the view mode (Wide View, Normal
View, Top Down View).
Adjust guideline/point The selected guideline(s) or the point is highlighted.
Rotate the LIST/SELECT knob to select the guideline(s) or the point you want to adjust.
Use the 4-way knob on the audio remote-HFL switch to adjust the guideline(s) or the
point up/down or right/left.
Save the data While displaying the adjustment screen, press the BACK button (the adjustment screen
returns to the preset screen).
Restore settings While displaying the fixed guideline adjustment, press and hold the preset No. 2 button
for 5 seconds.
While displaying the dynamic guideline adjustment, press and hold the preset No. 3
button for 5 seconds.

Fixed Guideline/Point Layout

Wide View/Normal View Top Down View

Dynamic Guideline/Point Layout

Connection

This diagnosis checks the connection between each component connected to the audio unit.

Title Item Description Procedure

Connection 1 B-CAN State This diagnosis checks whether the Check the indicated B-CAN status:
audio unit is receiving B-CAN data OFF: Loss of power
properly.
SL: Sleep
S WK: Transmits the WAKEUP flame
C WK: Confirms wake-up
W WK: Waiting for wake-up
SLNG: Sleep NG
SLOK: Sleep OK
S SL: Transmits the SLEEP flame
W SL: Waiting for sleep
PSKOK: Partial sleep OK
PSL: Partial sleep
ERR: Error
2 Display This diagnosis checks whether the This item shows the connection status by
Connection audio unit is connecting the center OK (connected) or NG (not connected).
display unit properly.
3 AUX Jack This item is not available in this vehicle. ―――
4 Rear Camera This diagnosis checks whether the This item shows the connection status by
Connection audio unit is connecting the rearview OK (connected) or NG (not connected).
camera properly.
5 MIC Connection This diagnosis checks whether the This item shows the connection status by
audio unit is connecting the HFL OK (connected) or NG (not connected).
microphone properly.
6 Steering This diagnosis checks whether the To diagnose the Steering remote
Remote audio unit is connecting the audio connection, press the preset No. 6 button.
Connection remote-HFL switch properly. Then press any audio remote switch
button and HFL switch button to check the
connection.

Vehicle Information

Use this screen to confirm that the audio unit is properly receiving input signals via the B-CAN
bus. The displayed value changes each time according to the state of input signal.
To start the diagnosis in the Vehicle Information 1/2, press the preset button to select the
diagnosis number you want to check.
To start the diagnosis in the Vehicle Information 2/2, press the SEEK/UP ( ) button, then
press the preset button to select the diagnosis number you want to check. To return to the
previous screen, press the SEEK/DOWN ( ) button.
 Title Item Description
Vehicle Information 1 ILLUMI This item indicates whether each illumination control data is properly
1/3 received from the gauge control module.
1 C_ILCANCEL 1: When the dashlights brightness control
knob is more than 90 % brightness with the
position lights turned on
0: When the dashlights brightness control
knob is less than 90 % brightness with the
position lights turned on
2 C_ACILL 1: When position lights, or headlights are on
0: When position lights, or headlights are off
3 C_ILSTEP With the position lights on, use the dashlights
brightness control knob to dim and brighten the
gauge. The value changes from 1 (max low) to 22
(max high).
4 METER_ILL 1: When the dashlights brightness control
CANCEL knob is more than 90 % brightness with the
position lights turned on
0: When the dashlights brightness control
knob is less than 90 % brightness with the
position lights turned on
5 METER_ILL 1: When position lights, or headlights are on
STATUS
0: When position lights, or headlights are off
6 METER_ILL STEP With the position lights on, use the dashlights
brightness control knob to dim and brighten the
gauge. The value changes from 1 (max low) to 22
(max high).
2 VSPNE This item indicates whether the specific data is properly received from the
gauge control module.
1 C_VSP This item indicates the vehicle speed (km/h).
3 VINNO 1 Receiving Data This item indicates the VIN that received from the
PCM.
2 Initial registration This item indicates the initial registration VIN (10
is added to the beginning of indicated VIN) that is
saved in the audio unit.
3 Additional This item indicates the additional registration VIN
registration (11 is added to the beginning of indicated VIN)
when the audio unit is substituted into another
vehicle, or when a PCM is substituted or replaced
into this vehicle.
4 MICU_BCM This item indicates whether the specific data is properly received from the
body control module.
1 C_BACKLTSW 1: When the transmission is shifted to R
position/mode
0: When the transmission is shifted to any
position/mode other than R position/mode
5 STEERING ANGLE 1 1: When trimming finished.
C_STR_COMP_TRIM
0: When trimming not finished.
2 1: When the Calibration finished
C_STR_COMP_CAL
0: When the Calibration not finished
3 C_STR_STATE_OK 1: ON (Steering angle sensor OK)
0: OFF (Steering angle sensor error)
4 C_STR_ANGLE This item indicates the steering angle signal.
6 PARKSENS2 This item is not available in this vehicle.
 Title Item Description
Vehicle Information 1 ST_SW_PAD This item indicates whether the specific data is properly received from the
2/3 audio remote-HFL switch via the gauge control module.
2 ACSTATE This item indicates status of data which is transmitted from each unit to the
3 ACFB audio unit via the B-CAN bus.
4 AT
5 ODO TRIP
6 TRICOM1
Vehicle Information 1 TRICOM2 This item indicates status of data which is transmitted from each unit to the
3/3 2 TRICOM3 audio unit via the B-CAN bus.
3 TRICOM3
4 TRICOM6
5 GPSTIME_AHU This item indicates status of data which is transmitted from the audio unit to
6 ACCOM_AHU each unit via the B-CAN bus.
Audio System Diagnostic Mode

NOTE:
Check the vehicle 12 volt battery condition first.
This diagnosis is applied to the audio unit (without navigation) only. Refer to the navigation
system section for audio-navigation unit System Diagnostic Mode.
The screens detail indicated may change depending on equipment or specification.

Start-Up Procedure and Diagnostic Menu

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode. If needed, start the engine.

2. Press and hold the HOME button, the SOURCE button, and the AUDIO POWER ( ) button
until the Select Diagnosis Items menu screen is displayed:

Self-Diagnosis Mode (runs the automatic diagnosis of the audio system)

Detail Information & Setting (allows you to manually diagnose the audio system)

Displaying Select Diagnosis Items Menu Screen

HOME BUTTON

AUDIO POWER BUTTON SOURCE BUTTON

Self-Diagnosis Mode (System Links)

1. Select the Self-Diagnosis Mode from the Select Diagnosis Items menu. The message at the
bottom of the screen flashes indicating ‘‘Diagnosis in progress...’’ , do not turn the vehicle to
the OFF (LOCK) mode.
2. The diagnosis tests the following:

Most of the wires connecting the external audio components shown in the block diagram.
The results from the various components shown in the block diagram.
The audio unit checks the microphone by listening to the ‘‘Pi Pi Pon’’ sound produced by
the audio unit from the speakers when the diagnosis is started. This requires that the
audio system be operating normally.

3. When the diagnosis finishes, the icons turn different colors based on their test status.
NOTE: By selecting the Help icon, you can see a description for each color.

Icon Description
Colors
Green The system ran a diagnosis and the results are OK.
Red* Errors that require replacement of hardware or harness. Examples are connection error or memory
diagnosis errors. Select the red icon and check each diagnostic screen (refer to the description for
diagnostic screens in the Unit Check).
Yellow Errors that do not require hardware replacement, or the connection check is in the state which is not
done. Such as leaving the vehicle in the ACCESSORY mode or because of a missing accessory.
When the audio unit detects a failure, and stores DTC, the Error History icon turns yellow.
White The diagnosis is running. The screen functions are locked out while the diagnosis runs.
Gray The system cannot automatically check this function. You have to select the diagnosis item and
manually do additional testing, like checking the audio unit buttons in the Hard Key test. When you
complete the Hard Key test and return to the System Links screen, the gray icon turns green.
The Vehicle Status icon anytime shows gray.

*: The F-CAN icon and the B-CAN icon turns red when the vehicle is in the ACCESSORY mode. Check the
System Links with the engine running, and if the F-CAN icon and the B-CAN icon turns green, the system
is OK at this time.

4. Select the icon to see the details of that diagnostic function. The icon colors on the screen
may not change until you exit and reenter the Self-Diagnosis mode. In some cases, you may
have to restart the engine for the indication to change. After you repair the affected
component or harness, repeat this diagnosis.

Factory Diagnostic Screen In Line Diag and Linking

If the vehicle left the factory in the factory diagnostic mode, you will see this screen every time
you turn the vehicle to the ON mode. Sometimes this screen also appears after you replace the
audio unit with a new or remanufactured unit. Normally the factory does the steps necessary to
verify proper operation and terminate the factory diagnosis. Until the proper confirmation
sequence is done, the screen appears every time you turn the vehicle to the ON mode.
 A

NOTE: The system cannot complete a full diagnosis unless vehicle is in the ON mode.

1. Select the Start Diag icon to check the connection between the audio unit and related
components. When the connection diagnosis is in progress, the icon (A) indicates Detecting...
, and each icon turns white. If the connection is OK, the icon turns green. If the connection is
NG, the icon turns red. Check for connection between the audio unit and related unit on the
failure connection line.
NOTE: When the item is a variation equipment, the icon shows yellow, and it is not reflected in
diagnosis.

2. If the connection diagnosis is finished, press the steering commander switch buttons (the
TALK button, PICK-UP button, and the HANG-UP/BACK button) to check the HFL switch. As
each button is pressed, the corresponding icon on the display should turn green.

3. Press the TALK button, and within 5 seconds in a normal voice say ' 'testing' '. The Mic Level
indicator on the screen should momentarily turn green.

4. If all the diagnosis are OK, the icon (A) indicates OK. Select the Exit Diag icon to exit the
diagnostic mode. The In Line Diag should not appear again.

Forced Completing of In Line Diag and Linking

Follow these steps to prevent the screen from appearing in the future:

1. While displaying the In Line Diag screen, press and hold the HOME button, the SOURCE
button, and the AUDIO POWER ( ) button until the Select Diagnosis Items menu screen is
displayed.

2. While displaying the Select Diagnosis Items menu screen, press and hold the HOME button
until the InLine Diag setting screen is displayed.
3. Set the Inline Diag Setting to OK (complete). The system restarts and a normal start-up
process occurs. The In Line Diag should not appear again.
Detail Information & Setting

This section allows you to run a specific diagnosis and allows additional setting choices for some
screens that are not shown when touching an icon from the System Links screen.

Select the item you want to check, and the test begins. To return to the previous screen, select
the Return icon.
Monitor Check
Unit Check
Audio Check
Guideline Setup
Functional Setup
Version
B-CAN*
F-CAN*
Car Status*
GPS Information
System Update
Smartphone information

*: Refer to the Unit Check for details.

LaneWatch (With LaneWatch)

This diagnosis checks the LaneWatch status.

 If Connection shows hyphen ( - ), check for hard error codes.
Error Status: Indicates LaneWatch camera status OK or NG. If Error Status shows NG,
replace the LaneWatch camera. When the LaneWatch camera is disconnected, the status
shows hyphen ( - ).
If Error Status shows OK, press the HOME button to display the LaneWatch camera image.
To return to the previous screen, press the HOME button again.
LaneWatch Switch: LaneWatch switch status on or off. When the LaneWatch switch is
pressing, the status shows ON. When the LaneWatch switch is released, the status shows
hyphen ( - ).
B-CAN: Checks whether the audio unit has received specific B-CAN data from the body
control module. If B-CAN shows NG, check for B-CAN DTCs with the HDS. If DTCs are not
detected, check for B-CAN lines continuity between the audio unit and the body control
module.
If Connection, Error Status, LaneWatch Switch, and B-CAN shows OK, the LaneWatch
camera aiming procedure is available. If the LaneWatch camera need to aiming, refer to the
How to Start LaneWatch Camera Aiming. When the aiming fails, Aiming shows NG.

Monitor Check

These screens allow you to troubleshoot the LCD display on the center display unit. Select the
item you want to check, and follow the diagnostic instructions.
RGB Color
Gray Tone 1
Gray Tone 2
White Raster
Black Raster
Color Pattern
Touch Panel Check
Camera Display Adjustment

RGB Color

NOTE: Displaying an anomaly in this diagnosis screen is not necessarily a failure.

This screen verifies that the display is receiving the video (R, G, B, and Composite sync) signals
properly. The three primary colors should all appear without distortion. The combination of all
three should produce a central white section. If any of the color circles are missing, replace the
center display unit.

The diagnostic screen is displayed in full screen mode while pressing the HOME button.
Gray Tone 1

NOTE: Displaying an anomaly in this diagnosis screen is not necessarily a failure.

This screen checks problems with contrast in 16 gradations. You should be able to see the
changes from bar to bar across the scale. It is normal for the two bars on either side to appear the
same.

The diagnostic screen is displayed in full screen mode while pressing the HOME button.

Gray Tone 2

NOTE: Displaying an anomaly in this diagnosis screen is not necessarily a failure.

This screen checks problems with contrast in 64 gradations. You should be able to see the
changes from bar to bar across the scale.

The diagnostic screen is displayed in full screen mode while pressing the HOME button.
White Raster

NOTE: Displaying an anomaly in this diagnosis screen is not necessarily a failure.

This screen checks for pixels that may be dead (off). The entire display must be white.

The diagnostic screen is displayed in full screen mode while pressing the HOME button.

Black Raster

NOTE: Displaying an anomaly in this diagnosis screen is not necessarily a failure.

This screen checks for pixels that may be stuck on. The entire display must be black.

The diagnostic screen is displayed in full screen mode while pressing the HOME button.

Color Pattern

NOTE: Displaying an anomaly in this diagnosis screen is not necessarily a failure.

The screen shows the colors being used for the map and menu screens. This is for factory use
only. To check the color signal, use the RGB Color diagnosis.

The diagnostic screen is displayed in full screen mode while pressing the HOME button.
Touch Panel Check

This check allows you to check the sensitivity of touch panel. If the screen is operated in the state
while the telop (A) is displayed, the track changes to black, and the action name (Tap, Double tap,
Pinch, Slide, and Flick) appears on the caption (B) for 5 seconds. The screen displays the
coordinates of where the screen was touched. If the BACK button is pressed, the screen returns
to the Monitor Check menu. If another location other than the location pressed responds, do the
Touch Panel Adjustment.

Camera Display Adjustment

This screen allows you to adjust the rear wide camera or LaneWatch camera* display position on
the touch screen.

*: With LaneWatch
When selecting the OK, the audio unit reflects the result of the camera display adjustment. Select
Return to exit the Camera Display Adjustment screen.

Unit Check (Quick Check)

These screens allow you to diagnose the audio unit and related units. Some of the tests and
screens that are displayed under the Unit Check are same as the checks listed under the Detail
Information & Setting.

To start the test, select the item you want to check.

NOTE: These items describe in indication order. Swipe the screen to check the next items.
HMI Unit
F-CAN
B-CAN
USB
Vehicle status
Mic
Hard Key
Error history
Rear wide camera
LaneWatch (With LaneWatch)
BSI-CTM (With BSI)
Parking Sensor (not supported)
Remote tuner
AMP (With stereo amplifier)
SXM-Ant. (With XM)
Center display
Meter Display
Air Conditioner
GPS-Ant.
Gyro Sensor
Wireless Charger (With wireless charger)
Telematics Diag (not supported)
HMI Unit

This diagnosis checks for the audio unit model name and serial number.
Model Name: Displays the audio unit manufacture's model number.
Serial Number : Displays the audio unit serial number. That should be the same as the serial
number found on the upper side of the audio unit.

F-CAN

NOTE:
This diagnosis must have the engine running.
Swipe the screen to check the next items.

This diagnosis checks whether the audio unit has received specific F-CAN data. If F-CAN shows
NO ERROR, an error is not detected between the F-CAN bus and the audio unit.
If F-CAN shows RX ERROR, replace the audio unit.
If F-CAN shows TIME OUT, There is a possibility that some items are NG (red icon). When
all the items from each transmitting unit is NG, check for F-CAN DTCs with the HDS. If DTCs
not detected, check for continuity in the F-CAN lines between the audio unit and the
transmitting unit.
B-CAN

NOTE:
This diagnosis must have the engine running.
Swipe the screen to check the next items.

This diagnosis checks whether the audio unit has received specific B-CAN data. If B-CAN shows
NO ERROR, an error is not detected between the B-CAN bus and the audio unit.
If B-CAN shows RX ERROR, replace the audio unit.
If B-CAN shows TIME OUT, There is a possibility that some items are NG (red icon). When
all the items from each transmitting unit is NG, check for B-CAN DTCs with the HDS. If DTCs
not detected, check for continuity in the B-CAN lines between the audio unit and the
transmitting unit.

Item Transmitting Unit

VSPNE, AT, ILLUMI, VINNO, Gauge control module
ACSTATE, STRG_ANG,
ODO_TRIP, TRICOM1 - 4,
PARKSENSE2,
HLSW_ICU/ICD,
MICU_ICU/ICD, RC_CTM, BSI-
CTM, MVC_CAM_SW2,
MVCPA_ST, METER_RMD,
GUIDE_INFO

USB

This diagnosis displays the USB device status that is connected to the audio unit.

If the USB memory device is connected to the USB port A or B, the screen displays the USB
controller status, the Bus power status, and the device status.
When you connect a USB mass storage device, you can see the capacity used and the amount
of free space available.

Vehicle Status

Use this screen to confirm that the audio unit is properly receiving input signals. The displayed
value changes each time according to the state of input signal.

NOTE: These items describe in indication order. Swipe the screen to check the next items.

Item Input Description

VSP VSP line 1: When the vehicle speed pulse is received from the PCM
0: When the vehicle speed pulse is not received from the
PCM
Speed B-CAN lines This item indicates the vehicle speed (km/h).
PARK PARKING BRAKE SW line 1: When the parking brake is applied

0: When the parking brake is not applied

Current received VIN B-CAN lines This item indicates the VIN that received from the PCM.
Initial registered VIN B-CAN lines This item indicates the initial registration VIN (10 is added to
the beginning of indicated VIN) that is saved in the audio unit.
Last registered VIN B-CAN lines This item indicates the additional registration VIN (11 is added
to the beginning of indicated VIN) when the audio unit is
substituted into another vehicle, or when a PCM is substituted
or replaced into this vehicle.
Back BACK LT line 1: When the transmission is shifted to R position/mode
0: When the transmission is shifted to any position/mode
other than R position/mode
IG B-CAN lines 1: When the vehicle is in the ON mode
0: When vehicle is in the ACCESSORY mode
C_METER_ILL_STATUS B-CAN lines 1: When parking lights, or headlights are on
0: When parking lights, or headlights are off
C_METER_ILL_CANCEL B-CAN lines 1: When the dashlights brightness control knob is more
than 90 % brightness with the parking lights turned on
0: When the dashlights brightness control knob is less
than 90 % brightness with the parking lights turned on
C_METER_ILL_STEP B-CAN lines With the parking lights on, use the dashlights brightness
control knob to dim and brighten the gauge. The value
changes from 1 (max low) to 22 (max high).
Mic

This diagnosis allows you to test the microphone. To properly check the microphone, make sure
you are sitting in the driver's seat.

NOTE: Before this diagnosis, check the response of the TALK button on the audio remote-HFL
switch by the Hard Key diagnosis.

Press the TALK button, and within 5 seconds in a normal voice say ' 'testing' ' toward the
microphone in the roof console. The Mic Level indicator on the screen should momentarily turn
green. The test is set to OK by indicating green more than 6 steps. If there is no Mic Level
movement when you speak, go to HFL does not work properly troubleshooting.

TALK BUTTON

Hard Key

This diagnosis checks the center display unit face switches (AUDIO POWER, HOME, MENU,
VOL+, VOL－, BACK ect), the audio remote-HFL switch. For this model, the audio remote-HFL
switch buttons use the data bus via the gauge control module for communications.

To complete the test, press each buttons. As each function is tested, the corresponding button on
the display should highlight. If the test cannot be completed, the corresponding icon on the Hard
Key menu screen shows red.
If any button of the center display unit does not respond, replace the center display unit.
If any button of the audio remote-HFL switch does not respond, replace the audio remote-
HFL switch.
If all buttons of the audio remote-HFL switch do not respond, go to Audio remote-HFL switch
does not work properly (audio unit buttons work) troubleshooting.
Error History

If you select Hard Error or Soft Error, you can see the error information. Refer to How to Check
for Error History to use this diagnosis.

Rear Wide Camera

This diagnosis checks the rearview camera connection.

If Connection shows NG, check for hard error codes.
If Connection shows OK, press the HOME button to display the rearview camera image. To
return to the previous screen, press the HOME button again.

LaneWatch (With LaneWatch)

This diagnosis checks the LaneWatch camera connection.

 If Connection shows NG, check for hard error codes.
If Connection shows OK, press the HOME button to display the LaneWatch camera image.
To return to the previous screen, press the HOME button again.

BSI_CTM (With BSI)

This diagnosis checks the BSI-CTM connection. Make sure the engine is running for this test.

If Connection shows NG, check for hard error codes.

Remote tuner

NOTE:
For factory use only. Do not alter any settings unless directed.
These items describe in indication order. Swipe the screen to check the next items.

This diagnosis displays the external AM/FM radio tuner (tuner unit) status.
 System μCom version display: Displays the tuner unit processor version.
Serial number display: Displays the tuner unit serial number. That should be the same as the
serial number found on the upper side of the tuner unit.
Frequency: Displays frequency of the radio station which is being received. Frequency can
be changed by selecting each icon (A).
Source can be changed in this order: AM→FM by selecting the Band Change icon.
Radio reception level display: Displays radio reception level (dB). The AM/FM antenna power
status can be changed to on or off by selecting the Ant +B OFF icon.
Target Area: Displays the destination of the tuner unit at 2 digits.
Operating status display: If the vehicle has diversity antenna, you can select the radio
antenna function from M (Main), S (Sub), or P (Diversity).
Displays the RBDS bit error ratio.
Displays the Sound/Noise ratio about the AM or FM.
Preset: Displays number of radio station preset about the AM or FM.
HD function: Displays the HD function is available (YES) or not available (NO).
VOL: Displays the current volume level.
Split Mode: Displays the split mode on or off. That can be changed by selecting the Split
Mode icon.
Blend Mode: Displays the blend mode which is being received. The blend mode can be
changed to AUTO/ANALOG/DIGITAL by selecting the Blend Mode icon.
HD Mode: Displays the HD mode status (ON: HD, OFF: analog) at frequency of the radio
station which is being received. That can be changed by selecting the HD Mode icon.

AMP (With stereo amplifier)

This diagnosis checks the stereo amplifier connection.

If Connection shows NG, go to No sound is heard from all of the speakers (display is normal)
troubleshooting.
SXM (With XM)

This diagnosis checks the XM antenna connection between the audio unit and the roof antenna.
The XM radio tuner is built into the audio unit.

If Connection shows NG, check for hard error codes.

Center display

These items describe in indication order. Swipe the screen to check the next items.

This diagnosis checks the digital bus (LVDS1) connection between the audio unit and the center
display unit, and displays the center display unit status.
Connection: Checks the digital bus (LVDS1) between the audio unit and the center display
unit. This item should indicate OK.
Unit Status Information: Indicates the center display unit processor status. If any of the status
indicates NG, turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode then the ON mode, and recheck the
status. If the status still indicates NG, replace the center display unit.
Unit Version Information: Displays the center display unit various version number.
Meter Display

This diagnosis checks the digital bus (LVDS2) between the audio unit and the gauge control
module.

If Connection shows NG, go to The MID does not display the audio unit information
troubleshooting.

A/C

This diagnosis detects if the vehicle is in the ON mode using information provided over the F-
CAN bus, then it tests the climate control signal via the B-CAN bus between the audio unit and
the climate control unit. Make sure the engine is running for this test.

If Connection shows NG, check for hard error codes.

GPS Unit Diagnosis

This diagnosis checks the GPS antenna connection.

If Antenna shows NG, the GPS antenna may be failure. Check for hard error codes.

Select Information to see the GPS satellite details.

Sensor Information

This diagnosis checks the gyro sensor in the audio unit. This devices detect how the vehicle
moves, and repositions the vehicle position icon on the map screen.

Select Information to see the GPS satellite details.

Wireless Charger (With wireless charger)

This diagnosis checks the wireless charger connection.

Audio Check

These screens allow you to troubleshoot the audio function. Select the Speaker Check icon.

Speaker Check

NOTE:
Make sure the audio system is off before this diagnosis.
While doing the diagnosis, the fader and the balance positions are set to the center.

This diagnosis checks the audio speakers individually.

Select the UP icon or the Down icon to check speakers. A tone should sound from the speaker.

When you select the Up icon, the system checks the speakers in this order:
→ → → → → → → → → → →
When you select the Down icon, the system checks the speakers in this order:
→ → → → → → → → → → →

Display Message Vehicle Test Condition

Front Left You should hear a tone from the driver's door speaker.
Front Right You should hear a tone from the front passenger's door speaker.
Surround Left You should hear a tone from the left rear speaker.
Surround Right You should hear a tone from the right rear speaker.
* Center You should hear a tone from the front center speaker.
* Subwoofer You should hear a tone from the subwoofer.
Front Tweeter Left You should hear a tone from the left door tweeter.
*: With stereo amplifier
 Display Message Vehicle Test Condition
Front Tweeter Right You should hear a tone from the right door tweeter.
Surround Tweeter Left You should hear a tone from the left rear tweeter.
Surround Tweeter Right You should hear a tone from the right rear tweeter.
ALL Channel You should hear a tone from all speakers.
*: With stereo amplifier

Guideline Setup

These screens adjusts the rearview camera image guide lines. Select the Rear Wide Camera
icon to adjust the guide lines.

Rear wide camera

Select the item you want to adjust.

Select the view mode icons (Wide View, Normal View, Top Down View) you want to adjust.

NOTE: The Top Down View cannot be selected when the dynamic guideline is selected.

Top Down View

Normal View
Wide View

Press the HOME button to display the sub menu.

Default: All guidelines can be reset to the factory specification.
SAVE: Reflects the result of the guideline adjustment.
Guideline Setup: Adjust the guideline.

Guideline Setup

Touch each arrow icon to move the guidelines up/down or left/right. The screen displays the
information about the adjusted distance and its direction.
If you want to keep the setting, press the HOME button to display the settings sub menu. The
audio unit saves the setting by selecting the Save icon on the settings sub menu.

Functional Setup

Select the item you want to check.

Backup Data Clear
Save User's Memory
LaneWatch information (with LaneWatch)
Anti-Theft Skip
Other (Not used)
AMP Repro (factory use only)
Display Repro (factory use only)
XM Repro (factory use only)

Backup Data Clear

This screen initializes the back-up data in the audio unit. Select the All Clear icon.
All Clear

The all clear function deletes the data in the audio unit, and restores it to the factory defaults. This
function is equivalent to Memory Refresh in the System Settings Menu.

When selecting the All Clear icon, the confirmation screen appears.

When selecting the Yes icon, the second confirmation screen appears.

When selecting the Yes icon, the system restarts after performing the All Clear process. After the
restart, a normal start-up process occurs.

Save User's Memory

When replacing the audio unit, this function allows the technician to transfer the customer's
personal data to the new audio unit. The transferred information includes their setup settings and
personal addresses. The dealer inserts a USB device into the USB port A or B, and then selects
the Save Users Memory function. The two functions in this diagnostic screen are Export and
Import. Export saves the customer's data to the USB device, and Import moves the USB device
files to the new audio unit.

This function does not start until you connect a USB device to the USB port.

1. Select the Export icon to move the customer's data from the original audio unit to the USB
device. Select the Yes icon on the Export User Data Confirmation screen. The process takes
only a couple of seconds. The system stores. DAT files on the USB device.
NOTE: If the Export icon is grayed out, check the USB port.

2. After replacing the new audio unit, allow the system to boot up. Insert the USB device into the
USB port A or B and enter the Save Users Memory in the System Diagnostic Mode.
3. Select the Import icon to move the two files stored by the Export process from the USB device
to the new audio unit. Select the Yes icon on the Import User Data Confirmation screen. When
the transfer is finished (a few seconds) the system automatically reboots. After the system
reboots, remove the USB device from the USB port.
LaneWatch information (With LaneWatch)

This diagnosis checks the LaneWatch status.

If Connection shows hyphen ( - ), check for hard error codes.
Failuer decision: Indicates LaneWatch camera status OK or NG. If Error Status shows NG,
replace the LaneWatch camera. When the LaneWatch camera is disconnected, the status
shows hyphen ( - ).
If Failuer decision shows OK, press the HOME button to display the LaneWatch camera
image. To return to the previous screen, press the HOME button again.
Switch conduction state: LaneWatch switch status on or off. When the LaneWatch switch is
pressing, the status shows ON. When the LaneWatch switch is released, the status shows
hyphen ( - ).
B-CAN abnormality determination: Checks whether the audio-navigation unit has received
specific B-CAN data from the body control module. If B-CAN shows NG, check for B-CAN
DTCs with the HDS. If DTCs are not detected, check for B-CAN lines continuity between the
audio-navigation unit and the body control module.
If Connection, Failuer decision, Switch conduction state, and B-CAN abnormality
determination shows OK, the LaneWatch camera aiming procedure is available. If the
LaneWatch camera need to aiming, refer to the How to Start LaneWatch Camera Aiming.
When the aiming fails, Aiming shows NG.

Anti-Theft Skip

This selection can cancel the anti-theft mode temporarily (for 150 seconds).

The Anti-Theft Skip icon is grayed out when the anti-theft mode is already canceled.

Version
This screen displays the current version information about each module in the audio unit.

B-CAN

Refer to the B-CAN in the Unit Check for details.

F-CAN

Refer to the F-CAN in the Unit Check for details.

Car Status

Refer to the Car Status in the Unit Check for details.

GPS Information

This screen shows the current status of GPS reception. The circular diagram shows the current
location of the GPS satellites (yellow numbers) as they would appear in the sky. The outer circle
represents the horizon (0 degrees elevation). The middle and inner circles represents 30 and 60
degrees respectively. The very center of the diagram (90 degrees elevation) is directly overhead.
Nearby obstructions, like tall buildings will block satellites in that direction. That is why it is
necessary to be in an open area to effectively troubleshoot GPS reception issues. The satellite
numbers shown on the diagram while pressing the HOME button that correspond to the PRN
(satellite ID number). There are always at least 24 active GPS satellites in orbit. Because
satellites fail, and have to be removed from service, spares are always parked in orbit, ready to
be activated. This is why the PRN can be greater than 24.

NOTE: When you use this screen for troubleshooting, park the vehicle outside, away from
buildings, tall trees, and hightension wires for at least 10 minutes with the engine running.
The Number of Satellites box shows the number of acquired satellites (maximum of 12). It
should contain three or more icons.
The Current Position shows latitude, longitude, and elevation (in feet). If there are less than
four satellites, the elevation can be grossly inaccurate.
The date/time field shows the current date and time that is received from the GPS satellite.
System Update

This screen displays the current version information about each module in the audio unit.

Smartphone information

This screen allows you to enable or disable the function about smartphone connection.
Audio System DTC Troubleshooting Index

NOTE: These DTCs cannot be read with the HDS. To view them, refer to How to Check for Error
History (Audio DTCs).

DTC Description Circuit

1102 USB Diag USB
1301 GPS Antenna Error GPS antenna
1304 Gyro Error 1 Internal gyro
1306 Vehicle Speed Pulse PCM
1702 XM Antenna Error XM antenna
2607 SXM Diag Audio unit (XM receiver)
2608 R-Camera Diag Rearview camera
2618 LaneWatch Diag LaneWatch camera
2620 BSI-CTM Diag BSI-CTM
2623 Remote Tuner Diag Tuner unit
2624 Center Display Diag Center display unit
2625 Meter Display Diag Gauge control module
2626 NFC Diag NFC
2628 Wireless Charger Diag Wireless charger
2629 External AMP Diag Stereo amplifier
2630 CAN Diag CAN line
2703 Aircon Diag Climate control unit
2707 Mic Diag Mic
Audio System Error Codes

NOTE: The audio system can display a few error codes when some problems are detected with
the audio unit, USB, and the XM radio. This is not a complete list of audio error codes. Refer to
symptom troubleshooting.

Audio Unit Error Messages (Display Audio Type)

Error Message Displayed Possible Cause Solution
The system is unable to start due to This message appears when the Park the vehicle in a cooler place for a
excessive heat. The system will start display temperature is too high. while. If the high temperature status is
after the system cools. cancelled, the audio unit turns on the
display.
Sounds are restricted because the This message appears when the stereo Park the vehicle in a cooler place for a
AMP is in protection mode. amplifier temperature is too high, and while. If the high temperature status is
the stereo amplifier inhibits sound cancelled, the stereo amplifier outputs
output. the sound again.

USB Error Messages

Error Message Displayed Possible Cause Solution
The connected USB device has a Faulty power supply to USB device. Check for hard error code:
problem. See Owner’s Manual*1 With navigation
Without navigation
Bad USB Device Please Check Faulty power supply to USB device. Disconnect the USB device, and turn
Owners Manual*2 the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode
then the ON mode. Then connect a
known-good USB device to the USB
port. If the error message appears on
the screen, replace the audio unit.
Connect Retry The audio unit failed to synchronize Appears when the system does not
with the iPod. acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the
iPod.
No Data No music file(s) can be found in a USB Check the music files in the USB
device. device.
USB Error There is a internal problem with the Replace the audio-navigation unit or
audio unit. the audio unit.
Unplayable File The audio unit cannot read the file (s). Check the files in the USB device.
There is a possibility that the files
have been damaged
The WMA files or the AAC file
cannot be read with the (DRM)
copy protection rights
Unsupported Unsupported USB device is Connect the applicable USB device
connected (see the Owner's Manual).
Unsupported file system
USB device communication error
Unsupported Version Unsupported version iPod is Connect the applicable iPod (see the
connected. Owner's Manual).

*1: Display audio type

*2: Color audio type

XM Error Messages
NOTE: Do these checks with the vehicle parked outside with a clear view of the southern horizon.
 Error Message Displayed Possible Cause Solution
Channel Not Subscribed Selected XM channel is not subscribed. Check the XM channel subscription
status.
Channel Not Available Selected XM channel is not in service. Try another XM channel.
No Signal Loss of signal. Both terrestrial and satellite antennas
have lost the signal. Park the vehicle
outside with a clear view of the
southern horizon.
Antenna Disconnected XM antenna/antenna lead error. Check for hard error code:
With navigation
Without navigation
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - AM/FM radio display is blank or no station
information is displayed
AM/FM radio display is blank or no station information is displayed
NOTE:
Check the vehicle 12 volt battery condition first.
Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals.
1. Problem verification:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Turn on the audio system, and select AM or FM.

Does the AM or FM radio station information display blank?

YES The failure is duplicated, go to step 2.

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. If the AM or FM sound is not

heard, go to Poor or no sound with AM/FM radio troubleshooting.■
2. Determine possible failure area (TUNER 6V line, others):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connector.

Tuner unit connector A (10P)

‐3. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 10
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there about 6.0 V?

YES The TUNER 6V wire is OK. Go to step 5.

NO Go to step 3.

3. Open wire check (TUNER 6V line):

‐1. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 1
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there about 6.0 V?

YES Repair an open in the wire between the audio-navigation unit and the tuner unit.■

NO The TUNER 6V wire is not open. Go to step 4.

4. Shorted wire check (TUNER 6V line):

‐1. Disconnect the following connector.

Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P)

‐2. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 1
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the audio-navigation unit and
the tuner unit.■
NO Replace the audio-navigation unit.■

5. Determine possible failure area (TUNER GND line, others):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 2
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES The TUNER GND wire is OK. Go to step 7.

NO Go to step 6.

6. Open wire check (TUNER GND line):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 9
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair an open in the wire between the audio-navigation unit and the tuner unit.■

NO Replace the audio-navigation unit.■

7. Determine possible failure area (TUNER 9V line, others):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle ON mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 1
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there about 9.0 V?

YES The TUNER 9V wire is OK. Go to step 10.

NO Go to step 8.

8. Open wire check (TUNER 9V line):

‐1. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle ON mode
 Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 2
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there about 9.0 V?

YES Repair an open in the wire between the audio-navigation unit and the tuner unit.■

NO The TUNER 9V wire is not open. Go to step 9.

9. Shorted wire check (TUNER 9V line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connector.

Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P)

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 2
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the audio-navigation unit and
the tuner unit.■
NO Replace the audio-navigation unit.■

10. Shorted wire check (TUNER RS485+ line, TUNER RS485－ line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connector.

Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P)

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 5
Test point 2 Body ground

Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 7

Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit
and the tuner unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.■
NO The TUNER RS485+ and the TUNER RS485－ wires are not shorted to ground.
Go to step 11.
11. Shorted wire check (TUNER RS485+ line to TUNER RS485－ line):
 ‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.
Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 5
Test point 2 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 7

Is there continuity?

YES There is a short in the wires between the audio-navigation unit and the tuner unit.
Replace the affected shielded harness.■
NO The TUNER RS485+ wire and the TUNER RS485－ wire are not shorted. Go to
step 12.
12. Shorted wire check (TUNER RS485 SH line to another lines):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 15
Test point 2 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 14

Test point 1 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 16

Test point 2 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 14

Is there continuity?

YES There is a short in the wires between the audio-navigation unit and the tuner unit.
Replace the affected shielded harness.■
NO The TUNER RS485 SH wire is not shorted. Go to step 13.

13. Open wire check (TUNER RS485+ line, TUNER RS485－ line):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 5
Test point 2 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 15

Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 7

Test point 2 Audio-navigation unit connector D (16P) No. 16

Is there continuity?

YES The TUNER RS485+ and the TUNER RS485－ wires are OK. Go to step 14.

NO There is an open in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit and the tuner
unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.■
14. Tuner unit check (substitution):

‐1. Substitute a known-good tuner unit.

‐2. Reconnect all the connectors, and recheck.

Does the symptom go away?

YES Replace the original tuner unit.■

NO Replace the audio-navigation unit.■

Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - AM/FM radio display is blank or no station
information is displayed
AM/FM radio display is blank or no station information is displayed
NOTE:
Check the vehicle 12 volt battery condition first.
Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals.
1. Problem verification:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Turn on the audio system, and select AM or FM.

Does the AM or FM radio station information display blank?

YES The failure is duplicated, go to step 2.

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. If the AM or FM sound is not

heard, go to Poor or no sound with AM/FM radio troubleshooting.■
2. Determine possible failure area (TUNER 6V line, others):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connector.

Tuner unit connector A (10P)

‐3. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 10
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there about 6.0 V?

YES The TUNER 6V wire is OK. Go to step 5.

NO Go to step 3.

3. Open wire check (TUNER 6V line):

‐1. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 1
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there about 6.0 V?

YES Repair an open in the wire between the audio unit and the tuner unit.■

NO The TUNER 6V wire is not open. Go to step 4.

4. Shorted wire check (TUNER 6V line):

‐1. Disconnect the following connector.

Audio unit connector D (16P)

‐2. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
 Audio unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 1
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the audio unit and the tuner
unit.■
NO Replace the audio unit.■

5. Determine possible failure area (TUNER GND line, others):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 2
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES The TUNER GND wire is OK. Go to step 7.

NO Go to step 6.

6. Open wire check (TUNER GND line):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 9
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair an open in the wire between the audio unit and the tuner unit.■

NO Replace the audio unit.■

7. Determine possible failure area (TUNER 9V line, others):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle ON mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 1
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there about 9.0 V?

YES The TUNER 9V wire is OK. Go to step 10.

NO Go to step 8.

8. Open wire check (TUNER 9V line):

‐1. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle ON mode
 Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 2
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there about 9.0 V?

YES Repair an open in the wire between the audio unit and the tuner unit.■

NO The TUNER 9V wire is not open. Go to step 9.

9. Shorted wire check (TUNER 9V line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connector.

Audio unit connector D (16P)

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Audio unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 2
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the audio unit and the tuner
unit.■
NO Replace the audio unit.■

10. Shorted wire check (TUNER RS485+ line, TUNER RS485－ line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connector.

Audio unit connector D (16P)

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Audio unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 5
Test point 2 Body ground

Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 7

Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES There is a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the audio unit and the
tuner unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.■
NO The TUNER RS485+ and the TUNER RS485－ wires are not shorted to ground.
Go to step 11.
11. Shorted wire check (TUNER RS485+ line to TUNER RS485－ line):
 ‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.
Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Audio unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 5
Test point 2 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 7

Is there continuity?

YES There is a short in the wires between the audio unit and the tuner unit. Replace
the affected shielded harness.■
NO The TUNER RS485+ wire and the TUNER RS485－ wire are not shorted. Go to
step 12.
12. Shorted wire check (TUNER RS485 SH line to another lines):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Audio unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 15
Test point 2 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 14

Test point 1 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 16

Test point 2 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 14

Is there continuity?

YES There is a short in the wires between the audio unit and the tuner unit. Replace
the affected shielded harness.■
NO The TUNER RS485 SH wire is not shorted. Go to step 13.

13. Open wire check (TUNER RS485+ line, TUNER RS485－ line):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Tuner unit connector A (10P): disconnected
Audio unit connector D (16P): disconnected
Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 5
Test point 2 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 15

Test point 1 Tuner unit connector A (10P) No. 7

Test point 2 Audio unit connector D (16P) No. 16

Is there continuity?

YES The TUNER RS485+ and the TUNER RS485－ wires are OK. Go to step 14.

NO There is an open in the wire(s) between the audio unit and the tuner unit. Replace
the affected shielded harness.■
14. Tuner unit check (substitution):

‐1. Substitute a known-good tuner unit.

‐2. Reconnect all the connectors, and recheck.

Does the symptom go away?

YES Replace the original tuner unit.■

NO Replace the audio unit.■

Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio remote-HFL switch does not work
properly (audio unit buttons work)

Audio remote-HFL switch does not work properly (audio unit buttons
work)
NOTE:
Check the vehicle 12 volt battery condition first.
Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals.
1. Problem verification:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Using the audio remote-HFL switch buttons, check if the audio system and the HFL
system operates properly.

Are the audio system and the HFL system operation OK?

YES Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

NO The failure is duplicated, go to step 2.

2. Determine possible failure area (audio remote-HFL switch, others):

‐1. Go into the System Diagnostic Mode, and use the Hard Key test under the Unit Check
menu.

‐2. Check the audio remote-HFL switch status.

Do all of the buttons fail to respond?

YES Go to step 3.

NO Replace the audio remote-HFL switch.■

3. Gauge control module DTCs check:

‐1. Check for gauge control module DTCs with the HDS.
DTC Description DTC
B1193 Gauge control module lost
communication with Steering Switch (LIN
bus connected)

Is DTC B1193 indicated?

YES Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

NO: Without navigation Go to step 4.

NO: With navigation Go to step 5.

4. Open wire check (B-CAN_H line, B-CAN_L line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)
Audio unit connector A (24P)

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Audio unit connector A (24P): disconnected
Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 22
Test point 2 Audio unit connector A (24P) No. 14

Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 23

Test point 2 Audio unit connector A (24P) No. 24

Is there continuity?

YES Replace the audio unit.■

NO Repair an open in the wire(s) between the audio unit and the gauge control
module.■
5. Open wire check (B-CAN_H line, B-CAN_L line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)
 Audio-navigation unit connector A (24P)

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Audio-navigation unit connector A (24P): disconnected
Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 22
Test point 2 Audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) No. 14

Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 23

Test point 2 Audio-navigation unit connector A (24P) No. 24

Is there continuity?

YES Replace the audio-navigation unit.■

NO Repair an open in the wire(s) between the audio-navigation unit and the gauge
control module.■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio remote-HFL switch does not work
properly (audio unit buttons work)

Audio remote-HFL switch does not work properly (audio unit buttons
work)
NOTE:
Check the vehicle 12 volt battery condition first.
If any button of the audio remote-HFL switch does not work, do the Knob Check in the
System Diagnostic Mode.
Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals.
1. Problem verification:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Using the audio remote-HFL switch buttons, check if the audio system and the HFL
system operates properly.

Are the audio system and the HFL system operation OK?

YES Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

NO The failure is duplicated, go to step 2.

2. Audio remote-HFL switch check:

 ‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connector.

Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector

‐3. Do the Audio Remote-HFL Switch Test.

Is the audio remote-HFL switch OK?

YES Go to step 3.

NO Replace the audio remote-HFL switch.■

3. Shorted wire check (AUDIO REMOTE SW line, HFT/NAVI REMOTE SW line):

‐1. Disconnect the following connector.

Audio unit connector A (24P)

‐2. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector: disconnected
Audio unit connector A (24P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio unit connector A (24P) No. 9
Test point 2 Body ground

Test point 1 Audio unit connector A (24P) No. 13

Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short to body ground in the wire(s) between the audio unit and the audio
remote-HFL switch. If the wires are OK, replace the cable reel.■
NO The AUDIO REMOTE SW and the HFT/NAVI REMOTE SW wires are not shorted
to ground. Go to step 4.
4. Open wire check (AUDIO REMOTE SW line, others):

‐1. Reconnect the audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector.

‐2. Measure the resistance between test points 1 and 2 as specified in the table.
Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Audio unit connector A (24P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio unit connector A (24P) No. 9
Test point 2 Audio unit connector A (24P) No. 19

Button held VOL DOWN VOL UP LEFT RIGHT SOURCE No button

down (-) (+) ( ) ( ) pressed
Resistance About 99 Ω About 357 Ω About 775 Ω About 1.7 kΩ About 3.7 kΩ About 10 kΩ

Is the resistance OK?

YES Go to step 5.

NO Repair an open or high resistance in the AUDIO REMOTE SW wire between the
audio unit and the audio remote-HFL switch. If the wire is OK, replace the cable
reel.■
5. Open wire check (HFT/NAVI REMOTE SW line):
‐1. Measure the resistance between test points 1 and 2 as specified in the table.
Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Audio unit connector A (24P): disconnected
Test point 1 Audio unit connector A (24P) No. 19
Test point 2 Audio unit connector A (24P) No. 13

Button held down HANG-UP/BACK PICK-UP TALK No button pressed

Resistance About 47 Ω About 222 Ω About 2.2 kΩ About 10 kΩ

Is the resistance OK?

YES Replace the audio unit.■

NO Repair an open or high resistance in the wire between the audio unit and the
audio remote-HFL switch. If the wire is OK, replace the cable reel.■
Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio system sound is weak or distorted
(display is normal)

Audio system sound is weak or distorted (display is normal)

NOTE:
Check the vehicle 12 volt battery condition first.
Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals.
1. Problem verification:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Go into the System Diagnostic Mode, and use the speaker check mode.

Is there tone from the speakers, and is the tone quality normal in each channel?

YES Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

NO The failure is duplicated, go to step 2.

2. Determine possible failure area (speaker lines, others):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

Stereo amplifier connector A (18P)
Stereo amplifier connector B (8P)

‐3. Measure the resistance between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Stereo amplifier connector A (18P): disconnected
Stereo amplifier connector B (8P): disconnected
 Test point 1: Test point 2: Resistance
Stereo amplifier Stereo amplifier
connector A (18P) connector A (18P)
No. 2 No. 4 About 2 Ω
No. 5 No. 6 About 4 Ω
No. 7 No. 8 About 4 Ω
No. 9 No. 10 About 4 Ω
No. 11 No. 18 About 4 Ω
No. 12 No. 13 About 4 Ω
No. 14 No. 15 About 3.2 Ω
No. 16 No. 17 About 3.2 Ω

Test point 1: Test point 2: Resistance

Stereo amplifier Stereo amplifier
connector B (8P) connector B (8P)
No. 5 No. 6 About 3.2 Ω
No. 7 No. 8 About 3.2 Ω

Is the resistance OK?

YES Go to step 4.

NO Go to step 3.

3. Speaker check:

‐1. Test the speaker on the faulty speaker lines.

Is the speaker OK?

YES Repair a faulty speaker wire(s) between the stereo amplifier and the speaker.■

NO Replace the speaker.■

4. Speaker visual check:

‐1. Remove the speaker that is duplicating the failure, and check the speaker for any
damage.

Is there any damage?

YES Replace the speaker.■

NO Replace the stereo amplifier.■

Audio System Symptom Troubleshooting - Audio system sound is weak or distorted
(display is normal)

Audio system sound is weak or distorted (display is normal)

NOTE:
Check the vehicle 12 volt battery condition first.
Check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals.
1. Problem verification:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Go into the System Diagnostic Mode, and use the speaker check mode.

Is there tone from the speakers, and is the tone quality normal in each channel?

YES Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

NO The failure is duplicated, go to step 2.

2. Determine possible failure area (speaker lines, others):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

Stereo amplifier connector A (18P)
Stereo amplifier connector B (8P)

‐3. Measure the resistance between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Stereo amplifier connector A (18P): disconnected
Stereo amplifier connector B (8P): disconnected
 Test point 1: Test point 2: Resistance
Stereo amplifier Stereo amplifier
connector A (18P) connector A (18P)
No. 2 No. 4 About 2 Ω
No. 5 No. 6 About 4 Ω
No. 7 No. 8 About 4 Ω
No. 9 No. 10 About 4 Ω
No. 11 No. 18 About 4 Ω
No. 12 No. 13 About 4 Ω
No. 14 No. 15 About 3.2 Ω
No. 16 No. 17 About 3.2 Ω

Test point 1: Test point 2: Resistance

Stereo amplifier Stereo amplifier
connector B (8P) connector B (8P)
No. 5 No. 6 About 3.2 Ω
No. 7 No. 8 About 3.2 Ω

Is the resistance OK?

YES Go to step 4.

NO Go to step 3.

3. Speaker check:

‐1. Test the speaker on the faulty speaker lines.

Is the speaker OK?

YES Repair a faulty speaker wire(s) between the stereo amplifier and the speaker.■

NO Replace the speaker.■

4. Speaker visual check:

‐1. Remove the speaker that is duplicating the failure, and check the speaker for any
damage.

Is there any damage?

YES Replace the speaker.■

NO Replace the stereo amplifier.■

Audio Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Connector Index
Audio Unit Connector A (24P)
Audio Unit Connector B (20P)
Audio Unit Connector C (3P)
Audio Unit Connector D (3P)
Audio Unit Connector E (5P)
Audio Unit Connector F (12P) (With rearview camera)

Audio Unit Connector A (24P) (female terminals)

2 1
- 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 GRY
PNK LT LT - - WHT BRN YEL WHT BLU
BLU BLU
4 3
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
- RED
BLU YEL - GRN - YEL BLK RED GRY PNK

Cavity Terminal Name Description

A1 GND Ground for audio unit (G504)
A2 Not used ―――
A3 ＋B AUDIO Continuous power source
A4 Not used ―――
A5 RL SPKR＋ Outputs sound signal for left rear speaker
A6 RL SPKR－ Outputs sound signal for left rear speaker
A7 RR SPKR＋ Outputs sound signal for right rear speaker
A8 RR SPKR－ Outputs sound signal for right rear speaker
A9* AUDIO REMOTE SW Detects control signal from audio remote switch
A10 Not used ―――
A11 Not used ―――
A12 K LINE Detects scan tool signal (serial data)
A13* HFT/NAVI REMOTE SW Detects control signal from HFL switch
A14 B-CAN_H Communication signal
A15 FL SPKR＋ Outputs sound signal for driver's door speaker
A16 FL SPKR－ Outputs sound signal for driver's door speaker
A17 FR SPKR＋ Outputs sound signal for front passenger's door speaker
A18 FR SPKR－ Outputs sound signal for front passenger's door speaker
A19* REMOTE SW GND Ground for audio remote-HFL switch
A20 Not used ―――
A21 SWD＋B Outputs signal for active noise cancellation unit switching on/off
A22 Not used ―――
A23 IG1 WHIT DIODE Power source for accessories
FMVSS
*: Mexico models
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
A24 B-CAN_L Communication signal
*: Mexico models

Audio Unit Connector B (20P) (female terminals)

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BLU GRY LT PNK - - - RED WHT RED
BLU
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
WHT - - GRN - - - BLU GRN BLK

Cavity Terminal Name Description

B1 ANC R＋ Inputs noise cancelling signal from active noise cancellation unit
B2 ANC R－ Inputs noise cancelling signal from active noise cancellation unit
B3 AUD F MIX Inputs audio mixing signal for front channels
B4 Not used ―――
B5 Not used ―――
B6 Not used ―――
B7 MIC GND Ground for front HFL-ANC microphone
B8 MIC PWR Power source for front HFL-ANC microphone
B9 SH MIC Shield for terminals No. 7 and No. 10
B10 MIC＋ Inputs sound signal from front HFL microphone
B11 ANC F＋ Inputs noise cancelling signal from active noise cancellation unit
B12 ANC F－ Inputs noise cancelling signal from active noise cancellation unit
B13 AUD F MIX GND Inputs noise cancelling signal from active noise cancellation unit
B14 Not used ―――
B15 Not used ―――
B16 Not used ―――
B17 HFT MUTE Outputs front HFL microphone directivity switching signal
B18 Not used ―――
B19 Not used ―――
B20 DISP CONT Outputs signal for center display unit switching on/off

Audio Unit Connector C (3P) (female terminals)

BLK

BLK
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
C1 SWD ＋B Power source for AM/FM antenna amplifier
C2 AM/FM Inputs AM/FM signal
C3 SH (AM/FM) Shield for terminal No. 2

Audio Unit Connector D (3P)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

D1 LVDS1＋ Communication signal for center display unit
D2 LVDS1－ Communication signal for center display unit
D3 LVDS1 SH Shield for terminals No. 1 and No. 2

Audio Unit Connector E (5P) (female terminals)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

E1 USB1 GND Ground for USB port
E2 USB1 VBUS Outputs power source for USB port
E3 USB1 DATA＋ Communication signal
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
E4 USB1 DATA－ Communication signal
E5 USB1 SH Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4

Audio Unit Connector F (12P) (female terminals) (With rearview camera)

6 5 4 3 2 1
WHT RED BRN - - -
12 11 10 9 8 7
GRY YEL GRN BLK - -

Cavity Terminal Name Description

F1 Not used ―――
F2 Not used ―――
F3 Not used ―――
F4 CAMERA ADPT Detects connection for rearview camera
F5 CAMERA V Inputs NTSC video signal from rearview camera
F6 CAMERA GND Ground for rearview camera
F7 Not used ―――
F8 Not used ―――
F9 CAMERA VCC Power source for rearview camera
F10 CAMERA BIT0 Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
F11 CAMERA BIT1 Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
F12 SH CAMERA Shield for terminals No. 5, No. 6, and No. 9
Audio Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Connector Index
Audio Unit Connector A (24P)
Audio Unit Connector C (2P) (Without stereo amplifier)
Audio Unit Connector C (6P) (With stereo amplifier)
Audio Unit Connector D (16P)
Audio Unit Connector E (36P)
Audio Unit Connector F (36P) (With LaneWatch)
Audio Unit Connector G (10P)
Audio Unit Connector H (6P)
Audio Unit Connector J (2P)
Audio Unit Connector K (2P)
Audio Unit Connector M (10P) (With NFC)
Audio Unit Connector N (2P) (With XM)

Audio Unit Connector A (24P) (female terminals)

2 1
GRY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
GRY
PNK - LT - - - BRN YEL WHT BLU
BLU
4 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 3
*2 BLU YEL BLU GRN - - BLK RED GRY PNK *1

*1: BRN (With auto idle stop system), RED (Without auto idle stop system)
*2: PNK (With auto idle stop system), RED (Without auto idle stop system)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

A1 GND Ground for audio unit (G504)
A2 GND Ground for audio unit (G504)
A3 +B BACKUP2 SUB*4 Continuous power source
+B AUDIO*3
A4 ＋B AUDIO SUB Continuous sub power source
A5*1 RL SPKR＋ Outputs sound signal for left rear speaker and left rear tweter
A6*1 RL SPKR－ Outputs sound signal for left rear speaker and left rear tweter
A7*1 RR SPKR＋ Outputs sound signal for right rear speaker and right rear tweter
A8*1 RR SPKR－ Outputs sound signal for right rear speaker and right rear tweter
A9 Not used ―――
A10 Not used ―――
A11 Not used ―――
A12 K LINE Detects scan tool signal (serial data)
A13 Not used ―――
A14 B-CAN_H Communication signal
A15*1 FL SPKR＋ Outputs sound signal for driver's door speaker and left front tweeter
A16*1 FL SPKR－ Outputs sound signal for driver's door speaker and left front tweeter
*1: Without stereo amplifier
*2: With stereo amplifier
*3: Without auto idle stop system
*4: With auto idle stop system
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
*1 FR SPKR＋ Outputs sound signal for front passenger's door speaker and right front tweeter
A17
A18*1 FR SPKR－ Outputs sound signal for front passenger's door speaker and right front tweeter
A19 Not used ―――
A20 Not used ―――
A21 SWD＋B Outputs signal for stereo amplifier*2 and active noise cancellation unit switching
on/off
A22 VSP Inputs vehicle speed pulse
A23 IG1 WITH DIODE Power source for accessories
FMVSS
A24 B-CAN_L Communication signal
*1: Without stereo amplifier
*2: With stereo amplifier
*3: Without auto idle stop system
*4: With auto idle stop system

Audio Unit Connector C (2P) (female terminals) (Without stereo amplifier)

BLK*

Cavity Terminal Name Description

C1 SPDIF1 SIG Communication signal for tuner unit
C2 SH (SPDIF1) Shield for terminal No. 1

Audio Unit Connector C (6P) (female terminals) (With stereo amplifier)

BLK* BLK*

Cavity Terminal Name Description

C1 SPDIF2 SIG Communication signal for stereo amplifier
C2 Not used ―――
C3 SPDIF1 SIG Communication signal for tuner unit
C4 SH (SPDIF2) Shield for terminals No. 1
C5 Not used ―――
C6 SH (SPDIF1) Shield for terminals No. 3

Audio Unit Connector D (16P) (female terminals)

 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PNK BLU GRY - BLU GRY YEL RED
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
PNK BLU GRY - GRN PNK - BLK

Cavity Terminal Name Description

D1 TUNER 6V Power source for tuner unit
D2 TUNER 9V Power source for tuner unit
D3* AUX NAVI SH Shield for terminals No. 4, No. 11 and No. 12
D4* AUX NAVI GND Basis ground for terminal No. 11 and No. 12
D5 Not used ―――
D6* AMP RS485 SH Shield for terminals No. 7 and No. 8
D7* RS485＋ Communication signal for stereo amplifier
D8* RS485－ Communication signal for stereo amplifier
D9 TUNER GND Ground for tuner unit
D10 Not used ―――
D11* AUX BEEP Outputs sound signal for beep
D12* AUX NAVI Outputs sound signal
D13 Not used ―――
D14 TUNER RS485 SH Shield for terminals No. 15 and No. 16
D15 TUNER RS485＋ Communication signal for tuner unit
D16 TUNER RS485－ Communication signal for tuner unit
*: With stereo amplifier

Audio Unit Connector E (36P) (female terminals)

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
- - BRN GRN GRY WHT WHT - BRN - - - PNK GRY GRN BLU WHT RED
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
- - - YEL RED BLK *2 *1 BRN - - - - BLU LT RED GRN BLK
BLU

*1: PUR (With CAN gateway, WHT (Without CAN gateway)

*2: GRN (With CAN gateway), RED (Without CAN gateway)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

1 ANC R＋ Power source for active noise cancellation unit
E1*
E2*1 ANC R－ Power source for active noise cancellation unit
*1: Without stereo amplifier
*2: Without CAN gateway
*3: With CAN gateway
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
E3*1 AUD F MIX GND Basis ground for terminal No. 21
E4 HFT MUTE Outputs front HFL microphone directivity switching signal
E5 SH MIC Shield for terminals No. 6 and No. 23
E6 MIC GND Ground for front HFL-ANC microphone
E7 Not used ―――
E8 Not used ―――
E9 Not used ―――
E10 PARK BUSY Detects parking brake on signal
E11 Not used ―――
E12 DISP CONT Outputs signal for center display unit switching on/off
E13 CAMERA GND Communication signal
E14 SH CAMERA Shield for terminals No. 13, No. 15, No. 31, No. 32 and No. 33
E15 CAMERA BIT0 Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E16 CAMERA ADPT Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E17 Not used ―――
E18 Not used ―――
E19*1 ANC F＋ Power source for active noise cancellation unit
E20*1 ANC F－ Power source for active noise cancellation unit
E21*1 AUD F MIX Inputs audio mixing signal for front channels
E22 MIC PWR Power source for front HFL-ANC microphone
E23 MIC＋ Inputs sound signal from front HFL microphone
E24 Not used ―――
E25 Not used ―――
E26 Not used ―――
E27 Not used ―――
E28 PARK BUSY Detects parking brake on signal
E29 F-CAN A_H*2 Communication signal
F-CAN C_H*3
E30 F-CAN A_L*2 Communication signal
F-CAN C_L*3
E31 CAMERA VCC Power source for rearview camera
E32 CAMERA V Inputs NTSC video signal from rearview camera
E33 CAMERA BIT1 Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E34 Not used ―――
E35 Not used ―――
E36 Not used ―――
*1: Without stereo amplifier
*2: Without CAN gateway
*3: With CAN gateway

Audio Unit Connector F (36P) (female terminals) (With LaneWatch)

 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
- - - - - - - - - - WHT WHT GRY - - - - -
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
- - - - - - - - - - GRN BLK RED - - - - -

Cavity Terminal Name Description

F1 Not used ―――
F2 Not used ―――
F3 Not used ―――
F4 Not used ―――
F5 Not used ―――
F6 SH LWC CAM Shield for terminals No. 7, No. 24, No. 25, and No. 26
F7 LWC CAM VGND Ground for LaneWatch camera
F8 LANEWATCH SW Detects LaneWatch on/off signal from LaneWatch switch
F9 Not used ―――
F10 Not used ―――
F11 Not used ―――
F12 Not used ―――
F13 Not used ―――
F14 Not used ―――
F15 Not used ―――
F16 Not used ―――
F17 Not used ―――
F18 Not used ―――
F19 Not used ―――
F20 Not used ―――
F21 Not used ―――
F22 Not used ―――
F23 Not used ―――
F24 LWC CAM VCC Power source for LaneWatch camera
F25 LWC CAM VID Inputs video signal from LaneWatch camera
F26 LWC UART AS Communication signal for LaneWatch camera
F27 Not used ―――
F28 Not used ―――
F29 Not used ―――
F30 Not used ―――
F31 Not used ―――
F32 Not used ―――
F33 Not used ―――
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
F34 Not used ―――
F35 Not used ―――
F36 Not used ―――

Audio Unit Connector G (10P) (female terminals)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

G1 USB1 GND Ground for USB port A
G2 USB1 VBUS Outputs power source for USB port A
G3 USB1 DATA＋ Communication signal
G4 USB1 DATA－ Communication signal
G5 USB1 SH Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4
G6* USB2 GND Ground for USB port B
G7* USB2 VBUS Outputs power source for USB port B
G8* USB2 DATA＋ Communication signal
G9* USB2 DATA－ Communication signal
G10* USB2 SH Shield for terminals No. 6, No. 7, No. 8, and No. 9
*: With USB port B

Audio Unit Connector H (6P) (female terminals)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

H1 LVDS2＋ Communication signal for gauge control module
H2 LVDS2－ Communication signal for gauge control module
H3 LVDS2 SH Shield for terminals No. 1 and No. 2
H4 LVDS1＋ Communication signal for center display unit
H5 LVDS1－ Communication signal for center display unit
H6 LVDS1 SH Shield for terminals No. 4 and No. 5
Audio Unit Connector J (2P) (female terminals)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

J1 GPS Inputs GPS signal
J2 SH (GPS) Shield for terminal No. 1

Audio Unit Connector K (2P) (female terminals)

BLK

Cavity Terminal Name Description

K1 Wi-Fi Inputs Wi-Fi signal
K2 SH(Wi-Fi) Shield for terminal No. 1

Audio Unit Connector M (10P) (female terminals) (With NFC)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

M1 USB3 GND Ground for near field communication unit
M2 USB3 VBUS Outputs power source for near field communication unit
M3 USB3 DATA＋ Communication signal
M4 USB3 DATA－ Communication signal
M5 USB3 SH Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4
M6 Not used ―――
M7 Not used ―――
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
M8 Not used ―――
M9 Not used ―――
M10 Not used ―――

Audio Unit Connector N (2P) (female terminals) (With XM)

BLK

Cavity Terminal Name Description

N1 SAT/TER Inputs satellite/terrestrial signal
N2 SH(SAT/TER) Shield for terminal No. 1
Audio unit power will not turn on (No information on display)

Diagnostic Procedure

1. Symptom Troubleshooting
Audio unit power will not turn on (No information on display)

Diagnostic Procedure

1. Symptom Troubleshooting
Audio Unit Removal and Installation

NOTE:
When working on electronic components, make sure the work area is clean and dust free.
Make sure your hands are clean and free of oils and grease.
If you are replacing the audio unit, write down the audio presets (if possible), and enter them into the new audio unit.

1
 2.
9.4
(0.96, 6.9)

2.
9.4
(0.96, 6.9)
3.
3.7
(0.38, 2.7)

3.
3.7
2. (0.38, 2.7)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. Center Pocket - Remove

2. Audio Unit - Remove

3. Audio Unit Brackets - Remove

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE:
Make sure all the connectors are secure.
After Installation, do the System Links in the System
Diagnostic Mode to confirm that there are no problems
in the system.
Audio Unit Removal and Installation

NOTE:
When working on electronic components, make sure the work area is clean and dust free.
Make sure your hands are clean and free of oils and grease.
If you are replacing the audio unit, write down the audio presets (if possible), and enter them into the new audio unit.

1
 2.
9.4
(0.96, 6.9)

2.
9.4
(0.96, 6.9)

3.
3.7
(0.38, 2.7)

3.
2.
3.7
(0.38, 2.7)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. Center Pocket - Remove

2. Audio Unit - Remove

3. Audio Unit Bracket - Remove

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE:
Make sure all the connectors are secure.
After Installation, do the System Links in the System
Diagnostic Mode to confirm that there are no problems
in the system.
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Connector Index
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector A (24P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector C (6P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector D (16P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector E (36P) (Without telematics
control unit)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector E (36P) (With telematics control
unit)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector F (36P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector G (10P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector H (6P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector J (2P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector K (2P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector M (10P) (With telematics control
unit)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector N (2P) (With XM)

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector A (24P) (female terminals)

2 1
GRY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
GRY
PNK - LT - - - - - - -
BLU
4 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 3
RED BLU YEL BLU GRN - - - - - - RED

Cavity Terminal Name Description

A1 GND Ground for audio-navigation unit (G504)
A2 GND Ground for audio-navigation unit (G504)
A3 ＋B AUDIO Continuous power source
A4 ＋B AUDIO SUB Continuous power source
A5 Not used ―――
A6 Not used ―――
A7 Not used ―――
A8 Not used ―――
A9 Not used ―――
A10 Not used ―――
A11 Not used ―――
A12 K LINE Detects scan tool signal (serial data)
A13 Not used ―――
A14 B-CAN_H Communication signal
A15 Not used ―――
A16 Not used ―――
A17 Not used ―――
A18 Not used ―――
A19 Not used ―――
A20 Not used ―――
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
A21 SWD＋B Outputs signal for stereo amplifier and active noise cancellation unit switching
on/off
A22 VSP Inputs vehicle speed pulse
A23 IG1 WITH DIODE Power source for accessories
FMVSS
A24 B-CAN_L Communication signal

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector C (6P) (female terminals)

BLK BLK

Cavity Terminal Name Description

C1 SPDIF2 SIG Communication signal for stereo amplifier
C2 Not used ―――
C3 SPDIF1 SIG Communication signal for tuner unit
C4 SH (SPDIF2) Shield for terminals No. 1
C5 Not used ―――
C6 SH (SPDIF1) Shield for terminals No. 3

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector D (16P) (female terminals)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PNK BLU GRY - BLU GRY YEL RED
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
PNK BLU GRY - GRN PNK - BLK

Cavity Terminal Name Description

D1 TUNER 6V Power source for tuner unit
D2 TUNER 9V Power source for tuner unit
D3 AUX NAVI SH Shield for terminals No. 4, No. 11 and No. 12
D4 AUX NAVI GND Basis ground for terminal No. 11 and No. 12
D5 Not used ―――
D6 AMP RS485 SH Shield for terminals No. 7 and No. 8
D7 RS485＋ Communication signal for stereo amplifier
D8 RS485－ Communication signal for stereo amplifier
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
D9 TUNER GND Ground for tuner unit
D10 Not used ―――
D11 AUX BEEP Outputs sound signal for beep
D12 AUX NAVI Outputs sound signal
D13 Not used ―――
D14 TUNER RS485 SH Shield for terminals No. 15 and No. 16
D15 TUNER RS485＋ Communication signal for tuner unit
D16 TUNER RS485－ Communication signal for tuner unit

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector E (36P) (female terminals) (Without telematics control

unit)

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
- - BRN GRN GRY WHT WHT - BRN - - - PNK GRY GRN - - -
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
- - - YEL RED BLK GRN PUR BRN - - - - BLU LT - - -
BLU

Cavity Terminal Name Description

E1 Not used ―――
E2 Not used ―――
E3 Not used ―――
E4 HFT MUTE Outputs front HFL microphone directivity switching signal
E5 SH MIC Shield for terminals No. 6 and No. 23
E6 MIC GND Ground for front HFL-ANC microphone
E7 Not used ―――
E8 Not used ―――
E9 Not used ―――
E10 PARK BUSY Detects parking brake on signal
E11 Not used ―――
E12 DISP CONT Outputs signal for center display unit switching on/off
E13 CAMERA GND Communication signal
E14 SH CAMERA Shield for terminals No. 13, No. 15, No. 31, No. 32 and No. 33
E15 CAMERA BIT0 Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E16 CAMERA ADPT Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E17 Not used ―――
E18 Not used ―――
E19 Not used ―――
E20 Not used ―――
E21 Not used ―――
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
E22 MIC PWR Power source for front HFL-ANC microphone
E23 MIC＋ Inputs sound signal from front HFL microphone
E24 Not used ―――
E25 Not used ―――
E26 Not used ―――
E27 Not used ―――
E28 PARK BUSY Detects parking brake on signal
E29 F-CAN C_H Communication signal
E30 F-CAN C_L Communication signal
E31 CAMERA VCC Power source for rearview camera
E32 CAMERA V Inputs NTSC video signal from rearview camera
E33 CAMERA BIT1 Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E34 Not used ―――
E35 Not used ―――
E36 Not used ―――

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector E (36P) (female terminals) (With telematics control unit)

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
- - BRN GRN GRY WHT WHT - BRN - - - BRN GRY BLU - - -

36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
- - - YEL RED BLK GRN PUR BRN - - - - YEL - - - -

Cavity Terminal Name Description

E1 Not used ―――
E2 Not used ―――
E3 Not used ―――
E4 ECALL HFT MUTE Outputs telematics control unit directivity switching signal
E5 SH ECALL NAVI MIC Shield for terminals No. 6 and No. 23
E6 ECALL NAVI MIC－ Ground for telematics control unit
E7 Not used ―――
E8 Not used ―――
E9 Not used ―――
E10 PARK BUSY Detects parking brake on signal
E11 Not used ―――
E12 DISP CONT Outputs signal for center display unit switching on/off
E13 CAMERA GND Communication signal
E14 SH CAMERA Shield for terminals No. 13, No. 15, No. 31, No. 32 and No. 33
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
E15 CAMERA BIT0 Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E16 CAMERA ADPT Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E17 Not used ―――
E18 Not used ―――
E19 Not used ―――
E20 Not used ―――
E21 Not used ―――
E22 Not used ―――
E23 ECALL NAVI MIC＋ Inputs sound signal from telematics control unit
E24 Not used ―――
E25 Not used ―――
E26 Not used ―――
E27 Not used ―――
E28 PARK BUSY Detects parking brake on signal
E29 F-CAN C_H Communication signal
E30 F-CAN C_L Communication signal
E31 CAMERA VCC Power source for rearview camera
E32 CAMERA V Inputs NTSC video signal from rearview camera
E33 CAMERA BIT1 Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E34 Not used ―――
E35 Not used ―――
E36 Not used ―――

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector F (36P) (female terminals)

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GRY*2 YEL*2 - - - - - - - - WHT*1 WHT*1 GRY*1 - - - - -
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
- GRN*2 - - - - - - - - GRN*1 BLK*1 RED*1 - - - - -

*1: With LaneWatch

*2: With telematics control unit

Cavity Terminal Name Description

F1 Not used ―――
F2 Not used ―――
F3 Not used ―――
F4 Not used ―――
F5 Not used ―――
F6*1 SH LWC CAM Shield for terminals No. 7, No. 24, No. 25, and No. 26
F7*1 LWC CAM VGND Ground for LaneWatch camera
*1: With LaneWatch
*2: With telematics control unit
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
F8*1 LANEWATCH SW Detects LaneWatch on/off signal from LaneWatch switch
F9 Not used ―――
F10 Not used ―――
F11 Not used ―――
F12 Not used ―――
F13 Not used ―――
F14 Not used ―――
F15 Not used ―――
F16 Not used ―――
F17*2 TELEM SIG－ Outputs sound prompts
F18*2 SH TELEM SIG Shield for terminals No. 17 and No. 35
F19 Not used ―――
F20 Not used ―――
F21 Not used ―――
F22 Not used ―――
F23 Not used ―――
F24*1 LWC CAM VCC Power source for LaneWatch camera
F25*1 LWC CAM VID Inputs video signal from LaneWatch camera
*1 LWC UART AS Communication signal for LaneWatch camera
F26
F27 Not used ―――
F28 Not used ―――
F29 Not used ―――
F30 Not used ―――
F31 Not used ―――
F32 Not used ―――
F33 Not used ―――
F34 Not used ―――
F35*2 TELEM SIG＋ Outputs sound prompts
F36 Not used ―――
*1: With LaneWatch
*2: With telematics control unit

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector G (10P) (female terminals)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

G1 USB1 GND Ground for USB port A
G2 USB1 VBUS Outputs power source for USB port A
G3 USB1 DATA＋ Communication signal
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
G4 USB1 DATA－ Communication signal
G5 USB1 SH Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4
G6 USB2 GND Ground for USB port B
G7 USB2 VBUS Outputs power source for USB port B
G8 USB2 DATA＋ Communication signal
G9 USB2 DATA－ Communication signal
G10 USB2 SH Shield for terminals No. 6, No. 7, No. 8, and No. 9

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector H (6P) (female terminals)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

H1 LVDS2＋ Communication signal for gauge control module
H2 LVDS2－ Communication signal for gauge control module
H3 LVDS2 SH Shield for terminals No. 1 and No. 2
H4 LVDS1＋ Communication signal for center display unit
H5 LVDS1－ Communication signal for center display unit
H6 LVDS1 SH Shield for terminals No. 4 and No. 5

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector J (2P) (female terminals)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

J1 GPS Inputs GPS signal
J2 SH (GPS) Shield for terminal No. 1

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector K (2P) (female terminals)

BLK
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
K1 Wi-Fi Inputs Wi-Fi signal
K2 SH (Wi-Fi) Shield for terminal No. 1

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector M (10P) (female terminals) (With telematics control unit)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

M1 USB3 GND Ground for near field communication unit
M2 USB3 VBUS Outputs power source for near field communication unit
M3 USB3 DATA＋ Communication signal
M4 USB3 DATA－ Communication signal
M5 USB3 SH Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4
M6 TEL USB GND Ground for USB
M7 TEL USB VBUS Outputs power source for USB
M8 TEL USB DATA＋ Communication signal
M9 TEL USB DATA－ Communication signal
M10 TEL USB SH Shield for terminals No. 6, No. 7, No. 8, and No. 9

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector N (2P) (female terminals) (With XM)

BLK
Cavity Terminal Name Description
N1 SAT/TER Inputs satellite/terrestrial signal
N2 SH (SAT/TER) Shield for terminal No. 1
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Connector Index
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector A (24P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector C (6P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector D (16P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector E (36P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector F (36P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector G (10P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector H (6P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector J (2P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector K (2P)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector M (10P) (With telematics control
unit)
Audio-Navigation Unit Connector N (2P) (With XM)

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector A (24P) (female terminals)

2 1
GRY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
LT GRY
PNK - - - - - - - -
BLU
4 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 3
*2 BLU YEL BLU GRN - - - - - - *1

*1: BRN (With auto idle stop system), RED (Without auto idle stop system)
*2: PNK (With auto idle stop system), RED (Without auto idle stop system)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

A1 GND Ground for audio-navigation unit (G504)
A2 GND Ground for audio-navigation unit (G504)
A3 +B BACKUP2 SUB*1 Continuous power source
+B AUDIO*2
A4 ＋B AUDIO SUB Continuous power source
A5 Not used ―――
A6 Not used ―――
A7 Not used ―――
A8 Not used ―――
A9 Not used ―――
A10 Not used ―――
A11 Not used ―――
A12 K LINE Detects scan tool signal (serial data)
A13 Not used ―――
A14 B-CAN_H Communication signal
A15 Not used ―――
A16 Not used ―――
A17 Not used ―――
A18 Not used ―――
A19 Not used ―――
*1: With auto idle stop system
*2: Without auto idle stop system
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
A20 Not used ―――
A21 SWD＋B Outputs signal for stereo amplifier and active noise cancellation unit switching
on/off
A22 VSP Inputs vehicle speed pulse
A23 IG1 WITH DIODE Power source for accessories
FMVSS
A24 B-CAN_L Communication signal
*1: With auto idle stop system
*2: Without auto idle stop system

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector C (6P) (female terminals)

BLK BLK

Cavity Terminal Name Description

C1 SPDIF2 SIG Communication signal for stereo amplifier
C2 Not used ―――
C3 SPDIF1 SIG Communication signal for tuner unit
C4 SH (SPDIF2) Shield for terminals No. 1
C5 Not used ―――
C6 SH (SPDIF1) Shield for terminals No. 3

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector D (16P) (female terminals)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PNK BLU GRY - BLU GRY YEL RED
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
PNK BLU GRY - GRN PNK - BLK

Cavity Terminal Name Description

D1 TUNER 6V Power source for tuner unit
D2 TUNER 9V Power source for tuner unit
D3 AUX NAVI SH Shield for terminals No. 4, No. 11 and No. 12
D4 AUX NAVI GND Basis ground for terminal No. 11 and No. 12
D5 Not used ―――
D6 AMP RS485 SH Shield for terminals No. 7 and No. 8
D7 RS485＋ Communication signal for stereo amplifier
D8 RS485－ Communication signal for stereo amplifier
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
D9 TUNER GND Ground for tuner unit
D10 Not used ―――
D11 AUX BEEP Outputs sound signal for beep
D12 AUX NAVI Outputs sound signal
D13 Not used ―――
D14 TUNER RS485 SH Shield for terminals No. 15 and No. 16
D15 TUNER RS485＋ Communication signal for tuner unit
D16 TUNER RS485－ Communication signal for tuner unit

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector E (36P) (female terminals)

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
- - BRN GRN GRY WHT WHT - BRN - - - *1 GRY GRN - -
-
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
- - - YEL RED BLK GRN PUR BRN - - - - *2 LT - - -
BLU

*1: BRN (With telematics control unit), PNK (Without telematics control unit)
*2: YEL (With telematics control unit), BLU (Without telematics control unit)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

E1 Not used ―――
E2 Not used ―――
E3 Not used ―――
E4 HFT MUTE Outputs front HFL microphone directivity switching signal
E5 SH ECALL-NAVI MIC*1 Shield for terminals No. 6 and No. 23
SH MIC*2
E6 ECALL-NAVI MIC-*1 Ground for front HFL-ANC microphone*2 or telematics control unit*1
MIC GND*2
E7 Not used ―――
E8 Not used ―――
E9 Not used ―――
E10 PARK BUSY Detects parking brake on signal
E11 Not used ―――
E12 DISP CONT Outputs signal for center display unit switching on/off
E13 CAMERA GND Communication signal
E14 SH CAMERA Shield for terminals No. 13, No. 15, No. 31, No. 32 and No. 33
E15 CAMERA BIT0 Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E16 CAMERA ADPT Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E17 Not used ―――
E18 Not used ―――
E19 Not used ―――
*1: With telematics control unit
*2: Without telematics control unit
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
E20 Not used ―――
E21 Not used ―――
E22*2 MIC PWR Power source for front HFL-ANC microphone
E23 ECALL-NAVI MIC+*1 Inputs sound signal from front HFL microphone*2 or telematics control unit*1
MIC+*2
E24 Not used ―――
E25 Not used ―――
E26 Not used ―――
E27 Not used ―――
E28 PARK BUSY Detects parking brake on signal
E29 F-CAN C_H Communication signal
E30 F-CAN C_L Communication signal
E31 CAMERA VCC Power source for rearview camera
E32 CAMERA V Inputs NTSC video signal from rearview camera
E33 CAMERA BIT1 Outputs mode select signal for rearview camera
E34 Not used ―――
E35 Not used ―――
E36 Not used ―――
*1: With telematics control unit
*2: Without telematics control unit

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector F (36P) (female terminals)

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GRY YEL - - - - - - - - WHT WHT GRY - - - - -
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19
- GRN - - - - - - - - GRN BLK RED - - - - -

Cavity Terminal Name Description

F1 Not used ―――
F2 Not used ―――
F3 Not used ―――
F4 Not used ―――
F5 Not used ―――
F6*1 SH LWC CAM Shield for terminals No. 7, No. 24, No. 25, and No. 26
1 LWC CAM VGND Ground for LaneWatch camera
F7*
1 LANEWATCH SW Detects LaneWatch on/off signal from LaneWatch switch
F8*
F9 Not used ―――
F10 Not used ―――
*1: With LaneWatch
*2: With telematics control unit
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
F11 Not used ―――
F12 Not used ―――
F13 Not used ―――
F14 Not used ―――
F15 Not used ―――
F16 Not used ―――
F17*2 TELEM SIG－ Outputs sound prompts
F18*2 SH TELEM SIG Shield for terminals No. 17 and No. 35
F19 Not used ―――
F20 Not used ―――
F21 Not used ―――
F22 Not used ―――
F23 Not used ―――
F24*1 LWC CAM VCC Power source for LaneWatch camera

F25*1 LWC CAM VID Inputs video signal from LaneWatch camera
F26*1 LWC UART AS Communication signal for LaneWatch camera
F27 Not used ―――
F28 Not used ―――
F29 Not used ―――
F30 Not used ―――
F31 Not used ―――
F32 Not used ―――
F33 Not used ―――
F34 Not used ―――
F35*2 TELEM SIG＋ Outputs sound prompts
F36 Not used ―――
*1: With LaneWatch
*2: With telematics control unit

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector G (10P) (female terminals)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

G1 USB1 GND Ground for USB port A
G2 USB1 VBUS Outputs power source for USB port A
G3 USB1 DATA＋ Communication signal
G4 USB1 DATA－ Communication signal
G5 USB1 SH Shield for terminals No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4
G6 USB2 GND Ground for USB port B
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
G7 USB2 VBUS Outputs power source for USB port B
G8 USB2 DATA＋ Communication signal
G9 USB2 DATA－ Communication signal
G10 USB2 SH Shield for terminals No. 6, No. 7, No. 8, and No. 9

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector H (6P) (female terminals)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

H1 LVDS2＋ Communication signal for gauge control module
H2 LVDS2－ Communication signal for gauge control module
H3 LVDS2 SH Shield for terminals No. 1 and No. 2
H4 LVDS1＋ Communication signal for center display unit
H5 LVDS1－ Communication signal for center display unit
H6 LVDS1 SH Shield for terminals No. 4 and No. 5

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector J (2P) (female terminals)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

J1 GPS Inputs GPS signal
J2 SH (GPS) Shield for terminal No. 1

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector K (2P) (female terminals)

BLK
 Cavity Terminal Name Description
K1 Wi-Fi Inputs Wi-Fi signal
K2 SH (Wi-Fi) Shield for terminal No. 1

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector M (10P) (female terminals) (With telematics control unit)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

M1 Not used ―――
M2 Not used ―――
M3 Not used ―――
M4 Not used ―――
M5 Not used ―――
M6 TEL USB GND Ground for USB
M7 TEL USB VBUS Outputs power source for USB
M8 TEL USB DATA＋ Communication signal
M9 TEL USB DATA－ Communication signal
M10 TEL USB SH Shield for terminals No. 6, No. 7, No. 8, and No. 9

Audio-Navigation Unit Connector N (2P) (female terminals) (With XM)

BLK
Cavity Terminal Name Description
N1 SAT/TER Inputs satellite/terrestrial signal
N2 SH (SAT/TER) Shield for terminal No. 1
Audio-Navigation Unit Removal and Installation

NOTE:
When working on electronic components, make sure the work area is clean and dust free.
Make sure your hands are clean and free of oils and grease.
If you are replacing the audio unit, write down the audio presets (if possible), and enter them into the new audio unit.
When the audio-navigation unit is replaced or disconnected, do the Map Matching. This part of the initialization matches the
GPS coordinates with a road on the map screen. To do this part of the procedure, make sure that the navigation system
displays a map, and drive the vehicle on a mapped road shown on the map screen. Do not enter a destination at this time.
When the name of the current road you are driving on appears at the bottom of the screen, the entire procedure is
complete.

1
2.
9.4
(0.96, 6.9)

2.
9.4
(0.96, 6.9)

3.
3.7
(0.38, 2.7)

3.
2.
3.7
(0.38, 2.7)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. Center Pocket - Remove

2. Audio-Navigation Unit - Remove

3. Audio-Navigation Unit Brackets - Remove

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE:
Make sure all the connectors are secure.
If the audio-navigation was replaced, it may take up to
30 minutes for the navigation system to calibrate and
operate correctly.
After Installation, do the System Links in the System
Diagnostic Mode to confirm that there are no problems
in the system.
2/8/23, 1:55 AM Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Circuit Diagram 5690
Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Circuit Diagram

M/T/CVT (Without Auto Idle Stop System)

*1: Without automatic wiper
*2: With automatic wiper
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX *3: Wire colors may be substituted for SRS circuits
12 VOLT : CAN line
BATTERY : Other communication line
No. A1 (125 A) No. A27 (10 A)

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. A5-5 (30 A) No. B36 (10 A) H17

IG1 METER
IG1B RELAY
CIRCUIT
D4 No. B37 (10 A) H7
YEL RED A
+B IG MAIN2 IG1 OPTION
H11 H9
WHT
No. A5-3 No. A6 RLY IG1 COIL+ BODY
(30 A) (30 A) GND CONTROL
IG1B HOT in ON and MODULE
PNK PUR RELAY START mode TAN
CONTROL
C5 A1 MODULE
R/M 2 R/M 1 R H/L HI A5
WHT
IPD RIGHT HEADLIGHT
R H/L LO A3
TAN

L H/L HI C9
PUR
IPD LEFT HEADLIGHT RED A
L H/L LO C7
YEL
MULTIPURPOSE
CAMERA UNIT
A17 14 F-CAN 15 5 1
LT GRN* 3 F-CAN GRN
F-CAN B_L B_L D_L F-CAN D_L IG1 OPTION
SRS UNIT
A16 6 F-CAN F-CAN 7 11 2
LT BLU* 3 PNK BLK
F-CAN B_H B_H D_H F-CAN D_H GND
CAN GATEWAY GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE G501
11 11 F-CAN F-CAN 13 A21 A1
RED A_L C_L GRN RED
TRANSMISSION F-CAN A_L F-CAN C_L MULTI- +B BACK UP
CONTROL INFORMATION
MODULE (TCM) 3 A20 DISPLAY A2
3 F-CAN F-CAN 5
WHT A_H C_H PUR BRN
F-CAN A_H F-CAN C_H IG1 METER
POWER
SUPPLY
*1 CIRCUIT
2
BLU
AUTOMATIC B-CAN_L
LIGHTING
SENSOR 1
PNK
B-CAN_H

*2

AUTOMATIC
LIGHTING/RAIN
SENSOR AUTO
HIGH-BEAM
LIN(FR WIPER) INDICATOR
4 (GREEN)

YEL

A60
LIN(FR WIPER) A55 A23 A16
BLU BLU BLK
B-CAN_L B-CAN_L GND
BODY CONTROL
MODULE A54 A22 A18
PNK PNK BLK
B-CAN_H B-CAN_H GND

G502
· COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
· WIPER/WASHER SWITCH

A/T

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005690_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 1:55 AM Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Circuit Diagram 5690

*1: Without automatic wiper

*2: With automatic wiper
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX *3: Wire colors may be substituted for SRS circuits
12 VOLT : CAN line
BATTERY : Other communication line
No. A1 (125 A) No. A27 (10 A)

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. B36
No. A5-5 (30 A) (10 A) H17
IG1 METER
IG1B RELAY
CIRCUIT No. B37
D4 (10 A) H7
YEL RED A
+B IG MAIN2 IG1 OPTION
H11 H9
WHT
No. A5-3 No. A6 RLY GND IG1 COIL+ BODY
(30 A) (30 A) CONTROL
IG1B HOT in ON and MODULE
PNK PUR RELAY START mode TAN
CONTROL
C5 A1 MODULE
R/M 2 R/M 1 R H/L HI A5
WHT
IPD RIGHT HEADLIGHT
R H/L LO A3
TAN

L H/L HI C9
PUR
IPD LEFT HEADLIGHT RED A
L H/L LO C7
YEL
MULTIPURPOSE
CAMERA UNIT
A17 14 F-CAN 15 5 1
LT GRN* 3 F-CAN YEL
F-CAN B_L B_L E_L F-CAN E_L IG1 OPTION
SRS UNIT
A16 6 F-CAN F-CAN 7 11 2
LT BLU* 3 LT BLU BLK
F-CAN B_H B_H E_H F-CAN E_H GND

CAN GATEWAY GAUGE CONTROL

MODULE
G501
A18 11 F-CAN F-CAN 13 A21 A1
YEL RED GRN MULTI- RED
F-CAN A_L A_L C_L F-CAN C_L INFORMATION +B BACK UP
DISPLAY
A19 3 F-CAN F-CAN 5 A20 A2
RED WHT A_H C_H PUR BRN
TRANSMISSION F-CAN A_H F-CAN C_H IG1 METER
POWER
CONTROL SUPPLY
MODULE (TCM) 15 F-CAN CIRCUIT
A12
WHT GRN D_L
F-CAN D_L

A13 7 F-CAN
BLK PNK D_H
F-CAN D_H

*2 *1
2
AUTOMATIC BLU
AUTOMATIC B-CAN_L
LIGHTING/RAIN LIGHTING
SENSOR SENSOR AUTO
1 HIGH-BEAM
PNK
LIN(FR WIPER) B-CAN_H INDICATOR
4 (GREEN)

YEL

A60
LIN(FR WIPER) A55 A23 A16
BLU BLU BLK
B-CAN_L B-CAN_L GND
BODY CONTROL
MODULE A54 A22 A18
PNK PNK BLK
B-CAN_H B-CAN_H GND

G502
· COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
· WIPER/WASHER SWITCH

CVT (With Auto Idle Stop System)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005690_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 1:55 AM Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Circuit Diagram 5690

*1: Without automatic wiper

*2: With automatic wiper
12 VOLT UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX *3: Wire colors may be substituted for SRS circuits
BATTERY : CAN line
No. A1 (125 A) No. A27 (10 A) : Other communication line

No. A2-1 (30 A) FUSE/RELAY HOLDER A

DC-DC
DC-DC CONVERTER
CONVERTER GRN IG1 RELAY 2
IG1A RELAY
CIRCUIT No. A41 B17 2 1 B16
A1 B2 (7.5 A) WHT
B12
No. C5
B8 (7.5 A)
WHT BODY B9
CONTROL LT GRN
B4
TAN MODULE B5 3 4 B10
GRY
IG1A HOT in ON and START mode

BLK

No. A5-3 No. A6

(30 A) (30 A)
G502
PNK PUR RELAY
CONTROL
C5 A1 MODULE
+B R/M2 +B R/M1 R H/L HI A5
WHT
IPD RIGHT HEADLIGHT
R H/L LO A3
BRN

L H/L HI C9
PUR
IPD LEFT HEADLIGHT
L H/L LO C7
YEL

A17 14 15 5 1
LT GRN *3 F-CAN F-CAN GRN
F-CAN B_L B_L D_L F-CAN D_L MULTIPURPOSE IG1 VSA 2
SRS UNIT CAMERA UNIT
A16 6 7 11 2
LT BLU *3 F-CAN F-CAN PNK BLK
F-CAN B_H B_H D_H F-CAN D_H GND
CAN GATEWAY GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE G501
11 11 F-CAN F-CAN 13 A21 A1
RED A_L C_L GRN RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN C_L MULTI- +B BACK UP
TCM INFORMATION
3 3 F-CAN 5 A20 DISPLAY
F-CAN No. C6 (7.5 A)
WHT A_H C_H PUR
F-CAN A_H F-CAN C_H FUSE
POWER (FUSE/RELAY
*2 SUPPLY HOLDER A)
CIRCUIT
AUTOMATIC *1
LIGHTING/RAIN 2
SENSOR AUTOMATIC BLU
B-CAN_L LT BLU
LIGHTING A2
LIN(FR WIPER) CONTROL UNIT-
4 SENSOR 1 IG1 PCU EWP
PNK
B-CAN_H AUTO
YEL HIGH-BEAM
INDICATOR
A60 (GREEN)
LIN(FR WIPER) A55 A23 A16
BLU BLU BLK
B-CAN_L B-CAN_L GND
BODY CONTROL
MODULE A54 A22 A18
PNK PNK BLK
B-CAN_H B-CAN_H GND

G502
∙ COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
∙ WIPER/WASHER SWITCH

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005690_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 1:55 AM Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Component Location Index 2224

For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram. MULTIPURPOSE CAMERA UNIT
Aiming
Removal and Installation
AUTOMATIC Update
LIGHTING/RAIN
SENSOR*2

VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT

AUTOMATIC
LIGHTING CONTROL
UNIT-SENSOR *1

TCM
(1.5 L engine)
MILLIMETER WAVE RADAR
Aiming
Removal and Installation HEADLIGHT
Update

*1: Without automatic wiper

*2: With automatic wiper

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002224_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 1:55 AM Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Component Location Index 2224

COMBINATION LIGHT
SWITCH

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

WIPER/WASHER SWITCH

BODY CONTROL
MODULE

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002224_enu 4/4
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Description - Overview 2163

Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Description - Overview

Overview
The system operates by switching the high beam and low beam automatically depending on the road condition of vehicles running
ahead and opposing vehicles, using the multipurpose camera unit.

Operating Conditions
NOTE: Weather and road conditions (undulation, curve, or environment illuminance etc.) may affect system operation.
The combination light switch is in the AUTO position.
The headlight low beam is turned on.
White and red light sources are not detected ahead.
2 or more streetlights have not been detected.
The vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
There is no halation state in front of the vehicle.
There is no manual operation input of the combination light switch.
NOTE: Weather and road conditions (undulation, curve, or environment illuminance etc.) may affect system operation.

Stopping Condition
The system stops operation under the following conditions.
When the combination light switch is turned to other than the AUTO position.
When the dimmer switch is operated.
When the vehicle speed is low:
－ Less than 6 mph (10 km/h)
－ Less than 15 mph (24 km/h) condition continues more than four seconds.

Conditions that the System Switches to Low Beam

When there are objects that are emitting lights such as streetlights, house lights, advertising display lighting, signages, vending
machines, or other reflecting light.
When there are objects emitting lights on the road similar to the taillights of vehicles driving ahead or headlights of opposing
vehicles.
When the red lights of the traffic signals are detected.
When the front wiper motor operates at HIGH for 5 seconds.

Conditions that Switching Timing to Low Beam is Changed

When the taillights of the vehicle driving ahead are bright or dark.
When the headlights of an opposing vehicle are bright or dark.
In rainy, snowy, and foggy weather.

Detection Range and Limits

The multipurpose camera unit recognizes and reacts within the range of 25 degrees horizontally (total 50 degrees).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C002163_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Description - Overview 2163

SYSTEM
DETECTABLE
AREA

50 degrees

25 degrees

Auto High-Beam Operation Indicator

When a system malfunction occurs, or when the camera lens or the windshield gets dirty, the warning message is shown on the multi-
information display (MID). If the warning message is shown, the system stops operating.

NOTE: The actual message may be different depending on your market.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C002163_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Description - System Diagram 2164

Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Description - System Diagram

The system diagram of the Auto High-Beam is shown below.

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index:

Without automatic wiper: Automatic lighting control unit-sensor
With automatic wiper: Automatic lighting/rain sensor
Body control module, Relay control module
Gauge control module
Multipurpose camera unit
SRS unit
VSA modulator-control unit
A/T: Transmission control module (TCM)
CVT: Transmission control module (TCM)

Multipurpose
Camera Unit
Relay Control Module

Transmission Control
Automatic Lighting/Rain Module (TCM)
Sensor*2 ・Vehicle Speed Sensor

Automatic Lighting Control SRS Unit

Unit-Sensor*1 ・Yaw Rate/G Sensor Signal

VSA Modulator-Control
Gauge Control Unit
Body Control Module Module
B-CAN line ・Indicator Signal F-CAN line

Combination
Light Switch

Wiper/Washer
Switch

*1: Without automatic wiper

*2: With automatic wiper

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C002164_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 1:55 AM Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Function Test 5129
Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Function Test

NOTE:
This test is only used to confirm if the auto high-beam system is operating correctly.
Certain vehicle and environmental conditions will affect how the auto high-beam system
operates. Refer to the owner’s manual or Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System)
Description for additional information.

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode and confirm there are no auto high-beam messages on the
multi-information display (MID). If a message is present, check for DTC’s and troubleshoot
them first before doing this test. Refer to the How to Troubleshoot the Auto High-Beam (High-
Beam Support System).

2. Cover the following areas with masking tape:

NOTE:
The images shown are examples and may not match your vehicle.
Apply two layers of masking tape to insure that the sensor and camera is blocked.
Multipurpose Camera (opening on the front windshield)

Automatic Lighting Control Unit-Sensor / Sunlight Sensor (entire sensor)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T005129_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 1:55 AM Auto High-Beam (High-Beam Support System) Function Test 5129

Automatic Lighting / Rain Sensor (opening on the front windshield)

3. Set the headlight switch to the low beam and AUTO positions.

4. Start the engine and confirm that the headlight low beam is on.

5. Check the gauge control assembly.

If the auto high-beam activation indicator is on, the system is normal and the test is
complete.
If the auto high-beam activation indicator is off, pull back the headlight switch lever back
for at least 30 seconds until the auto high-beam activation indicator blinks once. If it
blinks, repeat steps 1-4.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T005129_enu 2/2
Auto idle stop system does not operate

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
CVT speed sensor defective
Auxiliary transmission fluid pump worn, binding, foreign material in transmission fluid
pump, or insufficiency of air bleeding
Transmission fluid temperature sensor defective

Notes

Check the CVT speed sensor for wear and damage, and also check the O-ring for wear and
damage.
Inspect the auxiliary transmission fluid pump. If necessary, bleed the air of the auxiliary
transmission fluid pump.
Inspect the transmission fluid temperature sensor.
Automatic Brake Hold Switch Removal, Installation, and Test

1. Center Console Panel - Remove

2. Automatic Brake Hold Switch - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. Automatic Brake Hold Switch - Test

Switch Internal Resistance Check:

1. On the switch side, measure the resistance between the

connector terminal (male terminals) in each switch position
according to the table.

Terminal Position Resistance

No. 6 and PRESSED About 559 Ω
No. 12 RELEASED About 2200 Ω

2. If the switch does not work as described in the table,

replace the switch.
 Switch Illumination Circuit Check:

Terminal 1. On the switch side, check the LED for illumination by

7 9
Position applying power and ground to the terminals according to
the table.
ILLUMINATION
LIGHTS
NOTE: Important operating characteristic; diode bias
causes a diode to fully conduct electricity in one direction
= Voltage for LED (forward), while not at all in the opposite direction (reverse).

2. If the result is not as specified, replace the switch.

2/8/23, 2:29 AM Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror Connector for Inputs and Outputs 1210
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror 12P Connector (male terminals)

1 2 3 4 5 6
GRY - - BLU BLK BRN
7 8 9 10 11 12
- - - - - RED

Terminal Terminal name Description Signal

number
1 ILLUMI+ Detects illumination signal With combination light switch PARKING or ON: about
battery voltage
With combination light switch OFF: less than 0.2 V
2 Not used ――― ―――
3 Not used ――― ―――
4 BACK LT Detects back-up light signal With vehicle in ON mode and R position/mode: about
battery voltage
If none of the above conditions are met: less than 0.2
V
5 GND Ground for automatic dimming Less than 0.2 V at all times
inside mirror
6 IG2 A/C IG2 power source With vehicle in ON mode: about battery voltage
7 Not used ――― ―――
8 Not used ――― ―――
9 Not used ――― ―――
10 Not used ――― ―――
11 Not used ――― ―――
12 +B BACK UP +B power source About battery voltage at all times

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E001210_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:29 AM Automatic Dimming Mirrors Circuit Diagram 1209
Automatic Dimming Mirrors Circuit Diagram

*1: IG1B HOT in ON and START mode

*2: IG2 HOT in ON mode
UNDER-HOOD UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
12 VOLT
BATTERY No. A5-5 +B IG
(30 A) D4 MAIN2
YEL

IG1B
RELAY
CIRCUIT*1
IG1
COIL+ H9
WHT
No. B36
(10 A)

RLY
REVERSE GND H11 BODY
RELAY TAN CONTROL
IG2
CIRCUIT RELAY MODULE
CIRCUIT*2

No. B14
(10 A) IG2
COIL+ H3
GRY
ATP-R BACK LT IG2 A/C
D27 G3 H14

PUR WHT PNK

· TCM (A/T)
· TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(CVT)

RELAY
CONTROL
MODULE

BLU BRN GRY

4 6 1
BACK LT IG2 A/C ILLUMI+

AUTOMATIC DIMMING
INSIDE MIRROR
(Has a built-in control unit)

GND
REARVIEW MIRROR 5

BLK

G501

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E001209_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:28 AM Automatic Dimming Mirrors Electrical Component Location Index 650

REAR-FACING LUX LEVEL SENSOR FRONT-FACING LUX LEVEL SENSOR

INDICATOR

AUTOMATIC DIMMING INSIDE MIRROR AUTOMATIC DIMMING OFF SWITCH

(Built into the rearview mirror) (Built into the rearview mirror)
Removal and Installation

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (CVT)

Removal, Installation, and Test

TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (A/T)

Removal and Installation

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000650_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:28 AM Automatic Dimming Mirrors Electrical Component Location Index 650

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

(Has a built-in reverse relay circuit)
Removal and Installation

A/T model is shown, other models are similar.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000650_enu 4/4
2/8/23, 1:56 AM Automatic Lighting Control Unit-Sensor Connector for Inputs and Outputs 5777
Automatic Lighting Control Unit-Sensor Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Automatic Lighting Control Unit-Sensor 5P Connector (female terminals)

5 4 3 2 1
PNK RED BLK BLU PNK

Terminal Terminal name Description Signal

number
1 B-CAN_H Communication line ―――
2 B-CAN_L Communication line ―――
3 GND Ground for automatic lighting Less than 0.2 V at all times
control unit-sensor
4 +B BACK UP*1 +B power source About battery voltage at all times
+B BACKUP2 +B power source About battery voltage at all times
SUB*2
5 H/L ON SW Outputs H/L ON SW signal With combination light switch is in ON position: less
than 0.2 V
With combination light switch is in AUTO position and
the conditions for the headlight to be ON: less than
0.2 V
If none of the above conditions are met: about battery
voltage
*1: Without auto idle stop system
*2: With auto idle stop system

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005777_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 1:56 AM Automatic Lighting/Rain Sensor Connector for Inputs and Outputs 5776
Automatic Lighting/Rain Sensor Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Automatic Lighting/Rain Sensor 5P Connector (female terminals)

5 4 3 2 1
RED YEL - BLK PNK

Terminal Terminal name Description Signal

number
1 H/L ON SW Outputs H/L ON SW signal With combination light switch is in ON position: less
than 0.2 V
With combination light switch is in AUTO position and
the conditions for the headlight to be ON: less than
0.2 V
If none of the above conditions are met: about battery
voltage
2 GND Ground for automatic lighting/rain Less than 0.2 V at all times
sensor
3 Not used ――― ―――
4 LIN(FR WIPER) Communication line ―――
5 +B BACK UP*1 +B power source About battery voltage at all times
+B BACKUP2 +B power source About battery voltage at all times
SUB *2

*1: Without auto idle stop system

*2: With auto idle stop system

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005776_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:40 AM Automatic Lighting/Rain Sensor Removal and Installation 658

Automatic Lighting/Rain Sensor Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000658_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:40 AM Automatic Lighting/Rain Sensor Removal and Installation 658

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000658_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:40 AM Automatic Lighting/Rain Sensor Removal and Installation 658

2.

2.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

1. Sensor Cover - Remove

2. Automatic Lighting/Rain Sensor - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000658_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:40 AM Automatic Lighting/Rain Sensor Removal and Installation 658
1. Prying on the automatic lighting/rain sensor bracket (A)
C
may cause damage to the bracket. Insert a pick tool (B)
A from inside the clip (C) as shown, and carefully remove the
clip. Be careful not to damage the windshield with the tip of
the pick tool while working.

NOTE: Hold the connector portion, and carefully remove the

automatic lighting/rain sensor and silicon sheet together from
the glass surface.

Note for installation

Make sure that there are no air bubbles between the
windshield glass and silicon sheet during installation.
If the automatic lighting/rain sensor connector is connected
after the 12 volt battery terminal is connected, the
automatic lighting/rain sensor is not confirmed by the body
control module.
If the body control module does not confirm the automatic
B lighting/rain sensor, the automatic wiper system does not
work.

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000658_enu 4/4
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump Air Bleeding

NOTE: The auxiliary transmission fluid pump air bleeding procedure must be done when:
The auxiliary transmission fluid pump is removed.
The transmission fluid is replaced.
The TCM is replaced. If you replace the TCM, you must done Procedure After Replacing TCM.

Procedure With HDS

1. HDS - Connect

2. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

3. Engine - Warm Up

1. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating

temperature (the radiator fan comes on twice).

2. Turn the engine off.

4. Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump – Air Bleed

1. Select the Electrical Oil Pump Activation in the Function

Test Menu, and drive the auxiliary transmission fluid pump
for at least 15 seconds with the HDS.

NOTE: Do not drive the auxiliary transmission fluid pump

for more than 160 seconds at a time.

5. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

Procedure Without HDS

1. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

2. Engine - Warm Up

1. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating

temperature (the radiator fan comes on twice).
3. Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump - Air Bleed

1. Do the auto idle stop system operation. If the auto idle stop
system does not operate for at least 15 seconds, repeat
this procedure and recheck, or do the procedure with HDS.

4. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

Procedure After Replacing TCM

1. Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump - Air Bleed

NOTE:
Do not start the engine.
Do not remove the battery and fuse.

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, then wait at least 2

seconds.

2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, then at least 10

seconds.

3. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

4. Check that the shift position indicator does not blink. If shift
position indicator blinks, repeat step 1.

2. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump Removal, Installation, and Test

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Pressure Gauge Adapter 070AJ-RT4A100 or 070AJ-RT4A101

Pressure Gauge Adapter G 070AJ-RT4A170

A/T Low Pressure Gauge w/Panel 07406-0070301

Image Description/Tool Number
A/T Pressure Test Hose 07AAJ-PY4A100

A/T Pressure Adapter 07MAJ-PY40120

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
Be careful not to drop the filter.
Be sure to use new O-rings which should be applied a light coat of clean transmission fluid before installation.
Check the connector for corrosion, dirt, or oil, and clean or repair if necessary.

1
 3.
27 (2.8, 20)

12 (1.2, 9)

*1
*1
4.

5.

Detailed information, notes and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace
*1 Filter

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

3. Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump - Remove

4. Delivery Pipe - Remove

Note for installation

There are differences in size of the O-rings.

5. 10.9 x 31.5 mm Pipe - Remove

6. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

7. Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump – Air Bleed

8. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

NOTE:
Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are stored, troubleshoot and clear them first.
Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
Be sure to check the transmission fluid level after the test. When installing or removing the A/T oil pressure gauge,
transmission fluid may run out of the inspection port.
Hydraulic pressure measurement of the auxiliary transmission fluid pump is performed by the driven pulley pressure
inspection port.

1. A/T Oil Pressure Gauge - Set

1. When testing the auxiliary transmission fluid pump pressure

PRESSURE GAUGE ADAPTER at the driven pulley pressure inspection port, select
070AJ-RT4A100 or 070AJ-RT4A101 pressure gauge adapters A and G.

NOTE: Other pressure gauge adapters are not used.

PRESSURE GAUGE PRESSURE GAUGE

ADAPTER A ADAPTER B

PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE

GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE
ADAPTER C ADAPTER D ADAPTER E
 Inspection port Tool
PRESSURE GAUGE ADAPTER G
070AJ-RT4A170 CVT driven pulley Pressure gauge
pressure adapter A
Pressure gauge
adapter G

2. HDS - Connect

3. Vehicle - Lift

4. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

5. Engine Undercover Plate - Remove

6. Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump - Test

1. Remove the CVT driven pulley pressure sensor (A).

07406-0070301

2. Temporarily install the CVT driven pulley pressure sensor

with the sealing washer (B) to pressure gauge adapter A.
07AAJ-PY4A100

07MAJ-PY40120 3. Assemble the pressure gauge; install the A/T low pressure
gauge w/panel, the A/T pressure test hose, and the A/T
pressure adapter to pressure gauge adapter A.

B A

070AJ-RT4A100 or 070AJ-RT4A101
(PRESSURE GAUGE ADAPTER A)
 4. Install pressure gauge adapter G (quick connector) to the CVT driven pulley pressure inspection port (A).

070AJ-RT4A170
(PRESSURE GAUGE
ADAPTER G)

B
C
070AJ-RT4A100 or 070AJ-RT4A101
(PRESSURE GAUGE ADAPTER A)

5. Install pressure gauge to pressure gauge adapter G (quick connector).

6. Connect the connector (B) to the CVT driven pulley pressure sensor (C).

7. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on twice).

8. Turn the engine off.

9. Select the Electrical Oil Pump Activation in the Function Test Menu with the HDS, and measure the driven pulley pressure
while driving the auxiliary transmission fluid pump.

NOTE: Do not drive the auxiliary transmission fluid pump for more than 160 seconds at a time.

Pressure Standard
CVT driven Pulley 216－270 kPa (2.20－2.75 kgf/cm2, 31.3－39.2 psi)

10. If the pressure is out of the standard, replace the auxiliary transmission fluid pump.

11. Disconnect the connector from the CVT driven pulley pressure sensor.

12. Remove the pressure gauge and pressure gauge adapter G (quick connector).

13. Remove the CVT driven pulley pressure sensor.

14. Install the CVT driven pulley pressure sensor.

7. All Removed Parts - Install

 1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

8. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

2/8/23, 1:58 AM Back-Up Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3608

Back-Up Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test

NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, illustrations used in the procedure are for the 1.5 L engine.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003608_enu 1/9
2/8/23, 1:58 AM Back-Up Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3608

2.
3.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003608_enu 2/9
2/8/23, 1:58 AM Back-Up Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3608

1. Air Cleaner - Remove

2. Connector - Disconnect

3. Back-Up Light Switch - Remove

NOTE:

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003608_enu 3/9
2/8/23, 1:58 AM Back-Up Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3608

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Unless otherwise indicated, illustrations used in the procedure are for the 1.5 L engine.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003608_enu 4/9
2/8/23, 1:58 AM Back-Up Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3608

2.
1.
29 (3.0, 21)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003608_enu 5/9
2/8/23, 1:58 AM Back-Up Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3608

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. Back-Up Light Switch - Install

1. Clean any dirt and oil from the sealing surface of the back-
up light switch and the transmission housing.

2. Apply liquid gasket (P/N 08718-0003, 08718-0004, or

08718-0009) to the threads of the back-up light switch.
Install the back-up light switch within 4 minutes of applying
the liquid gasket.

NOTE: If too much time has passed after applying the liquid
gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and residue, then
reapply new liquid gasket.

2. Connector - Connect

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003608_enu 6/9
2/8/23, 1:58 AM Back-Up Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3608

3. Air Cleaner - Install

Back-Up Light Switch Test

Back-Up Light Switch Specifications

Back-Up Light Switch

Internal Circuit
2 4
Switch End
1 kΩ
1 3 Pressed: Reverse Position
Released: Out of Reverse Position

3 kΩ

Terminal side of
male terminal

Terminal
1 2 3 4
Position

Pressed/Reverse Position
683.1－820.5

Released/
Out of Reverse Position 2,732.5－3,281.8
: Continuity Check
: Resistance Check (Ω)

1. Air Cleaner - Remove

2. Connector (Back-Up Light Switch) - Disconnect

3. Back-Up Light Switch - Test (On Mission)

1. Check for continuity and resistance of the back-up light

switch when the shift lever is in reverse and in any positions
other than reverse, according to the above table.

If the test result is OK, install the parts in the reverse

order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003608_enu 7/9
2/8/23, 1:58 AM Back-Up Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3608

If the test result is not OK, go to the next step.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003608_enu 8/9
2/8/23, 1:58 AM Back-Up Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3608

4. Back-Up Light Switch - Remove

5. Back-Up Light Switch - Test (Off Mission)

1. Check for continuity and resistance of the back-up light

switch when pressing and releasing the switch end,
according to the above table.

If the test result is OK, check the reverse shift

mechanism in the transmission.
If the test result is not OK, replace the back-up light
switch.

6. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003608_enu 9/9
Balancer Shaft/Balancer Shaft Holder Assembly Overhaul

1
 1.
12 (1.2, 9)
2.
12 (1.2, 9)

2.
2.
27 (2.8, 20)

1.
12 (1.2, 9)

1.

4.
*1

3.
3. *1
*1

4.
*1

LOWER BALANCER
SHAFT HOLDER

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace
*1 These parts have inspection items.

1. Baffle Plate - Remove

2. Upper Balancer Shaft Holder - Remove

Note for installation

Apply new engine oil to the 8 mm bolts threads and flanges.

3. Front Balancer Shaft and Rear Balancer Shaft - Remove

Note for installation

A

1. Apply new engine oil to the journals.

C
2. Align the punch mark (A) on the rear balancer shaft (B) in
the center of the two punch marks (C) on the front balancer
shaft (D), then install the balancer shafts on the lower
balancer shaft holder.

B
D

4. Balancer Shaft Bearing - Remove

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. Balancer Shaft End Play - Inspect

 1. Seat the balancer shaft by pushing it away from the
balancer shaft sprocket end of the balancer shaft holder.

2. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the balancer shaft,
then push the balancer shaft back and forth and read the
end play.

Balancer Shaft End Play

Standard (New): 0.070－0.120 mm
(0.00276－0.00472 in)
Service Limit: 0.135 mm (0.00531 in)

2. Balancer Shaft Journal Oil Clearance - Inspect

1. Clean the both balancer shaft journals, the balancer shaft

holders, and the bearing halves with a clean shop towel.

2. Place one strip of plastigage across each journal.

3. Reinstall the bearings and the upper balancer shaft holder,

then tighten the bolts to the specified torque.

NOTE: Do not rotate the balancer shafts during inspection.

4. Remove the upper balancer shaft holder and the bearings

again, and measure the widest part with the plastigage.

If the front balancer shaft No. 1 journal and the rear

balancer shaft No. 1, 2 journals oil clearance is out-of-
tolerance, replace the balancer shaft and recheck. If it
is still out-of-tolerance, replace the balancer shaft
holders.
If the front balancer shaft No. 2 journal and the rear
balancer shaft No. 3 journal oil clearance is out-of-
tolerance, install new bearings, and recheck. If it is still
out-of-tolerance, replace the balancer shafts.

Journal Oil Clearance

Front No. 1 Journal:
Standard (New): 0.030－0.062 mm
(0.00118－0.00244 in)
Service Limit: 0.080 mm (0.00315 in)
Front No. 2 Journal:
Standard (New): 0.040－0.100 mm
(0.00157－0.00394 in)
Service Limit: 0.130 mm (0.00512 in)
Rear No. 1, 2 Journals:
Standard (New): 0.030－0.062 mm
(0.00118－0.00244 in)
Service Limit: 0.080 mm (0.00315 in)
Rear No. 3 Journal:
 Standard (New): 0.040－0.100 mm
(0.00157－0.00394 in)
Service Limit: 0.130 mm (0.00512 in)

3. Balancer Shaft Journal Taper - Inspect

1. Remove the balancer shafts.

REAR BALANCER SHAFT

2. Measure the taper at the edges of each journal. The

difference between measurements on each journal must
not be more than the standard.

Balancer Shaft Journal Taper

Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.00020 in) max.

FRONT BALANCER SHAFT

Balancer Shaft/Balancer Shaft Holder Assembly Removal and Installation

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Pin Driver, 6.0 mm 07744-0010500

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 3.

2.

3.

4.

4. 4.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Replace

1. Oil Pan - Remove

2. Balancer Chain Tensioner - Remove

 1. Turn the crankshaft to align No. 1 position at top dead
B
center (TDC); the white mark (A) on the crankshaft pulley
lines up with the pointer (B).

2. Remove and discard the balancer chain tensioner.

3. Balancer Shaft Sprocket - Remove

1. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert a pin driver, 6.0 mm

into the maintenance hole in the lower balancer shaft holder
and through the rear balancer shaft.

2. Loosen the balancer shaft sprocket mounting bolt.

3. Remove the balancer chain guide mounting bolt (A), then

remove the balancer shaft sprocket mounting bolt and the
balancer shaft sprocket.

A
07744-0010500

4. Balancer Shaft/Balancer Shaft Holder Assembly - Remove

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 1.
12 (1.2, 9)

2.
12 (1.2, 9)

1.
45 (4.6, 33)

1.

1.
45 (4.6, 33)

1. 1.
24 (2.4, 18) 12 (1.2, 9)
1.
45 (4.6, 33)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace

1. Balancer Shaft Sprocket and Balancer Shaft/Balancer Shaft Holder Assembly - Install
 1. Turn the crankshaft to align No. 1 position at top dead
B
center (TDC); the white mark (A) on the crankshaft pulley
lines up with the pointer (B).

2. Align the dowel pin (A) on the rear balancer shaft with the
B mark (B) on the balancer shaft holder.

3. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert a pin driver, 6.0 mm

into the maintenance hole in the lower balancer shaft holder
and through the rear balancer shaft.

07744-0010500
 4. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the balancer shaft
sprocket mounting bolt (A).

F
5. Loosely install the balancer shaft/balancer shaft holder
assembly (B) with the O-rings (C), then install the balancer
shaft sprocket (D).

NOTE: These colored link plates (E) shall be used in

product process only and not used for maintenance
A purpose. There is no need to line up the colored link plates
as it has no effect on the engine operation.
C

C
6. Remove the pin driver, 6.0 mm, then tighten the balancer
shaft/balancer shaft holder assembly mounting bolts.

B
7. Tighten the balancer chain guide mounting bolt (F).

07744-0010500

2. Balancer Chain Tensioner - Install

1. Squeeze the new balancer chain tensioner (A), then install

the set clip (B) on it as shown.
A

B
 NOTE: The set clip is supplied with the balancer chain
tensioner.

2. Install the new balancer chain tensioner.

3. Remove the set clip from the balancer chain tensioner.

3. Oil Pan - Install

Ball Joint Disconnection

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 07AAE-SJAA100

Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100

Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL00102

Image Description/Tool Number
Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00202

Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of the ball joint
connection to disconnect it.

1. Ball Joint - Disconnect

1. Install a hex nut (A) or the ball joint thread protector onto
the threads of the ball joint (B).
A
B
NOTE: When using a hex nut, make sure the nut is flush
with the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the
threaded end of the ball joint pin.

07AAE-SJAA100 or
07AAF-SDAA100
 2. Apply multipurpose grease to the ball joint remover on the
A B areas as shown (A). This will ease the installation of the
tool, and prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads.

07MAC-SL00102 or
07MAC-SL00202

3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the ball joint
remover as shown.

NOTE:
D
Insert the jaws carefully, making sure not to damage
the ball joint boot.
C
E Fasten the safety chain (B) securely to a suspension
arm or the subframe (C). Do not fasten it to a brake line
or wire harness.
B

4. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt (D).

5. Make sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in the position

shown to allow the jaw (E) to pivot.

A 07MAC-SL00102 or
07MAC-SL00202
6. Tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint pin pops loose
from the ball joint connecting hole. If necessary, apply
penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint pin.

NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on the

pressure bolt.

7. Remove the ball joint remover.

8. Remove the nut or the ball joint thread protector.

9. Pull the ball joint out of the ball joint connecting hole.

10. Inspect the ball joint boot, and replace it if damaged.

Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Connector Index
Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector A (28P)
Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector B (28P)
Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector C (28P)
Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector D (16P)
Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector E (32P)
Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector F (12P)

Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector A (28P) (female terminals)

- TAN PNK LT PUR BLU YEL - - - BLU - - -

BLU

YEL GRY LT BRN RED GRN - - - - - - - RED

GRN

Terminal Terminal name Description

number
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 BATT- Detects high voltage battery negative (-) pole terminal signal
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 VH0 Detects battery cell voltage signal
9 VH2 Detects battery cell voltage signal
10 VH4 Detects battery cell voltage signal
11 VH6 Detects battery cell voltage signal
12 VH8 Detects battery cell voltage signal
13 VH10 Detects battery cell voltage signal
14 Not used
15 BATT+ Detects high voltage battery positive (+) pole terminal signal
16 Not used
17 Not used
18 Not used
19 Not used
20 Not used
21 Not used
22 Not used
 Terminal Terminal name Description
number
23 VH1 Detects battery cell voltage signal
24 VH3 Detects battery cell voltage signal
25 VH5 Detects battery cell voltage signal
26 VH7 Detects battery cell voltage signal
27 VH9 Detects battery cell voltage signal
28 VH11 Detects battery cell voltage signal

Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector B (28P) (female terminals)

- RED BLU TAN PNK LT PUR GRN BLU TAN PNK LT PUR GRN
BLU BLU

- GRN YEL GRY LT BRN RED - YEL GRY LT BRN RED BLU
GRN GRN

Terminal Terminal name Description

number
1 VH13 Detects battery cell voltage signal
2 VH15 Detects battery cell voltage signal
3 VH17 Detects battery cell voltage signal
4 VH19 Detects battery cell voltage signal
5 VH21 Detects battery cell voltage signal
6 VH23 Detects battery cell voltage signal
7 VH24 Detects battery cell voltage signal
8 VH26 Detects battery cell voltage signal
9 VH28 Detects battery cell voltage signal
10 VH30 Detects battery cell voltage signal
11 VH32 Detects battery cell voltage signal
12 VH34 Detects battery cell voltage signal
13 VH36-0 Detects battery cell voltage signal
14 Not used
15 VH12 Detects battery cell voltage signal
16 VH14 Detects battery cell voltage signal
17 VH16 Detects battery cell voltage signal
18 VH18-0 Detects battery cell voltage signal
19 VH20 Detects battery cell voltage signal
20 VH22 Detects battery cell voltage signal
21 Not used
22 VH25 Detects battery cell voltage signal
23 VH27 Detects battery cell voltage signal
 Terminal Terminal name Description
number
24 VH29 Detects battery cell voltage signal
25 VH31 Detects battery cell voltage signal
26 VH33 Detects battery cell voltage signal
27 VH35 Detects battery cell voltage signal
28 Not used

Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector C (28P) (female terminals)

- - PUR GRN YEL GRY LT BRN PUR GRN YEL GRY LT BRN
GRN GRN

- BRN RED BLU TAN PNK LT - RED BLU TAN PNK LT PUR
BLU BLU

Terminal Terminal name Description

number
1 VH37 Detects battery cell voltage signal
2 VH39 Detects battery cell voltage signal
3 VH41 Detects battery cell voltage signal
4 VH43 Detects battery cell voltage signal
5 VH45 Detects battery cell voltage signal
6 VH47 Detects battery cell voltage signal
7 VH48 Detects battery cell voltage signal
8 VH50 Detects battery cell voltage signal
9 VH52 Detects battery cell voltage signal
10 VH54-0 Detects battery cell voltage signal
11 VH56 Detects battery cell voltage signal
12 VH58 Detects battery cell voltage signal
13 Not used
14 Not used
15 VH36-1 Detects battery cell voltage signal
16 VH38 Detects battery cell voltage signal
17 VH40 Detects battery cell voltage signal
18 VH42 Detects battery cell voltage signal
19 VH44 Detects battery cell voltage signal
20 VH46 Detects battery cell voltage signal
21 Not used
22 VH49 Detects battery cell voltage signal
23 VH51 Detects battery cell voltage signal
24 VH53 Detects battery cell voltage signal
 Terminal Terminal name Description
number
25 VH55 Detects battery cell voltage signal
26 VH57 Detects battery cell voltage signal
27 VH59 Detects battery cell voltage signal
28 Not used

Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector D (16P) (female terminals)

- - LT PUR GRN YEL GRY LT

BLU GRN

- LT BRN RED BLU TAN PNK LT

GRN BLU

Terminal Terminal name Description

number
1 VH61 Detects battery cell voltage signal
2 VH63 Detects battery cell voltage signal
3 VH65 Detects battery cell voltage signal
4 VH67 Detects battery cell voltage signal
5 VH69 Detects battery cell voltage signal
6 VH71 Detects battery cell voltage signal
7 Not used
8 Not used
9 VH60 Detects battery cell voltage signal
10 VH62 Detects battery cell voltage signal
11 VH64 Detects battery cell voltage signal
12 VH66 Detects battery cell voltage signal
13 VH68 Detects battery cell voltage signal
14 VH70 Detects battery cell voltage signal
15 VH72 Detects battery cell voltage signal
16 Not used

Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector E (32P) (female terminals)

- - PUR - - GRN PNK WHT RED BLU LT LT YEL RED TAN LT

BLU GRN GRN

- - YEL GRY BRN BLU LT - GRN GRY - BLU PUR GRN - BLK
GRN
 Terminal Terminal name Description
number
1 +B IGB Power source for battery condition monitor module (backup)
2 IGB Power source for battery condition monitor module
3 CNTPSIN Power source for contactors
4 CNTP Drives high voltage contactor
5 CNTN Drives high voltage sub contactor
6 PRE Drives bypass contactor
7 IG1MONI Detects IG1 signal
8 F-CAN D_L Sends and receives F-CAN D communication signal (LOW)
9 F-CAN D_H Sends and receives F-CAN D communication signal (HIGH)
10 EPP-CAN_L Sends and receives EPP-CAN communication signal (LOW)
11 EPP-CAN_H Sends and receives EPP-CAN communication signal (HIGH)
12 Not used
13 Not used
14 NFAN Detects high voltage battery module fan revolution speed signal
15 Not used
16 Not used
17 PG(ECU) Ground for battery condition monitor module
18 Not used
19 IGHLDB Drives IGHLDB relay
20 IGHLD Drives IGHLD1 relay
21 IGHLD2 Drives battery fan relay
22 Not used Detects collision detection signal from SRS unit
23 IGAMONI Detects IGA signal
24 FANCTL Drives high voltage battery module fan
25 Not used
26 ISOC Detects battery current sensor signal (normal range)
27 ISOCF Detects battery current sensor signal (fine range)
28 VCCISOC Provides battery current sensor reference voltage
29 SGISOC Sensor ground for battery current sensor
30 CDS Detects collision detection signal from SRS unit
31 Not used
32 Not used

Battery Condition Monitor Module Connector F (12P) (female terminals)

BRN LT - - GRN WHT

BLU

- - - - YEL RED
Terminal Terminal name Description
number
1 TBATT1 Detects high voltage battery module temperature sensor 1 signal
2 TBATT3 Detects high voltage battery module temperature sensor 3 signal
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 BATTIND1 Detects high voltage battery module identification resistor signal
6 SGTB Sensor ground for high voltage battery module
7 TBATT2 Detects high voltage battery module temperature sensor 2 signal
8 TBATT4 Detects high voltage battery module temperature sensor 4 signal
9 Not used
10 Not used
11 Not used
12 Not used
Battery Condition Monitor Module Removal and Installation

NOTE:
Follow the notes on the reference section.
If you are replacing the battery condition monitor module, do the all procedures.
If you are removing the battery condition monitor module, do 2nd procedure (IPU - Remove) and 3rd procedure (Battery
Condition Monitor Module - Remove).

1. Battery Condition Monitor Module Data - Read

1. Connect the HDS.

2. Select the Electric Powertrain system with the HDS.

3. Select the HV Battery/HV Battery ECU Replacement.

4. Select the Battery ECU Replacement, then select the Read

Data, and follow the screen prompts.

NOTE:
Doing this step copies (Read) the battery condition
monitor module data from the original battery condition
monitor module so you can later download (Write) it
into the new battery condition monitor module.
If the Read Data procedure is failed, go to the next
procedure.

2. IPU - Remove

3. Battery Condition Monitor Module - Remove

NOTE:
Follow the notes on the reference section.
If you are replacing the battery condition monitor module, do the all procedures.
If you are installing the original battery condition monitor module, do 1st procedure (Battery Condition Monitor Module -
Install) and 2nd procedure (IPU - Install).

1. Battery Condition Monitor Module - Install

2. IPU - Install

3. Battery Condition Monitor Module Data - Write

NOTE: If the Read Data procedure was failed in 1st procedure

of the removal (Battery Condition Monitor Module Data -
Read), go to next procedure (Battery Condition Monitor
Module - Install).

1. Connect the HDS.

2. Select the Electric Powertrain system with the HDS.

3. Select the HV Battery/Battery ECU Replacement, then

select the Write Data, and follow the screen prompts.

NOTE: If the Write Data procedure is failed, this procedure

is complete.

4. Battery Condition Monitor Module - Update

Battery Condition Monitor Module Update

1. Battery Condition Monitor Module - Update

NOTE: When updating control units, use the most current

version of the HDS software and interface device. Check any
official service information website for more information about
updating control units.
Battery Pack Disassembly and Reassembly
The power cables carry high voltage when the electric powertrain system is energized. To avoid serious injury from
electrical shock, do not turn on the system with the power cables disconnected.
Wear insulated gloves and use insulated tools to protect you from electrical shock. When removing or installing
high voltage items, always use them. Wrap the high voltage items with insulating tape after removing. Please be
careful when you see on the illustration.
 NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Wear insulated gloves and use insulated tools to protect you from electrical shock.
To avoid damaging the wiring and terminals, unplug the wiring connectors carefully while holding the connector portion.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection. Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or hoses, or interfere
with other parts.
Strong impact (i.e., dropping the high voltage battery, collision damage) may cause electrolyte leaks, internal short circuits
and heat increase resulting in fire. Avoid impact to the high voltage battery.
Organic electrolyte is poisonous. If ingested, get medical attention immediately.
High voltage battery damage may cause flammable gas or electrolyte leaks and may result in fire. Do not damage the high
voltage battery and keep sparks, flame and cigarettes away.

The electric powertrain components are located in this area. The electric powertrain is a high-voltage system. You must be
familiar with the electric powertrain system before working on or around it. Make sure you have read the electric powertrain
service precautions before doing repairs or service.

1
 1.

3.
*1

BATTERY MODULE A

2.

2.

3.
*2

BATTERY MODULE B

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

*1 High voltage battery module temperature sensor A
*2 High voltage battery module temperature sensor B

1. Service Plug Base - Remove

 1. Open the terminal covers (A).
C

2. Remove the terminal nuts (B).

3. Remove the service plug base (C).

NOTE: Never reuse a bent or damaged busbar.

4. Close the terminal covers.

NOTE: Keep the terminal covers closed when you are not
working on them.

B A A

2. Battery Frame - Remove

3. High Voltage Battery Module Temperature Sensor - Remove

1. Remove the high voltage battery module temperature sensor A and B.

BATTERY MODULE A

BATTERY MODULE B
The power cables carry high voltage when the electric powertrain system is energized. To avoid serious injury from
electrical shock, do not turn on the system with the power cables disconnected.
Wear insulated gloves and use insulated tools to protect you from electrical shock. When removing or installing
high voltage items, always use them. Wrap the high voltage items with insulating tape after removing. Please be
careful when you see on the illustration.
 NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Wear insulated gloves and use insulated tools to protect you from electrical shock.
To avoid damaging the wiring and terminals, connect the wiring connectors carefully while holding the connector portion.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection. Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or hoses, or interfere
with other parts.
Strong impact (i.e., dropping the high voltage battery, collision damage) may cause electrolyte leaks, internal short circuits
and heat increase resulting in fire. Avoid impact to the high voltage battery.
Organic electrolyte is poisonous. If ingested, get medical attention immediately.
High voltage battery damage may cause flammable gas or electrolyte leaks and may result in fire. Do not damage the high
voltage battery and keep sparks, flame and cigarettes away.

The electric powertrain components are located in this area. The electric powertrain is a high-voltage system. You must be
familiar with the electric powertrain system before working on or around it. Make sure you have read the electric powertrain
service precautions before doing repairs or service.

1
 3.
3.
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

1.
*1

BATTERY MODULE A

2.
17 (1.7, 13)

2.
17 (1.7, 13)

1.
*2

BATTERY MODULE B

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
*1 High voltage battery module temperature sensor A
*2 High voltage battery module temperature sensor B

1. High Voltage Battery Module Temperature Sensor - Install

High Voltage Battery Module Temperature Sensor A 1. Install the sensors (A).

A
2. Fix the harness to the locks (B).

3. Install the clip (C).

B
C
 High Voltage Battery Module Temperature Sensor B

B
C

2. Battery Frame - Install

3. Service Plug Base - Install

 NOTE: Check that the voltage between the terminals are
normal before installing the service plug base.
A
1. Open the terminal covers (A).

2. Measure the voltage between the terminals (B).

Standard: 1 V or less

3. Install the service plug base (A) with the mount bolts (B).
A B

4. Install the terminal nuts (C).

5. Close the terminal covers (D).

C D D
Battery Pack Removal and Installation

NOTE:
Follow the notes on the reference section.
When disassembling the battery pack and replacing one of the battery modules, retrieve the relevant electric powertrain
system parameter(s) information before servicing.

1. IPU - Remove

2. Battery Pack - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

4. Battery Condition Monitor Module - Reset

NOTE: When replacing the battery pack, do the following

procedure.

1. Connect the HDS.

2. Select the Electric Powertrain system with the HDS.

3. Select the HV Battery/HV Battery ECU Replacement.

4. Select the HV Battery Replacement, then follow the screen

prompts.
Battery System Description - Components

Battery Pack
The high voltage battery pack uses a Li-ion (lithium ion) battery. A Li-ion battery is lightweight and compact in size, and has a long
lifespan.
The battery pack is composed of 2 modules connected in series. The high voltage battery is equipped with thermistor type
temperature sensors.

BATTERY PACK (2 MODULES)

Junction Board/Subjunction Board

The junction and subjunction boards isolate the high voltage battery, and distribute power to other high voltage systems. The junction
board and subjunction board are installed in the IPU.
The main fuse, the contactors, and the battery current sensor are located on the junction board.

Contactor
The high voltage contactor and the bypass contactor are arranged on the positive pole side of the battery pack, while the high voltage
sub contactor is arranged on the negative pole side. These contactors are controlled by the battery condition monitor module and
perform connection and disconnection of the high voltage circuit. When the contactor connects to the positive pole side, the bypass
contactor switches to ON before the high voltage contactor is turned on connecting the high voltage circuit via a pre-charge resistance
limits the rush current until the capacitor is charged; this serves to protect the system.
Several large capacitors are located in the PCU. When the system starts up, these capacitors are discharged and if the battery were
connected by the high voltage contactor a very large and damaging current would flow. This is referred to as inrush current. This
current could damage various components but would cause arcing on the high voltage contactor. To prevent a large inrush current, a
bypass contactor is switches to ON first at start up. This connects the high voltage battery to the various capacitors thru a resistor
limiting the current and allowing the capacitors to charge. In a very short time the capacitors are charged, then the high voltage
contactor switches to ON and the bypass contactor switches to OFF.
Battery Current Sensor
The battery current sensor detects the input and output current of the high voltage battery. The input/output current detected by the
sensor is sent to the battery condition monitor module; it is used for calculating the remaining capacity of the state of charge (SOC).
Service Plug
The service plug is installed in the high voltage circuit of the high voltage battery and in the contactor control circuit. By removing this
plug, the high voltage circuit and the contactor control circuit can be interrupted when the electric powertrain system or the parts
around it have to be inspected or serviced. This ensures that safe inspection and servicing work can be done.
When removing the service plug, make sure you have read the electric powertrain service precautions.

HIGH VOLTAGE
CIRCUIT

SERVICE PLUG

CONTACTOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT

SERVICE PLUG BASE

Special Bolt

A high tension, truss head type special bolt is used on high voltage circuit connection points to properly secure the connection and
reduce the possibility of becoming loose. Do not replace these bolts with any other type.

High Voltage Battery Module Fan

When the electric powertrain system repeats the charging and discharging cycles, the battery pack become hot. To dissipate this heat
– and to maintain the high voltage battery performance and protection of the system – a high voltage battery module fan is installed in
the IPU. The high voltage battery module fan uses a fan motor control circuit and a speed sensor built in, and the battery condition
monitor module controls the high voltage battery module fan so that the high voltage battery temperature is kept at a suitable level.
The cooling air intake is located at center of the rear seat and passes through the battery pack to the trunk.
Battery Power Cable
The battery power cable located between the IPU and the PCU is protected by a corrugated tube and an orange aluminum pipe
against external damages, and is secured with a clamp under the floor.
Inside the pipe are the high voltage cable, the 12 volt power supply cable from the DC-DC convertor, and the electric A/C compressor
cable.
Battery System Description - Overview

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index.

Battery Control System

Battery Output Control

The amount of power that can be removed from or put into a battery will vary depending on various conditions such as the
temperature of the battery and the health of the battery. If more power is moved into or out of the battery than the battery can safely
handle, the battery life will be shortened or in a worse case situation, the battery could be damaged severely (thermal runaway, fluid
leakage, etc.). To prevent damage and maximize the battery capacity over the life of the battery, the battery charging and discharging
is controlled by the battery condition monitor module.
The battery condition monitor module uses inputs from the battery module temperature sensors, the battery current sensor, and the
state of charge (SOC) calculated by the battery condition monitor module to control the power into and out of the battery. The battery
condition monitor module uses the above information as well as the demand for power to determine the optimum power of the battery
at all times.

Motor control PCU

Management ECU EPP-CAN (Motor control module) ・ Motor control module
(PCM) ・ Control assist and ・ Inverter
Motor torque regeneration ・ Drive signal
request ・ Voltage convert ・ DC-DC converter
permission amount
toward the motor signal
Battery module output requested torque
control (Battery condition
Output
monitor module) DC-DC converter
・ SOC management control
・ Current sequence time EPP-CAN (Motor control module)
management ・ Accepts or rejects Battery pack
・ Temperature Assist and DC-DC converter
management regeneration operation based on
permission amount battery module
・ Real time peak output condition High voltage battery condition
estimate control
・ Battery current sensor
・ High voltage battery module
temperature sensor
・ Battery cell voltage
Battery module temperature, current, voltage

SOC Management Control

To prevent deterioration of the battery the SOC is controlled by the battery condition monitor module. If necessary, the battery
condition monitor module will limit the power output if the SOC should reach unacceptable levels.

HDS Parameter Normal Control Area

SOC 0 - 100 %
Motor Power Save (Affected by HV Battery SOC) No/Restricted

Relation to output
limit and SOC
Assist limit
[kW]

Assist Non-
discharge

0% SOC 100 %

Regeneration Regeneration Non-

limit charge

Discharge control area Normal control area Charge control area

Temperature Management Control

To prevent damage to the battery in extreme high or low temperatures, the battery condition monitor module may limit the battery
power. The battery condition monitor module also controls the operation of the high voltage battery module fan.

HDS Parameter Normal Control Area

HV Battery Module Temperature Sensor 1 Depending on battery
temperature
HV Battery Module Temperature Sensor 2 Depending on battery
temperature
HV Battery Module Temperature Sensor 3 Depending on battery
temperature
HV Battery Module Temperature Sensor 4 Depending on battery
temperature

Assist

Regeneration
Output limit
Output limit (high
(low temperature) Normal Control Area temperature)
–22 °F 32 °F 167 °F
(–30 °C) (0 °C) (75 °C)
Battery Temperature

Consecutive Output Management Control

The batteries ability to provide power varies with the amount of power and the time the power is provided. High power can be provided
for a short time, and low power can be provided for an extended period of time. The battery condition monitor module controls the
power provided to a safe limit below the maximum battery performance limit to prevent deterioration or overheating of the battery.

[kW]
Battery performance
limit

Assist amount

Assist amount
Instant Middle Standard output
output output

High Voltage Circuit Shut-Off Control at the time of Collision Detection

When the SRS unit detects a collision signal (front collision, side collision, rear collision), the battery condition monitor module stores
the DTC according to a signal from the SRS unit, and the high voltage circuit is cut off by switching the contactors to OFF. At this time,
the POWER SYSTEM indicator, the 12 volt charging system indicator, and the SRS indicator come on, and the READY indicator goes
out. The collision shut-off control is cancelled by using the HDS to clear the DTC in the battery condition monitor module.
Battery System Description - System Diagram

Control
The high voltage battery charging is provided by the electric power from the generator motor or the traction motor via inverter in the
PCU. The high voltage battery is equipped with multiple temperature sensors that send information to the battery condition monitor
module.

: HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

BATTERY PACK

BATTERY MODULE BATTERY MODULE

TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR

SERVICE PLUG

BATTERY CONDITION
MONITOR MODULE

JUNCTION BOARD

SUBJUNCTION
BOARD

・PCU
・DC-DC
CONVERTER
HIGH VOLTAGE
CONTACTOR BATTERY
CURRENT
SENSOR

BYPASS
BYPASS RESISTOR
CONTACTOR
ELECTRIC A/C
COMPRESSOR

HIGH VOLTAGE
SUB CONTACTOR
Bluetooth audio does not work

Diagnostic Procedure

1. Chack the Wi-Fi wire connection between the audio unit or the audio-navigation unit and
the center display unit (Display Audio Type)

Also Check for

Bluetooth audio device compatibility (see the Owner's Manual)

Body Electrical Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2 (without the HDS)

Shift to Test Mode 1

1. Check the No. A27 and No. A40 fuses. If a fuse is blown, find and correct the cause, then
replace the fuse.

2. Turn the front individual map light switches OFF, and move the interior light switch to the
DOOR position (with interior light switch) and the ceiling light switch to the middle position.
Close all the doors.
NOTE: Do steps 3－7 within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

4. Pull and hold the combination light switch in its PASSING position.

ON mode
Vehicle Mode
OFF (LOCK)
mode

ON
Passing Switch
OFF

PARKING
Combination
Light Switch
( ) OFF

10 sec.

5. While holding the combination light switch is in PASSING position, turn to the PARKING
position, then release, pull, and hold the combination light switch in its PASSING position.

6. Turn the combination light switch to OFF, then turn to the PARKING position, and turn to OFF
two more times.

7. Release the combination light switch.

8. Watch the front individual map lights* and the ceiling light. When the lights come on for 2
seconds and flash quickly once, the system enters in Test Mode 1.
*: With interior light switch

9. If the front individual map lights* and the ceiling light keep blinking after entering Test Mode 1,
check for B-CAN unit communication error.
*: With interior light switch

Error Display code

(blinking pattern)
Communication bus line error (BUS OFF) 1
The body control module cannot receive signals from the gauge 5
control module.

10. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated on the display in the gauge control module while still in Test
Mode 1. Press the TRIP button to display the next code. After you get to the last code, the
display shows END. If no DTCs are stored, the display reads NO.
NOTE: If the test times out, turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, and repeat steps 3－7.
 Multi-information display (MID)

DTC detected indication No DTCs detected All DTCs have been displayed
(The two digits after the letters
‘‘PA’’ represent the
Control Unit I.D. Number)

Segment display

DTC detected indication No DTCs detected All DTCs have been displayed
(The two digits below the DTC
represent the
Control Unit I.D. Number)

The control unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown next to the DTC.

Control Unit Control Unit I.D.

Number
Relay control module 11
Body control module 18
Power window master switch 30
Gauge control module 50
Climate control unit 51
Audio unit 54
Audio-navigation unit 55
Head up display 61
Automatic lighting control unit-sensor 72
Telematics control unit 91
Power seat control unit 95
Left side BSI radar unit 9F
Ventilated seat control unit A2
Front seat heater control unit A2
Right side BSI radar unit A7
Wireless charger AF

NOTE: You can also check B-CAN communication status by the following methods:
The body control module self-diagnostic function Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2 can check
some communication statuses and some switch circuits.
The gauge control module self-diagnostic function can check communication status.
11. Record all DTCs and sort them by DTC type, then troubleshoot them in this order:
 Internal error DTCs
Loss of communication DTCs
Signal error DTCs

12. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the TRIP button for about 10 seconds.

13. You will hear a beep to confirm the codes have been cleared. Operate the devices that failed,
and recheck for codes.

Shift to Test Mode 2

NOTE: Do steps 14－17 within 10 seconds.

14. Pull and hold the combination light switch in its Passing position.

ON mode
Vehicle Mode
OFF (LOCK)
mode
ON
Passing Switch
OFF

Combination PARKING
Light Switch
( ) OFF

10 sec.

15. While holding the combination light switch is in PASSING position, turn to the PARKING
position, then release, pull, and hold the combination light switch in its PASSING position.

16. Turn the combination light switch to OFF, then turn to the PARKING position, and turn to OFF
two more times.

17. Release the combination light switch.

18. Watch the front individual map lights* and the ceiling light. When the lights come on for 2
seconds and flash two times quickly and then go off, the system is in Test Mode 2.
*: With interior light switch
NOTE: If you repeat this procedure, the system automatically returns to Test Mode 1.

19. The following tables list the circuits that can be checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is most closely related to the problem.
If the circuit is OK, the front individual map lights* and the ceiling light blink once. If the circuit is faulty, there is no such indication.

－ If the front individual map lights* and the ceiling light do not blink even when a switch is operated, check two or three other circuits
listed in the table. If the front individual map lights* and the ceiling light blink for each circuit, the additional circuits are OK; repair
the short or open circuit that failed the test in step 19.
－ If the front individual map lights* and the ceiling light do not blink again, this means that the control unit has failed without triggering
a DTC. Test a few more circuits. If they also fail, check the related control units using their input tests.

*: With interior light switch

Body Control Module

Item
Driver's door switch Turn signal switch (LEFT)
*1: With trunk lid outer handle switch
*2: With trunk lid opener main switch
*3: M/T
*4: CVT
*5: With heated windshield wiper area switch
 Item
Front passenger's door switch Turn signal switch (RIGHT)
Left rear door switch Hazard warning switch
Right rear door switch Headlight switch (ON)
*1 Headlight switch (OFF)
Trunk lid outer handle switch
Trunk lid opener main switch*2 Lighting switch
Trunk lid latch switch Dimmer switch
Windshield wiper HI/LO switch Passing switch
Windshield wiper INT/LO switch Fog light switch
Windshield wiper MIST switch Brake pedal position switch
Windshield wiper intermittent dwell time controller Back-up light switch*3
Windshield washer switch Clutch pedal position switch A*3
Driver's door outer handle touch sensor (UNLOCK) Park pin switch*4
Driver's door outer handle lock sensor (LOCK) Transmission range switch*4
Front passenger's door outer handle touch sensor (UNLOCK) Heated windshield wiper area switch*5
Front passenger's door outer handle lock sensor (LOCK) Electric parking brake switch
*1: With trunk lid outer handle switch
*2: With trunk lid opener main switch
*3: M/T
*4: CVT
*5: With heated windshield wiper area switch

Relay Control Module

Item
Hood latch switch

Door Multiplex Control Unit

Item
Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK) Driving position memory switch (SET)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK) Driving position memory switch (POSITION 1)
Front passenger's door lock switch (UNLOCK) Driving position memory switch (POSITION 2)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK) Power window master switch
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) (Driver's window UP, DOWN, AUTO)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK) Power window master switch
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) (Front passenger's window UP, DOWN, AUTO)
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) Power window master switch
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) (Left rear window UP, DOWN)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)* Power window master switch
(Right rear window UP, DOWN)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK)*
Trunk lid opener switch
*: A mechanical key is necessary to check the key cylinder inputs. Be sure to rotate the key cylinder switch two times to each
position (lock and lock, unlock and unlock) to ensure the door lock knob switch is in the appropriate position.

Gauge Control Module

Item
*2
ACC combination switch Sport mode switch*3
Idle stop OFF switch*6
Cruise control combination switch*1 km/h, mph change switch*4
Distance switch*2 Brake fluid level switch
LKAS switch*2 Washer fluid level switch*5
Safety support switch*2 ECON switch
Automatic brake hold switch TRIP switch
VSA OFF switch
*1: Without ACC
*2: With ACC
*3: With sport mode switch
*4: Without multi-information display
*5: Canada model
*6: With auto idle stop system
Body Electrical Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A - Initial Communication and DTC Checks

Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM or F-CAN loss of communication errors first,
then do this diagnosis if the symptom is related to the B-CAN system.

1. Compare the symptom with this list of B-CAN related systems:

Gauge control module

Head up display
Exterior lights
Turn signals
Entry light control
Safety indicators
Horns (security and panic)
Reminder chimes (seat belt, lights-on, and parking brake etc.)
Power window/moonroof timer
Wiper/washer
Security
Keyless entry
Power door locks
Immobilizer
Driving position memory system
Keyless access control
Climate control
Ventilated seat
Seat heater
Wireless charger
Audio and visual system
Telematics system
Driving support
BSI system

－ If the symptom is related to the B-CAN, go to step 2.

－ If the symptom is not related to the B-CAN, go to the system symptom troubleshooting.■

2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).

3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT menu, select B-CAN CONTROL UNITS
INFORMATION, and then select CHECK CONNECTED CONTROL UNITS listed to see if the
following control units are communicating with the HDS.
 Body control module
Gauge control module
Head up display
Climate control unit
Automatic lighting control unit-sensor
Power window master switch
Power seat control unit
Relay control module
Front seat heater control unit
Ventilated seat control unit
Wireless charger
Audio unit
Audio-navigation unit
Telematics control unit
Left side BSI radar unit
Right side BSI radar unit

NOTE:
If a unit is communicating with the HDS, "DETECT" is displayed.
If a unit is not communicating or the vehicle is not equipped, "NOT AVAILABLE" is
displayed.
The HDS only checks the status one time when BODY ELECTRICAL is selected. To
recheck the status after repair, reboot the HDS.

－ If all control units are communicating with the HDS, go to step 4.

－ If any of the control units are not communicating, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
Mode B.■
－ If all units are not communicating or only the body control module is communicating, go to
body control module DTC U1280 troubleshooting.■

4. Select the system that has the problem from the BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SELECT
menu, then select DTCs.

－ If any DTCs are indicated, go to step 5.

5. Record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type, then troubleshoot them in this order:

Internal error DTCs.

Loss of communication DTCs.
Signal error DTCs.
Body Electrical Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B - Control Unit Not Communicating

Do this diagnosis if any of the control units are not communicating (NOT AVAILABLE is displayed
in the HDS) as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A.

1. Using the HDS, select the system that has the symptom from the BODY ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM SELECT menu.

2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of communication DTCs.

－ If any loss of communication DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.

－ If any loss of communication DTCs are not indicated, replace the body control module.■

3. Do the power, ground, and communication part of the input test for the unit(s) not communicating
with the HDS.

Unit not communicating

Body control module
Gauge control module
Head up display
Climate control unit
Power window master switch
Automatic lighting control unit-sensor
Power seat control unit
Relay control module
Front seat heater control unit
Ventilated seat control unit
Wireless charger
Audio unit
Audio-navigation unit
Telematics control unit
Left side BSI radar unit
Right side BSI radar unit
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test

NOTE: If both the ABS/VSA indicator and the brake system indicator (red) come on at the same time, check the VSA system
first.

1. Brake Fluid Level Switch - Test

1. Disconnect the connector (A).

2. Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2) with
the float in the down position and in the up position.

Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir.

With the float down, there should be continuity.
Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper)
level (B). With the float up, there should be no
continuity.

NOTE: If the brake fluid level switch is OK, but the brake
system indicator (red) does not function, do the gauge
control module self-diagnostic function.

3. Connect the connector.

B
A

1 2
2/8/23, 2:44 AM Brake Fluid Level Switch Test 1028

Brake Fluid Level Switch Test

NOTE: If both the ABS/VSA indicator and the brake system indicator (red) come on at the same time, check the VSA system
first.

1. Brake Fluid Level Switch - Test

1. Disconnect the connector (A).

2. Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2) with
the float in the down position and in the up position.

Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir.

With the float down, there should be continuity.
Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper)
level (B). With the float up, there should be no
continuity.

NOTE: If the brake fluid level switch is OK, but the brake
system indicator (red) does not function, do the gauge
control module self-diagnostic function.

A 3. Connect the connector.

B

1 2

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R001028_enu 1/1
3/22/23, 6:43 PM Brake Fluid Replacement 4189

Brake Fluid Replacement

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004189_enu 1/5
3/22/23, 6:43 PM Brake Fluid Replacement 4189
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.
There are three different methods used for bleeding brake systems. The method shown in this procedure is the
preferred method for removing the air from the system. For pressure or vacuum bleeding, refer to the tool
manufacturer's instructions included with the tool. If you use a commercially available pressure feed bleeder and
operate the brake pedal, excessive hydraulic pressure will be applied to the cup inside the master cylinder causing
damage. Do not use these methods together.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004189_enu 2/5
3/22/23, 6:43 PM Brake Fluid Replacement 4189

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
The brake fluid level must be at the MAX (upper) level mark of the reservoir at the start of the bleeding procedure and
checked after bleeding each wheel location. Add fluid as required.
Press the brake pedal slowly while the vehicle is being in ON mode.
Because brake fluid is replaced with the vehicle in the ON mode, the brake system indicator is turned on. The brake system
indicator goes off by depressing the brake pedal for about 3 seconds.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Turn The Vehicle to The ON Mode

3. Bleed - Precaution

1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the

MAX (upper) level line (A).

2. Bleed the brake system in the sequence shown.

BLEEDING SEQUENCE:

Front Driver's Side

Front Passenger's Side

Rear Passenger's Side

Rear Driver's Side

4. Brake System - Bleed 1 (Between Tandem Motor Cylinder and Brake Caliper)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004189_enu 3/5
3/22/23, 6:43 PM Brake Fluid Replacement 4189
1. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed screw
(B).
B
17 (1.7, 13)
2. Submerge the other end of the drain tube into a clear
plastic catch bottle of brake fluid (C).

A
3. Have an assistant slowly pump the brake pedal several
times then apply steady continuous pressure.

4. Loosen the bleed screw slowly to bleed the fluid into the
plastic catch bottle. The brake pedal will travel toward the
floor as the fluid is bled from the system.

5. When the brake pedal reaches the floor, have the assistant
C
hold the pedal in that position, then tighten the bleed screw.
The brake pedal can now be released.

6. Check and refill the reservoir tank to the MAX (upper) level
line. Be sure to reinstall the reservoir cap.

7. Repeat steps 3 thru 6 until the brake fluid in the clear drain
tube appears to be clean and new.

8. Repeat this procedure for each bleed screw of the brake

caliper in the bleeding sequence.

5. Turn The Vehicle to The OFF (LOCK) Mode

1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, and wait 3

minutes or more.

NOTE: After 3 minutes, do not open or close the door.

6. Brake System - Bleed 2 (Between Pedal Feel Simulator and Brake Caliper)

1. Have an assistant slowly pump the brake pedal several

times then apply steady continuous pressure.
A
17 (1.7, 13)
2. Loosen the bleed screw (A) slowly to bleed the fluid into the
plastic catch bottle. The brake pedal will travel toward the
floor as the fluid is bled from the system.

3. When the brake pedal reaches the floor, have the assistant
hold the pedal in that position, then tighten the bleed screw.
The brake pedal can now be released.

4. Check and refill the reservoir tank to the MAX (upper) level
line. Be sure to reinstall the reservoir cap.

5. Repeat steps 1 thru 4 until the brake fluid in the clear drain
tube appears to be clean and new.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004189_enu 4/5
3/22/23, 6:43 PM Brake Fluid Replacement 4189
6. Repeat this procedure for each bleed screw of the brake
caliper in the bleeding sequence.

7. After Bleeding - Check

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

2. Press the pedal with a normal force, and keep the pedal
pressed for about 3 seconds.

3. Release the brake pedal.

4. Check that the brake system indicator does not come on.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004189_enu 5/5
3/22/23, 6:44 PM Brake Hose and Line Inspection 1569

Brake Hose and Line Inspection

1. Brake Hose and Line - Inspect

1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.

2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.

3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.

4. Check the tandem motor cylinder and the pedal feel simulator for damage and leaks.

5. Check the VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leaks.

Connection Component Connected to Specified Torque Value Note

Point
A Front brake caliper Brake hose 35 N·m (3.6 kgf·m, 26 lbf·ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
B Rear brake caliper Brake hose 35 N·m (3.6 kgf·m, 26 lbf·ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
C Brake hose Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) Flare nut
D Pedal feel simulator Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) Flare nut
(10 mm nut)
Brake line 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft) Flare nut
(12 mm nut)
E Tandem motor cylinder Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) Flare nut
F VSA modulator-control unit Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft) Flare nut
(10 mm nut)
Brake line 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
(12 mm nut)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001569_enu 1/2
3/22/23, 6:44 PM Brake Hose and Line Inspection 1569

B C

C A

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001569_enu 2/2
3/22/23, 6:44 PM Brake Hose Removal and Installation 1570

Brake Hose Removal and Installation

NOTE: Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

Front

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Front Wheel - Remove

3. Brake Hose - Remove

1. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose (B).

D
B C 2. Remove the brake hose clip (C).
A

3. Remove the banjo bolt (D), and disconnect the brake hose
from the caliper body.

4. Remove the brake hose.

Rear

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Rear Wheel - Remove

3. Brake Hose - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001570_enu 1/3
3/22/23, 6:44 PM Brake Hose Removal and Installation 1570
1. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose (B).
A B

2. Remove the brake hose clip (C).

3. Remove the banjo bolt (D), and disconnect the brake hose
from the caliper body.

4. Remove the brake hose.

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

Front

1. Brake Hose - Install

1. Install the brake hose (A) with the brake hose mounting bolt
C D
(B).
35 (3.6, 26) F
A 15 (1.5, 11)
E
2. Connect the brake hose to the caliper body with the banjo
bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).

3. Install a new brake hose clip (E) to the brake hose.

4. Connect the brake line (F) to the brake hose.

B
22 (2.2, 16)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001570_enu 2/3
3/22/23, 6:44 PM Brake Hose Removal and Installation 1570

2. Brake System - Bleed

3. Brake Hose and Line - Check

4. Front Wheel - Install

Rear

1. Brake Hose - Install

1. Install the brake hose (A) with the brake hose mounting bolt
F
A (B).
15 (1.5, 11)

2. Connect the brake hose to the caliper body with the banjo
bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).

3. Install a new brake hose clip (E) to the brake hose.

4. Connect the brake line (F) to the brake hose.

B
22 (2.2, 16)
D C
35 (3.6, 26)

2. Brake System - Bleed

3. Brake Hose and Line - Check

4. Rear Wheel - Install

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001570_enu 3/3
0 0 - Brake pad Specifications Screen 1 of 1

Brake pad

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

Brake pad Pad thickness Front 10.5-11.5 mm (0.41-0.45 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)

Rear 8.9-9.1 mm (0.35-0.36 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)

3/22/23, 6:45 PM Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment 1554

Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment

1. Steering Joint Cover - Remove

2. Brake Pedal Height - Inspect

1. Measure the pedal height (A) from the upper right side of
B the pedal pad (B) to the center of the steering joint cover
mounting hole (C).

NOTE: If the standard pedal height is out of specifications,

check for body damage around the brake pedal mounting
area and on the brake pedal assembly.

A Standard pedal height: 229.8 ± 5 mm (9.047 ± 0.20

in)

3. Brake Pedal - Adjust

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001554_enu 1/3
3/22/23, 6:45 PM Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment 1554
1. Remove the brake pedal position switch.
B
Lower the pedal NOTE: Do not disconnect the connector.

2. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A).

3. Screw the pushrod (B) in or out with pliers until the

standard pedal height from the floor is reached.

A
15 (1.5, 11) Raise the pedal 4. Tighten the locknut firmly.

NOTE: Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod

pressed.

4. Brake Pedal Position Switch - Adjust

1. Lift up on the brake pedal by hand.

A
C B
2. Push in the brake pedal position switch (A) until its plunger
is fully pressed (threaded end (B) touching the pad (C) on
the pedal arm).

3. Turn the switch 45 ° clockwise to lock it. The gap between

the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically
adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.028 in) by locking the switch.

4. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is

released.
0.7 mm (0.028 in)

5. Brake Pedal Free Play - Check

1. Inspect the free play (A) at the brake pedal pad (B) by
pushing the brake pedal by hand. If the brake pedal free
play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position
switch (C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may
result in brake drag.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001554_enu 2/3
3/22/23, 6:45 PM Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment 1554

Free play: 7.8－15.2 mm (0.307－0.598 in)

6. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

7. Sensor 0 (Zero) Position - Memorize

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001554_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 2:14 AM Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment 1026

Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment

1. Steering Joint Cover - Remove

2. Brake Pedal Height - Inspect

1. Measure the pedal height (A) from the upper right side of
B the pedal pad (B) to the center of the steering joint cover
mounting hole (C).

NOTE: If the standard pedal height is out of specifications,

check for body damage around the brake pedal mounting
area and on the brake pedal assembly.

A Standard pedal height:

M/T:
Normal pad type: 228.4 ± 5 mm (8.992 ±
0.20 in)
Sport pad type: 228.2 ± 5 mm (8.984 ±
0.20 in)
A/T, CVT:
Normal pad type: 229.8 ± 5 mm (9.047 ±
0.20 in)
C
Sport pad type: 230.0 ± 5 mm (9.055 ±
This illustration shows A/T, CVT. 0.20 in)

3. Brake Pedal Position Switch - Adjust

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R001026_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:14 AM Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment 1026
1. Remove the brake pedal position switch.
A
C B
2. Lift up on the brake pedal by hand.

3. Push in the brake pedal position switch (A) until its plunger
is fully pressed (threaded end (B) touching the pad (C) on
the pedal arm).

4. Turn the switch 45 ° clockwise to lock it. The gap between

the brake pedal position switch and the pad is automatically
adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.028 in) by locking the switch.

0.7 mm (0.028 in)

5. Make sure the brake lights go off when the pedal is
released.

4. Brake Pedal Free Play - Check

1. Inspect the free play (A) at the brake pedal pad (B) by
pushing the brake pedal by hand. If the brake pedal free
play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position
switch (C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may
result in brake drag.

Free play: 2.6－8.4 mm (0.102－0.331 in)

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R001026_enu 2/2
3/22/23, 6:45 PM Brake Pedal Feel Simulator Inspection 4193

Brake Pedal Feel Simulator Inspection

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.
Do not try to disassemble the pedal feel simulator assembly. Replace the pedal feel simulator assembly with a new part if
necessary.
Align the marks (A) on the reservoir and subreservoir with the paint marks (B) on the reservoir hose.
Check for deterioration and damage to each part during removal.
Exploded View

RESERVOIR CAP
A B B A

RESERVOIR SEAL

STRAINER

2.0 (0.20, 1.5)

RESERVOIR UNION

RESERVOIR

GROMMET

RESERVOIR HOSE

BLEED SCREW
6.9 (0.70, 5.1)

PEDAL FEEL SIMULATOR

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004193_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:13 AM Brake Pedal Position Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 661

Brake Pedal Position Switch Removal, Installation, and Test

Do not connect the brake pedal position switch connector with the brake pedal position switch removed.
The engine may start if the start/stop button is pressed as the system interprets that the brake pedal is depressed.
Unintended starting of the engine is dangerous.

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000661_enu 1/5
2/8/23, 2:13 AM Brake Pedal Position Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 661

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000661_enu 2/5
2/8/23, 2:13 AM Brake Pedal Position Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 661

2. 2.

3.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

1. Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000661_enu 3/5
2/8/23, 2:13 AM Brake Pedal Position Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 661
2. Brake Pedal Position Switch - Remove

NOTE: Before removing the brake pedal position switch, adjust

the steering column to the full tilt up position, and to the full
telescopic out position.

3. Attaching Piece - Remove

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

5. Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch - Adjust

Do not connect the brake pedal position switch connector with the brake pedal position switch removed.
The engine may start if the start/stop button is pressed as the system interprets that the brake pedal is depressed.
Unintended starting of the engine is dangerous.

1. Lower Column Cover - Remove

2. Brake Pedal Position Switch - Test

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000661_enu 4/5
2/8/23, 2:13 AM Brake Pedal Position Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 661

NOTE: Before testing the brake pedal position switch, adjust

the steering column to the full tilt up position, and to the full
B A
telescopic out position.

1. Disconnect the connector (A).

2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch

position according to the table.

3. If the test results are not as specified, adjust the brake

pedal position switch (B), then recheck. If the results are
still not as specified, replace the brake pedal position
switch.

Terminal
1 2 3 4
Position

Pedal pressed
Pedal released

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000661_enu 5/5
3/22/23, 8:45 PM Brake Pedal Removal and Installation 1568

Brake Pedal Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

1. Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover - Remove

2. Driver's Knee Airbag - Remove

3. Brake Pedal Position Switch - Remove

4. Brake Pedal - Remove

1. Disconnect the connector (A).

B 22 (2.2, 16)
C
2. Remove the harness clip (B).

3. Remove the lock pin (C).

4. Remove the clevis pin (D).

A
NOTE: During installation, apply multipurpose grease to the
clevis pin in the brake pedal.

5. Remove the brake pedal with the bracket (E).

D 12 (1.2, 9)
E

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001568_enu 1/2
3/22/23, 8:45 PM Brake Pedal Removal and Installation 1568
NOTE: The lock pin (A) can be installed from the top or
bottom.

6. Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch - Adjust

7. Sensor 0 (Zero) Position - Memorize

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001568_enu 2/2
Brake system indicator (amber) does not go off

Diagnostic Procedure

Check for PGM-FI DTCs.

Check for VSA System DTCs.
Check for VSA System Symptom Troubleshooting (ABS indicator, brake system indicator
(red), VSA indicator, and brake system indicator (amber) do not go off).
Check for electric servo brake system DTCs.
Check for driving support system DTCs.
Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
3/22/23, 6:45 PM Brake System Inspection and Test 1553

Brake System Inspection and Test

1. Brake System - Inspect

Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.

Component Inspections:
Component Procedure Also check for
Brake hoses Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or
damage.
Caliper Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Seized or sticking caliper pins.
Piston seals.
Banjo bolt connections.
Bleed screw.
Tandem Motor Cylinder Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seal at reservoir cap. This is a
Reservoir, subreservoir, or tandem motor sign of fluid contamination.
cylinder.
Lines, reservoir hose, grommets, and their joints.
Between slave cylinder and gearbox.
Bleed screw.
Pedal Feel Simulator Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seal at reservoir cap. This is a
Reservoir, subreservoir, or pedal feel simulator. sign of fluid contamination.
Lines, reservoir hose, grommets, and their joints.
Bleed screw.
VSA modulator-control Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
unit Line joints.
Modulator-control unit.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001553_enu 1/1
Brake System Symptom Troubleshooting - Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration (after a
long drive), or high, hard brake pedal

Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration (after a long drive), or high, hard
brake pedal
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. The upper caliper pin and the lower
caliper pin are different. If these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause
vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, and possibly uneven tire wear. See the proper caliper
pin location:
Front caliper
Rear caliper
1. Electric servo brake system check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Check the brake system indicator (red) and the brake system indicator (amber) for
several seconds when the vehicle to the ON mode.

Do the indicators come on then go off?

YES Go to step 2.

NO Go to electric servo brake system troubleshooting.■

2. Electric parking brake system check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, then the ON mode.
 ‐2. Check the brake system indicator (red) and the brake system indicator (amber) for
several seconds when the vehicle to the ON mode.

Do the indicators come on then go off?

YES Go to step 3.

NO Go to electric parking brake system troubleshooting.■

3. Brake system check:

‐1. Drive the vehicle to note if the brakes drag or the pedal becomes high and hard. This
may take 20 or more brake pedal applications during an extended test-drive.

‐2. With the vehicle to the READY TO DRIVE mode, raise and support the vehicle, and spin
all four wheels by hand.

Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?

YES Go to step 4.

NO Look for other causes of pad wear, high pedal, or vehicle vibration.■

4. Brake pedal position switch check:

‐1. Without removing the brake lines, separate the brake pedal from the pedal feel
simulator, then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.

Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?

YES Go to step 5.

NO Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment and pedal free play.■

5. Caliper check:

‐1. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper, then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.

Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?

YES Check the pedal feel simulator reservoir for contamination in the brake fluid. If you
find contamination, flush the entire brake system of all contaminated fluid, then
replace all rubber parts in the brake system that were exposed to contaminated
fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, disassemble and repair the caliper or wheel cylinder
on the wheel(s) with brake drag.■
NO Look for and replace any damaged brake lines. If all brake lines are OK, replace
the VSA modulator-control unit.■
Brake Pedal Feel Simulator Inspection

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.
Do not try to disassemble the pedal feel simulator assembly. Replace the pedal feel simulator assembly with a new part if
necessary.
Align the marks (A) on the reservoir and subreservoir with the paint marks (B) on the reservoir hose.
Check for deterioration and damage to each part during removal.
Exploded View

RESERVOIR CAP
A B B A

RESERVOIR SEAL

STRAINER

2.0 (0.20, 1.5)

RESERVOIR UNION

RESERVOIR

GROMMET

RESERVOIR HOSE

BLEED SCREW
6.9 (0.70, 5.1)

PEDAL FEEL SIMULATOR

Brake Tandem Motor Cylinder Removal and Installation

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.
The electric powertrain components are located in this area. The electric powertrain is a high-voltage system. You must be
familiar with the electric powertrain system before working on or around it. Make sure you have read the electric powertrain
service precautions before doing repairs or service.

1. 12 Volt Battery Terminal - Disconnect

1. Open the driver's door, and wait 3 minutes or more.

NOTE: Do not turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

2. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection procedure.

2. Brake Fluid - Remove

Remove the brake fluid from the reservoir tank with a syringe.

3. A/C Pipe Bracket Mounting Bolt - Remove

1. Remove the A/C pipe bracket mounting bolt (A).

A

4. Battery Power Cable - Remove

 A
1. Remove the battery power cable (A), and move it aside.

9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

5. Fuel Hose Bracket - Remove

1. Remove the fuel hose cover.

2. Remove the fuel hose bracket (A), and move it aside.

9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

6. Air Cleaner - Remove

7. PCS Guard - Remove

1. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve 2 without

disconnecting the hose, and move it aside.

2. Remove the PCS guard with the PCS guard bracket.

8. Tandem Motor Cylinder - Remove

 1. Remove the harness clip (A).
B

2. Disconnect the connector (B).

3. Remove the brake line clamp (A) from the brake lines (B).
A
B
4. Disconnect the suction hose (C) from the subreservoir (D).

D C
 5. Disconnect the connector (A) by pushing the lock (B) and
B pulling down the lever (C).
C
A
6. Disconnect the brake lines (D).

D
15 (1.5, 11)

7. Remove the harness clip (A).

C
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)
8. Loosen the tandem motor cylinder mounting bolts (B).

NOTE: Do not remove the bolts.

9. Remove the tandem motor cylinder mounting bolt (C).

B B
9.5 (0.97, 7.0) A 9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

10. Remove the tandem motor cylinder (A) with the bracket.
 NOTE: Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines.
A

9. Tandem Motor Cylinder Bracket - Remove

9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

10.All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

11. Brake System - Bleed

Camshaft Timing Inspection

1. Cylinder Head Cover - Remove

2. Camshaft Timing - Inspect

1. Turn the crankshaft to align No. 1 position at top dead

B
center (TDC); the white mark (A) on the crankshaft pulley
lines up with the pointer (B).

2. Check the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The mark
C
(A) on the exhaust camshaft sprocket should align up with
the mark (C) on cam chain guide B.
B

A
 3. Check the mark (A) on the VTC actuator and the mark (C)
on cam chain guide B, the marks should align. If the marks
C B are not aligned, remove the cam chain and reinstall the
cam chain properly.
A

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

CAN Gateway Removal and Installation

1
 2.

1. Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover - Remove

2. CAN Gateway - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Procedure After Replacing CAN Gateway

1. CAN Gateway - Update

CAN Gateway Update

1. CAN Gateway - Update

NOTE: When updating control units, use the most current

version of the HDS software and interface device. Refer to
User Manual of the Update Device for more information about
updating control units.
Carpet Removal and Installation

NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures
before doing repairs or service.

Front Carpet

1. Both Front Seats - Remove

2. Shift Lever Housing - Remove (M/T)

3. Shift Lever - Remove (CVT)

4. Steering Joint Cover - Remove

5. Both Kick Panels - Remove

6. Both B-Pillar Lower Trims - Remove

7. Center Console - Remove

8. SRS Unit - Remove

9. Rear Vent Front Duct - Remove (For Some Models)

10.Rear Vent Rear Duct - Remove (For Some Models)

11. Front Carpet - Remove

 1. Cut the carpet in the area (A) as shown.
Fastener Locations
C :2
2. Release the hook and loop fastener (B), and detach the
clips (C).

B 3. Pull out the harnesses (D), then remove the front carpet.
C
D

D
A

4. If necessary, remove the floor mat holder (A).

12.All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Rear Carpet

1. Rear Seat Cushion - Remove

2. Both Front Seats - Remove

3. Center Console - Remove

4. Rear Vent Rear Duct - Remove (For Some Models)

5. B-Pillar Lower Trim - Remove

6. Rear Door Sill Trim - Remove

7. Rear Carpet - Remove

1. Remove the rear carpet (A).

8. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ceiling Light Removal, Installation, and Test 693

Ceiling Light Removal, Installation, and Test

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000693_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ceiling Light Removal, Installation, and Test 693

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000693_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ceiling Light Removal, Installation, and Test 693

3.

3.
2.9 (0.3, 2.1)
3.
2.9 (0.3, 2.1)

2.
*1

1.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
*1 Ceiling Light: 8 W

1. Lens - Remove

NOTE: Carefully pry off the lens.

2. Bulb - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000693_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:17 AM Ceiling Light Removal, Installation, and Test 693

3. Ceiling Light - Remove

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. Ceiling Light - Test

NOTE: When doing the ceiling light test, make sure to install
the bulb correctly.

1. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch

position according to the table.
A

2. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb or the

ceiling light (A).

Terminal
2 1 3 Body
ground
Position

ON

OFF

MIDDLE

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000693_enu 4/4
2/8/23, 2:51 AM Center Console Disassembly and Reassembly 3262

Center Console Disassembly and Reassembly

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003262_enu 1/6
2/8/23, 2:51 AM Center Console Disassembly and Reassembly 3262

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003262_enu 2/6
2/8/23, 2:51 AM Center Console Disassembly and Reassembly 3262

Fastener Locations
:8

2. 1.

3.

CONSOLE BOX

5.

4.

4.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003262_enu 3/6
2/8/23, 2:51 AM Center Console Disassembly and Reassembly 3262

Fastener Location
:1

7.

6.

CONSOLE BOX

1. Tray - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003262_enu 4/6
2/8/23, 2:51 AM Center Console Disassembly and Reassembly 3262

2. Mat - Remove

3. Center Console Bracket (A/T) - Remove

4. Side Panel - Remove

5. Rear Panel - Remove

6. Center Console Armrest Hinge - Remove

7. Center Console Armrest - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003262_enu 5/6
2/8/23, 2:51 AM Center Console Disassembly and Reassembly 3262
8. All Disassembled Parts - Assemble

1. Assemble the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003262_enu 6/6
Center Console Panel Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

M/T
 Fastener Locations
: 15

5.

A/T
 Fastener Locations
: 14

5.
6.

CVT
 Fastener Locations
: 14

5.
6.

1. Center Console Side Trim - Remove

2. Driver's Inner Dashboard Trim - Remove

3. Passenger's Dashboard Panel - Remove

4. Shift Lever Knob - Remove (M/T)

5. Center Console Panel - Remove

NOTE: For CVT, shift to neutral using the shift lock release to
remove the center console panel.

6. Cup Holder - Remove

Fastener Locations
:5

7. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

2/8/23, 2:52 AM Center Console Rear Trim Disassembly and Reassembly 3263

Center Console Rear Trim Disassembly and Reassembly

Center Console Rear Trim - Type 1

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003263_enu 1/6
2/8/23, 2:52 AM Center Console Rear Trim Disassembly and Reassembly 3263

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003263_enu 2/6
2/8/23, 2:52 AM Center Console Rear Trim Disassembly and Reassembly 3263

Fastener Locations
:2

3. 5.

6.

Center Console Rear Trim - Type 2

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003263_enu 3/6
2/8/23, 2:52 AM Center Console Rear Trim Disassembly and Reassembly 3263

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003263_enu 4/6
2/8/23, 2:52 AM Center Console Rear Trim Disassembly and Reassembly 3263

Fastener Locations
:5

2.
4.

5.

6.

1. USB Charger Unit - Remove (For Some Models)

2. Rear Duct - Remove

3. Rear Pocket Lower - Remove

4. Rear Outlet - Remove

5. Rear Trim - Remove

6. Center Console Rear Panel - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003263_enu 5/6
2/8/23, 2:52 AM Center Console Rear Trim Disassembly and Reassembly 3263
7. All Disassembled Parts - Assemble

1. Assemble the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003263_enu 6/6
Center Console Rear Trim Removal and Installation

1
 Fastener Locations
:6

1.

1. Center Console Rear Trim - Remove

2. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

2/8/23, 2:52 AM Center Console Removal and Installation 2698

Center Console Removal and Installation

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures
before doing repairs or service.

Center Console

1. Center Console Panel - Remove

2. Center Console Rear Trim - Remove

3. Center Console - Remove

Fastener Locations 1. Remove the bolts (A).

A :2 A
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002698_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:52 AM Center Console Removal and Installation 2698
2. For some models: Detach the harness clips (A).
Fastener Locations
C :2
3. Disconnect the connectors (B).
C
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)
4. Remove the bolts (C).

5. Remove the bolts (A) and the clips (B).

Fastener Locations
A :2 B :2

A
4.4 (0.45, 3.2)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002698_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:52 AM Center Console Removal and Installation 2698

6. Remove the center console (A).

7. With USB port B: Disconnect the connector (B).

B
A

Rear Vent Front Duct (For Some Models)

4. Rear Vent Front Duct - Remove (For Some Models)

1. Remove the rear vent front duct (A).

Fastener Locations
:2

Rear Vent Rear Duct (For Some Models)

5. SRS Unit - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002698_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:52 AM Center Console Removal and Installation 2698

6. Rear Vent Rear Duct - Remove (For Some Models)

1. Remove the rear vent rear duct (A).

Fastener Locations
:2

7. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002698_enu 4/4
Center Console Side Trim Removal and Installation

1
 Fastener Locations
: 14

1.

1.

1. Center Console Side Trim - Remove

2. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Center display unit button does not work

Diagnostic Procedure

1. Do the Hard Key in the System Diagnostic Mode

Also Check for

Check the Touch Panel Sensitivity in the System Settings

Center Display Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Connector Index
Center Display Unit Connector A (5P)
Center Display Unit Connector B (3P)
Center Display Unit Connector C (2P) (Display audio type)

Center Display Unit Connector A (5P) (female terminals)

5 4 3 2 1
GRY WHT - - *1

*1: BRN (With auto idle stop system), RED (Without auto idle stop system)

Cavity Terminal Name Description

A1 +B BACKUP2 SUB*1 Continuous power source
+B AUDIO*2
A2 Not used ―――
A3 Not used ―――
A4 DISP CONT Inputs signal for center display unit switching on/off
A5 GND Ground for center display unit (G504)
*1: With auto idle stop system
*2: Without auto idle stop system

Center Display Unit Connector B (3P) (female terminals)

Display audio type

Color audio type

 Cavity Terminal Name Description
B1 LVDS1＋ Communication signal for audio-navigation unit or audio unit
B2 LVDS1－ Communication signal for audio-navigation unit or audio unit
B3 LVDS1 SH Shield for terminals No. 1 and No. 2

Center Display Unit Connector C (2P) (female terminals) (Display audio type)

BLK

Cavity Terminal Name Description

C1 Wi-Fi Inputs Wi-Fi signal
C2 SH (Wi-Fi) Shield for terminals No. 1
Center Display Unit Removal and Installation

1
 Fastener Locations
:6

2.
4.4
(0.45, 3.2)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

2
 4.

1. Dashboard Center Middle Trim - Remove

2. Center Display Unit Assembly - Remove

3. Front Center Speaker - Remove

4. Center Display Unit - Remove

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

2/8/23, 2:18 AM Center Pocket Light Removal and Installation 694

Center Pocket Light Removal and Installation

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000694_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 2:18 AM Center Pocket Light Removal and Installation 694

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000694_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 2:18 AM Center Pocket Light Removal and Installation 694

2.
*1

*1 Center Pocket Light: LED

1. Dashboard Center Pocket - Remove

2. Center Pocket Light - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000694_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 1:40 AM Charging System Component Location Index 3003

ALTERNATOR
Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Overhaul

DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER

Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Air Bleeding DRIVE BELT
Removal, Installation, and Inspection

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G003003_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 1:40 AM Charging System Component Location Index 3011

ALTERNATOR
Alternator Removal, Installation,
and Inspection

DRIVE BELT
Removal, Installation, and Inspection
DRIVE BELT
DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER
IDLER PULLEY Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Removal and Installation Air Bleeding

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G003011_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 1:40 AM Charging System Description 2934

Charging System Description

Overview
The PCM gathers vehicle operating system data and determines the required charging rate. Based on that data, the PCM commands
the alternator to provide a specific charging rate (voltage) between 12.5 and 14.5 volts, using 0.1 volt steps. In some operating
conditions, the alternator may bypass PCM control and use a default value.
Depending on the vehicle condition, variable control is not activated.
When the alternator fails, the DTC(s) will be stored.

12 VOLT GAUGE
BATTERY CONTROL
SENSOR MODULE

ALTERNATOR PCM

Output voltage
(variable)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C002934_enu 1/1
CMP Sensor/CKP Sensor Removal and Installation

NOTE: Although a numbered sequence is shown, these "*1" indicated parts are separate components. If removal or
replacement of one of the components is needed, it is not necessary to remove the other.

1
CMP Sensor A, CMP Sensor B
 2.
*1

2. 12 (1.2, 9)
*1

12 (1.2, 9)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

Replace

2
CKP Sensor*1
 3.
12 (1.2, 9)

12 (1.2, 9)
*2

2.
12 (1.2, 9)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

Replace
*2 Loosen

CMP Sensor A

1. Intake Air Resonator - Remove

2. CMP Sensor A - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

CMP Sensor B

1. Intake Air Resonator - Remove

2. CMP Sensor B - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

4. CKP Pattern - Clear/Learn

NOTE: When replacing the CMP sensor B, do this procedure.

CKP Sensor

1. Engine Undercover - Remove

2. CKP Sensor Cover - Remove

3. CKP Sensor - Remove

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

5. CKP Pattern - Clear/Learn

NOTE: When replacing the CKP sensor, do this procedure.

Cold fast idle too high (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Check the idle speed.

Also check for

Intake air leaks

Cold fast idle too low (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Check the idle speed.

2. Do the carbon accumulation check.

Also check for

Incorrect valve adjustment

Intake air leaks
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Combination Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 659

Combination Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures before
doing repairs or service.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000659_enu 1/5
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Combination Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 659

2.

1. Column Covers - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000659_enu 2/5
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Combination Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 659

2. Combination Light Switch - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000659_enu 3/5
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Combination Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 659
1. Combination Light Switch - Test

1. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000659_enu 4/5
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Combination Light Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 659

Light Switch (Without automatic lighting)

Terminal
1 6 7 8 11 12
Position

OFF

Headlight LOW
switch

HIGH

Passing OFF
switch
ON

Light Switch (With automatic lighting)

Terminal
1 6 7 8 11 12
Position

OFF

LOW

Headlight HIGH
switch

HIGH
AUTO
PASSING

Passing OFF
switch
ON

Turn Signal Switch Fog Light Switch (With fog light)

Terminal Terminal
6 9 10 2 6
Position Position

Left ON

Neutral OFF

Right

2. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the combination light switch (A).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000659_enu 5/5
Communication Systems Circuit Diagram

CAN GATEWAY

1
RED RED From No. A27 (10 A) FUSE
+B BACK UP

9 16
BRN From No. B36 (10 A) FUSE RED
IG1 METER +B BACK UP

2 6
PNK
DIAG-CAN_H DIAG-CAN_H

10 14
BLU
DIAG-CAN_L DIAG-CAN_L

3 7 DATA LINK
WHT LT BLU CONNECTOR
F-CAN A_H K LINE (DLC)

11 15
RED RED
F-CAN A_L L-LINE

4
A B BLK
GND
6
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H 5
BLK
GND
14
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
E F

C D

5 G401
PUR
F-CAN C_H

13
GRN
F-CAN C_L

G H

7
PNK
F-CAN D_H

15
GRN
F-CAN D_L

J K

16 7
LT BLU LT BLU
F-CAN E_H F-CAN E_H
8 6
YEL YEL
F-CAN E_L F-CAN E_L
MILLIMETER
WAVE RADAR
12
BLK
GND 11
LT BLU
F-CAN E_H
5
YEL
F-CAN E_L
MULTIPURPOSE
G402 CAMERA UNIT
PCM
J K
5V

PNK GRN

A21 9
BLU BLU
EPP-CAN_H EPP-CAN_H
A20 10
GRY GRY
EPP-CAN_L EPP-CAN_L
5
PNK
F-CAN D_H
6
A B BLU GRY GRN
F-CAN D_L
SBW SHIFTER
PNK GRN CONTROL MODULE

WHT RED 27
BLU GRN
EPP-CAN_H
A37 28
WHT GRY PNK
F-CAN A_H EPP-CAN_L
A36 5
RED PNK WHT
F-CAN A_L F-CAN D_H
6
WHT RED GRN RED
F-CAN D_L
MOTOR
CONTROL
PNK GRN MODULE
L M PCU

E11
BLU GRN
EPP-CAN_H
E10
GRY PNK
EPP-CAN_L
A39 E9
PNK PNK WHT
F-CAN D_H F-CAN D_H
A38 E8
GRN GRN RED
F-CAN D_L F-CAN D_L

BATTERY CONDITION
PNK GRN MONITER MODULE

5
PNK
F-CAN D_H
6
GRN
F-CAN D _L
ACOUSTIC VEHICLE
ALERTING CONTROL
UNIT

8
PNK
F-CAN D_H
7
GRN
F-CAN D_L
PARK PAWL ACTUATOR
DRIVER UNIT
 *1: With parking and back-up sensor system
*2: With adaptive damper system
*3: With head up display
L M C D *4: With display audio type
*5: With color audio type

WHT RED LT BLU LT GRN

A4 20
RED WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
A3 21
GRN RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L
ELECTRIC A/C
COMPRESSOR 24
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
25
WHT RED LT GRN
F-CAN B_L

LT BLU LT GRN VSA MODULATOR-

CONTROL UNIT
A64 15
WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
A63 14
RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L
19
LT BLU
E F F-CAN B_H
18
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
LT BLU RED
B38 LT BLU ELECTRIC SERVO BRAKE
LT BLU LT GRN
K LINE CONTROL UNIT
C53 B4
RED LT BLU
L-LINE F-CAN B_H
BODY CONTROL
MODULE B1
LT GRN
F-CAN B _L
LT BLU LT GRN EPS CONTROL UNIT
LT BLU
4
LT BLU
G H F-CAN B_H
5
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
PUR GRN 14
LT BLU
A20 K LINE
PUR
F-CAN C_H ACTIVE NOISE
LT BLU LT GRN CANCELLATION UNIT
A21
GRN
F-CAN C_L A16
LT BLU
GAUGE CONTROL F-CAN B_H
MODULE PUR GRN A17
*3
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
4
PUR A18
F-CAN C_H RED
L-LINE
15 SRS UNIT
GRN LT BLU LT BLU LT GRN
F-CAN C_L *1
HEAD UP DISPLAY 22
LT BLU
*4 F-CAN B_H
E29 10
PUR LT GRN
F-CAN C_H F-CAN B_L
E30 PARKING and
GRN BACK-UP SENSOR
F-CAN C_L
CONTROL UNIT
A12
LT BLU *2
K LINE
AUDIO UNIT/AUDIO- 19
NAVIGATION UNIT LT BLU
LT BLU F-CAN B_H
*5 20
LT GRN
A12 F-CAN B_L
LT BLU
K LINE ADAPTIVE DAMPER
AUDIO UNIT CONTROL UNIT
Communication Systems DTC Troubleshooting Index

DTC Troubleshooting Index

SAE DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting Advanced Note
Diagnostics
U0029-00 CAN Gateway F-CAN ch A Bus Off TRS AD
U0038-00 CAN Gateway F-CAN ch E Bus Off TRS AD
U0047-00 CAN Gateway F-CAN ch B Bus Off TRS AD
U0056-00 CAN Gateway F-CAN ch C Bus Off TRS AD
U0065-00 CAN Gateway F-CAN ch D Bus Off TRS AD
U3000-49 CAN Gateway Internal Failure TRS AD
U3000-51 CAN Gateway Programming Error TRS AD
NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the CAN gateway system is selected with the HDS.
Console Box Light Removal and Installation

1
 2.
*1

*1 Console Box Light: LED

1. Center Console Panel - Remove

2. Console Box Light - Remove

3. All Parts Removed - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
Consoles Component Location Index

CENTER CONSOLE PANEL

Removal and Installation

CENTER CONSOLE SIDE TRIM

Removal and Installation

CENTER CONSOLE REAR TRIM

Removal and Installation
CENTER CONSOLE Disassembly and Reassembly
Removal and Installation
Disassembly and Reassembly
Conventional Brake Component Location Index
 BRAKE HOSE and LINE
Inspection
Brake Hose Removal and Installation

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

(Built into reservoir)
Test

REAR BRAKE
Pad Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Disc Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Caliper Removal and Installation
Caliper Overhaul

BRAKE PEDAL
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Removal and Installation

FRONT BRAKE
Pad Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Disc Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Caliper Removal and Installation
Caliper Overhaul
2/8/23, 2:10 AM Conventional Brake Component Location Index 1024

BRAKE HOSE and LINE

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR Inspection
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test Brake Hose Removal and Installation

REAR BRAKE
Pad Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Disc Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Caliper Removal and Installation
Caliper Overhaul

BRAKE PEDAL
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Removal and Installation
MASTER CYLINDER
Brake System Inspection and Test
Brake System Bleeding
Inspection FRONT BRAKE
Removal and Installation Pad Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Disc Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Caliper Removal and Installation
Caliper Overhaul

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G001024_enu 3/3
Conventional Brake Service Precautions

Check the following precautions when handling the brake fluid and brake parts.

Handling the Brake Fluid

Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with
water.

Brake fluid is poisonous. If ingested, get medical attention immediately.

Use recommend new genuine Acura or Honda Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-Acura or non-Honda brake
fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid.

Handling the Brake Parts

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
Avoid breathing dust particles.
Never use a compressed air gun (unless specified) to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.

Clean all parts with brake cleaner and air dry.

Before reassembling, check that all the parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so.
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs, the brake drums, the brake pads, or the brake shoes.
Before installing the brake disc or the brake drum clean the mating surfaces between the hub or hub bearing unit and the inside of
the brake disc or the brake drum.
After removing the brake hoses and the brake lines, plug the ends of the hoses and the joints to prevent spilling brake fluid.
Be careful not to bend, damage, or deform the brake lines.
After installing the brake hoses, check the brake hoses for interference and twisting.
During brake caliper removal, to prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang the
caliper assembly from the undercarriage.
Be careful when pressing or moving the piston back in the caliper; brake fluid might overflow from the master cylinder's reservoir.
If brake fluid gets on any painted surface, wash it off immediately with water.
Conventional Brake Symptom Troubleshooting Index

Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for

Brake system indicator (amber) Check for PGM-FI DTCs.
does not go off
Check for VSA System DTCs.
Check for VSA System Symptom Troubleshooting (ABS indicator,
brake system indicator (red), VSA indicator, and brake system
indicator (amber) do not go off).
Check for electric servo brake system DTCs.
Check for driving support system DTCs.
Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle Symptom Troubleshooting.
vibration (after a long drive), or
high, hard brake pedal
Coolant Check and Replacement

Coolant Level Check

1. Coolant - Check

1. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make sure

it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN mark (B).
A

2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or below the

MIN mark, add coolant to bring it between the MIN and
MAX marks, then inspect the cooling system for leaks.

3. Check the coolant level in the radiator, and add Honda

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to
the base of the filler neck, if needed.

NOTE:
Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail.
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture
of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do not add water.
B

Coolant Leak Test

1. Coolant Leak - Test

1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the

radiator cap, and fill the radiator with engine coolant to the
A base of the filler neck.

2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A) to the

radiator, and apply a pressure of 93－123 kPa (0.95－1.25
kgf/cm2, 13.5－17.8 psi).

3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure.

4. Remove the pressure tester, then reinstall the radiator cap.

1. Radiator Cap - Remove

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, and make sure to turn the
A/C switch OFF, then turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK)
mode.

2. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the

radiator cap.

2. Engine Coolant - Drain

1. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.

A

3. Coolant Reservoir - Refill

1. Remove, drain and reinstall the coolant reservoir (A).

B

2. Fill the coolant reservoir to the MAX mark (B) with Honda
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

4. Engine Coolant - Refill

1. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.

NOTE:
Use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, and if necessary add Honda Extreme Cold Weather Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2 (concentrate). Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or
fail.
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Honda Extreme Cold Weather
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a 100% concentration coolant. Do not add water to either coolant.
If the vehicle is regularly driven in very low temperatures (below -22 °F (-30 °C)), a 60 % concentration of coolant should
be used.

Add Amount of Honda

Vehicle Usage Then add Honda Long
Current Extreme Cold Weather
Operation (Desired Coolant Drain Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Mixture Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Mixture) Type 2 (50/50)
(100% concentrate)
50/50
Normal Area Drain radiator
60/40 None
(50/50) and reservoir
unknown
Coolant
50/50 About
Change
Very Cold Area unknown Drain radiator 1.4 L (47 fl oz)
(60/40) and reservoir About
60/40
1.1 L (37 fl oz)
Normal Area
- - None Top off the cooling system
Engine (50/50)
Overhaul Very Cold Area About
- -
(60/40) 1.4 L (47 fl oz)
Drain about 2.0
50/50 L (68 fl oz)
Coolant Very Cold Area from radiator About
Winterizing (60/40) 1.4 L (47 fl oz)
Drain radiator
unknown*
and reservoir

*: When you want to winterize the coolant with the minimum amount of coolant change but the current coolant concentration
in the vehicle is unknown, you must drain all coolant from the cooling system.

Engine Coolant Refill Capacities (Including the coolant reservoir capacity of 0.7 L (0.18 US gal)
At Coolant Change: 4.9 L (1.29 US gal)
After Engine Overhaul: 7.3 L (1.93 US gal)
5. Engine Coolant - Air Bleed

1. Loosely install the radiator cap.

2. Enter the maintenance mode, then start the engine, and let
it run until it warms up (the cooling fan comes on at least
twice).

3. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode. Check the level
in the radiator, and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2, if needed.

6. Engine Coolant Leak - Check

1. Put the radiator cap securely and enter the maintenance

mode, then start the engine again, and check for leaks.

2. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.

7. Maintenance Minder - Reset

1. If the Maintenance Minder required to replace the engine

coolant, reset the Maintenance Minder with the gauge (see
"Resetting the Maintenance Minder"). If the Maintenance
Minder did not require to replace the engine coolant, reset
the Maintenance Minder with the HDS (see "Resetting the
Individual Maintenance Items").
Coolant Replacement and Check

NOTE:
How to read the replacement symbols.
Running the PCU electric coolant pump without coolant may cause damage to the pump. The pump may get activated
when the vehicle is turned to the ON mode.
PCU coolant is poisonous. If ingested, get medical attention immediately.
Use covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces.
Do not spill the PCU coolant on the surrounding parts. If you spill the PCU coolant , wipe the PCU coolant off immediately.

1. PCU Coolant - Drain

1. Wait until the motor and PCU are cool, then carefully
B remove the expansion tank cap.

2. Remove the clips (A) securing the front bumper lower cover
as much as you need.
C

3. Loosen the radiator drain plug (B) from the front bumper
lower cover gap, and drain the PCU coolant.

NOTE: If necessary, connect a tube to the drain port (C).

4. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely with a new O-ring.

5. Install the front bumper lower cover.

2. PCU Coolant - Refill

1. Install the coolant charger (A), then pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 until the expansion tank is filled to the
MAX mark (B).

NOTE:
 Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, and if necessary add Honda Extreme Cold Weather
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction
or fail.
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Honda Extreme Cold Weather
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a 100 % concentration coolant. Do not add water to either coolant.
If the vehicle is regularly driven in very low temperatures (lower than － 22 °F (－ 30 °C)), a 60 % concentration of coolant
should be used.

Add Amount of Honda

Vehicle Usage Then add Acura Long
Current Extreme Cold Weather
Operation (Desired Coolant Drain Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Mixture Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Mixture) Type 2 (50/50)
(100 % concentrate)
50/50 Drain radiator
Normal Area
60/40 and expansion None
PCU (50/50)
unknown tank
Coolant
50/50 Drain radiator
Change Very Cold Area About 0.3 L (10 fl oz)
unknown and expansion
(60/40)
60/40 tank About 0.2 L (7 fl oz)
Normal Area
- - None
PCU (50/50)
Top off the cooling system
Removal Very Cold Area
- - About 0.3 L (10 fl oz)
(60/40)
Drain about 0.3
50/50 L (10 fl oz) About 0.3 L (10 fl oz)
PCU from radiator
Very Cold Area
Coolant
(60/40) Drain radiator
Winterizing
unknown* and expansion About 0.3 L (10 fl oz)
tank
*: When you want to winterize the coolant with the minimum amount of coolant change but the current coolant concentration in
the vehicle is unknown, you must drain all coolant from the cooling system.

PCU Coolant Refill Capacities (Including the expansion tank capacity of 0.18 L (0.048 US gal))
At PCU Coolant Replacement 0.83 L (0.219 US gal)
At PCU Removal 1.43 L (0.378 US gal)

A
 B

3. PCU Coolant - Air Bleed

1. Connect the HDS.

2. Select the ADJUSTMENT in the ELECTRIC POWERTRAIN

system with the HDS.

3. Select the COOLANT AIR BLEEDING.

4. Press the START to drive the PCU electric coolant pump

(EWP), then wait more than 10 minutes.

NOTE:
Pour coolant as needed when the coolant level drops. If
the coolant level keeps changing or bubbles are seen
even after 10 minutes, continue to drive the EWP until
the coolant level stabilizes and there are no more
bubbles.
When the POWER SYSTEM indicator comes on, clear
the DTC with the HDS, then return to step 2.

5. Press the STOP to finish driving the EWP forcibly.

6. Check the coolant level and add coolant as necessary until

it is at the MAX mark.

7. Install the expansion tank cap.

NOTE: Do not spill the PCU coolant on the surrounding parts. If you spill the PCU coolant , wipe the PCU coolant off
immediately.

1. PCU Coolant - Check

 1. Check the coolant level in the expansion tank. Make sure it
B A is between the MAX mark (A) and the MIN mark (B).

2. If the coolant level in the expansion tank is at or below the

MIN mark, add coolant to bring it on the MAX mark, then
inspect the cooling system for leaks.

NOTE:
Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail.
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture
of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do not add water.
Cooling Fan Controls Circuit Diagram

*1: IG1A HOT in ON and READY TO DRIVE mode

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

12 VOLT
BATTERY
T1 No. A2-1 (30 A)
BLK

No. A5-1 (40 A) RELAY CIRCUIT

BOARD
GRY
IG1A RELAY
No. A12 (10 A) CIRCUIT*1
B5 A1
PNK
3 1

RFC No. A43

RELAY (7.5 A)

4 2
RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD
B8 B4
RFC DIODE
C22 C21
LT GRN
WHT TAN

C54 C47
BLU IG1 RLY
COIL+ GND

BODY CONTROL MODULE

PCM A18
FAN LO
SIGNAL
5V

FAN
TW2 SG6 CONTROL
E54 E45 A17

WHT

GRN LT GRN BRN RED

GRY

2 1

ECT B1 B3 A1 A2
SENSOR 2 FAN IG1 MAIN GND
CONTROL RFC FAN MOTOR
BLK

CPU/IPD

RFC CIRCUIT

G202

COOLING FAN MOTOR

Cooling Fan Controls Symptom Troubleshooting Index

NOTE: Do an all DTC check with the HDS, and troubleshoot any DTCs first before following the
repair procedures listed in the index.

Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for

Engine overheats 1. Check the coolant level. Check the cooling
2. Check for any engine coolant leakage (from fan is operating
properly.
gaskets, hoses, O-rings, etc.).
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on the
radiator and the A/C condenser.
4. Check for deteriorated coolant.
5. Check for a damaged or deformed fan
shrouds.
6. Check the cooling fan is operating properly
(air should be blowing toward the engine).
7. Check the radiator cap.
8. Check the thermostat.
9. Check for plugged or deteriorated radiator
hoses.
10. Check for a plugged heater core or hoses.
11. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
Cooling Fan Controls System Description - Overview

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index.

Overview
Cooling Fan Control

The PCM decides the optimal fan drive depending on the signals from various sensors, and outputs duty signals to control the cooling
fan motor. By performing a sensitive drive control depending on the situation, it efficiently maintains the temperature of the coolant,
and reduces fan noise.
ECT sensor 2 detects the temperature of the coolant.

VARIOUS SENSORS

COOLING FAN MOTOR

PCM (RFC CIRCUIT)

ECT SENSOR 2
Cooling Pipe Removal and Installation

NOTE:
Use covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces.
Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection. Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or hoses, or interfere
with other parts.
Do not spill the PCU coolant on the surrounding parts. If you spill the PCU coolant , wipe the PCU coolant off immediately.

1
 3.
4.
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

4.
4. 9.5 (0.97, 7.0)
22 (2.2, 16) 4.

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. ATF cooler - Remove

2. Radiator - Remove

3. PCU Electric Coolant Pump Inlet Hose - Disconnect

4. Radiator Frame -Remove

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

6. ATF cooler - Refill

7. PCU Coolant - Refill and Air Bleed

8. Millimeter Wave Radar - Aim

Cooling System Description - Exhaust Heat Exchange System

Overview
Exhaust Heat Exchange System

The exhaust heat exchange system is composed of the heat exchanger core built into the heat collector, bypass passage, thermo wax
valve, thermo actuator, and the thermo wax valve link.
Fuel consumption and heating performance are improved by advancing the engine warm up by using the heat energy from the
exhaust gas produced through engine combustion under low ambient temperature.

THERMO WAX VALVE LINK

HEAT COLLECTOR

THERMO ACTUATOR

BYPASS PASSAGE

THERMO WAX VALVE

HEAT EXCHANGER CORE

This illustration shows an example.

Thermo Actuator

The thermo actuator is attached to the heat collector. The temperature sensor portion is in contact with the coolant channel of the
internal heat collector. Wax is sealed in the temperature sensor.
The thermo actuator rod is retracted and extended the shape change of the wax, the force of the spring built into the thermo actuator,
and the temperature change of the coolant in the bypass passage.

THERMO ACTUATOR ROD

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

WAX
SPRING
Operation
Cold Engine

When the thermo wax valve is closed, the exhaust gas is sent through the bypass passage into the heat exchanger core, then
discharged outside through the exhaust pipe.

THERMO ACTUATOR

EXHAUST GAS

COOLANT
(TO WATER OUTLET)
THERMO WAX VALVE
(CLOSE)

COOLANT
(FROM HEATER CORE)

HEAT EXCHANGER CORE

THERMO WAX VALVE LINK

This illustration shows an example.

After Warm Up

When the thermo wax valve is opened through the thermo wax valve link due to the operation of the thermo actuator, the exhaust gas
flows through the exhaust pipe without being sent through the bypass passage.

THERMO ACTUATOR
EXHAUST GAS

COOLANT
(TO WATER OUTLET)

THERMO WAX VALVE

(OPEN)
COOLANT
(FROM HEATER CORE)

HEAT EXCHANGER CORE

THERMO WAX VALVE LINK

This illustration shows an example.
System Warning/Indicator Index

System Warning/Indicator Index

NOTE:
Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS, then refer to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
There are some indicators displayed on the multi-information display (MID).

Indicator Indicator Name Fault Detection HDS System Menu (DTC Diagnostic Procedure
Unit Check)
SECURITY BODY CONTROL ONE-PUSH START Body electrical general
INDICATOR MODULE Backup Control Unit troubleshooting information
(Red) System Information
System Check Keyless access system check
Keyless access system
ONE-PUSH START symptom troubleshooting
Backup Control Unit information
System Information
Status Log Keyless access system
symptom troubleshooting
ONE-PUSH START index
Keyless Access Control
Unit
System Information
System Check 1

ONE-PUSH START
Keyless Access Control
Unit
System Information
System Check 2
Indicator Indicator Name Fault Detection HDS System Menu (DTC Diagnostic Procedure
Unit Check)
KEYLESS BODY CONTROL ONE-PUSH START Body electrical general
ACCESS MODULE PCU troubleshooting information
INDICATOR DTCs
Body control module DTC
(Amber)
ONE-PUSH START troubleshooting index
Backup Control Unit Keyless access system
DTCs symptom troubleshooting
information
ONE-PUSH START
Keyless Access Control Keyless access system
Unit symptom troubleshooting
DTCs index
12 VOLT PCM PGM-FI Fuel and emissions systems
CHARGING DTCs/Freeze Data general troubleshooting
SYSTEM BATTERY
information
INDICATOR CONDITION ELECTRIC
MONITOR POWERTRAIN Fuel and emissions systems
(Red)
MODULE DTCs/Freeze Data DTC troubleshooting index
MOTOR Fuel and emissions systems
CONTROL symptom troubleshooting
MODULE index
Electric powertrain general
troubleshooting information
Electric powertrain DTC
troubleshooting index
Electric powertrain symptom
troubleshooting index
POWER SYSTEM BATTERY ELECTRIC Electric powertrain general
INDICATOR CONDITION POWERTRAIN troubleshooting information
(Red) MONITOR DTCs/Freeze Data
Electric powertrain DTC
MODULE
troubleshooting index
MOTOR
Electric powertrain symptom
CONTROL troubleshooting index
MODULE
MALFUNCTION PCM PGM-FI Fuel and emissions systems
INDICATOR DTCs/Freeze Data general troubleshooting
LAMP (MIL) information
(Amber)
Fuel and emissions systems
DTC troubleshooting index
Fuel and emissions systems
symptom troubleshooting
index
EPS INDICATOR EPS CONTROL EPS EPS system general
(Amber) UNIT DTCs/Freeze Data troubleshooting information
EPS system DTC
troubleshooting index
EPS system symptom
troubleshooting index
SRS INDICATOR SRS UNIT SRS SRS general troubleshooting
(Red) SRS/SWS/PUH information
DTCs
SRS DTC troubleshooting
index
SRS symptom troubleshooting
index
Indicator Indicator Name Fault Detection HDS System Menu (DTC Diagnostic Procedure
Unit Check)
VSA INDICATOR VSA MODULATOR- ABS/VSA VSA system general
(Amber) CONTROL UNIT DTCs troubleshooting information
VSA system DTC
troubleshooting index
VSA system symptom
troubleshooting index
VSA OFF VSA MODULATOR- ABS/VSA VSA system general
INDICATOR CONTROL UNIT DTCs troubleshooting information
(Amber)
VSA system DTC
troubleshooting index
VSA system symptom
troubleshooting index
ABS INDICATOR VSA MODULATOR- ABS/VSA VSA system general
(Amber) CONTROL UNIT DTCs troubleshooting information
VSA system DTC
troubleshooting index
VSA system symptom
troubleshooting index
BRAKE SYSTEM VSA ABS/VSA VSA system general
INDICATOR MODULATOR- DTCs troubleshooting information
(Red) CONTROL
Brake System VSA system DTC
UNIT
Electric Servo Brake troubleshooting index
ELECTRIC System VSA system symptom
SERVO BRAKE DTCs/Freeze Date troubleshooting index
CONTROL
UNIT Electric parking brake system
general troubleshooting
information
Electric parking brake system
symptom troubleshooting
index
Electric servo brake system
general troubleshooting
information
Electric servo brake system
DTC troubleshooting index
Indicator Indicator Name Fault Detection Unit HDS System Menu (DTC Diagnostic Procedure
Check)
BRAKE SYSTEM VSA ABS/VSA VSA system general
INDICATOR MODULATOR- DTCs troubleshooting information
(Amber) CONTROL UNIT
Brake System VSA system DTC
ELECTRIC Electric Servo Brake troubleshooting index
SERVO BRAKE System
VSA system symptom
CONTROL UNIT DTCs/Freeze Date troubleshooting index
MILLIMETER Brake system symptom
DRIVING SUPPORT
WAVE RADAR troubleshooting index
Integrated Driver
MULTIPURPOSE Support System Electric parking brake system
CAMERA UNIT DTCs general troubleshooting
PCM information
PGM-FI
DTCs/Freeze Data Electric parking brake system
symptom troubleshooting
index
Electric servo brake system
general troubleshooting
information
Electric servo brake system
DTC troubleshooting index
Driving support system DTC
troubleshooting index
Driving support system
symptom troubleshooting
index
Fuel and emissions systems
general troubleshooting
information
Fuel and emissions systems
DTC troubleshooting index
Fuel and emissions systems
symptom troubleshooting
index
LOW TIRE VSA MODULATOR- ABS/VSA TPMS general
PRESSURE/ CONTROL UNIT DTCs troubleshooting information
TPMS
INDICATOR TPMS DTC troubleshooting
(Amber) index
TPMS symptom
troubleshooting index
ADAPTIVE ADAPTIVE DAMPER Active Damper Adaptive damper system
DAMPER CONTROL UNIT System/Adaptive Damper general troubleshooting
SYSTEM System information
WARNING DTCs
Adaptive damper system DTC
troubleshooting index
Adaptive damper system
symptom troubleshooting
index
SHIFT POSITION PCM AT Gear Unit general
INDICATOR DTCs/Freeze Data troubleshooting information
Gear unit DTC
troubleshooting index
Gear unit symptom
troubleshooting index
Indicator Indicator Name Fault Detection Unit HDS System Menu (DTC Diagnostic Procedure
Check)
LKAS INDICATOR MILLIMETER DRIVING SUPPORT Driving support system DTC
(Amber) WAVE RADAR Integrated Driver Support troubleshooting index
System
MULTIPURPOSE DTCs Driving support system
CAMERA UNIT symptom troubleshooting
EPS CONTROL EPS index
UNIT DTCs/Freeze Data LKAS general troubleshooting
information
LKAS symptom
troubleshooting index
EPS system general
troubleshooting information
EPS system DTC
troubleshooting index
EPS system symptom
troubleshooting index
ACC INDICATOR MILLIMETER DRIVING SUPPORT Driving support system DTC
(Amber) WAVE RADAR Integrated Driver Support troubleshooting index
System
MULTIPURPOSE DTCs Driving support system
CAMERA UNIT symptom troubleshooting
index
ACC system general
troubleshooting information
ACC system symptom
troubleshooting index
SAFETY SUPPORT MILLIMETER DRIVING SUPPORT Driving support system DTC
INDICATOR WAVE RADAR Integrated Driver Support troubleshooting index
(Amber) System
MULTIPURPOSE Driving support system
DTCs
CAMERA UNIT symptom troubleshooting
LEFT SIDE BSI DRIVING SUPPORT index
RADAR UNIT Blind Spot CMBS general
Information/Cross Traffic troubleshooting information
RIGHT SIDE BSI Monitor
RADAR UNIT CMBS symptom
DTCs
troubleshooting index
RDM system general
troubleshooting information
RDM system symptom
troubleshooting index
BSI general troubleshooting
information
BSI DTC troubleshooting
index
BSI symptom troubleshooting
index
CTM general troubleshooting
information
AUTO HIGH-BEAM MULTIPURPOSE DRIVING SUPPORT Driving support system DTC
INDICATOR CAMERA UNIT Integrated Driver Support troubleshooting index
(Amber) System
Driving support system
DTCs
symptom troubleshooting
index
Auto high-beam system
general troubleshooting
information
Indicator Indicator Name Fault Detection HDS System Menu (DTC Diagnostic Procedure
Unit Check)
LIGHT CONTROL BODY CONTROL BODY ELECTRICAL Body control module DTC
INDICATOR MODULE Lighting troubleshooting index
(Amber) DTCs
Body electrical general
troubleshooting information
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Cowl Cover Removal and Installation 2758

Cowl Cover Removal and Installation

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002758_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Cowl Cover Removal and Installation 2758

Fastener Locations
:4

4.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002758_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Cowl Cover Removal and Installation 2758

5.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002758_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Cowl Cover Removal and Installation 2758

1. Left/Right Front Grille Cover - Remove

2. Windshield Wiper Arms - Remove

3. Front Fender Trim - Remove

4. Cowl Cover - Remove

5. Hood Rear Seal - Remove

6. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002758_enu 4/4
CVT Differential Backlash Inspection

1. Differential Backlash - Inspect

1. Install the driveshaft and the intermediate shaft on the

differential, then place the axles on V-blocks.

2. Check the backlash of the pinion gears (A) using a dial

B indicator (B).

Standard: 0.05－0.15 mm (0.0020－0.0059 in)

3. If the backlash is out of the standard, replace the differential

carrier.

A
CVT Differential Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Bearing Driver Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600

Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000

Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101
Image Description/Tool Number
Preload Inspection Tool 07HAJ-PK40201

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
If the transmission was disassembled, the differential carrier tapered roller bearing preload must be adjusted.
Apply a light coat of clean transmission fluid on all parts before installation.

1. Differential Carrier Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race (Torque Converter Housing Side) - Install

1. Install the thrust shim (A).

2. Install the 41 x 76.2 x 1 mm spacer (B) by aligning the tab

(C) with the groove (D).
07749-0010000

C
A

07746-0010600

D
 3. Install the differential carrier tapered roller bearing outer
race (E) using the 15 x 135L driver handle and the 72 x 75
mm bearing driver attachment so there is no clearance
between the bearing outer race, the 41 x 76.2 x 1 mm
spacer, the thrust shim, and the torque converter housing.

2. Differential Carrier Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race (Transmission Housing Side) - Install

1. Install the 41 x 92 x 1 mm spacer (A) by aligning the tab (B)

07749-0010000
with the groove (C).

07GAD-SD40101 2. Install the differential carrier tapered roller bearing outer

race (D) using the 15 x 135L driver handle and the 78 x 90
D mm attachment so there is no clearance between the
bearing outer race, the 41 x 92 x 1 mm spacer, and the
transmission housing.

A
C

3. Torque Converter Housing - Install

1. Install the differential assembly (A).

 27 (2.8, 20)

C
D

C
A

2. Install the torque converter housing (B) with the dowel pins (C) and a new gasket (D), and tighten the bolts in a crisscross
pattern in at least two steps.

4. Differential Carrier Tapered Roller Bearing Preload - Inspect

1. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions to seat

the bearings using the preload inspection tool.
A

B
2. Measure the starting torque using the preload inspection
tool, a torque wrench (A), and a socket (B).

NOTE: Measure the starting torque at normal room

temperature in both directions.

Standard
New Bearing:
1.35－3.07 N·m (13.8－31.3 kgf·cm, 12.0－27.2
lbf·in)
07HAJ-PK40201 Reused Bearing:
 1.06－2.78 N·m (10.8－28.3 kgf·cm, 9.4－24.6
lbf·in)

3. If the measurement is out of the standard, remove the

thrust shim, and measure its thickness.

4. Refer to the Parts catalog, then select appropriate thrust

shim.

NOTE:
To increase the starting torque, increase thickness of
the thrust shim.
To decrease the starting torque, decrease the thickness
of the thrust shim.
Changing the thrust shim to the next size will increase
or decrease starting torque about 0.3－0.4 N·m (3－4
kgf·cm, 2－3 lbf·in).
Do not use more than two thrust shims to adjust the
starting torque.

5. Install a selected thrust shim, then recheck the starting

torque.
CVT Differential Carrier Disassembly and Reassembly

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000

Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 66 mm 07MAD-SP00100

Installer Attachment 40 mm 07LAD-PW50601

NOTE:
 Where icon is shown, click for further information.
The bearing and the bearing outer race should be replaced as a set.

2.

1.
*1

1.

DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER

2.

Detailed information, notes and precautions

Replace
*1 Left-hand threads
1. Final Driven Gear - Remove

2. Differential Carrier Tapered Roller Bearing - Remove

 1. Set a commercially available bearing puller (A) under the
A differential carrier tapered roller bearings (B) as shown.

2. Remove the bearings using the commercially available

bearing puller and a commercially available spacer (C).

This illustration shows transmission housing side.

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

The bearing and the bearing outer race should be replaced as a set.
Adjust the differential carrier tapered roller bearing preload whenever the bearing and the bearing outer race are replaced.
Apply a light coat of clean transmission fluid on all parts before installation.

1
 1.
2.
101 (10.3, 74)
*1

2.

DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER

1.

Detailed information, notes and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace
*1 Left-hand threads

1. Differential Carrier Tapered Roller Bearing - Install

 Transmission Housing Side

1. Install the differential carrier tapered roller bearing (A) until

it bottoms using the 15 x 135L driver handle, the 66 mm oil
07749-0010000
seal driver attachment, and a press.
07MAD-SP00100

Torque Converter Housing Side

07LAD-PW50601

A
 2. Install the differential carrier tapered roller bearing (A) until
it bottoms using the 40 mm installer attachment and a
press.

2. Final Driven Gear - Install

NOTE:
Tighten the final driven gear bolts to the specified torque in a crisscross pattern in at least two steps.
Make sure the final driven gear is installed in the correct direction.
Make sure to assemble the final drive shaft and the final driven gear correctly (Combination A or B) as shown in the chart if
either one of them or both are to be replaced. Correct combinations of the shaft and gear can be identified by the presence or
the absence of the groove as shown in the chart.

Final Drive Shaft Final Driven Gear

Combination A
(With Groove)

GROOVE
GROOVE

Combination B
(Without Groove)
CVT Differential Component Location Index
 41 x 92 x 1 mm SPACER

DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
Replacement
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
TAPERED ROLLER
BEARING OUTER RACE
Replacement

FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

Removal and Installation

DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER Removal and Installation
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
Replacement

DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
TAPERED ROLLER
BEARING OUTER RACE
Replacement

41 x 76.2 x 1 mm SPACER

THRUST SHIM
Preload Inspection
CVT Electronic Control System Circuit Diagram

: CAN line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD

12 VOLT
BATTERY IG1A RELAY CIRCUIT
No. A2-1 (30 A) No. A39 (10 A)

RELAY CONTROL
MODULE (With paddle shifter)
No. A6 (30 A)
GRY

J K

UNDER-DASH FUSE RELAY BOX

No. A5-5 (30 A) No. B36 (10 A)

D4 H17
YEL
+B IG MAIN2
IG1B RELAY No. B37 (10 A)
CIRCUIT H7

No. B4 (10 A) H12

ACC RELAY
CIRCUIT

A B

No. A10 (15 A)

GRY
+B TCU

TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

1 4
PUR BRN
+B IG1 METER IG1(+)
SHIFT
LOCK
26 3 SOLENOID
BLU PUR
SLS SHIFT LOCK SOL UNIT(–)

8
PNK LT GRN
IG1 IG1 TCU

5V

3
WHT
F-CAN A_H

11
RED
F-CAN A_L

4
BLU
TM-CAN_H
12
PNK
TM-CAN_L
10
BLK
GND1(TCU)
9
BLK
GND2(TCU)
C D E F

G201
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

5V
18 3
YEL
VCC1
CVT DRIVE
28 1 PULLEY
PNK
NDR-PWM SPEED
SENSOR
20 2
GRN
SG1
41 3
BLU
VCC3
22 1 CVT
WHT SPEED
VEL-PWM SENSOR
25 2
YEL
SG3

21 3
YEL
VCC2
TORQUE
49 2 CONVERTER
RED TURBINE
NT
SPEED
SENSOR
19 1
GRY
SG2
17 3
LT GRN
VCC4 CVT DRIVEN
31 2 PULLEY
TAN PRESSURE
PDN SENSOR
29 1
PUR
SG4
33 7 TRANSMISSION
RED WHT
TATF TATF FLUID
32 6 TEMPERATURE
BLU WHT SENSOR
12 V SG5 SG

7 5 1
LT GRN ORN
SOL B SHB+ SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B

6 2 1
WHT YEL
SOL C SHC+ SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE O/P

15 8 1 2 CVT
BRN RED RED
DRLS DRC+ DRC+ DRIVE PULLEY
PRESSURE
1 CONTROL
WHT
DRC- SOLENOID VALVE

14 3 2 2 CVT
GRN BLU BLU
DNLS DNC+ DNC+ DRIVEN PULLEY
PRESSURE
1 CONTROL
YEL SOLENOID VALVE
DNC-

16 4 4 G251 2
PUR GRN GRN CVT
LCCLS LCC+ LCC+ LOCK-UP
1 CLUTCH CONTROL
WHT SOLENOID VALVE
LCC-

13 1 5 2
LT BLU PNK PNK CVT
CPCLS CPC+ CPC+ CLUTCH PRESSURE
1 CONTROL
YEL SOLENOID VALVE
CPC-

G252
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

5V

43 10 ATP-RVS
YEL
ATP-RVS
44 6 ATP-FWD
LT GRN
ATP-FWD
35 2 ATP-L
BLU BLU
ATP-L
36 8 ATP-S
WHT WHT
ATP-S
37 3 ATP-D
PUR PUR
ATP-D
46 9 ATP-N
BRN BRN
ATP-N
47 4 ATP-R
GRN GRN
ATP-R
48 5 ATP-P
LT BLU LT BLU
ATP-P
7 ATP-ST
GRY
YEL 1 PG1
LT BLU GRN BRN PUR WHT BLU BLK

TRANSMISSION RANGE
PCM G201 SWITCH

J B A
GRN PUR
4
BLU ACC

BODY CONTROL 6
MODULE RED IG1 OPTION

5
GRY ILLUMI+

7
REVERSE RELAY BLU ILL–(LED)
CIRCUIT
8
PNK ILLUMI CANCEL
G H
9
WHT ATP-L

10
LT BLU ATP-S

11
BRN ATP-D

12
PNK ATP-N

1
PUR ATP-R

2
GRN ATP-P

3
GRY GND

SHIFT POSITION
G504 INDICATOR
 : Other communication line

(With paddle shifter)

TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

ILM(+)

34
PUR
SUPP

PADDLE SHIFTER + ILM(-)

45 (UPSHIFT SWITCH)
TAN
SDNP PADDLE UP(PLUS)

PUR BLU

GND
CABLE REEL
C12 4
BLK
STRG GND
A6 C18 2
LT BLU
PADDLE SW UP PADDLE SW UP
ACC COMBINATION SWITCH
4 1
PUR
ILLUMI-(LED)
2 3
YEL
ILLUMI+
No. B43 (10 A) FUSE 10 7
(in the under-dash fuse/relay box)
LT BLU RED
9 11
A3 C15 12
WHT PUR 5 2
+B OPTION +B GRN
ILLUMI+
A2 C14 10
BRN BLU
LIN (BATT SNSR) STRG SW LIN
M C11 7 3 4
BLK WHT
STRG GND ILLUMI-(LED)
AUDIO REMOTE-HFT SWITCH
A7 C19 3
PUR RED
PADDLE SW DOWN PADDLE SW DOWN
A1 C13 1
BLK BLK
GND STRG GND

GND
G502

PADDLE SHIFTER - PADDLE DOWN(MINUS)

(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
ILM(-)

K L M

SPORT MODE SWITCH ILM(+)

5
GRY BRN GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
ILLUMI+
1 A4
BLU
ILL-(LED) LIN (BATT SNSR)
6 A14
LT BLU
SPORT MODE SW
2
BLK
GND

G501
 : Other communication line

TRANSMISSON
CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

FUSE/RELAY HOLDER A

27 3 4
GRN LT BLU
EOPRLY EOP RLY CL–
No. C3
(7.5 A)
1 2
BLU BRN
EOP RLY OUT +B EOP DCDC
AUXILIARY OUT2
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PUMP RELAY

4
RED
EOPVB
40 3
YEL
EOPSIG GRN
50 2 DCDC OUT2
LT GRN
EOPSTS DC-DC
1 CONVERTER
BLK
EOPGND
AUXILIARY TRANSMISSION
G201 FLUID PUMP
 : CAN line

H G

A17
BLU
ILL–(LED)
A13
PNK
ILLUMI CANCEL GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
5 A20
PUR
F-CAN C_H
13 A21
GRN
F-CAN C_L
2 6
PNK
DIAG-CAN_H DATA LINK
10 14 CONNECTOR (DLC)
BLU
DIAG-CAN_L
CAN GATEWAY 3
WHT
F-CAN A_H
11
RED
F-CAN A_L
6 A16
LT BLU LT BLU
F-CAN B_H F-CAN B_H
SRS UNIT
14 A17
LT GRN LT GRN
F-CAN B_L F-CAN B_L

LT GRN LT BLU

20
WHT
F-CAN A_H
21
RED
VSA MODULATOR- F-CAN A_L
CONTROL UNIT 24
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
25
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L

LT GRN LT BLU RED WHT

26
WHT
F-CAN A_H
18
ELECTRIC RED
F-CAN A_L
BRAKE
19
BOOSTER LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
12
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
RED WHT

E F

A37
WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
A36
RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L
A39
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
C D POWERTRAIN
A38
LT GRN CONTROL
F-CAN B_L MODULE
A21 (PCM)
BLU
TM-CAN_H TM-CAN_H
A20
PNK GRY
TM-CAN_L TM-CAN_L

BRAKE PEDAL A26

GRN
POSITION SWITCH STOP SW
CVT Electronic Control System Circuit Diagram

: CAN line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD

12 VOLT
BATTERY IG1A RELAY CIRCUIT
No. A2-1 (30 A) No. A39 (10 A)

RELAY CONTROL
MODULE (With paddle shifter)
No. A6 (30 A)
GRY

J K

UNDER-DASH FUSE RELAY BOX

No. A5-5 (30 A) No. B36 (10 A)

D4 H17
YEL
+B IG MAIN2
IG1B RELAY No. B37 (10 A)
CIRCUIT H7

No. B4 (10 A) H12

ACC RELAY
CIRCUIT

A B

No. A10 (15 A)

GRY
+B TCU

TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

1 4
PUR BRN
+B IG1 METER IG1(+)
SHIFT
LOCK
26 3 SOLENOID
BLU PUR
SLS SHIFT LOCK SOL UNIT(–)

8
PNK LT GRN
IG1 IG1 TCU

5V

3
WHT
F-CAN A_H

11
RED
F-CAN A_L

4
BLU
TM-CAN_H
12
PNK
TM-CAN_L
10
BLK
GND1(TCU)
9
BLK
GND2(TCU)
C D E F

G201
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

5V
18 3
YEL
VCC1
CVT DRIVE
28 1 PULLEY
PNK
NDR-PWM SPEED
SENSOR
20 2
GRN
SG1
41 3
BLU
VCC3
22 1 CVT
WHT SPEED
VEL-PWM SENSOR
25 2
YEL
SG3

21 3
YEL
VCC2
TORQUE
49 2 CONVERTER
RED TURBINE
NT
SPEED
SENSOR
19 1
GRY
SG2
17 3
LT GRN
VCC4 CVT DRIVEN
31 2 PULLEY
TAN PRESSURE
PDN SENSOR
29 1
PUR
SG4
33 7 TRANSMISSION
RED WHT
TATF TATF FLUID
32 6 TEMPERATURE
BLU WHT SENSOR
12 V SG5 SG

7 5 1
LT GRN ORN
SOL B SHB+ SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B

6 2 1
WHT YEL
SOL C SHC+ SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE O/P

15 8 1 2 CVT
BRN RED RED
DRLS DRC+ DRC+ DRIVE PULLEY
PRESSURE
1 CONTROL
WHT
DRC- SOLENOID VALVE

14 3 2 2 CVT
GRN BLU BLU
DNLS DNC+ DNC+ DRIVEN PULLEY
PRESSURE
1 CONTROL
YEL SOLENOID VALVE
DNC-

16 4 4 G251 2
PUR GRN GRN CVT
LCCLS LCC+ LCC+ LOCK-UP
1 CLUTCH CONTROL
WHT SOLENOID VALVE
LCC-

13 1 5 2
LT BLU PNK PNK CVT
CPCLS CPC+ CPC+ CLUTCH PRESSURE
1 CONTROL
YEL SOLENOID VALVE
CPC-

G252
 (Without paddle shifter)
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

5V

43 10 ATP-RVS
YEL
ATP-RVS
44 6 ATP-FWD
LT GRN
ATP-FWD
35 2 ATP-L
BLU BLU
ATP-L
36 8 ATP-S
WHT WHT
ATP-S
37 3 ATP-D
PUR PUR
ATP-D
46 9 ATP-N
BRN BRN
ATP-N
47 4 ATP-R
GRN GRN
ATP-R
48 5 ATP-P
LT BLU LT BLU
ATP-P
7 ATP-ST
GRY

1 PG1
LT BLU GRN BRN PUR WHT BLU YEL BLK

TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH
PCM G201

J B A
GRN PUR
4
BLU ACC

BODY CONTROL 6
MODULE RED IG1 OPTION

5
GRY ILLUMI+

7
REVERSE RELAY BLU ILL–(LED)
CIRCUIT
8
PNK ILLUMI CANCEL
G H
9
WHT ATP-L

10
LT BLU ATP-S

11
BRN ATP-D

12
PNK ATP-N

1
PUR ATP-R

2
GRN ATP-P

3
GRY GND

SHIFT POSITION
G504 INDICATOR
 (With paddle shifter)
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

5V

43 10 ATP-RVS
YEL
ATP-RVS
44 6 ATP-FWD
LT GRN
ATP-FWD

37 3 ATP-D
PUR PUR
ATP-D
46 9 ATP-N
BRN BRN
ATP-N
47 4 ATP-R
GRN GRN
ATP-R
48 5 ATP-P
LT BLU LT BLU
ATP-P
7 ATP-ST
YEL GRY

1 PG1
LT BLU GRN BRN PUR BLK

PCM G201 TRANSMISSION RANGE

SWITCH
J B A
4
BLU ACC

6
RED IG1 OPTION
GRN PUR

5
GRY ILLUMI+
BODY CONTROL
MODULE
7
BLU ILL–(LED)

8
PNK ILLUMI CANCEL
REVERSE RELAY L G H
CIRCUIT

11
BRN ATP-D

12
PNK ATP-N

1
PUR ATP-R

2
GRN ATP-P

3
GRY GND

SHIFT POSITION
G504 INDICATOR
 (With paddle shifter)
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

ILM(+)

34
PUR
SUPP

PADDLE SHIFTER + ILM(-)

45 (UPSHIFT SWITCH)
TAN
SDNP PADDLE UP(PLUS)

PUR BLU

GND
CABLE REEL
C12 4
BLK
STRG GND
A6 C18 2
LT BLU
PADDLE SW UP PADDLE SW UP
ACC COMBINATION SWITCH
4 1
PUR
ILLUMI-(LED)
2 3
YEL
ILLUMI+
10 7
No. B43 (10 A) FUSE
(in the under-dash fuse/relay box) LT BLU RED
9 11

A3 C15 12 5 2
WHT PUR GRN
+B OPTION +B ILLUMI+
C11 7 3 4
BLK WHT
STRG GND ILLUMI-(LED)
AUDIO REMOTE-HFL SWITCH

A7 C19 3
RED
PADDLE SW DOWN PADDLE SW DOWN
A1 C13 1
BLK BLK
GND STRG GND

GND
G502

PADDLE SHIFTER - PADDLE DOWN(MINUS)

(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
ILM(-)
K L

SPORT MODE SWITCH

5
GRY ILM(+)
ILLUMI+
1 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
BLU
ILL-(LED)
6 A14
LT BLU
SPORT MODE SW
2
BLK
GND

G501
 (Without ACC)

: CAN line
H G

A17
BLU
ILL–(LED)
A13
PNK
ILLUMI CANCEL GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
A20
WHT
F-CAN A_H
A21
RED
F-CAN A_L

6
WHT DATA LINK
F-CAN A_H
14 CONNECTOR (DLC)
RED
F-CAN A_L

RED WHT

20
WHT
F-CAN A_H VSA MODULATOR-
21 CONTROL UNIT
RED
F-CAN A_L

RED WHT

26
WHT
F-CAN A_H ELECTRIC BRAKE
18 BOOSTER
RED
F-CAN A_L

C D E F
RED WHT

A37
WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
A36
RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L
A21 POWERTRAIN
BLU CONTROL
TM-CAN_H TM-CAN_H MODULE
A20 (PCM)
PNK GRY
TM-CAN_L TM-CAN_L

BRAKE PEDAL A26

GRN
POSITION SWITCH STOP SW
 (With ACC)

H G : CAN line

A17
BLU
ILL–(LED)
A13
PNK
ILLUMI CANCEL GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
5 A20
PUR
F-CAN C_H
13 A21
GRN
F-CAN C_L
2 6
PNK
DIAG-CAN_H DATA LINK
10 14 CONNECTOR (DLC)
BLU
DIAG-CAN_L
CAN GATEWAY 3
WHT
F-CAN A_H
11
RED
F-CAN A_L
6
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
14
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L

20
WHT
F-CAN A_H
21
RED
VSA MODULATOR- F-CAN A_L
CONTROL UNIT 24
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
25
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L

LT GRN LT BLU RED WHT

26
WHT
F-CAN A_H
18
ELECTRIC RED
F-CAN A_L
BRAKE
19
BOOSTER LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
12
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
RED WHT

E F

A37
WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
A36
RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L
A39
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
C D POWERTRAIN
A38
LT GRN CONTROL
F-CAN B_L MODULE
A21 (PCM)
BLU
TM-CAN_H TM-CAN_H
A20
PNK GRY
TM-CAN_L TM-CAN_L

BRAKE PEDAL A26

GRN
POSITION SWITCH STOP SW
CVT Oil Seal Replacement

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000

Oil Seal Driver Attachment 07GAD-PG40100

Oil Seal Driver, 65 mm 07JAD-PL9A100

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.

Left Differential Oil Seal

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

3. Transmission Fluid - Drain

4. Left Driveshaft Inboard Joint - Disconnect

5. Left Differential Oil Seal - Remove

6. Left Differential Oil Seal - Install

1. Install the left differential oil seal (A) flush with the
transmission housing using the 15 x 135L driver handle and
the oil seal driver attachment.
 NOTE: Before installation, apply a light coat of clean
transmission fluid to the surface both of the press-fit and
07GAD-PG40100 the lip that are on the oil seal.

07749-0010000

7. Left Driveshaft Inboard Joint - Connect

8. Transmission Fluid - Refill

9. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

10.Engine Undercover - Install

Right Differential Oil Seal

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

3. Transmission Fluid - Drain

4. Intermediate Shaft - Remove

5. Right Differential Oil Seal - Remove

6. Right Differential Oil Seal - Install

1. Install the right differential oil seal (A) flush with the torque
07JAD-PL9A100 converter housing using the 65 mm oil seal driver.

NOTE: Before installation, apply a light coat of clean

transmission fluid to the surface both of the press-fit and
the lip that are on the oil seal.

7. Intermediate Shaft - Install

8. Transmission Fluid - Refill

9. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

10.Engine Undercover - Install

CVT Road Test

NOTE: The following road test should be done in a safe, isolated road away from traffic while obeying all local traffic laws.

1. HDS - Connect

2. Engine - Warm Up

1. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating

temperature (the radiator fan comes on twice).

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Vehicle - Road Test

1. Park the vehicle on level ground.

2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.

3. Start the engine.

4. Shift the transmission to D position/mode while pressing the brake pedal. Press the accelerator pedal, and release it
suddenly. The engine should not stall.

5. Repeat step 4 in all positions/modes.

6. Prepare the HDS to take a SNAPSHOT (refer to the HDS user's guide for more details if needed):

Set the Trigger Type to Parameter.

Adjust the Parameter setting to APP Sensor A (V) above 1.1 V.
Set the Record Time to 60 seconds.
Set the Trigger Point to (Negative) - 30 seconds.

7. Find a suitable level road.

8. When you are ready to do the test, press OK on the HDS.

9. Accelerate quickly until APP Sensor A (V) reads 1.2 V. Maintain a steady throttle at 1.2 V until the vehicle reaches a
reasonable speed, then slow the vehicle, and come to a stop.

10. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded, or increase the recording time setting as necessary, and repeat step 9.

11. Adjust the parameter setting to 2.2 V.

12. Test-drive the vehicle again. Accelerate quickly until APP Sensor A (V) reads 2.3 V. Maintain a steady throttle at 2.3 V until the
vehicle reaches a reasonable speed, then slow the vehicle, and come to a stop.

13. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded, or increase the recording time setting as necessary, and repeat step 12.

14. Accelerate quickly until the accelerator pedal is to the floor. Maintain a steady pedal until the vehicle reaches reasonable
speed, then slow to a stop, and save the snapshot.

15. Review each snapshot individually, and compare APP Sensor A (V), the Vehicle Speed, and the Engine Speed to the
following table:

APP Sensor A (V) Position/Mode Vehicle Speed Engine Speed

1.2 V D 25 mph (40 km/h) 950－1,550 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 950－1,550 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 1,500－2,100 rpm
S* 25 mph (40 km/h) 1,740－2,340 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 2,030－2,630 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 2,660－3,260 rpm
L* 25 mph (40 km/h) 2,300－2,900 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 3,040－3,640 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 3,900－4,500 rpm
2.3 V D 25 mph (40 km/h) 1,620－2,220 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 1,700－2,300 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 1,860－2,460 rpm
S* 25 mph (40 km/h) 1,900－2,500 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 2,140－2,740 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 2,660－3,260 rpm
L* 25 mph (40 km/h) 2,800－3,400 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 3,200－3,800 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 3,900－4,500 rpm
4.5 V D 25 mph (40 km/h) 3,700－4,300 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 5,100－5,700 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 5,700－6,300 rpm
S* 25 mph (40 km/h) 3,700－4,300 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 5,100－5,700 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 5,700－6,300 rpm
L* 25 mph (40 km/h) 4,300－4,900 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 5,020－5,620 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 5,500－6,100 rpm
*: Without paddle shifter

16. With paddle shifter: Test-drive the vehicle with the 7-Speed Manual shift mode, and compare the Speed Stage, the Vehicle
Speed, and the Engine Speed to the following table:
 SPORT Mode with 7-Speed Manual shift mode (With Paddle Shifter)
Speed Stage Vehicle Speed Engine Speed
1st 25 mph (40 km/h) 4,059－4,659 rpm
2nd 25 mph (40 km/h) 2,636－3,236 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 4,104－4,704 rpm
3rd 25 mph (40 km/h) 1,960－2,560 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 3,090－3,690 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 5,350－5,950 rpm
4th 25 mph (40 km/h) 1,461－2,061 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 2,342－2,942 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 4,104－4,704 rpm
5th 25 mph (40 km/h) 1,109－1,709 rpm
37 mph (60 km/h) 1,814－2,414 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 3,223－3,823 rpm
6th 37 mph (60 km/h) 1,389－1,989 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 2,516－3,116 rpm
7th 37 mph (60 km/h) 1,083－1,683 rpm
62 mph (100 km/h) 2,006－2,606 rpm

17. Park the vehicle on an upward slope (about 16 degrees), apply the parking brake, and shift the transmission to P
position/mode. Release the brake; the vehicle should not move.

NOTE: Always use the parking brake to hold the vehicle when stopped on an incline. Depending on the grade of the incline,
the vehicle could roll if the brake is released.
CVT Symptom Troubleshooting - HDS does not communicate with the TCM

HDS does not communicate with the TCM

1. CVT system communication check:

‐1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐3. Check the Mode Menu of the CVT system with the HDS.

Does the HDS show the Mode Menu of the CVT system?

YES The CVT system communication is OK. Intermittent failure, the system is OK at
this time.■
NO Go to step 2.

2. Fuse check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Check the following fuses.

Fuse No. A10
No. A39
 Are the fuses OK?

YES The fuses are OK. Reinstall the fuses, then go to step 3.

NO Replace faulty fuse, and recheck. If the fuse blows again, repair a short to ground
in the blown fuse circuit.■
3. Open wire check (+B/+B TCU line):

‐1. Disconnect the following connector.

TCM 50P connector

‐2. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
TCM 50P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 TCM 50P connector No. 1
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there battery voltage?

YES The +B/+B TCU wire is OK. Go to step 4.

NO Repair an open in the +B/+B TCU wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box
and the TCM.■
4. Open wire check (IG1/IG1 line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle ON mode
TCM 50P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 TCM 50P connector No. 8
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there battery voltage?

YES The IG1/IG1 wire is OK. Go to step 5.

NO Repair an open in the IG1/IG1 wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and
the TCM.■
5. Open wire check (GND1(TCU) line, GND2(TCU) line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
TCM 50P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 TCM 50P connector No. 9
TCM 50P connector No. 10
Test point 2 Body ground

Are there continuity?

YES The GND1(TCU) wire and the GND2(TCU) wire are OK. Go to step 6.

NO Repair an open in the GND1(TCU) wire and/or the GND2(TCU) wire between the
TCM and ground (G201), or repair poor ground (G201).■
6. Open wire check (F-CAN A_H line, F-CAN A_L line):
‐1. Disconnect the following connector.
CAN gateway 16P connector

‐2. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

F-CAN A_H wire
Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
CAN gateway 16P connector: disconnected
TCM 50P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 CAN gateway 16P connector (female terminals) No. 3 :
Test point 2 TCM 50P connector No. 3

F-CAN A_L wire

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
CAN gateway 16P connector: disconnected
TCM 50P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 CAN gateway 16P connector (female terminals) No. 11 :
Test point 2 TCM 50P connector No. 11

Is there continuity?

YES The F-CAN_H wire and the F-CAN_L wire are OK. Check for any authorized
service information related to the DTCs or symptoms you are troubleshooting, or
substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If the symptom goes away and the
TCM was substituted, replace the original TCM.■
NO Repair an open in the F-CAN_H wire and/or the F-CAN_L wire between the CAN
gateway and the TCM.■
Auto idle stop system does not operate

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
CVT speed sensor defective
Auxiliary transmission fluid pump worn, binding, foreign material in transmission fluid
pump, or insufficiency of air bleeding
Transmission fluid temperature sensor defective

Notes

Check the CVT speed sensor for wear and damage, and also check the O-ring for wear and
damage.
Inspect the auxiliary transmission fluid pump. If necessary, bleed the air of the auxiliary
transmission fluid pump.
Inspect the transmission fluid temperature sensor.
CVT System Component Location Index
 SHIFT LEVER
Removal and Installation
SHIFT CABLE Disassembly and Reassembly
Removal and Installation
Adjustment

For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram.

TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION CONTROL
Removal and Installation CVT SPEED SENSOR MODULE (TCM)
Disassembly and Reassembly Removal and Installation Update
TRANSMISSION FLUID Removal and Installation
Level Check and Replacement Reset
DRIVE PLATE TRANSMISSION CVTF WARMER
Removal and Installation RANGE SWITCH Removal and Installation
OIL SEAL Removal, Installation, CVTF WARMER HOSE
Replacement and Test Removal and Installation

CVT DRIVEN PULLEY

PRESSURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation

TORQUE CVT DRIVE PULLEY

CONVERTER SPEED SENSOR
TURBINE Removal and Installation
SPEED SENSOR
Removal AUXILIARY TRANSMISSION
and Installation FLUID PUMP*1
Removal, Installation, and Test
TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE Air Bleeding
SENSOR
TRANSMISSION
(integrated with solenoid wire harness A) Behind Transmission Fluid Pan FLUID PUMP
Test
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation

CVT CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(integrated with valve body assembly)
Test
Removal and Installation

CVT DRIVEN PULLEY PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(integrated with valve body assembly)
Test
Removal and Installation SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE O/P
Test
Removal and Installation
CVT DRIVE PULLEY PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CVT LOCK-UP CLUTCH
(integrated with valve body assembly) SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Test (integrated with (integrated with VALVE BODY ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation valve body assembly) valve body assembly) Removal and Installation
Test Test
*1: With auto idle stop system Removal and Installation Removal and Installation
CVT System Description - Electronic Control System

CVT Control System Component Location

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index.

Location Index Component

CVT System Component Speed Sensor, Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor,
Location Index TCM, Transmission Range Switch, CVT Driven Pulley
Pressure Sensor, Auxiliary transmission fluid pump
Shift Position Indicator Paddle Shifter, Sport Mode Switch, Shift Position Indicator
Component Location Index
Conventional Brake Brake Pedal Position
Component Location Index
Fuel and Emissions Systems PCM, Engine RPM, Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor,
Component Location Index Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor, Throttle Position
Sensor, Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
VSA System Component VSA Modulator-Control Unit
Location Index
Gauges Component Location ECON Switch
Index
Electronic Control System
Functional Diagram

The electronic control system consists of the TCM, sensors, switches, and solenoid valves. Shifting and lock-up are electronically
controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
The TCM receives input signals from the sensors and the other control units, processes data, and outputs signals for the engine
control system and the CVT control system. The CVT control system includes the shift control, the pulley pressure control, the clutch
pressure control, the lock-up control, the transmission fluid pump pressure control, and the indicator control. The TCM switches the
shift solenoid valves and the CVT pulley control solenoid valves to control shifting position and lock-up torque converter clutch.
 TCM
Engine RPM Signal

CVT Drive Pulley Speed

Sensor Signal PGM-FI Control System

CVT Speed Sensor Signal

CVT Drive Pulley Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve
Torque Converter Turbine Shift Control/Pulley Pressure Control
Speed Sensor Signal
CVT Driven Pulley Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve
Throttle Position Sensor
Signal
Clutch Pressure Control CVT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Signal
CVT Lock-Up Clutch
Manifold Absolute Control Solenoid Valve
Pressure Sensor Signal Lock-Up Control

CVT Driven Pulley Shift Solenoid Valve B

Pressure Sensor Signal

VSA Modulator-Control Transmission Fluid Pump

Pressure Control Shift Solenoid Valve O/P
Unit Signal

Engine Coolant Vehicle Speed Signal

Temperature Sensor Signal
Self-Diagnosis/Fail-Safe Function

Transmission Range
Switch Signal Shift Lock Solenoid

ECON Switch Signal

Communication and Output Function Data Link Connector (DLC)

Brake Pedal Position

Switch Signal

Transmission Fluid
Temperature Sensor Signal
Indicator Control Shift Position Indicator
Paddle Shifter Signal*

Auxiliary Transmission
Auto Idle Stop Control Fluid Pump

With auto idle stop system

*: Four-Position Transmission

Shift Control/Pulley Pressure Control

To reduce the steel belt slippage and increase the steel belt life, the TCM/PCM calculates signals from sensors and switches, and
actuates the pulley pressure control solenoid valves to maintain optimum pulley pressure. When the pulley ratio is high (low vehicle
speed), high hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the driven pulley and reduces the effective diameter of the drive pulley,
and lower hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the drive pulley to eliminate the steel belt slippage. When the pulley ratio
is low (high vehicle speed), high hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the drive pulley and reduces the effective diameter
of the driven pulley, and lower hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the driven pulley to eliminate the steel belt slippage.
The TCM/PCM compares actual driving conditions with programmed driving conditions to control shifting, and it instantly determines a
drive pulley ratio from various signals sent from sensors and switches. The TCM/PCM activates the CVT drive pulley pressure control
solenoid valve and the CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve to control pulley pressure to the pulleys.
The shift control includes the grade logic control and the shift-hold control.
 TCM/PCM
PGM-FI Control System

Engine RPM Correction of Engine

Signal Torque Data

Calculation of Transfer
Belt Torque
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal
Fail-Safe Control

Decision of Minimum CVT Drive Pulley Pressure

Required Pulley Pressure Control Solenoid Valve
CVT Drive Pulley Speed
Sensor Signal Current
Feedback
CVT Driven Pulley Pressure
CVT Speed Sensor Signal Control Solenoid Valve
Calculation of Pulley Ratio
Transmission Range
Switch Signal Fail-Safe Control Decision of Controlling
Pulley Pressure Control
Paddle Shifter + Solenoid Current
(Upshift Switch) Signal*

Paddle Shifter -
(Downshift Switch) Signal* Decision of
Calculation of Master Driving Pulley
Target of Drive Pulley Pressure
ECON Switch Signal RPM

Accelerator Pedal Correction of Driven

Position Sensor Signal Pulley Pressure
Fail-Safe Control

Throttle Position
Sensor Signal

Shift Position Control

Vehicle Speed Signal

Fail-Safe Control

Magnitude of Gradient
Brake Pedal Position Control Grade Logic
Switch Signal Control

Engine Coolant Correction of Engine

Temperature Sensor Coolant Temperature
Signal Sensor Signal Data

Transmission Fluid Correction of

Temperature Sensor Transmission Fluid
Signal Temperature Sensor
Signal Data

CVT Driven Pulley

Pressure Sensor Signal

*: Four-Position Transmission

Shift Control - Grade Logic Control

The grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in D position/mode and S position/mode. The TCM/PCM
compares actual driving conditions with memorized driving conditions, based on the input signal from the various sensors and
switches, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope.
 TCM/PCM

PGM-FI Control System

Engine RPM Signal Engine RPM

Shift Position Control

Fail-Safe Control
Vehicle Speed Signal

CVT Drive Pulley Speed

Sensor Signal Actual Driving Shift Position

CVT Speed Sensor Signal

Comparison
Automatic Non-Stage
with Signals
Transmission Range Switch Master Target of Shift Schedule
Signal

Accelerator Pedal Position

Sensor Signal

Correction of Data and Selection

Throttle Position Sensor of Grade Logic Shifting Mode
Signal

Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor Signal

Grade Logic Control

Transmission Fluid
Temperature Sensor Signal
Calculate Magnitude of Gradient

Brake Pedal Position

Switch Signal
Correction of Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor Signal Data
VSA Modulator-Control
Unit Signal

Correction of Transmission Fluid

Temperature Sensor Signal Data

Grade Logic Control: Ascending Control

When the TCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in D position/mode or S position/mode, the system selects the most
suitable shift schedule according to the magnitude of a gradient, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power when needed.

Engine Speed

LOW

Throttle Opening: High

Throttle Opening: Middle

Throttle Opening: Low

OD

Vehicle speed
0

Grade Logic Control: Descending Control

When the TCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in D position/mode or S position/mode, the system selects the most
suitable shift schedule according to the magnitude of a gradient, so the vehicle can run smooth in combination with engine braking.

Engine Speed

LOW

Steep Hill Schedule

OD

Flat Road Schedule

Vehicle Speed
0

Shift-Hold Control
When negotiating winding roads, the throttle is suddenly released and the brakes are applied, as is the case when decelerating at the
entrance of a corner, Shift-Hold Control keeps the transmission in its current (lower) ratio as it negotiates the corner and accelerates
out. When the vehicle is driven aggressively on a winding road, the TCM will keep the engine speed on a higher-than-normal setting,
so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power. The transmission will resume the normal setting after the TCM determines that
normal driving has resumed.
Shift Control - D-Paddle Shift Mode (Four-Position Transmission)

When the transmission is switched into the D-paddle shift mode by pulling steering wheel-mounted paddle shifters while driving in the
D position/mode with general driving, the transmission can shift into a lower speed stage by pulling the paddle shifter － (downshift
switch), and it can shift into a higher speed stage by pulling the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch). When the transmission shifts into a
lower or a higher speed stage by pulling the paddle shifters, the shift indicator in the gauge control module displays the number of
currently-selected stage. This number of the speed stage goes off when the transmission downshifts automatically, or when the
transmission upshifts automatically while coasting.
Shift Control - S-paddle shift mode (Four-Position Transmission)

With the SPORT mode switch turned ON in D position/mode, the transmission is switched into the sport driving mode. This mode has
two shifting modes; the sport driving mode with non-stage speeds and the S-paddle shift mode. In the sport driving mode, the
transmission automatically adjusts to keep the engine at a higher rpm than the general driving mode setting, and steering wheel-
mounted paddle shifters are ready to be activated to switch to the S-paddle shift mode. In non-stage speeds sport driving mode, the
shift indicator and the M indicator in the gauge control module do not come on.
When the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) or paddle shifter － (downshift switch) is pulled, non-stage speeds sport driving mode is
canceled and the S-paddle shift mode comes into operation. The shift indicator displays the number of the selected speed stage, and
the M indicator comes on. In the S-paddle shift mode, the driver can shift up and down manually from 1st through 7th speed stage by
using the paddle shifters, much like a manual transmission. The paddle shifters are located on the back of the steering wheel, and the
driver can shift speed stages by pulling the paddle shifters without taking either hand off the steering wheel.
In the S-paddle shift mode, the transmission must be shifted up and down by pulling the paddle shifters. However, the transmission
cannot downshift and stays in the current stage if the paddle shifter － (downshift switch) is pulled while the vehicle is coasting at a
speed that would cause the engine to over-rev by downshifting the transmission, and the shift indicator blinks the number of the
selected stage several times, then returns to the number of the current stage. If the vehicle speed reaches an appropriate speed while
the shift indicator is blinking the number of the selected stage, the transmission downshifts and the shift indicator displays the selected
stage. The transmission also cannot upshift and stays in the current stage if the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) is pulled while driving
below an appropriate upshifting speed, the shift indicator blinks the number of the selected stage several times, then returns to the
number of the current stage. If the vehicle speed reaches the an appropriate upshift speed while the shift indicator is blinking the
number of the selected stage, the transmission upshifts and the shift indicator displays the selected stage.
This mode has automatic upshifting areas to prevent engine over-revving, and downshifting areas so the vehicle can run smoothly
with more power to cope with upcoming acceleration. When coasting, the transmission downshifts to the next lower stage if the
vehicle slows down to the programmed speed, or by pressing the brake pedal.
When the transmission decelerates to a stop, the transmission shifts to 1st stage automatically. The transmission can be shifted to
2nd stage by pulling the paddle shifter ＋ (upshift switch) while the vehicle is stopped, and the vehicle can start off in 2nd stage.
The S-paddle shift mode is canceled when moving the shift lever to any position/mode other than D, or when turing the SPORT mode
switch OFF.
Clutch Pressure Control

The TCM actuates the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve to control the forward clutch pressure and the reverse brake
pressure. When the transmission is in-gear, the forward clutch pressure and the reverse brake pressure regulated by the CVT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve engage and disengage the forward clutch and the reverse brake smoothly.
The TCM receives input signals from the various sensors and switches, processes data, and outputs current to the CVT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve.

TCM

CVT Drive Pulley Speed

Sensor Signal Actual Driving Decision of
Pulley Ratio Shifting Mode

CVT Speed Sensor Signal

Torque Converter Turbine

Speed Sensor Signal Current
Master Target of CVT Clutch Pressure
Controlling Current Feedback Control Solenoid Valve
Throttle Position Sensor
Signal
Correction
Accelerator Pedal Position of Data
Sensor Signal

Brake Pedal Position Correction of Engine

Switch Signal Torque Signal Data

Manifold Absolute Pressure

Sensor Signal
Correction of Hydraulic
Pressure Application
Timing

Correction of Engine
Engine Coolant
Coolant Temperature
Temperature Sensor Signal
Sensor Signal Data

Transmission Fluid Correction of Transmission

Temperature Sensor Signal Fluid Temperature Sensor
Signal Data

Engine RPM Signal

Lock-Up Control

Shift solenoid valve B controls hydraulic pressure to lock-up ON and OFF. The TCM actuates shift solenoid valve B and the CVT lock-
up clutch control solenoid valve to start lock-up. The CVT lock-up clutch control solenoid valve applies and regulates hydraulic
pressure to control the volume of the lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in D position/mode, S position/mode, at transmission fluid temperature exceeding 68 °F (20 °C).

TCM

Engine Coolant Engine Coolant

Temperature Sensor Temperature Control
Signal

Transmission Fluid
Temperature Sensor Transmission Fluid
Signal Temperatur Control

ECON Switch Signal Shift Lever Position Control

Gradient Control by
Magnitude

Transmission Range Fail-Safe Control

Switch Signal

Throttle Position
Sensor Signal

Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Signal
Actual Driving
Pulley Ratio Shift Solenoid Valve B

CVT Drive Pulley Speed

Sensor Signal

Decision of Lock-Up Control

Shifting Mode ∙ Lock-Up ON/OFF
CVT Speed Sensor
control
Signal
∙ Lock-Up Condition
Control
Torque Converter
Turbine Speed Sensor
Signal

Engine RPM Current CVT Lock-Up Clutch

Signal Feedback Control Solenoid Valve
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump Control (With Auto Idle Stop System)

The auxiliary transmission fluid pump supplies hydraulic pressure to the hydraulic circuit during the operation of the auto idle stop
system.
When the vehicle comes to an engine stop in the operation of the auto idle stop system, the transmission fluid pump also stops, then
the TCM starts the auxiliary transmission fluid pump to supply hydraulic pressure to the hydraulic circuit. The auxiliary transmission
fluid pump continues to supply enough hydraulic pressure for the clutch to engage until the engine restarts. When the engine restarts,
the TCM stops the auxiliary transmission fluid pump.
The auxiliary transmission fluid pump is installed out of the transmission housing, and consists of the relief valve, the pump, the motor,
and the driver.

PRESSURE SUPPLY
OF EACH PARTS

AUXILIARY TRANSMISSION FLUID PUMP

PUMP

MOTOR/
DRIVER
RELIEF VALVE

AUXILIARY
TRANSMISSION
FLUID PUMP

OIL PAN
CVT System Description - General Operation

General Operation
The continuously variable transmission (CVT) is an electronically controlled automatic transmission with drive and driven pulleys, steel
belt, and new transmission fluid (HCF-2). The CVT provides non-stage speeds forward and non-stage speeds reverse. The entire unit
is positioned in line with the engine.

Transmission
The torque converter consists of a pump, a turbine, and a stator assembly in a single unit. The torque converter is connected to the
engine crankshaft and turns as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a ring gear which meshes with the
starter drive gear when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly serves as a flywheel, transmitting power to
the transmission input shaft. The transmission has four parallel shafts: the input shaft, the drive pulley shaft, the driven pulley shaft,
and the final drive shaft. The input shaft is connected to the torque converter turbine, and integrates the forward clutch on the drive
pulley shaft end. The drive pulley shaft and the driven pulley shaft consist of movable and fixed face pulleys. Both pulleys are linked
by the steel belt. The input shaft includes the forward clutch. The drive pulley shaft includes the drive pulley. The input shaft is
connected with the drive pulley shaft by the forward clutch hub/sun gear, and by the ring gear, the planetary pinion gears, and the sun
gear. The planetary carrier is positioned between the ring gear and the sun gear, and engaged with the planetary pinion gears. The
driven pulley shaft includes the driven pulley (with the park gear). The secondary drive gear is splined to the driven pulley shaft. The
final drive shaft is positioned between the secondary drive gear and the final driven gear. The final drive shaft integrates the
secondary driven gear and the final drive gear which serves to change the rotational direction of the drive and driven pulley shafts,
because the drive pulley shaft and driven pulley shaft rotate the same direction. When the input shaft is joined with the drive pulley
shaft by engaging the forward clutch or the reverse brake, the power is transmitted through the input shaft, the drive pulley shaft, and
the driven pulley shaft to the final drive shaft provide drive.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the transmission control module (TCM), sensors, and solenoid valves. Shifting and lock-up
are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The TCM is located in the engine compartment.
Hydraulic Control
The hydraulic control system is controlled by the TCM, the transmission fluid pump, and the valves and the solenoid valves in the
valve body. The transmission fluid pump is driven as the engine turns. The transmission fluid pump drive sprocket is connected to the
torque converter housing, turns as the engine turns, and drives the transmission fluid pump driven sprocket by the transmission fluid
pump drive chain. The transmission fluid pump supplies hydraulic pressure to the hydraulic circuit. Fluid from the transmission fluid
pump passes to the various control valves, the drive/driven pulleys, the forward clutch, and the reverse brake.
Shift Control
To shift pulley ratio, the TCM controls shift solenoid valve B, the shift solenoid valve O/P, the CVT drive pulley pressure control
solenoid valve, the CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve, the CVT clutch pressure control solenoid valve, and the CVT
lock-up clutch control solenoid valve while receiving input signals from various sensors and switches located throughout the vehicle.
The TCM actuates the CVT drive pulley pressure control solenoid valve and the CVT driven pulley pressure control solenoid valve to
change drive and driven pulley pressures. The drive pulley pressure is applied to the drive pulley, and the driven pulley pressure is
applied to the driven pulley, and pulley ratio is changed to their effective ratio.
Lock-Up Mechanism
The lock-up mechanism of the torque converter clutch operates in D position/mode, S position/mode, and L position/mode (without
paddle shifter), at transmission fluid temperature exceeding 68 °F (20 °C). The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque
converter through a fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the transmission fluid pump. As this
takes place, the input shaft and the drive pulley shaft rotate the same as the engine crankshaft. Together with hydraulic control, the
TCM optimizes the timing of the lock-up mechanism. When shift solenoid valve B is turned ON by the TCM, shift solenoid valve B
pressure switches lock-up ON and OFF. The CVT lock-up clutch control solenoid valve controls the volume of lock-up.
Gear Selection
The CVT comes in two types of shift lever position/mode as follows:

Six-position/mode
 Position/Mode Description
P: PARK Front wheels locked; the parking brake pawl engages with the park gear on the
driven pulley.
The forward clutch disengages.
R: REVERSE The reverse brake engages, and it locks with the planetary carrier to the
transmission housing.
N: NEUTRAL The forward clutch disengages.
D: DRIVE Transmission automatically adjusts to keep the engine at the best rpm for driving
under all conditions.
The lock-up mechanism operates in this position/mode.
The WOT Step Shift Mode * operates in this position/mode.
S: SPORT Sport driving mode with non-stage speeds; transmission automatically adjusts to
keep the engine at a higher rpm than in D position/mode driving conditions for
sport driving.
The lock-up mechanism operates in this position/mode.
The WOT Step Shift Mode* operates in this position/mode.
L: LOW For engine braking and power for climbing; the transmission shifts into the
lowest pulley ratio.
The lock-up mechanism operates in this position/mode.
*: When accelerating and the engine speed reaches the maximum while the accelerator pedal is depressed deeply and
the vehicle is driving at high speed, the CVT system switches the gear shift method to provide an automatic
transmission-like multistage gear shift.

Four-position/mode
Position/Mode Description
P: PARK Front wheels locked; the parking brake pawl engages with the park gear on the
driven pulley.
The forward clutch disengages.
R: REVERSE The reverse brake engages, and it locks with the planetary carrier to the
transmission housing.
N: NEUTRAL The forward clutch disengages.
D: DRIVE With SPORT mode Transmission automatically adjusts to keep the engine at the best rpm for driving
switch OFF: under all conditions. D-paddle shift mode is also equipped; the transmission can
GENERAL DRIVE be changed to lower or higher ratio manually with the steering wheel-mounted
paddle shifters under certain particular conditions.
The number of the selected ratio is displayed in the shift indicator.
The lock-up mechanism operates in this position/mode.
The WOT Step Shift Mode * operates in this position/mode.
With SPORT mode Sport driving mode (non-stage speeds)
switch ON: SPORT Transmission automatically adjusts to keep the engine at a higher rpm than
DRIVE in D position/mode driving conditions for sport driving.
The lock-up mechanism operates in this position/mode.
The WOT Step Shift Mode* operates in this position/mode.

S-paddle shift mode (1st through 7th)

The transmission can be manually shifted from 1st through 7th using the
steering wheel-mounted paddle shifters.
The selected ratio position is displayed in the shift indicator.
In this mode, the vehicle can also start off in 1st gear, upshift automatically
through the ratios during acceleration, and then downshift automatically
when decelerating to a stop.
The lock-up mechanism operates in this position/mode.
The WOT Step Shift Mode* operates in this position/mode.
*: When accelerating and the engine speed reaches the maximum while the accelerator pedal is depressed deeply and
the vehicle is driving at high speed, the CVT system switches the gear shift method to provide an automatic
transmission-like multistage gear shift.

Starting the engine is possible only the transmission is in P or N position/mode because of a neutral-safety switch.
Shift Position Indicator
The shift position indicator in the gauge control module shows which shift lever position/mode has been selected without having to
look down at the console.
CVT System Description - Lock-Up System

Lock-Up System
The lock-up mechanism of the torque converter clutch operates in D position/mode, S position/mode, and L position/mode, at
transmission fluid temperature exceeding 68 °F (20 °C). The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through
a fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the transmission fluid pump. As this takes place, the
input shaft and the drive pulley shaft rotate as the same as the engine crankshaft. Together with hydraulic control, the TCM optimizes
the timing of the lock-up mechanism. When shift solenoid valve B is turned ON by the TCM, shift solenoid valve B pressure switches
lock-up ON and OFF. The CVT lock-up clutch control solenoid valve controls the volume of lock-up.

Torque Converter Clutch Lock-Up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and fluid entering from
the chamber between the pump and the stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch piston against the torque converter
cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages with the torque converter cover; torque converter clutch lock-up ON, and the input
shaft rotates at the same as the engine.

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH PISTON

Power flow
DAMPER SPRING
The power flows by way of:
TURBINE
Engine
↓
Drive plate TORQUE
↓ CONVERTER
Torque converter cover COVER INLET OUTLET
↓
Torque converter clutch piston
↓
Damper spring
↓
Turbine
↓
Input shaft
INPUT SHAFT

Torque Converter Clutch Lock-Up OFF (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid entered from the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston passes through the torque
converter and goes out from the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the pump and the stator. As a result, the
torque converter clutch piston moves away from the torque converter cover, and the torque converter clutch lock-up is released;
torque converter clutch lock-up OFF.

TURBINE
Power flow PUMP

The power flows by way of:

Engine
↓ TORQUE
Drive plate CONVERTER OUTLET
↓ COVER INLET
Torque converter cover
↓
Pump
↓
Turbine
↓
Input shaft

INPUT SHAFT
CVT System Description - Shift Lock System

Shift Lever Assembly

The shift lever is equipped with the shift lock function to prevent the miss-handling when selecting the position.
Also, the park pin switch is used for one of the key interlock system and installed on the shift lever, and sends the park position signal
(lever is in P position) to the TCM.
Shift Lock System

The shift lock system prevents the shift lever from miss shifting when starting the engine. The shift lock solenoid is usually OFF. After
starting the engine in P, the shift lever cannot move to any other position from P because the shift lock stop stops the lock pin unless
pressing the brake pedal. When the brake pedal is pressed and the accelerator pedal is not pressed, the shift lock solenoid is ON; the
shift lock solenoid plunger in the shift lock solenoid pulls the shift lock stop to release the lock pin. Then push the shift lever button,
and the shift lever can move to any other position. When the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal are pressed at the same time, the
shift lock system is not unlocked.

P POSITION

SHIFT LEVER BUTTON

LOCK PIN

SHIFT LOCK STOP

SHIFT LOCK SHIFT LOCK

SOLENOID SOLENOID PLUNGER

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID: OFF SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID: ON

Shift Lock Release

When the shift lock system does not operate due to a mechanical or electrical trouble, you can unlock the shift lock temporarily by
inserting the mechanical key into the shift lock release hole and pressing the shift lock release. When the shift lock release is pressed,
the shift lock stop releases the lock pin, and the shift lever can move to any other position.
 MECHANICAL KEY

LOCK PIN

SHIFT LEVER GATE

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID SHIFT LOCK STOP

CVT System Symptom Troubleshooting Index

NOTE: Do an all DTC check with the HDS, and troubleshoot any DTCs first before following the
repair procedures listed in the index.

Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes

With the vehicle in the F-CAN communication line error Check the F-CAN communication line (Without ACC).
ON mode, the shift
Gauge control module defective Check the F-CAN communication system (With ACC).
position indicator
displays an improper TCM defective Check the F-CAN communication line by using the
indication, or it never Transmission range switch defective or gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
displays at all out of adjustment Inspect the transmission range switch.
Transmission range switch circuit Inspect the open or short in the wire between the TCM
and transmission range switch.
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment
Control pin broken Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
control lever.
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and
detent spring worn or damaged Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
spring for wear and damage.
Shift lever cannot be Shift lock solenoid defective Test the shift lock solenoid.
moved from P
position/mode while Shift lock solenoid control circuit Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit.
pressing on the brake Shift lock mechanism defective Inspect the transmission range switch.
pedal
Transmission range switch defective Inspect the APP sensor signal.
Transmission range switch circuit Check the throttle body.
Brake pedal position switch circuit
Brake pedal position switch defective
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
Accelerator pedal position sensor
defective
Throttle body defective
When you press the A problem in the paddle shifter circuit Troubleshoot the paddle shifter circuit.
paddle shifter, the
Paddle shifter defective Test the paddle shifter.
transmission does not
upshift/downshift (With TCM defective
paddle shifter)
M indicator does not F-CAN communication line error Check the F-CAN communication line (Without ACC).
come on even though
the paddle shifter is Gauge control module defective Check the F-CAN communication system (With ACC).
operated in the S-paddle TCM defective Check the F-CAN communication line by using the
shift mode. (With paddle gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
shifter)
HDS does not DLC circuit error Troubleshoot the TCM communication circuit.
communicate with the
TCM defective Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
TCM
Engine does not start Shift cable broken or out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
control lever.
Control pin broken
Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
out of adjustment Inspect the drive plate for wear and damage. If the drive
plate is worn or damaged, replace it.
Drive plate worn or damaged
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
Torque converter assembly defective
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate
installation defective
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Engine runs, but vehicle Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
does not move in any
Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
positions/modes
out of adjustment Adjust the engine output.
Engine output low Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
warmer strainer clogged strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
damaged components that caused debris.
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
damaged shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
transmission housing assembly.
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
Secondary drive/driven gear worn or for wear and damage.
damaged
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Final driven gear worn or damaged If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
Sun gear worn or damaged it and also check the related part of the input shaft
assembly for wear and damage.
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and
detent spring worn or damaged Check the secondary drive/driven gear for wear and
damage.
Control lever worn or damaged
Check the final driven gear for wear and damage.
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft
worn or damaged Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
Manual valve worn or damaged planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
foreign material in transmission fluid pump Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
Transmission fluid pump drive chain or spring for wear and damage.
transmission fluid pump drive/driven Check the control lever for wear and damage.
sprocket worn or damaged
Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for
Valve body assembly defective wear and damage. If the parking brake pawl or the
Joint pipes defective parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and
also check the park gear for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Torque converter assembly defective
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Torque converter ring gear worn or
damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Transmission assembly and drive plate Check the transmission fluid pump drive chain and the
installation defective transmission fluid pump drive/driven sprocket for wear
and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Vehicle does not move in Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
D, S*1, or L*1 out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
positions/modes Shift cable broken or out of adjustment control lever.
Control pin broken Adjust the engine output.
Engine output low Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
Forward clutch defective plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Reverse brake piston defective
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Sun gear worn or damaged the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
Manual valve worn or damaged damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Valve body assembly defective of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Stator shaft worn or damaged reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and
the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Vehicle does not move in Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
R position/mode out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment control lever.
Control pin broken Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Reverse brake defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Reverse brake piston defective brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Planetary carrier assembly worn or of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
damaged reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Sun gear worn or damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
Ring gear worn or damaged brake end-plate.
Thrust needle bearing or thrust washer on Check the planetary carrier assembly for wear and
planetary carrier assembly seized, worn, damage. If the planetary carrier assembly is worn or
or damaged damaged, replace it and also check the planetary carrier
pinion gears, the reverse brake, and the drive pulley
Manual valve worn or damaged shaft splines for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective
Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun
Stator shaft worn or damaged gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and
the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the ring gear for wear and damage. If the ring
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier assembly and the reverse brake for
wear and damage.
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washer
on the planetary carrier assembly for seize, wear, and
damage. If the thrust needle bearing or the thrust
washer are seized, worn, or damaged, replace them and
adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Engine stalls when Engine output low Adjust the engine output.
shifted to D
Reverse brake defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
position/mode from N
position/mode Reverse brake piston defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Torque converter assembly defective brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Torque converter ring gear worn or of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
damaged reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Transmission assembly and drive plate If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
installation defective brake end-plate.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Engine stalls when Engine output low Adjust the engine output.
shifted to R
position/mode from N Forward clutch defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
position/mode Planetary carrier assembly worn or plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
damaged tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.

Thrust needle bearing or thrust washer on Check the planetary carrier assembly for wear and
planetary carrier assembly seized, worn, damage. If the planetary carrier assembly is worn or
or damaged damaged, replace it and also check the planetary carrier
pinion gears, the reverse brake, and the drive pulley
Torque converter assembly defective shaft splines for wear and damage.
Torque converter ring gear worn or Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washer
damaged on the planetary carrier assembly for seize, wear, and
Transmission assembly and drive plate damage. If the thrust needle bearing or the thrust
installation defective washer are seized, worn, or damaged, replace them and
adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
No shift to higher or TCM defective Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
lower ratio
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
warmer strainer clogged strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
damaged components that caused debris.
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
damaged
and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective transmission housing assembly.
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
foreign material in transmission fluid pump for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Poor acceleration TCM defective Check the CVT drive pulley speed sensor for wear and
CVT drive pulley speed sensor defective damage, and also check the O-ring for wear and
damage.
Engine output low
Adjust the engine output.
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
damaged shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective transmission housing assembly.
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
foreign material in transmission fluid pump for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Joint pipes defective damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Torque converter assembly defective
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Torque converter ring gear worn or
damaged Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Transmission assembly and drive plate Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
installation defective damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Engine revs up TCM defective Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
abnormally high while shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
driving, and no and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
acceleration steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
transmission housing assembly.
damaged
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
for wear and damage.
Forward clutch defective
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
Reverse brake defective plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Reverse brake piston defective tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.

Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
foreign material in transmission fluid pump the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Transmission fluid pump drive chain or brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
transmission fluid pump drive/driven of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
sprocket worn or damaged reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Valve body assembly defective and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
Joint pipes defective
brake end-plate.
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Stator shaft worn or damaged damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the transmission fluid pump drive chain and the
transmission fluid pump drive/driven sprocket for wear
and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Excessive shock when TCM defective Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
accelerating and
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If
decelerating
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated necessary, replace the transmission fluid (HCF-2).
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
damaged
transmission housing assembly.
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
Forward clutch defective for wear and damage.
Reverse brake defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
Reverse brake piston defective plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Valve body assembly defective
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Joint pipes defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
Stator shaft worn or damaged damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Torque converter assembly defective
of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Torque converter ring gear worn or reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
damaged and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Transmission assembly and drive plate If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
installation defective brake end-plate.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
No engine braking TCM defective Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
transmission housing assembly.
damaged
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Joint pipes defective
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Vehicle does not creep TCM defective Check the CVT drive pulley speed sensor for wear and
on a flat road in D, S*1, CVT drive pulley speed sensor defective
damage, and also check the O-ring for wear and
or L*1 positions/modes damage.
Engine output low
Adjust the engine output.
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level
Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF
warmer strainer clogged Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or damaged components that caused debris.
damaged
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
foreign material in transmission fluid pump transmission housing assembly.
Valve body assembly defective Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
for wear and damage.
Joint pipes defective
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
Stator shaft worn or damaged damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Torque converter assembly defective Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Torque converter ring gear worn or Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
damaged Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Transmission assembly and drive plate Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
installation defective
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Vehicle moves in N Forward clutch defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
position/mode, shift plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
cable is properly Reverse brake defective
tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
adjusted Reverse brake piston defective
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Spring retainer/return spring assembly the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
defective damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Thrust needle bearing on input shaft brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
assembly seized, worn, or damaged of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Manual valve worn or damaged and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Stator shaft worn or damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Check the thrust needle bearing on the input shaft
assembly for seize, wear, and damage. If the thrust
needle bearing is seized, worn, or damaged, replace it
and also check the related part of the input shaft
assembly for wear and damage.
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Late shift after shifting to TCM defective Check the torque converter turbine speed sensor for
D position/mode from N wear and damage, and also check the O-ring for wear
Torque converter turbine speed sensor
position/mode, and and damage.
defective
return to N position/mode
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.

Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.

out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment control lever.
Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Control pin broken
warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
warmer strainer clogged damaged components that caused debris.
Forward clutch defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
Manual valve worn or damaged plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Valve body assembly defective
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Joint pipes defective
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Late shift after shifting to TCM defective Check the torque converter turbine speed sensor for
R position/mode from N wear and damage, and also check the O-ring for wear
position/mode, and Torque converter turbine speed sensor
defective and damage.
return to N position/mode
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Inspect the transmission range switch.
Transmission range switch defective or
out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
control lever.
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment
Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Control pin broken
warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
warmer strainer clogged damaged components that caused debris.
Reverse brake defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Reverse brake piston defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Manual valve worn or damaged brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Valve body assembly defective of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Joint pipes defective and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Stator shaft worn or damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Unstable engine speed TCM defective Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated necessary, replace the transmission fluid (HCF-2).

Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
warmer strainer clogged
strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, damaged components that caused debris.
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
damaged
shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
Forward clutch defective transmission housing assembly.
Reverse brake defective Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
for wear and damage.
CVT drive pulley pressure control
solenoid valve defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
CVT driven pulley pressure control tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
solenoid valve defective
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
CVT clutch pressure control solenoid the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
valve defective damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
CVT lock-up clutch control solenoid valve brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
defective of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Shift solenoid valve B defective
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Shift solenoid valve O/P defective If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or brake end-plate.
foreign material in transmission fluid pump Inspect the CVT solenoid valve.
Valve body assembly defective Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Joint pipes defective damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Torque converter assembly defective
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Torque converter ring gear worn or
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
damaged
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
Transmission assembly and drive plate
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
installation defective
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Excessive shock when TCM defective Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
starting off
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If
necessary, replace the transmission fluid (HCF-2).
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated
Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF
warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
warmer strainer clogged
strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective damaged components that caused debris.
Forward clutch defective Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
Reverse brake defective for wear and damage.

Reverse brake piston defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Valve body assembly defective tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Joint pipes defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Vibration in all Engine output low Adjust the engine output.
positions/modes
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
Torque converter assembly defective
it and also check the related part of the input shaft
Torque converter ring gear worn or assembly for wear and damage.
damaged
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
Transmission assembly and drive plate damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
installation defective damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Excessive idle vibration TCM defective Adjust the engine output
in R, D, S*1, or L*1 Engine output low Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
positions/modes shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
transmission housing assembly.
damaged
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
Forward clutch defective
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Reverse brake defective Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Reverse brake piston defective If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
it and also check the related part of the input shaft
Thrust washer on planetary carrier assembly for wear and damage.
assembly seized, worn, or damaged
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Valve body assembly defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
Joint pipes defective damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged
of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Torque converter assembly defective reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Torque converter ring gear worn or and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Transmission assembly and drive plate
installation defective Check the thrust washer on the planetary carrier
assembly for seize, wear, and damage. If the thrust
washer is seized, worn, or damaged, replace it and
adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Excessive idle vibration TCM defective Adjust the engine output.
in N and P
Engine output low Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
positions/modes
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Forward clutch defective
tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Reverse brake defective If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
Reverse brake piston defective it and also check the related part of the input shaft
assembly for wear and damage.
Torque converter assembly defective
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Torque converter ring gear worn or the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damaged damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Transmission assembly and drive plate brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
installation defective of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Noise from transmission Forward clutch defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
in N and P plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
positions/modes tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Reverse brake defective
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Reverse brake piston defective If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
Thrust needle bearing or thrust shim on it and also check the related part of the input shaft
input shaft assembly seized, worn, or assembly for wear and damage.
damaged Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Planetary carrier assembly worn or the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damaged damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Sun gear worn or damaged of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Ring gear worn or damaged reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Thrust needle bearing or thrust washer on
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
planetary carrier assembly seized, worn,
brake end-plate.
or damaged
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust shim on
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or
the input shaft assembly for seize, wear, and damage. If
foreign material in transmission fluid pump
the thrust needle bearing or the thrust shim are seized,
worn, or damaged, replace them and also check the
related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
damage.
Check the planetary carrier assembly for wear and
damage. If the planetary carrier assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it and also check the planetary carrier
pinion gears, the reverse brake, and the drive pulley
shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and
the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the ring gear for wear and damage. If the ring
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier assembly and the reverse brake for
wear and damage.
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washer
on the planetary carrier assembly for seize, wear, and
damage. If the thrust needle bearing or the thrust
washer are seized, worn, or damaged, replace them and
adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Noise from transmission Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
in D, S*1, or L*1 steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
positions/modes damaged and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
transmission housing assembly.
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Secondary drive/driven gear worn or
If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
damaged
it and also check the related part of the input shaft
Final driven gear worn or damaged assembly for wear and damage.
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and Check the secondary drive/driven gear for wear and
detent spring worn or damaged damage.
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft Check the final driven gear for wear and damage.
worn or damaged
Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
Parking pawl spring worn or damaged spring for wear and damage.
Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for
wear and damage. If the parking brake pawl or the
parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and
also check the park gear for wear and damage.
Check the parking pawl spring for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Noise from transmission Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
in R position/mode steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
damaged and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged transmission housing assembly.
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Reverse brake defective
If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
Reverse brake piston defective it and also check the related part of the input shaft
Spring retainer/return spring assembly assembly for wear and damage.
defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Secondary drive/driven gear worn or the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damaged damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Final driven gear worn or damaged of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Thrust needle bearing or thrust shim on reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
input shaft assembly seized, worn, or and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Planetary carrier assembly worn or
damaged Check the secondary drive/driven gear for wear and
damage.
Sun gear worn or damaged
Check the final driven gear for wear and damage.
Ring gear worn or damaged
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust shim on
Thrust needle bearing or thrust washer on
the input shaft assembly for seize, wear, and damage. If
planetary carrier assembly seized, worn,
the thrust needle bearing or the thrust shim are seized,
or damaged
worn, or damaged, replace them and also check the
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
detent spring worn or damaged damage.
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft Check the planetary carrier assembly for wear and
worn or damaged damage. If the planetary carrier assembly is worn or
Parking pawl spring worn or damaged damaged, replace it and also check the planetary carrier
pinion gears, the reverse brake, and the drive pulley
shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and
the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the ring gear for wear and damage. If the ring
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier assembly and the reverse brake for
wear and damage.
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washer
on the planetary carrier assembly for seize, wear, and
damage. If the thrust needle bearing or the thrust
washer are seized, worn, or damaged, replace them and
adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
spring for wear and damage.
Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for
wear and damage. If the parking brake pawl or the
parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and
also check the park gear for wear and damage.
Check the parking pawl spring for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Stall speed high TCM defective Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If
necessary, replace the transmission fluid (HCF-2).
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated
Forward clutch defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Reverse brake defective Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Reverse brake piston defective If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
it and also check the related part of the input shaft
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or assembly for wear and damage.
foreign material in transmission fluid pump
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Valve body assembly defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
Joint pipes defective damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Stator shaft worn or damaged
of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Torque converter assembly defective reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Torque converter ring gear worn or and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Transmission assembly and drive plate
installation defective Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Stall speed low TCM defective Adjust the engine output.
Engine output low Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Joint pipes defective Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
Torque converter assembly defective
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Torque converter ring gear worn or
damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate
installation defective
Judder when starting off Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If
necessary, replace the transmission fluid (HCF-2).
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF
warmer strainer clogged Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
foreign material in transmission fluid pump strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
damaged components that caused debris.
Valve body assembly defective
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Joint pipes defective damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Shift lever does not Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
operate smoothly out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment control lever.
Control pin broken Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and spring for wear and damage.
detent spring worn or damaged Check the control lever for wear and damage.
Control lever worn or damaged Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for
wear and damage. If the parking brake pawl or the
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft
worn or damaged parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and
also check the park gear for wear and damage.
Manual valve worn or damaged
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Transmission will not TCM defective Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
shift into P shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
position/mode, or and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
transmission cannot shift transmission housing assembly.
damaged
out of P position/mode
Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
control lever.
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment
Control pin broken Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
spring for wear and damage.
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and
Check the control lever for wear and damage.
detent spring worn or damaged
Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for
Control lever worn or damaged
wear and damage. If the parking brake pawl or the
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and
worn or damaged also check the park gear for wear and damage.
Park gear worn or damaged Check the park gear for wear and damage.
Parking pawl spring worn or damaged Check the parking pawl spring for wear and damage.
Manual valve worn or damaged Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Torque converter clutch Shift solenoid valve B defective Inspect shift solenoid valve B.
does not disengage;
CVT lock-up clutch control solenoid valve Inspect the CVT lock-up clutch control solenoid valve.
engine stalls easily
defective Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
Torque converter clutch piston defective damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Valve body assembly defective
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Auto idle stop system TCM defective Check the CVT speed sensor for wear and damage, and
does not operate also check the O-ring for wear and damage.
CVT speed sensor defective
Inspect the auxiliary transmission fluid pump. If
Auxiliary transmission fluid pump worn,
necessary, bleed the air of the auxiliary transmission
binding, foreign material in transmission
fluid pump.
fluid pump, or insufficiency of air bleeding
Transmission fluid temperature sensor Inspect the transmission fluid temperature sensor.
defective
*1: Without paddle shifter
CVT System Symptom Troubleshooting Index

NOTE: Do an all DTC check with the HDS, and troubleshoot any DTCs first before following the
repair procedures listed in the index.

Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes

With the vehicle in the F-CAN communication line error Check the F-CAN communication line (Without ACC).
ON mode, the shift
Gauge control module defective Check the F-CAN communication system (With ACC).
position indicator
displays an improper TCM defective Check the F-CAN communication line by using the
indication, or it never Transmission range switch defective or gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
displays at all out of adjustment Inspect the transmission range switch.
Transmission range switch circuit Inspect the open or short in the wire between the TCM
and transmission range switch.
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment
Control pin broken Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
control lever.
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and
detent spring worn or damaged Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
spring for wear and damage.
Shift lever cannot be Shift lock solenoid defective Test the shift lock solenoid.
moved from P
position/mode while Shift lock solenoid control circuit Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit.
pressing on the brake Shift lock mechanism defective Inspect the transmission range switch.
pedal
Transmission range switch defective Inspect the APP sensor signal.
Transmission range switch circuit Check the throttle body.
Brake pedal position switch circuit
Brake pedal position switch defective
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
Accelerator pedal position sensor
defective
Throttle body defective
When you press the A problem in the paddle shifter circuit Troubleshoot the paddle shifter circuit.
paddle shifter, the
Paddle shifter defective Test the paddle shifter.
transmission does not
upshift/downshift (With TCM defective
paddle shifter)
M indicator does not F-CAN communication line error Check the F-CAN communication line (Without ACC).
come on even though
the paddle shifter is Gauge control module defective Check the F-CAN communication system (With ACC).
operated in the S-paddle TCM defective Check the F-CAN communication line by using the
shift mode. (With paddle gauge control module self-diagnostic function.
shifter)
HDS does not DLC circuit error Troubleshoot the TCM communication circuit.
communicate with the
TCM defective Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
TCM
Engine does not start Shift cable broken or out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
control lever.
Control pin broken
Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
out of adjustment Inspect the drive plate for wear and damage. If the drive
plate is worn or damaged, replace it.
Drive plate worn or damaged
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
Torque converter assembly defective
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate
installation defective
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Engine runs, but vehicle Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
does not move in any
Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
positions/modes
out of adjustment Adjust the engine output.
Engine output low Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
warmer strainer clogged strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
damaged components that caused debris.
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
damaged shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
transmission housing assembly.
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
Secondary drive/driven gear worn or for wear and damage.
damaged
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Final driven gear worn or damaged If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
Sun gear worn or damaged it and also check the related part of the input shaft
assembly for wear and damage.
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and
detent spring worn or damaged Check the secondary drive/driven gear for wear and
damage.
Control lever worn or damaged
Check the final driven gear for wear and damage.
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft
worn or damaged Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
Manual valve worn or damaged planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
foreign material in transmission fluid pump Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
Transmission fluid pump drive chain or spring for wear and damage.
transmission fluid pump drive/driven Check the control lever for wear and damage.
sprocket worn or damaged
Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for
Valve body assembly defective wear and damage. If the parking brake pawl or the
Joint pipes defective parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and
also check the park gear for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Torque converter assembly defective
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Torque converter ring gear worn or
damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Transmission assembly and drive plate Check the transmission fluid pump drive chain and the
installation defective transmission fluid pump drive/driven sprocket for wear
and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Vehicle does not move in Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
D, S*1, or L*1 out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
positions/modes Shift cable broken or out of adjustment control lever.
Control pin broken Adjust the engine output.
Engine output low Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
Forward clutch defective plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Reverse brake piston defective
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Sun gear worn or damaged the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
Manual valve worn or damaged damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Valve body assembly defective of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Stator shaft worn or damaged reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and
the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Vehicle does not move in Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
R position/mode out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment control lever.
Control pin broken Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Reverse brake defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Reverse brake piston defective brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Planetary carrier assembly worn or of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
damaged reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Sun gear worn or damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
Ring gear worn or damaged brake end-plate.
Thrust needle bearing or thrust washer on Check the planetary carrier assembly for wear and
planetary carrier assembly seized, worn, damage. If the planetary carrier assembly is worn or
or damaged damaged, replace it and also check the planetary carrier
pinion gears, the reverse brake, and the drive pulley
Manual valve worn or damaged shaft splines for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective
Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun
Stator shaft worn or damaged gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and
the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the ring gear for wear and damage. If the ring
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier assembly and the reverse brake for
wear and damage.
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washer
on the planetary carrier assembly for seize, wear, and
damage. If the thrust needle bearing or the thrust
washer are seized, worn, or damaged, replace them and
adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Engine stalls when Engine output low Adjust the engine output.
shifted to D
Reverse brake defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
position/mode from N
position/mode Reverse brake piston defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Torque converter assembly defective brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Torque converter ring gear worn or of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
damaged reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Transmission assembly and drive plate If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
installation defective brake end-plate.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Engine stalls when Engine output low Adjust the engine output.
shifted to R
position/mode from N Forward clutch defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
position/mode Planetary carrier assembly worn or plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
damaged tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.

Thrust needle bearing or thrust washer on Check the planetary carrier assembly for wear and
planetary carrier assembly seized, worn, damage. If the planetary carrier assembly is worn or
or damaged damaged, replace it and also check the planetary carrier
pinion gears, the reverse brake, and the drive pulley
Torque converter assembly defective shaft splines for wear and damage.
Torque converter ring gear worn or Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washer
damaged on the planetary carrier assembly for seize, wear, and
Transmission assembly and drive plate damage. If the thrust needle bearing or the thrust
installation defective washer are seized, worn, or damaged, replace them and
adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
No shift to higher or TCM defective Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
lower ratio
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
warmer strainer clogged strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
damaged components that caused debris.
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
damaged
and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective transmission housing assembly.
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
foreign material in transmission fluid pump for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Poor acceleration TCM defective Check the CVT drive pulley speed sensor for wear and
CVT drive pulley speed sensor defective damage, and also check the O-ring for wear and
damage.
Engine output low
Adjust the engine output.
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
damaged shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective transmission housing assembly.
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
foreign material in transmission fluid pump for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Joint pipes defective damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Torque converter assembly defective
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Torque converter ring gear worn or
damaged Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Transmission assembly and drive plate Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
installation defective damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Engine revs up TCM defective Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
abnormally high while shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
driving, and no and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
acceleration steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
transmission housing assembly.
damaged
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
for wear and damage.
Forward clutch defective
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
Reverse brake defective plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Reverse brake piston defective tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.

Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
foreign material in transmission fluid pump the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Transmission fluid pump drive chain or brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
transmission fluid pump drive/driven of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
sprocket worn or damaged reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Valve body assembly defective and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
Joint pipes defective
brake end-plate.
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Stator shaft worn or damaged damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the transmission fluid pump drive chain and the
transmission fluid pump drive/driven sprocket for wear
and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Excessive shock when TCM defective Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
accelerating and
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If
decelerating
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated necessary, replace the transmission fluid (HCF-2).
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
damaged
transmission housing assembly.
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
Forward clutch defective for wear and damage.
Reverse brake defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
Reverse brake piston defective plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Valve body assembly defective
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Joint pipes defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
Stator shaft worn or damaged damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Torque converter assembly defective
of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Torque converter ring gear worn or reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
damaged and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Transmission assembly and drive plate If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
installation defective brake end-plate.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
No engine braking TCM defective Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
transmission housing assembly.
damaged
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Joint pipes defective
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Vehicle does not creep TCM defective Check the CVT drive pulley speed sensor for wear and
on a flat road in D, S*1, CVT drive pulley speed sensor defective
damage, and also check the O-ring for wear and
or L*1 positions/modes damage.
Engine output low
Adjust the engine output.
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level
Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF
warmer strainer clogged Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or damaged components that caused debris.
damaged
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
foreign material in transmission fluid pump transmission housing assembly.
Valve body assembly defective Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
for wear and damage.
Joint pipes defective
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
Stator shaft worn or damaged damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Torque converter assembly defective Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Torque converter ring gear worn or Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
damaged Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Transmission assembly and drive plate Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
installation defective
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Vehicle moves in N Forward clutch defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
position/mode, shift plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
cable is properly Reverse brake defective
tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
adjusted Reverse brake piston defective
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Spring retainer/return spring assembly the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
defective damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Thrust needle bearing on input shaft brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
assembly seized, worn, or damaged of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Manual valve worn or damaged and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Stator shaft worn or damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Check the thrust needle bearing on the input shaft
assembly for seize, wear, and damage. If the thrust
needle bearing is seized, worn, or damaged, replace it
and also check the related part of the input shaft
assembly for wear and damage.
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Late shift after shifting to TCM defective Check the torque converter turbine speed sensor for
D position/mode from N wear and damage, and also check the O-ring for wear
Torque converter turbine speed sensor
position/mode, and and damage.
defective
return to N position/mode
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.

Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.

out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment control lever.
Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Control pin broken
warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
warmer strainer clogged damaged components that caused debris.
Forward clutch defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
Manual valve worn or damaged plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Valve body assembly defective
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Joint pipes defective
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Late shift after shifting to TCM defective Check the torque converter turbine speed sensor for
R position/mode from N wear and damage, and also check the O-ring for wear
position/mode, and Torque converter turbine speed sensor
defective and damage.
return to N position/mode
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Inspect the transmission range switch.
Transmission range switch defective or
out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
control lever.
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment
Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Control pin broken
warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
warmer strainer clogged damaged components that caused debris.
Reverse brake defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Reverse brake piston defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Manual valve worn or damaged brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Valve body assembly defective of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Joint pipes defective and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Stator shaft worn or damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Unstable engine speed TCM defective Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated necessary, replace the transmission fluid (HCF-2).

Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
warmer strainer clogged
strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, damaged components that caused debris.
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
damaged
shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
Forward clutch defective transmission housing assembly.
Reverse brake defective Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
for wear and damage.
CVT drive pulley pressure control
solenoid valve defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
CVT driven pulley pressure control tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
solenoid valve defective
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
CVT clutch pressure control solenoid the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
valve defective damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
CVT lock-up clutch control solenoid valve brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
defective of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Shift solenoid valve B defective
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Shift solenoid valve O/P defective If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or brake end-plate.
foreign material in transmission fluid pump Inspect the CVT solenoid valve.
Valve body assembly defective Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Joint pipes defective damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Torque converter assembly defective
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Torque converter ring gear worn or
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
damaged
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
Transmission assembly and drive plate
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
installation defective
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Excessive shock when TCM defective Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
starting off
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If
necessary, replace the transmission fluid (HCF-2).
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated
Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF
warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
warmer strainer clogged
strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective damaged components that caused debris.
Forward clutch defective Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring
Reverse brake defective for wear and damage.

Reverse brake piston defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Valve body assembly defective tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Joint pipes defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Vibration in all Engine output low Adjust the engine output.
positions/modes
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
Torque converter assembly defective
it and also check the related part of the input shaft
Torque converter ring gear worn or assembly for wear and damage.
damaged
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
Transmission assembly and drive plate damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
installation defective damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Excessive idle vibration TCM defective Adjust the engine output
in R, D, S*1, or L*1 Engine output low Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
positions/modes shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
transmission housing assembly.
damaged
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
Forward clutch defective
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Reverse brake defective Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Reverse brake piston defective If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
it and also check the related part of the input shaft
Thrust washer on planetary carrier assembly for wear and damage.
assembly seized, worn, or damaged
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Valve body assembly defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
Joint pipes defective damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged
of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Torque converter assembly defective reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Torque converter ring gear worn or and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Transmission assembly and drive plate
installation defective Check the thrust washer on the planetary carrier
assembly for seize, wear, and damage. If the thrust
washer is seized, worn, or damaged, replace it and
adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Excessive idle vibration TCM defective Adjust the engine output.
in N and P
Engine output low Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
positions/modes
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Forward clutch defective
tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Reverse brake defective If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
Reverse brake piston defective it and also check the related part of the input shaft
assembly for wear and damage.
Torque converter assembly defective
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Torque converter ring gear worn or the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damaged damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
Transmission assembly and drive plate brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
installation defective of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Noise from transmission Forward clutch defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
in N and P plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
positions/modes tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Reverse brake defective
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Reverse brake piston defective If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
Thrust needle bearing or thrust shim on it and also check the related part of the input shaft
input shaft assembly seized, worn, or assembly for wear and damage.
damaged Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Planetary carrier assembly worn or the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damaged damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Sun gear worn or damaged of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Ring gear worn or damaged reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
Thrust needle bearing or thrust washer on
If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
planetary carrier assembly seized, worn,
brake end-plate.
or damaged
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust shim on
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or
the input shaft assembly for seize, wear, and damage. If
foreign material in transmission fluid pump
the thrust needle bearing or the thrust shim are seized,
worn, or damaged, replace them and also check the
related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
damage.
Check the planetary carrier assembly for wear and
damage. If the planetary carrier assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it and also check the planetary carrier
pinion gears, the reverse brake, and the drive pulley
shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and
the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the ring gear for wear and damage. If the ring
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier assembly and the reverse brake for
wear and damage.
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washer
on the planetary carrier assembly for seize, wear, and
damage. If the thrust needle bearing or the thrust
washer are seized, worn, or damaged, replace them and
adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Noise from transmission Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
in D, S*1, or L*1 steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
positions/modes damaged and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
transmission housing assembly.
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Secondary drive/driven gear worn or
If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
damaged
it and also check the related part of the input shaft
Final driven gear worn or damaged assembly for wear and damage.
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and Check the secondary drive/driven gear for wear and
detent spring worn or damaged damage.
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft Check the final driven gear for wear and damage.
worn or damaged
Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
Parking pawl spring worn or damaged spring for wear and damage.
Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for
wear and damage. If the parking brake pawl or the
parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and
also check the park gear for wear and damage.
Check the parking pawl spring for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Noise from transmission Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
in R position/mode steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
damaged and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged transmission housing assembly.
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Reverse brake defective
If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
Reverse brake piston defective it and also check the related part of the input shaft
Spring retainer/return spring assembly assembly for wear and damage.
defective Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Secondary drive/driven gear worn or the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
damaged damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Final driven gear worn or damaged of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Thrust needle bearing or thrust shim on reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
input shaft assembly seized, worn, or and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Planetary carrier assembly worn or
damaged Check the secondary drive/driven gear for wear and
damage.
Sun gear worn or damaged
Check the final driven gear for wear and damage.
Ring gear worn or damaged
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust shim on
Thrust needle bearing or thrust washer on
the input shaft assembly for seize, wear, and damage. If
planetary carrier assembly seized, worn,
the thrust needle bearing or the thrust shim are seized,
or damaged
worn, or damaged, replace them and also check the
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
detent spring worn or damaged damage.
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft Check the planetary carrier assembly for wear and
worn or damaged damage. If the planetary carrier assembly is worn or
Parking pawl spring worn or damaged damaged, replace it and also check the planetary carrier
pinion gears, the reverse brake, and the drive pulley
shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and
the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the ring gear for wear and damage. If the ring
gear is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the
planetary carrier assembly and the reverse brake for
wear and damage.
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washer
on the planetary carrier assembly for seize, wear, and
damage. If the thrust needle bearing or the thrust
washer are seized, worn, or damaged, replace them and
adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
spring for wear and damage.
Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for
wear and damage. If the parking brake pawl or the
parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and
also check the park gear for wear and damage.
Check the parking pawl spring for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Stall speed high TCM defective Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If
necessary, replace the transmission fluid (HCF-2).
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated
Forward clutch defective Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-
plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out of
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Reverse brake defective Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage.
Reverse brake piston defective If the input shaft assembly is worn or damaged, replace
it and also check the related part of the input shaft
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or assembly for wear and damage.
foreign material in transmission fluid pump
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check
Valve body assembly defective the spring retainer/return spring assembly for wear and
Joint pipes defective damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse
brake end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance is out
Stator shaft worn or damaged
of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
Torque converter assembly defective reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs
Torque converter ring gear worn or and plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set.
damaged If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse
brake end-plate.
Transmission assembly and drive plate
installation defective Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Stall speed low TCM defective Adjust the engine output.
Engine output low Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Joint pipes defective Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
Torque converter assembly defective
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Torque converter ring gear worn or
damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate
installation defective
Judder when starting off Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If
necessary, replace the transmission fluid (HCF-2).
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF
warmer strainer clogged Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or warmer strainer for debris. If the transmission fluid
foreign material in transmission fluid pump strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the
damaged components that caused debris.
Valve body assembly defective
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and
Joint pipes defective damage. If the transmission fluid pump is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
 Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Shift lever does not Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
operate smoothly out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment control lever.
Control pin broken Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and spring for wear and damage.
detent spring worn or damaged Check the control lever for wear and damage.
Control lever worn or damaged Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for
wear and damage. If the parking brake pawl or the
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft
worn or damaged parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and
also check the park gear for wear and damage.
Manual valve worn or damaged
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Transmission will not TCM defective Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley
shift into P shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related parts for wear
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft,
position/mode, or and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the
steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
transmission cannot shift transmission housing assembly.
damaged
out of P position/mode
Transmission range switch defective or Inspect the transmission range switch.
out of adjustment Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
control lever.
Shift cable broken or out of adjustment
Control pin broken Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent
spring for wear and damage.
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and
Check the control lever for wear and damage.
detent spring worn or damaged
Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for
Control lever worn or damaged
wear and damage. If the parking brake pawl or the
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and
worn or damaged also check the park gear for wear and damage.
Park gear worn or damaged Check the park gear for wear and damage.
Parking pawl spring worn or damaged Check the parking pawl spring for wear and damage.
Manual valve worn or damaged Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Valve body assembly defective Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Stator shaft worn or damaged Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Torque converter clutch Shift solenoid valve B defective Inspect shift solenoid valve B.
does not disengage;
CVT lock-up clutch control solenoid valve Inspect the CVT lock-up clutch control solenoid valve.
engine stalls easily
defective Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and
Torque converter clutch piston defective damage. If the torque converter assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Valve body assembly defective
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
*1: Without paddle shifter
CVTF Warmer Hose Removal and Installation

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Check the connector for corrosion, dirt, or oil, and clean or repair if necessary.

1
 3.

4.

Detailed information, notes and precautions

1. Engine Coolant - Drain

2. Air Cleaner - Remove

NOTE: Remove the necessary part(s).

3. Connector (Solenoid Wire Harness A) - Cover

 NOTE: To prevent damage, cover the connector located under
the CVTF warmer using a shop towel.

4. CVTF Warmer Hose - Disconnect

NOTE: When disconnecting/connecting the hoses, do not

A bend the warmer pipes excessively, or they will be damaged or
deformed.

Note for installation

1. Connect the CVTF warmer inlet hose and outlet hose to

each bulge of the CVTF warmer lines by aligning the paint
marks (A) on the lines with the paint marks (B) on the hose
C ends.

2. Secure the CVTF warmer hoses with the clamps (C).

C
B NOTE: When securing the clamps, make sure they do not
interfere with the surrounding parts.

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

CVTF Warmer Removal and Installation

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
Apply a light coat of clean transmission fluid on all O-rings before installation.
Make sure the O-rings are firmly installed in the grooves.
Check the connector for corrosion, dirt, or oil, and clean or repair if necessary.

1
 3.

6.

4.

5.
27 (2.8, 20)

Detailed information, notes and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
 Replace

1. Engine Coolant - Drain

2. Air Cleaner - Remove

 NOTE: Remove the necessary part(s).

3. Connector (Solenoid Wire Harness A) - Cover

NOTE: To prevent damage, cover the connector located under

the CVTF warmer using a shop towel.

4. CVTF Warmer Hose - Disconnect

NOTE: When disconnecting/connecting the hoses, do not

bend the warmer pipes excessively, or they will be damaged or
deformed.

5. CVTF Warmer - Remove

6. CVTF Warmer Strainer - Remove

1. Clean the CVTF warmer strainer if necessary. Replace the

CVTF warmer strainer, if it is clogged or damaged.

NOTE:
Do not use compressed air to clean the CVTF warmer
strainer.
Soak the CVTF warmer strainer thoroughly in
transmission fluid.

Note for installation

Make sure the CVTF warmer strainer is installed in the
correct direction.

7. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

8. Transmission Fluid Level - Check

Cylinder Head Assembly Component Location Index
 CYLINDER HEAD COVER
HEAD COVER GASKET Removal and Installation

CAM CHAIN
Removal and Installation
Inspection
CAM CHAIN CAM CHAIN
TENSIONER ARM GUIDE B

CAM CHAIN
AUTO-TENSIONER
FILTER

CAM CHAIN
AUTO-TENSIONER CAM CHAIN
Removal and Installation GUIDE

CHAIN CASE
COVER
O-RINGS

OIL PUMP
Removal and Installation
KEY

PULLEY END CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL

Replacement
CRANKSHAFT
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
PULLEY BOLT Removal and Installation
 CAMSHAFT HOLDERS

CMP SENSOR HOLDER

INTAKE CAMSHAFT
Removal and Installation
Inspection

CMP PULSE PLATE A

Removal and Installation

VTC ACTUATOR
Removal and Installation
CMP PULSE PLATE B
Removal and Installation

EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
Removal and Installation
Inspection

EXHAUST
ROCKER ARM

EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
SPROCKET
Removal and Installation HYDRAULIC TAPPET
Air Bleeding

INTAKE ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY

VTEC Rocker Arm Test
Valve Clearance Adjustment LOST MOTION
Removal and Installation
Rocker Arm and Shaft
Disassembly, Reassembly,
and Inspection
 VALVE COTTERS VALVE COTTERS
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS
SPRING
RETAINER
SPRING RETAINER

OIL LEVEL EXHAUST VALVE

INTAKE VALVE OIL CONTROL SPRING
SPRING ORIFICE PIPE

INTAKE VALVE O-RING

SEAL
EXHAUST VALVE
SEAL

VALVE SPRING VALVE SPRING

SEAT SEAT

EXHAUST VALVE
GUIDE
INTAKE VALVE GUIDE
Valve Stem-to-Guide
Clearance Inspection
Replacement

INTAKE VALVE
CYLINDER HEAD
Engine Compression Inspection
Removal and Installation
Inspection for Warpage
Valve Seat Reconditioning
EXHAUST VALVE
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal
Removal and Installation
Inspection

CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

DOWEL PIN

COOLANT SEPARATOR DOWEL PIN

2/8/23, 1:35 AM Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations 3695

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations

Front Passenger's Compartment:

PASSENGER AIRBAG SRS WARNING PASSENGER AIRBAG

MODULE DANGER INFORMATION WARNING TAG
(CHILD SEAT)
USA models

PASSENGER'S KNEE AIRBAG

MODULE DANGER

DRIVER'S KNEE
AIRBAG MODULE
DANGER

SEAT BELT TENSIONER

WARNING
SIDE AIRBAG MODULE SRS UNIT
SEAT BELT OUTER LAP DANGER NOTICE
TENSIONER WARNING

Steering Wheel: Rear Passenger's Compartment:

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G003695_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 1:35 AM Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations 3695

ROOF-SIDE AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER

DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G003695_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 1:35 AM Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations 3695

Engine Compartment:

EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION and
ENGINE COOLANT
INFORMATION CVTF
(HCF-2)
AIR CONDITIONING NOTICE
INFORMATION USA models

12 VOLT
SUPPORT ROD RADIATOR CAP BATTERY
WARNING DANGER DANGER

Driver's Doorjamb:

TIRE INFORMATION

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G003695_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 1:35 AM Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations 3696

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations

Front Passenger's Compartment:

PASSENGER AIRBAG SRS WARNING

MODULE DANGER INFORMATION

PASSENGER'S KNEE AIRBAG

MODULE DANGER

DRIVER'S KNEE
AIRBAG MODULE
DANGER

SEAT BELT TENSIONER

WARNING
SIDE AIRBAG MODULE SRS UNIT
SEAT BELT OUTER LAP DANGER NOTICE
TENSIONER WARNING

Steering Wheel: Rear Passenger's Compartment:

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G003696_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 1:35 AM Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations 3696

ROOF-SIDE AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER

DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G003696_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 1:35 AM Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations 3696

Engine Compartment:

ENGINE COOLANT
INFORMATION

SUPPORT ROD 12 VOLT

WARNING RADIATOR CAP BATTERY
DANGER DANGER

Driver's Doorjamb:

TIRE INFORMATION

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G003696_enu 3/3
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations

NOTE: The following illustrations do not show all of the DANGER/WARNING/CAUTION labels for the hybrid systems. Refer to the
Service Precautions for more details.

Front Passenger's Compartment:

PASSENGER'S AIRBAG SRS WARNING PASSENGER AIRBAG

MODULE DANGER INFORMATION WARNING TAG
(CHILD SEAT)
USA models

PASSENGER'S KNEE AIRBAG

MODULE DANGER

DRIVER'S KNEE
AIRBAG MODULE
DANGER

SEAT BELT TENSIONER

WARNING
SIDE AIRBAG MODULE SRS UNIT
SEAT BELT OUTER LAP DANGER NOTICE
TENSIONER WARNING
Steering Wheel: Rear Passenger's Compartment:

ROOF-SIDE AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER

DRIVER'S AIRBAG
MODULE DANGER

Rear Seat Under Floor: Driver's Doorjamb:

HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY DISPOSAL

WARNING INFORMATION

HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY

DANGER DANGER TIRE INFORMATION

Engine Compartment:
 AIR CONDITIONING EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION INFORMATION and
ENGINE COOLANT
BATTERY INFORMATION
HANDLING
NOTICE and EXPANSION
BATTERY TANK CAP
DISPOSAL DANGER
INFORMATION

HIGH
VOLTAGE 12 VOLT
WARNING RADIATOR BATTERY
CAP DANGER DANGER
HIGH
SUPPORT ROD VOLTAGE
WARNING WARNING
2/8/23, 2:53 AM Dashboard Center Lower Cover Removal and Installation 2711

Dashboard Center Lower Cover Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002711_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:53 AM Dashboard Center Lower Cover Removal and Installation 2711

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002711_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:53 AM Dashboard Center Lower Cover Removal and Installation 2711

Fastener Locations
A :3 B :3 C :1 D :1

B
C

A
7. A

4.4 (0.45, 3.2)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. Center Console - Remove

2. Glove Box - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002711_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:53 AM Dashboard Center Lower Cover Removal and Installation 2711
3. Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover - Remove

4. Center Pocket - Remove

5. Dashboard Center Middle Trim - Remove

6. Meter Visor - Remove

7. Dashboard Center Lower Cover - Remove

8. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002711_enu 4/4
Dashboard Center Middle Trim Removal and Installation

1
Fastener Locations
: 16

3.
2

Fastener Locations
: 10
7.

5.

6.
1. Driver's Inner Dashboard Trim - Remove

2. Passenger's Outlet - Remove

3. Dashboard Center Middle Trim - Remove

4. Climate Control Panel - Remove

5. Driver's Side Molding - Remove

6. Passenger's Side Molding - Remove

7. Center Outlet - Remove

8. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Dashboard Center Pocket Removal and Installation

1
 Fastener Locations
:4

2.

* M/T
1. Center Console Panel - Remove

2. Center Pocket - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Dashboard Component Location Index
 METER VISOR
Removal and Installation
DASHBOARD CENTER MIDDLE TRIM
Removal and Installation
COLUMN COVER
DRIVER'S OUTLET Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation PASSENGER'S OUTLET
Removal and Installation

DRIVER'S
DASHBOARD SIDE COVER
Removal and Installation PASSENGER'S
DASHBOARD SIDE COVER
Removal and Installation
DRIVER'S DASHBOARD
LOWER COVER
Removal and Installation PASSENGER'S DASHBOARD
UNDERCOVER
Removal and Installation
DASHBOARD
CENTER POCKET
Removal and Installation
 DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER BEAM
Removal and Installation

DASHBOARD
DRIVER'S DASHBOARD Removal and Installation
MIDDLE TRIM
Removal and Installation
PASSENGER'S DASHBOARD
PANEL
DRIVER'S SIDE Removal and Installation
DEFOGGER VENT TRIM
Removal and Installation PASSENGER'S SIDE
DEFOGGER VENT TRIM
Removal and Installation

GLOVE BOX LOCK CYLINDER

(FOR SOME MODELS)
Removal and Installation
DRIVER'S DASHBOARD
OUTSIDE SWITCH TRIM
Removal and Installation GLOVE BOX
Removal and Installation
DRIVER'S INNER
DASHBOARD TRIM
Removal and Installation DASHBOARD
CENTER LOWER COVER
Removal and Installation
Dashboard Meter Visor Removal and Installation

1
 Fastener Locations
A :2 B :2 C :4

A C
B
B C
C
C

3.

1. Dashboard Center Middle Trim - Remove

2. Driver's Dashboard Middle Trim - Remove

3. Meter Visor - Remove

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

2/8/23, 2:53 AM Dashboard Removal and Installation 2721

Dashboard Removal and Installation

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures
before doing repairs or service.

1. 12 Volt Battery Terminal - Disconnect

NOTE: Wait at least 3 minutes before starting work.

2. Column Cover - Remove

3. Dashboard Center Lower Cover - Remove

4. Center Display Unit Assembly - Remove

5. Driver's Inner Dashboard Trim - Remove

6. Gauge Control Module - Remove

7. Both A-Pillar Trims - Remove

8. Sunlight Sensor - Remove

9. Front Seat Heater Control Unit - Remove

10.GPS Antenna - Remove

11. Front Passenger's Airbag Inflator Connector - Disconnect

1. Disconnect the connector, and detach the harness clips.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002721_enu 1/5
2/8/23, 2:53 AM Dashboard Removal and Installation 2721

12.Front Passenger's Airbag Bolt - Remove

1. Remove the bolt.

Fastener Location
:1

13.Dashboard - Remove

1. Detach the harness clips (A) and the connector clips (B).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002721_enu 2/5
2/8/23, 2:53 AM Dashboard Removal and Installation 2721

A
B
B

2. Release the tilt/telescopic lock lever, and adjust the steering column to the full tilt down, full telescopic out position.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002721_enu 3/5
2/8/23, 2:53 AM Dashboard Removal and Installation 2721

Fastener Locations
:9

4.4 (0.45, 3.2)

3. Remove the dashboard (A).

14.Front Defogger Vent Trim - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002721_enu 4/5
2/8/23, 2:53 AM Dashboard Removal and Installation 2721
1. If necessary, remove the front defogger vent trim (A).
Fastener Locations
:3
A

15.Head Up Display Trim - Remove (With head up display)

1. If necessary, remove the head up display trim (A).

Fastener Locations
:4 A

16.All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002721_enu 5/5
Dashboard Side Cover Removal and Installation

Driver's Dashboard Side Cover

 Fastener Locations

A :1 B :4 C :1

B
B
B

2. B

Passenger's Dashboard Side Cover

 Fastener Locations

:7

*
*

1.

* Mexico models
Driver's Dashboard Side Cover

1. Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover - Remove

2. Driver's Dashboard Side Cover - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Passenger's Dashboard Side Cover

1. Passenger's Dashboard Side Cover - Remove

2. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271

Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations and the precautions and procedures
before doing repairs or service.

1. 12 Volt Battery - Remove

NOTE: Remove the 12 volt battery for removing the special

bolt at the engine compartment side.

2. Cowl Cover - Remove

NOTE: Remove the cowl cover for removing the special bolt at
the engine compartment side.

3. Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover - Remove

4. Driver's Knee Airbag - Remove

5. Passenger's Dashboard Undercover - Remove

6. Both A-Pillar Trims - Remove

7. Both Kick Panels - Remove

8. Shift Lever - Remove (CVT)

9. Shift Lever Housing - Remove (M/T)

10.Rear Vent Front Duct - Remove (For Some Models)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 1/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271
11. Rear Vent Rear Duct - Remove (For Some Models)

12.Brake Pedal Position Switch – Remove

13.Steering Joint Cover - Remove

14.Steering Column - Lower

NOTE: The positions and number of connectors vary depending on model type.

1. Disconnect the connectors (A), and detach the harness clips (B).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 2/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271
A
B

C :2 D :2

D
D
E

C C

This illustration shows with steering lock.

2. Remove the bolts (C) and the nuts (D).

3. Lay the steering column (E) on the driver's floor.

NOTE:

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 3/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271
Wrap the part in a shop towel to avoid any damage to it prior to the removal.
Before the steering column is laid down on the floor, make sure that all the connectors and the clips are removed.
Be careful not to pull out the lower side from the steering shaft during working.

15.Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam - Remove

Harness

NOTE: The positions and number of connectors vary depending on model type.

1. Disconnect the connectors (A), and detach the clips (B).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 4/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271

A
A
B

A B

A
A

A
A
B
A
A
:1
A

A
B

A A
B

A
(Without rear vent duct)

9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 5/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271

Bolt

2. Remove the bolts (A, B, and C).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 6/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271

A :1 B :2 C :2 D :1

B
22 (2.2, 16)

A
22 (2.2, 16)

D C
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

3. Remove the bolt (D).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 7/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 8/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271

Special bolt

4. Remove the cap (A).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 9/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271

C :2

Engine Compartment Side

B, C

F G

5. Loosen the special bolts (B, C) until they disengage from the threads on the hanger beam brackets (D), and engage the
inside threads of the collar bolts (E). The thread lock on the special bolts makes the special bolts and the collar bolts turn
together.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 10/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 11/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271
6. Continue to loosen the special bolts to turn the collar bolts into the fixed space adjusters (F) until the collar bolts engage the
adjuster brackets. This creates a gap (G) between the collar bolts and the body.

7. Remove the special bolts.

8. Check that the collar bolts (A) are seated in the fixed space adjusters (B).

NOTE:
If either collar bolt was not seated, replace the special bolts.
If necessary, use hex wrench through the mounting hole to engage and seat the collar bolt into the hanger beam.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 12/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271

B
A

Engine Compartment Side

B A

9. Lift up the dashboard/steering hanger beam (A) to release it from the guide pins (B) on the body.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 13/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271

B B

10. Carefully remove the dashboard/steering hanger beam through the front door opening.

16.All Removed Parts - Install

Special Bolt Tightening 1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 14/15
2/8/23, 2:54 AM Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal and Installation 3271
NOTE:
A
Before reinstalling the dashboard, screw the special
bolt (A) into the collar bolts (B), and check that they turn
together. If they do not turn together, replace the
special bolts.
Before reinstalling the dashboard, be sure the collar
bolt on the passenger's side and the engine
C B compartment side can be screwed/unscrewed lightly by
hand, and then screw them into the space adjuster (C)
B
A fully by hand. Do not tighten them with any tools.
After setting the dashboard in the body, reinstall all of
the mounting bolts but do not tighten them. First tighten
the driver's side mounting bolts to the specified torque.
Next, tighten the special bolts. As you tighten the bolts,
the collar bolts screw out of the space adjuster until
they contact the body. Continue tightening the special
C bolts to the specified torque.
B

A
22 (2.2, 16)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003271_enu 15/15
2/8/23, 2:42 AM Dashlights Brightness Control Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3358

Dashlights Brightness Control Switch Removal, Installation, and Test

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003358_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:42 AM Dashlights Brightness Control Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3358

2.

1. Driver's Dashboard Outside Switch Trim - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003358_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:42 AM Dashlights Brightness Control Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3358

2. Dashlights Brightness Control Switch - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. Dashlights Brightness Control Switch - Test

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003358_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:42 AM Dashlights Brightness Control Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 3358
1. Check the dashlights brightness control switch (A)
according to the table.

NOTE:
When an LED is located between terminals, check if
A the LED illuminates by connecting power and ground to
the LED.
Note this important operating characteristic; diode bias
causes a diode to fully conduct electricity in one
direction (forward), while not at all in the opposite
direction (reverse).
8P Type

2. If the result is not as specified, replace the dashlights

brightness control switch.

10P Type

8P Type

Terminal
7 4 5 6
Position/Illumination

TRIP pressed

Indicator
x3
― = Continuity check
― = Voltage for LED

10P Type

Terminal
9 5 6 7
Position/Illumination

TRIP pressed

Indicator
x3
― = Continuity check
― = Voltage for LED

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003358_enu 4/4
Design Specifications

Item Measurement Qualification Specification

ELECTRIC Motor Type DC brushless-3 phases
POWERTRAIN Battery Type 3.6 V Li-ion
Number 72 (36 cells × 2 modules)
Output 259.2 V
GEAR Type e-CVT
Gear ratio 2.454
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 3.421
STEERING Type Rack and pinion with electrical power-assisted
Overall ratio 17 inch wheels 11.77
19 inch wheels 11.82
Turns, lock-to-lock 2.30
Steering wheel diameter 374 mm (14.72 in)
SUSPENSION Type Front MacPherson strut with stabilizer, coil spring
Rear Independent multilink with stabilizer, coil spring
Shock absorber Front and rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
TIRES Size See tire information label attached to driver's doorjamb.
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Electrical parking brake
AIR CONDITIONING Compressor Type Scroll
Capacity 27.0 mL (1.65 cu in)/rev
Maximum speed 8,600 rpm
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Ferrite type
Motor type 235 W/12 V
Speed control Infinitely variable
Temperature control Air-mix type
 Item Measurement Qualification Specification
ELECTRICAL 12 volt battery 55B24R 12 V－47 Ah/20 HR (12 V－38 Ah/5 HR)
RATINGS Fuses Under-hood 150 A, 70 A, 60 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
fuse/relay box
Under-dash 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
fuse/relay box
Light bulbs Headlight low LED
beam
Headlight high 12 V－60 W (HB3)
beam LED
Front fog lights LED
Front LED
parking/daytime
running lights
Front side marker LED
lights
Front turn signal LED
lights
Side turn signal LED
lights
Rear turn signal 12 V－21 W
lights
Brake LED
lights/taillights
Inner taillights LED
Rear side marker LED
lights
High mount brake LED
light
Back-up lights 12 V－16 W
License plate light LED
Ceiling light 12 V－8 W
Front individual 12 V－8 W
map lights
Trunk light 12 V－5 W
Ambient light LED
Vanity mirror 14 V－1.4 W
lights
Door inner handle LED
lights
Console box light LED
Center pocket LED
light
Door courtesy 12 V－3.8 W
lights
2/8/23, 1:35 AM Design Specifications 5870
Design Specifications

Item Measurement Qualification Specification

CLUTCH Type Single plate dry, diaphragm spring
MANUAL Type Synchronized six-speed forward, one reverse
TRANSMISSION (1.5 Primary reduction Direct 1:1
L engine)
Gear ratio 1st 3.642
2nd 2.080
3rd 1.361
4th 1.023
5th 0.829
6th 0.686
Reverse 3.673
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.105
MANUAL Type Synchronized six-speed forward, one reverse
TRANSMISSION (2.0 Primary reduction Direct 1:1
L engine)
Gear ratio 1st 3.625
2nd 2.115
3rd 1.529
4th 1.125
5th 0.847
6th 0.686
Reverse 3.757
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 3.842
AUTOMATIC Type Electronically-controlled automatic, ten-speed forward, one-reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
(KA/KC)
Gear ratio 1st 5.246
2nd 3.271
3rd 2.185
4th 1.597
5th 1.304
6th 1.000
7th 0.782
8th 0.653
9th 0.581
10th 0.517
Reverse 3.974
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 3.550

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005870_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 1:35 AM Design Specifications 5870
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
AUTOMATIC Type Electronically-controlled automatic, ten-speed forward, one-reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
(KX)
Gear ratio 1st 5.246
2nd 3.270
3rd 2.184
4th 1.596
5th 1.303
6th 1.000
7th 0.781
8th 0.653
9th 0.580
10th 0.517
Reverse 3.973
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 3.550
CVT Type Electronically-controlled continuously variable transmission, multi plate wet sump,
hydraulic
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio Low－High 2.645－0.405
Reverse (KA/KC) 1.859－1.265
Reverse (KX) 1.857－1.264
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 3.238
STEERING (M/T, Type Rack and pinion with electrical power-assisted
A/T) Overall ratio 17 inch wheels 11.89
19 inch wheels 11.93
Turns, lock-to-lock 2.23
Steering wheel diameter 374 mm (14.72 in)
STEERING (CVT) Type Rack and pinion with electrical power-assisted
Overall ratio 17 inch wheels 11.77
19 inch wheels 11.82
Turns, lock-to-lock 2.30
Steering wheel diameter 374 mm (14.72 in)
SUSPENSION Type Front MacPherson strut with stabilizer, coil spring
Rear Independent multilink with stabilizer, coil spring
Shock absorber Front and rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
TIRES Size See tire information label attached to driver's doorjamb.
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Electrical parking brake

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005870_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 1:35 AM Design Specifications 5870
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
AIR CONDITIONING Compressor Type Variable capacity, swash plate type
Capacity 140.6 mL (8.57 cu in)/rev
Maximum speed 9,400 rpm
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Ferrite type
Motor type 235 W/12 V
Speed control Infinitely variable
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, poly V-ribbed belt drive
Electrical power 28 W maximum at 12 V
consumption at
68 °F (20 °C)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005870_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 1:35 AM Design Specifications 5870
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
ELECTRICAL 12 volt battery L2 12 V－60 Ah/20 HR (12 V－48 Ah/5 HR)
RATINGS LN2 (with auto 12 V－57 Ah/20 HR (12 V－48 Ah/5 HR)
idle stop system)
LN3 12 V－70 Ah/20 HR (12 V－56 Ah/5 HR)
Fuses Under-hood 125 A, 70 A, 60 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
fuse/relay box
Under-dash 20 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
fuse/relay box
Fuse/relay holder 15 A, 7.5 A
(with auto idle
stop system)
Light bulbs Headlight low LED
beam
Headlight high 12 V－60 W (HB3)
beam LED
Front fog lights LED
Front LED
parking/daytime
running lights
Front side marker LED
lights
Front turn signal LED
lights
Side turn signal LED
lights
Rear turn signal 12 V－21 W
lights
Brake LED
lights/taillights
Inner taillights LED
Rear side marker LED
lights
High mount brake LED
light
Back-up lights 12 V－16 W
License plate light LED
Ceiling light 12 V－8 W
Front individual 12 V－8 W
map lights
Trunk light 12 V－5 W
Ambient light LED
Vanity mirror 14 V－1.4 W
lights
Door inner handle LED
lights
Console box light LED
Center pocket LED
light
Door courtesy 12 V－3.8 W
lights

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005870_enu 4/4
Difficult to refuel (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Check the fuel vent tube between the EVAP canister and the fuel tank unit.
2. Check the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube between the fuel fill pipe and the fuel tank
unit..
3. Insert the emergency fuel funnel into the fuel filler neck, then check the operation of the
shut-off valve flap.
NOTE: The emergency fuel funnel is stored in the trunk tool box.
4. Replace the fuel tank.

Also check for

Malfunctioning gas station filling nozzle

Faulty fuel tank vapor control valve
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting

DLC Circuit Troubleshooting

NOTE: If you suspect the HDS or the HDS DLC cable may be the source of the communication
problem, verify that they are working properly by connecting them to a known-good vehicle and
system and checking for communication problems.
1. Fuse check 1:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Check the following fuse.

Fuse No. A14

Is the fuse OK?

YES Go to step 2.

NO Replace the No. A14 fuse. Also check for a short to ground on the No. A14 fuse
circuit if needed.■
2. Fuse check 2:

‐1. Check the following fuse.

Fuse No. A38

Is the fuse OK?

YES Go to step 3.

NO Replace the No. A38 fuse. Also check for a short to ground on the No. A38 fuse
circuit if needed.■
3. Open wire check (PG line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Remove the service plug.

‐3. Remove the IPU.

‐4. Remove the IPU cover and the IPU case.

‐5. Disconnect the following connector.

Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P)

‐6. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P): disconnected
Test point 1 Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P) No. 17
Test point 2 IPU ground (G801)

Is there continuity?

YES Go to step 4

NO Repair an open in the PG wire between the battery condition monitor module and
G801.■
4. Open wire check (IG1MONI line):

‐1. Remove the IPU harness from the IPU.

‐2. Reinstall the IPU harness, then reconnect the IPU harness 14P connector to the floor wire harness.

‐3. Do the 12 volt battery terminal reconnection procedure.

 ‐4. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐5. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle ON mode
Test point 1 Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P) No. 7
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there battery voltage?

YES Go to step 5

NO Repair an open in the IG1MONI wire between the No. A38 fuse and the battery
condition monitor module.■
5. Open wire check (IGAMONI line):

‐1. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle ON mode
Test point 1 Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P) No. 23
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there battery voltage?

YES Go to step 6

NO Go to step 8.

6. Open wire check (F-CAN D_H line, F-CAN D_L line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection procedure.

‐3. Disconnect the following connector.

CAN gateway 16P connector

‐4. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2 respectively.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
CAN gateway 16P connector: disconnected
Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P): disconnected
Test point 1 CAN gateway 16P connector (female terminals) No. 7:
Test point 2 Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P) No. 9

Test point 1 CAN gateway 16P connector (female terminals) No. 15:
Test point 2 Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P) No. 8

Is there continuity?
 YES Go to step 7.

NO Repair an open or poor connection in the F-CAN D_H wire or F-CAN D_L
between the CAN gateway and the battery condition monitor module.■
7. Shorted wire check (F-CAN D_H line, F-CAN D_L line):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2 respectively.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
CAN gateway 16P connector: disconnected
Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P): disconnected
Test point 1 Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P) No. 9
Test point 2 Body ground

Test point 1 Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P) No. 8

Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short in the F-CAN D_H wire or F-CAN D_L wire between the CAN
gateway and the battery condition monitor module.■
NO The F-CAN D wires are OK. Replace the battery condition monitor module.■

8. Relay check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Do the IG HLD1 relay circuit test.

Is the relay OK?

YES Go to step 9.

NO Replace the relay circuit board.■

9. Open wire check (+B IG HOLD1 line):

‐1. Disconnect the following connector.

Relay circuit board connector C (22P)

‐2. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Relay circuit board connector C (22P): disconnected
Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P): disconnected
Test point 1 Relay circuit board connector C (22P) No. 20:
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there battery voltage?

 YES Go to step 10.

NO Repair an open in the +B IG HOLD1 wire between the No. A14 fuse and the relay
circuit board (C20).■
10. Open wire check (IGA/IGAMONI line):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Relay circuit board connector C (22P): disconnected
Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P): disconnected
Test point 1 Relay circuit board connector C (22P) No. 14:
Test point 2 Battery condition monitor module connector E (32P) No. 23

Is there continuity?

YES Repair an open in the IGHLD wire between the relay circuit board (C15) and the
battery condition monitor module.■
NO Repair an open in the IGA/IGAMONI wire between the relay circuit board (C14)
and the battery condition monitor module.■
2/8/23, 2:27 AM Door Courtesy Light Removal and Installation 3395

1.

2.
*1

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

*1 Courtesy Light: 2 CP

1. Lens - Remove

NOTE: Carefully pry off the lens.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003395_enu 3/4
Door Inner Handle Light Removal and Installation

Front
 2. *1

*1 Door Inner Handle Light: LED

Rear
 2. *1

*1 Door Inner Handle Light: LED

Front

1. Front Door Panel - Remove

2. Front Door Inner Handle Light - Remove

3. All Parts Removed - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Rear

1. Rear Door Panel - Remove

2. Rear Door Inner Handle Light - Remove

3. All Parts Removed - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Door Switch Test

Front Door

1. Front Door Panel - Remove

2. Front Door Lock Actuator - Test

Driver's door 1. Disconnect the connector (A).

2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch

position according to the table.

3. If the continuity is not as specified, the door switch is faulty;

replace the front door latch (B).

Front passenger's door

B
 Driver's Door

Terminal
5 8
Operation
DOOR OPEN
DOOR CLOSE

Front Passenger's Door

Terminal
6 8
Operation
DOOR OPEN
DOOR CLOSE

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Rear Door

1. Rear Door Panel - Remove

2. Rear Door Lock Actuator - Test

1. Disconnect the connector (A).

2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch

position according to the table.
B

3. If the continuity is not as specified, the door switch is faulty;

replace the rear door latch (B).

A
 Left Rear Door

Terminal
9 10
Operation
DOOR OPEN
DOOR CLOSE

Right Rear Door

Terminal
5 6
Operation
DOOR OPEN
DOOR CLOSE

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

2/8/23, 1:43 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Air Bleeding 3006

Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Air Bleeding

1. Drive Belt - Remove

2. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner - Air Bleed

1. Attach a wrench to the drive belt auto-tensioner from under

the engine. Slowly (at least 3 seconds) compress the auto-
tensioner in the direction shown, the full length of its stroke,
then slowly (at least 3 seconds) move the auto-tensioner in
the opposite direction, the full length of its stroke. Repeat
this operation three times.

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003006_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Air Bleeding 3014

Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Air Bleeding

1. Drive Belt - Remove

2. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner - Air Bleed

1. Attach a wrench to the drive belt auto-tensioner from under

the engine. Slowly (at least 3 seconds) compress the auto-
tensioner in the direction shown, the full length of its stroke,
then slowly (at least 3 seconds) move the auto-tensioner in
the opposite direction, the full length of its stroke. Repeat
this operation three times.

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003014_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003005_enu 1/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003005_enu 2/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

2.
*1

2.
55 (5.6, 41)

2.
24 (2.4, 18)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
*1 These parts have inspection items.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003005_enu 3/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003005_enu 4/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003005_enu 5/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER

DAMPER BRACKET

4.
40 (4.1, 30)

3.
32 (3.3, 24)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. Drive Belt - Remove

2. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003005_enu 6/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

NOTE: Check for oil leaks from the drive belt auto-tensioner
damper and check for damage to the damper rubber.

3. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Damper - Remove

4. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Pulley - Remove

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE: Do the drive belt auto-tensioner air bleeding after

install the drive belt auto-tensioner.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003005_enu 7/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

1. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner - Position Check

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, and make sure to turn the
A/C switch OFF, then turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK)
mode.

2. Check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator

pointer (A).

3. Start the engine, then check the position again with the
engine idling. If the position of the indicator moves or
fluctuates a lot, do the auto-tensioner air bleeding, and
recheck. If the position is still fluctuates, replace the drive
belt auto-tensioner.

4. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley. If you

hear any abnormal noise, replace the drive belt auto-
tensioner.

2. Drive Belt - Remove

NOTE: After the drive belt is removed, remove the pin from the
drive belt auto-tensioner.

3. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner - Inspect

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003005_enu 8/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

1. Set a wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner, and slowly

turn the wrench in the direction of the arrow.

NOTE:
This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner, so you must
turn the wrench slowly for at least 3 seconds.
Check the belt for cracks or damage.
Check for oil leakage from the damper rubber bellows.
If the tensioner does not move smoothly, or you hear
abnormal noise, replace the drive belt auto-tensioner.

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003005_enu 9/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003013_enu 1/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003013_enu 2/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

2.
*1

2.
55 (5.6, 41)

2.
24 (2.4, 18)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
*1 These parts have inspection items.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003013_enu 3/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003013_enu 4/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003013_enu 5/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER

DAMPER BRACKET

4.
40 (4.1, 30)

3.
32 (3.3, 24)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. Drive Belt - Remove

2. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003013_enu 6/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

NOTE: Check for oil leaks from the drive belt auto-tensioner
damper and check for damage to the damper rubber.

3. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Damper - Remove

4. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Pulley - Remove

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE: Do the drive belt auto-tensioner air bleeding after

install the drive belt auto-tensioner.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003013_enu 7/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

1. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner - Position Check

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, and make sure to turn the
A/C switch OFF, then turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK)
mode.

2. Check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator

pointer (A).

3. Start the engine, then check the position again with the
engine idling. If the position of the indicator moves or
fluctuates a lot, do the auto-tensioner air bleeding, and
recheck. If the position is still fluctuates, replace the drive
belt auto-tensioner.

4. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley. If you

hear any abnormal noise, replace the drive belt auto-
tensioner.

2. Drive Belt - Remove

NOTE: After the drive belt is removed, remove the pin from the
drive belt auto-tensioner.

3. Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner - Inspect

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003013_enu 8/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Auto-Tensioner Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3005

1. Set a wrench on the drive belt auto-tensioner, and slowly

turn the wrench in the direction of the arrow.

NOTE:
This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner, so you must
turn the wrench slowly for at least 3 seconds.
Check the belt for cracks or damage.
Check for oil leakage from the damper rubber bellows.
If the tensioner does not move smoothly, or you hear
abnormal noise, replace the drive belt auto-tensioner.

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003013_enu 9/9
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3004

Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003004_enu 1/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3004

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003004_enu 2/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3004

3.
*1

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

*1 These parts have inspection items.

1. Right Front Wheel - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003004_enu 3/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3004

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003004_enu 4/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3004

3. Drive Belt - Remove

1. Attach a wrench to the drive belt auto-tensioner (A) and

A move it in the direction shown. Fix the drive belt auto-
tensioner by aligning the water passage hole with drive belt
auto-tensioner hole and inserting a 6 x 45 mm (15/64 x 1.77
in) pin (B) deep into the holes.

C
NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner, so you must
turn the wrench slowly.

2. Remove the drive belt (C).

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

5. Maintenance Minder - Reset (With Maintenance Minder System)

1. If the Maintenance Minder requires the drive belt to be

replaced, reset the Maintenance Minder with the gauge
(see "Resetting the Maintenance Minder").

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003004_enu 5/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3004

1. Drive Belt - Inspect

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003004_enu 6/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3004

1. Inspect the belt for cracks or damage. If the belt is cracked

or damaged, replace it.

2. Check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator

pointer (A) is within the standard range (B) as shown. If it is
out of the standard range, replace the drive belt.
B

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003004_enu 7/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3012

Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003012_enu 1/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3012

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003012_enu 2/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3012

3.
*1

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

*1 These parts have inspection items.

1. Right Front Wheel - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003012_enu 3/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3012

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

3. Drive Belt - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003012_enu 4/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3012

1. Attach a wrench to the drive belt auto-tensioner (A) and

C move it in the direction shown. Fix the drive belt auto-
tensioner by aligning the water passage hole with drive belt
auto-tensioner hole and inserting a 6 x 45 mm (15/64 x 1.77
in) pin (B) deep into the holes.

NOTE: This is a hydraulic type auto-tensioner, so you must

turn the wrench slowly for at least 3 seconds.

2. Remove the drive belt (C).

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

5. Maintenance Minder - Reset (With Maintenance Minder System)

1. If the Maintenance Minder requires the drive belt to be

replaced, reset the Maintenance Minder with the gauge
(see "Resetting the Maintenance Minder").

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003012_enu 5/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3012

1. Drive Belt - Inspect

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003012_enu 6/7
2/8/23, 1:44 AM Drive Belt Removal, Installation, and Inspection 3012

1. Inspect the belt for cracks or damage. If the belt is cracked

or damaged, replace it.

2. Check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner

indicator's pointer (A) is within the standard range (B) as
shown. If it is out of the standard range, replace the drive
belt.
C B
NOTE: When installing a new drive belt, check the position
A of the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator's pointer is within
the standard range (C) as shown.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003012_enu 7/7
Drive Plate Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 2.
74 (7.5, 55)

Detailed information, notes and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. Transmission (e-CVT) - Remove

2. Drive Plate - Remove

 Note for installation

Tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern in at least two steps.

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Drive Plate Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

1. Transmission - Remove

2. Drive Plate - Remove

1. Remove the drive plate (A) with the washer (B).

A

B
74 (7.5, 55)

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE: Tighten eight bolts in a crisscross pattern in at least

two steps.
Driver's Dashboard Outside Switch Trim Removal and Installation

1
Fastener Locations

:5

2.
1. Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover - Remove

2. Driver's Dashboard Outside Switch Trim - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Driver's Inner Dashboard Trim Removal and Installation

1
 Fastener Locations
:5

1.

2
 Fastener Locations
:3
2.

1. Driver's Inner Dashboard Trim - Remove

2. Switch Trim - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Driver's Outlet Removal and Installation

1
 Fastener Locations
:4

3.

1. Driver's Dashboard Outside Switch Trim - Remove

2. Driver's Dashboard Side Cover - Remove

3. Driver's Outlet - Remove

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index 945

Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index

For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram.

For the Keyless Access System, refer to Keyless Access System Component Location Index.

Without Remote Engine Starter With Remote Engine Stater

LOCK LOCK
BUTTON BUTTON

UNLOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON

REMOTE
Registration
Removal, Installation, and Test

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000945_enu 1/10
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index 945

(For driving position memory 1) (For driving position memory 2)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000945_enu 2/10
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index 945

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000945_enu 3/10
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index 945

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)

Removal and Installation

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (CVT)

Removal, Installation, and Test
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM)
(A/T)
Removal and Installation

Driver's Seat

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000945_enu 4/10
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index 945

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000945_enu 5/10
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index 945

RECLINE MOTOR/
POSITION SENSOR*
Test
Removal and Installation

SLIDE MOTOR/
POSITION SENSOR*
Test
Removal and Installation

REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR/

POSITION SENSOR*
Test
Removal and Installation

FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR/ POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT/

POSITION SENSOR* POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Test Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation Driving Position Memory Clear

*: Included in the seat frame assembly.

Driver's Door

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000945_enu 6/10
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index 945

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000945_enu 7/10
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index 945

DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SWITCH
Removal, Installation, and Test

POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH

(Has a built-in door multiplex control unit)
Removal, Installation, and Test

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000945_enu 8/10
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index 945

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000945_enu 9/10
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Component Location Index 945

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

Update
Removal and Installation

BODY CONTROL MODULE

Update
Removal and Installation

A/T model is shown, other models are similar.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G000945_enu 10/10
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System Description - Components 891

Driving Position Memory System Description - Components

Power Seat Control Unit/Power Seat Adjustment Switch

The power seat control unit/power seat adjustment switch is located on the recline cover. It combines the slide switch, the recline
switch, the front up/down switch, the rear up/down switch, and the control unit.

Power Seat Motors/Seat Position Sensors

Each motor has a sensor that detects motor rotation and sends a pulse to the power seat control unit when the motor rotates. The
control unit stores the number of pulses in its memory when the seat position is memorized.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000891_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System Description - System Diagram 890

Driving Position Memory System Description - System Diagram

For locations of each component on the vehicle, refer to the Component Location Index

Gauge Control Module

∙ Vehicle Wheel Speed B-CAN
Signal
∙ Customize Check Request
Signal
∙ Illumination Signal Gauge Control Module
B-CAN ∙ Customize Check
Body Control Module ∙ Response Signal
∙ Remote ID Signal Power
∙ Driver’s Door Switch Signal Seat
Control
∙ Smart Entry Signal Unit
∙ Keyless Lock/Unlock Signal
Power Window Master Switch
Driving Position ∙ Switch Illumination Signal Driving Position
Memory Switch ∙ Position Memory Indicator Memory Switch
Signal
Power Window Master Switch
∙ Door Lock Knob Signal
∙ Memory Switch Signal

Front Up/Down Front Up/Down Motor

Position Sensor

Rear Up/Down
Position Sensor Rear Up/Down Motor

Recline Position Sensor Recline Motor

Slide Position Sensor Slide Motor

TCM
∙ ATP-P Signal
A/T

Transmission Range Switch

∙ ATP-P Signal
CVT

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000890_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:50 AM Driving Position Memory System Description 889

Driving Position Memory System Description

Overview
The driving position memory system (DPMS) can store the driver's seat to one of two memorized presets. Drivers can activate the
system using the driving position memory switch or the remote.

Along with the seat, the power door lock settings will also be memorized based on which remote (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is used.

Memorizing a Seat Position

Turn the vehicle to the ON mode and move the seat to the desired position. Press the SET button on the driving position memory
switch. A single beep will be heard and both of the green LEDs will begin to flash. Press No. 1 or No. 2 to match the remote that is to
be used. There will be two more beeps confirming that the seat position have been memorized. The LED will remain lit, unless the
seat is moved from the memorized position.

Memorized Position Recall with the Remotes

When the driver's door is unlocked and opened, the driver's seat will move back and move to the memorized position once the vehicle
is turned to the ON mode. The green LED corresponding to that remote will then turn on and stay lit until the seat position is changed
or the vehicle is turned to the OFF (LOCK) mode. The seat will move back when the vehicle is turned to the OFF (LOCK) mode and
the driver's door is opened.

Memorized Customized Setting Recall with the Remotes

The customized setting is controlled independently by the remotes (Driver 1 and Driver 2).

Failsafe Function
When a failure occurs in the inputs of the power supply and B-CAN signals or an abnormality with the control unit occurs, the failsafe
function disables the driving position memory system function.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000889_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:32 AM DTC Troubleshooting: B1175 1362
DTC Troubleshooting: B1175

DTC B1175: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.

DTC Description DTC

B1175 Fuel level sensor (fuel gauge
sending unit) circuit malfunction

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. Problem verification:

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐3. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, and wait more than 30 seconds.

‐4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC
B1175 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge
sending unit) circuit malfunction

Is DTC B1175 indicated?

YES Go to step 2.

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.■
2. Open wire check (FUEL GAUGE+, FUEL GAUGE- lines):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001362_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:32 AM DTC Troubleshooting: B1175 1362

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)
Fuel tank unit 4P connector

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2 individually.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Fuel tank unit 4P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 8
Test point 2 Fuel tank unit 4P connector (female terminals) No. 2:

Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 9

Test point 2 Fuel tank unit 4P connector (female terminals) No. 4:

Is there continuity?

YES The FUEL GAUGE+ and FUEL GAUGE- wires are OK. Go to step 3.

NO Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.■

3. Fuel gauge sending unit check:

‐1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit.

Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?

YES Replace the gauge control module.■

NO Replace the fuel gauge sending unit .■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001362_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: B1176 1363
DTC Troubleshooting: B1176

DTC B1176: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Short
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.

DTC Description DTC

B1176 Fuel level sensor (fuel gauge
sending unit) circuit short

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. Problem verification:

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐3. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, and wait more than 30 seconds.

‐4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC
B1176 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge
sending unit) circuit short

Is DTC B1176 indicated?

YES Go to step 2.

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.■
2. Shorted wire check (FUEL GAUGE+ line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)
Fuel tank unit 4P connector

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001363_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: B1176 1363

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Fuel tank unit 4P connector: disconnected
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 8
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short to ground in the wire.■

NO The FUEL GAUGE+ wire is OK. Go to step 3.

3. Fuel gauge sending unit check:

‐1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit.

Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?

YES Replace the gauge control module.■

NO Replace the fuel gauge sending unit .■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001363_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: B1176 1363
DTC Troubleshooting: B1176

DTC B1176: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Short
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.

DTC Description DTC

B1176 Fuel level sensor (fuel gauge
sending unit) circuit short

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. Problem verification:

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐3. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, and wait more than 30 seconds.

‐4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC
B1176 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge
sending unit) circuit short

Is DTC B1176 indicated?

YES Go to step 2.

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.■
2. Shorted wire check (FUEL GAUGE+ line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)
Fuel tank unit 4P connector

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004415_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: B1176 1363

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Fuel tank unit 4P connector: disconnected
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 8
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short to ground in the wire.■

NO The FUEL GAUGE+ wire is OK. Go to step 3.

3. Fuel gauge sending unit check:

‐1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit.

Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?

YES Replace the gauge control module.■

NO Replace the fuel gauge sending unit .■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004415_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: B1193 4416
DTC Troubleshooting: B1193

DTC B1193: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with Steering Switch
(LIN BUS Connected)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.

DTC Description DTC

B1193 Gauge control module lost
communication with steering switch (LIN
bus connected)

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004416_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: B1193 4416
1. Problem verification:

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode and then the ON mode.

‐3. Wait for at least 4 seconds.

‐4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC
B1192 Gauge control module lost
communication with battery sensor ECU
(LIN bus connected)
B1193 Gauge control module lost
communication with steering switch (LIN
bus connected)

Is DTC B1192 and/or B1193 indicated?

YES: B1193 indicated Go to step 2.

YES: B1192 and B1193 indicated Go to step 6.

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check

for loose or poor connections.■
2. Fuse check:

‐1. Check the following fuse.

Fuse No. B43

Is the fuse OK?

YES Go to step 3.

NO Replace the fuse. If the fuse blows again, repair a short to ground in the No. B43
fuse circuit.■
3. Open wire check (+B line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connector.

Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector

‐3. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector No. 12
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there battery voltage?

YES The +B wire is OK. Go to step 4.

NO Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.■

4. Open wire check (STRG GND line):

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004416_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: B1193 4416

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector No. 7
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES The STRG GND wire is OK. Go to step 5.

NO Repair an open or high resistance in the ground wire or poor ground (G502).■

5. Open wire check (LIN(BATT SNSR)/STRG SW LIN line):

‐1. Disconnect the following connector.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)

‐2. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 4
Test point 2 Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector No. 10

Is there continuity?

YES LIN(BATT SNSR)/STRG SW LIN wire is OK. Replace the audio remote-HFL
switch.■
NO An open or poor connection in the LIN(BATT SNSR)/STRG SW LIN wire.■

6. Shorted wire check (LIN(BATT SNSR)/STRG SW LIN line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)
Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector
12 volt battery sensor 3P connector

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector: disconnected
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
12 volt battery sensor 3P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector No. 10
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short to ground in the LIN(BATT SNSR)/STRG SW LIN wire.■

NO The LIN(BATT SNSR)/STRG SW LIN wire is not shorted. Go to step 7.

7. Open wire check (LIN(BATT SNSR)/STRG SW LIN line):

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004416_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: B1193 4416

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector: disconnected
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
12 volt battery sensor 3P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 4
Test point 2 Audio remote-HFL switch 12P connector No. 10

Is there continuity?

YES LIN(BATT SNSR)/STRG SW LIN wire is OK. Replace the gauge control module.■

NO An open or poor connection in the LIN(BATT SNSR)/STRG SW LIN wire.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004416_enu 4/4
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U0029 1366
DTC Troubleshooting: U0029

DTC U0029: F-CAN Communication Line Error

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.

DTC Description DTC

U0029 F-CAN communication line error

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. DTC check (CAN gateway system):

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Check for CAN gateway system DTCs with the HDS.
DTC Description DTC

Are any DTCs indicated?

YES Go to the troubleshooting for CAN gateway system DTC(s).■

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001366_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U0029 1365
DTC Troubleshooting: U0029

DTC U0029: F-CAN Communication Line Error

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.

DTC Description DTC

U0029 F-CAN communication line error

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. Problem verification:

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode and then the ON mode.

‐3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.

‐4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC
U0029 F-CAN communication line error

Is DTC U0029 indicated?

YES Go to DLC Circuit Troubleshooting.■

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001365_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U0029 1366
DTC Troubleshooting: U0029

DTC U0029: F-CAN Communication Line Error

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.

DTC Description DTC

U0029 F-CAN communication line error

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. DTC check (CAN gateway system):

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Check for CAN gateway system DTCs with the HDS.
DTC Description DTC

Are any DTCs indicated?

YES Go to the troubleshooting for CAN gateway system DTC(s).■

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001368_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U0100, U0101, U0122, U0128, U0131, U0151 1367
DTC Troubleshooting: U0100, U0101, U0122, U0128, U0131, U0151

DTC U0100: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with ENG/AT

DTC U0101: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with AT
DTC U0122: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with VSA Modulator-
Control Unit
DTC U0128: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with EPB
DTC U0131: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with EPS Unit
DTC U0151: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with SRS Unit
NOTE:
If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.
According to the detected DTC(s), check for the power circuit and the ground circuit of
the control unit which cannot communicate with the gauge control module.
Refer to the DTC shown on the display, then inspect the connectors and terminals
based on the instructions.

DTC Description DTC

U0100 Gauge control module lost
communication with ENG/AT
U0101 Gauge control module lost
communication with AT
U0122 Gauge control module lost
communication with VSA modulator-
control unit
U0128 Gauge control module lost
communication with EPB
U0131 Gauge control module lost
communication with EPS Unit
U0151 Gauge control module lost
communication with SRS unit

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. Problem verification:

‐1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001367_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U0100, U0101, U0122, U0128, U0131, U0151 1367

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode and then the ON mode.

‐3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC
U0100 Gauge control module lost
communication with ENG/AT
U0101 Gauge control module lost
communication with AT
U0122 Gauge control module lost
communication with VSA modulator-
control unit
U0128 Gauge control module lost
communication with EPB
U0131 Gauge control module lost
communication with EPS Unit
U0151 Gauge control module lost
communication with SRS unit

Are any DTCs indicated?

YES The failure is duplicated. Go to step 2.

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or
loose terminals at the transmitting control units and the gauge control module.■
2. Open wire check (F-CAN A_H line, F-CAN A_L line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the receiving control unit connector.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)

‐3. U0100: Jump the SCS line with the HDS, and wait more than 1 minute.

SCS short
U0151: Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection procedure, and wait for at least 3 minutes.

‐4. According to the detected DTC on the following table, disconnect the transmitting control unit connector(s).
DTC Connector
U0100 PCM connector A (50P)
U0101 TCM 50P connector
U0122 VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
U0128
U0131 EPS control unit connector B (6P)
U0151 SRS unit connector A (43P)

‐5. Check for continuity between the receiving control unit and the transmitting control unit on the F-CAN A_H circuit and
the F-CAN A_L circuit.
Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Transmitting control unit connector(s) for indicated DTCs: disconnected

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001367_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U0100, U0101, U0122, U0128, U0131, U0151 1367

DTC Circuit name Receiving control unit Transmitting control unit

Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
U0100 F-CAN A_H Gauge control module No. 20 PCM connector A (50P) No. 37
F-CAN A_L connector A (32P) No. 21 No. 36
U0101 F-CAN A_H Gauge control module No. 20 TCM 50P connector No. 3
F-CAN A_L connector A (32P) No. 21 No. 11
U0122 F-CAN A_H Gauge control module No. 20 VSA modulator-control unit No. 20
U0128 F-CAN A_L connector A (32P) No. 21 46P connector No. 21
U0131 F-CAN A_H Gauge control module No. 20 EPS control unit connector B No. 4
F-CAN A_L connector A (32P) No. 21 (6P) No. 1
U0151 F-CAN A_H Gauge control module No. 20 SRS unit connector A (43P) No. 16
F-CAN A_L connector A (32P) No. 21 No. 17

Is there continuity?

YES The F-CAN A_H wire and the F-CAN A_L wire are OK.

According to the detected DTC on the following table, substitute or replace the control unit based on the
instructions (see table).■
DTC Operation for transmitting control unit
U0100 Substitute a known-good PCM, then recheck. If DTC U0100 goes away after substitution, replace
the original PCM.
U0101 Substitute a known-good TCM, then recheck. If DTC U0101 goes away after substitution, replace
the original TCM.
U0122 Replace the VSA modulator-control unit.
U0128
U0131 Replace the EPS control unit (steering gearbox assembly).
U0151 Substitute a known-good SRS unit, then recheck. If DTC U0151 goes away after substitution,
replace the original SRS unit.

NO Repair an open in the F-CAN A_H wire and/or the F-CAN A_L wire between the gauge control module and the
transmitting control unit.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001367_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U1280 1369
DTC Troubleshooting: U1280

DTC U1280: Communication Bus Line Error (BUS-OFF)

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.

DTC Description DTC

U1280 Communication bus line error
(BUS-OFF)

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. Problem verification:

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode and then the ON mode.

‐3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.

‐4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC
U1280 Communication bus line error
(BUS-OFF)

Is DTC U1280 indicated?

YES Go to body control module DTC U1280 troubleshooting.■

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001369_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U1281, U128F 1370
DTC Troubleshooting: U1281, U128F

DTC U1281: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with MICU (Body
Control Module) (MICU Frame)
DTC U128F: Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with BSI Unit
NOTE:
If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.
According to the detected DTC(s), check for the power circuit and the ground circuit of
the control unit which cannot communicate with the gauge control module.
Refer to the DTC shown on the display, then inspect the connectors and terminals
based on the instructions.

DTC Description DTC

U1281 Gauge control module lost
communication with MICU (body control
module) (MICU frame)
U128F Gauge control module lost
communication with BSI unit

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. Problem verification:

‐1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode and then the ON mode.

‐3. Wait for at least 6 seconds.

‐4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC
U1281 Gauge control module lost
communication with MICU (body control
module) (MICU frame)
U128F Gauge control module lost
communication with BSI unit

Are any DTCs indicated?

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001370_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U1281, U128F 1370

YES Go to step 2.

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or
loose terminals at the transmitting control units and the gauge control module.■
2. Open wire check (B-CAN_H line, B-CAN_L line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the receiving control unit connector.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)

‐3. According to the detected DTC on the following table, disconnect the transmitting control unit connector(s).
DTC Connector
U1281 Body control module connector A (66P)
U128F Left side BSI radar unit 6P connector
Right side BSI radar unit 6P connector

‐4. Check for continuity between the receiving control unit and the transmitting control unit on the B-CAN_H circuit and
the B-CAN_L circuit.
Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Transmitting control unit connector(s) for indicated DTCs: disconnected

DTC Circuit name Receiving control unit Transmitting control unit

Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
U1281 B-CAN_H Gauge control module No. 22 Body control module No. 54
B-CAN_L connector A (32P) No. 23 connector A (66P) No. 55
U128F B-CAN_H Gauge control module No. 22 Left side BSI radar unit 6P No. 3
B-CAN_L connector A (32P) No. 23 connector No. 5
U128F B-CAN_H Gauge control module No. 22 Right side BSI radar unit 6P No. 3
B-CAN_L connector A (32P) No. 23 connector No. 5

Is there continuity?

YES The B-CAN_H wire and the B-CAN_L wire are OK.

According to the detected DTC on the following table, substitute or replace the control unit based on the
instructions (see table).■
DTC Operation for transmitting control unit
U1281 Substitute a known-good body control module, then recheck. If DTC U1281 goes away after
substitution, replace the original body control module.
U128F Substitute a known-good left side BSI radar unit and right side BSI radar unit, then recheck. If DTC
U128F goes away after substitution, replace the original BSI radar unit.
NO Repair an open in the B-CAN_H wire and/or the B-CAN_L wire between the gauge control module and the
transmitting control unit.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001370_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U3000-49 1371
DTC Troubleshooting: U3000-49

DTC U3000-49: ECU Internal Circuit Malfunction

NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.

DTC Description DTC

U3000-49 ECU internal circuit malfunction

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. Problem verification:

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode and then the ON mode.

‐3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC
U3000-49 ECU internal circuit malfunction

Is DTC U3000-49 indicated?

YES Replace the gauge control module.■

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001371_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:31 AM DTC Troubleshooting: U3000-51 1372
DTC Troubleshooting: U3000-51

DTC U3000-51: Reprogramming Error

NOTE:
If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A.
Before reprogramming the gauge control module, make sure the 12 volt battery in the
vehicle is fully charged, and connect a 12 volt jumper battery (not a 12 volt battery
charger) to maintain system voltage.
Never turn the vehicle to the ACCESSORY mode or OFF (LOCK) mode during the
reprogramming. If there is a problem with the reprogramming, turn the vehicle to the ON
mode.

DTC Description DTC

U3000-51 Reprogramming error

DTC (Gauge Control Module)

1. Problem verification:

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode and then the ON mode.

‐3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC
U3000-51 Reprogramming error

Is DTC U3000-51 indicated?

YES Reprogramming the gauge control module.■

NO Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001372_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:43 AM ECON Switch Test 5768

ECON Switch Test

1. Center Console Panel - Remove

2. ECON Switch - Test

1. Check the ECON switch (A) according to the table.

NOTE:
When an LED is located between terminals, check if
the LED illuminates by connecting power and ground to
the LED.
Note this important operating characteristic; diode bias
causes a diode to fully conduct electricity in one
direction (forward), while not at all in the opposite
direction (reverse).

2. If the result is not as specified, replace the electric parking

brake switch.

M/T Without Idle Stop Off Switch and Sport Mode Switch

Terminal
1 2 6 5
Position/Illumination

Pressed

ECON switch light

― = Continuity check
― = Voltage for LED

CVT Without Idle Stop Off Switch and Sport Mode Switch

Terminal
5 2 6 1
Position/Illumination

Pressed

ECON switch light

― = Continuity check
― = Voltage for LED

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R005768_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:43 AM ECON Switch Test 5768

With Idle Stop Off Switch and Sport Mode Switch

Terminal
4 2 5 1
Position/Illumination

Pressed

ECON switch light

― = Continuity check
― = Voltage for LED

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R005768_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster Connector for Inputs and Outputs 1164
Electric Brake Booster Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Electric Brake Booster Inputs and Outputs for 26P Connector (female terminals)

5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2
BRN - - - - - BLU
BLK YEL
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
LT - - - - RED
GRN GRN

3 4
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
- LT -
- YEL PNK - PUR - WHT
BLU

Terminal Terminal sign Description

number
1 GND Ground for the electric brake booster
2 +B BOOSTER MTR Power source for the motor
3 Not used
―――
4 Not used
5 PTS GND Ground for the brake pedal stroke sensor
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used ―――
9 Not used
10 Not used
11 PTS VS Power source for the brake pedal stroke sensor
12 F-CAN B_L F-CAN communication circuit
13 FL DOOR SW Detects driver's door switch signal
14 Not used
15 Not used
―――
16 Not used
17 Not used
18 F-CAN A_L F-CAN communication circuit
19 F-CAN B_H F-CAN communication circuit
20 Not used ―――
21 PTS2 Detects brake pedal stroke sensor signal
22 PTS1 Detects brake pedal stroke sensor signal
23 Not used ―――
24 IG1 OPTION4 Power source for activating the system
25 Not used ―――
26 F-CAN A_H F-CAN communication circuit

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E001164_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster Removal and Installation 4950

Electric Brake Booster Removal and Installation

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.
M/T is sharing the master cylinder reservoir with the brake system and the clutch system. Bleed the air foam from the brake
system and the clutch system after install the master cylinder.

1. Brake Fluid - Remove

1. Remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir

with a syringe.

2. Air Cleaner - Remove

3. 12 Volt Battery - Remove

1. Open the driver's door, and wait 3 minutes or more.

NOTE: Do not turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

2. Remove the 12 Volt Battery.

4. Clutch Reservoir Hose - Disconnect (M/T)

1. Disconnect the clutch reservoir hose from the master

cylinder reservoir.

5. Master Cylinder Reservoir - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004950_enu 1/8
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster Removal and Installation 4950
1. Disconnect the connector (A).
B
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)
2. Remove the reservoir mounting bolt (B).

3. Remove the master cylinder reservoir (C).

A C

6. 12 Volt Battery Base - Remove

M/T 1. Remove the harness clips (A).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004950_enu 2/8
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster Removal and Installation 4950

A/T

CVT

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004950_enu 3/8
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster Removal and Installation 4950
2. Remove the harness clips (A).
A A

3. Remove the 12 volt battery base mounting bolts (A).

A A

4. Remove the 12 volt battery base (B).

B A

7. Electric Brake Booster - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004950_enu 4/8
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster Removal and Installation 4950
1. A/T: Remove the harness clips (A).
A 9.4 (0.96, 6.9)
A 2. A/T: Remove the wire harness bracket (B).
B

3. Disconnect the connector (A) by pushing the lock (B) and

pulling up the lever (C); the connector disconnects itself.

4. Disconnect the connector (D).

5. Disconnect the brake lines from the master cylinder.

A B C D

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004950_enu 5/8
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster Removal and Installation 4950
6. Remove the brake lines (A) from the brake line clamp (B).

A B

7. Remove the lock pin (A).

8. Remove the clevis pin (B).

NOTE: During installation, apply multipurpose grease to the

clevis pin in the brake pedal.

9. Remove the electric brake booster mounting nuts (C).

A C
B
12 (1.2, 9)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004950_enu 6/8
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster Removal and Installation 4950

10. Remove the electric brake booster (A) from the engine
compartment.

NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the electric brake booster
surfaces and threads of the electric brake booster stud
bolts.
Be careful not to bend or damage the other
components hoses and lines.

11. Remove the gasket (B).

NOTE: Use the new gasket during reassembly.

B
A

8. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE: The lock pin (A) can be installed from the top or
bottom.

9. Brake System - Bleed

10.Clutch Hydraulic System - Bleed (M/T)

11. Brake Pedal Height and Free Play - Check

12.Clutch Pedal Height and Free Play - Check (M/T)

13.Electric Brake Booster Software - Check

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004950_enu 7/8
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster Removal and Installation 4950

1. Make sure the electric brake booster has the latest

software. If it does not have the latest, update the software
in the electric brake booster.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004950_enu 8/8
2/8/23, 2:10 AM Electric Brake Booster System Circuit Diagram 5853
Electric Brake Booster System Circuit Diagram

*1: A/T
*2: M/T, CVT
*3: CVT
: CAN line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

12 VOLT
BATTERY
No. A2-4 (40 A)
YEL A
+B BOOSTER MTR

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. A5-5 (30 A) D4 IG1B RELAY
YEL CIRCUIT
No. B35 (10 A) D13
PUR B
IG1
H9 OPTION4
BODY WHT
CONTROL
MODULE H11
TAN

IG1B HOT in ON and START mode

*2 *1
PCM PCM

F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN

A_H A_L B_H B_L D_H D_L A_H A_L

A37 A36 A39 A38 A39 A38 A37 A36

WHT RED LT BLU LT GRN PNK GRN WHT RED

*3

MILLIMETER
WAVE RADAR
7
PNK
F-CAN D_H
6
GRN
F-CAN D_L

WHT C

RED D

LT BLU E

LT GRN F

WHT RED LT BLU LT GRN PUR GRN PNK GRN

3 11 6 14 5 13 7 15 A20 A21

F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN C_H F-CAN C_L
A_H A_L B_H B_L C_H C_L D_H D_L
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR (RED) (AMBER)

CAN GATEWAY GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005853_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:10 AM Electric Brake Booster System Circuit Diagram 5853

: CAN line

ELECTRIC BRAKE BOOSTER

2
A YEL
+B BOOSTER
MTR
CONTROL UNIT

24
B PUR
IG1 OPTION4

13
GRN
FL DOOR
5 SW

DRIVER’S
DOOR DRIVER’S
SWITCH DOOR
(Closed: LATCH
Door open)
8

G502
1
BLK
GND

MOTOR

G303 MOTOR
26 ANGLE
WHT SENSOR
F-CAN A_H CAN
CONTROLLER
18
RED
F-CAN A_L
19
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H CAN
12 CONTROLLER
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
11
BLU
PTS VS
C WHT
22
PNK
D RED PTS1
21
E LT BLU YEL
PTS2
5
F LT GRN BRN
PTS GND

4
PTS GND
WHT RED LT BLU LT GRN
3
20 21 24 25 PTS2 BRAKE PEDAL
STROKE SENSOR
1
F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN
A_H A_L B_H B_L PTS1
2
PTS VS

:5V
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005853_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Circuit Diagram 1166
Electric Brake Booster System Circuit Diagram

: CAN line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

12 VOLT
BATTERY
No. A2-4 (40 A)
YEL A
+B BOOSTER MTR

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. A5-5 (30 A) D4 IG1B RELAY
YEL CIRCUIT
+B IG No. B35 (10 A) D13
BODY CONTROL PUR B
MODULE MAIN2
IG1
OPTION4
C54 H9
WHT
IG1 COIL+
C47 H11
TAN
RLY GND

IG1B HOT in ON and START mode

PCM

F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN

A_H A_L B_H B_L

A37 A36 A39 A38

WHT RED LT BLU LT GRN

WHT C

RED D

LT BLU E

LT GRN F

WHT RED

A20 A21

F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_L

BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR (RED) (AMBER)

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E001166_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Circuit Diagram 1166

: CAN line

ELECTRIC BRAKE BOOSTER

2
A YEL
+B BOOSTER
MTR
CONTROL UNIT

24
B PUR
IG1 OPTION4

13
GRN
FL DOOR
5 SW

DRIVER’S
DOOR DRIVER’S
SWITCH DOOR
(Closed: LATCH
Door open)
8

G502
1
BLK
GND

MOTOR

G303 MOTOR
26 ANGLE
WHT SENSOR
F-CAN A_H CAN
CONTROLLER
18
RED
F-CAN A_L
19
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H CAN
12 CONTROLLER
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
11
BLU
PTS VS
C WHT
22
PNK
D RED PTS1
21
E LT BLU YEL
PTS2
5
F LT GRN BRN
PTS GND

4
PTS GND
WHT RED LT BLU LT GRN
3
20 21 24 25 PTS2 BRAKE PEDAL
STROKE SENSOR
1
F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN F-CAN
A_H A_L B_H B_L PTS1
2
PTS VS

:5V
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E001166_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster System Component Location Index 1044

For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram.

ELECTRIC BRAKE BOOSTER

Removal and Installation
Update

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G001044_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 2:08 AM Electric Brake Booster System Description - Components 968

Electric Brake Booster System Description - Components

Components
The electric brake booster system consists of the following primary components:
Electric brake booster
Brake pedal stroke sensor
System indicator

For locations of each component on the vehicle, refer to Component Location Index, and for indicator functions, refer to How to
Troubleshoot the Electric Brake Booster System.

Electric Brake Booster

The electric brake booster consists of the brushless motor, control unit, transmission, rotary position sensor, brake pedal stroke
sensor, and master cylinder.

The electric brake booster consists of the servo component, the servo control component, and the master cylinder component.
The servo component consists of the motor, the transmission, and the valve body. The assisting force generated with the motor is
transmitted to the valve body through the transmission, and an assist is performed because the valve body moves the piston of the
master cylinder through the reaction disc.

The servo control component consists of the electric brake booster control unit, the rotary position sensor, and the brake pedal stroke
sensor. The electric brake booster control unit measures the target differential stroke by using the brake pedal stroke sensor. The
location of the plunger is calculated from the target differential stroke and the motor angle information (measured by the rotary position
sensor).
The master cylinder component is equivalent to a conventional vacuum brake booster brake system.

Valve Body
Brake Pedal
Stroke Sensor Spindle

Reaction Disc
Plunger

Input Rod

Spindle Nut

Master Cylinder
Piston

Transmission

Electric Brake Booster Control Unit/Motor

(With a Built-in Rotary Position Sensor)

Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000968_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:08 AM Electric Brake Booster System Description - Components 968
The brake pedal stroke sensor is located in the electric brake booster.
The brake pedal stroke sensor detects the level of brake pedal force and outputs two kinds of voltage values depending on the given
stroke.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000968_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster System Description - System Diagram 967

Electric Brake Booster System Description - System Diagram

This system diagram shows the inputs and outputs of the electric brake booster system.

For locations of each component on the vehicle, refer to Component Location Index:
Electric brake booster
Gauge control module
PCM
VSA modulator-control unit, Automatic brake hold switch
Driver’s door switch

: CAN line

ELECTRIC BRAKE BOOSTER

F-CAN
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE MOTOR

PCM ROTARY
POSITION
CONTROL SENSOR
UNIT
VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT

BRAKE
DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH PEDAL
STROKE
SENSOR

F-CAN Communication Data

Electric Brake Booster System Receiving Signal
Transmitting Unit Signal Name
PCM
Engine speed signal

System operating status signal

VSA modulator-control unit Master cylinder fluid pressure signal

Vehicle speed signal

External brake control mode signal

System operating status signal

System failure Information

Electric Brake Booster System Transmitting Signal

Transmitting Unit Signal Name
Electric brake booster
Hydraulic boost failure compensation control request signal

Indicator drive signal

System operating status signal

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000967_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:09 AM Electric Brake Booster System Description - System Diagram 967

Transmitting Unit Signal Name

System failure Information

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000967_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:08 AM Electric Brake Booster System Description 5820

Electric Brake Booster System Description

Overview
The electric brake booster is an electromechanical brake booster that replaces a typical vacuum brake booster. This system provides
stable braking performance that does not depend on vacuum supply.

The driver's brake pedal control is changed to the fluid pressure by the master cylinder and it's transmitted to the VSA modulator-
control unit. The electric brake booster provides the assisting force created by the motor to the master cylinder input force.
The system generates the braking force based on other control unit request. (Depending on the model)

Servo Control Operations

When the driver presses the brake pedal, the input rod and the plunger moves to the master cylinder piston side. The plunger moves
at this time, but the valve body connected with the motor through the transmission, the spindle nut, and the spindle does not move
because the motor is not active. As a result, there is a difference between the relative position of the plunger and the valve body.
The control unit drives the motor to generate the required assisting force which is calculated based on the relative position of the
plunger and the valve body. The assisting force created by the movement of the valve body is transmitted via the reaction disc to the
master cylinder piston.

Transmission
Electric Brake Booster
Master Cylinder
Piston Assisting
Force
Motor Torque
Motor
Master Cylinder
Brake Pedal
Stroke Sensor

Driver's
Pedal
Force

VSA Modulator-Control Unit

Input Rod & Plunger

Valve Body
Reaction Disc

Fail-safe
During the fail-safe mode, the driver's brake pedal operating force is transmitted via the reaction disc to the master cylinder piston
directly. The hydraulic pressure created by the brake pedal force activates the brake caliper.
In the fail-safe mode, the operating force of the brake pedal becomes higher than under normal conditions. To reduce the operating
force of the brake pedal, the electric brake booster requests hydraulic boost failure compensation control to the VSA system.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C005820_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:08 AM Electric Brake Booster System Description 5820

Transmission
Electric Brake Booster
Master Cylinder
Piston

Motor
Master Cylinder
Brake Pedal
Stroke Sensor

Driver's
Pedal
Force

VSA Modulator-Control Unit Input Rod & Plunger

Valve Body
Reaction Disc

Engine Starting Prohibition Condition ( '18-19 )

Vehicles equipped with the electric brake booster have starting restrictions.
The engine may only start under the following conditions:
Clutch pedal pressed and parking brake is applied. (M/T)
Shift position/mode is P. (A/T, CVT)
Shift position/mode is N and parking brake is applied. (A/T, CVT)

System Wake-Up and Shutdown

The electric brake booster system is activated when the driver's door is opened while the vehicle is in the OFF (LOCK) mode or when
the vehicle is turned to the ON mode.

To prevent excessive battery discharge, the system will shut down automatically 3 minutes after the driver's door was opened with the
vehicle in the OFF (LOCK) mode. Once the driver's door is opened and the system is activated, the system's activation time will not
be extended even if the door was opened again.

Activating and shutting down the system by the driver’s door operation is as follows.

Open the driver's door

The electric brake booster system is activated when the driver's door is opened, and will shut down automatically 3 minutes after the
driver's door was opened with the vehicle in the OFF (LOCK) mode.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C005820_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:08 AM Electric Brake Booster System Description 5820

Open
Driver’s door
Close

ON mode
Vehicle

OFF mode

Activate
System

Shutdown

3 minutes

Turn the vehicle to the ON mode after opening the driver's door

If the vehicle is turned to the ON mode within 3 minutes after opening the driver's door, the electric brake booster system will continue
to operate.

Open
Driver’s door
Close

ON mode
Vehicle

OFF mode

Activate
System

Shutdown

3 minutes

Open the driver's door again after the system is activated by opening the door

Once the driver's door is opened and the system is activated, the system's activation time will not be extended even if the door was
opened again.

Open
Driver’s door
Close

ON mode
Vehicle

OFF mode

Activate
System

Shutdown

3 minutes

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C005820_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:08 AM Electric Brake Booster System Description 5820

Open the driver's door after turning the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode from ON mode

The system will shut down automatically 3 minutes after the vehicle is turned to the OFF (LOCK) mode, and the system's activation
time will not be extended even if the door is opened.

Open
Driver’s door
Close

ON mode
Vehicle

OFF mode

Activate
System

Shutdown

3 minutes

Boost Restriction ( '18-19 )

When the system is activated by the driver's door operation, and the vehicle is stopped, a boost amount of electric brake booster is
restricted. Under this condition, a boost amount is such that the brake pedal position switch can be turned ON. The boost restriction
continues even after turning the vehicle to the ON mode, and the normal boost is started when the engine is started.
Therefore, the driver may feel that the brake pedal is hard until the engine is started, but it is not a system fault. While the system is
activated for 3 minutes after turning the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, the normal boost is maintained.

Normal

Boost

Restriction

Time

Driver's Vehicle Engine Vehicle System

door ON mode start OFF mode shutdown
open

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C005820_enu 4/4
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System DTC Troubleshooting Index 5851
Electric Brake Booster System DTC Troubleshooting Index

DTC Detection Item

C1250 -98 ECU Internal Malfunction (Over Temperature)
C1C01 -96 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Component Internal Failure
C1C02 -11 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Signal Circuit 1 Short To Ground
-15 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Signal Circuit 1 Short To Battery or Open
C1C03 -11 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Signal Circuit 2 Short To Ground
-15 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Signal Circuit 2 Short To Battery or Open
C1C04 -11 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Power Circuit Short To Ground or Battery
U0029 -00*1
CAN Communication Failure (Ch1 Bus OFF)
-00*2
U0047 -00*1
CAN Communication Failure (Ch2 Bus OFF)
-00*2
U0100 -00*1
CAN Communication Failure With ECM/PCM
-00*2
U0104 -00 CAN Communication Failure With Driving Support System Control Unit
U0122 -00*1
CAN Communication Failure With VSA
-00*2
U0128 -00*1
CAN Communication Failure With Electric Parking Brake
-00*2
U0416 -68 VSA System Malfunction
U3000 -49 ECU Internal Malfunction
-51 ECU Software Update Failure
-55 Variant Code Undefined
U3003 -16 Brake Booster Control Unit Power Circuit (+B) Low Voltage
-17 Brake Booster Control Unit Power Circuit (+B) High Voltage
U3006 -13 IG1 Circuit Open

*1: Without ACC

*2: With ACC

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T005851_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not…
Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red)
and brake system indicator (amber) do not go off

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T003405_enu 1/7
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not…

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T003405_enu 2/7
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not…

Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not
go off
1. DTC check (Electric brake booster):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC Freeze
Frame

Is DTC indicated?

YES Go to indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

NO Go to step 2.

2. CAN gateway system DTC check:

‐1. Check for CAN gateway system DTCs with the HDS.
DTC Description DTC

DTC (CAN gateway)

Is DTC indicated?

YES Go to indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

NO Go to step 3.

3. Gauge control module operation check:

‐1. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.

Is the gauge control module OK?

YES Go to step 4.

NO Replace the gauge control module.■

4. Fuse check 1:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode with driver's door open.

‐2. Wait for 3 minutes.

NOTE: Do not close the driver's door.

‐3. Check the following fuse.

Fuse No. A2-4

Is the fuse OK?

YES The fuse is OK. Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 5.

NO Replace the fuse. If the fuse blows again, repair a short to body ground in the No.
A2-4 fuse circuit.■
5. Fuse check 2:

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T003405_enu 3/7
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not…

‐1. Check the following fuse.

Fuse No. B35

Is the fuse OK?

YES The fuse is OK. Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 6.

NO Replace the fuse. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, then to the OFF (LOCK)
mode. If the fuse blows again, repair a short to body ground in the No. B35 fuse
circuit.■
6. Open wire check (IG1 OPTION4 line):

‐1. Disconnect the following connector.

Electric brake booster 26P connector

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐3. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle ON mode
Electric brake booster 26P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 24
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there battery voltage?

YES The IG1 OPTION4 wire is OK. Go to step 7.

NO Repair an open in the wire between the No. B35 fuse and the electric brake
booster.■
7. Open wire check (+B BOOSTER MTR line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Electric brake booster 26P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 2
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there battery voltage?

YES The +B BOOSTER MTR wire is OK. Go to step 8.

NO Repair an open in the wire between the No. A2-4 fuse and the electric brake
booster.■
8. Open wire check (GND line):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Electric brake booster 26P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 1
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T003405_enu 4/7
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not…

YES The GND wire is OK. Go to step 9.

NO Repair an open in the wire between the electric brake booster and body ground
(G303).■
9. F-CAN circuit communication check:

‐1. Reconnect the following connector.

Electric brake booster 26P connector

‐2. Select the FUNCTION TEST in the CAN gateway with the HDS, then select the F-CAN
Bus Connected Unit Check.

F-CAN Bus Connected Unit Check

Which result is indicated?

Electric brake booster (Bus A) is Not Available Go to step 10.

Electric brake booster (Bus B) is Not Available Go to step 11.

Gauge control module (Bus C) is Not Available Go to step 12.

Electric brake booster and gauge control module are Available Intermittent failure, the system
is OK at this time. Refer to
intermittent failures
troubleshooting.■
10. Open wire check (F-CAN A_H, F-CAN A_L lines):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode with driver's door open.

‐2. Wait for 3 minutes.

NOTE: Do not close the driver's door.

‐3. Disconnect the following connectors.

Electric brake booster 26P connector
CAN gateway 16P connector

‐4. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Electric brake booster 26P connector: disconnected
CAN gateway 16P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 26
Test point 2 CAN gateway 16P connector (female terminals) No. 3:

Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 18

Test point 2 CAN gateway 16P connector (female terminals) No. 11:

Is there continuity?

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T003405_enu 5/7
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not…

YES The F-CAN A_H and F-CAN A_L wires are OK. Check for loose terminals and
poor connections in the electric brake booster 26P connector. Check for any
authorized service information related to the DTCs or symptoms you are
troubleshooting. If they are OK, replace the electric brake booster.■
NO Repair an open in the wire between the electric brake booster and the CAN
gateway.■
11. Open wire check (F-CAN B_H, F-CAN B_L lines):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode with driver's door open.

‐2. Wait for 3 minutes.

NOTE: Do not close the driver's door.

‐3. Disconnect the following connectors.

Electric brake booster 26P connector
CAN gateway 16P connector

‐4. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Electric brake booster 26P connector: disconnected
CAN gateway 16P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 19
Test point 2 CAN gateway 16P connector (female terminals) No. 6:

Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 12

Test point 2 CAN gateway 16P connector (female terminals) No. 14:

Is there continuity?

YES The F-CAN B_H and F-CAN B_L wires are OK. Check for loose terminals and
poor connections in the electric brake booster 26P connector. Check for any
authorized service information related to the DTCs or symptoms you are
troubleshooting. If they are OK, replace the electric brake booster.■
NO Repair an open in the wire between the electric brake booster and the CAN
gateway.■
12. Open wire check (F-CAN C_H, F-CAN C_L lines):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)
CAN gateway 16P connector

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
CAN gateway 16P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 20
Test point 2 CAN gateway 16P connector (female terminals) No. 5:

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T003405_enu 6/7
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not…

Test point 1 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 21

Test point 2 CAN gateway 16P connector (female terminals) No. 13:

Is there continuity?

YES The F-CAN C_H and F-CAN C_L wires are OK. Check for any authorized service
information related to the DTCs or symptoms you are troubleshooting or
substitute a known-good gauge control module, then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good gauge control module, replace
the original gauge control module.■
NO Repair an open in the wire between the gauge control module and the CAN
gateway.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T003405_enu 7/7
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not…
Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red)
and brake system indicator (amber) do not go off

Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not
go off
1. DTC check (Electric brake booster):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC Freeze
Frame

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001169_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not…
Is DTC indicated?

YES Go to indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

NO Go to step 2.

2. Gauge control module operation check:

‐1. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.

Is the gauge control module OK?

YES Go to step 3.

NO Replace the gauge control module.■

3. Fuse check 1:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode with driver's door open.

‐2. Wait for 3 minutes.

NOTE: Do not close the driver's door.

‐3. Check the following fuse.

Fuse No. A2-4

Is the fuse OK?

YES The fuse is OK. Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 4.

NO Replace the fuse. If the fuse blows again, repair a short to body ground in the No.
A2-4 fuse circuit.■
4. Fuse check 2:

‐1. Check the following fuse.

Fuse No. B35

Is the fuse OK?

YES The fuse is OK. Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 5.

NO Replace the fuse. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, then to the OFF (LOCK)
mode. If the fuse blows again, repair a short to body ground in the No. B35 fuse
circuit.■
5. Open wire check (IG1 OPTION4 line):

‐1. Disconnect the following connector.

Electric brake booster 26P connector

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐3. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle ON mode
Electric brake booster 26P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 24
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there battery voltage?

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001169_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) and brake system indicator (amber) do not…

YES The IG1 OPTION4 wire is OK. Go to step 6.

NO Repair an open in the wire between the No. B35 fuse and the electric brake
booster.■
6. Open wire check (+B BOOSTER MTR line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Electric brake booster 26P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 2
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there battery voltage?

YES The +B BOOSTER MTR wire is OK. Go to step 7.

NO Repair an open in the wire between the No. A2-4 fuse and the electric brake
booster.■
7. Open wire check (GND line):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Electric brake booster 26P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 1
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES The GND wire is OK. Go to step 8.

NO Repair an open in the wire between the electric brake booster and body ground
(G303).■
8. Open wire check (F-CAN A_H, F-CAN A_L lines):

‐1. Disconnect the following connectors.

Gauge control module connector A (32P)

‐2. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Electric brake booster 26P connector: disconnected
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 26
Test point 2 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 20

Test point 1 Electric brake booster 26P connector No. 18

Test point 2 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 21

Is there continuity?

YES Check for loose terminals and poor connections in the electric brake booster 26P
connector. Check for any authorized service information related to the DTCs or
symptoms you are troubleshooting. If they are OK, replace the electric brake
booster.■
NO Repair an open in the wire between the gauge control module and the electric
brake booster.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001169_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 2:33 AM Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting Index 1168
Electric Brake Booster System Symptom Troubleshooting Index

When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for electric brake booster diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) with the HDS. If there are no DTCs, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom,
in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit. Power and
electric brake booster or the vehicle ground at the
electric brake
booster.
Brake system indicator (red) or brake Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
system indicator (amber) does not function.
come on at start-up (bulb check)
Brake system indicator (red) and brake Symptom troubleshooting.
system indicator (amber) do not go off

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001168_enu 1/1
Coolant Check and Replacement

Coolant Level Check

1. Coolant - Check

1. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. Make sure

it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN mark (B).
A

2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or below the

MIN mark, add coolant to bring it between the MIN and
MAX marks, then inspect the cooling system for leaks.

3. Check the coolant level in the radiator, and add Honda

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to
the base of the filler neck, if needed.

NOTE:
Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail.
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture
of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do not add water.
B

Coolant Leak Test

1. Coolant Leak - Test

1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the

radiator cap, and fill the radiator with engine coolant to the
A base of the filler neck.

2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A) to the

radiator, and apply a pressure of 93－123 kPa (0.95－1.25
kgf/cm2, 13.5－17.8 psi).

3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure.

4. Remove the pressure tester, then reinstall the radiator cap.

1. Radiator Cap - Remove

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, and make sure to turn the
A/C switch OFF, then turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK)
mode.

2. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the

radiator cap.

2. Engine Coolant - Drain

1. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.

A

3. Coolant Reservoir - Refill

1. Remove, drain and reinstall the coolant reservoir (A).

B

2. Fill the coolant reservoir to the MAX mark (B) with Honda
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

4. Engine Coolant - Refill

1. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.

NOTE:
Use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2, and if necessary add Honda Extreme Cold Weather Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2 (concentrate). Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or
fail.
Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Honda Extreme Cold Weather
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a 100% concentration coolant. Do not add water to either coolant.
If the vehicle is regularly driven in very low temperatures (below -22 °F (-30 °C)), a 60 % concentration of coolant should
be used.

Add Amount of Honda

Vehicle Usage Then add Honda Long
Current Extreme Cold Weather
Operation (Desired Coolant Drain Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Mixture Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
Mixture) Type 2 (50/50)
(100% concentrate)
50/50
Normal Area Drain radiator
60/40 None
(50/50) and reservoir
unknown
Coolant
50/50 About
Change
Very Cold Area unknown Drain radiator 1.4 L (47 fl oz)
(60/40) and reservoir About
60/40
1.1 L (37 fl oz)
Normal Area
- - None Top off the cooling system
Engine (50/50)
Overhaul Very Cold Area About
- -
(60/40) 1.4 L (47 fl oz)
Drain about 2.0
50/50 L (68 fl oz)
Coolant Very Cold Area from radiator About
Winterizing (60/40) 1.4 L (47 fl oz)
Drain radiator
unknown*
and reservoir

*: When you want to winterize the coolant with the minimum amount of coolant change but the current coolant concentration
in the vehicle is unknown, you must drain all coolant from the cooling system.

Engine Coolant Refill Capacities (Including the coolant reservoir capacity of 0.7 L (0.18 US gal)
At Coolant Change: 4.9 L (1.29 US gal)
After Engine Overhaul: 7.3 L (1.93 US gal)
5. Engine Coolant - Air Bleed

1. Loosely install the radiator cap.

2. Enter the maintenance mode, then start the engine, and let
it run until it warms up (the cooling fan comes on at least
twice).

3. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode. Check the level
in the radiator, and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2, if needed.

6. Engine Coolant Leak - Check

1. Put the radiator cap securely and enter the maintenance

mode, then start the engine again, and check for leaks.

2. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.

7. Maintenance Minder - Reset

1. If the Maintenance Minder required to replace the engine

coolant, reset the Maintenance Minder with the gauge (see
"Resetting the Maintenance Minder"). If the Maintenance
Minder did not require to replace the engine coolant, reset
the Maintenance Minder with the HDS (see "Resetting the
Individual Maintenance Items").
Electric Motor Control Module Coolant Pump Removal and Installation

NOTE: Do not spill the PCU coolant on the surrounding parts. If you spill the PCU coolant , wipe the PCU coolant off
immediately.

1
 4.
3.

5.
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

4.
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

1. PCU Coolant - Drain

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

3. Coolant Hose - Disconnect

4. PCU Electric Coolant Pump Assembly - Remove

5. PCU Electric Coolant Pump - Remove

6. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

7. PCU Coolant - Refill and Air Bleed

3/22/23, 12:25 PM Electric Parking Brake Actuator Removal and Installation 1580

Electric Parking Brake Actuator Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Rear Wheel - Remove

3. Electric Parking Brake Actuator - Remove

B
1. Disconnect the connector (A).
C
8.0 (0.82, 5.9)
NOTE: If the connector lock tab is difficult to release, push
E in on the connector body before pushing on the release
lock.
A
2. Remove the electric parking brake actuator (B).

NOTE:
Use new mounting screws (C) during reassembly.
F During installation, coat the spindle (D) with the
actuator service set grease.

3. Remove the O-ring (E) from the caliper body (F).

NOTE:
Use the new O-ring during reassembly.
When installing the actuator, make sure there is no
foreign matter on the mating surfaces and the O-ring.

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

5. Electric Parking Brake Actuator After Install - Check

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

2. Apply and release the parking brake 2 times, then make

sure that the brake system indicator (red) goes OFF.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001580_enu 1/2
3/22/23, 12:25 PM Electric Parking Brake Actuator Removal and Installation 1580
NOTE: If the brake system indicator (red) does not go OFF,
check for a poor connection at the electric parking brake
actuator connector.

3. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001580_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake Actuator Removal and Installation 1052

Electric Parking Brake Actuator Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Rear Wheel - Remove

3. Electric Parking Brake Actuator - Remove

B
1. Disconnect the connector (A).
C
8.0 (0.82, 5.9)
NOTE: If the connector lock tab is difficult to release, push
E in on the connector body before pushing on the release
lock.
A
2. Remove the electric parking brake actuator (B).

NOTE:
Use new mounting screws (C) during reassembly.
F During installation, coat the spindle (D) with the
actuator service set grease.

3. Remove the O-ring (E) from the caliper body (F).

NOTE:
Replace the O-ring whenever the electric parking brake
actuator is removed.
When installing the actuator, make sure there is no
foreign matter on the mating surfaces and the O-ring.

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

5. Electric Parking Brake Actuator After Install - Check

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

2. Apply and release the parking brake 2 times, then make

sure that the brake system indicator (red) goes OFF.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R001052_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake Actuator Removal and Installation 1052
NOTE: If the brake system indicator (red) does not go OFF,
check for a poor connection at the electric parking brake
actuator connector.

3. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R001052_enu 2/2
Electric Parking Brake Switch Removal, Installation, and Test

1. Center Console Panel - Remove

2. Electric Parking Brake Switch - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. Electric Parking Brake Switch - Test

Switch Internal Continuity Check:

1. On the switch side, check for continuity between the connector terminal (male terminals) in each switch position according to
the table.
 Terminal
1 4 5 7 9 10
Position

NEUTRAL

APPLY

RELEASED

2. If the switch does not work as described in the table, replace the switch.

Switch Illumination Circuit Check:

Terminal 1. On the switch side, check the LED for illumination by

7 9
Position applying power and ground to the terminals according to
the table.
ILLUMINATION
LIGHTS
NOTE: Important operating characteristic; diode bias
causes a diode to fully conduct electricity in one direction
= Voltage for LED (forward), while not at all in the opposite direction (reverse).

2. If the result is not as specified, replace the switch.

Switch Indicator Circuit Check:

Terminal 1. On the switch side, check the LED for indicator by applying
11 8
Position power and ground to the terminals according to the table.

SWITCH
INDICATOR NOTE: Important operating characteristic; diode bias
causes a diode to fully conduct electricity in one direction
(forward), while not at all in the opposite direction (reverse).
= Voltage for LED
2. If the result is not as specified, replace the switch.
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 4953

Electric Parking Brake Switch Removal, Installation, and Test

1. Center Console Panel - Remove

2. Electric Parking Brake Switch - Remove

This illustration shows A/T, CVT.

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. Electric Parking Brake Switch - Test

Switch Internal Continuity Check:

1. On the switch side, check for continuity between the connector terminal (male terminals) in each switch position according to
the table.

Electric parking brake switch 10P connector type

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004953_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 4953

Terminal
6 7 8 9
Position

NEUTRAL

APPLY

RELEASED

Electric parking brake/automatic brake hold switch 12P connector type

Terminal
1 4 5 7 9 10
Position

NEUTRAL

APPLY

RELEASED

2. If the switch does not work as described in the table, replace the switch.

Electric parking brake switch 10P connector type Switch Illumination Circuit Check:

1. On the switch side, check the LED for illumination by

Terminal applying power and ground to the terminals according to
4 10 the table.
Position

ILLUMINATION NOTE: Important operating characteristic; diode bias

LIGHTS
causes a diode to fully conduct electricity in one direction
(forward), while not at all in the opposite direction (reverse).
= Voltage for LED
2. If the result is not as specified, replace the switch.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004953_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake Switch Removal, Installation, and Test 4953

Electric parking brake/automatic brake hold switch 12P

connector type

Terminal
7 9
Position

ILLUMINATION
LIGHTS

= Voltage for LED

Electric parking brake switch 10P connector type Switch Indicator Circuit Check:

1. On the switch side, check the LED for indicator by applying

Terminal power and ground to the terminals according to the table.
5 3
Position
NOTE: Important operating characteristic; diode bias
SWITCH causes a diode to fully conduct electricity in one direction
INDICATOR (forward), while not at all in the opposite direction (reverse).

= Voltage for LED 2. If the result is not as specified, replace the switch.

Electric parking brake/automatic brake hold switch 12P

connector type

Terminal
11 8
Position

SWITCH
INDICATOR

= Voltage for LED

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004953_enu 3/3
3/22/23, 8:47 PM Electric Parking Brake System Component Location Index 1576

Electric Parking Brake System Component Location Index

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=G001576_enu 1/4
3/22/23, 8:47 PM Electric Parking Brake System Component Location Index 1576

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=G001576_enu 2/4
3/22/23, 8:47 PM Electric Parking Brake System Component Location Index 1576

For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram.

RIGHT-REAR ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR

How To Temporarily Cancel Automatic Electric Parking Brake
Forced Cancellation
Removal and Installation

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

LEFT-REAR ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR

How To Temporarily Cancel Automatic Electric Parking Brake
Forced Cancellation
Removal and Installation

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=G001576_enu 3/4
3/22/23, 8:47 PM Electric Parking Brake System Component Location Index 1576

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

Removal, Installation, and Test

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=G001576_enu 4/4
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Component Location Index 1048

Electric Parking Brake System Component Location Index

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G001048_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Component Location Index 1048

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G001048_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Component Location Index 1048

For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram.

RIGHT-REAR ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR

How To Temporarily Cancel Automatic Electric Parking Brake
Forced Cancellation
Removal and Installation

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

LEFT-REAR ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR

How To Temporarily Cancel Automatic Electric Parking Brake
Forced Cancellation
Removal and Installation

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G001048_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Component Location Index 1048

CLUTCH PEDAL STROKE SENSOR

(M/T)

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

This illustration shows M/T. Removal, Installation, and Test

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G001048_enu 4/4
Electric Parking Brake System Description - Components

Components
The electric parking brake system consists of the following primary components:
VSA modulator-control unit
Electric parking brake actuators
Electric parking brake switch
System indicator

For locations of each component on the vehicle, refer to Component Location Index, and for indicator functions, refer to How to
Troubleshoot the Electric Parking Brake.

Electric Parking Brake Actuator

The electric parking brake actuator has a built-in DC motor. When the motor operates, the motor's speed is reduced by the 2 step
worm gear reducer and a ball screw mechanism, increasing torque. The 2nd worm wheel gear turns the spindle and the nut inside the
caliper piston forcing it outward to generate brake pad clamping force. The electric parking brake actuators are automatically adjusted
to compensate for brake pad wear, so no parking brake adjustment is necessary.

Piston
Ball Screw
Mechanism

Nut

Spindle

2nd Worm
Wheel Gear

2nd Worm Gear

Motor

1st Worm 1st Worm Gear

Wheel Gear

When the electric parking brake system has a malfunction and the parking brake cannot be released, you can release the parking
brake by doing the forced cancellation procedure. Refer to the forced cancellation procedure.

Electric Parking Brake Switch

The electric parking brake switch is connected to the VSA modulator-control unit using four separate circuits. The control unit must
see the correct voltage patterns on all 4 circuits, or the switch will be disabled and a DTC will be set.
 VSA Modulator-Control Unit

SW1

Apply Release

SW4

SW3

SW6

Electric Parking Brake Switch

2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Description - Components 972

Electric Parking Brake System Description - Components

Components
The electric parking brake system consists of the following primary components:
VSA modulator-control unit
Electric parking brake actuators
Electric parking brake switch
Clutch pedal stroke sensor (M/T)
System indicator

For locations of each component on the vehicle, refer to Component Location Index, and for indicator functions, refer to How to
Troubleshoot the Electric Parking Brake.

Electric Parking Brake Actuator

The electric parking brake actuator has a built-in DC motor. When the motor operates, the motor's speed is reduced by the 2 step
worm gear reducer and a ball screw mechanism, increasing torque. The 2nd worm wheel gear turns the spindle and the nut inside the
caliper piston forcing it outward to generate brake pad clamping force. The electric parking brake actuators are automatically adjusted
to compensate for brake pad wear, so no parking brake adjustment is necessary.

Piston
Ball Screw
Mechanism

Nut

Spindle

2nd Worm
Wheel Gear

2nd Worm Gear

Motor

1st Worm 1st Worm Gear

Wheel Gear

When the electric parking brake system has a malfunction and the parking brake cannot be released, you can release the parking
brake by doing the forced cancellation procedure. Refer to the forced cancellation procedure.

Electric Parking Brake Switch

The electric parking brake switch is connected to the VSA modulator-control unit using four separate circuits. The control unit must
see the correct voltage patterns on all 4 circuits, or the switch will be disabled and a DTC will be set.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000972_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Description - Components 972

VSA Modulator-Control Unit

SW1

Apply Release

SW4

SW3

SW6

Electric Parking Brake Switch

Clutch Pedal Stroke Sensor (M/T)

The clutch pedal stroke sensor is located in the clutch pedal assembly. The clutch pedal stroke sensor detects the stroke of clutch
pedal, and outputs two kinds of voltage values depending on the given angle. The VSA modulator-control unit determines the clutch
engagement status from the clutch pedal stroke sensor.
In addition, the VSA modulator-control unit sends the clutch pedal stroke sensor value to the PCM via F-CAN.

Clutch Pedal Stroke Sensor

Clutch Pedal Assembly

4.5

Output
voltage (V)

0.5
0
Angle

NOTE: This illustration is a typical sample of clutch pedal stroke sensor.

Clutch pedal stroke sensor zero point learning (M/T):

The VSA modulator-control unit learns the clutch pedal stroke sensor position when the clutch pedal is fully released. This learning is
automatically performed when the ignition switch is turned on without pressing the clutch pedal after you do any of these actions:
Replacing the VSA modulator-control unit.
Replacing the clutch pedal stroke sensor.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000972_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Description - Components 972

Clutch engagement point learning (M/T)

The clutch engagement point learning is necessary to release the parking brake in an appropriate timing when the drive away assist
function operates.
When starting the vehicle, the learning is automatically performed based on the clutch pedal position signal, the engine speed signal,
and the accelerator pedal position signal. The VSA modulator-control unit learns the clutch pedal position value by calculating the
value from the engine speed changing rate when the accelerator pedal signal is lower than the determined threshold. This learning is
performed several times whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000972_enu 3/3
Electric Parking Brake System Description - System Diagram

This system diagram shows the inputs and outputs of the electric parking brake system.

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index:

VSA modulator-control unit, Wheel speed sensor
Electric parking brake switch, Electric parking brake actuator
PCM
Gauge control module
SRS unit
Electric servo brake control unit

: CAN line

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

PCM

SRS UNIT

ELECTRIC SERVO BRAKE

CONTROL UNIT F-CAN VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

SWITCH

LEFT-REAR ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR

RIGHT-REAR ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR

F-CAN Communication Data

Electric Parking Brake System Receiving Signal
Transmitting Unit Signal Name
PCM
Accelerator pedal position signal

Drive torque signal

Shift position signal

System failure Information

Gauge control module Odometer data

SRS unit Driver's seat belt buckle switch status

Longitudinal acceleration signal

System failure Information

Electric servo brake control unit Parking brake apply request signal

System failure Information

Electric Parking Brake System Transmitting Signal
Transmitting Unit Signal Name
VSA modulator-control unit Parking brake activation status

Hydraulic pressure control request signal

Target deceleration signal

Indicator drive request signal

System operating status

System failure Information

2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Description - System Diagram 971

Electric Parking Brake System Description - System Diagram

This system diagram shows the inputs and outputs of the electric parking brake system.

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index:

VSA modulator-control unit, Wheel speed sensor
Electric parking brake switch, Electric parking brake actuator, Clutch pedal stroke sensor (M/T)
PCM
TCM (A/T, CVT)
Gauge control module
SRS unit
Electric brake booster
Millimeter wave radar (With ACC)

: CAN line

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

PCM

F-CAN
TCM

(AT, CVT)

SRS UNIT

ELECTRIC BRAKE BOOSTER

MILLIMETER WAVE RADAR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT

(With ACC)

WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

CLUTCH PEDAL STROKE

SENSOR

(M/T)

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE

SWITCH

LEFT-REAR ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR

RIGHT-REAR ELECTRIC
PARKING BRAKE ACTUATOR

F-CAN Communication Data

Electric Parking Brake System Receiving Signal

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000971_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Description - System Diagram 971

Transmitting Unit Signal Name

PCM Accelerator pedal position signal

Engine speed signal

Engine torque signal

Neutral position sensor signal*1

TCM*2 Shift position signal

Gauge control module Odometer data

SRS unit
Driver's seat belt buckle switch status

Longitudinal acceleration signal

Electric brake booster

Parking brake apply request signal

Millimeter wave radar*3 Parking brake apply request signal

*1: M/T
*2: A/T, CVT
*3: With ACC

Electric Parking Brake System Transmitting Signal

Transmitting Unit Signal Name
VSA modulator-control unit Indicator drive signal

Parking brake status signal

System operating status signal

System failure Information

Clutch pedal stroke signal*1

*1: M/T

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000971_enu 2/2
Electric Parking Brake System Description

Overview
The electric parking brake system replaces the traditional parking brake pedal or lever and linkage with an electrically controlled
parking brake mechanism in the rear calipers. This reduces driver effort and provides additional features such as:
Simple electric switch operation
Parking brake release upon acceleration
Automatic rollaway prevention

The system is controlled by the VSA modulator-control unit.

Function

The electric parking brake system has the following functions.

Manual Operating Function

Drive Away Assist Function

External Applying Function

Automatic Adjusting
Function
Electric Parking
Brake System
Emergency Brake Function

Parking Brake Cannot Be

Manually Released With
The Ignition In The OFF Mode

Ignition OFF Apply Function

Maintenance Mode Function

Manual Operating Function

The electric parking brake can be manually applied and released using the switch. Pulling up on the electric parking brake switch
applies the parking brake. Firmly applying the brake pedal and pushing down on the electric parking brake switch release it.
Drive Away Assist Function
The electric parking brake is released automatically when the vehicle is driven away from a stop with the driver's seat belt buckled.
Problems in the electric parking brake switch circuits do not affect this function.
External Applying Function
During automatic brake hold or low speed follow control, the electric parking brake operates automatically depending on a request.
Automatic Adjusting Function
Because the parking brake is automatically adjusted whenever applying the parking brake, the parking brake does not require
adjustment. Additionally, if the vehicle is driven 1864 miles (3,000 km) without applying the parking brake, the parking brake is
automatically applied and released while the vehicle is in the OFF (LOCK) mode, and performs the automatic adjustment in order to
compensate for brake pad wear.
Emergency Brake Function
In an emergency situation, such as a failure of the conventional brake system, the electric parking brake system performs the
emergency brake function by activating the electric parking brake switch continuously. There are two controls depending on the state
of the electric servo brake system.
In cases where the electric servo brake system can perform the servo control:
The electric parking brake system sends the brake control request to the electric servo brake system which applies the
emergency brake using the servo control.
In cases where the electric servo brake system can not perform the servo control:
The electric parking brake system controls the electric parking brake actuator so that the wheels do not lock, and applies the
emergency brake instead of the electric servo brake system. However, if wheel speed signal is abnormal, the anti-lock control is
not performed.

The Parking Brake Cannot Be Manually Released With The Ignition In The OFF Mode
In the ignition OFF (LOCK) mode, the system does not allow the manual release of the electric parking brake.
Ignition OFF Apply Function
The electric parking brake system can apply the parking brake automatically when the vehicle is turned to the OFF (LOCK) mode
based on customer preferences. It may be necessary to temporarily cancel this function in certain service procedures. Refer to How to
Temporarily Cancel Automatic Electric Parking Brake or How to Enter Neutral Position Holding Mode. For more information on how to
turn on or off the automatic parking brake function, refer to the owner's manual.
Maintenance Mode
The electric parking brake system has a brake pad maintenance mode functional test. This test fully releases the parking brake
mechanism so that brake service, such as rear pad replacement, can be done. Maintenance mode can be activated by the HDS.
2/8/23, 2:10 AM Electric Parking Brake System Description 970

Electric Parking Brake System Description

Overview
The electric parking brake system replaces the traditional parking brake pedal or lever and linkage with an electrically controlled
parking brake mechanism in the rear calipers. This reduces driver effort and provides additional features such as:
Simple electric switch operation
Parking brake release upon acceleration
Automatic rollaway prevention

The system is controlled by the VSA modulator-control unit.

Function

The electric parking brake system has the following functions.

Manual Operating Function

Drive Away Assist Function

External Applying Function

Automatic Adjusting
Function
Electric Parking
Brake System
Emergency Brake Function

Parking Brake Cannot Be

Manually Released With
The Ignition In The OFF Mode

Ignition OFF Apply Function

Maintenance Mode Function

Manual Operating Function

The electric parking brake can be manually applied and released using the switch. Pulling up on the electric parking brake switch
applies the parking brake. Firmly applying the brake pedal and pushing down on the electric parking brake switch release it.
Drive Away Assist Function
A/T, CVT:
The electric parking brake is released automatically when the vehicle is driven away from a stop with the driver's seat belt
buckled. Problems in the electric parking brake switch circuits do not affect this function.
M/T:
The electric parking brake is released automatically when the vehicle is driven away from a stop with the engine running, the
vehicle in gear, the clutch engaged, and the driver's seat belt buckled. When the electric parking brake control unit confirms the
appropriate amount of engine torque to move the vehicle forward relative to the incline of the slope, the electric parking brake
releases.
Problems in the electric parking brake switch circuits do not affect this function.

External Applying Function

During automatic brake hold or low speed follow control, the electric parking brake operates automatically depending on a request.
Automatic Adjusting Function

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000970_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:10 AM Electric Parking Brake System Description 970
Because the parking brake is automatically adjusted whenever applying the parking brake, the parking brake does not require
adjustment. Additionally, if the vehicle is driven 1864 miles (3,000 km) without applying the parking brake, the parking brake is
automatically applied and released while the vehicle is in the OFF (LOCK) mode, and performs the automatic adjustment in order to
compensate for brake pad wear.
Emergency Brake Function
In an emergency situation, such as a failure of the conventional brake system, the VSA system applies the emergency brake by
activating the electric parking brake switch continuously. There are two controls depending on the state of the VSA system.
In cases where the VSA system can perform the pressure adding control:
The electric parking brake system sends the brake control request to the VSA system which applies the emergency brake using
the pressure adding control.
In cases where the VSA system can not perform the pressure adding control:
The electric parking brake system controls the electric parking brake actuator so that the wheels do not lock, and applies the
emergency brake instead of the VSA system. However, if wheel speed signal is abnormal, the anti-lock control will not function.

The Parking Brake Cannot Be Manually Released With The Ignition In The OFF Mode
In the ignition OFF (LOCK) mode, the system does not allow the manual release of the electric parking brake.
Ignition OFF Apply Function
The electric parking brake system can apply the parking brake automatically when the vehicle is turned to the OFF (LOCK) mode
based on customer preferences. It may be necessary to temporarily cancel this function in certain service procedures. Refer to How to
Temporarily Cancel Automatic Electric Parking Brake or How to Enter Neutral Position Holding Mode (A/T). For more information on
how to turn on or off the automatic parking brake function, refer to the owner's manual.
Ignition OFF Apply Function - Switch Failure (M/T)
If the electric parking brake switch has a fault, the system will automatically apply the parking brake when the vehicle is turned to the
OFF(LOCK) mode.
Maintenance Mode
The electric parking brake system has a brake pad maintenance mode functional test. This test fully releases the parking brake
mechanism so that brake service, such as rear pad replacement, can be done. Maintenance mode can be activated by the HDS.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000970_enu 2/2
Electric Parking Brake System Forced Cancellation

NOTE: Forced cancellation is performed when the system is abnormal and the parking brake cannot be released.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Rear Wheel - Remove

3. Electric Parking Brake Actuator - Remove

4. Parking Brake - Forced Cancel

1. Using a TORX socket, turn the spindle (A) clockwise until

the parking brake is released.
A
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Forced Cancellation 4952

Electric Parking Brake System Forced Cancellation

NOTE: Forced cancellation is performed when the system is abnormal and the parking brake cannot be released.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Rear Wheel - Remove

3. Electric Parking Brake Actuator - Remove

4. Parking Brake - Forced Cancel

1. Using a TORX socket, turn the spindle (A) clockwise until

the parking brake is released.
A

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004952_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) indicator does not come on 1095
Electric Parking Brake System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red)
indicator does not come on

Brake system indicator (red) indicator does not come on

1. Gauge control module operation check:

‐1. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.

Is the gauge control module OK?

YES Go to step 2.

NO Replace the gauge control module.■

2. Open wire check (PARK LAMP line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
Gauge control module connector A (32P)

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector: disconnected
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Test point 1 VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector No. 16
Test point 2 Gauge control module connector A (32P) No. 15

Is there continuity?

YES Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector. If the
symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-control unit.■
NO Repair an open in the wire between the VSA modulator-control unit and the gauge
control module.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001095_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) indicator does not go off 1096
Electric Parking Brake System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red)
indicator does not go off

Brake system indicator (red) indicator does not go off

1. DTC check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

DTC Description DTC

Are there DTCs indicated?

YES Go to indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

NO Go to step 2.

2. Gauge control module operation check:

‐1. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function.

Is the gauge control module OK?

YES Go to step 3.

NO Replace the gauge control module.■

3. Shorted wire check (PARK LAMP line):

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Disconnect the following connectors.

VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
Gauge control module connector A (32P)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001096_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:11 AM Electric Parking Brake System Symptom Troubleshooting - Brake system indicator (red) indicator does not go off 1096

‐3. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector: disconnected
Gauge control module connector A (32P): disconnected
Test point 1 VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector No. 16
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short to body ground in the wire between the VSA modulator-control unit
and the gauge control module.■
NO Check for loose terminals in the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector. If the
symptom/indication is still present, replace the VSA modulator-control unit.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001096_enu 2/2
2/8/23, 2:12 AM Electric Parking Brake System Symptom Troubleshooting Index 1094
Electric Parking Brake System Symptom Troubleshooting Index

Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit.
VSA modulator-control unit or the
vehicle
Brake system indicator (amber) does Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
not come on function.
Brake system indicator (red) indicator Symptom troubleshooting.
does not come on
Brake system indicator (red) indicator Symptom troubleshooting.
does not go off

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T001094_enu 1/1
Electric Powertrain Circuit Diagram

For CAN circuit, refer to the Communication Systems Circuit Diagram for Fuel and
Emissions
PCU
MOTOR CONTROL 12P TRANSMISSION (e-CVT)
MODULE CONNECTOR
3 3
5V PUR
S1G

14 9
YEL
S3G

26 2
BLU
S2G

25 8
LT BLU
12 V S4G

4 1
GRN
R1G
15 7
RED
R2G

R2 R1 S4 S2 S3 S1

6P
CONNECTOR GENERATOR
MOTOR
2
BRN

A
GENERATOR MOTOR
10 3 MOTOR ROTOR
BLU
TMOT POSITION SENSOR

B C D

9 6
PUR
S1M

20 12
LT BLU
S3M

30 5
BLU
S2M

31 11
YEL
S4M

8 4
GRN
R1M TRACTION MOTOR
19 10 TEMPERATURE
PNK SENSOR
R2M
12P
CONNECTOR
R2 R1 S4 S2 S3 S1

TRACTION
MOTOR

TRACTION MOTOR
MOTOR ROTOR
POSITION SENSOR

E F G
 PCU

H I

(-) (+)

MOTOR CONTROL
MODULE

J K REACTOR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
5V SGTL

TL

IPIN

CSDC

SG DC

PROTECTION
CIRCUIT SV DC

L M

N O P Q R S GATE DRIVER BOARD

 PCU
MOTOR CONTROL
MODULE

GOV TRC1
IGA TRC
GND TRC
UH TRC
F15V TRC
SC H TRC
UL TRC
SC L TRC
FB TRC
VH TRC
VL TRC
WH TRC
WL TRC
TUH TRC
TUL TRC
TVH TRC
TVL TRC
TWH TRC
TWL TRC
TCS TRC
SVV2
PN V2
GATE DRIVER BOARD
SGV2
GOV VCU
IGA GEN VCU
GND GEN VCU
VCUFO
OEN2
VCU EN
VCU VPP
VMMT CANH
VMMT CANL
V to M CANH
V to M CANL
GOV GEN
UH GEN
UL GEN
VH GEN
VL GEN
WH GEN
WL GEN
FB GEN
SC H GEN
F15V GEN
SC L GEN
 PCU

MOTOR CONTROL
MODULE J K

DC-DC TEMP G

DC-DC TEMP S

VBU

VIN BU M L

BU TEMP S

BU TEMP G

DC-DC CARRIER

DC-DC VB

DC-DC LR

DC-DC VOOV1

DC-DC VCC ENABLE

DC-DC INH DC-DC CONVERTER

DC-DC TD

GND BU

DC-DC 1 IN

DC-DC GND

DC-DC CTRL POW ON/OFF

DC-DC VB CTL

DC-DC CS CTL
 PCU
MOTOR CONTROL
MODULE GENERATOR N O P
PHASE CURRENT
SENSOR

SVU TRC

SVV TRC

SVW TRC B C D

CSU TRC

CSV TRC

CSW TRC

SGU TRC

SGV TRC

SGW TRC

Q R S
MOTOR PHASE
CURRENT
SENSOR

SVU GEN

SVV GEN

SVW GEN E F G

CSU GEN

CSV GEN

CSW GEN

SGU GEN

SGV GEN

SGW GEN

12
BLK
PG

11
GRN RED
IGA

U
G201
 PCU
: CAN line
MOTOR CONTROL
MODULE A

BRN
17
BRN BRN BRN
SGTEMP
BRN V
2
5V RED
PCU TW SNSR GND PCU
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
16 1 SENSOR
PUR BLU
TWPCU PCU TW SNSR

4
BLU
PCU EWP RLY OUT
W
18 3
YEL BRN
EWP PCU W/P EWP PCU
ELECTRIC
COOLANT
7 2 PUMP
GRY TAN
NEWP PCU W/P NEWP

1
33 BLK GRY
TAN LT BLU GND
IG
PCU EWP
X G201

29 E66
LT GRN PUR YEL NGENPLS PCM
NGENPLS

5
WHT To BATTERY CONDITION MONITOR MODULE, PCM,
F-CAN D_H SBW SHIFTER CONTROL MODULE, CAN GATEWAY,
PARK PAWL ACTUATOR DRIVE UNIT,
6 ACOUSTIC VEHICLE ALERTING
RED CONTROL UNIT
F-CAN D_L

27
GRN
EPP-CAN_H
To BATTERY CONDITION MONITOR MODULE, PCM,
SBW SHIFTER CONTROL MODULE
28
PNK
EPP-CAN_L

BRN
1 TRANSMISSION
FLUID
23 2 TEMPERATURE
RED
TATF SENSOR
 *: IG1A HOT in ON and START mode
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX T
12 VOLT
BATTERY
No. A1 (150 A)

No. A4-4 (60 A)

BODY CONTROL MODULE

No. A27 (10 A) A1
RED +B BACK UP

IG1A
No. A2-1 +B IG RELAY IG1
(30 A) A1 MAIN CIRCUIT* COIL+ B8 C54
GRY WHT IG1 COIL+

RLY
B2 IG1-A GND B4 C47 U
PNK TAN RLY GND

IGHLD 1 C18
RELAY RED
No. A14 +B IG IGA
CIRCUIT
(10 A) C20 HOLD1 C14
BRN RED
IGA
C15
YEL
IG HOLD1
RLY CL-
No. A2-5
(60 A) RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD

+B F/BOX
MAIN2
No. A38
(10 A)

PCU ELECTRIC W X
COOLANT
PUMP RELAY
No. A11
(15 A) PNK GRN
1 2
BLU
PCU EWP
RLY OUT
3 4
LT BLU D1 D2
PCU EWP
RLY CL-
RED
No. B8 No. B32 UNDER-DASH
(10 A) (15 A) FUSE/RELAY
BOX

BATTERY CONDITION B10 +B IG A22

MONITOR MODULE HOLD3
14P
CONNECTOR PNK
E20 12
PUR YEL
IGHLD
E23 7 Y
GRY RED
IGAMONI
E1 8
LT GRN LT GRN LT GRN
+B IGB +B IG HOLD2
E7 13
BLU LT BLU
IG1MONI
LT GRN

Z
F6
BRN
SGTB
BRN BRN BRN BRN BRN

AA AB AC AD AE
BATTERY CONDITION : CAN line
MONITOR MODULE
Z Y

RELAY HOLDER A
LT GRN PNK
IGHLDB RELAY
1 1 2 2 2
TAN LT GRN 14P
+B IGB CONNECTOR
E19 6 4 3 5
GRN LT GRN
IGHLDB +B IGB

BATTERY FAN
RELAY
E2 7 3 4 8
TAN TAN
IGB
3 1 2 4
PNK
IGA2 +B IGA2
HIGH VOLTAGE
BATTERY
MODULE FAN

4
RED IGA2

E24 2
GRN
5V FANCTL
E14 3
PUR
NFAN
1
BLK FAN GND

E21
BLU
IGHLD2 G801

E17
BLK
PG (ECU)

G801

E9 5
WHT PNK
F-CAN D_H
To MOTOR CONTROL MODULE, PCM,
SBW SHIFTER CONTROL MODULE,
CAN GATEWAY,
PARK PAWL ACTUATOR DRIVE UNIT,
ACOUSTIC VEHICLE ALERTING
CONTROL UNIT
E8 10
RED GRN
F-CAN D_L

E11 9
GRN BLU
EPP-CAN_H

To MOTOR CONTROL MODULE, PCM,

SBW SHIFTER CONTROL MODULE

E10 14
PNK GRY
EPP-CAN_L
14P
CONNECTOR
SRS UNIT
E30 6 A1
YEL PUR PUR PUR CDS
CDS
14P
CONNECTOR
 To ELECTRIC A/C
COMPRESSOR
BATTERY CONDITION
MONITOR MODULE

H I

SUBJUNCTION
BOARD
(-) (+)
G851
1 (+)
2 (-) (30 A)

(-) (+)

JUNCTION BOARD
(-) (+)
+ A15 A5 (+)
RED
BATT+
- A4 A1 (-)
BLU
5V BATT-

E28 1
BRN
VCCISOC
E26 2
LT GRN BATTERY
ISOC
E27 3 CURRENT
BLU SENSOR
ISOCF
E29 4
GRY
SGISOC

MAIN
FUSE
BYPASS (175 A)
RESISTOR

HIGH
VOLTAGE BYPASS HIGH
SUB CONTACTOR VOLTAGE
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR
12 V

E5 B1
LT GRN
CNTN
E4 B4
YEL
CNTP
B3

E6 B2
LT BLU
PRE
(-) (+)
GRN

E3
RED
CNTPSIN

2 1

SERVICE AF AG AH AI
PLUG
BATTERY CONDITION AH
MONITOR MODULE AA AB

BATTERY PACK
A4
BRN
F7 A3
RED
5V TBATT2 A2
BRN
F1 A1
WHT
TBATT1 BATTERY
MODULE 1
24P
CONNECTOR IDENTTIFICATION
RESISTOR
F5 12
LT BLU
BATTIND1
24
WHT HIGH
BATTIND1-M VOLTAGE
BATTERY
AJ MODULE
TEMPERATURE
VH1 A23 21 SENSOR 1
GRN
VH3 A24 9
RED
VH5 A25 20
BRN
VH7 A26 8
LT GRN
VH9 A27 19
GRY
VH11 A28 7
YEL
VH13 B1 18
+ GRN
VH15 B2 6
PUR
VH17 B3 17
LT BLU
- VH19 B4 5
PNK
VH21 B5 16
TAN
VH23 B6 4
BLU
VH25 B22 15
RED
VH27 B23 3
BRN
VH29 B24 14
LT GRN
VH31 B25 2
GRY
VH33 B26 13
YEL
VH35 B27 1
GRN

VH0 A8 11
YEL
VH2 A9 1
BLU
VH4 A10 12
PUR
VH6 A11 2
LT BLU
VH8 A12 13
PNK
VH10 A13 3
TAN
VH12 B15 14
BLU
VH14 B16 4
RED
+ VH16 B17 15
BRN
VH18-0 B18 5
LT GRN
- VH20 B19 16
GRY
VH22 B20 6
YEL
VH24 B7 17
GRN
VH26 B8 7
PUR
VH28 B9 18
LT BLU
VH30 B10 8
PNK HIGH
VH32 B11 19
TAN VOLTAGE
VH34 B12 9 BATTERY
BLU MODULE
VH36-0 B13 20
RED TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 2
20P AF
CONNECTOR
BATTERY CONDITION AG
MONITOR MODULE AC AD
BATTERY PACK

5V
B4
BRN
F8 B3
YEL
TBATT4 B2
BRN
F2 B1
GRN
TBATT3 BATTERY
MODULE 2
24P
AE AJ CONNECTOR IDENTTIFICATION
RESISTOR
12
WHT
BATTIND1-M
24
BRN HIGH
VOLTAGE
BATTERY
MODULE
TEMPERATURE
VH37 C1 21 SENSOR 3
BRN
VH39 C2 9
LT GRN
VH41 C3 20
GRY
VH43 C4 8
YEL
VH45 C5 19
GRN
VH47 C6 7
PUR
VH49 C22 18
LT BLU
+ VH51 C23 6
PNK
VH53 C24 17
TAN
- VH55 C25 5
BLU
VH57 C26 16
RED
VH59 C27 4
BRN
VH61 D1 15
LT GRN
VH63 D2 3
GRY
VH65 D3 14
YEL
VH67 D4 2
GRN
VH69 D5 13
PUR
VH71 D6 1
LT BLU

VH36-1 C15 11
PUR
VH38 C16 1
LT BLU
VH40 C17 12
PNK
VH42 C18 2
TAN
VH44 C19 13
BLU
VH46 C20 3
RED
VH48 C7 14
BRN
VH50 C8 4
LT GRN
+ VH52 C9 15
GRY
VH54-0 C10 5
YEL
- VH56 C11 16
GRN
VH58 C12 6
PUR
VH60 D9 17
LT BLU
VH62 D10 7
PNK
VH64 D11 18
TAN
VH66 D12 8
BLU HIGH
VH68 D13 19
RED VOLTAGE
VH70 D14 9 BATTERY
BRN MODULE
VH72 D15 20
LT GRN TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 4
20P AI
CONNECTOR
Electric Powertrain Component Location Index
For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram.
Motor Control System
Battery System

PCU
Removal and Installation
MOTOR CONTROL MODULE
(Built into the PCU)
Update
RADIATOR
Removal and Installation IPU
Test Removal and Installation
Coolant Replacement and Check Disassembly and Reassembly

BATTERY PACK
Removal and Installation
Disassembly and Reassembly

PCU ELECTRIC COOLANT PUMP BATTERY POWER CABLE

Removal and Installation Removal and Installation

COOLING PIPE
Removal and Installation EXPANSION TANK
Removal and Installation
EXPANSION TANK CAP
Test
PCU COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
 PCU ELECTRIC COOLANT PUMP RELAY
Test

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

TRACTION MOTOR
(Built into the TRANSMISSION (e-CVT))
Removal and Installation

GENERATOR MOTOR/
TRACTION MOTOR
MOTOR ROTOR
POSITION SENSOR
Calibration

TRANSMISSION FLUID
TEMPERATURE SENSOR GENERATOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation (Built into the TRANSMISSION (e-CVT))
Removal and Installation
 IPU COVER
Removal and Installation
BATTERY FAN RELAY
Test

RELAY HOLDER A

BATTERY CONDITION
MONITOR MODULE
Removal and Installation
Update

IGHLDB RELAY SERVICE PLUG

Test Turning ON and OFF

IPU CASE
Removal and Installation

JUNCTION BOARD
Removal and Installation
Disassembly and Reassembly

SUBJUNCTION BOARD
Removal and Installation
Disassembly and Reassembly

HIGH VOLTAGE
BATTERY MODULE FAN
Removal and Installation
EV SWITCH
Removal, Installation, and Test
Electric Powertrain Coolant Temperature Sensor Removal and Installation

NOTE: Do not spill the PCU coolant on the surrounding parts. If you spill the PCU coolant , wipe the PCU coolant off
immediately.

1
 3.
12 (1.2, 9)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

Replace
1. Front Bumper - Remove

2. PCU Coolant - Drain

3. PCU Coolant Temperature Sensor - Remove

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

5. PCU Coolant - Refill and Air Bleed

Electric Powertrain DTC Troubleshooting Index

DTC Troubleshooting Index

Motor Control Module
DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting Advanced Diagnostics Note
P0562 Traction Motor Control Module System Voltage Low TRS AD
P0602 Traction Motor Control Module Programming Error TRS AD
P0602 Generator Motor Control Module Programming Error TRS AD
P061B Traction Motor Control Module Torque Calculation Performance TRS AD *1
P062F Traction Motor Control Module EEPROM Error TRS AD
P062F Generator Motor Control Module EEPROM Error TRS AD
P0634 PCU Internal Temperature Too High TRS AD
P06B1 Traction Motor Phase Current Sensor Power Supply Circuit Low (Phase U) TRS AD
P06B1 Generator Motor Phase Current Sensor Power Supply Circuit Low (Phase TRS AD
U)
P06B4 Traction Motor Phase Current Sensor Power Supply Circuit Low (Phase V) TRS AD
P06B4 Generator Motor Phase Current Sensor Power Supply Circuit Low (Phase TRS AD
V)
P06E7 Traction Motor Phase Current Sensor Power Supply Circuit Low (Phase W) TRS AD
P06E7 Generator Motor Phase Current Sensor Power Supply Circuit Low (Phase TRS AD
W)
P0710 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0711 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P0712 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD
P0713 Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P0A1A Generator Motor Control Module(Traction Motor Control Module Detected) TRS AD
P0A1A Generator Motor Control Module TRS AD
P0A1B Traction Motor Control Module TRS AD
P0A2A Traction Motor Temperature Sensor Circuit TRS AD *1
P0A2B Traction Motor Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0A2C Traction Motor Temperature Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD
P0A2D Traction Motor Temperature Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P0A2F Traction Motor Over Temperature TRS AD
P0A3C Traction Motor Inverter Over Temperature TRS AD
P0A3E Generator Motor Inverter Over Temperature TRS AD
P0A3F Traction Motor Rotor Position Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P0A40 Traction Motor Rotor Position Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0A41 Traction Motor Rotor Position Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD
P0A4B Generator Motor Rotor Position Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P0A4C Generator Motor Rotor Position Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0A4D Generator Motor Rotor Position Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD
P0A5E Traction Motor Phase U Current Low TRS AD
P0A5F Traction Motor Phase U Current High TRS AD
P0A61 Traction Motor Phase V Current Low TRS AD
P0A62 Traction Motor Phase V Current High TRS AD
P0A64 Traction Motor Phase W Current Low TRS AD
P0A65 Traction Motor Phase W Current High TRS AD
*1: This DTC code does not store individually. Details depend on other DTC codes stored at the same time.
 DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting Advanced Diagnostics Note
P0A70 Generator Motor Phase U Current Low TRS AD
P0A71 Generator Motor Phase U Current High TRS AD
P0A73 Generator Motor Phase V Current Low TRS AD
P0A74 Generator Motor Phase V Current High TRS AD
P0A76 Generator Motor Phase W Current Low TRS AD
P0A77 Generator Motor Phase W Current High TRS AD
P0A78 Traction Motor Inverter Performance TRS AD *1
P0A7A Generator Motor Inverter Performance(Traction Motor Control Module TRS AD *1
Detected)
P0A7A Generator Motor Inverter Performance TRS AD *1
P0A90 Traction Motor Performance TRS AD
P0A92 Generator Motor Performance TRS AD
P0AED Traction Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit TRS AD
P0AEE Traction Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0AEF Traction Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low TRS AD
P0AF0 Traction Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High TRS AD
P0AF2 Traction Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit TRS AD
P0AF3 Traction Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0AF4 Traction Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit Low TRS AD
P0AF5 Traction Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit High TRS AD
P0BCC Generator Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P0BCD Generator Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0BCE Generator Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD
P0BCF Generator Motor Inverter Temperature Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P0BE6 Traction Motor Phase U Current Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0BEA Traction Motor Phase V Current Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0BEE Traction Motor Phase W Current Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0BFD Traction Motor Phase U-V-W Current Sensor Correlation TRS AD *1
P0C0C Traction Motor Inverter Power Supply Circuit Low TRS AD
P0C39 DC-DC Converter Temperature Sensor Range/Performance TRS AD
P0C3A DC-DC Converter Temperature Sensor Low TRS AD
P0C3B DC-DC Converter Temperature Sensor High TRS AD
P0C4E Traction Motor Rotor Position Exceeded Learning Limit TRS AD
P0CE9 PCU Electric Coolant Pump Control Circuit Open TRS AD *1
P0CEA PCU Electric Coolant Pump Performance TRS AD *1
P0CED PCU Electric Coolant Pump Enable Circuit TRS AD
P0CEE PCU Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P0CEF PCU Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0CF0 PCU Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD
P0CF1 PCU Coolant Temperature Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P0D32 DC-DC Converter Over Temperature (Traction Motor Control Module TRS AD
Detected)
P0DFA Generator Motor Phase U-V-W Current Sensor Correlation TRS AD *1
P0DFB Generator Motor Rotor Position Sensor Exceeding Learn Limit TRS AD
P0E01 Generator Motor Phase U Current Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0E05 Generator Motor Phase V Current Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
*1: This DTC code does not store individually. Details depend on other DTC codes stored at the same time.
 DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting Advanced Diagnostics Note
P0E09 Generator Motor Phase W Current Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0E56 DC-DC Converter Voltage Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD
P0E57 DC-DC Converter Voltage Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P1437 Traction Motor Inverter Short TRS AD
P1440 Traction Motor Inverter Gate Line Open TRS AD
P15A5 Traction Motor Inverter Current Too High TRS AD
P1A54 Traction Motor Control Module Torque Control Performance TRS AD
P1A55 Traction Motor Control Module Torque Adjustment Performance TRS AD
P1A56 Traction Motor Current Too High TRS AD
P1A57 Traction Motor Phase Current Sensor TRS AD
P1A63 VCU V2 Voltage Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P1A64 PCU Internal Failure (Communication Error) TRS AD
P1A65 Motor Inverter Internal Failure TRS AD
P1A87 VCU V0 Voltage Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Over Voltage Range) TRS AD
P1A88 VCU V1 Voltage Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Under Voltage TRS AD
Range)
P1A89 VCU V1 Voltage Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Over Voltage Range) TRS AD
P1D05 Traction Motor Control Module Internal Communication Failure TRS AD
P1D11 Traction Motor Phase Current Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P1D13 Generator Motor Phase Current Sensor Range/Performance TRS AD
P1D18 Traction Motor Temperature Sense Failure TRS AD
P1D1B VCU V2S Voltage Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P1D1C VCU V2S Voltage Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P1D1D VCU V0 Voltage Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD
P1D6E Traction Motor Temperature Sensor Circuit Performance TRS AD
P1D70 Traction Motor Phase Current Sensor Multiple Performance TRS AD
P1D72 Traction Motor Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Lo Side) TRS AD
P1D77 VCU I1 Current Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P1D78 VCU I1 Current Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD
P1D79 VCU I1 Current Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P1D7A Reactor Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem TRS AD
P1D7B Reactor Over Temperature (Traction Motor Control Module Detected) TRS AD
P1D7D Reactor Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low TRS AD
P1D7E Reactor Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High TRS AD
P1D7F Generator Motor Inverter Malfunction Signal Low (Generator Motor Control TRS AD
Module Detected)
P1D81 VCU Malfunction Signal Low (Traction Motor Control Module Detected) TRS AD
P1D85 Traction Motor Inverter Malfunction Signal Low (Traction Motor Control TRS AD
Module Detected)
P1D8A Generator Motor Inverter Gate Line Open TRS AD
P1D8C Generator Motor Inverter Over Current TRS AD
P1D8D Generator Motor Inverter Short TRS AD
P1D92 PCU Electric Coolant Pump Control Circuit TRS AD
P1D93 PCU Coolant Over Temperature TRS AD
P1D97 Generator Motor Phase Current Sensors Multiple Failure TRS AD
P1D99 PCU Electric Coolant Pump TRS AD
*1: This DTC code does not store individually. Details depend on other DTC codes stored at the same time.
 DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting Advanced Diagnostics Note
P1D9A PCU Electric Coolant Pump Circuit TRS AD
P1D9D VCU Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P1DA0 VCU Inverter Temperature Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD
P1DA1 VCU Inverter Temperature Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P1DA4 VCU Inverter Short TRS AD
P1DA6 VCU V1 Voltage Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P1DA8 VCU V2M Voltage Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P1DAA VCU V2S Voltage Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P1DD8 VCU Inverter Temperature Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P1DD9 VCU I1 Current Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P1DDB Reactor Temperature Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P1DE3 VCU V1 Voltage Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P1DE4 VCU V1 Voltage Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P1DE5 VCU V2M Voltage Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P1DE6 VCU V2M Voltage Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P1DE7 VCU V0 Voltage Sensor Circuit High TRS AD
P1DE8 VCU V0 Voltage Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P1DE9 VCU V0 Voltage Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P1DEA VCU V0 Voltage Control Failure TRS AD
P1F3C VCU Over Temperature TRS AD
P2ECB Generator Motor Performance TRS AD
U0029 F-CAN Malfunction (Traction Motor Control Module Bus-Off) TRS AD
U0038 EP-CAN Malfunction (Traction Motor Control Module Bus-Off) TRS AD
U0100 CAN Malfunction (Traction Motor Control Module - PCM) TRS AD *1
U0111 CAN Malfunction (Traction Motor Control Module - Battery Condition TRS AD *1
Monitor Module)
U0146 F-CAN Malfunction (Traction Motor Control Module - CAN Gateway) TRS AD
U0311 Traction Motor Control Module Programming Error (Version Mismatch) TRS AD
U1204 EP-CAN Malfunction (Traction Motor Control Module - PCM) TRS AD
U1206 EP-CAN Malfunction (Traction Motor Control Module - Battery Condition TRS AD
Monitor Module)
U1600 F-CAN Malfunction (Traction Motor Control Module - PCM) TRS AD
U1603 F-CAN Malfunction (Traction Motor Control Module - Battery Condition TRS AD
Monitor Module)
*1: This DTC code does not store individually. Details depend on other DTC codes stored at the same time.

Battery Condition Monitor Module

DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting Advanced Diagnostics Note
P0562 Battery Condition Monitor Module System Voltage Low TRS AD
P0602 Battery Condition Monitor Module Programming Error TRS AD
P062F Battery Condition Monitor Module EEPROM Error TRS AD *1
P06B1 HV Battery Current Sensor Power Supply Circuit Low TRS AD
P0A1F Battery Condition Monitor Module TRS AD
P0A7E HV Battery Pack Over Temperature TRS AD
P0A7F HV Battery Pack Deterioration TRS AD *1
P0A80 Replace HV Battery Pack TRS AD
P0A82 HV Battery Pack Cooling Fan Performance/Stuck Off TRS AD
P0A94 DC-DC Converter Performance TRS AD
P0A9B HV Battery Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit TRS AD
P0A9C HV Battery Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
*1: This DTC code does not store individually. Details depend on other DTC codes stored at the same time.
*2: '18-19 models
*3: '20-22 models
 DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting Advanced Diagnostics Note
P0A9D HV Battery Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low TRS AD
P0A9E HV Battery Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High TRS AD
P0AA1 HV Battery Main Contactor Circuit Stuck Closed TRS AD
P0AA3 HV Battery Sub Contactor Circuit TRS AD
P0AA6 HV Battery Voltage System Isolation Fault TRS AD
P0AA7 HV Battery Voltage Isolation Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P0ABF HV Battery Pack Current Sensor Circuit TRS AD *1
P0AC0 HV Battery Pack Current Sensor Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD *1
P0AC1 HV Battery Pack Current Sensor Circuit Low TRS AD *1
P0AC2 HV Battery Pack Current Sensor Circuit High TRS AD *1
P0AC3 HV Battery Pack Current Sensor Circuit Intermittent/Erratic TRS AD *1
P0AC5 HV Battery Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit TRS AD
P0AC6 HV Battery Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0AC7 HV Battery Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit Low TRS AD
P0AC8 HV Battery Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit High TRS AD
P0ACA HV Battery Temperature Sensor 3 Circuit TRS AD
P0ACB HV Battery Temperature Sensor 3 Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0ACC HV Battery Temperature Sensor 3 Circuit Low TRS AD
P0ACD HV Battery Temperature Sensor 3 Circuit High TRS AD
P0AE1 HV Battery Precharge Contactor Circuit TRS AD
P0AE8 HV Battery Temperature Sensor 4 Circuit TRS AD
P0AE9 HV Battery Temperature Sensor 4 Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P0AEA HV Battery Temperature Sensor 4 Circuit Low TRS AD
P0AEB HV Battery Temperature Sensor 4 Circuit High TRS AD
P0AFA HV Battery System Voltage Low TRS AD
P0B3B HV Battery Cell Voltage Sense Circuit 1 TRS AD
P0B40 HV Battery Cell Voltage Sense Circuit 2 TRS AD
P0B45 HV Battery Cell Voltage Sense Circuit 3 TRS AD
P0B4A HV Battery Cell Voltage Sense Circuit 4 TRS AD
P0B4F HV Battery Cell Voltage Sense Circuit 5 TRS AD
P0B54 HV Battery Cell Voltage Sense Circuit 6 TRS AD
P0D32 DC-DC Converter Over Temperature (Battery Condition Monitor Module TRS AD
Detected)
P0DA8 HV Battery Voltage/Motor Inverter Voltage Correlation TRS AD
P0DE6 HV Battery Pack Voltage Low TRS AD
P0DE7 HV Battery Pack Voltage High TRS AD
P0E2D HV Battery Cell Voltage Sense Circuit TRS AD
P1447 HV Battery Pack Deterioration (Middle Severity) TRS AD
P144A HV Battery Pack Deterioration (High Severity) TRS AD
P1586 HV Battery Current Sensor TRS AD
P158A HV Battery Current Sensor Correlation TRS AD
P158B HV Battery Current Sensor 1 Circuit TRS AD
P158D HV Battery Current Sensor 1 Circuit Low TRS AD
P158E HV Battery Current Sensor 2 Circuit Low TRS AD
P158F HV Battery Current Sensor 1 Circuit High TRS AD
P1596 HV Battery Current Sensor 2 Circuit High TRS AD
P1597 HV Battery Current Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
P1598 HV Battery Current Sensor 2 Circuit Range/Performance TRS AD
*1: This DTC code does not store individually. Details depend on other DTC codes stored at the same time.
*2: '18-19 models
*3: '20-22 models
 DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting Advanced Diagnostics Note
P1673 IGHLD Relay Circuit TRS AD
P16C3 DC-DC Converter Temperature Sensor Circuit TRS AD
P1D3A Battery Condition Monitor Module EEPROM Error (FSA Operated) TRS AD
P1D3B Battery Condition Monitor Module EEPROM Error (FSA Not-Operated) TRS AD
P1D64 Collision Detection Signal Circuit TRS AD
P1D65 HV System Shutdown (Collision Detection Signal Detected) TRS AD
P1DC7 HV Battery Pack Deterioration of Power TRS AD
P1DCB HV Battery Identification Circuit (System Running) TRS AD
P1DFD Power System Indicator Lighting Request From PCM TRS AD
P1DFF IGHLDB Relay Circuit TRS AD
P262B Battery Condition Monitor Module Timer TRS AD
U0029 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module Bus-Off) TRS AD
U0038 EP-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module Bus-Off) TRS AD
U0100 CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - PCM) TRS AD *1
U0110*2 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - Traction Motor TRS AD
Control Module)
U0110*3 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - Traction Motor TRS AD *1
Control Module)
U012D*2 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - Generator Motor TRS AD
Control Module)
U012D*3 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - Generator Motor TRS AD *1
Control Module)
U0146 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - CAN Gateway) TRS AD
U0155 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - Gauge Control TRS AD
Module)
U0298 DC-DC Converter Communication Error TRS AD *1
U0312 Battery Condition Monitor Module Programming Error (Version Mismatch) TRS AD
U0599 DC-DC Converter Serial Communication Receive Error TRS AD
U1204 EP-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - PCM) TRS AD
U1205 EP-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - Traction Motor TRS AD
Control Module)
U1207 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - Electric A/C TRS AD
Compressor)
U1220 DC-DC Converter Serial Communication Transmit Error TRS AD
U12A5 EP-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - Generator Motor TRS AD
Control Module)
U1600 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - PCM) TRS AD
U1604 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - Traction Motor TRS AD
Control Module)
U1605 F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor Module - Traction Motor TRS AD
Control Module)
*1: This DTC code does not store individually. Details depend on other DTC codes stored at the same time.
*2: '18-19 models
*3: '20-22 models
Electric Powertrain Service Precautions

General Information
Electric powertrain system uses high voltage circuits and an organic solution (lithium-ion) contained battery module. Improper
handling may cause serious injury such as electrocution. When working on or around the electric powertrain system, pay attention to
the following precautions.
Preparation items
Protective items (insulated gloves or rubber gloves, protective goggles, protective shoes)
ABC fire extinguisher (available for both oil fires and electric fires)
Shop towels (for wiping off the electrolyte)
Insulating tape
Precautions when Working on High Voltage Areas

Be careful not to let the electrolyte get into your eyes or contact your skin. Doing so may cause loss of your eyesight or skin damage.
If electrolyte gets into your eyes or comes into contact with your skin, immediately flush with a large amount of water and seek
medical attention.

Wear insulated gloves and use insulated tools to protect you from electrical shock. When removing or installing high voltage
items, always use them. Wrap the high voltage items with insulating tape after removing. Please be careful when you see on
the illustration.
Always inspect protective equipment for holes, tears, or other damage.
Keep uniform pockets free of items, especially tools and metallic objects. Items may fall out and fall on to exposed high-voltage
parts, creating a hazard.
As a safety warning, attach a sign saying, WORKING ON HIGH-VOLTAGE PARTS. DO NOT TOUCH! to the steering wheel.
Be sure to shut off the electrical circuits and isolate the electric powertrain system and related parts before servicing the electric
powertrain system. (Refer to ''Turning Off and ON Power to the High Voltage Circuit'' below)
The high voltage cables and their covers are identified by orange coloring. The caution labels are attached to high voltage and
other related parts.
Do not touch bare wires that could carry a high-voltage. If you must touch them, put on insulated gloves, and measure the voltage
between the body grounds. If the voltage is above the 12 volt battery voltage, insulate the part with insulating tape before
performing an operation to prevent shorting the battery module.
When insulating a high voltage area with insulating tape, be sure to cover it thoroughly.
Check around the battery module for electrolyte leaks and adhesion before starting your work. If you encounter a leak, you must
wear insulated protective equipment (protective eyeglasses, insulated gloves, insulated shoes, and insulating tools) as it may
cause electrical shock.
Organic electrolyte is poisonous. If ingested, get medical attention immediately.
Keep sparks and flames away from the battery module, leaking electrolyte from the battery is flammable. Always work in a well
ventilated area.
Strong impact (i.e., dropping the high voltage battery, collision damage) may cause electrolyte leaks, internal short circuits and
heat increase resulting in fire. Avoid impact to the high voltage battery.
Do not disassemble the battery module when doing a repair or replacement procedure.
Seal the replaced battery module and any shop towels or rags used to wipe the electrolyte in a P.P. (Polypropylene) bag, and
keep it in a well-ventilated area away from sparks and flames. Make sure to dispose these items according to local regulations.
Inspect all high voltage related parts near the battery module for electrolyte. If you find electrolyte, you must replace the part(s).
Updating Control Units
NOTE:
When updating control units, use the most current version of the HDS software and interface device. Check any official service
information website for more information about updating control units.
High temperature in the motor compartment might cause the motor control module (built into the PCU) to become too hot to run
the update. If the motor has been running before this procedure, open the hood and cool the motor compartment.

The following control units can be updated.

 Motor control module (built into the PCU)
Battery condition monitor module
Collision Shut-off History Clear Command
When the battery condition monitor module receives a collision detection signal (CDS) from the SRS unit, the battery condition
monitor module updates the collision shutoff history, and stores it in the nonvolatile memory located inside the module. The battery
condition monitor module stops supplying power to the high-voltage circuits disrupting the control signal to be sent to the high-voltage
contactor inside the battery module the next time the system is being turned on. To resume power supply to the high-voltage circuits,
the collision shutoff history needs to be cleared. Do the following procedures to clear the collision shutoff history.

1. Inspect the battery module for exterior damage or leaks. If any damage or leaks are found, contact American Honda Motor Co.
(AHM) 800-555-3497. If no damage is found, go to step 2.

2. Check the battery high voltage wires (orange coated) for damage. If any damage is found, replace the damaged wire harness or
component, then go to step 3.

3. Connect the HDS.

4. Select the Electric Powertrain system with the HDS.

5. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

Other Precautions
High temperature may damage the battery module. When drying paint in a heated paint booth, make sure the temperature does not
exceed 149 °F (65 °C).
No-Load Charging Procedure
The expected life span of the high voltage battery can be affected if the vehicle is not used for a long time. To reduce this risk, perform
the charging procedure within at least 12 months.
-1. Apply the parking brake, and block the front wheels.
-2. Firmly press the brake pedal, and turn the vehicle to the READY TO DRIVE mode.
-3. Make sure the transmission is in N or P position/mode.
-4. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor for 10 seconds while pressing the brake pedal.
After 10 seconds, the vehicle starts the engine and holds the engine speed at 1,200 rpm automatically for high voltage battery
charging.
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal and brake pedal during high voltage battery charging.
After the high voltage battery charging is completed, the engine stops automatically.

-5. After engine stops, turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.
Turning Off and On Power to the High Voltage Circuit
The following procedure should be done before you work on or near any energized high voltage components. Follow the procedure
exactly. Otherwise, you may be injured or may damage equipment.

NOTE: Wear insulated gloves and use insulated tools to protect you from electrical shock. When removing or installing high voltage
items, always use them. Wrap the high voltage items with insulating tape after removing. Please be careful when you see on the
illustration.

Turning Off the Service Plug

NOTE:
Secure the service plug in a safe location to prevent other personnel from installing the service plug while the vehicle is being
repaired or serviced.
If the service plug is damaged, replace it.

1. Connect the HDS.

2. Select the Electric Powertrain system with the HDS.

3. Check the DTC and note it if any DTCs are stored.

4. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, then put the remote away to avoid malfunction.

5. Do the 12 volt battery negative terminal disconnection procedure.

6. Remove the rear seat cushion.

7. Remove the service plug cover (A).

8. Pushing and sliding the tab (A) in the direction of the arrow.

9. Raise the lever (A).

 A

10. Remove the service plug (A).

11. Wrap the service plug base (A) with insulating tape.

12. Do the 12 volt battery negative terminal reconnection procedure.

13. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

14. Select the Electric Powertrain system with the HDS.

15. Check the Motor Inverter Voltage (GEN) in the Data List with the HDS, then make sure it is 30 V or less.

16. Do the 12 volt battery negative terminal disconnection procedure.

Turning On the Service Plug

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

1. Remove insulating tape and insert the service plug (A) as shown.

2. Lower the lever (A).

3. Slide the tab (A) in the direction of the arrow while holding the lever, then lock the service plug.
 A

4. Install the service plug cover (A).

9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

A

5. Install the rear seat cushion.

6. Do the 12 volt battery negative terminal reconnection procedure.

Disconnecting and Reconnecting the Connector
NOTE:
If the outside of the power cable connector is dirty, clean it before you disconnect it.
Cover the disconnected connector with a plastic bag, and wrap the battery module power cable terminals with insulating tape.
If the power cable is wet, dry it with a clean shop towel. Do not use compressed air.

Lever-Locked Connector

1. Disconnect the connector (A) by releasing the lock (B) and sliding the lever (C) in the direction of the arrow.
 C
B A

Slider-Locked Connector

1. Slide the slider (A) in the direction of the arrow, then disconnect the connector (B) while pushing the tab (C).

B
C

2. Wrap the items with insulating tape (A).

How to Cable Connector Bolt Replacement

Removal procedure

NOTE: When replacing the connector bolt, replace a whole cable too if there is any damage, scratch, or coating deterioration on the
aluminum portion of the connector or resin parts.

1. Apply protective tape (A) to the connector as shown.

 A

This illustration shows an example.

2. Adjust the position of the bolt clip (A) as shown. By using pliers (B), move the clip a bit toward the arrow as shown.

A
B
This illustration shows an example.

3. Put 2 long nose pliers onto the areas as shown and remove the bolt clip by gripping the pliers tightly. Then, remove the bolt.

This illustration shows an example.

Installation procedure

1. Place the bolt clip as shown. Put pliers onto the areas (A) as shown and install the clip by gripping the pliers tightly.
NOTE: Install the bolt clip into a groove, not into a screw thread.
 A

This illustration shows an example.

Electric Powertrain Symptom Troubleshooting - Charging indicator comes on faintly, no DTCs set

1. The charging indicator may faintly illuminate when the vehicle is in READY TO DRIVE mode
during extremely cold weather -22°F (-30°C). As the battery module temperature increases,
the charging indicator will turn off.
Electric Powertrain Symptom Troubleshooting - Charging indicator never comes on, no
DTCs set

Charging indicator never comes on, no DTCs set

1. HDS communication check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Connect the HDS to the DLC.

‐3. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, and read the HDS

Does the HDS identify the vehicle?

YES Go to step 2.

NO Do the DLC circuit troubleshooting.■

2. Gauge control module check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function.

Does the charging indicator flash?

YES Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

NO Substitute a known-good gauge control module, then recheck. If the

symptom/indication goes away with a known-good gauge control module, replace
the original gauge control module.■
Electric Powertrain Symptom Troubleshooting - Charging system indicator stays on, no
DTCs set

Charging system indicator stays on, no DTCs set

1. PGM-FI system DTC check:

‐1. Check for Pending or Confirmed DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
DTC Description Confirmed Pending
DTC DTC

Are any Pending or Confirmed DTCs indicated?

YES The failure is duplicated. Go to the troubleshooting for PGM-FI system DTC(s).■

NO Go to step 2.

2. Problem verification 1:

‐1. Check the parameter(s) below with the HDS.

Signal Threshold Current conditions
Values Unit Values Unit
History of DC-DC Converter 1
Stop 2

Does the current condition(s) match the threshold?

 YES The system is OK at this time. The charging system indicator will turn off when the
state-of charge (SOC) increases.■
NO Go to step 3.

3. Problem verification 2:

‐1. Check the parameter(s) below with the HDS.

Signal Current conditions
Values Unit
DC-DC Converter Temperature

Is 217 °F (103 °C) or more indicated?

YES The system is OK at this time. The charging system indicator will turn off when the
DC-DC converter temperature decreases.■
NO Go to step 4.

4. Problem verification 3:

‐1. Check the parameter(s) below with the HDS.

Signal Threshold Current conditions
Values Unit Values Unit
HV Battery Total Voltage 180-310 V

Does the current condition(s) match the threshold?

YES Go to step 5.

NO The system is OK at this time. The charging system indicator will turn on when the
DC-DC converter temperature increases or over the operating voltage range
temporary.■
5. Gauge control module check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

‐2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function.

Does the charge indicator flash?

YES Replace the PCU.■

NO Substitute a known-good gauge control module, then recheck. If the

symptom/indication goes away with a known-good gauge control module, replace
the original gauge control module.■
Electric Powertrain Symptom Troubleshooting - POWER SYSTEM indicator never comes
on, no DTCs set

POWER SYSTEM indicator never comes on, no DTCs set

1. Gauge control module check:

‐1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function.

Does the POWER SYSTEM indicator flash?

YES Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

NO Substitute a known-good gauge control module, then recheck. If the

symptom/indication goes away with a known-good gauge control module, replace
the original gauge control module.■
Electric Powertrain Symptom Troubleshooting - POWER SYSTEM indicator stays on, no
DTCs set

POWER SYSTEM indicator stays on, no DTCs set

1. HDS communication check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Connect the HDS to the DLC.

‐3. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode, and read the HDS.

Does the HDS identify the vehicle?

YES Go to step 2.

NO Do the DLC circuit troubleshooting.■

2. Gauge control module check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function.

Does the POWER SYSTEM indicator flash?

YES Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.■

NO Substitute a known-good gauge control module, then recheck. If the

symptom/indication goes away with a known-good gauge control module, replace
the original gauge control module.■
Electric Powertrain Symptom Troubleshooting - The word (High Voltage Battery Charge
Too Low, Vehicle Cannot Start) is indicated on the multi-information display

The word (High Voltage Battery Charge Too Low, Vehicle Cannot Start) is
indicated on the multi-information display
1. Diagnostic interview (lack of fuel):

‐1. Interview to the customer; Before the failure, the vehicle lacked fuel.

Fuel is lacked before the failure?

YES Check the fuel level on the gauge. If it is OK, enter the maintenance mode to
charge the high voltage battery.■
NO Go to the symptom troubleshooting in the fuel and emissions systems.■
NOTE: This vehicle has a fail-safe function that leave the SOC of the high-voltage
battery when the generation function has failed. To start the engine by
maintenance mode if you want to use the SOC of the high voltage battery in the
vehicle maintenance. At that time, make sure the SOC of the high voltage battery.
Electric Powertrain Symptom Troubleshooting Index

Symptom Troubleshooting Index

When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the
HDS. If there is no DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom in the sequence listed until
you find the cause.

Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Vehicle does not go into READY Troubleshoot the PCM power and ground circuits. No power to
TO DRIVE mode, and HDS PCM
does not communicate with the
No ground to
PCM (POWER SYSTEM
indicator comes on and stays PCM
on) Short in
reference
voltage circuit
POWER SYSTEM indicator Symptom troubleshooting.
stays on, no DTCs set
POWER SYSTEM indicator Symptom troubleshooting.
never comes on, no DTCs set
Charging system indicator stays Symptom troubleshooting.
on, no DTCs set
Charging indicator comes on Symptom troubleshooting.
faintly, no DTCs set
Charging indicator never comes Symptom troubleshooting.
on, no DTCs set
The word (High Voltage Battery Symptom troubleshooting.
Charge Too Low, Vehicle
Cannot Start) is indicated on the
multi-information display
Vehicle will not operate on Check the immobilizer system.
either electric motor or gasoline
engine (POWER SYSTEM
indicator works OK, no DTCs
set, immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
HDS does not communicate Troubleshoot the DLC circuit. Correct HDS
with the Electric Powertrain software
System
Electric Powertrain System Description - Components

EV Switch
The EV switch allows the driver to select EV driving mode when vehicle conditions allow for the use of EV driving mode.
When the EV switch is pressed, the PCM determines if the current vehicle condition is capable of driving in EV driving mode.
If EV driving mode drive is possible, the driving mode changes to EV driving mode, and the EV mode indicator on the gauge control
module illuminates.
If EV driving mode is not possible, the vehicle is kept in current hybrid driving mode, and the reason is displayed in the gauge control
module.
Electric Powertrain System Description - Overview

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index.

The electric powertrain system is powered by high voltage motors and the engine. The system switches the driving power depending
on driving conditions or by the manual operation of the EV switch and enables driving with the use of optimal available power.
Major components are the engine, the two high voltage motors, the power control unit (PCU), the high voltage battery, and the battery
power cable.

Driving Modes
The electric powertrain system has the following driving modes: EV driving mode, HV driving mode, and engine driving mode.
The available driving modes are determined and selected by the PCM depending on the vehicle's current condition.
EV driving mode can be manually selected by the driver and is available based on current vehicle condition.
When the vehicle is driven at low speeds, and during regenerative braking, the electric powertrain system operates in the EV driving
mode.
During high-load conditions such as acceleration, the system switches to an HV driving mode that use both the electric motor and the
internal combustion engine.
At high speeds, the system enters the engine driving mode, using the gasoline engine to propel the vehicle.

EV DRIVING MODE HV DRIVING MODE ENGINE DRIVING MODE

BATTERY CHARGING

START HIGH SPEED CRUISE

ENGINE

ACCELERATION

TRACTION
MOTOR
GENERATOR
MOTOR HIGH VOLTAGE
BATTERY

EV Driving Mode
When EV driving mode has been selected, the vehicle's drive propulsion and regenerative braking is performed by the traction motor
only.
The EV driving mode operates at a specific vehicle speed range and during low load conditions. The operating range is 0 mph (0
km/h) - 80 mph (130 km/h), depending on the driving force and battery state of charge.
 ECVT ASSIST MODE

ENGINE DRIVE MODE

DRIVING ECVT
FORCE CHARGE
[N] MODE

EV DRIVING MODE
0
0
VEHICLE SPEED [mph (km/h)]

・EV Idle Stop Mode

During EV idle stop mode, the traction motor, generator motor, and engine are all stopped. At this time, the high voltage battery
supplies power to various devices of the vehicle.

VEHICLE
SPEED

TRACTION STOPPED
MOTOR

GENERATOR STOPPED
MOTOR

ENGINE STOPPED

HIGH VOLTAGE
BATTERY DISCHARGE

DRIVE EV IDLE STOP

MODE MODE

・EV Drive Mode

During EV drive mode, the traction motor supplies driving force.

The generator motor and the engine do not operate. At this time, the high voltage battery energizes the traction motor.
 VEHICLE
SPEED

TRACTION RUNNING
MOTOR

GENERATOR
MOTOR STOPPED

ENGINE STOPPED

HIGH VOLTAGE
BATTERY DISCHARGE

DRIVE EV DRIVE
MODE MODE

・Regeneration Mode

The regenerative charging mode is used during deceleration.

The engine and generator motor are in a stopped condition, and the traction motor generates power that is supplied to the high
voltage battery.

VEHICLE
SPEED

TRACTION
MOTOR REGENERATING

GENERATOR STOPPED
MOTOR

ENGINE STOPPED

HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING

BATTERY

DRIVE REGENERATION
MODE MODE

HV Driving Mode

While driving in the HV driving mode during acceleration, the engine powers the vehicle by activating the generator motor to generate
power.
The generated power is used to activate the traction motor to drive the vehicle.
Depending on the battery’s state of charge and the load condition of the traction motor, the high voltage battery is recharged while
driving.
 ECVT ASSIST MODE

ENGINE DRIVE MODE

DRIVING ECVT
FORCE CHARGE
[N] MODE

EV DRIVING MODE
0
0
VEHICLE SPEED [mph (km/h)]

・ECVT Charge Mode

The ECVT charge mode is used at vehicle speed ranges suitable for charging, and its activation range varies depending on the state
of charge of the high voltage battery.
During ECVT charge mode, the engine energizes the generator motor to send electric power to the high voltage battery.
The traction motor provides driving power to the drive wheel, using the electric power from generator motor.
The engine is actively controlled to operate at optimum RPM ranges according to driving conditions.
The generator motor generates more power than what is required by the traction motor to drive the vehicle.
Generated power not used by the traction motor is used to recharge the high voltage battery.

VEHICLE
SPEED

TRACTION RUNNING
MOTOR

GENERATOR GENERATING
MOTOR

ENGINE RUNNING

HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING

BATTERY
DRIVE ECVT CHARGE
MODE MODE

・ECVT Assist Mode

The ECVT assist mode is primarily used during acceleration, and its activation range varies depending on the high voltage battery
state of charge.
The driving power during ECVT assist mode is similar to that of the ECVT drive mode.
The engine energizes the generator motor, and the traction motor provides the driving power to the drive wheel.
During ECVT assist mode, the traction motor sends a large amount of torque to the drive wheel, therefore requiring more electric
power as compared with other modes.
The engine activates the generator at optimum RPM ranges, and available electric power is used directly by the traction motor.
If the generator motor generates insufficient power to accommodate the needs of the traction motor, additional power is supplied from
the high voltage battery.

VEHICLE
SPEED

TRACTION RUNNING
MOTOR
GENERATOR
MOTOR GENERATING

ENGINE RUNNING

HIGH VOLTAGE DISCHARGING

BATTERY
DRIVE ECVT ASSIST
MODE MODE

Engine Driving Mode

The engine driving mode uses the power of the engine only at high speeds and low loads.
The engine driving mode is primarily used during high-speed cruising.
The operating range of the engine driving mode varies depending on the high voltage battery state of charge, driving force conditions
and current speed of the vehicle.

ECVT ASSIST MODE

ENGINE DRIVE MODE

DRIVING ECVT
FORCE CHARGE
[N] MODE

EV DRIVING MODE
0
0
VEHICLE SPEED [mph (km/h)]
Engine Drive Mode

During engine drive mode, the engine output is supplied to the drive wheel and the traction motor.
This allows the vehicle to be mechanically driven by the engine, while the high voltage battery is charged with power created by the
traction motor.
The generator motor is not operated during engine drive mode.

VEHICLE
SPEED

TRACTION GENERATING
MOTOR
GENERATOR NO TORQUE
MOTOR

ENGINE RUNNING

HIGH VOLTAGE
BATTERY CHARGING

DRIVE ENGINE DRIVE

MODE MODE
Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 22P Connector (female terminals)

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
- - GRN LT GRN RED YEL PNK RED WHT GRY PUR LT LT TAN PUR BLU
GRN GRN BLU

1 2 3 4 5
RED GRN WHT BLK GRN

Terminal Terminal sign Description

number
1 MV Drives the motor
2 MU Drives the motor
3 MW Drives the motor
4 GND Ground for the electric servo brake control unit
5 ＋B ESB Power source for the electric servo brake control unit
6 Not used ―――
7 Not used ―――
8 BPS Detects brake pedal stroke sensor signal
9 ESV SGND Ground for the sensors
10 FL DOOR SW Detects driver's door switch signal
11 BPSR Detects brake pedal stroke sensor redundant signal
12 ESB SVCC Power source for the sensors
13 BRK LAMP Drives brake light relay
14 F-CAN A_L F-CAN communication circuit
15 F-CAN A_H F-CAN communication circuit
16 STOP LT Detects brake light relay signal
17 IG1 OPTION4 Power source for activating the system
18 F-CAN B_L F-CAN communication circuit
19 F-CAN B_H F-CAN communication circuit
20 HALL U Detects motor angle sensor signal
21 HALL V Detects motor angle sensor signal
22 HALL W Detects motor angle sensor signal
3/22/23, 6:45 PM Electric Servo Brake Control Unit/Pedal Feel Simulator Removal and Installation 4192

Electric Servo Brake Control Unit/Pedal Feel Simulator Removal and Installation

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.
The electric powertrain components are located in this area. The electric powertrain is a high-voltage system. You must be
familiar with the electric powertrain system before working on or around it. Make sure you have read the electric powertrain
service precautions before doing repairs or service.
Do not disassemble the electric servo brake control unit and the pedal feel simulator.

1. 12 Volt Battery Terminal - Disconnect

1. Open the driver's door, and wait 3 minutes or more.

NOTE: Do not turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

2. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection procedure.

2. Intake Air Resonator - Remove

3. Brake Fluid - Remove

1. Remove the brake fluid from the reservoir tank with a

syringe.

4. Brake Reservoir - Remove

1. Disconnect the connector (A).

9.5 (0.97, 7.0)
B
2. Remove the reservoir (B).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004192_enu 1/5
3/22/23, 6:45 PM Electric Servo Brake Control Unit/Pedal Feel Simulator Removal and Installation 4192
5. Brake Reservoir Bracket - Remove

1. Remove the harness clips (A).

A

2. Remove the reservoir bracket (B).

B 9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

6. Radiator Expansion Tank - Remove

1. Remove the radiator expansion tank (A) without

9.5 (0.97, 7.0) disconnecting the hose, and move it aside.

9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

A

7. Electric Servo Brake Control Unit/Pedal Feel Simulator - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004192_enu 2/5
3/22/23, 6:45 PM Electric Servo Brake Control Unit/Pedal Feel Simulator Removal and Installation 4192

1. Disconnect the suction hose (A) from the brake line (B).

B A

2. Disconnect the connector (A) by pushing the lock (B), and

B C pulling down on the lever (C).

3. Disconnect the brake lines (D) from the pedal feel simulator
(E).

A
E D D
15 (1.5, 11) 22 (2.2, 16)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004192_enu 3/5
3/22/23, 6:45 PM Electric Servo Brake Control Unit/Pedal Feel Simulator Removal and Installation 4192
4. Remove the brake lines (A) from the brake line clamp (B).

A B

5. Remove the lock pin (A).

6. Remove the clevis pin (B).

NOTE: Apply multipurpose grease to the clevis pin in the

brake pedal during reassembly.

7. Remove the pedal feel simulator mounting nuts (C).

C A
B
12 (1.2, 9)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004192_enu 4/5
3/22/23, 6:45 PM Electric Servo Brake Control Unit/Pedal Feel Simulator Removal and Installation 4192
8. Remove the electric servo brake control unit/pedal feel
simulator (A) from the engine compartment.

NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the electric servo brake
control unit/pedal feel simulator mounting surfaces and
the threads on the electric servo brake control
unit/pedal feel simulator studs.
Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines.

9. Remove the gasket (B).

NOTE: Use the new gasket during reassembly.

B A

8. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE: The lock pin (A) can be installed from the top or
bottom.

9. Brake System - Bleed

10.Brake Pedal Height and Free Play - Check

11. Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Software - Check

1. Make sure the electric servo brake control unit has the
latest software. If it does not have the latest, update the
software in the electric servo brake control unit.

12.Sensor 0 (Zero) Position - Memorize

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R004192_enu 5/5
Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Update

1. Electric Servo Brake Control Unit - Update

2. Sensor 0 (Zero) Position - Memorize

Electric Servo Brake System Bleeding

Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

There are three different methods used for bleeding brake systems. The method shown in this procedure is the
preferred method for removing the air from the system. For pressure or vacuum bleeding, refer to the tool
manufacturer's instructions included with the tool. If you use a commercially available pressure feed bleeder and
operate the brake pedal, excessive hydraulic pressure will be applied to the cup inside the master cylinder causing
damage. Do not use these methods together.
Whenever you do any of these actions, or the pedal feel simulator reservoir tank is empty, first bleed the brake
system using the normal bleed procedure. Then apply and release the parking brake 5 times and bleed the rear
brakes again.

－ Removing the tandem motor cylinder.

－ Removing the electric servo brake control unit/pedal feel simulator.
－ Removing the rear brake caliper.
－ Removing the rear brake hose or line.
－ Removing the VSA modulator-control unit.

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
The procedure of bleeding brake system is different from replacing brake fluid. Refer to the procedure of Brake Fluid
Replacement as needed.
The brake fluid level must be at the MAX (upper) level mark of the reservoir at the start of the bleeding procedure and
checked after bleeding each wheel location. Add fluid as required.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. 12 Volt Battery Terminal - Disconnect

 1. Open the driver's door, and wait 3 minutes or more.

NOTE: Do not turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

2. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection procedure.

3. Bleed - Precaution

1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the

MAX (upper) level line (A).

2. Bleed the brake system in the sequence shown.

BLEEDING SEQUENCE:

Front Driver's Side

Front Passenger's Side

Rear Passenger's Side

Rear Driver's Side

4. Brake System - Bleed 1 (Between Pedal Feel Simulator and Brake Caliper)

NOTE: If a large amount of air is introduced into the system

from a brake system component replacement, first drain the
brake fluid into a container from each caliper by pumping the
brake pedal slowly before starting the normal brake system
bleed.

1. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed screw

(B).

2. Submerge the other end of the drain tube into a clear

plastic catch bottle of brake fluid (C).
 3. Have an assistant slowly pump the brake pedal several
times then apply steady continuous pressure.
B
17 (1.7, 13)
4. Loosen the bleed screw slowly to bleed the fluid into the
plastic catch bottle. The brake pedal will travel toward the
floor as the fluid is bled from the system.
A

5. When the brake pedal reaches the floor, have the assistant
hold the pedal in that position, then tighten the bleed screw.
The brake pedal can now be released.

6. Check and refill the reservoir tank to the MAX (upper) level
line. Be sure to reinstall the reservoir cap.

C
7. Repeat steps 3 thru 6 until the brake fluid in the clear drain
tube appears fresh and there are no air bubbles in the fluid.

8. Repeat this procedure for each bleed screw of the brake

caliper in the bleeding sequence.

5. Brake System - Bleed 2 (Between Pedal Feel Simulator and Tandem Motor Cylinder)

Rear bleed screw 1. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed screw
(B).
B
6.9 (0.70, 5.1)
2. Submerge the other end of the drain tube into a clear
plastic catch bottle of brake fluid (C).

3. Have an assistant slowly pump the brake pedal several

times then apply steady continuous pressure.

4. Loosen the bleed screw slowly to bleed the fluid into the
plastic catch bottle. The brake pedal will travel toward the
floor as the fluid is bled from the system.

5. When the brake pedal reaches the floor, have the assistant
hold the pedal in that position, then tighten the bleed screw.
The brake pedal can now be released.

A C 6. Check and refill the reservoir tank to the MAX (upper) level
line. Be sure to reinstall the reservoir cap.

7. Repeat steps 3 thru 6 until the brake fluid in the clear drain
tube appears fresh and there are no air bubbles in the fluid.

8. Repeat this procedure for each bleed screw of the tandem

motor cylinder in the bleeding sequence.
 Front bleed screw

B
6.9 (0.70, 5.1) A
C

6. Brake System - Bleed 3 (Between Pedal Feel Simulator and Brake Caliper)

1. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed screw

(B).
B
17 (1.7, 13)
2. Submerge the other end of the drain tube into a clear
plastic catch bottle of brake fluid (C).

A
3. Have an assistant slowly pump the brake pedal several
times then apply steady continuous pressure.

4. Loosen the bleed screw slowly to bleed the fluid into the
plastic catch bottle. The brake pedal will travel toward the
floor as the fluid is bled from the system.

5. When the brake pedal reaches the floor, have the assistant
C
hold the pedal in that position, then tighten the bleed screw.
The brake pedal can now be released.

6. Check and refill the reservoir tank to the MAX (upper) level
line. Be sure to reinstall the reservoir cap.

7. Repeat steps 3 thru 6 until the brake fluid in the clear drain
tube appears fresh and there are no air bubbles in the fluid.

8. Repeat this procedure for each bleed screw of the brake

caliper in the bleeding sequence.

7. Brake System - Bleed (Inside of Rear Brake Caliper)

1. Reconnect the 12 volt battery terminal.

 2. Apply and release the parking brake 5 times.

3. Open the driver's door, and wait 3 minutes or more.

NOTE: Do not turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

4. Do the 12 volt battery terminal disconnection procedure.

5. Bleed the rear brakes again.

NOTE: When bleeding the brake system, air can get

trapped inside the rear calipers. This is due to the complex
fluid path inside electric parking brake calipers. Therefore
this procedure is necessary.

8. 12 Volt Battery Terminal - Reconnect

9. After Bleeding - Check

1. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

2. Check that the brake system indicator does not come on.
3/22/23, 8:44 PM Electric Servo Brake System Circuit Diagram 6540
Electric Servo Brake System Circuit Diagram

: CAN line

12 VOLT UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY
No. A2-4 (40 A)
GRN A
+B ESB

No. A5-5 (30 A)

YEL B
+B IG
MAIN2
No. A2-1 (30 A)
RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD
IG1A RELAY
CIRCUIT No. A41 (7.5 A)
A1 B2
GRY PNK

B8
WHT
BODY
CONTROL
MODULE B4
TAN

IG1A HOT in ON and GRY C

READY TO DRIVE mode IG1 ABS/VSA
No. A9 (10 A) (or IG1 VSA/ABS)
RED D
+B STOP

GAUGE CONTROL
AUTOMATIC BRAKE MODULE
HOLD SWITCH
BRAKE SYSTEM
RELAY 7 9 A17 INDICATOR
CONTROL GRY BLU (AMBER)
MODULE ILLUMI+ ILL–(LED) ILL–(LED)

BRAKE SYSTEM
12 A32 INDICATOR
BLU (RED)
BRAKE HOLD BRAKE HOLD
6
VSA MODULATOR- BLK
GND AUTOMATIC BRAKE
CONTROL UNIT
HOLD SYSTEM
20 A20 INDICATOR
WHT PUR
F-CAN A_H G401 F-CAN C_H
21 A21
RED GRN AUTOMATIC BRAKE
F-CAN A_L F-CAN C_L HOLD INDICATOR
24
LT BLU
F-CAN B_H
25
LT GRN
F-CAN B_L

CAN GATEWAY
3
WHT
F-CAN A_H
11
RED
F-CAN A_L
6
LT BLU WHT E
F-CAN B_H
14
LT GRN RED F
F-CAN B_L
5
PUR LT BLU G
F-CAN C_H
13
GRN LT GRN H
F-CAN C_L
7
PNK I
F-CAN D_H
15
GRN J
F-CAN D_L
16 7
LT BLU
F-CAN E_H F-CAN E_H MILLIMETER
8 6 WAVE RADAR
YEL
F-CAN E_L F-CAN E_L

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=E006540_enu 1/3
3/22/23, 8:44 PM Electric Servo Brake System Circuit Diagram 6540
*: Wire colors may be substituted for SRS circuits
: CAN line

A GRN K
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

D4 IG1B RELAY
B YEL CIRCUIT
+B IG No. B35 (10 A) D13
MAIN2 PUR L
IG1 OPTION4
H9
BODY WHT GRN M
CONTROL
MODULE H11 5
TAN
DRIVER’S
DOOR DRIVER’S
IG1B HOT in ON and DOOR
READY TO DRIVE mode SWITCH N
(Closed: LATCH
8
Door open)
O
G402
C GRY
RED P

D RED
GRN Q

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

(Closed: Brake pedal pressed)
4 1
RED GRN
+B STOP

BATTERY
CONDITION
MONITOR
MODULE PCM
E9 A26
WHT GRN
F-CAN D_H STOP SW
E8 A37
RED WHT
F-CAN D_L F-CAN A_H
A36
SRS UNIT RED
F-CAN A_L
A16 A39
LT BLU* PNK
F-CAN B_H F-CAN D_H
A17 A38
LT GRN* GRN
F-CAN B_L F-CAN D_L

E WHT

F RED

G LT BLU WHT R

H LT GRN RED S

I PNK LT BLU T

J GRN LT GRN U

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=E006540_enu 2/3
3/22/23, 8:44 PM Electric Servo Brake System Circuit Diagram 6540
: CAN line
: Shielding
ELECTRIC SERVO BRAKE CONTROL UNIT/PEDAL FEEL SIMULATOR
ECU
5
K GRN BATT
+B ESB

17
L PUR IG1
IG1 OPTION4

10
M GRN DOOR SW
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FL DOOR
RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD SW

BRAKE LIGHT BRK

C19 RELAY CIRCUIT C2 13 LAMP
N GRY PNK
IG1 ABS/VSA BRK LAMP
(or IG1 VSA/ABS)
D5
O RED
+B STOP
D6 BRK
P RED
+B STOP D1 16 DIAG
GRY
D2 STOP LT
Q GRN
STOP SW

TANDEM MOTOR CYLINDER

SVCC_PL
1 2 LOWER
GRN U SGND_PL
MU HYDRAULIC
2 1 PL PRESSURE
MOTOR RED V SENSOR
MV
3 PUL
3
WHT W
MW
6 20 SVCC_PU
TAN HALL-U
HALL U UPPER
7 21 SGND_PU
PUR HALL-V HYDRAULIC
HALL V PU PRESSURE
8 22 SENSOR
HALL SENSOR BLU HALL-W
HALL W PUR
5V
4 12 SVCC1
YEL YEL
ESB SVCC
9 9 SGND1 PFSV+B PEDAL FEEL
LT GRN LT GRN SIMULATOR
ESV SGND PFSV CUT VALVE
BRAKE PEDAL
STROKE SENSOR
MCV-P+B MASTER
1 CYLINDER
YEL MCV-P CUT VALVE
4
LT GRN
2 8 MCV-S+B MASTER
GRN BPS INPUT CIRCUIT CYLINDER
BPS
3 11 MCV-S CUT VALVE
RED BPSR INPUT CIRCUIT
BPSR

BLK

G204 15
R WHT
F-CAN A_H CAN
14 CONTROLLER
S RED
F-CAN A_L
19
T LT BLU
F-CAN B_H CAN
18 CONTROLLER
U LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
4
BLK
GND

G302

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=E006540_enu 3/3
Electric Servo Brake System Component Location Index
For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram

BRAKE PEDAL STROKE SENSOR

(Built into brake pedal)

ELECTRIC SERVO BRAKE CONTROL UNIT/

PEDAL FEEL SIMULATOR
Removal and Installation
Inspection
TANDEM MOTOR CYLINDER Bleeding
Removal and Installation Fluid replacement
Disassembly and Reassembly Sensor 0 (Zero) Position Memorization
Update
AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD SWITCH
Removal, Installation, and Test
Electric Servo Brake System Description - Automatic Brake Hold

Overview
With automatic brake hold, the vehicle stays in a stopped state by using the main brakes and will remain stopped even when the
brake pedal is released. There is no need to keep pressing the brake pedal while stopped in heavy traffic or at traffic lights.
Control

As the accelerator pedal is pressed, the automatic brake hold feature is cancelled and returns to the stand by mode. If the automatic
brake hold features is applied for an extended time (approx.10 minutes), the electric parking brake will engage to hold the vehicle.

ON
Automatic Brake
Hold Switch
OFF
Accelerator pedal pressed

Vehicle Speed
0 mph
(0 km/h)
Release brake
pressure automatically

Brake Pressure

ON
Brake Pedal
Position Switch
OFF

Time

Automatic brake
hold activation
Electric Servo Brake System Description - Brake Assist Control

The brake assist control constantly monitors brake operation through the pressure sensor. If the pedal stroke speed and pedal stroke
amount exceed the predetermined values, it is considered to be emergency braking. When the system determines that the driver is
making an emergency stop, the electric servo brake control unit increases braking force compared to normal braking and shortens the
braking distance.

Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor

Detect the brake pedal stroke speed Electric Servo Tandem Motor Cylinder
Brake Control Unit
Generates additional brake
Pedal Feel Simulator fluid pressure when amount
of driver handling value
Detect the brake pedal stroke amount exceeds specified value
Acknowledges "emergency"
by calculating data

Brake Assist Operation Emergency brake detection

Pressure
Panic Stop with Brake Assist

Panic Stop without Brake Assist

Brake Assist Begins

Time
Electric Servo Brake System Description - Components

Components
The electric servo brake system consists of the following primary components:
Electric Servo Brake Control Unit/Pedal Feel Simulator
Tandem motor cylinder
Brake pedal stroke sensor
Automatic brake hold switch
System indicator

For locations of each component on the vehicle, refer to Component Location Index, and for indicator functions, refer to How to
Troubleshoot the Electric Servo Brake System.

Electric Servo Brake Control Unit/Pedal Feel Simulator

The electric servo brake control unit/pedal feel simulator consists of the electric servo brake control unit, master cylinder, pedal force
simulator, pedal feel simulator valve (PFSV), master cylinder cut valves (MCV), and hydraulic pressure sensors. It reproduces the feel
when the brake pedals are pressed.
 Master Cylinder

Electric Servo Brake

Control Unit

PU

PL
Pedal Feel
Simulator

Pedal Feel Simulator

Cut Valve (PFSV)

Master Cylinder
Cut Valve (MCV) Lower Hydraulic Upper Hydraulic Master Cylinder
Pressure Sensor Pressure Sensor Cut Valve (MCV)

Tandem Motor Cylinder

The tandem motor cylinder is composed of the motor, the gearbox, and the slave cylinder. The electric servo brake control unit drives
the motor, whose movement is transmitted through the gearbox, in order to move the piston in the slave cylinder and generate fluid
pressure.
 Gearbox

Secondary Piston

Primary Piston Ball Screw

Slave Cylinder

Motor

NOTE: This illustration is a typical sample of tandem motor cylinder.

Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor

The brake pedal stroke sensor is located in the brake pedal bracket.
The brake pedal stroke sensor detects the level of brake pedal force and outputs two kinds of voltage values depending on the given
angle.
 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor

Brake Pedal

4.5

Output
voltage (V)

0.5
0
Angle

NOTE: This illustration is a typical sample of brake pedal stroke sensor.

Electric Servo Brake System Description - Hill Start Assist Control

Overview
The hill start assist control assists drivers by automatically controlling brake pressure when starting a vehicle on a steep hill; this assist
prevents the vehicle from rolling on a hill for a few seconds while moving the driver's foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal. The hill assist control may not be activated when the driver does not press the brake strongly enough upon stopping the vehicle
or when the driver releases the brake pedal gradually upon starting the vehicle.
Control

The control unit reads the angle of inclination from the longitudinal acceleration signal and that all four wheels are stopped, then it
calculates the amount of fluid pressure required to keep the vehicle from rolling backward.
This takes place as the control unit sees the brake pressure decrease when the driver lifts their foot off of the brake pedal and moves
it onto the accelerator pedal. After the driver transitions to the accelerator pedal and the drive torque is restored to the predetermined
level required to start-up the vehicle, the hill start assist control will release the brake fluid pressure. The hill start assist control will
release the brake fluid pressure if the accelerator pedal is not pressed for a certain period of time after the brake pedal has been
released.

Vehicle travels forward up hill Vehicle travels in reverse up hill

Brake pedal ON Transition Accelerator pedal ON

Required drive torque

Actual drive torque

(Amount of throttle
operation)

Brake pressure

Required fluid pressure

Time

Hill start assist

activation
Electric Servo Brake System Description - System Diagram

The electric servo brake control unit receives the pedal stroke signal from the brake pedal stroke sensor, regeneration control
information from the electric powertrain system, and various other signals. Based on these signals, the electric servo brake unit drives
the valve in the pedal feel simulator and the motor of the tandem motor cylinder, while controlling the brake oil pressure, and therefore
the braking force for each wheel.
If a problem is detected, the warning lamp in the gauge control module illuminates to inform the driver about the problem.

For locations of each component on the vehicle, refer to Component Location Index:
Electric servo brake control unit/Pedal feel simulator, Tandem motor cylinder, Brake pedal stroke sensor, Automatic brake hold
switch
Gauge control module
PCM
VSA modulator-control unit
SRS unit
Millimeter wave radar
Battery condition monitor module
Driver’s door switch
Brake light relay

: CAN-line

AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD ELECTRIC SERVO BRAKE CONTROL

SWITCH GAUGE CONTROL MODULE UNIT/PEDAL FEEL SIMULATOR

PCM
MASTER
CYLINDER
CUT VALVE
VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT

SRS UNIT
MASTER
CYLINDER
CUT VALVE
MILLIMETER WAVE RADAR

BATTERY CONDITION
MONITOR MODULE
CPU PEDAL FEEL
SIMULATOR
VALVE

DRIVER’S DOOR SWITCH

LOWER HYDRAULIC
BRAKE LIGHT RELAY PRESSURE SENSOR

TANDEM MOTOR CYLINDER

BRAKE PEDAL STROKE SENSOR UPPER HYDRAULIC

(Built into BRAKE PEDAL) PRESSURE SENSOR

F-CAN Communication Data

Electric Servo Brake System Primary Receiving Signal
 Transmitting Unit Signal Name
Gauge control module
Automatic brake hold switch status signal
PCM
Vehicle speed signal

Drive torque signal

Servo control enable/disable signal

Accelerator pedal position signal

Brake pedal position switch signal

Shift position signal

Regeneration control information

Stall management control request

System failure information

SRS unit
Yaw rate signal

Driver's seat belt buckle switch status signal

VSA modulator-control unit Regeneration control stop request signal

Pressurization control activation signal

Wheel speed signal

Longitudinal acceleration signal

Hydraulic pressure control request signal

Target deceleration signal

Parking brake activation status

Operating information of each control

System failure information

Battery condition monitor module DC-DC converter output information

Millimeter wave radar
Brake request signal

Target deceleration signal

Brake light relay control request signal

System failure information

Electric Servo Brake System Primary Transmitting Signal

 Transmitting Unit Signal Name
Electric servo brake control unit System operating status signal

Indicator drive signal

Pressurization control activation signal

Hydraulic boost failure compensation control request signal

Brake light relay control request signal

Electric parking brake apply request signal

Driver request brake pressure signal

System failure Information

Electric Servo Brake System Description

Overview
The electric servo brake system is used to convert as much of the vehicle’s kinetic energy as possible into electricity and store it in the
battery.
The system enables to maximize the regenerative brake force depending on the brake pedal pressure available. The braking force is
determined by the amount of regenerative electricity and the brake. When vehicle speed is low, the brake creates most of the braking
force.

Electric servo brake system performs the following control:

Servo control: Reduces the driver's effort for operating the brake pedals.
Regeneration control: Coordinated control with the regenerative brake, by the traction motor.
Stall management: Protective control of the traction motor.
Hill start assist control: Startup assist on a slope road.
Brake assist control: Increases the braking force when emergency braking is detected.
Automatic brake hold: Reduces the driver's load for operating the brake pedals.
Brake pressurization control: Controls brake pressure by brake request from ACC/CMBS.

Brake Control

As the vehicle decelerates, the amount of regeneration by the traction motor decreases, thus causing a decline in braking effort. The
electric servo brake control unit drives the motor of the tandem motor cylinder to increase fluid pressure while minimizing the change
in braking effort, enabling a smooth transition from regeneration brake to hydraulic brake.

Vehicle Speed/ Brake pedal operation

Kick Power (Target deceleration)

Vehicle speed

Time

Braking Effort

Regeneration brake

Brake pressure
(Electric servo
brake)

Time

Servo Control
System Shutdown State

When the electric servo brake system is shut down, the master cylinder cut valve (MCV) opens and the pedal feel simulator cut valve
(PFSV) is closed while the brake pedal is not in use.
 : Valve Open
Pedal stroke
signal is OFF : Valve Closed

Brake Pedal
Stroke Sensor

PFSV
PU Electric
Servo
MCV Brake
Control Unit
PL MCV
Pedal Feel
Simulator

Tandem
Motor Motor
Motor drive
Cylinder signal is OFF

VSA Modulator-Control Unit

Communication
via F-CAN is OFF

: Communication via F-CAN

: Start-up commumication &
condition information

System Startup State

The electric servo brake system activates when the driver's door is opened. When the system activates, the motor starts its initial
operation. The master cylinder cut valve (MCV) opens and the pedal feel simulator cut valve (PFSV) is open until the brake pedal is
pressed.
 : Valve Open
Pedal stroke
signal is OFF : Valve Closed

Brake Pedal
Stroke Sensor

PFSV
Driver’s Door Switch
PU Electric Door open
Servo signal is ON
MCV Brake
Control Unit
PL MCV
Pedal Feel
Simulator

Tandem
Motor Motor
Cylinder Motor drive
signal is ON

VSA Modulator-Control Unit

Communication
via F-CAN is OFF

: Communication via F-CAN

: Start-up commumication &
condition information

Servo Control Operations

During normal operations, the master cylinder cut valve (MCV) closes and the pedal feel simulator cut valve (PFSV) is open.
Under these conditions, the system can prevent the brake hydraulic pressure created by the braking pedal force from transmitting to
the VSA modulator-control unit. Pedal feedback is created virtually by the pedal feel simulator.
The hydraulic pressure for the VSA modulator-control unit is created when the piston in the slave cylinder gets pushed by a thrust
force. The thrust force is transmitted from the rotary torque of the motor in the tandem motor cylinder using a gearbox.
The required hydraulic pressure is calculated by the electric servo brake control unit using the stroke sensor signal and controlled by
the rotary angle of the motor in the tandem motor cylinder.
 : Valve Open
Pedal stroke
signal is ON : Valve Closed

Brake Pedal
Stroke Sensor

PFSV
PU Electric
Servo
MCV Brake
Control Unit
PL MCV
Pedal Feel
Simulator

Tandem Motor Motor angle signal

Motor
Cylinder Motor drive
signal is ON

VSA Modulator-Control Unit

Communication
via F-CAN is ON

: Communication via F-CAN

: Start-up commumication &
condition information

Regeneration Control Operations

When the brake and regeneration system work together, the master cylinder cut valve (MCV) closes and the pedal feel simulator cut
valve (PFSV) is open.
The electric servo brake control unit uses the information on the amount of charge in the regenerative electricity system to activate the
motor in the tandem motor cylinder and reduce the hydraulic pressure. At the same time, the unit also increases the amount of charge
in regenerative electricity system.
 : Valve Open
Pedal stroke
signal is ON : Valve Closed

Brake Pedal
Stroke Sensor

PFSV
PU
Electric
Servo
MCV Brake
Control Unit
PL MCV
Pedal Feel
Simulator

Regeneration
control
information

Tandem Motor angle signal

Motor
Cylinder Motor Motor drive
signal is ON

Electric
Powertrain
VSA Modulator-Control Unit System
Communication
via F-CAN is ON

: Communication via F-CAN

: Start-up commumication &
condition information

Failsafe
During the failsafe mode, the master cylinder cut valve (MCV) opens and the pedal feel simulator cut valve (PFSV) is closed.
The hydraulic pressure created by the brake pedal force activates the brake caliper.
 : Valve Open
Pedal stroke
signal is ON : Valve Closed

Brake Pedal
Stroke Sensor

PFSV
PU
Electric
Servo
MCV Brake
Control Unit
PL MCV
Pedal Feel
Simulator

Tandem
Motor Motor
Cylinder Motor drive
signal is OFF

VSA Modulator-Control Unit

Communication
via F-CAN is ON

: Communication via F-CAN

: Start-up commumication &
condition information

Stall Management
When driving uphill, the driving force of the vehicle's drive motor balances against the gravitational force that pulls the vehicle back.
Electric current continues to flow only to specific motor drive circuits, generating heat in them.
Continued generation of heat causes overheating, which could damage the circuit and the motor.
For this reason, the stall cooperative control activates the electric servo brake and prevents overheating of the vehicle drive circuit.
The brake light illuminates when the stall cooperative control is activated.
When the brakes or the accelerator pedal are operated, the vehicle is starts and the stall cooperative control is stopped.
 MPI MODULE MOTOR Driving/Forward Progress

Vehicle stalls while on incline

(Temperature rise in the drivetrain)

The PCM initiates

the electric servo brake control unit
before the drivetrain overheats

Stall management The electric servo brake activates,

and the braking keeps the vehicle stopped
while the brake lights illuminate

Power from the battery to the electric motor is

discontinued to enable cooling of the drivetrain

Operating the brakes or the accelerator

pedal to start the vehicle, and stops
the stall cooperative control.

Driving/Forward Progress

System Wake-Up and Shutdown

The electric servo brake system is activated when the driver's door is opened while the vehicle is in the OFF (LOCK) mode or when
the vehicle is turned to the ON mode.

When the electric servo brake system is not activated (the vehicle is turned to the ON mode while pressing the brake pedal) the brake
pedal may travel down as the pedal feel simulator cut valve (PFSV) opens. This is normal and not a system fault. To prevent the driver
from feeling this condition at system start-up, the electric servo brake system is activated for 3 minutes, triggered by the driver's door
switch signal when the driver's door is opened. To prevent excessive battery discharge, the system will automatically shut down after 3
minutes from when the driver's door is opened.

Activating and shutting down the system by the driver’s door operation is as follows.

Open the driver's door

The electric servo brake system is activated when the driver's door is opened, and will shut down automatically 3 minutes after the
driver's door was opened with the vehicle in the OFF (LOCK) mode.
 Open
Driver’s door
Close

ON mode
Vehicle

OFF mode

Activate
System

Shutdown

3 minutes

Turn the vehicle to the ON mode after opening the driver's door

If the vehicle is turned to the ON mode within 3 minutes after opening the driver's door, the electric servo brake system will continue to
operate.

Open
Driver’s door
Close

ON mode
Vehicle

OFF mode

Activate
System

Shutdown

3 minutes

Open the driver's door again after the system is activated by opening the door

Once the driver's door is opened and the system is activated, the system's activation time will not be extended even if the door was
opened again.

Open
Driver’s door
Close

ON mode
Vehicle

OFF mode

Activate
System

Shutdown

3 minutes
Open the driver's door after turning the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode from ON mode

The system will shut down automatically 3 minutes after the vehicle is turned to the OFF (LOCK) mode, and the system's activation
time will not be extended even if the door is opened.

Open
Driver’s door
Close

ON mode
Vehicle

OFF mode

Activate
System

Shutdown

3 minutes
Electric Servo Brake System DTC Troubleshooting Index

DTC Detection Item

B0050 -F0 Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch Malfunction
C0023 -12 Brake Diag Circuit ON Failure
-14 Brake Diag Circuit OFF Failure
C0049 -7A Brake Fluid Leak or Seal Failure
C0062 -F0 Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction
C0063 -F0 Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction
C1260 -7A Brake Fluid Leak or Seal Failure in Pedal Feel Simulator
C1270 -11 Automatic Brake Hold Switch Signal Circuit Short
-15 Automatic Brake Hold Switch Signal Circuit Open
P057B -00 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem
P057C -00 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
P057D -00 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Circuit High Voltage
P0602 -00 Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Programming Error
P0606 -00 Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Internal Circuit Malfunction
P062F -00 Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Internal Circuit EEPROM Error
P0642 -00 Sensor Power Source Circuit Low Voltage
P0643 -00 Sensor Power Source Circuit High Voltage
P1E20 -00 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor PL/PLR Incorrect Correlation
P1E24 -00 Brake Pedal Stroke Redundant Sensor Circuit High Voltage
P1E25 -00 Brake Pedal Stroke Redundant Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
P1E26 -00 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor/Brake Pedal Stroke Redundant Sensor Incorrect Correlation
P1E27 -00 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor PU Circuit High Voltage
P1E28 -00 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor PU Circuit Low Voltage
P1E29 -00 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor PUR Circuit High Voltage
P1E2A -00 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor PUR Circuit Low Voltage
P1E2B -00 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor PU/PUR Incorrect Correlation
P1E2C -00 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor PL Circuit High Voltage
P1E2D -00 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor PL Circuit Low Voltage
P1E2E -00 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor PLR Circuit High Voltage
P1E2F -00 Brake Fluid Pressure Sensor PLR Circuit Low Voltage
P1E32 -00 Master Cylinder Cut Valve Stuck OFF (Stuck Open)
P1E33 -00 Master Cylinder Cut Valve Incorrect Operation
P1E34 -00 Master Cylinder Cut Valve Stuck ON (Stuck Close)
P1E35 -00 Brake Pedal Feel Simulator Cut Valve Incorrect Operation
P1E36 -00 Brake Pedal Feel Simulator Cut Valve No Operation
P1E37 -00 Brake Pedal Feel Simulator Cut Valve Stuck OFF (Stuck Close)
P1E38 -00 Brake Pedal Feel Simulator Cut Valve Stuck ON (Stuck Open)
P1E41 -00 Electric Servo Brake System Fail-Safe Relay Stuck ON
P1E42 -00 Electric Servo Brake System Fail-Safe Relay Stuck OFF
P1E44 -00 Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Internal Circuit Malfunction (Charge Pump Circuit)
P1E46 -00 Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Internal Circuit Malfunction (FET Stuck ON)
P1E47 -00 Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Internal Circuit Malfunction (FET Stuck OFF)
P1E48 -00 Slave Cylinder Drive Motor Current Malfunction (Offset)
P1E49 -00 Slave Cylinder Drive Motor Current Malfunction (Stuck)
P1E4A -00 Slave Cylinder Drive Motor Current Malfunction (Over Current)
P1E4B -00 Slave Cylinder Drive Motor Circuit Open
P1E4C -00 Slave Cylinder Drive Motor Power Source Circuit High Voltage
 DTC Detection Item
P1E4D -00 Motor Angle Signal Malfunction
P1E51 -00 Tandem Motor Cylinder Gearbox Mechanical Linkage Failure
P1E52 -00 Tandem Motor Cylinder Gearbox Stuck
P1E63 -00 Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Signal Stuck
P1E68 -00 Brake Master Cylinder Cut Valve Self Lock
P2531 -00 Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Power Source Circuit (IG1) Low Voltage
P2532 -00 Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Power Source Circuit (IG1) High Voltage
U0029 -00 F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)
U0047 -00 F-CAN Malfunction (Ch2 Bus-OFF) / Vehicle Communication Bus C Performance
U0100 -00 F-CAN Malfunction (Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Lost Communication With Management ECU)
U0101 -00 F-CAN Malfunction (Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Lost Communication With TCM/PCM(Gear
System))
U0104 -00 F-CAN Malfunction (Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Lost Communication With Driving Support
System Control Unit)
U0111 -00 Lost communication With Battery Energy Control Module A
U0122 -00 F-CAN Malfunction (Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Lost Communication With VSA Modulator-
Control Unit)
U0128 -00 F-CAN Malfunction (Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Lost Communication With Electric Parking
Brake Control Unit)
U0151 -00 F-CAN Malfunction (Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Lost Communication With SRS Unit)
U0155 -00 F-CAN Malfunction (Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Lost Communication With Gauge Control
Module)
U0401 -68 PGM-FI/ECM/PCM System Malfunction
U0415 -68 ABS System Malfunction
U0416 -68 VSA System Malfunction
U0417 -68 Electric Parking Brake System Malfunction
U3000 -49 Driver's Door Switch Signal Stuck On (ECU Internal Malfunction)
U3003 -16 Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Power Source Circuit (+B) Low Voltage
-17 Electric Servo Brake Control Unit Power Source Circuit (+B) High Voltage
-92 System Voltage Low (Long Term)
Electric Servo Brake System Inspection

1. HDS - Connect

2. Function Test

NOTE: Before doing the function test, check for electric servo
brake DTCs.

1. Check the BRAKE PEDAL STROKE and BRAKE FLUID

PRESSURE SENSOR PL in the ELECTRIC SERVO
BRAKE DATA LIST.

2. With the HDS measure the BRAKE PEDAL STROKE while

pressing down on the brake pedal. At the same time, check
the BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE SENSOR PL value.

NOTE: Do not continue to keep down the pedal for a long

time, otherwise the fluid pressure is decreased abnormally
to protect the motor.
BRAKE PEDAL BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
STROKE SENSOR PL
mm (in) MPa (kgf/cm2 , psi) min.
64.0－68.0 11.0
(2.520－2.677) (112.17, 1,595.4)
Electric Servo Brake System Sensor 0 (Zero) Position Memorization

The electric servo brake system sensor 0 (zero) position must be memorized whenever you do any of these actions:
Replacing the electric servo brake control unit/pedal feel simulator.
Replacing the brake pedal assembly.
Updating the electric servo brake control unit.
Adjusting the brake pedal height.

1. HDS - Connect

2. Sensor 0 (Zero) Position - Memorize

NOTE: If brake system indicator (amber) is blinking before this

procedure, press the brake pedal hard while brake system
indicator goes off.

1. In the BRAKE SYSTEM MENU of the HDS, select

ELECTRIC SERVO BRAKE SYSTEM, select
ADJUSTMENT, then select SENSOR 0 (ZERO) POSITION
MEMORIZATION.
Electric VTC Motor Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 1.
24 (2.4, 18)

Detailed information, notes and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace

1. Electric VTC Motor - Remove

 Note for installation

Align the direction of the joint (A) with the electric VTC gear (B).

2. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

3. VTC Position - Learn

2/8/23, 2:37 AM Emblem/Sticker Removal and Installation 5706

Emblem/Sticker Removal and Installation

1. Rear License Trim - Remove (Rear ‘‘H’’ Emblem)

2. Emblem/Sticker - Remove

NOTE: The emblem/sticker vary according to the model and trim.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R005706_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Emblem/Sticker Removal and Installation 5706

Unit: mm (in)
Adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
REAR WINDOW
PUSH NUTS
ALIGNMENT MARKS
REAR ‘‘H’’ EMBLEM Center line Edge of the
black ceramic

33.3
(1.311)

REAR LICENSE APPLICATION TAPE

TRIM REAR VTEC TURBO STICKER

REAR 2.0T EMBLEM

REAR ACCORD EMBLEM

33.7
(1.327)
43.9
(1.728)

11.6 23.5 35.2

(0.457) (0.925) (1.386)
36.9
(1.453)
Edge of the trunk lid Edge of the trunk lid

REAR 2.0T EMBLEM

REAR SPORT EMBLEM 34.5
(1.358)

49.3
(1.941) 26.5 35.1
(1.043) (1.382)
32.6
(1.283) REAR TOURING
15.7 EMBLEM
(0.618) 27.4 13.1
(1.079) (0.516)
Edge of the trunk lid 10.4
Edge of the trunk lid (0.409)

REAR TOURING EMBLEM 35.3

(1.390) 32.5
51.1 (1.280)
(2.012)

26.7
(1.051)
REAR 2.0T
EMBLEM

REAR SPORT
31.5 30.6 26.7 EMBLEM
(1.240) (1.205) (1.051)
20.5
Edge of the trunk lid 15.0 (0.807)
Edge of the trunk lid (0.591)

REAR SE EMBLEM
40.6
37.5 (1.598)
(1.476) 20.2
(0.795)
30.3
(1.193)

REAR SPORT
EMBLEM
34.9 48.2
(1.374) (1.898) REAR SPECIAL
27.1 EMBLEM
(1.067) 13.7
Edge of the trunk lid 10.8 (0.539)
Edge of the trunk lid (0.425)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R005706_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Emblem/Sticker Removal and Installation 5706
3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE: Clean the body surfaces where the emblems will be

applied with a shop towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water from getting on
the surface.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R005706_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 2:36 AM Emergency Access to Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator 722

Emergency Access to Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator

1. Emergency Access to Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator - Procedure

1. Pull the emergency access wire (A) by hand in the direction

A of the arrow to release the lock.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000722_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 2:39 AM Emergency Access to Trunk Lid Release Actuator 723

Emergency Access to Trunk Lid Release Actuator

Accessed by Emergency Access Wire

1. Emergency Access to Trunk Lid Release Actuator - Procedure

Without Key Cylinder

A

1. Remove the cover (A).

2. Pull the emergency access wire (B) by hand in the direction

of the arrow to release the lock.

A
With Key Cylinder

1. Remove the cover (A).

B

2. Insert the mechanical key (B) to the key cylinder (C).

3. Turn the mechanical key clockwise to release the lock.

C

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000723_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:39 AM Emergency Access to Trunk Lid Release Actuator 723

2. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Accessed by Trunk Lid Latch

1. Emergency Access to Trunk Lid Release Actuator - Procedure

1. Pull back the rear seat as needed to access the trunk room.

A
2. Operates the lock lever (A).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000723_enu 2/2
Emergency Towing

If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service.

Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the below procedure exactly. If you cannot shift the
transmission or start the engine, the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed tow truck.
Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the
vehicle's weight.
It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the vehicle speeds below 35 mph (55 km/h) except
when loading on a flat-bed tow truck.
For vehicles equipped with the power switch
If the 12 volt battery is discharged, the ACCESSORY mode cannot be selected by pushing the power switch. Charge or
replace the 12 volt battery to unlock the steering wheel before towing.
If the ACCESSORY mode cannot be selected because of in an electrical problem other than a discharged 12 volt battery, the
flat-bed tow truck is the only way to transport the vehicle.
For vehicles equipped with the electric parking brake
If the 12 volt battery is discharged, the electric parking brake cannot be canceled by pushing the electric parking
brake/automatic brake hold switch. Charge or replace the 12 volt battery to release the parking brake before towing.
If the electric parking brake is disabled in an electrical problem or severe vehicle damage, the vehicle must be transported on
a flat-bed tow truck.
For vehicles equipped with the neutral position holding mode
Neutral Position Holding Mode is automatically canceled after several minutes.

Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.

Towing Method Transmission Shift Notes

Type Position
e-CVT
Cable-type Equipment × - Never tow this vehicle
with cable-type
equipment.

Flat-bed Tow Truck Equipment ○ P Secure the vehicle

securely on a flat-bed
tow truck.
Apply the parking
brake.
 Towing Method Transmission Shift Notes
Type Position
e-CVT
Front Wheel Lift Equipment ○ N Turn the vehicle to the
ACCESSORY or ON
mode, and then release
the parking brake.

Towing Hook/Tie Down Hook Slots Locations

The front towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the vehicle onto the flat-bed tow truck, and the front/rear tie down hook
slots can be used to secure the vehicle to the flat-bed tow truck.
The tie down hook slots are covered with rubber plugs. Be sure to reinstall them after use.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, use the towing hook for straight flat ground towing only. Do not tow on an angle.
This vehicle is not equipped with a rear towing hook. Do not use the rear bumper or the rear tie down hook slots as a towing
hook. It will cause a severe damage of rear of the vehicle.
Front Towing Hook:

A: Front towing hook

Tie down hook slots:

B C

B: Front tie down hook slots

C: Rear tie down hook slots
D: Rubber plugs: Be sure to reinstall the plugs after use.
Engine Assembly Mount Removal and Installation

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Do the mounts tightening procedure before tightening all of the mount's bolts and nuts.

1
Side Engine Mount
 6. 4.
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)
6.

6.

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

Replace
2
Transmission Mount 1/2
 7.
22 (2.2, 16)
7.

7.
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)
7.
22 (2.2, 16) 7.
22 (2.2, 16)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

3
Transmission Mount 2/2
 14. 14.
9.
9.4 (0.96, 6.9) 9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

14.

14.

9.

14.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace

4
Upper Torque Rod
 1.

1.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Replace

5
Lower Torque Rod
 3.
49 (5.0, 36)
2.

3.

2.

3.
49 (5.0, 36)

2.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace

Side Engine Mount

1. Engine Undercover - Remove

2. Upper Torque Rod - Remove

3. Engine - Support

1. Lift and support the engine with a jack and a wood block
under the oil pan.
4. Ground Cable - Disconnect

5. A/C Lines - Move

NOTE:
Do not disconnect the A/C lines.
Do not bend the A/C lines excessively.

6. Side Engine Mount - Remove

7. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Transmission Mount

1. Left Front Wheel - Remove

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

3. Front Inner Fender (Left Side) - Remove

4. Intake Parts - Remove

NOTE: Remove the necessary part(s).

5. 12 Volt Battery - Remove

6. PCM - Remove

7. 12 Volt Battery Base - Remove

8. Battery Power Cable - Move

 NOTE: Do not disconnect the battery power cable.

9. Cooling Pipe - Move

9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

10.Coolant Hose - Move

11. Expansion Tank - Move

NOTE: Do not disconnect the coolant hoses.

12.Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box - Move

13.Transmission - Support

1. Lift and support the transmission (e-CVT) with a jack and a

wood block under the transmission (e-CVT).

14.Transmission Mount - Remove

15.All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Upper Torque Rod

1. Upper Torque Rod - Remove

Note for installation

Make sure to install the upper torque rod with the "UP" mark
facing up.

2. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Lower Torque Rod

1. Engine Undercover - Remove

2. Lower Torque Rod - Remove

Note for installation

Make sure to install the lower torque rod with the "UP" marks
facing up.

3. Lower Torque Rod Bracket - Remove (if necessary)

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

 NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts and nuts in the sequence given in the following steps. Failure to follow this sequence may
cause excessive noise, vibration, and severe damage to the engine mount brackets.

1. Jack - Remove

2. Engine/Transmission Mount - Tightening Procedure

NOTE:
When the side engine mount is removed, loosely install the side engine mount, loosen the bolts and nuts of 's , and
's and 's before tightening. Then tighten the remaining bolts and nuts according to the sequence shown in the
following table.
When the transmission mount is removed, loosely install the transmission mount, loosen the bolts and nuts of 's and 's
before tightening. Then tighten the remaining bolts and nuts according to the sequence shown in the following table.
When the lower torque rod is removed, loosely install the lower torque rod, loosen the bolts and nuts of 's before
tightening. Then tighten the remaining bolts according to the sequence shown in the following table.
When the upper torque rod is removed, only tighten the torque rod in the sequence listed below.

Tightening Sequence
Mount Removed Mount Tightening Sequence

Side Engine Mount , , , and

Transmission Mount , , and

Lower Torque Rod and

Upper Torque Rod

Tightening Torque
Mount Bolt/Nut Tightening Sequence
Mount No. Mount Name

49 N·m 49 N·m 93 N·m 93 N·m

Side Engine Mount (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft) (5.0 kgf·m, 36 lbf·ft) (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft) (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft)
Replace. Replace. Replace. Replace.

55 N·m 55 N·m 55 N·m 55 N·m

Transmission Mount (5.6 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft) (5.6 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft) (5.6 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft) (5.6 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft)
Replace. Replace. Replace. Replace.

75 N·m 83 N·m
Lower Torque Rod (7.6 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft) (8.5 kgf·m, 61 lbf·ft)
Replace. Replace.

70 N·m 70 N·m
Upper Torque Rod (7.1 kgf·m, 52 lbf·ft) (7.1 kgf·m, 52 lbf·ft)
Replace. Replace.
 UPPER TORQUE ROD LOWER TORQUE ROD

SIDE ENGINE MOUNT TRANSMISSION MOUNT

Engine Block Assembly Component Location Index
BALANCER CHAIN
TENSIONER

O-RING
O-RING

BALANCER SHAFT
SPROCKET

O-RING OIL PAN

O-RING
Removal and Installation

BALANCER SHAFT/BALANCER
SHAFT HOLDER ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Overhaul
 OIL CONTROL
ORIFICE

O-RINGS

LOWER BLOCK

ENGINE BLOCK
HEAT INSULATOR

MAIN BEARINGS
Replacement
BALANCER CHAIN

CKP PULSE PLATE

Removal and Installation

TRANSMISSION END
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
Replacement - In Car
CRANKSHAFT SPROCKET

CRANKSHAFT
End Play Inspection
Removal, Installation,
WASHAER and Inspection

THRUST
WASHERS BALANCER CHAIN GUIDE

DRAIN BOLT
SEALING BOLT
Drain Bolt/Sealing Bolt
Removal and Installation

WASHAER

O-RINGS
L SIDE COVER
 PISTON RINGS
Removal and Installation

PISTON
SNAP RINGS Removal and Installation
Inspection

PISTON PIN
Inspection

CONNECTING ROD
End Play Inspection

CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS

Replacement

ENGINE BLOCK
Block and Piston Inspection
Cylinder Bore Honing

CONNECTING ROD
BEARING CAP

CONNECTING ROD BOLTS

Engine Block Assembly Component Location Index
BALANCER CHAIN
TENSIONER

O-RING
O-RING

BALANCER SHAFT
SPROCKET

O-RING OIL PAN

O-RING
Removal and Installation

BALANCER SHAFT/BALANCER
SHAFT HOLDER ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Overhaul
 OIL CONTROL
ORIFICE

O-RINGS

LOWER BLOCK

ENGINE BLOCK
HEAT INSULATOR

MAIN BEARINGS
Replacement
BALANCER CHAIN

CKP PULSE PLATE

Removal and Installation

TRANSMISSION END
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
Replacement - In Car
CRANKSHAFT SPROCKET

CRANKSHAFT
End Play Inspection
Removal, Installation,
WASHAER and Inspection

THRUST
WASHERS BALANCER CHAIN GUIDE

DRAIN BOLT
SEALING BOLT
Drain Bolt/Sealing Bolt
Removal and Installation

WASHAER

O-RINGS
L SIDE COVER
 PISTON RINGS
Removal and Installation

PISTON
SNAP RINGS Removal and Installation
Inspection

PISTON PIN
Inspection

CONNECTING ROD
End Play Inspection

CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS

Replacement

ENGINE BLOCK
Block and Piston Inspection
Cylinder Bore Honing

CONNECTING ROD
BEARING CAP

CONNECTING ROD BOLTS

Engine Compression Inspection

NOTE: After this inspection, you must reset the PCM. Otherwise, the PCM will continue to stop the injectors from operating.

1. Engine - Warm Up

1. Enter the maintenance mode, then start the engine. Hold

the engine speed at 3,000 rpm with no load (P or N) until
the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

2. HDS - Connect

3. Ignition Coil and Spark Plug - Remove

4. Engine Compression - Inspect

1. Attach a compression gauge to the spark plug hole.

2. Step on the accelerator pedal to open the throttle fully, then

select ALL INJECTORS STOP in the PGM-FI Function Test
with the HDS, and measure the compression.

NOTE:
The engine will be driven by the motor when ALL
INJECTORS STOP is selected with HDS.
When measuring the pressure of other cylinders, make
sure to stop ALL INJECTORS STOP first and replace
the compression gauge and select ALL INJECTORS
STOP again.

Compression Pressure:
Above 880 kPa (8.97 kgf/cm2, 127.6 psi)

3. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders.

Maximum Variation:
Within 200 kPa (2.04 kgf/cm2, 29.0 psi)

4. If the compression is not within specifications, perform a

cylinder leak down test to determine the problem area.
Then check the following items, and remeasure the
compression:
 Incorrect valve clearance
Confirmation of camshaft timing
Damaged or worn cam lobes
Damaged or worn valves and seats
Damaged cylinder head gasket
Damaged or worn piston rings
Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
Damaged hydraulic tappet

5. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode, then remove the
compression gauge from the spark plug hole.

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Engine Configuration

Cylinder Arrangement/Firing Order: 1-3-4-2

Crankshaft
pulley side

Front of vehicle

Engine Rotation: Clockwise

Engine does not start

Probable cause(s)

Shift cable broken or out of adjustment

Control pin broken
Transmission range switch defective or out of adjustment
Drive plate worn or damaged
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the control lever.
Inspect the transmission range switch.
Inspect the drive plate for wear and damage. If the drive plate is worn or damaged, replace it.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Engine does not start

Probable cause(s)

Shift cable broken or out of adjustment

Control pin broken
Transmission range switch defective or out of adjustment
Drive plate worn or damaged
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the control lever.
Inspect the transmission range switch.
Inspect the drive plate for wear and damage. If the drive plate is worn or damaged, replace it.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Engine is hard to start (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Test the 12 volt battery.

2. Check the fuel pressure.
3. Do the carbon accumulation check.

Also check for

Low compression
Intake air leaks
Fuel contamination
Weak spark
Engine Lubrication Circuit Diagram

*1: IG1B HOT in ON and READY TO DRIVE mode

: CAN line

UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
12 VOLT
BATTERY IG1B RELAY
No. A5-5 (30 A) CIRCUIT*1 No. B36 (10 A)
T1 D4 H17
BLK YEL

H9 H11
BODY CONTROL
MODULE WHT TAN
BRN
C54
IG1 COIL+
C47
RLY GND

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE A2

CAN GATEWAY
IG1
METER
7 5 A20
F-CAN D_H F-CAN C_H PUR F-CAN C_H

15 13 A21 MULTI-INFORMATION
F-CAN D_L F-CAN C_L GRN F-CAN C_L
DISPLAY

F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_L

3 11

PNK GRN WHT RED

PCM A37 A36

5V F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_L

A38 F-CAN D_L

A39 F-CAN D_H

SG2 OPSEN VCC2

E78 E58 E77
LT PUR/TAN
GRY GRN
TAN
1 2 3

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR

Engine Lubrication System Component Location Index
 OIL CONTROL OIL FILTER
ORIFICE Removal and Installation OIL FILTER FEED PIPE
Removal and Installation

O-RING WASHER
OIL PAN
OIL JETS Engine Oil Level Check
Removal, Installation, and Replacement DRAIN BOLT
and Inspection

OIL JET BOLTS

Removal, Installation,
and Inspection

PULLEY END
CRANKSHAFT
O-RINGS OIL SEAL
O-RINGS

TRANSMISSION END
CRANKSHAFT
OIL SEAL

OIL PUMP
Removal and Installation
O-RING

OIL PRESSURE SENSOR

Oil Pressure Test
Removal and Installation
Engine Lubrication System Description

Hydraulic Circuit
INTAKE INTAKE
CAMSHAFT ROCKER ARM
VTC ASSEMBLY
ACTUATOR
INTAKE
ROCKER SHAFT EXHAUST
CAMSHAFT

ELECTRIC
VTC MOTOR

EXHAUST
ROCKER ARM

HYDRAULIC
TAPPET

ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
VALVE

OIL CONTROL
ORIFICE
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE SENSOR

OIL JET
CAM CHAIN
AUTO-TENSIONER

CRANKSHAFT
JOURNAL

CONNECTING ROD
JOURNAL
OIL PUMP
BALANCER SHAFT
JOURNAL

OIL CONTROL
ORIFICE
ENGINE
OIL FILTER
OIL STRAINER
 CYLINDER HEAD
ROCKER ARM INTAKE INTAKE ROCKER
OIL CONTROL ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
VALVE SHAFT

ELECTRIC INTAKE INTAKE INTAKE CAMSHAFT

VTC CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT
VTC ACTUATOR (No. 3, 4, and 5 JOURNALS)
MOTOR (No. 1 JOURNAL) (No. 2 JOURNAL)

OIL EXHAUST CAMSHAFT

CONTROL (No. 1 JOURNAL)
ORIFICE

EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
(No.2, 3, 4, and 5 JOURNALS)

HYDRAULIC EXHAUST
TAPPET ROCKER ARM

CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

ENGINE BLOCK
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR

CAM CHAIN AUTO-TENSIONER

OIL JET

CRANKSHAFT CONNECTING
JOURNAL ROD JOURNAL
OIL PUMP

OIL CONTROL ORIFICE

OIL PAN
BALANCER
ENGINE SHAFT
OIL FILTER JOURNAL

OIL STRAINER
Engine Lubrication System Symptom Troubleshooting - Low oil pressure warning
message displays on

Low oil pressure warning message displays on

1. Engine oil level check:

‐1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.

‐2. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing
with this test.

DTC (PGM-FI)

‐3. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐4. Check the engine oil level.

Is the engine oil level normal?

YES Go to step 2.

NO Check the following items, and refill or replace the engine oil.
Check for oil leaks.
Check for worn valve guide(s) or worn valve seal(s).
Check for damaged or worn piston ring(s).
Check for damaged or worn engine internal parts (cylinder wall, pistons, etc.).
2. PCM check:

‐1. Disconnect the following connector.

Engine oil pressure sensor 3P connector

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the ON mode.

 ‐3. Check the parameter(s) below with the HDS.
Signal Threshold Current conditions
Values Unit Values Unit
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure More than V
Sensor Voltage 4.79

Do the current condition(s) match the threshold?

YES Go to step 3.

NO Check for any authorized service information related to the DTCs or symptoms
you are troubleshooting, or substitute a known-good PCM, then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the original
PCM.■
3. Oil pressure test:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Do the oil pressure test.

Is the oil pressure OK?

YES Replace the engine oil pressure sensor.■

NO Check the following items. If its does not blocked or plugged, replace the oil
pump.■
Oil filter blocked or plugged.
Oil strainer blocked or plugged.
Engine Lubrication System Symptom Troubleshooting Index

Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Excessive engine oil consumption 1. Check for oil leaks. Check the
maintenance records
2. Check for worn valve guide(s); or worn valve
as engine oil that is
seal(s).
worn out burns off at
3. Check for a damaged or worn piston ring(s). a higher rate
4. Check for damaged or worn engine internal
parts (cylinder wall, pistons, etc.).
Low oil pressure warning message 1. Check the engine oil level. A wire shorted to
displays on ground between the
2. Do the symptom troubleshooting for Low oil
PCM and the engine
pressure warning message displays on. oil pressure sensor
Engine Oil Filter/Oil Filter Feed Pipe Removal and Installation

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Oil Filter Wrench 07AAA-PLCA100

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 4. 3.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Oil Filter Guard Cover - Remove

3. Engine Oil Filter - Remove

 1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench.

07AAA-PLCA100

4. Oil Filter Feed Pipe - Remove

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 1. 2.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

1. Oil Filter Feed Pipe - Install

1. Install the two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the oil filter feed
A pipe. Hold the nut with a wrench, then tighten the other nut.

2. Apply new engine oil to the oil filter feed pipe threads.
 3. Make sure the oil filter feed pipe installed height is in its
specified range shown.

4. Remove the nuts from the oil filter feed pipe.

18－22 mm
(0.71－0.87 in)

2. Engine Oil Filter - Install

1. Inspect the oil filter to make sure the rubber seal is not
stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine.

2. Inspect the threads (A) and the rubber seal (B) on the new
filter.
B

3. Clean the seat on the oil pan.

4. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the oil filter rubber
seal.

NOTE: Use only filters with a built-in bypass system.

A
 5. Install the oil filter by hand.

6. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise
with the oil filter wrench.

Tighten: 3/4 Turn Clockwise

Tightening Torque: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

07AAA-PLCA100

7. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or ▼ to▼▼▼▼) are

printed around the outside of the filter, use the following
procedure to tighten the filter:

Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the oil
pan, and note which number or mark is at the bottom.
Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three numbers
or marks from the one you noted. For example, if
mark▼is at the bottom when the seal is lightly seated,
tighten the filter until the mark ▼▼▼▼comes around
to the bottom.

Number or
1 2 3 4
Mark when
or or or or
rubber seal is
▼ ▼▼ ▼▼▼ ▼▼▼▼
seated
Number or 4 1 2 3
Mark after or or or or
tightening ▼▼▼▼ ▼ ▼▼ ▼▼▼

Mark when rubber seal Mark after tightening.

is seated.

3. Engine Oil Filter After Install - Check

1. After installation, enter the maintenance mode, then start

the engine. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then
check the oil level and the oil leakage.

4. Oil Filter Guard Cover - Install

5. Maintenance Minder - Reset

1. USA models: If the Maintenance Minder requires the oil

filter to be replaced, reset the Maintenance Minder with the
gauge (see "Resetting the Maintenance Minder").

2. Canada models: If the Maintenance Minder requires the oil

filter to be replaced, reset the Maintenance Minder with the
gauge (see "Resetting the Maintenance Minder"). If the
Maintenance Minder did not require the oil filter to be
replaced, reset the Maintenance Minder with the HDS (see
"Resetting the Individual Maintenance Items").
Engine Oil Jet and Bolt Removal, Installation, and Inspection

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 2.
16 (1.6, 12)
*1

3.
*1
 Detailed information, notes, and precautions
Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
*1 These parts have inspection items

1. Crankshaft - Remove

2. Oil Jet Bolt - Remove

Note for installation

Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange.

3. Oil Jet - Remove

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. Oil Jet and Oil Jet Bolt - Inspect

1. Inspect the oil jet and the oil jet bolt as follows.
A
Make sure that a 0.7 mm (1/32 in) diameter drill bit will
0.9 mm
(0.035 in) go through the nozzle hole (A) (0.9 mm (0.035 in)
diameter).
2.0 mm Insert the other end of a 1.8 mm (1/16 in) drill into the
(0.079 in) oil intake (2.0 mm (0.079 in) diameter). Make sure the
check ball (B) moves smoothly.
B Check the oil jet operation with an air nozzle. It should
take at least 132 kPa (1.35 kgf/cm2, 19.1 psi) to unseat
the check ball.

NOTE: Replace the oil jet, if the nozzle is damaged or bent.

Engine Oil Level Check and Replacement

1. Engine Oil Level - Check

1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and enter the

maintenance mode, then start the engine. Hold the engine
speed at 3,000 rpm with no load (in P or N) until the
A
radiator fan comes on, then turn the vehicle to the OFF
B (LOCK) mode, and wait more than 3 minutes

2. Remove the dipstick, and wipe off the dipstick, then reinstall
the dipstick.

3. Remove the dipstick.

4. Check the engine oil level. It should be between the upper

mark (A) and the lower mark (B).

5. If the engine oil level is near or below the lower mark check
for oil leaks, and add the engine oil to bring it to the upper
mark.

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

1. Engine - Warm Up

1. Enter the maintenance mode, then start the engine. Allow

the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at
least twice).

2. Vehicle - Lift

3. Engine Oil - Drain

 1. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
A
40 (4.1, 30) B
2. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B) and torque to
specification.

NOTE: Do not overtighten the drain bolt.

4. Engine Oil - Refill

1. Refill the engine with the recommended engine oil.

Capacity
At Oil Change: 3.5 L (3.7 US qt)
At Oil Change
including Filter: 3.8 L (4.0 US qt)
After Engine
Overhaul: 4.5 L (4.8 US qt)

5. Engine Oil Level - Check

1. Enter the maintenance mode, then start the engine. Run

the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check the oil level
and the oil leakage.

6. Maintenance Minder - Reset

1. If the Maintenance Minder required to replace the engine
oil, reset the Maintenance Minder with the gauge (see
"Resetting the Maintenance Minder"). If the Maintenance
Minder did not require to replace the engine oil, reset the
Maintenance Minder with the HDS (see "Resetting the
Individual Maintenance Items").
Engine Oil Pan Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 5.5 mm 5.0 mm
(0.217 in) (0.197 in)

12.

*1

12.

*2

11.

12.
10. 12.

*1
12. 12.
11.
*2 10. *2
 Detailed information, notes, and precautions
Replace
*1 Remove
*2 Loosen

2
 15.

15.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

 Replace

1. Engine Undercover - Remove

2. Engine Oil - Drain

3. Exhaust Pipe A - Remove

4. Lower Bulkhead Brace - Remove

5. TWC Bracket - Remove

6. Electric A/C Compressor - Move

NOTE:
Do not disconnect the connector (electric A/C compressor).
Do not disconnect the A/C lines.
Do not bend the A/C lines excessively.
Hang the electric A/C compressor with a wire tie.

7. Intermediate Shaft Assembly Mounting Bolt - Remove

8. CKP Sensor Cover - Remove

9. Lower Torque Rod and Lower Torque Rod Bracket - Remove

10.Front Subframe Rear Stay Mounting Bolt - Remove

11. Front Lower Arm Mounting Bolt - Remove

12.Front Subframe - Move

 1. Support the front subframe with the transmission jack.

2. Remove the subframe mounting bolts from the front

subframe.

3. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts from the front

subframe on rear side, so they are about 5.5 mm (0.217 in)
from the mounting surface.

4. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts from the front

subframe on front side, so they are about 5.0 mm (0.197 in)
from the mounting surface.

NOTE: Remove the harness clip from the front subframe.

13.Torque Converter Cover - Remove

14.Lower Transmission (e-CVT) Mounting Bolt - Remove

15.Oil Pan - Remove

1. Remove the oil pan mounting bolts.

2. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan from the
lower block in the places shown.

3. Remove the oil pan.

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

 1.

1.
17 (1.7, 13)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace

1. Oil Pan - Install

 1. Apply liquid gasket to the lower block mating surface of the
oil pan and to the inside edge of the threaded bolt holes.

2. Tighten the bolts in three steps; tighten the bolts until the
bolts sit on the oil pan, tighten the bolts until the gasket is
compressed, tighten the bolts to specified torque in the
numbered sequence shown.

2. Lower Transmission (e-CVT) Mounting Bolt - Install

3. Torque Converter Cover - Install

4. Front Subframe - Install

NOTE: Install the harness clip to the front subframe.

5. Front Lower Arm Mounting Bolt - Install

6. Front Subframe Rear Stay Mounting Bolt - Install

7. Lower Torque Rod and Lower Torque Rod Bracket - Install

8. CKP Sensor Cover - Install

9. Intermediate Shaft Assembly Mounting Bolt - Install

10.Electric A/C Compressor - Install

11. TWC Bracket - Install

12.Lower Bulkhead Brace - Install

13.Exhaust Pipe A - Install

14.Engine Undercover - Install

15.Engine Oil - Refill

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 1.
22 (2.2, 16)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace

1. Engine Oil Pressure Sensor - Remove

 Note for installation

1. Install the engine oil pressure sensor by finger-tight until the

O-ring sits on the engine block.

2. Tighten the engine oil pressure sensor to the specified

torque.

2. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

2/8/23, 2:46 AM Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Removal and Installation 3107

Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003107_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:46 AM Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Removal and Installation 3107

5.
22 (2.2, 16)

5.
12 (1.2, 9)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003107_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:46 AM Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Removal and Installation 3107

Replace

1. Right Front Wheel - Remove

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

3. Drive Belt - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003107_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:46 AM Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Removal and Installation 3107

4. A/C Compressor - Move

NOTE:
Do not disconnect the A/C lines.
Do not bend the A/C lines excessively.
Hang the A/C compressor with a wire tie.

5. Engine Oil Pressure Sensor - Remove

Note for installation

Install the engine oil pressure sensor by finger-tight until the

O-ring sits on the water passage.
Tighten the engine oil pressure sensor to the specified
torque.

6. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003107_enu 4/4
Engine Oil Pan Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 5.5 mm 5.0 mm
(0.217 in) (0.197 in)

12.

*1

12.

*2

11.

12.
10. 12.

*1
12. 12.
11.
*2 10. *2
 Detailed information, notes, and precautions
Replace
*1 Remove
*2 Loosen

2
 15.

15.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

 Replace

1. Engine Undercover - Remove

2. Engine Oil - Drain

3. Exhaust Pipe A - Remove

4. Lower Bulkhead Brace - Remove

5. TWC Bracket - Remove

6. Electric A/C Compressor - Move

NOTE:
Do not disconnect the connector (electric A/C compressor).
Do not disconnect the A/C lines.
Do not bend the A/C lines excessively.
Hang the electric A/C compressor with a wire tie.

7. Intermediate Shaft Assembly Mounting Bolt - Remove

8. CKP Sensor Cover - Remove

9. Lower Torque Rod and Lower Torque Rod Bracket - Remove

10.Front Subframe Rear Stay Mounting Bolt - Remove

11. Front Lower Arm Mounting Bolt - Remove

12.Front Subframe - Move

 1. Support the front subframe with the transmission jack.

2. Remove the subframe mounting bolts from the front

subframe.

3. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts from the front

subframe on rear side, so they are about 5.5 mm (0.217 in)
from the mounting surface.

4. Loosen the subframe mounting bolts from the front

subframe on front side, so they are about 5.0 mm (0.197 in)
from the mounting surface.

NOTE: Remove the harness clip from the front subframe.

13.Torque Converter Cover - Remove

14.Lower Transmission (e-CVT) Mounting Bolt - Remove

15.Oil Pan - Remove

1. Remove the oil pan mounting bolts.

2. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan from the
lower block in the places shown.

3. Remove the oil pan.

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 1.

1.
17 (1.7, 13)

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace

1. Oil Pan - Install

 1. Apply liquid gasket to the lower block mating surface of the
oil pan and to the inside edge of the threaded bolt holes.

2. Tighten the bolts in three steps; tighten the bolts until the
bolts sit on the oil pan, tighten the bolts until the gasket is
compressed, tighten the bolts to specified torque in the
numbered sequence shown.

2. Lower Transmission (e-CVT) Mounting Bolt - Install

3. Torque Converter Cover - Install

4. Front Subframe - Install

NOTE: Install the harness clip to the front subframe.

5. Front Lower Arm Mounting Bolt - Install

6. Front Subframe Rear Stay Mounting Bolt - Install

7. Lower Torque Rod and Lower Torque Rod Bracket - Install

8. CKP Sensor Cover - Install

9. Intermediate Shaft Assembly Mounting Bolt - Install

10.Electric A/C Compressor - Install

11. TWC Bracket - Install

12.Lower Bulkhead Brace - Install

13.Exhaust Pipe A - Install

14.Engine Undercover - Install

15.Engine Oil - Refill

Engine overheats

Diagnostic Procedure

1. Check the coolant level.

2. Check for any engine coolant leakage (from gaskets, hoses, O-rings, etc.).
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on the radiator and the A/C condenser.
4. Check for deteriorated coolant.
5. Check for a damaged or deformed fan shrouds.
6. Check the cooling fan is operating properly (air should be blowing toward the engine).
7. Check the radiator cap.
8. Check the thermostat.
9. Check for plugged or deteriorated radiator hoses.
10. Check for a plugged heater core or hoses.
11. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.

Also check for

Check the cooling fan is operating properly.

Engine revs up abnormally high while driving, and no acceleration

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
damaged
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
Forward clutch defective
Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or foreign material in transmission fluid pump
Transmission fluid pump drive chain or transmission fluid pump drive/driven sprocket
worn or damaged
Valve body assembly defective
Joint pipes defective
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged
Stator shaft worn or damaged

Notes

Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related
parts for wear and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the transmission housing
assembly.
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring for wear and damage.
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and damage. If the transmission fluid pump is
worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the transmission fluid pump drive chain and the transmission fluid pump drive/driven
sprocket for wear and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Engine revs up abnormally high while driving, and no acceleration

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
damaged
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
Forward clutch defective
Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or foreign material in transmission fluid pump
Transmission fluid pump drive chain or transmission fluid pump drive/driven sprocket
worn or damaged
Valve body assembly defective
Joint pipes defective
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged
Stator shaft worn or damaged

Notes

Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related
parts for wear and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the transmission housing
assembly.
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring for wear and damage.
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and damage. If the transmission fluid pump is
worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the transmission fluid pump drive chain and the transmission fluid pump drive/driven
sprocket for wear and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Engine runs, but vehicle does not move in any positions/modes

Probable cause(s)

Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level

Transmission range switch defective or out of adjustment
Engine output low
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF warmer strainer clogged
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
damaged
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Secondary drive/driven gear worn or damaged
Final driven gear worn or damaged
Sun gear worn or damaged
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent spring worn or damaged
Control lever worn or damaged
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft worn or damaged
Manual valve worn or damaged
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or foreign material in transmission fluid pump
Transmission fluid pump drive chain or transmission fluid pump drive/driven sprocket
worn or damaged
Valve body assembly defective
Joint pipes defective
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes
Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Inspect the transmission range switch.
Adjust the engine output.
Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF warmer strainer for debris. If the
transmission fluid strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the damaged
components that caused debris.
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related
parts for wear and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the transmission housing
assembly.
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring for wear and damage.
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage. If the input shaft assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it and also check the related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
damage.
Check the secondary drive/driven gear for wear and damage.
Check the final driven gear for wear and damage.
Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun gear is worn or damaged, replace it and
also check the planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and the drive pulley shaft
splines for wear and damage.
Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent spring for wear and damage.
Check the control lever for wear and damage.
Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for wear and damage. If the parking
brake pawl or the parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and also check the park
gear for wear and damage.
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and damage. If the transmission fluid pump is
worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the transmission fluid pump drive chain and the transmission fluid pump drive/driven
sprocket for wear and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Engine runs, but vehicle does not move in any positions/modes

Probable cause(s)

Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level

Transmission range switch defective or out of adjustment
Engine output low
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF warmer strainer clogged
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
damaged
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Secondary drive/driven gear worn or damaged
Final driven gear worn or damaged
Sun gear worn or damaged
Control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent spring worn or damaged
Control lever worn or damaged
Parking brake pawl and parking shaft worn or damaged
Manual valve worn or damaged
Transmission fluid pump worn, binding, or foreign material in transmission fluid pump
Transmission fluid pump drive chain or transmission fluid pump drive/driven sprocket
worn or damaged
Valve body assembly defective
Joint pipes defective
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes
Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.
Inspect the transmission range switch.
Adjust the engine output.
Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF warmer strainer for debris. If the
transmission fluid strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the damaged
components that caused debris.
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related
parts for wear and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the transmission housing
assembly.
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring for wear and damage.
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage. If the input shaft assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it and also check the related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
damage.
Check the secondary drive/driven gear for wear and damage.
Check the final driven gear for wear and damage.
Check the sun gear for wear and damage. If the sun gear is worn or damaged, replace it and
also check the planetary carrier pinion gears, the forward clutch, and the drive pulley shaft
splines for wear and damage.
Check the control shaft, roller, detent lever, and detent spring for wear and damage.
Check the control lever for wear and damage.
Check the parking brake pawl and the parking shaft for wear and damage. If the parking
brake pawl or the parking shaft are worn or damaged, replace them and also check the park
gear for wear and damage.
Check the manual valve for wear and damage.
Check the transmission fluid pump for wear and damage. If the transmission fluid pump is
worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Check the transmission fluid pump drive chain and the transmission fluid pump drive/driven
sprocket for wear and damage.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Engine stalls (MIL works OK, no DTCs set)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Check the fuel pressure.

2. Check the idle speed.

Also check for

Intake air leaks

Faulty harness and sensor connections
Fuel contamination
Engine stalls when shifted to D position/mode from N position/mode

Probable cause(s)

Engine output low

Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Adjust the engine output.

Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Engine stalls when shifted to D position/mode from N position/mode

Probable cause(s)

Engine output low

Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Adjust the engine output.

Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Engine stalls when shifted to R position/mode from N position/mode

Probable cause(s)

Engine output low

Forward clutch defective
Planetary carrier assembly worn or damaged
Thrust needle bearing or thrust washer on planetary carrier assembly seized, worn, or
damaged
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Adjust the engine output.

Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Check the planetary carrier assembly for wear and damage. If the planetary carrier assembly
is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the planetary carrier pinion gears, the reverse
brake, and the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washer on the planetary carrier assembly for
seize, wear, and damage. If the thrust needle bearing or the thrust washer are seized, worn,
or damaged, replace them and adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Engine stalls when shifted to R position/mode from N position/mode

Probable cause(s)

Engine output low

Forward clutch defective
Planetary carrier assembly worn or damaged
Thrust needle bearing or thrust washer on planetary carrier assembly seized, worn, or
damaged
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Adjust the engine output.

Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Check the planetary carrier assembly for wear and damage. If the planetary carrier assembly
is worn or damaged, replace it and also check the planetary carrier pinion gears, the reverse
brake, and the drive pulley shaft splines for wear and damage.
Check the thrust needle bearing and the thrust washer on the planetary carrier assembly for
seize, wear, and damage. If the thrust needle bearing or the thrust washer are seized, worn,
or damaged, replace them and adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Engine starts but stalls immediately (MIL works OK, no DTCs set, immobilizer indicator stays on or flashes)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Check the keyless access system.

Also check for

Low compression
Intake air leaks
Weak spark
Low fuel pressure
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Engine Undercover Removal and Installation 2769

Engine Undercover Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Engine Undercover - Remove

Fastener Locations

:6 : 21

8.4 (0.86, 6.2)

3. Oil Filter Guard Cover and Engine Undercover Plate - Remove

1. If necessary, remove the oil filter guard cover (A) and the engine undercover plate (B) from the engine undercover (C).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002769_enu 1/2
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Engine Undercover Removal and Installation 2769

Fastener Locations
:7

A B

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002769_enu 2/2
Engine will not start(MIL works OK, no DTCs set, generator motor works OK)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Test the 12 volt battery.

2. Check the fuel pressure.
3. Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit.

Also check for

Low compression
No ignition spark
Exhaust restriction
Intake air leaks
Locked up engine
Broken cam chain
Fuel contamination
Engine will not start, and HDS does not communicate with the PCM(MIL comes on and stays on, no DTCs set)

Diagnostic procedure

1. Do the DLC circuit troubleshooting.

2. Do the PCM Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting.
EPS Circuit Diagram

12 VOLT
BATTERY : CAN line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. A2-7 (70 A)

RED A
+B EPS
RELAY CIRCUIT
BOARD

IG1A RELAY
CIRCUIT
No. A2-1 (30 A) No. A41 (7.5 A)
A1 B2
GRY PNK GRY B
+B IG MAIN IG1 VSA/ABS

B8
WHT
BODY
CONTROL
B4 MODULE
TAN

IG1A HOT in ON and START mode

DC-DC
CONVERTER
No. A1 (125 A) No. A4-1 (30 A)
B2 B5
GRY GRN C
+B DC/DC2 DCDC OUT2

VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT PCM
20 A37
WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
21 A36
RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L
24 A39
LT BLU LT BLU
F-CAN B_H F-CAN B_H
25 A38
LT GRN LT GRN
F-CAN B_L F-CAN B_L
RED WHT LT GRN LT BLU
CAN GATEWAY TCM
3 3
WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
11 11
RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L

6
LT BLU LT BLU D
F-CAN B_H
14
LT GRN LT GRN E
F-CAN B_L GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
5 A20 EPS
PUR PUR INDICATOR
F-CAN C_H F-CAN C_H
13 A21
GRN GRN
F-CAN C_L F-CAN C_L

2 6
PNK DATA LINK
DIAG-CAN_H CONNECTOR
10 14 (DLC)
BLU MILLIMETER
DIAG-CAN_L WAVE RADAR
7 7
PNK PNK
F-CAN D_H F-CAN D_H
15 6
GRN GRN
F-CAN D_L F-CAN D_L
 *: Wire colors may be substituted
for SRS circuits
: CAN line

EPS CONTROL UNIT

A1
A RED
+B EPS

A2
GND
BLK
B

G302

FUSE/RELAY HOLDER A
DC-DC CONVERTER
IG1 RELAY 2
B5 3 4 B10
GRY
IG1 VSA/ABS GND

B17 2 1 B16
C GRN WHT BLK
DCDC OUT2

B12
IG1 RLY2 OUT G502

No. C7 (7.5 A)
B18 B5
PUR
IG1
RELAY1

SRS UNIT
A16
LT BLU*
F-CAN B_H
A17
LT GRN*
F-CAN B_L

B4
D LT BLU LT BLU
F-CAN B_H CAN
B1 CONTROLLER
E LT GRN LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
EPS Circuit Diagram

M/T/CVT
12 VOLT
BATTERY : F-CAN line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. A2-7 (70 A)

RED A
+B EPS

RELAY CIRCUIT
BOARD

IG1A RELAY
CIRCUIT
No. A2-1 (30 A) No. A41 (7.5 A)
A1 B2
GRY PNK GRY B
+B IG MAIN IG1 ABS/VSA
(or IG1 VSA/ABS)

B8
WHT
BODY
CONTROL
B4 MODULE
TAN

IG1A HOT in ON and START mode

VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT PCM
20 A37
WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
21 A36
RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L
24 A39
LT BLU LT BLU
F-CAN B_H F-CAN B_H
25 A38
LT GRN LT GRN
F-CAN B_L F-CAN B_L
RED WHT LT GRN LT BLU
CAN GATEWAY TCM
3 3
WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
11 11
RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L

6
LT BLU LT BLU C
F-CAN B_H
14
LT GRN LT GRN D
F-CAN B_L GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
5 A20 EPS
PUR PUR INDICATOR
F-CAN C_H F-CAN C_H
13 A21
GRN GRN
F-CAN C_L F-CAN C_L

2 6
PNK DATA LINK
DIAG-CAN_H CONNECTOR
10 14 (DLC)
BLU MILLIMETER
DIAG-CAN_L WAVE RADAR
7 7
PNK PNK
F-CAN D_H F-CAN D_H
15 6
GRN GRN
F-CAN D_L F-CAN D_L
 *: Wire colors may be substituted
for SRS circuits
: CAN line

EPS CONTROL UNIT

A1
A RED
+B EPS

A2
GND
BLK

G302

B5
B GRY
IG1 ABS/VSA
(or IG1 VSA/ABS)

SRS UNIT
A16
LT BLU*
F-CAN B_H
A17
LT GRN*
F-CAN B_L

B4
C LT BLU LT BLU
F-CAN B_H CAN
B1 CONTROLLER
D LT GRN LT GRN
F-CAN B_L

A/T
12 VOLT
BATTERY : F-CAN line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. A2-7 (70 A)

RED A
+B EPS

RELAY CIRCUIT
BOARD

IG1A RELAY
CIRCUIT
No. A2-1 (30 A) No. A41 (7.5 A)
A1 B2
GRY PNK GRY B
+B IG MAIN IG1 ABS/VSA
(or IG1 VSA/ABS)

B8
WHT
BODY
CONTROL
B4 MODULE
TAN

IG1A HOT in ON and START mode

PCM TCM
A37 A19
WHT WHT RED
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
A36 A18
RED RED YEL
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L
A39 A13
PNK PNK BLK
F-CAN D_H F-CAN D_H
A38 A12
GRN GRN WHT
F-CAN D_L F-CAN D_L
MILLIMETER
WHT RED PNK GRN WAVE RADAR
CAN GATEWAY
16 7
LT BLU LT BLU
F-CAN E_H F-CAN E_H
8 6
YEL YEL
F-CAN E_L F-CAN E_L
7
PNK
F-CAN D_H
15
GRN GAUGE CONTROL
F-CAN D_L MODULE
5 A20 EPS
PUR PUR INDICATOR
F-CAN C_H F-CAN C_H
13 A21
GRN GRN
F-CAN C_L F-CAN C_L
6
LT BLU LT BLU C
F-CAN B_H
14
LT GRN LT GRN D
F-CAN B_L VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
3 20
WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
11 21
RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L
2 6 24
PNK DATA LINK LT BLU
DIAG-CAN_H CONNECTOR F-CAN B_H
10 14 (DLC) 25
BLU LT GRN
DIAG-CAN_L F-CAN B_L
 *: Wire colors may be substituted
for SRS circuits
: CAN line

EPS CONTROL UNIT

A1
A RED
+B EPS

A2
GND
BLK

G302

B5
B GRY
IG1 ABS/VSA
(or IG1 VSA/ABS)

SRS UNIT
A16
LT BLU*
F-CAN B_H
A17
LT GRN*
F-CAN B_L

B4
C LT BLU LT BLU
F-CAN B_H CAN
B1 CONTROLLER
D LT GRN LT GRN
F-CAN B_L
EPS Circuit Diagram

12 VOLT *: Wire colors may be substituted

BATTERY for SRS circuits
: CAN line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. A2-7 (70 A)

RED A
+B EPS

RELAY CIRCUIT
BOARD

IG1A RELAY
CIRCUIT
No. A2-1 (30 A) No. A41 (7.5 A)
A1 B2
GRY PNK GRY B
+B IG MAIN IG1 ABS/VSA
(or IG1 VSA/ABS)

B8
WHT
BODY
CONTROL
B4 MODULE
TAN

IG1A HOT in ON and START mode

VSA MODULATOR-
PCM CONTROL UNIT
A37 20
WHT WHT
F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
A36 21
RED RED
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L
TCM RED WHT
3
WHT
F-CAN A_H
11
RED
F-CAN A_L
DATA LINK RED WHT
CONNECTOR
6
WHT
F-CAN A_H
14
RED
F-CAN A_L
GAUGE CONTROL RED WHT
MODULE SRS UNIT
EPS A20 A16
WHT WHT*
INDICATOR F-CAN A_H F-CAN A_H
A21 A17
RED RED*
F-CAN A_L F-CAN A_L

WHT C

RED D
 : CAN line

EPS CONTROL UNIT

A1
A RED
+B EPS

A2
GND
BLK

G302

B5
B GRY
IG1 ABS/VSA
(or IG1 VSA/ABS)

B4
C WHT
F-CAN A_H CAN
B1 CONTROLLER
D RED
F-CAN A_L
EPS Component Location Index
For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram.

EPS MOTOR/CONTROL UNIT

Steering Angle Neutral Position Learning
Update
EPS Control Unit Connector for Inputs and Outputs

EPS Control Unit Connector for inputs and Outputs

Connector Index
EPS Control Unit Connector A (2P)
EPS Control Unit Connector B (6P)

EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (2P) (female terminals)

1 2
RED BLK

Terminal number Terminal sign Description

1 +B EPS Power source for the actuator EPS motor
2 GND Ground for the EPS control unit

EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (6P) (female terminals)

1 2 3
*1 - -
4 5 6
*2 *3 -

*1: RED (Without ACC), LT GRN (With ACC)

*2: WHT (Without ACC), LT BLU (With ACC)
*3: GRY (Without auto idle stop system), PUR (With auto idle stop system)

Terminal number Terminal sign Description

1 F-CAN A_L*1 F-CAN communication circuit
F-CAN B_L*2
2 Not used ―――
3 Not used ―――
4 F-CAN A_H*1 F-CAN communication circuit
F-CAN B_H*2
*1: Without ACC
*2: With ACC
*3: Without auto idle stop system
*4: With auto idle stop system
 Terminal number Terminal sign Description
5 IG1 ABS/VSA Power source for activating the system
(or IG1 VSA/ABS)*3
IG1 RELAY1*4
6 Not used ―――
*1: Without ACC
*2: With ACC
*3: Without auto idle stop system
*4: With auto idle stop system
EPS Control Unit Update

1. EPS Control Unit - Update

NOTE: When updating control units, use the most current

version of the HDS software and interface device. Check any
official service information website for more information about
updating control units.
EPS System Description - Components

Components
The EPS system mainly consists of the following parts:
The EPS control unit: Control the EPS motor
The EPS motor: Generate the assisting torque
The torque sensor: Measure the steering force applied to the steering wheel
The steering gearbox: Transmit the steering force

The EPS control unit, the EPS motor, the torque sensor are combined into the steering gearbox.

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index, and for indicator functions, refer to How to
Troubleshoot the EPS System.
Steering Gearbox

The assist pinion shaft transmits the EPS motor power to the steering rack. The EPS motor power is transmitted to the worm wheel by
the worm gear. The assist pinion shaft moves the steering rack with the EPS motor power that is increased and transmitted by the
worm wheel.
The manual pinion shaft transmits the steering torque from the steering wheel to the steering rack. The steering torque is transmitted
from the steering column shaft to the input shaft, and the manual pinion shaft connecting with the input shaft by the torsion bar moves
the steering rack.

Torque Sensor
EPS Motor/Control Unit
(With a built-in motor
angle sensor)

Worm Wheel
Input Shaft
Worm Gear

Torsion Bar

Assist Pinion
Shaft

Manual Pinion Steering Rack

Shaft

Steering Rack

VGR (Variable Gear Ratio)

The VGR is applied to the manual pinion shaft side of the steering rack. The normal gear ratio is applied to the near the straight ahead
position of the steering rack for smooth start of steering operation. The quick gear ratio is applied for a large steering angle, which
reduces lock-to-lock steering.

Manual Pinion Shaft

Steering Rack

High

Rack Stroke Ratio

Low
Left Center Right

Pinion Rotation Angle

Torque Sensor
Overview

The torque sensor is built into the steering gearbox, using a Hall IC sensor to detect steering wheel torque forces. The torque sensor
consists of the input shaft, the torsion bar, the manual pinion shaft, and the torque sensor unit.

Input Shaft

Torsion Bar

Torque Sensor Unit

Manual Pinion Shaft

EPS System Description - System Diagram

The steering force of the steering wheel is detected by the torque sensor, and the signal is sent to the EPS control unit. The EPS
control unit calculates the assistance torque based on the steering torque signal and vehicle speed signal, and activates the
motor to assists the steering force.
To activate the three-phase brushless motor properly, the motor angle sensor detects the motor angle, and sends the signal to the
EPS control unit.
The EPS control unit sends the motor load status to the PCM. If the electric load of the motor is high while the vehicle is idling or
running at a low speed, the PCM increases the idling speed to avoid engine stall.
The EPS control unit receives the vehicle behavior information from the VSA modulator-control unit.
When the EPS system detects a problem, the EPS control unit stores the DTC, and sends the signal to the gauge control module
to cause the EPS indicator to come on.
With LKAS: The EPS control unit assists the steering force when the EPS control unit receives the steering assist request from
the millimeter wave radar.

For locations of each component on vehicle, refer to Component Location Index:

EPS control unit, EPS motor, torque sensor, EPS motor angle sensor
Gauge control module
PCM
TCM
VSA modulator-control unit
SRS unit
Driver's seat belt buckle
Body control module
Driver's door switch
Wiper/washer switch
Millimeter wave radar
 : CAN line
B-CAN F-CAN

DRIVER'S GAUGE CONTROL

DOOR SWITCH MODULE
BODY
CONTROL
MODULE
WIPER/WASHER PCM
EPS MOTOR
SWITCH

(With Driver Attention Monitor) EPS MOTOR

TCM ANGLE SENSOR

(2.0 L Engine)

EPS
VSA MODULATOR- CONTROL
CONTROL UNIT UNIT

TORQUE SENSOR
MILLIMETER
WAVE RADAR

(With LKAS)

SRS UNIT

DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT BUCKLE

(With Driver Attention Monitor)

F-CAN Communication Data

EPS System Receiving Signal
Transmitting Unit Signal Name
Gauge control module
Driver's door switch signal*1

Wiper switch status*1

System operating state signal*1

PCM Engine speed signal

Vehicle speed signal

Sport mode signal

TCM*2 Vehicle speed signal

VSA modulator-control unit Wheel speed signals

Yaw Rate Deviation Signal

Estimated Longitudinal Acceleration Signal

μ Ratio Signal
*1: With driver attention monitor
*2: 2.0 L Engine
*3: With LKAS
 Transmitting Unit Signal Name
SRS unit Yaw rate signal

Lateral acceleration signal

Longitudinal acceleration signal

Driver's seat belt buckle switch status*1

Millimeter wave radar*3 LKAS mode signal

Instructing current signal

*1: With driver attention monitor

*2: 2.0 L Engine
*3: With LKAS

EPS System Transmitting Signal

Transmitting Unit Signal Name
EPS control unit Indicator drive signal

Motor load status

Idle control demand

Steering angle signal

Driver attention monitor information signal*1

Steering torque signal*2

Motor speed signal*2

*1: With driver attention monitor
*2: With LKAS
EPS System Description

System Outline
This vehicle is equipped with electrical power steering (EPS). The driver's steering force is assisted by an electric motor at the
steering gearbox, instead of an engine-driven oil pump to generate oil pressure, so the EPS system improves engine efficiency.

The EPS control unit monitors and controls the EPS motor's assisting force to match driving conditions.
Low vehicle speeds: High power assist (for easy handling)
High speed driving: Low power assist (for stable driving)
Low speed to high speed driving: Change smoothly from high assist to low assist
EPS Control
Base Current
The base current is a basic current value to drive the motor and is calculated using the steering torque and the vehicle speed.
Inertia Compensation
The torque of the EPS motor tends to be lower as the vehicle begins to move and higher as it decreases in speed due to the inertia of
the rotating body. To reduce the impact of the inertia, the inertia compensation increases the base current in acceleration and
decreases in deceleration. The current of the inertia compensation is calculated by using the steering torque, vehicle speed, and
motor speed.
Damping Compensation
The steering wheel receives vibration from the road surface during braking or cornering. The damping compensation reduces the
vibration of the steering wheel by applying a damping effect through the motor current control. The damping compensation current is
calculated by the steering torque, the vehicle speed, and the motor speed.
Target Current
The target current is a value necessary to perform feedback control of the motor and is determined by applying inertia and damping
compensation to the base current and adding steering torque direction.
Current Feedback Control
Current feedback control monitors the motor current through sensors and reduces any deviation of motor current compared to the
target current, thus accurately running the motor.
End Stop Control
The end stop control reduces motor current at the lock to lock (full right or left) of the steering wheel to protect the system. This value
is determined by using the target current and the motor speed.
Sport Mode
The EPS system has two control modes which correspond to the sport mode signal sent from the PCM via F-CAN.
When the vehicle in the normal mode, the EPS system provides smooth and natural steering feel. When the vehicle in the sport mode,
the EPS system provides direct and linear steering feel.
Steering Wheel Return control
The return control controls the return speed of the steering wheel based upon the steering angle and the vehicle speed. This control is
responsible for the returning the steering wheel to the neutral position.
Steering Speed Feedback Control
The steering speed feedback control improves stability in the high speed range by controlling the hysteresis of the steering torque.
The steering speed feedback control current is calculated by using the deviation between the target and actual steering angle speed
to adjust to the base current.
EPS Motor Control Circuit

The EPS motor control circuit is composed of a system control CPU, the MOS-FET (field-effect transistor) driver, MOS-FET, the cut-off
relay, the cut-off relay switch, the current sensor, and the EPS motor. With the signal from the input sensor, the CPU calculates and
duty cycle outputs the appropriate three-phase current for the FET driver. This operation is duty controlled.
 MOS-FET

Cut-Off Relay

MOS-FET
Driver CPU

EPS
Motor

Current Current
Sensor Sensor

Cut-Off
Relay
Switch

Motor Output Limit Control

The motor output limit control reduces the motor current in the event of repeated turning of the steering wheel when the vehicle is not
in motion. This control gradually reduces power assist force. The power assist force resumes gradually from the steering torque of 0
N·m (0 kgf·m, 0 lbf·ft) or from having the ignition switch in the OFF position and it may take up to 20 minutes to go back to normal
assist force conditions. The activation of the motor limit control is based on the motor and the internal temperature of the control
system.
Steering Angle Detection

The EPS control unit calculates the steering angle from the motor angle sensor value. The EPS control unit detects the motor
rotational angle (A) with the motor angle sensor, and calculates the assist pinion shaft angle (B) by multiplying the motor rotational
angle by the reduction ratio of the worm gear. The EPS control unit converts the assist pinion shaft angle and the initial steering angle
by using the VGR (Variable Gear Ratio) conversion map and calculates the manual pinion shaft angle (C), which is the steering angle.

To Steering Wheel

Input Shaft
B
Manual Pinion Shaft EPS Motor/Control Unit
(With a built-in motor
Worm Gear angle sensor)

Steering Rack

C
VGR
Assist Pinion
Shaft
This illustration shows an example.

Steering Angle Neutral Position Learning

The EPS control unit learns the steering angle neutral position to detect an initial steering angle when turning the vehicle to the ON
mode.
The steering angle neutral position learning is classified into initial learning and the regular learning.
Initial Learning
The initial learning is performed automatically at the time of the first driving after steering angle neutral position is cleared.
When the EPS control unit judges that the vehicle is going straight based on each sensor signals, the steering angle neutral position is
learned.
For more details of the learning procedure, refer to Steering Angle Neutral Position Learning.

The steering angle neutral position is cleared whenever you do any of these actions:
Replacing the EPS motor/control unit.
Disconnecting the 12 volt battery cable from the 12 volt battery.
Disconnecting the power from the EPS control unit.
Decreasing the power supply voltage for the EPS control unit.

Regular Learning
The regular learning revises a gap of the neutral position that occurs due to normal wear and tear of the vehicle and a change of the
wheel alignment during driving.
Learning using the HDS
The VSA sensor neutral position memorization for VSA system is performed using the HDS, the steering angle neutral position is
cleared and overwritten.
Driver Attention Monitor Function
Overview
To help avoid a crash or collision due to drowsiness or fatigue, the driver attention monitor function prompts the driver to take a break.
System Description

The driver attention monitor function analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is being driven in a manner consistent with
drowsy or inattentive driving behavior based on the steering angle and the yaw rate when the vehicle speed is above a set point. If the
system detects driver drowsiness or inattention, the driver attention monitor function warns the driver to take a break by showing a
message on the multi-information display (MID) and/or vibrating the steering wheel.

Warn break
Concentration Attention Warns the driver if the risk is high
Few Level of falling asleep or fatigue

High

Normal

Correction
steering Invite break by display

Not attentive

Low

Many Invite break by display and

Drowsiness steering wheel vibration

Inform Attention

Select monitor of
the display contents

As one of the display contents, show driver attention as level meter

NOTE: This illustration shows a typical sample of attention display.

Operation Conditions
The driver attention monitor function operates under these conditions:
Vehicle speed is 25 - 112 mph (40 - 180 km/h).
The EPS system, the SRS, and/or the transmission system does not have a malfunction.

Function Prohibition
The driver attention monitor function is not activated under these conditions:
Driving duration is less than 30 minutes.
Driving on rough roads.
Driving in a strong side wind.
Active driving situation (changing the traffic lane or the vehicle speed).

Attention Level Reset

The driver attention monitor function resets the attention level displayed on the multi-information display (MID) if detects these
conditions.
The vehicle is turned to the OFF (LOCK) mode.
The driver releases the seat belt and opens the driver's door with the vehicle in ON mode.
EPS Backup Function
Overview

EPS backup function is designated to maintain the EPS assistance system in case of component failure utilizing redundant and
substitute controls, allowing the EPS assist to fade and prevent sudden change in steering force.

Steering
Steering kickback
Force[N]
Steering Force: 80[N]
(Assist ratio: 0%)

Assistance
malfunction

Steering Force: 10-80[N] Fade

(Assist ratio: 100-0%)

Fade
Steering Force: 10[N]
(Assist ratio: 100%)

TIME[s]

: Without assist

: Redundant/Substitute control

: Normal control

Failing Redundant / Substitute Warning signs

component EPS indicator Additional control Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Return
Vibration Warning Control
Control
Torque Sensor Redundant ON OFF OFF ON
Malfunction
Motor Angle Redundant (partially) ON OFF OFF ON
Sensor
Malfunction Substitute OFF
Current Sensor Substitute ON OFF ON ON
Malfunction
MOS FET Substitute ON OFF ON ON
Malfunction
Operation Conditions
In the event that a fault is detected in any of the following components after EPS system normal start-up.
Torque sensor
Motor angle sensor
Current sensor
MOS FET

Number of operability
Substitutive control: once
Redundant control: unlimited*
*: Steering assist is disabled when multiple failures are detected in a same component.

Backup Function Reset

Turn the vehicle to the ON mode after the system is restored
Replace the failed component

Symptoms of assist failure

Substitute control causes the steering wheel to stiffen and remain so for up to 60 seconds then stops steering assist.
If motor angle sensor fails, the following controls are disabled:
－ Steering Wheel Return Control
－ End Stop Control

Failing current sensor causes steering wheel vibrations.

Failing MOS FET causes steering wheel vibrations and noise.
The following functions are disabled:
－ Motion Adaptive-EPS Control
－ Straight Driving Steering Assist
－ Driver Attention Monitor
－ Lane Keeping Assist System
－ Road Departure Mitigation
Motion Adaptive-EPS Control
Overview
The motion adaptive-EPS control performs the steering torque correction control coordinated with VSA system for stabilizing the
vehicle when the steering is unstable.
The EPS system determines the state of the vehicle based on the data calculated by the VSA modulator-control unit, and the data
from the yaw rate sensor and the acceleration sensor. When the system determines that the vehicle behavior is abnormal, the EPS
control unit calculates the correction current based on the vehicle behavior and corrects the steering torque.
The motion adaptive-EPS control is stopped in the event of failure in the VSA system.
Mitigates Oversteer Control

When oversteer occurs, it compensates for steering torque to steer in the countersteer direction, and enhances vehicle control.
 Oversteer suppression control by VSA

Heavy Light

Motion adaptive-EPS control

compensates for steering
torque and enhances
vehicle control.

Mitigates Understeer Control

When understeer occurs, it compensates for steering torque to control the oversteer, then holds the tire grip to enhance vehicle
control.

Heavy Light

Motion adaptive-EPS control

compensates for steering
torque in order to prevent
oversteer.

Understeer suppression control by VSA

Stabilizes Braking on Road Surfaces With Different Friction Coefficients Control

When the vehicle behavior is abnormal while braking on an uneven road surface, it compensates for steering torque to enhance
vehicle control.
 Braking force

Light Heavy

Motion adaptive-EPS control

compensates steering torque
and enhances vehicle control.
Wet road Dry road
surface surface

Straight Driving Steering Assist

Steering effort is detected and reduced by applying EPS motor assist when driving on a sloped road. This control will return to normal
when no longer driving on a sloped road. This function only operates when the cruise control is on and the speed is set.

Assist image
Without control With control

Driving on slope road

Steering effort Like neutral

Failsafe
The EPS control unit diagnoses and monitors the motor system, the torque sensor system, the power supply system, the
communication system, and the CPU. When a failure is detected, the EPS indicator comes on and the unit takes one of the following
failsafe actions:
Stop assist
Limit assist
Start alternative assist (limited control)
EV Switch Removal, Installation, and Test

1. EV Switch - Remove

1. Remove the electric parking brake switch.

NOTE: The EV switch is built into the electric parking brake

switch.

2. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. EV Switch - Test

1. Check the EV switch (A) according to the table.

NOTE:
When an LED is located between terminals, check if
the LED illuminates by connecting power and ground to
the LED.
The following information is an important operating
characteristic; the diode bias causes the diode to
conduct electricity in one direction (forward), while not
allowing the flow of electricity in the opposite direction
(reverse).

Terminal
2 3 5 1
Position
Pressed ○ ○
Released

○ ○ = Continuity check
= Voltage for LED
2. If the switch does not operate as specified, replace the
electric parking brake switch.
Excessive engine oil consumption

Diagnostic procedure

1. Check for oil leaks.

2. Check for worn valve guide(s); or worn valve seal(s).
3. Check for a damaged or worn piston ring(s).
4. Check for damaged or worn engine internal parts (cylinder wall, pistons, etc.).

Also check for

Check the maintenance records as engine oil that is worn out burns off at a higher rate
Excessive idle vibration in N and P positions/modes

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
Engine output low
Forward clutch defective
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Adjust the engine output.

Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage. If the input shaft assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it and also check the related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
damage.
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Excessive idle vibration in N and P positions/modes

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
Engine output low
Forward clutch defective
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Adjust the engine output.

Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage. If the input shaft assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it and also check the related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
damage.
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Excessive idle vibration in R, D, S*1, or L*1 positions/modes

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
Engine output low
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
damaged
Forward clutch defective
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Thrust washer on planetary carrier assembly seized, worn, or damaged
Valve body assembly defective
Joint pipes defective
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Adjust the engine output

Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related
parts for wear and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the transmission housing
assembly.
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage. If the input shaft assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it and also check the related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
damage.
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Check the thrust washer on the planetary carrier assembly for seize, wear, and damage. If
the thrust washer is seized, worn, or damaged, replace it and adjust the clearance with the
thrust shim.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Excessive idle vibration in R, D, S*1, or L*1 positions/modes

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
Engine output low
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
damaged
Forward clutch defective
Input shaft assembly worn or damaged
Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Thrust washer on planetary carrier assembly seized, worn, or damaged
Valve body assembly defective
Joint pipes defective
Solenoid wire harness worn or damaged
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Adjust the engine output

Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related
parts for wear and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the transmission housing
assembly.
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Inspect the input shaft assembly for wear and damage. If the input shaft assembly is worn or
damaged, replace it and also check the related part of the input shaft assembly for wear and
damage.
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Check the thrust washer on the planetary carrier assembly for seize, wear, and damage. If
the thrust washer is seized, worn, or damaged, replace it and adjust the clearance with the
thrust shim.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Inspect the solenoid wire harness for open and short.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Excessive shock when accelerating and decelerating

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
damaged
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
Forward clutch defective
Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Valve body assembly defective
Joint pipes defective
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.

Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If necessary, replace the transmission fluid
(HCF-2).
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related
parts for wear and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the transmission housing
assembly.
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring for wear and damage.
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Excessive shock when accelerating and decelerating

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated
Drive pulley, driven pulley, pulley shaft, steel belt, and pulley related parts worn or
damaged
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
Forward clutch defective
Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Valve body assembly defective
Joint pipes defective
Stator shaft worn or damaged
Torque converter assembly defective
Torque converter ring gear worn or damaged
Transmission assembly and drive plate installation defective

Notes

Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.

Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If necessary, replace the transmission fluid
(HCF-2).
Check the drive pulley, the driven pulley, the pulley shafts, the steel belt, and pulley related
parts for wear and damage. If there are worn or damaged, replace the transmission housing
assembly.
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring for wear and damage.
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Check the stator shaft for wear and damage.
Inspect the torque converter assembly for wear and damage. If the torque converter
assembly is worn or damaged, replace it as an assembly.
Excessive shock when starting off

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF warmer strainer clogged
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
Forward clutch defective
Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Valve body assembly defective
Joint pipes defective

Notes

Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.

Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If necessary, replace the transmission fluid
(HCF-2).
Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF warmer strainer for debris. If the
transmission fluid strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the damaged
components that caused debris.
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring for wear and damage.
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Excessive shock when starting off

Probable cause(s)

TCM defective
Low transmission fluid (HCF-2) level
Transmission fluid (HCF-2) deteriorated
Transmission fluid strainer or CVTF warmer strainer clogged
Pulley pressure feed pipe defective
Forward clutch defective
Reverse brake defective
Reverse brake piston defective
Valve body assembly defective
Joint pipes defective

Notes

Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) level.

Check the transmission fluid (HCF-2) condition. If necessary, replace the transmission fluid
(HCF-2).
Check the transmission fluid strainer and the CVTF warmer strainer for debris. If the
transmission fluid strainer or the CVTF warmer strainer is clogged, find the damaged
components that caused debris.
Check the pulley pressure feed pipe and the sealing ring for wear and damage.
Inspect the clearance between the forward clutch end-plate and the top disc. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, replace the input shaft assembly.
Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the spring retainer/return spring
assembly for wear and damage. Inspect the clearance between the reverse brake end-plate
and the top disc. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs and
reverse brake plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or damaged,
replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
Check the valve body assembly for wear and damage.
Check the joint pipes and O-rings for wear and damage.
Exhaust Pipe/Heat Collector/Muffler Removal, Installation, and Test

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Do not remove all parts. Only remove the ones applicable to the procedure you are working on.
When the heat collector is removed, test it.

1
 6.
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

5.

6.
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)
6.
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

4.
*4

3.

3. 3. 4.
54 (5.5, 40) 16 (1.6, 12) 33 (3.4, 24)
*1
*2 *3 *2

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace
*1 8 mm
*2 10 mm
*3 If necessary, remove this part(s).
*4 These parts have test items.
1. Engine Undercover - Remove

NOTE: Remove the necessary part(s).

2. Front Floor Brace - Remove

NOTE: If necessary, remove the front floor brace.

3. Exhaust Pipe A - Remove

NOTE:
Do not bend exhaust pipe A excessively.
When replacing exhaust pipe A, remove the protector from
new exhaust pipe A after installation.

4. Heat Collector - Remove

NOTE: If a heat collector remove, before drain the engine

coolant.

5. Muffler - Remove

6. Heat Shield - Remove

7. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

1. Link Cover - Remove

NOTE: Do not remove the heat collector.

2. Heat Collector - Test

1. Measure the initial rod length (A) in between (B) and (C).

NOTE:
Connect the HDS to the DLC, and monitor ECT SENSOR 1. Measure the initial rod length only when the engine coolant
temperature is less than 100 °F (38 °C).
If the initial rod length is beyond the standard value, test the thermo actuator.

Initial Rod Length

 Standard (New): 58.0 mm (2.284 in) max.

2. Enter the maintenance mode, then start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm with no load (P or N) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.

3. When warmed up, measure the rod position length (D) in between (B) and (C).

4. Calculate the extended rod length from difference in distance of the initial rod length (A) and the rod position length (D).

NOTE: If the extended rod length is less than the standard value, test the thermo actuator.

Calculating the Extended Rod Length

D mm (in) - A mm (in)

Extended Rod Length

Standard (New): 9.0 mm (0.355 in) min.

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Exhaust Thermo Actuator Removal, Installation, and Test

1
 2.

3.
*1

Replace
*1 These parts have inspection items

1. Heat Collector - Remove

2. Link Cover - Remove

3. Thermo Actuator - Remove

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 2.
5 (0.51, 3.7)
1.
*1

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
 Replace
*1 These parts have inspection items

1. Thermo Actuator - Install

1. Install the thermo actuator hook (A) in the link pin (B).

F
8.0 (0.82, 5.9)

2.0 mm (0.078 in)

A
D

2. Insert a washer (2.0 mm) between the thermo actuator hook and the side plate(C), then hold in direction.

3. Adjust the bolts mount position (D) while pulling the thermo actuator (E) in direction.

4. Install the bolts (F) finger-tight, then tighten to the specified torque.

5. Remove the washer.

2. Link Cover - Install

3. Heat Collector - Install

1. Thermo Actuator - Test

 NOTE: Before you test, review the heat collector test.

B
To test a thermo actuator extend rod length (standard value):

1. Suspend the thermo actuator (A) in a container of water. Do

not let the thermo actuator and the thermometer (B) touch
the bottom of the hot container.

2. Check the temperature when the rod starts to be extended,

and check the temperature when the rod is fully extended.

3. Measure the length of the thermo-actuator rod when the rod

is fully extended.

A
NOTE:
If the extended rod length is less than the fully
extended value, replace the thermo actuator.
If the extended rod length is standard value, replace the
heat collector.

Standard Thermo Actuator

Extended Above 15.9 mm (0.625 in) min.
Length:
Starts Extending: 158－167 °F (70－75 °C)
Fully extended: 203 °F (95°C)
Exhaust Thermo Actuator Removal, Installation, and Test

1
 2.

3.
*1

Replace
*1 These parts have inspection items

1. Heat Collector - Remove

2. Link Cover - Remove

3. Thermo Actuator - Remove

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

1
 2.
5 (0.51, 3.7)
1.
*1

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
 Replace
*1 These parts have inspection items

1. Thermo Actuator - Install

1. Install the thermo actuator hook (A) in the link pin (B).

F
8.0 (0.82, 5.9)

2.0 mm (0.078 in)

A
D

2. Insert a washer (2.0 mm) between the thermo actuator hook and the side plate(C), then hold in direction.

3. Adjust the bolts mount position (D) while pulling the thermo actuator (E) in direction.

4. Install the bolts (F) finger-tight, then tighten to the specified torque.

5. Remove the washer.

2. Link Cover - Install

3. Heat Collector - Install

1. Thermo Actuator - Test

 NOTE: Before you test, review the heat collector test.

B
To test a thermo actuator extend rod length (standard value):

1. Suspend the thermo actuator (A) in a container of water. Do

not let the thermo actuator and the thermometer (B) touch
the bottom of the hot container.

2. Check the temperature when the rod starts to be extended,

and check the temperature when the rod is fully extended.

3. Measure the length of the thermo-actuator rod when the rod

is fully extended.

A
NOTE:
If the extended rod length is less than the fully
extended value, replace the thermo actuator.
If the extended rod length is standard value, replace the
heat collector.

Standard Thermo Actuator

Extended Above 15.9 mm (0.625 in) min.
Length:
Starts Extending: 158－167 °F (70－75 °C)
Fully extended: 203 °F (95°C)
Expansion Tank Cap Test

NOTE: Do not spill the PCU coolant on the surrounding parts. If you spill the PCU coolant , wipe the PCU coolant off
immediately.

1. Expansion Tank Cap - Remove

2. Expansion Tank Cap - Test

1. Wait until the motor and PCU are cool, then carefully
remove the expansion tank cap (A). Wet the expansion
B A
tank cap seal with coolant, then install it on a commercially
available pressure tester (B).

2. Apply a pressure of 34.3－63.7 kPa (0.350－0.650

kgf/cm2, 4.98－9.24 psi).

3. Check for a drop in pressure.

4. If the pressure drops, replace the expansion tank cap.

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Expansion Tank Removal and Installation

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications
Do not spill the PCU coolant on the surrounding parts. If you spill the PCU coolant , wipe the PCU coolant off immediately.

1. Expansion Tank - Remove

1. Wait until the motor and PCU are cool, then carefully remove the expansion tank cap.

A B
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

2. Drain the PCU coolant from the expansion tank (A).

3. Remove the bolt (B), and raise the expansion tank.

4. Disconnect the coolant hoses (C).

5. Remove the expansion tank.

6. If necessary, remove the mount cushion (D).

2. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

3. PCU Coolant - Refill and Air Bleed

2/8/23, 1:52 AM Exterior Lights Bulb Removal and Installation 664

Exterior Lights Bulb Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Headlight (High Beam) (With Non-LED high beam)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000664_enu 1/7
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Exterior Lights Bulb Removal and Installation 664

2.

2.
*1
3.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

*1 Headlight (High Beam): 60 W

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000664_enu 2/7
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Exterior Lights Bulb Removal and Installation 664

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000664_enu 3/7
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Exterior Lights Bulb Removal and Installation 664

2.
*1

2.

*1 Back-Up Light: 16 W

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000664_enu 4/7
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Exterior Lights Bulb Removal and Installation 664

2.
*1

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000664_enu 5/7
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Exterior Lights Bulb Removal and Installation 664

*1 Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W

Headlight (High Beam) (With Non-LED high beam)

1. Washer Filler Neck - Remove (Right Headlight)

2. Headlight (High Beam) Bulb - Remove

3. Rubber Cover - Remove

NOTE: Inspect the rubber cover for damage. If damaged,

replace it.

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Back-Up Light

1. Trunk Lid Trim Panel - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000664_enu 6/7
2/8/23, 1:52 AM Exterior Lights Bulb Removal and Installation 664

1. Remove the trunk lid trim panel as needed.

2. Back-Up Light Bulb - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Rear Turn Signal Light

1. Taillight - Remove

2. Rear Turn Signal Light Bulb - Remove

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R000664_enu 7/7
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram 5775
Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram

Headlights/Parking Lights/Daytime Running Lights/Side Marker Lights/Taillights/License

Plate Light

*1: IG1A HOT in ON and START mode

*2: Without automatic wiper with automatic lighting
*3: With automatic wiper
*4: Without auto idle stop system
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX *5: With auto idle stop system
12 VOLT : Other communication line
BATTERY
No. A5-5 (30 A) UNDER-DASH
YEL A FUSE/RELAY
RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD BOX

IG1A RELAY *5
+B IG CIRCUIT*1 No. A40
No. A2-1 (30 A) A1 MAIN IG1-A B2 (20 A)
GRY PNK RED B DC-DC
CONVERTER
IG1 COIL+ B8 BODY
WHT T CONTROL
MODULE
RLY GND B4 BLU
TAN C
FUSE/RELAY
HOLDER A A2

+B DCDC
No. A45 BACKUP2 No. C2
(30 A) (15 A) OUT1
B4 MAIN
GRN

· BODY CONTROL
No. A1 (125 A) No. A27 (10 A) MODULE
RED E · AUTOMATIC LIGHTING
CONTROL UNIT-SENSOR* 2*4
· AUTOMATIC LIGHTING/ BRN
RAIN SENSOR*3
No. A5-3 No. A6 D
(30 A) (30 A)

AUTOMATIC LIGHTING
RELAY PNK PUR RED CONTROL UNIT-SENSOR* 2
CONTROL
MODULE C5 A1 B13
+B R/M2 +B R/M1 +B
BACK UP

IPD IPD IPD IPD IPD IPD IPD

DRL DRL
RLY RLY H/L LO H/L LO
L H/L LO L H/L HI PARKING PARKING OUT OUT L SIG R SIG R H/L LO R H/L HI PARKING PARKING
C7 C9 B12 B4 B14 C11 B2 A4 A3 A5 B8 B10

YEL PUR BLU PUR YEL WHT PNK GRY BRN WHT GRN LT BLU

F G H J K L M N P Q R S

RIGHT · RIGHT RIGHT LEFT LEFT RIGHT LEFT · LEFT

LEFT HEADLIGHT TAILLIGHT HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT RIGHT HEADLIGHT TAILLIGHT
HEADLIGHT · RIGHT HEADLIGHT · LEFT
INNER INNER
TAILLIGHT TAILLIGHT
· LICENSE
PLATE
LIGHT

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005775_enu 1/9
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram 5775

*1: IG1B HOT in ON and START mode

*2: IG2 HOT in ON mode
*3: Without automatic wiper with automatic lighting
No. A5-5 (30 A) : CAN line
FUSE
(UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
A

YEL WHT GRY

UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX D4 H9 H3
+B IG MAIN2 IG1 COIL+ IG2 COIL+

IG1B IG2
RELAY RELAY
CIRCUIT*1 CIRCUIT*2

WHT
No. B36 No. B15
(10 A) (10 A)
T
IG1 METER IG2 DRL RLY GND
D15 RELAY
H19 H11 CIRCUIT
BOARD

BRN BRN TAN C B

TAN

TAN RED WHT

RELAY CONTROL MODULE B11 A23 C47 A2 C43 C54

IG1 IG2 DRL RLY GND IG1 FUEL IG2 IG1
METER PUMP COIL+ COIL+

C1 A54
B-CAN_H PNK PNK B-CAN_H

C2 A55
B-CAN_L BLU BLU B-CAN_L

H/L
ON SW GND GND BODY CONTROL MODULE
A2 B1 C10

PNK BLK BLK PNK BLU

A22
PNK B-CAN_H
U
LIGHTS-ON HIGH BEAM
A23 INDICATOR INDICATOR
COMBINATION BLU B-CAN_L (LED) (LED)
LIGHT SWITCH
PNK BLU

V W
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
AUTOMATIC
LIGHTING
CONTROL
UNIT-SENSOR* 3
G303 G301

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005775_enu 2/9
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram 5775

*1: Without automatic wiper with automatic lighting

*2: With automatic wiper
*3: With automatic lighting
: Other communication line

No. A27 (10 A)

FUSE
(UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX)
E

RED

BODY CONTROL MODULE A1

+B
BACK UP
· AUTOMATIC
LIGHTING
CONTROL
UNIT-SENSOR* 1
· AUTOMATIC
LIGHTING/RAIN
H/L H/L H/L SENSOR*2
H-BRAKE HI PASSING OFF PARKING ON · RELAY CONTROL
SW(EPB) SW SW SW LT SW SW MODULE
COMBI
LIN SW GND U
GND GND GND (FR WIPER) (LT)
A56 B2 B35 A60 C37 A25 A6 A41 A12 A7 A40
PNK PNK

BLK BLK BLK YEL BRN LT BLU GRN YEL GRY

PNK BRN
X
11 12 1 8 7 6
AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC
LIGHTING/RAIN PARKING LO ( ) AUTO* 3

SENSOR*2 BRAKE
SWITCH HI OFF ( )
PASSING
DIMMER

COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH

G502 G501

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005775_enu 3/9
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram 5775

*1: With halogen high beam

*2: With LED high beam
: Other communication line

RELAY CONTROL MODULE

*2 *1

F M L R G G

YEL PNK WHT GRN PUR PUR

3 7 5 1 4 1
L H/L HI
L H/L LO H/L LO L SIG DRL RLY PARKING L H/L HI
OUT

LED CONTROL UNIT

HIGH
(60 W)
LOW FRONT FRONT HIGH
PARKING/ SIDE
(LEDs) (LEDs) DAYTIME (LEDs) MARKER (LEDs)
RUNNING LIGHT
LIGHT
GND GND
LEFT HEADLIGHT 8 2

BLK BLK

G303 G303

RELAY CONTROL MODULE

*2 *1

P N K H Q Q

BRN GRY YEL BLU WHT WHT

3 7 5 1 4 1
R H/L HI
R H/L LO H/L LO R SIG DRL RLY PARKING R H/L HI
OUT

LED CONTROL UNIT

HIGH
(60 W)
LOW FRONT FRONT HIGH
PARKING/ SIDE
(LEDs) (LEDs) DAYTIME (LEDs) MARKER (LEDs)
RUNNING LIGHT
LIGHT
GND GND
RIGHT HEADLIGHT 8 2

BLK BLK

G402 G402

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005775_enu 4/9
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram 5775

*1: Without auto idle stop system

*2: With auto idle stop system
: CAN line
: Other communication line
RELAY RELAY
CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE MODULE
S J

LT BLU PUR

LT BLU

LT BLU LT BLU LT BLU PUR PUR

2 2
PARKING PARKING
2 1 2
TAILLIGHT/ TAILLIGHT/
REAR SIDE LEFT LICENSE RIGHT REAR SIDE
MARKER INNER PLATE INNER MARKER
LIGHT TAILLIGHT LIGHT TAILLIGHT LIGHT
(LEDs) (LEDs) (LED) (LEDs) (LEDs)
4 2 4
GND GND
4 LEFT 4 RIGHT
TAILLIGHT TAILLIGHT

BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK

BLK BLK

G701 G701 G701

(Without automatic wiper with automatic lighting)

(With automatic wiper)
*1 *2
No. A27 (10 A) No. A45 (30 A) No. A27 (10 A)
FUSE FUSE · GAUGE CONTROL MODULE FUSE
(UNDER-HOOD (UNDER-HOOD · BODY CONTROL MODULE (UNDER-HOOD BODY
FUSE/RELAY FUSE/RELAY · RELAY CONTROL MODULE FUSE/RELAY CONTROL
BOX) BOX) BOX) MODULE
E D V W E X

RED BRN PNK BLU RED YEL

4 4 1 2 5 4
+B +B B-CAN_H B-CAN_L +B LIN(FR WIPER)
BACK UP BACKUP2 BACK UP
SUB
AUTOMATIC LIGHTING AUTOMATIC LIGHTING/RAIN SENSOR
CONTROL UNIT-SENSOR
H/L ON H/L ON
SW GND SW GND
5 3 1 2

PNK BLK PNK BLK

U U

COMBINATION COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH G503 LIGHT SWITCH G501

Back-Up Lights (M/T)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005775_enu 5/9
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram 5775

*1: IG1A HOT in ON and START mode

*2: 1.5 L engine
*3: 2.0 L engine

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD

12 VOLT IG1A RELAY
BATTERY No. A2-1 +B IG No. A42
(30 A) CIRCUIT*1 (10 A)
A1 MAIN IG1-A B5
GRY PNK

RLY IG1
GND COIL+
B4 B8 BLU

2 BACK-UP
TAN WHT LIGHT
SWITCH
4 (Closed:
in reverse)

PUR

BODY CONTROL MODULE

GRN

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX WHT

WHT

BACK LT D23 *2 *3

A15

WHT

WHT WHT

1 LEFT 1 RIGHT
BACK-UP BACK-UP
LIGHT LIGHT
2 (16 W) 2 (16 W)

BLK BLK

G701

Back-Up Lights (A/T, CVT)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005775_enu 6/9
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram 5775

*: IG1B HOT in ON and START mode

12 VOLT
BATTERY UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IG1B
RELAY
No. A5-5 +B IG CIRCUIT* No. B36
(30 A) D4 MAIN2 (10 A)
YEL

REVERSE
RELAY
CIRCUIT

IG1
RLY GND COIL+ BACK LT ATP-R
H11 H9 A15 D27

TAN WHT WHT PUR

· TCM (A/T)
BODY CONTROL MODULE · TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(CVT)

WHT WHT

1 LEFT 1 RIGHT
BACK-UP BACK-UP
LIGHT LIGHT
2 (16 W) 2 (16 W)

BLK BLK

G701

Brake Lights

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005775_enu 7/9
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram 5775

No. A42 (10 A) FUSE

(UNDER-HOOD
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX)
12 VOLT
BATTERY
No. A9 (10 A)

RED BLU
2 4
+B STOP IG1 ACG

(Closed: (Open: BRAKE

No. A41 (7.5 A) pedal pedal PEDAL
FUSE pressed) pressed) POSITION
(UNDER-HOOD SWITCH
FUSE/RELAY BOX) STOP SW BKSWNC
1 3

GRY RED GRN YEL

C19 D5 D6 D2
PCM
IG1 +B STOP STOP
VSA/ABS SW
(or IG1 ABS/VSA)
BRAKE RELAY
LIGHT CIRCUIT
RELAY BOARD
CIRCUIT

BRK LAMP STOP LT

C2 D1

PNK GRY

GRY GRY

VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT

GRY GRY GRY GRY GRY

1 3 3 1
STOP STOP
LT 2 LT
HIGH
BRAKE BRAKE MOUNT BRAKE BRAKE
LIGHT LIGHT BRAKE LIGHT LIGHT
(LEDs) (LEDs) LIGHT (LEDs) (LEDs)
(LEDs)

1
GND GND
4 LEFT 4 LEFT 4 RIGHT 4 RIGHT
TAILLIGHT INNER INNER TAILLIGHT
BLK BLK TAILLIGHT BLK TAILLIGHT BLK

BLK

BLK (With brake light) (With brake light) BLK

G701 G601 G701

Fog Lights

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005775_enu 8/9
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram 5775

*1: IG1A HOT in ON and START mode

*2: With automatic lighting
12 VOLT
BATTERY *3: '18-20
*4: '21-22
: CAN line

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD

IG1A RELAY
+B IG CIRCUIT*1
No. A2-1 (30 A) A1 MAIN IG1-A B2
GRY
PNK

No. A1
(125 A) No. A40
(20 A)

RLY IG1
No. A29 GND COIL+
(10 A)
B4 B8

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

1 3
FOG
LIGHT TAN WHT RED
RELAY FOG LIGHT
2 4 INDICATOR
(LED)
BODY
LT GRN CONTROL
B-CAN_H B-CAN_L C47 C54 A2 MODULE
A22 A23 RLY IG1 IG1
C16 GND COIL+ FUEL
FR FOG PNK BLU PUMP
LT RLY CL-
C1 A54
B-CAN_H PNK PNK B-CAN_H
C2 A55
B-CAN_L BLU BLU B-CAN_L

RELAY CONTROL MODULE

H/L H/L FR
OFF PARKING ON FOG
SW LT SW SW SW
RED COMBI
SW GND
(LT) GND GND GND
A41 A12 A7 A13 A40 A56 B2 B35

RED RED YEL GRY PNK PUR BRN

1*3 1*3 1 8 7 2 6
2*4 2*4

FR FOG LT FR FOG LT AUTO*2

RLY OUT RLY OUT BLK BLK BLK
LED LEFT LED RIGHT OFF OFF FOG
CONTROL UNIT FRONT CONTROL UNIT FRONT
FOG FOG
GND LIGHT GND
LIGHT
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
(LEDs) (LEDs)
2*3 2*3
1*4 1*4

BLK BLK

G303 G402 G502 G501

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=E005775_enu 9/9
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

Exterior Lights Component Location Index

For relationships between signals in a system, refer to System Diagram.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 1/11
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 2/11
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

FOG LIGHT RELAY (4P)

RELAY CONTROL MODULE (With fog light)
Removal and Installation Test

RELAY CIRCUIT BOARD

(Has a built-in brake light relay circuit)
Removal, Installation, and Test

AUTOMATIC LIGHTING/RAIN SENSOR

(With automatic wiper)
Removal and Installation

AUTOMATIC LIGHTING
CONTROL UNIT-SENSOR
(Without automatic wiper DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH
with automatic lighting) (Built into the driver's door latch)
Removal and Installation Test
Removal and Installation

TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (CVT)

Removal, Installation, and Test

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

Removal and Installation

BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH (M/T)

TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (A/T) Removal, Installation, and Test
Removal and Installation

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 3/11
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 4/11
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

LIGHTS-ON INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

(With fog light)
BODY CONTROL MODULE
Update
Removal and Installation
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
Update
Removal and Installation

COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH

Removal, Installation, and Test
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX Removal, Installation, and Test
(Has a built-in reverse relay circuit) BRAKE PEDAL POSITION
Removal and Installation SWITCH
Adjustment
Removal, Installation, and Test

A/T model is shown, other models are similar.

'18-20

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 5/11
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 6/11
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT (LED)

(Built into the headlight)
FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT (LED)
FRONT TURN SIGNAL FRONT TURN SIGNAL (Built into the headlight)
LIGHT (LED) LIGHT (LED)
(Built into the headlight) (Built into the headlight)

With Non-LED high beam With LED high beam

FRONT PARKING/
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHT (LED)
(Built into the headlight)

FRONT PARKING/
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (LED) HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) (LED)
(Built into the headlight) (Built into the headlight)
HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) (LED)
(Built into the headlight) HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) (LED)
(Built into the headlight)
HEADLIGHT BULB (HIGH BEAM)
Bulb Removal and Installation

HEADLIGHT
Adjustment
Removal and Installation

FOG LIGHTS (With fog light)

Adjustment
Removal and Installation

'21-22

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 7/11
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 8/11
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT (LED)

(Built into the headlight)
FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT (LED)
FRONT TURN SIGNAL FRONT TURN SIGNAL (Built into the headlight)
LIGHT (LED) LIGHT (LED)
(Built into the headlight) (Built into the headlight)

With Non-LED high beam With LED high beam

FRONT PARKING/
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHT (LED)
(Built into the headlight)

FRONT PARKING/
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (LED) HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) (LED)
(Built into the headlight) (Built into the headlight)
HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) (LED)
(Built into the headlight) HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAM) (LED)
(Built into the headlight)
HEADLIGHT BULB (HIGH BEAM)
Bulb Removal and Installation

HEADLIGHT
Adjustment
Removal and Installation

FOG LIGHTS (With fog light)

Adjustment
Removal and Installation

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 9/11
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 10/11
2/8/23, 2:15 AM Exterior Lights Component Location Index 5846

BRAKE LIGHT (LED)

(Built into the taillight)
(With brake light)

BACK-UP LIGHT BULB

Bulb Removal and Installation

INNER TAILLIGHT HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT (LED)

Removal and Installation Removal and Installation

INNER TAILLIGHT (LED)

(Built into the inner taillight)

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT (LED)

Removal and Installation
TAILLIGHT
Removal and Installation
BRAKE LIGHT (LED)
(Built into the taillight)

REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BULB

Bulb Removal and Installation

REAR SIDE MARKER LIGHT (LED) TAILLIGHT (LED)

(Built into the taillight) (Built into the taillight)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G005846_enu 11/11
2/8/23, 1:53 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not come on 4488

Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not come on

LED headlight does not come on

1. DTC check 1:

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004488_enu 1/7
2/8/23, 1:53 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not come on 4488

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode then the ON mode.

‐3. Wait for at least 10 seconds.

‐4. Check for Relay Control Module DTCs with the HDS.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004488_enu 2/7
2/8/23, 1:53 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not come on 4488

DTC (Relay Control Module)

DTC Description DTC

Are any DTCs indicated?

YES Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

NO Go to step 2.

2. DTC check 2:

‐1. Check for Body Control Module DTCs with the HDS.
DTC Description DTC

Are any DTCs indicated?

YES Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

NO Go to step 3.

3. Combination light switch HEADLIGHT position check:

‐1. Turn the combination light switch ON.

‐2. Check the parameter(s) below with the HDS.

Signal Threshold Current conditions
Values Unit Values Unit
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) ON

Is data list values correct?

YES Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.■
NO Go to step 4.

4. Combination light switch check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Do the combination light switch test.

Is the switch OK?

YES Go to step 5.

NO Replace the combination light switch.■

5. Open wire check (H/L ON SW line) 1:

‐1. Measure the voltage between test points 1 and 2.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004488_enu 3/7
2/8/23, 1:53 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not come on 4488

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode

Combination light switch 12P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Combination light switch 12P connector (female terminals) No. 7:
Test point 2 Body ground

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004488_enu 4/7
2/8/23, 1:53 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not come on 4488

Is there battery voltage?

YES Go to step 6.

NO Go to step 7.

6. Open wire check (COMBI SW GND(LT) line):

‐1. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Combination light switch 12P connector: disconnected
Test point 1 Combination light switch 12P connector (female terminals) No. 6:
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES The COMBI SW GND(LT) wire is OK. Replace the combination light switch.■

NO Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.■

7. Open wire check (H/L ON SW line) 2:

‐1. Disconnect the following connector.

Body control module connector A (66P)

‐2. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004488_enu 5/7
2/8/23, 1:53 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not come on 4488

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode

Combination light switch 12P connector: disconnected
Body control module connector A (66P): disconnected
Test point 1 Combination light switch 12P connector (female terminals) No. 7:
Test point 2 Body control module connector A (66P) No. 7

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004488_enu 6/7
2/8/23, 1:53 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not come on 4488

Is there continuity?

YES The H/L ON SW wire is OK. Replace the body control module.■

NO Repair an open or high resistance in the wire.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004488_enu 7/7
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not go off 4490

Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not go off

LED headlight does not go off

1. Combination light switch OFF position check:

‐1. Turn the combination light switch OFF.

‐2. Check the parameter(s) below with the HDS.

Signal Threshold Current conditions
Values Unit Values Unit
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF

Is data list values correct?

YES Go to step 4.

NO Go to step 2.

2. Combination light switch check:

‐1. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode.

‐2. Do the combination light switch test.

Is the switch OK?

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004490_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not go off 4490

YES Go to step 3.

NO Replace the combination light switch.■

3. Shorted wire check (H/L ON SW line):

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004490_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not go off 4490

‐1. Disconnect the following connectors.

Body control module connector A (66P)
Relay control module connector A (6P)
Automatic lighting/rain sensor 5P connector (with automatic wiper)
Automatic lighting control unit-sensor 5P connector (without automatic wiper with automatic
lighting)

‐2. Check for continuity between test points 1 and 2.

Test condition Vehicle OFF (LOCK) mode
Combination light switch 12P connector: disconnected
Body control module connector A (66P): disconnected
Relay control module connector A (6P): disconnected
Automatic lighting/rain sensor 5P connector (with automatic wiper): disconnected
Automatic lighting control unit-sensor 5P connector (without automatic wiper with
automatic lighting): disconnected
Test point 1 Combination light switch 12P connector (female terminals) No. 7:
Test point 2 Body ground

Is there continuity?

YES Repair a short to ground in the wire.■

NO The H/L ON SW wire is OK. Replace the body control module.■

4. DTC check:

‐1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

Clear DTCs

‐2. Turn the vehicle to the OFF (LOCK) mode then the ON mode.

‐3. Wait for at least 10 seconds.

‐4. Check for Relay Control Module DTCs with the HDS.

DTC (Relay Control Module)

DTC Description DTC

Are any DTCs indicated?

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004490_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 1:54 AM Exterior Lights Symptom Troubleshooting - LED headlight does not go off 4490

YES Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.■

NO Repair a short to power in the H/L HI or H/L LO wire.■

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=T004490_enu 4/4
2/8/23, 1:50 AM Exterior Lights System Description - Components 800

Exterior Lights System Description - Components

Headlights
The headlight assembly consists of the headlights (low/high beam lights), front parking lights, daytime running lights, side marker
lights, and the front turn signal lights.

Front Fog Lights

The front fog lights are installed on the front bumper.

Rear Combination Lights

The taillights consist of the taillights, the inner taillights, the brake lights, the rear turn signal lights, the back-up lights, and the rear side
marker lights on the outside of the vehicle.

High Mount Brake Light

The high mount brake light is located on the rear shelf.

Side Turn Signal Lights (With Mirror Turn Signal)

The side turn signal lights are built into the power mirror.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000800_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 1:50 AM Exterior Lights System Description - System Diagram 798

Exterior Lights System Description - System Diagram

For locations of each component on the vehicle, refer to the Component Location Index
Exterior Lights
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights

Combination Light Switch

Gauge Control Module

Gauge Control Module B-CAN B-CAN ∙ Lights ON Indicator Signal

∙ High Beam Indicator Signal
∙ Vehicle Speed Signal ∙ Fog Light Indicator Signal
∙ Parking Brake ∙ LED Warning Indicator
Status Signal Signal
∙ Turn Signal Indicators
Signal
Automatic Lighting Control
Unit-Sensor
∙ Automatic Lighting Signal
Headlights
Without Automatic Wiper (HI Beam)
With Non-LED HI Beam
Power Window Master Switch
∙ Front Door Lock Knob Taillights
Switch Signal
Rear Side Marker Lights
Relay Control Module

Relay Inner Taillights

Control
Headlights Module
Body License Plate Light
∙ Fault Detection Signal Control
Module
Fog Lights
Automatic Lighting/ LIN
Rain Sensor
∙ Automatic Lighting Signal Headlights
(LO Beam)

Driver’s Door Latch Front Parking /

∙ Driver’s Door Switch Daytime Running Lights
Signal LED
Control Front Turn Signal Lights
Units
Hazard Warning Switch
Front Side Marker Lights

Headlights
(HI Beam)
With LED HI Beam

Side Turn Signal Lights

With Side Turn Signal Light

Rear Turn Signal Lights

Brake Pedal Position Switch Brake Lights

VSA Modulator-Control Unit High Mount

Brake Light

Back-Up Light Switch Back-Up Lights

M/T

Transmission Range Switch

CVT

TCM
A/T

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000798_enu 1/1
2/8/23, 1:50 AM Exterior Lights System Description 799

Exterior Lights System Description

Headlights Function
The headlights are controlled by the relay control module, based on combination light switch input signals from the body control
module.

B-CAN Gauge Control Module

∙ Indicator Signal

Body
Combination Light Switch Control Relay Control Module
Module

Headlights

Headlights Auto-OFF Function

When the headlights auto-off function is selected, the exterior lights automatically turn off when the vehicle is in the OFF (LOCK)
mode, and the driver's door is opened and closed. The timing for turning off the exterior lights can be customized to suit the
customer's needs.

Combination Light Switch

Automatic Lighting/ LIN

Rain Sensor Headlights
∙ Automatic Lighting Signal
With Automatic Wiper
Body Relay Rear Side Marker Lights
Automatic Lighting Control Control Control
B-CAN Module B-CAN Module
Unit-Sensor
License Plate Light
∙ Automatic Lighting Signal
Without Automatic Wiper Inner Taillights
Power Window Master Switch
∙ Front Door Lock Knob Taillights
Switch Signal

Driver’s Door Latch

∙ Driver’s Door Switch
Signal

Headlight Fault Detection Function

When a low beam error is detected, the headlights send an error signal to the relay control module. When the relay control module
receives the error signal, it sends an LED headlight system indicator signal to the gauge control module via B-CAN.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000799_enu 1/5
2/8/23, 1:50 AM Exterior Lights System Description 799

B-CAN Gauge Control Module

Combination Light Switch
∙ LED Headlight System
Indicator Signal

Body
Control
Module
Headlights Relay B-CAN B-CAN Relay
Control Control Headlights
∙ Fault Detection Signal Module Module

Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Light Function

The turn signal/hazard warning lights are controlled by the body control module, using input from the combination light switch or
hazard warning switch signal. When the body control module receives a left turn or right turn command from the combination light
switch, it blinks the front and rear turn signal lights for the left or right side of the vehicle. When the body control module receives a
hazard warning command from the hazard warning switch, it blinks the front and rear turn signal lights for both sides of the vehicle.
The system also includes wire break detection by monitoring the current values using the body control module. An abnormal value is
registered as a wire break (open) or faulty bulb or LED. When this occurs, the body control module increases the turn signal lighting
frequency. If the break detection shows that the current value has returned to the correct value, the body control module returns to the
normal frequency.

B-CAN Gauge Control Module

∙ Turn Signal
Indicators Signal
Combination Light Switch Body
Control LED Control Units Front Turn Signal Lights
Module

Hazard Warning Switch Side Turn Signal Lights

With Side Turn Signal Light
Rear Turn Signal Lights

One-Push Turn Signal Light

With the vehicle in the ON mode, when there is a brief input from the turn signal switch, the body control module flashes the left or
right turn signal three times in succession.

Fog Light Function (With Fog Light)

The fog lights are controlled by the body control module, based on the switch input from the combination light switch. In fog light
control, the fog lights signal is sent from the body control module via B-CAN to the relay control module, and is output from the relay
control module.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000799_enu 2/5
2/8/23, 1:50 AM Exterior Lights System Description 799

Automatic Lighting/ LIN

Rain Sensor
∙ Automatic Lighting Signal
With Automatic Wiper B-CAN Gauge Control Module
∙ Fog Light Indicator Signal
Automatic Lighting Control B-CAN Body
Unit-Sensor Control
∙ Automatic Lighting Signal Module

Without Automatic Wiper Relay Control Module Front Fog Lights

Combination Light Switch

Daytime Running Lights Function

For daytime running light control, the body control module controls the daytime running light relay based on the combination light
switch signal, the parking brake signal, and the automatic lighting signal, and then turns on the light. When the combination light
switch is in the OFF position or the AUTO position at the time of the vehicle ON mode, and the parking brake is released, the body
control module controls the daytime running light relay. When the combination light switch is in the ON position or the AUTO position,
and the low beam output signal from the automatic lighting control unit-sensor or the automatic lighting/rain sensor are inputted to the
body control module, daytime running light control is not performed. Once the parking brake is released, the body control module
commands the daytime running lights ON.

Combination Light Switch

Automatic Lighting/ LIN

Rain Sensor
∙ Automatic Lighting Signal
With Automatic Wiper Body B-CAN Relay
Control Control Daytime Running Lights
Automatic Lighting Control B-CAN Module Module
Unit-Sensor
∙ Automatic Lighting Signal

Without Automatic Wiper

Gauge Control Module

∙ Parking Brake Status Signal

Automatic Lighting ON/OFF Control

When the light ON delay time elapses after the automatic lighting control unit-sensor or the automatic lighting/rain sensor output
voltage drops to the light ON luminance, the front parking lights, the side marker lights, the taillights, the license plate lights, and the
headlights turn on. When the light OFF delay time elapses after the automatic lighting control unit-sensor or automatic lighting/rain
sensor output voltage rises to the light OFF luminance, the front parking lights, the side marker lights, the taillights, the license plate
lights, and the headlights turn off.

Without Automatic Wiper

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000799_enu 3/5
2/8/23, 1:50 AM Exterior Lights System Description 799

B-CAN Gauge Control Module

Body Control Module ∙ Warning Indicator Signal
∙ Backup Circuit Signal
Automatic Lighting
∙ Combination Light Switch Signal B-CAN Control Unit-Sensor
∙ Wiper Position Signal
∙ IG1 Signal
Body Control Module
∙ Automatic Lighting Signal

With Automatic Wiper

Body Control Module

∙ Backup Circuit Signal Gauge Control Module
∙ Warning Indicator Signal
∙ Combination Light Switch Signal LIN
∙ Wiper Position Signal Automatic Lighting/
∙ IG1 Signal Rain Sensor
B-CAN
LIN Body Control Module
B-CAN
∙ Automatic Lighting Signal
Gauge Control Module
∙ Vehicle Speed Signal

Automatic Lighting
Sensor Value

Light OFF Luminance

Light ON Luminance

Time
ON
Parking Lights
OFF
T1 T2
ON
Headlights
OFF

T1: Light ON delay time

T2: Light OFF delay time

Wiper Linked Mode

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000799_enu 4/5
2/8/23, 1:50 AM Exterior Lights System Description 799

When the wiper switch is in a position other than OFF, the automatic lighting control unit-sensor*1 or automatic lighting/rain sensor*2
counts and records the windshield wiper motor FR WIPER AS signal (ON to OFF count within 20 seconds) from the body control
module via B-CAN. After a total of 5 counts, it switches to wiper linked mode and turns on the headlights, the front parking lights, the
taillights, inner taillights, daytime running light, and the side marker lights. The ON/OFF signals at the time of windshield washer
operation are not counted. When a count is not received for 30 seconds or more, the count is reduced by 1, and shifting to normal
mode is done when the count reaches 0. The wipers return to normal when the vehicle is stopped, or when the respective switch is
set to OFF.

*1: Without automatic wiper

*2: With automatic wiper

ON
MODE
Vehicle
Ignition OFF
(LOCK)
MODE
ON
Wiper
Switch
OFF

FR WIPER ON
AS Signal
OFF

ON T1 T1 T1 T1
Edge
Counter
OFF T1 T1 T1
30 sec. or more
T1: within 20 sec. (–1 count)

Without Normal Mode Wiper Linked Mode

Automatic Wiper

With Normal Mode Wiper Linked Mode

Automatic Wiper

Warning Function
The automatic lighting control unit-sensor or the automatic lighting/rain sensor sends an indicator signal to the gauge control module
in case of failure of the automatic lighting sensor or when the signal sent from the body control module by B-CAN signal is abnormal.

Sensitivity Adjustment Function

Sensitivity adjustment function of the automatic lighting system can be customized with the gauge control module. You can select the
customized timing from 5 types (Min, Lo, Mid, Hi, Max) sensitivity.

Failsafe Function
When an automatic lighting sensor failure occurs, the system maintains the state before the failure, and a warning is displayed in the
multi-information display (MID).

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=C000799_enu 5/5
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Exterior Trim Component Location Index 2754

Exterior Trim Component Location Index

Front

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002754_enu 1/5
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Exterior Trim Component Location Index 2754

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002754_enu 2/5
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Exterior Trim Component Location Index 2754

SIDE WINDSHIELD TRIM

Removal and Installation

COWL COVER
Removal and Installation

SIDE SILL PANEL

Removal and Installation

FRONT GRILLE COVER

Removal and Installation
FRONT FENDER
PARTITION PAD
FRONT ‘‘H’’ EMBLEM (FOR SOME MODELS)
Removal and Installation Removal and Installation

FRONT FENDER TRIM

Removal and Installation

FRONT GRILLE
Removal and Installation
FRONT BULKHEAD AIR SHROUD Disassembly and Reassembly
Removal and Installation

Rear

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002754_enu 3/5
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Exterior Trim Component Location Index 2754

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002754_enu 4/5
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Exterior Trim Component Location Index 2754

REAR EMBLEM
Removal and Installation

TRUNK LID SPOILER

Removal and Installation

REAR EMBLEM
Removal and Installation

REAR EMBLEM
Removal and Installation REAR ‘‘H’’ EMBLEM
Removal and Installation

REAR LICENSE TRIM

Removal and Installation

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002754_enu 5/5
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Fenderwell Component Location Index 2765

Fenderwell Component Location Index

Front

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002765_enu 1/5
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Fenderwell Component Location Index 2765

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002765_enu 2/5
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Fenderwell Component Location Index 2765

MIDDLE FLOOR UNDERCOVER

Removal and Installation

FRONT FLOOR UNDERCOVER

Removal and Installation

FRONT FENDER FAIRING

Removal and Installation

ENGINE UNDERCOVER FRONT INNER FENDER

Removal and Installation Removal and Installation

Rear

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002765_enu 3/5
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Fenderwell Component Location Index 2765

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002765_enu 4/5
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Fenderwell Component Location Index 2765

REAR INNER FENDER

Removal and Installation

REAR STRAKE
Removal and Installation

REAR AIR OUTLET

Removal and Installation

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002765_enu 5/5
2/8/23, 2:41 AM Frame Component Location Index 2776

Frame Component Location Index

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002776_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 2:41 AM Frame Component Location Index 2776

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002776_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 2:41 AM Frame Component Location Index 2776

REAR SUBFRAME
Tightening Torque

FRONT SUBFRAME
Tightening Torque

FRONT FLOOR BRACE

Tightening Torque

FRONT SUBFRAME REAR STAY

Tightening Torque

LOWER BULKHEAD BRACE

Tightening Torque

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=G002776_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 2:41 AM Frame Tightening Torque 3291

Frame Tightening Torque

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003291_enu 1/6
2/8/23, 2:41 AM Frame Tightening Torque 3291

1.

38 (3.9, 28)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003291_enu 2/6
2/8/23, 2:41 AM Frame Tightening Torque 3291

2.

2.

93 (9.5, 69)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003291_enu 3/6
2/8/23, 2:41 AM Frame Tightening Torque 3291

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003291_enu 4/6
2/8/23, 2:41 AM Frame Tightening Torque 3291

3.

22 (2.2, 16)

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003291_enu 5/6
2/8/23, 2:41 AM Frame Tightening Torque 3291

1. Lower Bulkhead Brace - Tightening Torque

2. Front Subframe Rear Stay - Tightening Torque

3. Front Floor Brace - Tightening Torque

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R003291_enu 6/6
Front and Rear Suspension Component Location Index

Front Suspension
 DAMPER/SPRING
Disassembly, Reassembly, and Inspection
STABILIZER BAR Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation

KNUCKLE/HUB/WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Knuckle/Hub Replacement
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection
Wheel Bearing Replacement

STABILIZER LINK
Removal and Installation

LOWER ARM
Compliance Bush Removal and Installation
WHEEL
Removal and Installation
Alignment
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT
Removal and Installation
Inspection Runout Inspection
Removal and Installation
WHEEL BOLT
Removal and Installation

This illustration shows with adaptive damper system.

Rear Suspension
 SPRING
Removal and Installation
DAMPER
LOWER ARM B Removal, Installation, and Inspection
Removal and Installation

STABILIZER BAR
Removal and Installation

STABILIZER LINK
Removal and Installation

UPPER ARM
Removal and Installation

LOWER ARM A
Removal and Installation

TRAILING ARM
Removal and Installation

WHEEL
Alignment
KNUCKLE/HUB BEARING UNIT Removal and Installation
(MAGNETIC ENCODER) WHEEL BOLT Runout Inspection
Hub Bearing Unit Removal and Installation Removal and Installation
Knuckle Removal and Installation
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection

This illustration shows without adaptive damper system.

Front Brake Caliper Overhaul

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 07AAE-SEPA101

Installer, Front Brake Caliper Dust Boot 070AD-TVAA100

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

1
 1.

5.

CALIPER BRACKET

1.

CALIPER BODY
4.

3.

2.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Replace

1. Pin Bushing - Remove

2. Piston Boot - Remove

3. Piston - Remove
 1. Set the wooden block (A) or several shop towels in the
caliper body (B) as shown.
A
B
2. Blow out the piston (C) with compressed air gradually, and
remove the piston from the caliper body.

NOTE: Do not put your hand into the caliper body because
the piston will come out forcibly from the caliper body.

4. Piston Seal - Remove

NOTE: Be careful not to damage the inner surface of the

cylinder wall with the tool.

5. Bleed Screw - Remove

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.
Use recommended greases in the front caliper set.

1
 5.

1.
28 (2.9, 21) 17 (1.7, 13)

CALIPER BRACKET

5.

CALIPER BODY
2.

3.

4.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace
1. Bleed Screw - Install

2. Piston Seal - Install

3. Piston - Install
 1. Apply brake fluid to the outer surface of the piston (A), then
set the piston in place on the caliper body (B).

2. Install the brake caliper piston compressor tool (A) on the

caliper body (B).

3. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston compressor

tool.

NOTE:
Make sure that the piston boot is properly positioned
into the groove of the piston.
Do not press the piston diagonally, and do not force it.
Be careful not to damage the piston boot when
pressing in the piston.
A
07AAE-SEPA101 B

4. Piston Boot - Install

 1. Apply a thin coat of Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-
B0234M) or ATE brake cylinder paste (commercially
available) to the inner portion of the piston boot (A).

NOTE: Do not apply grease to the contact surface of the

caliper body.

2. Install the piston boot onto the piston.

3. Set the piston boot in place on the caliper body (A).

B
07AAE-SEPA101
4. Install the brake caliper piston compressor tool (B) and the
front brake caliper dust boot installer (C).

5. Press in the piston boot with the brake caliper piston

compressor tool and the rear brake caliper dust boot
installer.

NOTE:
Make sure that the piston boot is properly positioned
into the groove of the caliper body.
Be careful not to damage the piston boot.

C
070AD-TVAA100

5. Pin Bushing - Install

Front Brake Caliper Removal and Installation

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Front Wheel - Remove

3. Brake Hose - Remove

1. Disconnect the brake hose from the caliper body.

4. Brake Caliper Body - Remove (If necessary)

1. Remove the housing clip (A).

A
 2. Remove the caps (A).
B
28 (2.9, 21)
3. Remove the pin bolts (B).

A 4. Remove the caliper body (C).

NOTE: The brake pads comes off with the caliper body.

5. Remove the brake pads (If necessary).

NOTE: Do not remove the brake pads unless you are

replacing it. If the brake pads are removed, the adhesive
C tape cannot be reused and the brake pads must be
replaced.

5. Brake Caliper - Remove

108 (11.0, 80)

6. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE: If you are replacing the brake caliper, install a new

set of brake pads. Removed brake pads cannot be
reinstalled.

7. Brake System - Bleed

8. After Installation - Brake Pad (If removed)

1. READY TO DRIVE mode, and press the brake pedal for 10

seconds with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf) of force to set the
adhesive on the shim securely to the caliper.
3/22/23, 8:45 PM Front Brake Disc Removal, Installation, and Inspection 1558

Front Brake Disc Removal, Installation, and Inspection

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Front Wheels - Remove

3. Front Brake Caliper - Remove

1. Remove the caliper assembly without disconnecting the

brake hose from the caliper body.

4. Front Brake Disc - Remove

1. Remove the brake disc flathead screw (A).

B
2. Remove the brake disc (B).

NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the front hub, thread two
C 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) into the brake disc to push it away
from the front hub. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to
prevent the brake disc from binding.

A
9.5 (0.97, 7.0)

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

6. Front Brake Disc Runout - Inspect

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001558_enu 1/3
3/22/23, 8:45 PM Front Brake Disc Removal, Installation, and Inspection 1558

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Front Wheels - Remove

3. Brake Pad - Remove

4. Front Brake Disc Thickness and Parallelism - Inspect

1. Using a micrometer (A), measure the brake disc thickness

at eight points, about 45 ° apart and 10 mm (0.39 in) from
the outer edge of the brake disc. Replace the brake disc if
the smallest measurement is less than the maximum
refinishing limit.

10 mm
(0.39 in) Brake disc thickness:
Standard: 25.0 mm (0.984 in)
Maximum refinishing 23.0 mm (0.906 in)
limit:
Brake disc parallelism*: 0.015 mm (0.00059 in)
A max.

* This is the maximum allowable difference between the

thickness measurements.

2. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism,

refinish the brake disc with a Honda-approved commercially
available on-car brake lathe.

NOTE:
If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it.
For more information on Honda-approved brake lathes,
refer to any authorized service information related
brake disc refinishing (if available).

3. Inspect the brake disc runout.

5. Front Brake Disc Runout - Inspect

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001558_enu 2/3
3/22/23, 8:45 PM Front Brake Disc Removal, Installation, and Inspection 1558

1. Inspect the brake disc to wheel surface for damage and

cracks.

2. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and remove all rust.

3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts (B).

4. Tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to hold the

brake disc securely against the hub.
C

5. Set up the dial gauge (C) against the brake disc as shown.
10 mm
A (0.39 in)
6. Measure the runout at 10 mm (0.39 in) from the outer edge
B of the brake disc.
108 (11.0, 80)

Brake disc runout:

Service limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in)

7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the

brake disc with a Honda-approved commercially available
on-car brake lathe.

Maximum refinishing limit: 23.0 mm (0.906 in)

NOTE:
If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it.
If the brake disc is replaced with a new one, check the
new disc for runout. If the new disc is out of
specification, refinish the disc.
For more information on Honda-approved brake lathes,
refer to any authorized service information related
brake disc refinishing (if available).

6. Brake Pad - Install

7. Front Wheels - Install

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TWA&lang=enu&sie=R001558_enu 3/3
Front Brake Pad Removal, Installation, and Inspection

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 07AAE-SEPA101

NOTE: Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Front Wheels - Remove

3. Brake Pad - Remove

 1. Remove the housing clip (A).

2. Remove the caps (A).

A B

3. Remove the pin bolts (B).

4. Remove the caliper body (C).

A
B

C
 5. Remove the brake pads (A).

NOTE: Do not remove the brake pads unless you are

C replacing it. If the brake pads are removed, the adhesive
tape cannot be reused and the brake pads must be
replaced.

6. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust,

and check for grooves and cracks.

7. Clean and degrease the outer supporting part (C).

4. Brake Disc - Inspect

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

1. Brake Pad - Install

1. Install the brake caliper piston compressor tool (A) on the

caliper body (B).
B
2. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston compressor
tool.

3. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor tool.

A
07AAE-SEPA101
 4. Apply a thin coat of ATE plastilube paste (included in the
front pad set or commercially available) to the brake pads
: mating surface of the caliper bracket (indicated by the
arrows).
B

5. When installing new brake pads, peel the backing paper (A)
off the outer brake pad to expose the adhesive on the shim.

D
NOTE:
Do not touch the adhesive when installing the brake
pad.
E Keep dirt or other contaminants off the adhesive.
Before installing the brake pads, make sure there is no
grease on the outer support area (B).

6. Install the brake pads (C) to the caliper body (D) correctly
with the wear indicator (E) on the upper inside position.

7. Install the caliper body (A).

B
28 (2.9, 21)
C
8. Install the pin bolts (B).

9. Install the caps (C).

C
B
28 (2.9, 21)
A
 10. Install the housing clip (A).

11. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the
brakes work.

NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke

immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a
set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the
normal pedal stroke.

2. Front Wheels - Install

3. Brake Fluid - Refill

1. Add brake fluid as needed.

4. After Installation - Brake Pad

1. READY TO DRIVE mode, and press the brake pedal for 10

seconds with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf) of force to set the
adhesive on the shim securely to the caliper.

NOTE: Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Front Wheels - Remove

3. Front Brake Pad - Inspect

 Inner pad 1. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the outer
pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate.

Brake pad thickness:

Standard: 11.0 mm (0.433 in)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)

2. If any part of the brake pad thickness is less than the

B
service limit, replace the brake pads as a set.

Outer pad

4. Front Wheels - Install

Front Brake Pad Removal, Installation, and Inspection

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 07AAE-SEPA101

NOTE: Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Front Wheels - Remove

3. Brake Pad - Remove

 1. Remove the housing clip (A).

2. Remove the caps (A).

A B

3. Remove the pin bolts (B).

4. Remove the caliper body (C).

A
B

C
 5. Remove the brake pads (A).

NOTE: Do not remove the brake pads unless you are

C replacing it. If the brake pads are removed, the adhesive
tape cannot be reused and the brake pads must be
replaced.

6. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove any rust,

and check for grooves and cracks.

7. Clean and degrease the outer supporting part (C).

4. Brake Disc - Inspect

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

1. Brake Pad - Install

1. Install the brake caliper piston compressor tool (A) on the

caliper body (B).
B
2. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston compressor
tool.

3. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor tool.

A
07AAE-SEPA101
 4. Apply a thin coat of ATE plastilube paste (included in the
front pad set or commercially available) to the brake pads
: mating surface of the caliper bracket (indicated by the
arrows).
B

5. When installing new brake pads, peel the backing paper (A)
off the outer brake pad to expose the adhesive on the shim.

D
NOTE:
Do not touch the adhesive when installing the brake
pad.
E Keep dirt or other contaminants off the adhesive.
Before installing the brake pads, make sure there is no
grease on the outer support area (B).

6. Install the brake pads (C) to the caliper body (D) correctly
with the wear indicator (E) on the upper inside position.

7. Install the caliper body (A).

B
28 (2.9, 21)
C
8. Install the pin bolts (B).

9. Install the caps (C).

C
B
28 (2.9, 21)
A
 10. Install the housing clip (A).

11. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the
brakes work.

NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal stroke

immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a
set. Several applications of the brake pedal will restore the
normal pedal stroke.

2. Front Wheels - Install

3. Brake Fluid - Refill

1. Add brake fluid as needed.

4. After Installation - Brake Pad

1. READY TO DRIVE mode, and press the brake pedal for 10

seconds with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf) of force to set the
adhesive on the shim securely to the caliper.

NOTE: Review the Service Precautions before doing repairs or service.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Front Wheels - Remove

3. Front Brake Pad - Inspect

 Inner pad 1. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the outer
pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the backing plate.

Brake pad thickness:

Standard: 11.0 mm (0.433 in)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)

2. If any part of the brake pad thickness is less than the

B
service limit, replace the brake pads as a set.

Outer pad

4. Front Wheels - Install

2/8/23, 2:37 AM Front Bulkhead Air Shroud Removal and Installation 4694

Front Bulkhead Air Shroud Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

1. Front Grille Cover - Remove

2. Front Bumper Center Upper Beam - Remove

3. Horn - Remove

4. Front Bulkhead Air Shroud - Remove

1. Remove the bolts (A), then remove the front bulkhead air shroud (B).

Fastener Locations
A :4

A
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004694_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Front Bulkhead Air Shroud Removal and Installation 4694

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004694_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 2:37 AM Front Bulkhead Air Shroud Removal and Installation 4694

2. If necessary, remove the upper air shutter duct (A) and the lower air shutter duct (B) from the air shutter grille base (C).

Fastener Locations
:8

5. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004694_enu 3/3
Front Damper/Spring Disassembly, Reassembly, and Inspection

Special Tool Required

Image Description/Tool Number

Strut Nut Adapter 07AAA-SVAA100

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

When compressing the damper spring, use a commercially available strut spring compressor according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Check for deterioration and damage to each part during removal.
Unless otherwise indicated, illustrations used in the procedure are for without adaptive damper system.

1
 1.
GUIDE PIN

2.

5.

9.

4.

8.

7.

3.
6.

2.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Replace

1. Damper Cap - Remove

2. Damper Unit, Damper Mounting Base - Remove

 1. Set the damper/spring to the strut spring compressor.
B
07AAA-SVAA100 C
2. Compress the damper spring.

NOTE: Do not compress the spring more than necessary to

A remove the nut.

3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) with the strut nut adapter
(B), while holding the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C).

4. Remove the damper unit.

5. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor.

6. Remove the damper mounting base/damper spring from

the strut spring compressor.

3. Lower Spring Seat Rubber - Remove

4. Damper Spring - Remove

5. Upper Spring Seat Rubber - Remove

6. Dust Cover - Remove

7. Upper Spring Seat - Remove

8. Damper Mounting Bearing - Remove

9. Bump Stop - Remove

1. Damper/Spring - Inspect
 1. Reassemble the damper mounting base and the self-
locking nut.

2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for

smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression
and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and
constantly when compression is released. If it does not, the
gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced.

3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding during

these tests.

NOTE:

Where icon is shown, click for further information.

When compressing the damper spring, use a commercially available strut spring compressor according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Unless otherwise indicated, illustrations used in the procedure are for without adaptive damper system.

1
 60 (6.1, 44)
10.

GUIDE PIN

8.

5.

1.

6.

2.

3.

7.
4.

9.

Detailed information, notes, and precautions

Torque: N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
Replace

1. Bump Stop - Install

2. Damper Mounting Bearing - Install

3. Upper Spring Seat - Install

4. Dust Cover - Install

5. Upper Spring Seat Rubber - Install

6. Damper Spring - Install

1. Install the damper spring (A) on the upper spring seat

C rubber (B) by aligning the upper end (C) of the damper
spring with the ledge portion (D) of the upper spring seat
rubber.

7. Lower Spring Seat Rubber - Remove

1. Install the damper spring (A) on the lower spring seat

rubber (B) by aligning the upper end (C) of the damper
spring with the ledge portion (D) of the lower spring seat.
A

B
C

8. Damper Mounting Base - Set

 1. Set the damper mounting base/damper spring (A) to the
strut spring compressor.

2. Compress the damper spring.

NOTE: Do not compress the spring excessively.

9. Damper Unit - Install

1. Install the damper unit (A) to the damper spring/damper

mounting base.

2. Align the raised portion (B) of the lower spring seat rubber
and the hole (C) of the lower spring seat on the damper
unit.

NOTE: After reassembling the damper/spring, make sure

that the dust cover (D) are properly positioned into the
raised portion (E) of the damper unit.
B

C
D A
E

Left side 3. Align the angle of the hole (A) on the damper mounting
base (B) with the aligning tab (C) on the bottom of the
damper unit as shown.

FRONT

8° 3°

A
B
 Right side

FRONT

8° 3°

A
B

4. Install the self-locking nut (A).

C B
A 07AAA-SVAA100

5. Hold the damper shaft using a hex wrench (B), and tighten
the self-locking nut using the strut nut adapter (C) to the
specified torque.

6. Remove the damper/spring from the strut spring

compressor.

10.Damper Cap - Install

Front Damper/Spring Removal and Installation

NOTE:
How to read the torque specifications.
Unless otherwise indicated, illustrations used in the procedure are for without adaptive damper system.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Front Wheel - Remove

3. Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Remove

1. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the knuckle.

4. Connector - Disconnect (With Adaptive Damper System)

5. Stabilizer Link - Disconnect

1. Disconnect both sides of the stabilizer link from the damper.

6. Knuckle/Hub Assembly - Remove

NOTE: Do not remove the brake disc.

7. Damper/Spring - Remove
 1. Remove the flange nuts (A).
A
59 (6.0, 44)
NOTE:
Do not let the damper/spring drop down under its own
weight.
Use new flange nuts during reassembly.
E
2. Remove the damper/spring (B).
D

NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the body.
During installation, install the damper/spring in the body
with the aligning tab (C) facing inside.
During installation, if the guide pin (D) is equipped,
align the guide pin with the body hole (E).

8. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install all removed parts in the reverse order of removal.

9. Wheel Alignment - Check

2/8/23, 2:35 AM Front Fender Fairing Removal and Installation 2770

Front Fender Fairing Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

Front Fender Fairing Type 1

1. Front Inner Fender - Remove

2. Front Fender Fairing - Remove

1. Remove the grommet (A) and the clip (B).

Fastener Location
B :1 2. Release the hooks (C).

A C

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002770_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Front Fender Fairing Removal and Installation 2770
3. Remove the front fender fairing (A).

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Front Fender Fairing Type 2

1. Front Inner Fender - Remove

2. Side Sill Panel - Remove

3. Front Fender Fairing - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002770_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Front Fender Fairing Removal and Installation 2770

1. Remove the bolt (A).

Fastener Location
A :1
2. Detach the front fender (B) as needed.

3. Remove the front fender fairing (C).

A
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002770_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Front Fender Fairing Removal and Installation 2770

Front Fender Fairing Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

Front Fender Fairing Type 1

1. Front Inner Fender - Remove

2. Front Fender Fairing - Remove

1. Remove the grommet (A) and the clip (B).

Fastener Location
B :1 2. Release the hooks (C).

A C

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002759_enu 1/3
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Front Fender Fairing Removal and Installation 2770
3. Remove the front fender fairing (A).

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

Front Fender Fairing Type 2

1. Front Inner Fender - Remove

2. Side Sill Panel - Remove

3. Front Fender Fairing - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002759_enu 2/3
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Front Fender Fairing Removal and Installation 2770

1. Remove the bolt (A).

Fastener Location
A :1
2. Detach the front fender (B) as needed.

3. Remove the front fender fairing (C).

A
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002759_enu 3/3
2/8/23, 2:38 AM Front Fender Trim Removal and Installation 4225

Front Fender Trim Removal and Installation

NOTE: Where icon is shown, click for further information.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004225_enu 1/4
2/8/23, 2:38 AM Front Fender Trim Removal and Installation 4225

Fastener Locations
A :2 B :1

2.

B
A

3.

1. Left/Right Front Grille Cover - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004225_enu 2/4
2/8/23, 2:38 AM Front Fender Trim Removal and Installation 4225

2. Front Fender Trim - Remove

3. Front Fender Trim Seal - Remove

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004225_enu 3/4
2/8/23, 2:38 AM Front Fender Trim Removal and Installation 4225
1. If necessary, remove the front fender trim seal (A).
Fastener Locations
:4

4. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R004225_enu 4/4
2/8/23, 2:35 AM Front Floor Undercover Removal and Installation 2771

Front Floor Undercover Removal and Installation

NOTE: How to read the torque specifications.

1. Vehicle - Lift

2. Front Floor Undercover - Remove

Fastener Locations
A :2 B :1 C :3 D :8 E :1

B
9.4 (0.96, 6.9)

C D

C
A D D
8.4 (0.86, 6.2)
D C
D

D D
D

3. All Removed Parts - Install

1. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

https://www.in.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/app/hm/serv-info.html?package=61TVA&lang=enu&sie=R002771_enu 1/1